Kalkhoff Bosch Cruise, Bosch Speed, Fast Pedelec, Kalkhoff, Pedelec Groove, Pedelec Impulse, Pedelec Impulse Ergo, Pedelec Xion, Pedelec with centre motor, Pedelec with front motor User Manual

User Manual
English
I
General User Manual
II
User Manual | Fast Pedelec
III
User Manual | Pedelec with centre motor
IV
User Manual | Pedelec with front motor
V
User Manual | Pedelec Impulse
VI
User Manual | Pedelec Impulse Ergo
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
VIII User Manual | Pedelec Xion
IX
User Manual | Bosch Speed
X
User Manual | Bosch Cruise
XI
User Manual | NuVinci Harmony (English version) *
* Not included in this document.
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
I
General
User Manual
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
1
The bike and its components
1
Handlebar
2
Handlebar stem
3
Bell
4
Headset
5
Front light
6
Mudguard
7
Fork
8
Front wheel brake
9
Tyres
10 Wheels
11 Bottom bracket
12 Pedals
13 Chain
14 Rear derailleur
14 a
Front derailleur
14 b
Rear derailleur
15 Rear light
16 Reflector
17 Pannier rack
18 Saddle
19 Frame
3
18
2
1
4
17
5
15
19
16
7
14a
6
11
6
8
10
10
14b
13
9
2
I General User Manual
12
9
2 Preface
Your bike has been delivered to you fully assembled.
If parts of your bike have not been installed, please consult your specialist cycle shop.
The purpose of this User Manual is to help you use your
bike safely in the manner for which is is intended, and enjoy all its benefits for many years to come. We assume that
you have general knowledge on the handling of bikes.
Every person who uses, cleans, maintains or disposes of
this bike must have read and understood the entire content of this User Manual.
In addition to texts, tables and lists, the User Manual contains the following symbols that denote important information or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury,
increased risk of falls or other injuries
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or
special information on using the bike
NOTE about possible damage to property or
the environment
I General User Manual
3
3 Content
9.2.4Adjusting the saddle angle
15
1The bike and its components
2
2Preface
3
9.2.4.1With a two-bolt seatpost
15
3Content
4
9.2.4.2With a seatpost saddle clamp
15
4Safety information
7
9.2.4.3With a suspension seatpost
16
4.1
Basic safety information
4.2For your own safety
7
7
4.3Information for parents and legal guardians 7
4.4Safety in road traffic
7
4.5Bike safety
8
5Legal provisions
8
5.1Applicable road traffic licensing regulations 8
6Intended use
6.1General information
9
9
9.3Adjusting the handlebar position
16
9.3.1Adjusting / aligning the handlebar height
with a conventional handlebar stem
16
9.3.2Adjusting the handlebar height with
A-head systems
17
9.3.3Aligning handlebars with A-head systems
in relation to the front wheel
17
9.3.4Adjusting the handlebar position by
turning the handlebar
17
9.3.5Adjusting the handlebar height with
an adjustable handlebar stem
18
6.2Trekking bike / all-terrain bike (ATB), if
equipped in accordance with the applicable
road traffic licensing regulations
9
10Frame
18
11Headset
19
6.3City, touring, sports, child's and
youngster's bike, if equipped in accordance
with the applicable road traffic licensing
regulations9
12Fork
19
13Suspension frame and suspension elements
20
13.1Frame with rear suspension
20
13.2Care and maintenance
20
6.4Mountain bike (MTB) / cross bike
10
6.5Road bike / fitness bike
10
14Bottom bracket and cranks 21
6.6
10
15Checking the bottom bracket
21
7Before the first ride 11
16Wheels
21
8Before every ride
12
16.1Checking the wheels
21
9Setting up the bike for the rider
12
16.2Checking the hubs
21
9.1Fitting the pedals
12
16.3Checking the rims
22
9.2Adjusting the seat position
13
BMX
22
9.2.1Adjusting the bike saddle
13
17.1Tyres
22
9.2.2Operating the quick-release device
13
17.2Tubeless tyres
23
17.3Tubed tyres
23
17.4Inner tubes
23
9.2.3Determining the correct saddle height 14
4
17Tyres and inner tubes I General User Manual
18Repairing a puncture 18.1Opening the brake
24
20Bike chain
40
24
20.1Maintenance of bike chains 40
18.1.1Opening the cantilever or V-brake 24
21Brake, brake levers and brake systems
41
18.1.2Removing the hydraulic rim brake
24
18.1.3Opening the side-pull calliper brake 25
18.1.4Releasing the hub gears, roller, drum
or back-pedal brakes
18.2Removing the wheel
21.1Important information and precautionary
measures41
21.2Brake lever
25
25
42
21.2.1Standard brake lever
21.3Hub brakes 42
42
18.2.1Removing the front wheel 25
21.3.1Drum and roller brakes
42
18.2.2Removing the rear wheel 25
21.3.2Back-pedal brake
43
18.3Removing the tyre and inner tube
26
18.4Mending the inner tube
26
21.4.1Readjusting the brake
44
18.5Fitting the tyre and inner tube
27
18.6Fitting the wheel
27
21.4.2Adjusting the brake-pad clearance
in relation to the rim
44
21.4.3Wear of brake pad
45
18.6.1Inserting the front wheel
27
18.6.2Inserting the rear wheel
27
18.6.2.1Bikes with derailleur gears
27
18.6.2.2Bikes with hub gears
27
19Bike gears
19.1Derailleur gears
19.1.1 Operating the shifting lever
19.1.1.1 Shifting lever on road bike
19.1.1.2Shifting lever on MTB, trekking
and touring bike
19.2Hub gears
19.2.1Operating the hub gears
19.2.1.1Shimano 7/8-speed shift lever
19.2.2Adjusting gears with Shimano
hub gears
30
30
31
31
35
38
38
38
21.4Rim brakes
44
21.5Disc brakes
45
21.5.1Hydraulic disc brake
46
21.5.2Vapour bubble formation
47
21.5.3Cleaning the brake system
47
21.5.4Fitting/removing the wheel
47
22Lighting system
48
22.1Specifications for lighting system
48
22.2Special regulations for road bikes
48
22.3Generator / dynamo
48
22.3.1Sidewall dynamo
22.3.1.1Switching the sidewall dynamo
on and off
48
22.3.2Hub dynamo
39
48
49
22.4Failure of the lighting system
I General User Manual
49
5
23Add-on components
50
27.5Brake pads
58
50
27.6Brake discs
58
23.1.1Front pannier rack
50
27.7Bike chains or toothed belts
58
23.1.2Rear pannier rack
50
27.8Chainrings, sprocket wheels and jockey
wheels58
23.1Pannier rack
23.2Wheel guards / mudguards 51
27.9Lamps of lighting set
58
27.10Handlebar tapes and handle grips
59
52
27.11Hydraulic oils and lubricants
59
24.1Child seat
52
27.12Gear-shift and brake cables
59
24.2Bike stand
53
27.13Paint finishes
59
24.3Bike trailer
53
27.14Bearings
59
24.4Bike basket
53
24.5Bar ends
53
27.15Sliding bearings and bearings for fullsuspension frames, suspension forks
or other suspension elements
59
23.2.1Re-engaging the safety-release
mechanism51
24Accessories and equipment
25Bike carriers for mounting on roof and rear of car 54
28Regular inspections
60
26Carbon components
54
26.1Properties
54
26.2Torques
54
26.3Visual inspection
55
26.4Carbon frame
55
26.5Carbon handlebar
55
26.6Carbon handlebar stem
55
30.2Maximum permitted loading of pannier rack
63
26.7Carbon wheels 56
30.3Tightening torques for screw connections 63
26.8Carbon fork
56
26.9Carbon seatpost
56
30.3.1General tightening torques for screw
connections65
26.10Splinters
56
26.11Fastening in mounting stand
56
26.12Transportation by car
56
28.1.1Maintenance / checks
60
60
29Link list
61
30Technical data
62
30.1Maximum permitted gross weight of bike 62
30.4Tyres and tyre pressure
65
30.5Lighting set
65
31Warranty conditions
66
57
31.1Prerequisites for the validity of warranty
claims66
27.1Care
57
31.2Warranty exclusions
27.2Wear parts
57
27.3Tyres
58
27.4Rims in conjunction with rim brakes
58
27Care and maintenance of the bike
6
28.1Inspection schedule
I General User Manual
66
4 Safety information
4.1
I nformation for parents and legal
guardians
Basic safety information
Please read all the warnings and information in this User
Manual carefully before using the bike. Keep this User
Manual near your bike for ready reference.
If you hand this bike over to someone else, don't forget to
give them the User Manual as well.
4.2
4.3
For your own safety
›› Always use a suitable bicycle helmet and wear it
correctly.
›› Make sure that your child has been taught, and
also understands, how to handle the bike safely
and responsibly in the environment in which it is
going to be used.
›› Explain to your child how to operate all the
brakes, and also how they work and any special
features. For further important information on
this matter, refer to ➠ Chapter 21 "Brake, brake
levers and brake systems".
›› As the legal guardian, you are responsible for the
safety of your child and any damage he/she may
cause when cycling. You should therefore make
absolutely sure that the bike is in technically
sound condition and adjust it regularly to the
size of the child.
4.4
›› Wear bright clothing or reflective elements so
that other road users can see you in good time.
›› Wear shoes with a stiff, and whenever possible,
non-slip sole.
›› Wear close-fitting clothing on your legs, or wear
trouser clips.
›› Wear protective clothing such as robust shoes
and gloves.
Safety in road traffic
›› Observe the applicable traffic regulations.
›› Never ride with no hands!
›› In some countries children below a certain age
must ride on the pavement and must also dismount when crossing the road. Please familiarise
yourself with the applicable regulations.
›› Adjust your handling on wet or slippery roads;
ride more slowly and brake carefully and in good
time as you will require a much greater braking
distance.
›› Adopt a speed that reflects the terrain as well as
your riding ability.
›› Do not listen to music through headphones when
cycling.
›› Do not cycle when using a mobile phone.
›› Use designated cycle paths when not using public roads.
I General User Manual
7
›› Be ready to brake, especially if you are not sure
what lies ahead or are riding downhill.
4.5
Bike safety
›› Only bikes that have been approved for use in
public places, as per the applicable regulations
(e.g. StVZO in Germany), may be used.
›› Observe the maximum permitted gross weight of
the various bike types, as this could otherwise
lead to breakage or failure of safety-relevant
components. The brake system is also only designed for the maximum permitted gross weight
of the bike. For a list of the maximum permitted
gross weights, refer to ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical
data".
The gross weight is the sum of the weight
of the bike + weight of the rider + weight of the
luggage. The gross weight also includes towed
weights such as trailers.
›› If you notice that a part is damaged or warped,
do not use the bike until you have had the part
replaced as otherwise parts that are important to
operation of the bike may fail.
›› Observe the maximum load-carrying capacity of
the pannier rack. This is marked on the pannier
rack directly (also refer to ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
›› Have maintenance and repairs carried out by a
professional bike workshop (for maintenance
intervals, refer to ➠ Chapter 28 "Regular inspections").
›› If you make technical changes to your bike, take
the national traffic regulations and applicable
standards into account. Bear in mind that this
could render your warranty invalid.
›› Only replace electrical components on your bike
with type-tested parts.
›› Only ride with suitable lighting in unfavourable
lighting conditions such as fog, rain, dawn/twilight or in the dark.
8
I General User Manual
Bear in mind that with intensive use of your bike wear
increases accordingly. Many bike parts, particularly
on light sports bikes, are only designed for a specific
period of use. If this is exceeded, there is a considerable risk that components could fail.
Perform care and maintenance on your bike regularly.
In doing so, check important components, particularly
the frame, fork, wheel suspension, handlebar, handlebar stem, seatpost and brakes for warping and damage. If you notice changes such as cracks, bulges or
warping, have your bike checked by a specialist cycle
shop before using again.
5 Legal provisions
If you wish to use your bike in road traffic, make sure that
your bike complies with the road traffic regulations. If
necessary, observe ➠ Chapter 22.2 "Special regulations for
road bikes".
5.1
pplicable road traffic licensing
A
regulations
Before you take your bike on the road, find out what the
relevant national regulations in your country are – in
Germany, these are the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations
(StVZO) and the Road Traffic Ordinance (StVO).
In Switzerland, the applicable regulations can be found
in the Ordinances relating to Technical Requirements for
Road Vehicles, Articles 213 to 218.
If you wish to ride in road traffic in Austria, you must observe Ordinance 146 / Bicycle Ordinance.
Make sure each time you use your bike that it actually is
in the prescribed roadworthy condition, that the brakes
are properly adjusted and that the bell and lighting set
comply with the relevant regulations in your country, in
Germany these are the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations
(StVZO).
In some EU countries, battery-operated front lights and
rear lights may only be used by road bikes weighing less
than 11 kg. They must always be carried and have an official approval (sinuous line and K number). All other bikes
must use dynamo lighting sets. Every component of the
system must carry the official test mark which identifies it
as "approved". The applicable regulations in your country
apply in this regard, e.g. the Road Traffic Licensing Regu-
lations (StVZO) in Germany. When performing technical
modifications, bear in mind that electrical components
must only be replaced by type-tested components.
6.2
6 Intended use
6.1
rekking bike / all-terrain bike
T
(ATB), if equipped in accordance
with the applicable road traffic
licensing regulations
General information
Bikes are a means of transportation for one person. In
some countries, regulations exist governing the carrying
of passengers, such as the Road Traffic Ordinance (StVO)
in Germany (tandem or bike child seat).
If you wish to carry luggage, you will require a suitable
fixture on your bike. Bear in mind the maximum loadbearing capacity of the carrier (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
You may use these bikes on surfaced routes and in road
traffic, providing they are equipped accordingly. They are
also suitable for gentle offroad riding, such as on country
lanes.
Not every bike type is suitable for every surface. Bikes are
not designed to cope with extreme stresses such as jumping or riding over steps.
You must not take part in competitions with your bike. The
only exceptions to this are bikes that are offered explicitly
for use in competitions.
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended. This particularly applies for non-observance of the safety information and damage resulting for example from:
The information in this User Manual applies for all bike
types.
Any deviations for individual bike types are identified
accordingly.
Observe the relevant user manual from the individual
component manufacturers which can be found on the CD
or in the Internet. If you have any questions once you
have read the documentation, your specialist cycle shop
will be pleased to provide assistance.
•• overloading or
•• incorrect repairs.
6.3
ity, touring, sports, child's and
C
youngster's bike, if equipped in
accordance with the applicable road
traffic licensing regulations
Intended use also includes compliance with the operating,
maintenance and repair instructions provided in this User
Manual.
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended.
You can use these bikes in road traffic and on surfaced
routes.
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended. This particularly applies for non-observance of the safety information and damage resulting (for example) from:
•• offroad use,
•• overloading or
•• incorrect repairs.
I General User Manual
9
6.4
Mountain bike (MTB) / cross bike
The bike is exempt from these requirements for the duration of officially approved cycling events.
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended. This particularly applies for non-observance of the safety information and damage resulting for example from:
•• offroad use,
•• overloading,
You can use these bikes offroad. You must not use these
bikes in road traffic or competitions. If you wish to use
your bike on public roads, it must have the requisite
equipment features (see ➠ Chapter 5 "Legal provisions").
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended.
This particularly applies for non-observance of the safety
information and damage resulting for example from:
•• use in competitions,
•• overloading,
•• incorrect repairs.
•• riding over steps,
•• jumping,
•• riding through deep water
•• e xtreme stresses on non-designated MTB routes or
MTB courses.
6.5
Road bike / fitness bike
•• incorrect repairs or
•• use in competitions,
6.6
BMX
These bikes are designed for BMX routes and/or BMX practice facilities.
In some EU countries, they are not approved for use in
road traffic, e.g. by the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations
(StVZO) in Germany, and in this case must not be used for
this purpose (see ➠ Chapter 5 "Legal provisions").Always
wear a helmet and protective clothing, such as elbow and
knee pads.
The brakes normally installed on BMX bikes produce a
less effective braking action. You should therefore bear in
mind that this increases the braking distance, especially
in wet conditions. Please test this thoroughly in a safe
location and always adjust your handling accordingly.
The manufacturer and cycle shop will not accept liability
claims should the bike not be used as intended.
This particularly applies for non-observance of the safety
information and damage resulting for example from
•• use in competitions,
•• overloading,
•• incorrect repairs.
•• riding over steps or
You may use these bikes on public roads for training purposes. You may use road bikes weighing up to 11 kg without permanently fitted dynamo lighting. If you choose to
do so, you must carry a battery-operated front light and a
rear light. If the light has the required approval, there will
be an embossed sinuous line and K-number on it.
When using road bikes that weigh more than 11 kg in road
traffic, the required equipment features must be installed.
Please familiarise yourself with the applicable regulations.
10
I General User Manual
•• jumping.
7
Before the first ride
Make sure that your bike is ready for use and is set up
for your body size.
Check the following:
•• Positioning and secure fastening of saddle and
handlebar
Never inflate the tyres to less than the minimum or
more than the maximum specified tyre pressure. As a
rule of thumb, e.g. when on the road, you can check
the tyre pressure as follows: If you press your thumbs
into the inflated tyre, there should not be much give
in the tyre even if you press hard.
Check the tyres and rims for damage, foreign bodies,
e. g. glass fragments or sharp stones and deformation.
If cuts, cracks or holes are visible, do not ride off. Instead, take your bike to a professional bike workshop
and have it checked.
•• Installation and correct adjustment of the brakes
•• Secure fastening of wheels in frame and fork
Adjust the handlebar and stem until you find a safe
and comfortable riding position. Instructions on how
to adjust the handlebar are provided in ➠ Chapter 9.3
"Adjusting the handlebar position".
Adjust the saddle until you find a safe and comfortable riding position. Instructions on how to adjust the
saddle are provided in ➠ Chapter 9.2 "Adjusting the
seat position".
Make sure the brake levers are always within easy
reach and that you know how to operate the right/
left brake levers and where to find them. Make a note
of which brake lever operates the front and which the
rear wheel brake.
Modern brake systems can have a far more powerful
and different braking effect than those you are already
familiar with. Before setting off, familiarise yourself
with the effects of the brakes on a safe traffic-free
area.
If you are using a bike with carbon-fibre rims, bear
in mind that the braking behaviour of this material is
much poorer than aluminium rims.
Make sure that the wheels are securely fastened in the
frame and forks. Check that the quick-release device
and all important fastening screws and nuts are securely fastened.
➠ Chapter 9.2.2 "Operating the quick-release device"
contains instructions on how to operate quick-release
devices safely and ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data" contains a table of the tightening torques for important
screws and nuts.
Check the tyre pressure. Information on the prescribed tyre pressure appears on the tyre sidewall.
I General User Manual
11
8 Before every ride
9 Setting up the bike for the rider
Road bikes or mountain bikes can also be supplied without pedals.
Although a great deal of care has been taken during
production and assembly, parts may still come loose
or change function during transportation for example.
You should therefore always check the following before every ride:
Proceed as follows if you wish to fit pedals to your bike
yourself:
9.1
Fitting the pedals
›› Coat both pedal threads with lubricant (grease).
•• Bell and lighting are working properly and securely fastened
•• Brake system is working properly and securely
fastened
•• If a hydraulic brake is fitted to your bike, make
sure the lines and connections are tight
The left pedal has a left-handed thread which is normally indicated by an "L" embossed on the axle. The
right pedal has a right-handed thread which is normally indicated by an embossed "R".
•• Check the tyres and rims for damage and foreign
bodies and check the wheel runs true, especially
after riding offroad
•• Sufficient tread depth on the tyres
•• The suspension elements are in working order
and are securely fastened
Axle with right pedal thread
Axle with left pedal thread
•• Screws, nuts and quick-release devices are secure
•• Frame and fork for deformation and damage
•• Handlebar, handlebar stem, seatpost and saddle
in the correct position and safely and properly
secured
If you are not sure whether your bike is in a technically sound condition, do not ride it and have it checked
by a professional bike workshop instead.
12
I General User Manual
›› Screw the left pedal anticlockwise into the left
crank.
›› Screw the right pedal clockwise into the right crank
(on the side of the bike chain).
›› Tighten both pedals using a suitable size 15
open-ended spanner or Allen key. Tighten all
screws to the prescribed torque (➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data"). If you do not do this, the pedals may come loose.
9.2
Make sure you fit or screw in the pedals straight, as
otherwise you could damage the thread in the crank
arm beyond repair.
1
1
2
3
2
3
Adjusting the seat position
9.2.1 Adjusting the bike saddle
The seat position is decisive for your well-being and cycling performance.
›› Do not remove or change the seatpost or saddle
clamp. If you change or modify components, this
renders the warranty invalid.
MTB system pedals
Touring or sports pedals
Road bike system pedals
›› Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as
otherwise screws could shear off and components could come loose or detach altogether (see
➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
Only use the designated cleats and shoes for MTB,
racing and system pedals. If you use other cleats/
shoes you may slip out of the pedals.
Riders who are inexperienced in the use of MTB system
pedals or road system pedals, also referred to as click
pedals, are vulnerable to falls with potentially serious
consequences. If you use system pedals, practise clicking
into the pedal and releasing the shoe from the pedal when
the bike is stationary. Never practise this in road traffic.
Only work on the bike if you have the correct tools
and requisite knowledge. Always have complex or
safety-relevant work carried out by a specialist cycle
shop.
9.2.2 Operating the quick-release device
Read the user manual of the pedal and shoe manufacturer.
You can also find more information on this subject in
the Internet. A list of links is provided in ➠ Chapter 29
"Link list" .
›› All quick-release devices must be tightened securely before you set off. Check this before every
journey.
›› If you leave your bike unattended, check that all
quick-release devices are correctly secured before setting off again.
›› When closing the quick-release lever to lock it,
it must be necessary to apply a force that causes
you to make a fist with your hand as otherwise
the quick-release device could come loose.
I General User Manual
13
Quick-release device
2
1
1
2
›› When closed, quick-release levers must lie flat
against the frame, fork and saddle clamp. Make
sure that quick-release devices for the hubs point
backwards when closed as otherwise they could
snag on obstructions when the bike is moving
and open. This could lead to serious accidents.
Quick-release lever
Adjusting nut
To open the quick-release device, proceed as follows:
›› Throw back the quick-release lever so that its inner
face or the lettering OPEN is visible.
9.2.3 Determining the correct saddle height
›› Sit on the bike saddle.
›› Try to reach the pedal with your heel when it is in
the bottom position. Your knee should be more or
less fully straightened out.
›› Place the balls of your feet on the centre of the
pedal. If your knee is now slightly bent, the saddle
height is correct.
›› Open the quick-release device as far as possible.
›› Turn the adjusting nut anticlockwise to further
slacken the quick-release device.
To close the quick-release device, proceed as follows:
›› Adjust the clamping strength by turning the adjusting nut.
›› If the quick-release device closes too easily, open
it again and turn the adjusting nut clockwise.
›› If the quick-release device still closes too easily,
repeat the previous step.
›› If the quick-release device is too difficult to close,
turn the adjusting nut anticlockwise.
›› Turn back the quick-release lever from the OPEN
position so you can see the outer side of the lever
or the lettering CLOSE.
14
I General User Manual
Never tighten the seatpost if the maximum mark or
stop mark is above the top of the seat tube as otherwise you could injure yourself or damage the seatpost. Always observe the specified tightening torques.
In full-suspension mountain bikes the seat tube is also
open at the bottom, so the seatpost should only be inserted a certain distance downwards to ensure the rear swing
arm and suspension element never come into contact
when the bike is in use.
9.2.4.1 With a two-bolt seatpost
The minimum insertion depth is marked on the seatpost. If this is not the case, the minimum insertion
depth must be 7.5 cm. In frames with long seat tubes
that project beyond the top tube, the minimum insertion depth is 10 cm.
Some seatposts have two screws for adjusting the saddle angle, one in front of and one behind the seat tube.
If you want to tilt the saddle forwards, loosen the rear
screw with an Allen key and tighten the front screw by the
same number of revolutions. To tilt the saddle backwards,
loosen the front screw and tighten the other to the same
degree. Then retighten both screws observing the correct
tightening torque (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
Observe stop
mark.
Two-bolt seatpost
9.2.4 Adjusting the saddle angle
›› Your bike saddle should be as close as possible to
horizontal.
›› You can make use of longer bike rides to find out
what your most comfortable seat position is. If you
want to tilt the saddle, try tilting it very slightly
forwards. If you tilt the saddle back, this can quickly lead to pain or physical injury.
Adjust the saddle angle as follows:
›› Turn the clamping screw anticlockwise to loosen it.
›› Tilt the bike saddle to the required angle.
›› Turn the clamping screw clockwise to tighten it.
(For tightening torques see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical
data").
9.2.4.2 With a seatpost saddle clamp
If the saddle is attached to the seatpost by a clamp, the
clamping nut will be at the side. Adjust the saddle angle
as follows:
›› Turn the clamping nut anticlockwise to loosen it.
You may need to counter the nut on the other side
using another wrench.
›› Tilt the bike saddle to the required angle.
›› Turn the clamping nut clockwise to tighten it. You
may need to counter the nut on the other side using another wrench. Use the correct tightening
torque (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
Seatpost saddle clamp
Adjusting the saddle angle
I General User Manual
15
9.2.4.3 With a suspension seatpost
Suspension seatposts reduce vibrations caused by uneven
roads thereby reducing stress on the spinal column.
If you need to adjust the suspension elements in the seatpost, consult your specialist cycle shop.
›› Bend your upper body towards the handlebar until
you have found a position that is comfortable for
your back.
›› Stretch out your arms towards the handlebar.
›› Note the approximate position of your hands and
set the handlebar at this height.
9.3.1 A
djusting / aligning the handlebar
height with a conventional handlebar
stem
To release the stem shaft in the head tube, proceed as
follows:
›› Release the stem expander bolt to loosen the handlebar stem. Turn it anticlockwise by two or three
revolutions using an Allen key.
Suspension seatpost
9.3
Adjusting the handlebar position
Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as otherwise screws could shear off and components could
come loose or detach altogether (see ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data").
›› Clamp the front wheel between your legs to prevent the bike fork from turning with the stem shaft.
You can also influence your riding position by changing
the handlebar height.
›› If it is not possible to do this, tap lightly on the
stem expander bolt with a plastic hammer to loosen the clamping fixture inside the stem.
›› Holding the handlebar by the handles, turn it from
right to left and vice-versa.
The lower you set the handlebar, the further you will have
to lean forwards. This increases the strain on your wrists,
arms and upper body and you will need to bend your back
further.
›› Set the handlebar stem to the required height.
The higher the handlebar is, the more upright your riding
position will be. This increases the stress on your spinal
column due to jolting.
›› To secure the stem shaft again, turn the stem expander bolt clockwise using an Allen key until it is
tight (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
You can determine a handlebar height that best suits your
body size as follows:
›› Sit on the bike saddle.
›› Ask another person to hold the bike steady if
required.
16
I General User Manual
›› Align the handlebar so that it is exactly at right
angles to the front wheel.
Never tighten the handlebar stem if the maximum
mark or stop mark is above the top of the shaft. If you
cannot find a mark, insert the handlebar stem into
the head tube to a depth of at least 6.5 cm. If you do
not do this, the handlebar stem could come loose or
break.
9.3.4 A
djusting the handlebar position by
turning the handlebar
Loosen the hexagon socket screws on the front of the
stem. Turn the handlebar until you find the position that
is comfortable for you. Make sure that the handlebar is
always exactly in the centre of the stem. Now retighten the
hexagon socket screws by turning them clockwise. If the
tightening torque is stamped on the stem, use this value,
and if not, use the tightening torques in ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data".
9.3.2 A
djusting the handlebar height with
A-head systems
With the A-head stems shown here, the handlebar height
must be adjusted by a professional bike workshop.
9.3.3 A
ligning handlebars with A-head
systems in relation to the front wheel
To align the handlebar with the front wheel, proceed as
follows:
›› Loosen the hexagon socket screws on the rear of
the handlebar stem by turning them anticlockwise
with an Allen key.
Once you have adjusted the handlebar, you will also need
to adjust the brake levers and gear-shift handles. Loosen
the hexagon socket screws on the handle grips. Sit on
the saddle and put your finger on the lever. Turn the lever until your hand and lower arm are in a straight line.
Retighten the screws in the handle grips by turning them
clockwise. (For tightening torques see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
›› Turn the handlebar so that it is exactly at right
angles to the front wheel.
›› Tighten the hexagon socket screw by turning it
clockwise with an Allen key (see ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data").
I General User Manual
17
9.3.5 A
djusting the handlebar height with an
adjustable handlebar stem
With some types of handlebar stems, you can vary the
handlebar tilt. The stem angle can be adjusted via the
clamping screws which are on the side of the articulation
or the top/bottom of the stem. Models equipped with additional stop notches or adjusting screws are available.
10 Frame
The form of the frame depends on the bike type and function. Frames are manufactured from different materials
– steel or aluminium alloys or carbon (carbon fibre), for
example.
Adjusting screw
Hexagon socket screw
(integrated stop notch)
Adjust the handlebar tilt as follows:
›› Undo the clamping screw by turning it anticlockwise through two or three revolutions using an
Allen key.
›› If you own a model that is also equipped with
detents, continue turning the clamping screw anticlockwise to disengage the detents.
The frame number of the bike is stamped on the seat
tube, the dropout or the bottom bracket housing.
It may also be found on the motor suspension in Pedelecs. The bike can be identified by the frame number if it is stolen. To identify the bike properly, it is
important to note down the whole number in the right
order.
›› If you own a model with integrated stop notch,
loosen the screw of the stop notch. In many stem
types this is located on the underside of the stem.
›› Tilt the handlebar stem to the required angle.
›› To fasten the handlebar stem, tighten the clamping
screw clockwise using an Allen key . If tightening
torques are specified on the stem, use exactly these
torques, and if not, refer to the table of tightening
torques in ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data".
›› In models with an integrated stop notch, tighten
the screw of the stop notch carefully clockwise.
In doing so, the stop notch must engage with the
teeth.
18
I General User Manual
Never ride your bike if the frame is warped or
cracked. On no account should you attempt to repair
damaged parts. This can lead to accidents. Replace
defective parts before you ride the bike again.
After an accident or crash, have your bike checked by
a professional bike workshop before riding it again. If
defects on the frame or components go unnoticed this
can lead to accidents.
If your bike does not roll forwards easily in a straight
line, this could mean that the frame is warped. In this
case, have the steering stability checked by a professional bike workshop.
11 Headset
12 Fork
The front wheel is held in place by the bike fork. The bike
fork consists of two fork blades, the fork crown and steering tube.
Headset
The headset is the bearing for the bike fork in the frame. If
the headset has been properly adjusted, it will turn easily.
In doing so, no play should be evident.
The headset is subject to a large amount of stress due to
impacts with the road surface. This can cause it to come
loose or affect its setting. Have the play and ease of movement of the headset checked regularly by your specialist
cycle shop (for inspection intervals see ➠ Chapter 28.1
"Inspection schedule").
Checking the headset
If you do not adjust the headset properly or tighten
it too tightly, this could cause breakages. This should
therefore always be carried out by a professional bike
workshop.
If you ride with the headset loose, this could damage
the bearing shells or fork.
Carbon fork
Suspension fork
The suspension fork is a feature of most mountain bikes,
trekking bikes and city bikes. They can be adjusted in
different ways and provide a greater degree of riding comfort.
For information on the function, maintenance and care of
suspension elements, refer to ➠ Chapter 13 "Suspension
frame and suspension elements". Specific information on
your suspension fork is provided in the manufacturer's
operating instructions which you can find on the CD or the
manufacturer's website.
Never ride with a damaged bike fork. Do not attempt
to repair a defective bike fork. This can lead to serious
accidents. If you notice that the bike fork is warped or
otherwise damaged, replace it before using the bike
again.
Avoid sudden changes in ground level and riding off
high kerb stones. This can damage the fork and lead
to serious accidents.
Check regularly that the screws on the bike fork are
securely fastened. If screws are allowed to come
loose, this can cause serious accidents.
I General User Manual
19
13 S
uspension frame and suspension
elements
response, but does not strike through if you ride over an
obstruction. It must give slightly when you sit on your
bike.
13.1
13.2 Care and maintenance
Frame with rear suspension
If you wish to ride offroad in a particularly sporty manner
or with a high degree of comfort, you may have opted for a
full-suspension model. In this case, the rear triangle of the
main frame is not rigid; instead it can move and is spring
mounted and damped by a shock absorber.
You can clean your full-suspension MTB in the usual manner. Hot water with a little washing-up liquid or a gentle
detergent which you can obtain from your specialist cycle
shop are suitable for this.
You should avoid using a high-pressure cleaner to
clean your bike as the cleaning fluid can also enter
sealed bearings due to the high pressure and damage
them beyond repair.
Full-suspension frame
Different types of suspension elements are used. These
are mainly shock absorbers equipped with a steel spring
or an air chamber whose air is compressed due to the
action of the suspension. In high-quality shock absorbers,
the damping action, that regulates the speed of compression and rebound, can be adjusted. This task is performed
by a system of oil chambers and ducts.
Although this type of shock absorber offers a higher degree of riding safety and comfort, it requires special handling. This User Manual contains only general information
in this regard. Detailed information and advice is provided
in the instructions from the shock absorber manufacturer
enclosed with the CD and can also be obtained from your
specialist cycle shop.
The website of the relevant suspension element
manufacturer may also prove to be a valuable source
of information. Informative and helpful links are provided in ➠ Chapter 29 "Link list".
Your specialist cycle shop should have adjusted the suspension for you before handing over your new bike. Your
bike and the seat position may look different to what you
are used to, and may also feel different when you are riding. The spring strut must be tuned so that it has a soft
20
I General User Manual
You should carefully wipe down the piston of the shock absorber and the seal with a soft cloth as part of your regular
bike maintenance. If you spray a little spray oil, e.g. from
Brunox, on the running surface of the shock absorber and
the seal, this increases its performance and service life.
You should regularly check the articulations of the rear
triangle for play. To do this, lift the wheel and try to move
the rear wheel sideways.
You can detect play in the mounting bushes of the shock
absorber by lifting the rear wheel up and setting it back
down quickly. If you sense play or hear a rattling noise,
have your bike checked immediately by a professional
bike workshop.
Your safety depends to a large extent on whether the
suspension elements are securely fastened and are
working correctly. You should therefore regularly look
after and inspect your full-suspension bike.
›› Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as
otherwise screws could shear off and components could come loose or detach altogether (see
➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
14 Bottom bracket and cranks
Chainrings are wear parts. Their service life depends on
various factors, e.g.
•• maintenance and care,
•• type of use and
•• distance travelled.
15 Checking the bottom bracket
16 Wheels
16.1 Checking the wheels
The wheels connect the bike with the surface you are riding on. The wheels are subject to a particularly high level
of stress due to unevenness of the riding surface and the
weight of the rider.
The wheels are carefully checked and trued prior to delivery. However, the spokes may settle when you ride the
first kilometres on your bike.
›› Have the wheels checked again and trued if necessary after the first 100 kilometres by a specialist
cycle shop.
The cranks must be securely fastened as this could
otherwise damage the crankset.
›› The cranks can come loose which is why you should
regularly check whether they are securely fastened
by attempting to rock them to and fro.
›› If there is play in the cranks, have the bike checked
and the cranks fastened securely by a professional
bike workshop .
If your bike has a carbon frame and a bottom bracket
housing for a BB30 bottom bracket please note the
following:
›› You should subsequently regularly check the tension in the spokes and have loose or damaged
spokes replaced, and/or have the wheel trued, by a
specialist cycle shop.
The wheel can be attached to the frame and fork in a number of different ways. In addition to the standard systems
in which the wheel is held on by axle nuts or quick-release
devices, different types of floating axles exist. These can
be held in place by a screw connection or different types
of quick-release devices. If your bike has a floating axle,
please also refer to the enclosed manufacturer's user manual or visit the web pages of the relevant manufacturer in
the Internet.
In this case you can fit an adapter so that a bottom
bracket with conventional BSA thread can be used.
However, bear in mind
•• You can only install the adapter if the frame is
completely undamaged. Repairing a defective
BB30 housing serves no purpose. If it is not
installed correctly, the bottom bracket housing
may be damaged which would render the warranty void. This kind of adapter should only be
fitted by a specialist cycle shop.
•• Once the adapter has been fitted in the carbon
frame it cannot be removed.
Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as otherwise screws could shear off and components could
come loose or detach altogether (see ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data").
16.2 Checking the hubs
To check the hub bearings, proceed as follows:
›› Lift the wheel and spin it.
›› Check whether the wheel continues to turn through
several revolutions before it stops moving. If it
stops suddenly, the bearing is damaged. This does
not apply for front wheels with hub dynamos.
›› To determine whether there is play in the hub bearing, try rocking the wheel in the bike fork or rear
I General User Manual
21
triangle backwards and forwards perpendicular to
the direction of travel.
›› If you notice that there is play between the bearings or if you encounter resistance when turning
the wheel, have the hub bearing adjusted by a specialist cycle shop.
17 Tyres and inner tubes
17.1
Tyres
A large number of different tyre types exist. The bike's
offroad capability and rolling resistance depend on tread
profile.
16.3 Checking the rims
If you are using a rim brake, the rim is subject to a higher
degree of wear.
Only inflate the tyre to the maximum permissible tyre
pressure as otherwise it may burst.
If a rim is worn it loses stability which makes it
more susceptible to damage. If the rim is deformed,
cracked or broken this can lead to serious accidents.
If you notice changes in a rim on your bike, do not
ride on it. Have the problem checked by a professional bike workshop.
Inflate the tyre at least to the specified minimum air
pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre may
detach from the rim.
The maximum permissible tyre pressure, and normally
also the minimum permissible pressure, can be found
on the tyre sidewall.
Always replace the tyre with a tyre of the same type,
dimension and profile as otherwise the ride characteristics may be adversely affected. This can lead to
accidents.
Rims for bikes with wheel sizes greater than 24" are
supplied with a rim wear indicator. These rims have
a characteristic curve or groove that runs round the
entire circumference.
Replace the rim as soon as you notice marks (grooves,
coloured spots) in one location on the rim, if an
embossed marking has disappeared or if a coloured
marking has worn down.
Tyres are wear parts. Check the tread depth, tyre pressure and condition of the tyre sidewalls regularly.
Replace worn tyres before using the bike.
If the marking consists of a groove or several points
on the rim side wall, have the rim replaced as soon as
it wears off.
Note the dimension of the fitted tyre. Standard designations are used when stating the tyre dimension.
•• Example 1: "46-622" means the tyre is 46 mm
wide and the rim diameter is 622 mm.
•• Example 2: "28 × 1.60 inches" means that the tyre
diameter is 28 inches and the tyre width is 1.60
inches.
22
I General User Manual
The tyre pressure is frequently stated in PSI. ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data" contains a table which you can
use to convert tyre pressures from PSI into bar.
17.2
Only use tubed tyres on the designated rims. These do
not have turned-up edges (rim flanges) and instead
have a smooth inwards-curving surface onto which
the tubed tyre is glued.
Tubeless tyres
Tubeless tyres are also used nowadays, especially with
modern mountain bikes, but also with road bikes to a lesser extent. Although the offer a number of benefits, they
must be used and handled with caution.
Only use the tubed tyres of the prescribed type and in
the prescribed manner with the correct tyre pressure.
Only use tubeless tyres on suitable rims. These are
identified accordingly, e.g. using the abbreviation
"UST".
Special skills and a great deal of experience are
required to glue on tubed tyres. Always have tubed
tyres replaced at a professional bike workshop. Find
out how to handle tubed tyres correctly and how to
replace them safely.
Only use tubeless tyres of the prescribed type and in
the prescribed manner, with the right tyre pressure
and, if applicable, using the recommended sealing
fluid.
Tools must not be used to remove tubeless tyres from the
rim as otherwise leaks may subsequently occur. If the
sealing fluid does not remedy the defect, the valve can be
removed and a normal inner tube used.
17.3
17.4 Inner tubes
The inner tube is necessary to maintain the pressure inside the tyre. It is inflated via a valve.
Three valve types exist:
1
2
3
Tubed tyres
Tubed tyres are also used, particularly on bikes used in
sports competitions. With this tyre type, the inner tube
is sewn into the casing and this unit is glued firmly to the
designated rim using special adhesive. Tubed tyres offer
enhanced safety in the event of a puncture and improved
emergency-running characteristics
1
2
3
Sclaverand or road valve
Schrader or car valve
Dunlop or Woods valve
All three have a cap to protect them from ingress of dirt.
I General User Manual
23
To inflate an inner tube with a Sclaverand or road valve,
proceed as follows:
18 Repairing a puncture
To repair a puncture, you will need the following equipment:
•• Plastic tyre lever
•• Patches
•• Rubber solution
•• Sandpaper
•• Spare inner tube, if required
›› Unscrew the valve cap anticlockwise with your
fingers.
›› Unscrew the knurled nut anticlockwise.
›› Push the knurled nut with your finger briefly into
the valve until air escapes.
›› Inflate the inner tube using a suitable tyre pump.
•• Spare valve, if required
•• Open-ended spanner (if your bike is not equipped
with a quick-release device)
•• Tyre pump
We recommend you remove the defective wheel first. Open
or remove the brake beforehand. The procedure for this
depends on the type of bike brake that is installed.
›› Screw the knurled nut back down.
›› Screw the cap clockwise back onto the valve.
Ask a specialist cycle shop for advice on which tyre
pump is suitable for your valve.
To inflate an inner tube with a Dunlop/Woods valve or
Schrader/car valve proceed as follows:
›› Unscrew the valve cap anticlockwise.
Read the chapter on brakes before removing the brake
as otherwise you could damage the brake system and
this could lead to accidents.
18.1 Opening the brake
18.1.1 Opening the cantilever or V-brake
›› Inflate the inner tube using a suitable tyre pump.
›› Grip the wheel with one hand.
›› Screw the cap clockwise back onto the valve.
›› Squeeze the brake pads or brake arms against the
rim.
›› Detach the brake cable at one of the brake arms.
18.1.2 Removing the hydraulic rim brake
›› If quick-release brake mechanisms are fitted, remove a brake unit (see ➠ Chapter 9.2.2 "Operating
the quick-release device").
›› If no quick-release brake mechanisms are fitted,
deflate the tyre.
24
I General User Manual
18.1.3 Opening the side-pull calliper brake
›› Open the quick-release lever on the brake arm or
brake lever.
›› If no quick-release brake mechanisms are fitted,
deflate the tyre. The wheel can now be pulled out
between the brake pads.
18.1.4 Releasing the hub gears, roller, drum
or back-pedal brakes
›› Undo the cable clamping screw or quick-release
device on the brake arm.
›› With back-pedal brakes, the screw connection of
the brake arm on the chain stay must be released.
18.2 Removing the wheel
Please note that the work steps described here are for a
specific example.
Please observe the information by the relevant manufacturer or consult your specialist cycle shop.
18.2.2 Removing the rear wheel
›› If your bike is equipped with derailleur gears, shift
down to the smallest sprocket. The rear derailleur
does not prevent the wheel from being removed in
this position.
›› If quick-release devices are fitted to your bike,
open them (see ➠ Chapter 9.2.2 "Operating the
quick-release device").
›› If axle nuts are fitted to your bike, release these
by turning them anticlockwise using a suitable
spanner.
›› Fold the rear derailleur backwards slightly.
›› Lift the bike up slightly.
›› Pull the wheel out of the frame.
›› If the rear wheel still does not come out, open the
quick-release device further by turning the lock nut
anticlockwise.
›› Strike the wheel from above gently with the palm
of your hand to shift it.
›› The wheel should drop out.
18.2.1 Removing the front wheel
›› If quick-release devices are fitted to your bike,
open them (see ➠ Chapter 9.2.2 "Operating the
quick-release device").
›› If axle nuts are fitted to your bike, release these
by turning them anticlockwise using a suitable
spanner.
›› If your bike is equipped with metal wheel locking
devices, continue loosening the nuts by turning
them anticlockwise.
›› Pull the metal locking devices apart until they are
clear of the dropout.
›› Now pull the front wheel out of the fork.
Disconnect the shifting cable to remove the rear wheel
›› Disconnect the cable from the cassette joint to
remove the rear wheel from the frame
LOCK
›› If the dropouts are specially formed to prevent the
front wheel from falling out, continue loosening
the nuts by turning them anticlockwise. Once the
washers and nuts are clear of the dropouts, pull the
front wheel out of the fork.
The example here shows the removal of a Shimano hub gear:
20
-8S
CJ
N
PA
JA
Cassette joint
›› 1. Set the Revo-shift lever to 1.
Set to 1
I General User Manual
25
›› 2. Pull the outer casing out from the outer casing
holder of the cassette joint, and then remove the
inner cable from the slit in the bracket.
›› 5. Undo the wheel nuts and put them to one side.
Remove the lock washers from the wheel axle.
›› 6. Pull the rear wheel out of the dropout slits.
Bracket
Outer casing holder
CJ
-8S
JA
PA
20
18.3 Removing the tyre and inner tube
›› Unscrew the valve cap, fastening nut and the cap
nut (if installed) from the valve. Remove the valve
insert from Dunlop or Woods valves.
N
1
Slit
2
›› Allow the remaining air to escape from the inner
tube.
1 Pull out from outer casing holder
2 Remove from the slit
›› 3. Remove the inner cable fixing bolt unit from the
cassette joint pulley.
Inner cable fixing bolt unit
Cassette joint pulley
›› Place the tyre lever on the inner edge of the tyre
opposite the valve.
›› Lever the tyre sidewall over the rim flange.
›› Push the second tyre lever between the rim and
tyre approx. 10 cm away from the first one.
›› Continue levering the tyre off the rim until the tyre
has detached round the entire circumference.
LOCK
›› Take the inner tube out of the tyre.
CJ-8S20
JAPAN
18.4 Mending the inner tube
If it is difficult to pull the outer casing out from the
outer casing holder of the cassette joint, insert a
2 mm Allen key or # 14 spoke into the hole in the
cassette joint pulley, and then turn the pulley to
loosen the inner cable. Then remove the inner cable fixing bolt unit from the pulley first, and after
this remove the outer casing from the outer casing
holder.
2
3
Remove the inner
cable fixing bolt unit
Pull out from
the outer casing
holder
LOCK
JAPAN
1
Pulley hole
2 mm Allen key
or # 14 spoke
›› 4. Undo the screw of the brake arm and remove it.
26
›› Put the inner tube in a container filled with water
to locate the puncture.
›› Push the inner tube below the surface of the water.
Air bubbles will be visible at the point where the
inner tube is torn or perforated.
›› If you start losing air from the tyre on the road and
cannot find the hole, simply inflate the inner tube
hard. The hole will then get bigger as the air will
escape with greater force and you will be able to
hear more easily where it is coming from.
›› Allow the inner tube to dry.
CJ-8S20
Turn the
pulley
›› Pump up the inner tube.
I General User Manual
›› Carefully roughen the inner tube in the area around
the puncture using the sandpaper.
›› Coat this area with rubber solution.
›› Wait for several minutes until the rubber solution
is touch dry.
›› Press the rubber patch firmly onto the damaged
area.
›› Leave the rubber patch to dry for several minutes.
18.5 Fitting the tyre and inner tube
Make sure that foreign bodies do not enter the inside
of the tyre. Make sure that the inner tube is creasefree and not pinched at all times. When fitting the
tyre, bear in mind the running direction. If the tyre
has a running direction, this will be indicated on the
tyre sidewall.
›› Make sure that the rim tape covers the spoke nipples and is undamaged.
18.6 Fitting the wheel
Please note that the work steps described here are for a
specific example.
Please observe the information from the relevant manufacturer or consult your specialist cycle shop.
18.6.1 Inserting the front wheel
Bear the running direction of the tyre in mind when
fitting the front wheel.
›› Put the rim with one edge inside the tyre.
›› Push one side of the tyre completely into the rim.
›› Insert the valve through the valve hole in the rim
and fit the inner tube inside the tyre.
›› Push the tyre over the rim sidewall.
›› Pull the tyre forcefully into the centre of the rim.
The area that has already been fitted will slip into
the base of the rim.
If your bike is equipped with a disc brake, make sure
that the brake discs are correctly positioned between
the brake pads.
›› Check once again that the inner tube is seated
correctly.
18.6.2 Inserting the rear wheel
›› Push the other side of the tyre completely over the
rim flange using the heel of your hand.
18.6.2.1 Bikes with derailleur gears
›› Check that the tyre is correctly seated and is true
using the indicator ring on the rim sidewall. Adjust
the seating of the tyre by hand if it does not run
straight.
›› Inflate the inner tube up to the recommended tyre
pressure.
›› Insert the wheel as far as it will go so it sits centrally in the dropouts.
›› Tighten the hub nut, or firmly close the quickrelease device (see ➠ Chapter 9.2.2 "Operating the
quick-release device").
18.6.2.2 Bikes with hub gears
Fitting a wheel with gear hub in the frame
›› 1. Fit the chain on the sprocket and offer up the
hub axle to the dropouts.
Hub axle
JAPAN
›› Inflate the inner tube slightly.
›› If your bike is equipped with derailleur gears, put
the chain back onto the smallest sprocket when
fitting the rear wheel.
CJ-NX10
›› With Dunlop or Woods valves: Put the valve insert
back into position and screw the cap nut tight.
Dropout
I General User Manual
27
›› 2. Fit the fixing washers onto both sides of the hub
axle. Turn the shifting arm until the projections on
the fixing washers engage with the slits in the
dropouts. In this case the shifting arm can be
mounted more or less parallel to the frame fork.
Locking washer (left-hand side)
Shifting arm
Counter the clamp nut with a 10 mm spanner when
tightening the clamp screw for assembly of the brake
arm clamp.
Tightening torque
2 – 3 Nm
Dropout
Locking washer
(right-hand side)
JA
PA
CJ-
N
NX
10
LOCK
Once you have installed the brake arm clamp, make
sure the clamp screw projects roughly 2 to 3 mm beyond the clamp nut.
Brake arm
7R
Frame fork
Clamp nut
Brake arm clamp
›› The projecting part must be on the dropout side.
›› Fit the fixing washers so the projections precisely
engage in the slits in the dropouts on the front or
rear of the hub axle.
2 – 3 mm
›› 3. Take up the slack in the chain and fasten the
wheel onto the frame with the cap nuts.
Tightening torque
30 – 45 Nm
JA
PA
CJ-
N
10
LOCK
7R
NX
Locking washer
Clamp screw
(M6 × 16 mm)
›› 5. Before using the back-pedal brake, make sure
the brake is working properly and the wheel turns
easily.
Cap nut
›› 4. Fit the brake arm with brake arm clamp correctly
onto the frame fork.
Clamp nut
Brake arm
Clamp screw
Brake arm clamp
Frame fork
Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as otherwise screws could shear off and components could
come loose or detach altogether (see ➠ Chapter 30.3
"Tightening torques for screw connections").
›› Thread in the brake cable and secure it or close the
quick-release brake mechanism.
›› Check that the brake pads make contact with the
brake contact surfaces.
›› Check that the brake arm is securely fastened.
›› Test the brakes.
28
I General User Manual
Installing the shifting cable with hub gears
›› Bring the cable around to the cassette joint pulley,
hold so that the inner cable fixing nut is facing to
the outside (toward the dropout), and then slide
the flats part of the inner cable fixing washer into
the gap in the pulley.
›› Attach the inner cable to the pulley as shown in the
illustration, pass the inner cable through the slit in
the cassette joint bracket, and then insert the end
of the outer casing securely into the outer casing
holder.
LOCK
Flats part of the inner
cable fixing washer
CJ-8
S20
JAPA
N
Inner cable
fixing nut
Gap in pulley
Inner cable
Pulley
Bracket
Pulley
Bracket
Outer casing holder
LOCK
CJ
-8S
20
JA
PA
N
CJ-8S20
JAPAN
2
Slit
1
›› Turn the cable 60° anticlockwise and attach it on
the hook.
1 Pass through the slit
2 Insert into the outer casing holder
Hook
LOCK
CJ-8S20
Turn the
cable 60°
JAPAN
›› If first inserting the outer casing into the outer
casing holder is easier, then first insert the outer
casing into the outer casing holder, and the insert a
2 mm Allen key or a # 14 spoke into the hole in the
cassette joint pulley, and then turn the pulley so
that the inner cable fixing bolt unit fits into the gap
in the pulley.
1
3
LOCK
CJ-8S20
JAPAN
2
Hole in pulley
2 mm Allen key
or # 14 spoke
1 Insert into the outer casing holder
2 Turn the pulley
3 Insert the inner cable fixing bolt unit
I General User Manual
29
19 Bike gears
Check that the inner cable is correctly seated inside
the pulley guide.
LOCK
LOCK
Guide OK
CJ-8S20
CJ-8S20
JAPAN
JAPAN
Guide not OK
19.1 Derailleur gears
This User Manual describes the handling of typical, commercially available gear-shift components for MTB, ATB,
cross and road bikes. Separate instructions are provided
for other components on the CD or on the web pages of the
relevant manufacturer in the Internet. If you have questions on installation, adjustment, maintenance and operation, please consult a specialist cycle shop.
If gear-shift components are loose, worn, damaged or
adjusted incorrectly, this poses a risk of injury to the
rider. Have the derailleur gears adjusted at a professional bike workshop.
•• Always contact your specialist cycle shop if the
chain jumps off the chainrings or sprockets when
riding or
•• you hear unusual noises or
•• you cannot change gears easily or
•• the rear derailleur, front derailleur or other
gear-shift components are loose, damaged or
distorted or
•• chain links are defective or worn.
30
I General User Manual
19.1.1 Operating the shifting lever
The bike chain must not be on the smallest chainring
at the front and the small outer rear sprocket wheel
simultaneously. The bike chain must not be on the
largest chainring at the front and large inner sprocket
wheel at the rear simultaneously. Otherwise the bike
chain could jump off.
19.1.1.1 Shifting lever on road bike
Shimano shifting lever
Lever b
from large to
small chainring
Never pedal backwards when changing gears as you
could damage the gear-shift mechanism.
Only make changes to the gear-shift system carefully
and in small increments. If settings are made incorrectly, the bike chain could jump off the sprocket
wheel and cause you to fall off the bike. If you are
unsure about what to do, have this work carried out
by a professional bike workshop.
Lever a
from small to
large chainring
Lever
a
Lever
Lever
a
Even if the gear system is perfectly adjusted, it can
produce noise if the chain is running at an extremely
sharp angle. This does not mean it is defective and
does not damage the drive. As soon as the chain is at
a more shallow angle, the noise will disappear.
b
Lever b
from large to
small chainring
Lever a
from small to
large chainring
Lever a: Shift to a larger chainring
Lever b: Shift to a smaller chainring
Once released, all levers revert to their initial position.
Never ride without a spoke protector. If a spoke protector is not installed, you must have one retrofitted.
Otherwise the bike chain or rear derailleur could land
in the gap between the sprocket and the spokes.
You should therefore select the lowest gear (largest
sprocket wheel) via the gear-shift handle for the rear
derailleur carefully as otherwise the rear derailleur
could collide with the spokes and damage them.
I General User Manual
31
Operating the rear derailleur shifting lever
Lever a: Shift to a larger sprocket.
Lever a engages in positions 1, 2 and 3.
Lever
a
When lever a is pressed, lever b moves with it. However, you should avoid putting any pressure on lever b
in doing so. The same applies for lever a when pressing lever b. The gear will not change if both levers are
operated at the same time.
3. Click-in position
Starting position of lever
a
2. Click-in position
Lever a: Shift to a larger chainring
1. Click-in position
1. Shifting up one gear to
next larger sprocket.
Example: shifting from
3rd to 4th gear
Lever
a
2. Shifting up two gears
to a larger sprocket.
Example: shifting from
3rd to 5th gear
Starting position
of lever a
Gear shift complete stroke
3. Shifting up three gears
to a larger sprocket.
Example: shifting from
3rd to 6th gear
Actual pull
If the lever movement does not effect a full changeover of chainring,
press the lever repeatedly by the amount (X') to move the lever the
remaining distance (X) and change gears.
Lever b: Shift to a smaller sprocket. Press lever b once to
change to the next sprocket down (smaller).
Lever
b
Operating the front derailleur lever (standard)
Lever
b
Starting position
of lever b
Gear shift complete
stroke
Starting position
of lever b
Click-in position
Click-in position
Lever b: Shift from intermediate chainring to smallest chainring
1. Shifting up one gear to
next smaller sprocket.
Example: shifting from
4th to 3rd gear
32
I General User Manual
When lever a is pressed, lever b moves with it. However,
you should avoid putting any pressure on lever b in doing
so. The same applies for lever a when pressing lever b.
The gear will not change if both levers are operated at the
same time.
Operating the front derailleur lever with trimming
(noise prevention), optional
Gear shifting operations
Lever a: Shift to a larger chainring
Lever
a
Starting position
of lever a
Gear shift complete stroke
Trimming (noise prevention)
Depending on the position of the chain after shifting, it
may rub against the outer chain guide plate or inner chain
guide plate of the front derailleur and produce noise. In
this case, lightly press lever a or lever b to move the front
derailleur until it is no longer in contact with the chain.
This procedure is known as "trimming". Trimming is possible if the chain is on the large, intermediate or small
chainring.
If you perform the trimming operation at one of the following positions, the noises will disappear completely.
Actual pull
If the lever movement does not effect a full changeover of chainring,
press the lever repeatedly by the amount (X') to move the lever the
remaining distance (X) and change gears.
Lever b: Shift from intermediate chainring to smallest
chainring
Lever
b
Starting position
of lever b
Gear shift complete
stroke
Click-in position
Click-in position
When lever b is operated, there is one click where trimming (the
noise prevention mechanism) enagages, and a second stronger click
when the gear shift stroke is completed. After trimming, the next
push will complete the gear shift stroke.
I General User Manual
33
CHAIN POSITION
large chainring
INDICATION
TRIMMING
LEVER OPERATION
FRONT DERAILLEUR MOVEMENT
Chain in contact with
outer chain guide plate
Lever a
Trimming
Outer
chain guide plate
before trimming
smaller
sprockets
after trimming
Front derailleur movement
Middle chainring
Smaller
sprockets
Small chainring
Click-in
position
Chain
(contact)
Smaller
sprockets
Large chainring
Chain in contact with inner chain guide plate
Lever b
Trimming
Inner
chain guide plate
before trimming
Larger
sprockets
Middle chainring
Larger
sprockets
Small chainring
Click-in
position
Chain
Larger
sprockets
34
after trimming
Front derailleur movement
I General User Manual
(contact)
SRAM shifting lever
Setting the swivel range
The range of the shifting and brake lever pivoting movement can be adjusted individually to suit the size of your
hand.
0°
X°
Click
XX°
Click
Click
Click
0
Rear shifting lever: To shift to a tougher (higher) gear,
press the small shifting lever gently inwards until you hear
or feel a click. To shift to an easier (lower) gear, press the
small shifting lever further inwards until you hear or feel
a second click. You can shift down by up to three gears at
once.
Front shifting lever: Press the small shifting lever inwards
as far as it will go to shift from the small chain wheel to
the large chain wheel. To shift from the large chain wheel
down to the small chain wheel, press the small shifting
lever in the centre until you hear or feel a distinctive click.
To prevent chain rubbing in extreme positions, the
shifting lever at the front has a trimming function for
the front derailleur. You can use this if the chain is on
the large chain wheel.
›› First, set the shifting lever range then adjust the
brake lever until the brake lever limit stop makes
contact with the shifting lever. This ensures that
the brake lever cannot strike the shifting lever
when it springs back.
›› To adjust the range of the shifting lever, push it
inwards to reach the range adjustment screw.
Push the adjustment screw inwards using a mandrel or your fingernail and turn it anticlockwise
to move the shifting lever closer to the handlebars.
19.1.1.2 Shifting lever on MTB, trekking and touring bike
Standard shifting lever
Both levers a and b always revert to the initial position
after they are pressed. The crank must always be turned
when a lever is pressed.
Operating the front derailleur shifting lever
Lever a
starting position
To shift the front derailleur to the trim position, press
the small shifting lever gently inwards until you hear
or feel a gentle click.
Shifting from a small to a large chainring
Press lever a once to move the chain from a small to a
larger chainring.
I General User Manual
35
Gear shift complete
stroke
Click-in position
Trimming operation
Click-in position
H b l (B)
Lever b
Lever b
Shifting from a large to a smaller chainring
Press lever b once to move the chain from a large to a
smaller chainring.
Operating the standard rear derailleur shifting lever
Lever a
starting position
1
When lever b is operated, there is one click where trimming (the noise prevention mechanism) engages, and a
second stronger click when the gear shift stroke is complete. The noise prevention mechanism no longer clicks
once the trimming operation is complete which means
that only the click-in positions will be heard when shifting
between sprockets.
2
Chain position
Front derailleur movement
Shifting from a small to a larger sprocket
To shift by one gear only, push lever a to position 1. To
shift by two gears, push the shifting lever to position 2.
You can shift a maximum of 3 gears using this method.
If the chain is on the large chainring and the large sprocket, the chain will rub the front derailleur producing a characteristic noise. When this happens, press lever b lightly
to the point where it clicks, this causes the front derailleur
to move slightly towards the smaller chainring, thereby
eliminating the noise.
Twist-grip shifters
To shift up or down one gear only, turn the twist-grip shifter by one increment forwards or backwards.
increasing
pedal force
reducing pedal
force
Abnehmende
Pedalkraft
Zunehmende
Pedalkraft
Lever b
Shifting from a large to a smaller sprocket
Push once to shift to a smaller sprocket.
Abnehmende
Zunehmende
Pedalkraft pedal force Pedalkraft
reducing
increasing pedal force
If you wish to shift up or down several gears at once, continue turning the shifting lever by the required number of
shift positions and in the required direction.
36
I General User Manual
Rear derailleur
The adjustment screw may also be on the shifting
lever or on the frame.
Have your specialist cycle shop carry out maintenance
on the derailleur gears, or replace or adjust them.
Adjustment screw
Precision adjustment / rear derailleur
B
Operate the shifting lever to shift the chain from the smallest sprocket to the second sprocket. Then take up the
slack in the shifting cable with the shifting lever and turn
the crank.
If the chain
jumps to the third
sprocket:
A
Cable housing adjustment screw
Optimum adjustment
Once the slack in the shifting cable
has been taken up by the shifting
lever, the chain should ideally rub
the third sprocket and produce a
noise.
Adjustment
screw
›› Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until the
chain moves back onto the second sprocket.
If noises cannot
be heard:
Adjustment
screw
›› Turn the screw anticlockwise until the chain rubs
against the third sprocket.
Release the shifting lever in second
gear and turn the crank.
If the chain rubs the third sprocket, turn the adjustment
screw clockwise slightly until the grinding noise stops.
To ensure problem-free SIS operation, you will need to
lubricate all power-transmitting parts.
If the chain is in the position shown, it could rub
against the chainrings or the front derailleur and
make a noise. If this is the case, you can shift the
chain onto the second or next largest sprocket.
Chainrings
Sprockets
I General User Manual
37
Cleaning
›› Whenever possible, avoid using cleaning agents on
the chain. If you use cleaning agents, such as rust
remover, this may wash lubricant out of the chain
which could lead to malfunctions.
›› The chainrings and sprockets should be cleaned
regularly using a neutral cleaning agent.
›› You should clean the derailleur and lubricate the
moving parts (mechanism and rollers) at regular
intervals.
19.2 Hub gears
This User Manual describes the handling of typical, commercially available gear-shift components of a gear hub on
a city or trekking bike. For other components, refer to the
separate information or enclosed instructions.
If you have questions on installation, adjustment, maintenance and operation, please consult a specialist cycle
shop.
The gears can be changed when the pedals are turning. Very occasionally, the hub may produce a harmless noise which is caused by its internal cogs and
stop notches.
If you encounter resistance when turning the wheel,
the brake pads will need to be replaced or the hub
will need to be lubricated. This should be done by a
professional bike workshop.
If the chain jumps off the the sprockets when you are
riding, the slack in the chain must be taken up immediately. If there is no further scope for adjustment, the
sprockets and chain must be replaced.
19.2.1 Operating the hub gears
19.2.1.1 Shimano 7/8-speed shift lever
›› Turn the twist-shift lever to select all 8 (7) gears.
If the hub is mounted on the frame, the correct fixing washers must be used on both sides and the hub
nuts must be tightened to the prescribed torque (see
➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
•• Increasing pedal force (increasing resistance)
➞ indicator towards 8 (7)
Display
Indicator
Revo-shift lever
If the fixing washers are used on one side only or the
hub nuts are tightened incorrectly, the hub may malfunction: It could rotate. This could cause the shifting
cable to pull the handlebar to one side and cause a
serious accident.
•• Decreasing pedal force (decreasing resistance)
➞ indicator towards 1
These instructions on operation of the Shimano twist-shift
grips also apply for other makes of twist-shift grips.
38
I General User Manual
19.2.2 A
djusting gears with Shimano hub
gears
Example shown is a 7/8-speed hub.
›› Select shift lever position 4.
›› Check whether the yellow marking lines on the
bracket and cassette joint pulley line up.
›› Turn the cable adjustment bolt on the shift lever to
align the marking lines. Next, set the Revo-shift
lever from position 4 to position 1 then back to
position 4. Check that the yellow marking lines still
line up.
Cable adjustment bolt
yellow marking lines
select position 4
JA
PA
LOCK
20
-8S
CJ N
Yellow marking lines appear at two points on the cassette
joint. Use the line which is most clearly visible.
Bike in normal position
line up markings
Cassette joint
pulley
LOCK
CJ-8S20
JAPAN
Bracket
Bike in inverted position
line up markings
Cassette joint
pulley
JAPAN
LOCK
CJ-8S20
Bracket
I General User Manual
39
20 Bike chain
There are two types of bike chain:
•• A wide bike chain (½ × 1 / 8") for hub gears and
•• A narrow bike chain for derailleur gears. These are
available in different widths, depending on how
may sprockets are on the cassette. Only use chains
that are approved for precisely the number of
sprocket wheels on your bike.
›› Clean and lubricate your bike chain regularly.
Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as otherwise screws could shear off and components could
come loose or detach altogether (see ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data").
20.1 Maintenance of bike chains
Bike chains are wear parts. Bike chains with hub gears
wear out after roughly 3000 km, and after roughly
2000 km with derailleur gears.
›› To prevent premature wear of the bike chain when
using derailleur gears, select gears that keep the
chain skew as marginal as possible.
To check the wear in the bike chain, proceed as follows:
›› Take the section of the chain that rests on the front
chainring between your thumb and forefinger.
›› Pull the bike chain off the chainring. If the bike
chain can be lifted by a significant amount, it is
worn and must be replaced by a new one.
›› With hub gears, the chain tension must be adjusted
so that vertical play of one to two centimetres is
present in the unsupported chain span between the
chainring and sprocket wheel.
To take up the slack in the bike chain, proceed as follows:
›› Loosen the rear wheel nuts.
›› Pull the wheel back into the dropouts until only the
permissible amount of play is present in the bike
chain.
›› Tighten all screw connections carefully clockwise.
40
I General User Manual
If the bike chain is worn, it can break and cause a
crash. If your bike chain is worn, have it replaced by
your specialist cycle shop before using the bike again.
21 B
rake, brake levers and brake
systems
This User Manual describes the maintenance and handling
of typical, commercially available brake components for
MTB, ATB, cross and road bikes. For other components,
refer to the separate information or enclosed instructions.
If you have questions on installation, adjustment, maintenance and operation, please consult a specialist cycle
shop.
21.1
I mportant information and
precautionary measures
"Bicycles must be equipped with 2 brakes that operate independently of one another."
Paragraph 65 of the German Road Traffic Licensing
Regulation (StVZO), similar rules apply in all other EU
countries.
Have maintenance work on the brakes carried out by a
professional bike workshop.
Do not allow fluids containing oils to come into contact with the brake pads, brake contact surfaces on
the rim, brake blocks or brake disc as this could otherwise impair the effectiveness of the brake.
Rubber brake blocks and brake pads must not come into
contact with oil or grease. If the rubber brake blocks and
brake pads come into contact with oil or grease, this drastically reduces their braking performance and they must
be replaced.
Tighten all screws to the prescribed torque as otherwise screws could shear off and components could
come loose or detach altogether (see ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data").
Brake cables are wear parts. You should check the
wear condition of the brake cables regularly and replace these if necessary.
Check the brake cable for rust and fraying and replace
the cable if it is faulty. If you do not, the brakes could
malfunction.
There are different types of brakes, the type of brake depends on what it is used for:
•• hub brakes,
•• disc brakes and
•• rim brakes.
The brakes can be operated mechanically or hydraulically.
Brake blocks and brake pads are wear parts. Check the
wear condition of these parts regularly. This can be identified by a marking. On the brake block, for example, the
grooves will no longer be visible. Always replace both
brake blocks at the same time.
Use genuine spare parts only as otherwise you could impair the functions of the bike or damage it.
To obtain correct friction pairing, only use brake pads that
are suitable for the rim as otherwise the braking distance
would be extended and wear increased. With carbon rims
in particular, only brake pads that are expressly intended
for this purpose should be used.
With hub gears, the brake lever that operates the front
wheel brake is normally on the right-hand side, and
with derailleur gears it is on the left. Remind yourself
of the position of the brake lever before you ride off.
If you wish to attach the brake lever on the opposite
side of the handlebar, follow the manufacturer's user
manual or ask your specialist cycle shop to do this.
I General User Manual
41
21.2 Brake lever
21.3.1 Drum and roller brakes
21.2.1 Standard brake lever
The bike is equipped as standard with a suitable brake
lever. Check regularly that when you operate the brake
lever it does not reach the handlebar and make contact
with it. With the brake lever pulled, push the bike forward
and check whether the braking performance is sufficient.
If the bike rolls slightly forwards, you will need to have
the brake cable readjusted or the brake pads replaced.
The brake lever of roller and drum brakes requires
special tuning.
Brake cable adjustment screw
Lever pull range
adjustment screw
With the roller brake or drum brake, the braking force is
transmitted via a cable from the hand brake lever to the
brake system. If applied continuously for an extended
period, roller brakes or drum brakes become very hot.
This reduces the braking performance and can result in
complete failure of the brake. You should adapt your handling accordingly.
Fastening screw
21.3 Hub brakes
Hub brakes are virtually maintenance-free as the brake
block is inside the hub.
›› Check regularly that the screws on the brake lever
are tight.
›› Turn them clockwise to retighten if necessary. For
the correct tightening torque, refer to ➠ Chapter 30
"Technical data".
›› Pull on the front wheel or rear wheel hand brake
lever with the same amount of force as you would
apply when braking sharply during a ride. Then
push the bike forwards. The rear wheel should lock.
The front wheel should decelerate so rapidly that
the bike starts to tip forwards.
›› Lubricate the cable-pull regularly.
If applied continuously for an extended period, hub
brakes become very hot. This reduces the braking
performance and ultimately complete failure of the
brake. You should adapt your handling accordingly.
Brake pads are wear parts. Have the brake pads for
back-pedal, roller and drum brakes checked regularly,
and replaced if necessary, by a professional bike
workshop.
If you have not used your bike for a while, there may
be surface rust in the brake drum which can increase
the braking force. You should therefore brake gently
several times when riding off to remove the surface
rust. This prevents sudden blocking of the brake.
42
I General User Manual
21.3.2 Back-pedal brake
Avoid operating the back-pedal brake continuously on
long descents as the internal components of the brake
system can become extremely hot which reduces braking performance. On long steep descents, always alternate between the rear wheel brake and the second
brake (front wheel brake) to allow the rear wheel
brake to cool down. As the brake drum can become
extremely hot when braking for prolonged periods,
you should not touch it for at least 30 minutes after
riding.
Brake drum
With back-pedal brakes the braking force is transmitted
by the foot via the chain to the brake system. If applied
continuously for an extended period, back-pedal brakes
become very hot. This reduces the braking performance
and can result in complete failure of the brake. You should
adapt your handling accordingly.
The back-pedal brake is operated by pedalling backwards. The force applied by the back-pedal brake
varies depending on the position of your feet/pedals.
If the crank arms are vertical, i.e. one of your feet is
in the highest position and the other is in the lowest
position, you cannot brake hard. Move the crank arms
into a horizontal position if you think you may want/
have to brake.
The back-pedal brake is easy to apply in a controlled
manner. The maximum braking performance is only
reached after a certain run-in period.
Operate the back-pedal brake carefully to familiarise
yourself with it and get a feel for its retarding effect.
If you have not used your bike for a while, there may
be surface rust in the brake drum which can increase
the braking force. If you have not used your bike for
some time, you should brake gently several times
when riding off to remove the surface rust. This prevents sudden blocking of the brake.
If excessive overheating of the hub occurs, this can
lead to loss of lubricant and a sharper braking effect.
In these cases, have the brake checked by a professional bike workshop.
I General User Manual
43
21.4 Rim brakes
21.4.2 A
djusting the brake-pad clearance in
relation to the rim
Turn the cable adjustment bolt to adjust the clearance
between the brake pad and the rim. Turn the bolt inwards
(clockwise) to increase the brake-pad clearance. Turn the
bolt outwards (anticlockwise) to reduce the brake-pad
clearance. The clearance between the brake blocks and
rim should be roughly 1 mm.
V-brakes produce an extremely high braking force.
You should therefore familiarise yourself with the
V-brake and only apply the brake gradually. Practise
emergency braking until you are sure you will be able
to remain fully in control of your bike if you have to
apply the brakes with force.
Adjusting the cable-pull
Cable adjustment bolt
If additional suspension elements in the brake system
(power modulators) are used improperly, this can lead
to serious accidents. The required spring strength of the
power modulator depends on the gross weight of the bike.
If the brake blocks are so worn that you can no longer see
notches, have them replaced by a professional bike workshop.
With V-brakes
2
21.4.1 Readjusting the brake
Cable adjustment bolt
The brakes on your bike are set correctly at the factory or
by your cycle dealer. The gap between the brake block and
the rim is roughly 1 – 1.5 mm. However, as the brake blocks
wear down the gap steadily increases and the brake lever
must travel a greater distance to achieve the same braking
effect. You should therefore inspect the brake at regular
intervals and adjust it if the brake lever travel distance is
too great or the brake is not working properly.
Check the brake as follows:
›› Pull the front wheel and then the rear wheel hand
brake lever with the same amount of force as you
would apply when braking sharply during a ride.
Then push the bike forwards.
2
1
With side pull brakes
2
1
›› The rear wheel should lock and
›› the front wheel should decelerate so rapidly that
the bike starts to tip forwards.
2
2
1
44
I General User Manual
1
1
21.4.3 Wear of brake pad
Most brake pads for rim brakes come with grooves or
notches.
If required, you can readjust the rebound force via the
spring adjustment screw so that both brake arms move
symmetrically. Once you have done this, check that the
brake is working properly (see ➠ Chapter 21.4.1 "Readjusting the brake").
If the brake is still not working properly, or the brake
pad is so worn that it is not possible to readjust it,
have your bike checked at a professional bike workshop and replace the brake block.
New brake pad
If these grooves are worn and can no longer be seen, this
is normally a sign that the brake pad is worn.
21.5 Disc brakes
Worn brake pad
Disc brake
Do not ride your bike if the brake pads are worn.
Have them replaced by a professional bike workshop
instead.
2
Have your disc brakes adjusted by a specialist cycle
shop. If this is done incorrectly, an accident may occur.
1
2
2
1
1
1 mm
Spring adjustment
screw
With this brake type, the brake discs are on the hub and
the brake calliper is on the frame or fork.
1 mm
Spring adjustment
screw
Once the brakes have been adjusted, always perform a
brake test by pushing the bike quickly forwards and operating the brake lever. You should only use your bike if you
can safely stop it using the brakes.
Disc brakes require a brake lead time during which the
braking force increases. Bear this in mind throughout the
entire brake lead time. The same effect also occurs after
replacing the brake block or disc.
I General User Manual
45
If you hear unusual noises when braking, the brake blocks
may have reached their wear limit. Allow the brakes to
cool down then check the brake block depth. Have the
brake blocks replaced if necessary.
If the brake disc is worn, cracked or bent it must be replaced. Have this work carried out by a professional bike
workshop.
If the depth of the brake blocks is less than 0.5 mm, they
must be replaced.
> 0.5 mm
0.5 mm
When installing, removing and carrying out maintenance on the wheel, do not touch the brake disc with
your fingers when it is turning. You could be seriously
injured if you catch your fingers in the cutouts of the
brake disc.
The brake calliper and the disc can become extremely
hot when braking. You should therefore not touch
these parts when riding the bike or immediately after
dismounting as you could burn yourself. Before adjusting the brakes, check that the parts have cooled
down sufficiently.
21.5.1 Hydraulic disc brake
The hand brake lever of the hydraulic disc brake is
equipped with a master cylinder. The hydraulic fluid is
fed through a tube to the brake cylinders. This actuates
the brake pistons which push the brake blocks against the
brake disc. This type of brake requires little maintenance
and can be very powerful.
Once the brakes have been adjusted, always perform
a brake test by pushing the bike quickly forwards and
operating the brake lever. You should only use your
bike if you can safely stop it using the brakes.
You must only fit a disc brake on your bike providing
suitable mounting devices are installed on the frame
and the bike fork. If in doubt, consult a specialist
cycle shop.
If the brake blocks come into contact with oil or grease,
they must be replaced. If the brake disc comes into contact with oil or grease, it must be cleaned as otherwise its
braking performance will be drastically reduced.
Check whether the quick-release lever for the wheel is
on the side opposite the brake disc. If the quick-release
lever is on the same side as the brake disc, there is a
danger you could burn yourself when operating the lever.
The heat in the brake disc could also reduce the clamping
force of the quick-release device.
46
I General User Manual
Check regularly, also before each journey, that the lines
and connections are tight. If lines and connections are not
tight, brake fluid may escape from the brake system. The
brake may not work properly as a result.
If fluid escapes from the braking system, do not use the
bike and have the necessary repair work carried out immediately by a professional bike workshop.
If you continue riding the bike in this condition, the risk
of brake failure is extremely likely.
If the brake blocks come into contact with oil or grease,
they must be replaced. If the brake disc comes into contact with oil or grease, it must be cleaned as otherwise its
braking performance will be drastically reduced.
21.5.2 Vapour bubble formation
›› Vapour bubble formation can occur if the brakes
are operated continuously for some time, e. g. during a long steep descent.
Instead of applying gentle pressure continuously
with the brakes, operate them for shorter periods,
with more force if necessary, releasing the brake
lever intermittently.
›› Vapour bubbles form if water in the brake fluid
heats up, evaporates and forms bubbles in the
brake system.
As these are easily compressed, the brake lever travel
distance increases.
When transporting or storing the bike upside down,
air bubbles can form in the brake system fluid reservoir.
If you then use the bike, the brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident.
Once the bike is in the correct riding position, pull the
brake lever several times to check whether the brakes
respond normally.
If not, adjust them as follows:
›› Adjust the brake lever so it is parallel to the ground
and operate it slowly several times so the bubbles
return to the reservoir.
›› If the response is still poor, the brake system must
be vented. Have this work carried out by a specialist cycle shop.
Brake pads and brake blocks are wear parts. Have the
brake pads of hydraulic disc brakes checked regularly,
and replaced if necessary, by a professional bike
workshop.
21.5.3 Cleaning the brake system
If the brake blocks come into contact with oil or grease,
they must be replaced. If the brake disc comes into contact with oil or grease, it must be cleaned as otherwise its
braking performance will be drastically reduced.
›› Clean and maintain the brake system using isopropyl alcohol, soapy water or a dry cloth. Do not use
commercially available brake cleaning agents or
agents to prevent braking noises as these can damage components such as the seals.
21.5.4 Fitting/removing the wheel
›› When removing the wheel, we recommend you
use a brake block spacer. This prevents the piston
from being pushed out if the brake lever is operated once the wheel has been removed. This also
prevents air bubbles in the expansion vessel from
entering the system.
›› If the brake lever is operated and the brake block
spacer is not inserted, the pistons may extend further than normal. Put the bike in an upright position to push back the brake blocks. Use a clean,
flat screw driver or tyre lever and be careful not to
scratch the brake blocks. If the brake blocks are
not fitted, push the piston back carefully without
damaging it. If you have trouble pushing back the
brake blocks or piston, remove the reservoir cap
and try again. Note that some oil may flow out the
reservoir.
›› After fitting the wheel, check that the quick-release
lever is on the side opposite the brake disc. If it
is on the same side as the brake disc, there is a
danger of the lever and brake disc obstructing one
another and this could also reduce the clamping
force of the quick-release device.
I General User Manual
47
22 Lighting system
22.3 Generator / dynamo
The dynamo produces the energy required to operate the
front and rear lights. There are different types of dynamos.
In some EU countries, only lighting systems that are
prescribed by national legislation (the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example)
and have been approved for use may be installed on
bikes. If in doubt, ask your specialist cycle shop.
22.3.1 Sidewall dynamo
22.1 Specifications for lighting system
•• At a distance of five metres, the cone of light
thrown by the front light must be at half the height
of its exit point. The centre of the cone of light
determines its height.
5m
e. g. 1 m
0.5 m
Sidewall dynamo
The dynamo must be positioned so its longitudinal axis
is perpendicular to the wheel axle. The roller must be in
contact with the designated traction surface on the tyre
across its entire width.
Aligning the front light
•• The cone of light thrown by the front light must
only light the road for ten metres at the most. The
centre of the cone of light determines its distance.
22.2 Special regulations for road bikes
•• You can fit battery-operated front lights and rear
lights to sports bikes with a maximum weight
of 11 kg (road bike). Please familiarise yourself
with the applicable regulations and, if applicable, have the bike refitted.
•• Always carry these with you.
•• Dynamo-operated lighting systems must be used
with bikes that weight more than 11 kg. The lighting system must come with an official test mark.
Please familiarise yourself with the applicable
regulations and, if applicable, have the bike refitted.
48
I General User Manual
Only switch the dynamo on and off when the bike is
stationary as otherwise you could put yourself and
other road users in danger. The sidewall dynamo is
less effective in wet conditions. Provide additional
lighting if necessary.
22.3.1.1 Switching the sidewall dynamo on and off
›› Switch the dynamo on/off via the pushbutton or
the lever. The traction roller is now on the tyre
sidewall.
›› To switch the dynamo off, pull it away from the tyre
and guide it into its starting position. The dynamo
engages in the starting position.
22.3.2 Hub dynamo
22.4 Failure of the lighting system
The hub dynamo is inside the hub of the front wheel. The
hub dynamo is highly efficient, and the wear is extremely
low.
If the lighting system fails or develops a fault when
riding in the dark this could cause a serious accident.
Have the fault repaired at a professional bike workshop before you continue your journey.
Hub dynamo
Extremely powerful (rechargeable) battery-operated bicycle and outdoor lights are available from some retail outlets. With some exceptions, use of these lights on public
roads is not permitted.
There is a switch or a sensor on the back of the front light
on some bikes with a hub dynamo. The sensor switches
the light on automatically in the twilight or when passing
through a tunnel. Other models have a switch on the handlebar that switches the lighting on and off.
If you want to remove the front wheel, you first need
to remove the connecting terminal for the light cable.
When you put the front wheel back on, turn it so that
the connecting terminal for the light cable is on the
right-hand side (facing in the direction of travel). If
the connecting terminal is on the left, the dynamo will
not be able to turn properly or the lighting system
may stop working. Ensure correct polarity of the connections.
I General User Manual
49
23 Add-on components
23.1.1 Front pannier rack
23.1 Pannier rack
The pannier racks on the bike satisfy the standard
EN 14873.
The load-carrying capacity of the pannier rack falls into
one of four possible categories: 5 kg, 10 kg, 18 kg and
25 kg.
The information on load-carrying capacity is embossed on
the pannier rack.
The maximum load it can handle may be higher, depending on its design. This is stated separately.
If you carry luggage, this changes the ride characteristics of your bike. It increases the braking distance
for one thing. This can lead to serious accidents.
Adapt your handling to the different ride characteristics. Apply the brakes in good time and bear in mind
that the bike's steering response will be more sluggish.
Only carry luggage on the pannier rack provided for
this purpose. Do not attach carriers to the seatpost.
It is not designed for this purpose. Overloading by a
carrier can lead to component breakages and serious
accidents.
If you carry luggage on your bike, it is extremely important that you do not exceed the maximum permissible
loading (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
If you fit another carrier, it must comply with standard EN
14873.
The maximum permissible load must be stated on the carrier (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data").
Front pannier rack
Front pannier racks are attached to the front axle or the
front fork. They are designed to carry smaller loads than
rear pannier racks. If you carry luggage on this pannier
rack, you must familiarise yourself with the changed
steering response.
Only use suitable pannier bags.
Consult a specialised dealer.
23.1.2 Rear pannier rack
Rear pannier rack
This type of luggage carrier attaches to the rear triangle of
the bike.
If you attach a rear pannier rack to a full-suspension
frame, the proportion of unsprung weight increases
which changes the suspension behaviour. You will
therefore have to readjust your suspension / damping
accordingly.
50
I General User Manual
If you notice that a wheel guard is damaged, always replace it before using the bike again.
If you carry pannier bags or other loads on the pannier racks, make sure they are securely attached.
Make sure that nothing can become caught in the
spokes and the turning wheels.
23.2.1 R
e-engaging the safety-release
mechanism
Only fit child seats to rear pannier racks if suitable
fixtures are provided. In doing so, be careful not to
exceed the permissible weight category.
Safety mechanism released Safety mechanism engaged
A plastic clip is attached to the end of the strut.
23.2 Wheel guards / mudguards
Additional struts are mounted to hold the mudguards in
the correct position. The strut is at its ideal length if the
inner edge of the wheel guard runs more or less concentrically and parallel to the tyre.
The wheel guard cannot detach when you are riding
normally. If a foreign object lodges between the front
wheel guard and the tyre and blocks it, the mudguard
struts immediately detach from their mountings on
the fork. This allows the mudguard to deflect and the
wheel will not block.
›› Insert this clip on the strut into the easy-clip
mount on the fork until it engages.
›› Align the wheel guard so that the tyre and front
wheel guard do not touch.
To securely reattach the safety-release mechanism,
you may need to push the strut and plastic mount
slightly together by pressing hard.
If this happens, the struts must be securely reattached. Have a specialist cycle shop check that the
mudguard, struts and plastic mounts are still in a
serviceable condition.
Never ride with the strut detached, it must be reattached. If this is not possible, have the strut replaced
by a professional bike workshop.
Check regularly that the struts are securely fastened in the
safety-release mechanisms.
I General User Manual
51
24 Accessories and equipment
Always install enclosed accessories according to
the instructions. Use the correct tightening torques
for screw connections (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical
data").
›› Only use accessory parts that meet the requirements of the national road traffic licensing
regulations (these are the Road Traffic Licensing
Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example).
›› Non-approved accessory parts are not safe for
use in traffic and can cause accidents. All accessories or add-on components must be compatible
with your bike
›› Never attach the child seat to the bike handlebars directly as it will not be possible to steer
the bike safely.
›› Do not use a suspension saddle if you are carrying a child in a child seat behind the saddle.
The child's fingers could be crushed. The coil
springs under the seat must always be completely wrapped or covered in such a way that
it is impossible to insert fingers into the coils of
the springs.
›› Always strap the child into the child seat as otherwise it could fall out and be severely injured.
›› Make sure that children wear a snug fitting bicycle helmet as otherwise a severe head injury may
result in the event of a crash.
›› Otherwise accidents could occur or the bike
could be damaged. Ask your specialist cycle shop
for advice.
24.1 Child seat
You can carry a child up to the age of seven years on
the child seat. The rider must be at least 16 years old
in Germany.
When using a child seat, this adversely affects the
handling of the bike. The additional weight can cause
the bike to sway and significantly increases the braking distance. Adapt your handling accordingly.
Not all bikes equipped with a suspension system are suitable for transporting child seats
A child seat must not be mounted on a carbon frame
as this could damage the frame.
›› Only use child seats that satisfy the standard
EN 14344.
›› These child seats must safely support the child's
feet.
›› Never leave your child sitting unattended in the
child seat when you park your bike. The bike
could fall over and severely injure the child.
52
I General User Manual
Check the mounting options or consult your specialist
cycle shop. If the child seat is mounted incorrectly, a serious accident may occur.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight of
the bike and the maximum load-carrying capacity of the
pannier rack (see ➠ Chapter 30 "Technical data"). If you
do, this could damage the pannier rack and frame and
cause a serious accident.
24.2 Bike stand
›› Never leave your child sitting unattended in the
child seat when you park your bike. The bike
could fall over and severely injure the child.
›› Never ride with the stand folded out.
24.3 Bike trailer
24.4 Bike basket
The fixing for the basket must not damage the handlebar or handlebar stem.
›› Attach the basket so as not to cover the front
light and front reflector.
›› In doing so, be careful not to bend the brake and
shifting cables.
›› Do not carry more than five kilogrammes of luggage in the basket.
›› Bear in mind that the steering characteristics
change when you use a basket.
Not all bikes are suitable for trailers. Ask your specialist cycle shop if your bike is designed and suitable for
this.
24.5 Bar ends
›› Only use trailers that meet the requirements
of the road traffic licensing regulations in your
country (the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations
(StVZO) in Germany for example). Non-approved
trailers can cause accidents.
›› Trailers adversely affect the handling. Adapt your
handling accordingly as otherwise the bike trailer may tip up or detach and cause an accident.
›› Practise starting off, braking, cornering and riding on hills with an unladen trailer.
›› Bear in mind that the gross weight of the bike
also includes the trailer.
Always attach bar ends securely to the handlebars as
otherwise you could have an accident.
›› A bike trailer may increase the braking distance
considerably. Failure to observe these points
could result in an accident.
If a thin-walled handlebar is fitted to your bike, you
may require additional accessory parts to protect the
handlebar from damage. Read the manufacturer's
instructions for use carefully.
If a carbon handlebar is fitted to your bike, find out
from your specialist cycle shop whether this handlebar is approved for use with bar ends.
I General User Manual
53
25 B
ike carriers for mounting on
roof and rear of car
›› Only use roof and rear-mounted bike carriers
that meet the requirements of the road traffic
licensing regulations in your country (the Road
Traffic Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany
for example). Non-approved roof and rear-mounted bike carriers are not safe for use in traffic and
can cause accidents.
›› Adjust your driving to take the load on your car
roof into account. Bear in mind that your car's
overall height has changed.
The bike could come off the carrier and cause a serious accident. When transporting the bike, check regularly that it is still securely fastened.
Loose parts such as tools, luggage and tool kits, child
seats, tyre pump, etc. could detach in transit and endanger other road users. Remove all loose parts from
the bike before setting off.
›› Avoid transporting the bike upside down. Only
attach the bike by the handlebar, handlebar
stem, bike saddle or seatpost if so intended
by the manufacturer of the carrier. Do not use
mountings that could damage the bike fork or
frame.
›› Do not attach your bike to the roof or rear-mounted carrier by its pedal cranks. Always attach
bikes by their wheels when transporting them,
unless the carrier is designed for something else,
as otherwise the frame and fork of the bike could
be damaged.
You can also find important information on using and
fitting add-on components and accessories in the
Internet on the pages of the relevant manufacturer.
➠ Chapter 29 contains a link list.
54
I General User Manual
26 Carbon components
Carbon is a specific material that requires special handling and care when setting up and carrying out maintenance on the bike as well as when riding and also during
transportation and storage.
26.1 Properties
Carbon parts must not be deformed, dented or bent
following an accident or crash. It is possible that fibres have been destroyed or have detached although
this is not evident externally.
You should therefore inspect the carbon frame and all
other carbon components very carefully if you come off the
bike or if it falls over. If you are not absolutely sure that
the bike is still in a sound condition, have the carbon components in question checked by an expert.
26.2 Torques
Some carbon components require lower tightening
torques than metal components. If the tightening
torques are too high, this can lead to hidden damage
that may not be visible externally. Frames or other
components can break or change to the extent that
they could fall off. You should therefore always observe the information enclosed by the manufacturer
with the component(s) or ask a specialist dealer for
advice. Use a torque wrench to ensure the right tightness is maintained.
If your bike has a carbon frame and a bottom bracket
housing for a BB30 bottom bracket please note the
following:
In this case you can fit an adapter so that a bottom
bracket with conventional BSA thread can be used.
However, bear in mind
•• You can only install the adapter if the frame is
completely undamaged. Repairing a defective
BB30 housing serves no purpose. If it is not
installed correctly, the bottom bracket housing
may be damaged which would render the war-
ranty void. This kind of adapter should only be
fitted by a specialist cycle shop.
•• Once the adapter has been fitted in the carbon
frame it cannot be removed.
26.3 Visual inspection
If your carbon component has pre-existing damage,
it could suddenly fail completely with potentially disastrous consequences. You should therefore inspect
your carbon frame and components thoroughly on a
regular basis.
›› Look for splitting, deep scratches, holes or other
changes in the carbon surface.
›› Check whether the components feel softer or
have more give in them than usual.
›› Check whether individual layers (paint, finish or
fibres) are flaking off.
If you suspect a component is no longer sound, you
should definitely replace it before riding your bike
again. You should ideally hand over your bike to a
specialist dealer for inspection.
Inspect the following components and areas regularly (at
least every 100 km) for cracks, fractures or changes in
surface appearance. Furthermore, if you come off the bike
or if it falls over, these components must always subsequently be inspected:
26.4 Carbon frame
Front derailleur clamp area, derailleur hanger, saddle
clamp, headset spacers, bottom bracket spacers, brake
boss or disc brake mount, dropout slots, suspension
mounts on main frame and rear triangle, bearing mounts
with full-suspension frame, transition areas around
threaded bushes for drinking bottles
Mounting of a child seat to a carbon frame is not permitted. There is a danger of the frame breaking with
serious consequences.
26.5 Carbon handlebar
Transition area at handlebar stem, handles, clamping areas of other components
If your bike falls on its handlebar, the best thing you
can do is replace it. Always have bar ends retrofitted
by your specialist cycle shop.
26.6 Carbon handlebar stem
Clamping area of all screws, head tube inside and outside
If you have changed the handlebar position, bear in
mind that the stem must extensively enclose the head
tube.
I General User Manual
55
26.7 Carbon wheels
Surface wear, change of surface, e. g. due to heat produced when braking, abrasion of brake blocks, wheel hub
or their flanks
ment of pannier racks, trailers and other fixtures are not
permitted due to the risk of breakage.
26.10 Splinters
If you are using a bike with carbon rims, bear in mind that
the braking behaviour of this material is much poorer than
aluminium rims.
Note that only approved brake blocks may be used.
26.8 Carbon fork
Fork blades on fork head, dropouts and clamping area of
quick-release device, fork head below fork cone, clamping
area of A-head stem on inside and outside
If you have changed the handlebar position, bear in
mind that the stem must extensively enclose the carbon section.
26.9 Carbon seatpost
Transition area between seatpost and seat tube, transition
area at head of seatpost, contact area of all screws
If other carbon parts are installed on your bike, inspect
them regularly for cracks, fractures or changes in surface
appearance.
Retapping of the thread and bearing shells and reaming of the seat tube is not permitted.
As a basic rule, if a fixture is not already provided on a
carbon frame or component for an object (e.g. threaded
inserts for bottle cage), it must not be fitted. The attach-
56
I General User Manual
Carbon fibres are extremely thin and hard. You should
therefore handle damaged carbon parts very carefully.
Individual fibres may detach and stick out. If these
projecting fibres come into contact with your skin,
there is a danger of them splintering off and causing
an injury.
26.11 Fastening in mounting stand
Only clamp your carbon frame at the seatpost when
fastening your carbon frame in a mounting stand, as
otherwise the clamping mechanism may cause visible or
concealed damage to the frame. If your bike has a carbon
seatpost, we recommend you replace it provisionally with
an aluminium or steel seatpost when carrying out this
work.
26.12 Transportation by car
When transporting the bike on the roof rack or on a towbar cycle carrier, never attach it by its frame. Always attach the bike at the seatpost, and never at the down tube,
top tube, seat tube, fork blades, steering tube, chain stay,
cranks or seat stay.
The clamping mechanism could cause visible or concealed
damage to the frame that may affect your safety. If your
bike has a carbon seatpost, we recommend you replace it
provisionally with an aluminium or steel seatpost when
transporting it.
27 Care and maintenance of the bike
›› Have defective parts replaced before you ride the
bike again.
27.1
›› Touch up damaged paintwork.
Care
Do not allow care products or oils to come into contact with brake pads, brake discs and the rim's brake
contact surfaces. This could reduce the effectiveness
of the brake.
Treat all parts that are susceptible to corrosion more
frequently than other parts with preservatives and care
products, especially during the winter and in aggressive
environments such as coastal regions as otherwise your
bike will corrode (rust) more powerfully and quickly.
›› Clean all galvanised and chrome-plated parts as
well as stainless-steel components regularly.
›› Preserve these parts after cleaning with spray wax.
Make sure that wax does not come into contact
with brake discs and rims.
Do not use a powerful water jet or high-pressure
cleaner. If water under under high pressure is directed at the bike, it can enter the bearings. This can dilute the lubricant which increases friction. This leads
to rusting and irrepairable damage to the bearings.
Do not clean your bike with
•• acids,
•• grease,
›› If you stop using your bike for a while, in the winter for example, store it in a dry place at a constant
temperature.
›› Before putting your bike into storage, inflate both
tyres to the prescribed tyre pressure.
To find out more important information on looking after
your bike, visit the Internet pages of the relevant component manufacturer. The link list in ➠ Chapter 29 provides
an overview with links.
•• hot oil,
•• brake cleaners (apart from brake discs) or
•• fluids containing solvents.
These substances attack the surface of the bike and
accelerate wear.
Dispose of used lubricants, cleaning agents and care
products in an environmentally sound manner. Do not
pour these substances into the domestic waste, down
the drain or into natural water bodies or the soil.
How well the bike works and how long it lasts depends on how well you look after it.
27.2
Wear parts
Your bike is a technical product that must be regularly
checked.
Many parts on your bike are subject to a higher degree of
wear due to their function and depending on their use.
Have your bike checked regularly at a professional
bike workshop and have the wear parts replaced.
›› Clean your bike regularly using hot water, a small
amount of cleaning agent and a sponge.
›› You should also always take this opportunity
to check your bike for cracks, dents or material
deformation.
I General User Manual
57
27.3
Tyres
Due to their function, bike tyres are subject to wear. This
depends on how the bike is used and the rider can influence this significantly.
›› Do not brake so sharply that the wheels lock.
›› Check the tyre pressure regularly. The maximum
permissible tyre pressure, and normally also the
minimum permissible pressure, can be found on
the tyre wall.
›› If necessary, inflate the tyre up to the specified
value. This reduces wear.
›› Do not expose the tyres to things that can damage
them such as sunlight, petrol, oil, etc.
27.4 Rims in conjunction with rim brakes
Owing to the interaction of the rim brake with the rim, not
only the brake pad but also the rim is subject to functionrelated wear. If fine cracks appear or the rim flanges
deform when the tyre pressure increases, this indicates
increased wear. Wear indicators on the rim allow its wear
condition to be easily identified.
›› Check the wear condition of the rim at regular intervals (see ➠ Chapter 16.3 "Checking the rims").
27.5
Brake pads
The brake pads on rim, roller, drum and disc brakes are
subject to wear, the extent of which depends on how the
bike is used. If the bike is ridden in hilly regions, or used
in a sporty manner, the brake pads may need to be replaced more often. Check the wear condition of the pads
regularly and, if necessary, have them replaced by a professional bike workshop.
27.6 Brake discs
Brake discs also wear out as a result of intensive braking,
or during the course of time. Find out from the manufacturer of your brakes or your specialist cycle shop about
the respective wear limits. You can have worn brake discs
replaced at a professional bike workshop.
27.7
Bike chains or toothed belts
The bike chain is subject to function-related wear the extent of which depends on care/maintenance and how the
bike is used (mileage, rain, dirt, salt, etc.).
›› To increase the service life of the bike, clean the
bike chains and toothed belts regularly and lubricate the chain.
›› Have the chain replaced by a professional bike
workshop once its wear limit has been reached
(see ➠ Chapter 20 "Bike chain").
27.8 C
hainrings, sprocket wheels and
jockey wheels
In bikes with derailleur gears, the sprocket wheels, chainrings and jockey wheels are subject to function-related
wear. The extent of the wear depends on care/maintenance and how the bike is used (mileage, rain, dirt, salt,
etc.).
›› To increase the service life of the bike, you should
clean and lubricate these parts regularly.
›› Have them replaced by a professional bike workshop once their wear limit has been reached.
27.9 Lamps of lighting set
Bulbs and other lamps are subject to function-related wear
and therefore may need to be replaced.
›› In case you need to replace damaged bulbs, always
carry spare ones with you.
58
I General User Manual
27.10 Handlebar tapes and handle grips
Handlebar tapes and handle grips are subject to functionrelated wear and therefore may need to be replaced.
›› Check regularly that the handles are securely
seated.
27.11 Hydraulic oils and lubricants
The effectiveness of hydraulic oils and lubricants decreases over time. If lubricants are not replaced, this increases
the wear of the relevant components and bearings.
›› Clean and relubricate all relevant components and
bearings regularly.
›› Have the brake fluid for disc brakes checked regularly, and replaced if necessary.
27.12 Gear-shift and brake cables
27.15 S
liding bearings and bearings for
full-suspension frames, suspension
forks or other suspension elements
The suspension components on the bike, particularly the
sliding bearings, bearings and suspension elements, must
cope with very high stresses compared to the other bearings. They are therefore subject to a high degree of wear.
›› Check these parts regularly and thoroughly.
›› Observe the enclosed user manual from the
manufacturer.
›› Your specialist cycle shop can advise on how to
look after these sensitive components, and also on
how to replace them if necessary.
To find out more important information on maintenance of
wear parts, visit the Internet pages of the relevant component manufacturer. The link list in ➠ Chapter 29 provides
an overview with links.
›› Carry out regular maintenance on all Bowden
cables.
›› Have defective parts replaced at a professional
bike workshop. This may be necessary especially if
the bike is often left outdoors and is exposed to the
effects of the weather.
27.13 Paint finishes
Paint finishes require regular care, this also ensures that
your bike looks good.
›› Check all painted surfaces regularly for damage
and touch up immediately if required.
›› Consult your specialist cycle shop for advice on
how to care for your bike's surface finishes.
27.14 Bearings
All bearings on the bike, such as the headset, wheel hubs,
pedals and bottom brackets, are subject to function-related wear which depends on the intensity and duration of
use and how well the bike is looked after.
›› Check these parts regularly.
›› Clean and lubricate them regularly.
I General User Manual
59
28 Regular inspections
As the spokes settle, the length of the brake and shifting
cables increases and the bearings will run in during the
first kilometres on the bike, you will have to have an initial inspection carried out by your specialist cycle shop
after the first 200 kilometres, or after four to six weeks.
This is also important for the acceptance of claims made
under the terms of the warranty.
›› Clean your bike after every offroad ride and check
it for damage.
›› Have the following components readjusted:
•• headset,
•• gearshift,
•• brakes,
•• suspension elements.
after every ride
›› Check the following:
›› Have the initial inspection carried out.
•• spokes,
›› Inspect your bike roughly every 300 to 500 km, or
every three to six months.
•• rims for wear and true running,
›› During this inspection, check that all screws, nuts
and quick-release devices are securely fastened.
›› Clean your bike.
›› Grease moving parts (apart from brake contact
surfaces) according to instructions.
›› Have paint damage and rust spots touched up.
›› Apply corrosion inhibitor to bare metal parts (apart
from brake contact surfaces).
›› Have inoperative or damaged parts replaced.
28.1 Inspection schedule
28.1.1 Maintenance / checks
•• tyres for damage and foreign objects,
•• quick-release devices,
•• function of gearshift and suspension,
•• brakes, hydraulic brakes for leaks,
•• lighting and
•• bell.
after 300 to 500 kilometres
›› Have the following checked for wear and replaced
if necessary:
•• bike chain,
•• sprocket,
•• sprocket wheel,
•• rims and
After the first 200 kilometres following purchase,
and subsequently at least once a year
›› Have the following checked:
•• tyres and wheels.
›› Have the tightening torques of the following
checked:
•• handlebar,
•• pedals,
•• pedal cranks,
•• bike saddle,
•• seatpost and
•• fastening screws.
60
I General User Manual
•• brake pads.
›› Clean the bike chain, chainring and sprocket
wheel.
›› Lubricate the chain using a suitable lubricant.
›› Check that all screw connections are secure.
after 1000 kilometres
›› Have the brake hub checked and, if necessary, lubricate the brake sleeve with brake sleeve grease
or replace it.
after 3000 kilometres
›› If necessary, the
29 Link list
•• headset,
You can obtain important information on your bike and
its components via these links. The relevant user manual
is normally provided on the manufacturer's web pages, in
addition to important tips for use and making settings.
•• pedals,
www.rohloff.de
•• shifting cables * and
www.speedlifter.com
•• brake cables
www.brooksengland.com
•• hubs,
›› should be
•• dismantled,
•• checked,
•• cleaned,
•• lubricated and,
•• if necessary, replaced by a professional bike
workshop.
www.paul-lange.de / produkte / shimano
www.ritcheylogic.com
www.schwalbe.de
www.srsuntour-cycling.com
www.magura.com
www.sram.com
www.dtswiss.com
*Do not apply lubricants or oils to teflon-coated cable casings.
Following each ride in the rain
›› Clean and lubricate the following:
•• gearshift,
www.fullspeedahead.com
www.paul-lange.de / produkte / selle_italia
www.bike-magazin.de
www.tour-magazin.de
•• brake (apart from brake contact surfaces) and
www.radfahren.de
•• bike chain.
www.tektro.com
www.fallbrooktech.com / nuvinci.asp
www.hebie.de
Not all lubricants and care products are suitable for
your bike. Ask your specialist cycle shop which product you should use in each case. If you use unsuitable
lubricants and care products, this can damage or impair the performance of your bike.
I General User Manual
61
30 Technical data
30.1 M
aximum permitted gross weight
of bike
The maximum permitted gross weight of the bike comprises the weight of the bike, the weight of the rider and the
weight of the luggage. It also includes the laden weight of
a trailer.
BIKE TYPE
MAXIMUM PERMITTED
GROSS WEIGHT
20" trailer
50 kg
20" child's bike:
60 kg
24" child's bike:
80 kg
Urban bike, city / trekking
130 kg
max. 115 kg
Urban bike, semi XXL
150 kg
max. 135 kg
Urban bike, XXL
170 kg
max. 155 kg
E-Bike
130 kg
max. 105 kg
E-Bike semi XXL
150 kg
max. 125 kg
E-Bike XXL
170 kg
max. 145 kg
MTB (hardtail)
110 kg
max. 100 kg
MTB (hardtail), semi XXL
140 kg
max. 125 kg
MTB (dirt)
110 kg
max. 100 kg
MTB (full-suspension)
110 kg
max. 100 kg
MTB (full-suspension), semi XXL
140 kg
max. 125 kg
Road bike
110 kg
max. 100 kg
Road bike, semi XXL
135 kg
max. 125 kg
Cyclo Cross / Cyclo Cross Trekking
110 kg
max. 100 kg
The maximum permitted gross weights of carbon frames
also apply for aluminium frames.
If other gross weights are approved, for lightweight construction components for example, this will be indicated
on the bike or component.
62
I General User Manual
WEIGHT OF RIDER:
30.2 M
aximum permitted loading
of pannier rack
Note that the data on your pannier rack or in the manufacturer's user manual may be different.
Maximum weight loading of front pannier rack:
•• Loading area above wheel: 10 kg
•• Low loading area: 18 kg
Observe the minimum screw-in depth. For hard aluminium
alloys this is at least 1.4 times the screw diameter (e.g.
nominal diameter M 5 × 1.4 = 7 mm).
Whenever possible, you should tighten all safety-relevant
screw connections using a torque wrench. This indicates
the tightening torque in Nm (Newton metres) in each case.
›› If no values are indicated on the component, use
the tightening torques in the following table.
›› If the torque has been specified by the manufacturer of the component, this has priority.
›› Carbon parts must be mounted using a special
mounting paste.
Maximum weight loading of rear pannier rack:
•• 20" child's bike and trailer: 10 kg
•• 24" child's bike: 18 kg
Also note other information or markings on carbon
components regarding the recommended torques.
•• Touring bike, city bike, trekking bike, ATB: 25 kg
30.3 T
ightening torques for screw
connections
Only use a suitable tool, a torque wrench for example,
to tighten the screw connections as otherwise the
screws could shear off or break.
If you tighten screws too tightly, this could damage
the components
You should therefore always observe the prescribed
tightening torque.
I General User Manual
63
General
Carbon
SCREW CONNECTION
THREAD
TIGHTENING TORQUE (NM)
Crank arm, steel
M8x1
30
Crank arm, alu
M8x1
30
Pedal
9 / 16"
30
Axle nuts, front
gen.
25
Axle nuts, rear
gen.
30
Stem expander bolt wedge
M8
23
Stem, A-head, angle adjustment
M6
10
Stem, A-head, handlebar clamping fixture
M5 / M6 / M7
M5: 5 / M6: 10 / M7: 14
Stem, A-head, head tube
M5 / M6 / M7
M5: 5 / M6: 10 / M7: 14
Bar end, outer clamp
M5 / M6
M5: 5 / M6: 10
Seatpost, clamp
M8
20
Seatpost, clamp
M6
10
Seatpost, saddle clamping bracket
M7 / M8
M7: 14 / M8: 20
Front derailleur clamp
M5
5
Brake, pad
M6
10
Brake, cable clamp
M6
10
Sidewall dynamo, fixing
M6
10
Derailleur hanger
M10x1
16
Bottom bracket
BSA
according to manufacturer's instructions
Disc brake calliper, Shimano, IS and PM
M6
6 to 8
Disc brake calliper, AVID, IS and PM
M6
8 to 10
Disc brake calliper, Magura, IS and PM
M6
6
Shifting lever clamp
M5
5
Brake lever clamp
M5
5
V-brake, fastening screw
M6
10
Road bike brake
M6
10
Freewheel fastening screw
n. a.
40
Cassette, lock ring
n. a.
30
Handles, screw-on type
M4 / M5
M4: 3 / M5: 5
Carbon frame, saddle clamp
M5 / M6
5
Carbon frame, water bottle holder
M5
5
Carbon frame, front derailleur clamp
M5
4
Carbon handlebar, shifting lever clamp
M5
3
Carbon handlebar, brake lever clamp
M5
3
Carbon handlebar, handlebar clamp
M5
5
Carbon handlebar, stem clamp
M5 / M6
5
Overview of torques, values apply for standard screws
64
I General User Manual
30.5 Lighting set
30.3.1 G
eneral tightening torques
for screw connections
The screw grade, e.g. 8.8, is embossed in the screw head.
Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, the following tightening torques (average values) apply depending on the screw grade:
GRADE
THREAD
V2A /
V4A
8.8
Depending on which type of lighting set is fitted on your
bike you may require different spare lamps. The following
table shows which bulbs you require.
TYPE OF LIGHTING SET USED
POWER SUPPLY
Front light
6V
2.4 W
10.9
12.9
Front light, halogen
6V
2.4 W
M4
3
2.7
3.8
4.6
Rear light
6V
0.6 W
M5
5
5.5
8
9.5
Rear light with stand light
6V
0.6 W
M6
8
9.5
13
16
M8
20
23
32
39
M10
40
46
64
77
Lighting with LED lights
LED lights cannot be
replaced
Dynamo
6V
3W
Hub dynamo
6V
3W
30.4 Tyres and tyre pressure
The recommended tyre pressure is stated in either bar or
PSI.
The following table shows standard values converted, and
also information on which tyre widths these pressures
normally apply.
TYRE WIDTH
in mm
PSI
BAR
25 HD*
80 – 110
5.5 – 7.6
28 HD*
70 – 80
4.8 – 5.5
28
60
4.1
32
60 – 70
4.1 – 4.8
37
50
3.5
40
60
4.1
42
60
4.1
47
40 – 50
3.5 – 4.1
57 – 62
30 – 40
2.1 – 2.8
* HD = high-pressure tyre
Note that the manufacturer's specifications may differ
and must be observed as otherwise you could damage
the tyres and inner tubes.
I General User Manual
65
31 Warranty conditions
Read ➠ Chapter 27 "Care and maintenance of the bike"
carefully. Comply with the inspection and maintenance
intervals specified in ➠ Chapter 28 "Regular inspections" .
Compliance with the service intervals is a prerequisite for
the assertion of warranty claims.
The statutory warranty period is two years. This starts
when the bike is handed over by the specialist cycle shop
who is also your contact partner for warranty claims.
As proof of purchase and date of handover, please retain
the handover document signed by both parties and record
of purchase, such as the invoice and/or sales receipt, for
the duration of the warranty period.
31.1
rerequisites for the validity
P
of warranty claims
•• Manufacturing, material or information error.
•• The problem or error already existed at the time of
handover to the customer.
31.2 Warranty exclusions
A warranty claim applies only for the initial faultiness of
the defective part. The following are excluded from the
warranty:
•• Damage caused by use in competitions, improper
use and force majeure (see ➠ Chapter 6 "Intended
use").
•• All parts that are subject to function-related wear,
providing this is not a production or material fault
(see ➠ Chapter 27.2 "Wear parts").
•• Damage caused by incorrect or insufficient care
and unprofessional repairs, conversions or replacement of components on the bike. This User Manual
contains detailed information on how to look after
your bike.
•• Accident damage or damage caused by other external factors, providing this is not attributable to
incorrect information or a product error.
•• Repairs carried out with used parts or damage that
occurs as a consequence of this.
•• Special equipment or accessories or non-standard
equipment; especially technical changes, i.e. to the
gearshift system or the bike fork and frame geometries.
66
I General User Manual
•• Non-compatible add-on components that were not
part of the scope of delivery at the time the product was handed over, or damage caused by unprofessional installation of these add-on components.
I General User Manual
67
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new bike!
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction in whole or in part is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
II
User Manual
Fast Pedelec
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
5
Charger
4
LCD control panel
4
2
1
3
2
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
1
Battery
2
Battery lock
3
Motor unit
4
Control panel
5
Charger
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
from us. This bike is equipped with an electric drive that
assists you when you are cycling. This will make your trip
much more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying
loads or riding into the wind. You can decide yourself how
much you want to use it. The purpose of this User Manual
is to help you get the most out of your fast Pedelec and
use it correctly.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury, increased risk of falls or other injuries
Although this vehicle looks like a normal bike and can also
be used as such, there are a number of important differences. It is for example viewed from a legal point of view
as a L1e moped. You must have a moped test certificate
and an insurance plate in order to ride it.
Structure of User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or
special information on using the bike
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
For more detailed information on your fast Pedelec, refer
to ➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your fast Pedelec only. For general information, on the
bike technology that features in your Pedelec for example,
refer to the General User Manual.
NOTE about possible damage to property or the
environment
Even if you can't wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” carefully without fail before
use.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
3
Content
1Quick start 7
4.1.10Battery charge state indicator
13
2Fast Pedelec / fundamental legal principles
8
4.1.11Power output indicator
13
8
4.1.12 Switching the light on and off
14
2.1Legal principles 2.1.1Meaning for the rider 8
2.1.2Fast Pedelecs and cycle paths
8
2.1.3Travel speed switch 8
3Charging the battery 5Assistance by the electric motor
9
5.1Operating principle of assistance
14
5.2Distance
15
5.3Riding your Pedelec efficiently
16
6Battery
3.1Charging operation 9
3.2Fitting the battery 9
4LCD control panel
4.1Function of control panel
4
10
10
4.1.1On / Off button
10
4.1.2Selector button for display panel
10
4.1.3Changing the assist level
11
4.1.4Resetting recorded data
11
4.1.5Switching the display on and off
11
4.1.6Deleting all data
11
4.1.7Reprogramming the language, wheel
circumference and LCD contrast 12
4.1.8Automatic switch-off
13
4.1.9Measurement and display ranges
13
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
14
6.1Straightforward charging
17
17
6.2High degree of safety due to battery
management17
6.3Straightforward storage
17
6.4Battery information system
18
6.4.1Checking the battery charge state
18
6.4.2Checking the battery capacity
18
6.5Service life and warranty
6.5.1of battery
7Charger
19
19
20
8Troubleshooting
8.1Problems / solutions:
Flash patterns and their meaning
20
21
8.1.1No display
21
8.1.2Battery charge state indicator
flashing or not visible
21
8.1.3Display “E1”
21
8.1.4Display “E9”
22
8.1.5Assistance control indicator flashing
22
8.1.6Additional possible sources of errors
22
9Cleaning
22
10Warnings
23
11Technical data
24
12Replacing components of the fast Pedelec
25
12.1Components that can only be replaced
by equivalent parts or approved parts
25
12.2 Spare tyres
26
12.3Components that do not require a
certificate of approval
27
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
5
6
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
1
Quick start
›› 1. Charge the battery completely before riding for
the first time.
when no force is applied to the pedals to adjust the
power sensor correctly.
Press the "Assist" button to select the power assist
mode. This works in both directions. The assistance output increases or decreases depending on
which "Assist" button you press. If you select the
most powerful setting then press the button again,
you return to a mode without assistance.
Unlocking the battery
›› 2. To remove the battery, grip the handle, insert
the key into the lock and turn it anticlockwise. The
battery is now unlocked.
›› 3. Tilt the battery sideways and lift it with both
hands out of the holder.
Always operate one of the brakes before putting one
of your feet on a pedal as the motor pulls your bike
away immediately. This starting assistance is very
convenient, especially when starting on hills. If you
start off in road traffic or on unsurfaced roads without
controlling your speed, you could come off your bike
and seriously injure yourself.
›› 9. You can now ride off.
Tilt to remove
›› 4. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger. The battery LEDs light up or flash. You
must fully charge the battery before using it for the
first time.
›› 5. Once all LEDs have gone out, take the battery
out of the docking station.
›› 6. Reinsert the battery into the holder on the
Pedelec from the left-hand side. Move the battery
outwards at an angle of roughly 45° as you do so,
as you did when you took it out of the holder. Move
the battery into the upright position until the locking mechanism engages. If the key is still in the
lock, you will need to turn it clockwise and pull it
out to allow the battery to lock in place.
›› 7. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and that the key is no longer in the lock.
›› 8. Push the "On / Off" button on the control panel
on the handlebar. Wait for 2 seconds before turning the pedals. The drive system requires this time
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
7
2 F ast Pedelec / fundamental legal
principles
•• You legally have to have insurance. In Germany,
you can obtain the small registration mark from
any insurance company.
The essential idea behind the fast Pedelec is not only to
be able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate assist level.
•• Use on cycle paths is restricted.
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater
degree of security. Your fast Pedelec assists you with 300
watts of power which takes you up to a speed of 45 km / h.
2.1
These regulations apply to you wherever you are
in the European Union. It is possible that different
regulations exist in other countries, also inside the
EU in individual cases. Before using your fast Pedelec
abroad, find out about the legal situation in the relevant country.
Legal principles
The fast Pedelec is classed from a legal point of view as
a L1e moped. In some EU countries, like all other bikes,
it must comply with certain regulations, the Road Traffic
Licensing Regulation in Germany (StVZO) for example.
Please observe the relevant explanations and general
information provided in the General User Manual.
•• When riding with the power assist only, the fast
Pedelec must not travel faster than 20km / h. You
will therefore reach a speed of between 15 and
18 km / h on the flat.
•• The power assist switches itself off once you have
reached a speed of roughly 45 km/h. You will require 700 watts to reach this speed and you cannot
do this with the assistance of the electric motor
alone. You can reach speeds of 35–45 km / h by
combining a motor output of 300 watts with your
own physical effort.
2.1.1 Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
2.1.2 Fast Pedelecs and cycle paths
If you use your fast Pedelec as you would use a bike, i.e.
without assistance from the electric motor, you can use
all cycle paths without restriction. In some EU countries,
restrictions apply if you use the motor on a cycle path.
In Germany an amendment to the Road Traffic Ordinance
(StVO) states that: You must use your fast Pedelec on cycle
paths outside built-up areas, as is the case with mopeds.
In exceptional cases where this is not permitted, the cycle
path will also be marked with the sign "No mopeds" in
accordance with Paragraph 2 Section 4 of the Road Traffic
Ordinance (StVO). Inside built-up areas on the other hand,
you can only use your Pedelec on cycle paths if the cycle
path is marked accordingly in accordance with Paragraph
41, Sctn. 2, No. 5.
2.1.3 Travel speed switch
Your fast Pedelec is equipped with a travel speed switch.
The bike is designed so that it cannot go faster than
20 km / h when you press the travel speed switch without
pushing the pedals. This is why wearing a helmet is not
mandatory for the fast Pedelec.
•• You legally have to have a driving license. The moped test certificate is mandatory.
•• If you have a German driving licence, you are automatically exempt from this requirement.
•• In Germany, if you were born before 01.04.1965,
you may also ride a fast Pedelec without a driving
licence.
8
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
Travel speed switch
3 Charging the battery
3.1
To charge the battery, you have to take it out of the holder
on the Pedelec.
Before charging the battery, read the information on the
charger carefully.
Carry handle
Charging operation
›› 1. Take the charger provided out of its packaging
and plug the mains plug into a socket (230 V, observe type plate on the charger).
Battery charge
state indicator
Type plate on charger: Front and back
›› 2. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger.
Grip the battery by the handle, insert the key into the lock
and turn it anticlockwise. The battery is now unlocked and
can be removed from the Pedelec by tilting it sideways.
In doing so, hold on tight to the battery to prevent it from
being dropped.
›› 3. The charging operation starts. The battery LEDs
light up or flash. Once all five LEDs have gone out,
the battery is fully charged. You can leave the battery standing in the charger. However, the charger
always draws some current if you leave it plugged
in.
›› 4. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the
socket once the charging operation is complete.
3.2
Unlocking the battery
Fitting the battery
›› 1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of
the Pedelec from the left by tilting it outwards at
roughly 45°.
›› 2. In doing so, you must insert the lateral guides
at the bottom of the battery into the guides of the
holder.
›› 3. Tilt the battery towards the bike until it engages in the locking mechanism. If the key is still
in the lock, turn it clockwise then pull it out to lock
the battery in place.
Tilt to remove
›› 4. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
You should now remove the key and keep it in a safe place
to prevent it from breaking off or being lost.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
9
4 LCD control panel
6
5
2
3
4
1
1
On / Off
2
Light switch
3
Charge state indicator
4
Indicator for headlight
5
Power output indicator
(only visible when the bike is in motion)
7
15
6
Speed
7
Display of actual journey length
9
8
Average speed
10
9
Top speed
8
14
10 Total journey length
11 Display panel
12 Assist level
11
13
12
13 Selector button for display panel ("Mode")
14 Reduce assist level
15 Increase assist level
delete all data
Display switched off
Display switched on
Rear
4.1
Function of control panel
4.1.1 On / Off button
Press the "On / Off" button to switch on the control panel
and drive.
The assist level that was active at the time the control
panel was switched off is automatically reinstated. The
back-lit display is turned on briefly then goes out. All
recording of data (trip, actual journey length, average
speed, top speed, total journey length) starts as soon
as you switch the control panel on and stops when you
switch it off.
10
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
4.1.2 Selector button for display panel
You can display the information "Trip", "Average speed",
"Top speed" and "Total journey length" consecutively
by pressing the selector button for the display panel
("Mode").
The setting that was selected when you switched off is
also displayed first in this case.
4.1.3 Changing the assist level
If you press the light button when the control panel is
switched on, the back-lit display turns on.
If you press the light switch when the light is on, the backlit display turns off. The power assist is still available and
you can change the assist level.
Increase power assist
The following assist levels are displayed one by one when
you press the button for selecting a more powerful assist
level: "NO ASSIST / no assistance", "ECO / low assist level",
"STANDARD / medium assist level", "HIGH / high assist
level", followed once again by "NO ASSIST / no assistance".
This means that the assistance increases each time you
press the button until you reach the highest power level.
If you subsequently press the button, the assistance
switches off.
4.1.6 Deleting all data
Press the display ("Mode") selector button and the button
that deletes all data on the rear of the control panel at the
same time to delete all the data stored, including the total
journey length. The display then automatically switches
to settings mode for language, LCD contrast and wheel
circumference.
Reduce power assist
If you press the button that reduces the assist level, the
assistance reduces each time the button is pressed and
returns to the most powerful assist level when it reaches
the end of the loop.
In the "NO ASSIST / no assistance" mode, you ride the bike
normally without the assistance of the motor.
4.1.4 Resetting recorded data
If you press the selector button for the display panel for
longer than three seconds with the control panel switched
on, this resets the trip, average speed and top speed to
zero. You cannot delete the total journey length using this
method.
4.1.5 Switching the display on and off
The back-lit display and LCD control panel display can
also be switched on even if the drive is not enabled. To
do this, press the button that switches the lights on. The
drive remains in "NO ASSIST / no assistance" mode. Now
you cannot change the assist level.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
11
4.1.7 R
eprogramming the language, wheel
circumference and LCD contrast
Normal display
Display mode
Settings mode
Display selector button & ▼button for 3 sec.
Press light button to apply the settings
▼ button (setting selection)
Language
selection
▼ button
Adjust LCD
contrast
▼ button
Set
km / h or mph
▼ button
▼ button
Set
wheel circumference
▲ button
▲ button
▲ button
▲ button
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
Set
journey length
▼button (setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Settings mode
language
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Settings mode
LCD contrast
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(4th digit)
Set
km / h or mph
▼button
▲button
Selector
button
display
Selector
button
display
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(6th digit)
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(4th digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
* ▲button refers to the ▲button for assist level selection
* ▼button refers to the▼button for assist level selection
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
▲button
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(3rd digit)
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(1st digit)
* to scroll more quickly, press ▲ / ▼buttons for more than 2 seconds
▼button
Set
total mileage
(4th digit)
Set wheel
circumference
(2nd digit)
Selector
button
display
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(5th digit)
Set wheel
circumference
(3rd digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(2nd digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(1st digit)
▼button
12
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
▲button
(setting selection)
4.1.8 Automatic switch-off
4.1.10 Battery charge state indicator
If you stop your Pedelec and it does not move for 10 minutes, the system switches off automatically. If you want to
use the assistance again, you will have to switch it back
on via the control panel.
Battery charge state indicator
4.1.9 Measurement and display ranges
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY RANGE
Speed
0.0 – 99.9 km / h
Journey length
0.0 – 99999 km
(once the distance reaches
9999.9 km, this is displayed without a decimal
place.)
Average speed
Top speed
Total journey length
0 – 99.9 km / h
0.0 – 99.9 km / h
0.0 – 99999 km
(once the distance reaches
9999.9 km, this is displayed without a decimal
place.)
This indicator helps you save power when riding which
means you can travel further.
The remaining battery charge is shown in 5 stages.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
5 LEDs light up •••••
80 – 100%
4 LEDs light up ••••
60 – 80%
3 LEDs light up •••
40 – 60%
2 LEDs light up ••
20 – 40%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 20%
1 LED flashes ¡
< 10%
no display –
0%
E: Battery is empty
F: Battery is full
4.1.11 Power output indicator
The power output indicator shows the actual power output
being requested and the actual power consumption in 6
stages (bars).
This indicator helps you save power when riding which
means you can travel further.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
13
The fewer of the 6 bars that are displayed, the lower the
actual power output of the motor and the consumption. If
more bars are visible, the power output and consumption
of the motor is higher.
IF YOU CAN
SEE...
THE BATTERY IS SUPPLYING
A CURRENT OF
6 bars
more than 20 amperes
5 bars
up to 16 – 20 A
4 bars
up to 12 – 16 A
3 bars
up to 8 – 12 A
2 bars
up to 2 – 8 A
1 bar
up to 0 – 2 A
5 Assistance by the electric motor
If your Pedelec is equipped with hub gears, you may
have to take more load off the pedals when changing
gears than you would normally do when riding your
conventional bike. This is due to the additional power
output of the electric motor. The hub gear system
contains a device that protects it against gear shifting
operations under excessive loads in order to preserve
the gear unit in the hub.
5.1
If the power consumption is very low, no bars are
displayed.
4.1.12 Switching the light on and off
If you are using the assistance and press the light switch,
this switches the lighting of the fast Pedelec on and off.
If you are riding with the lights on and switch off the
system, the lights also switch off automatically. You must
therefore switch the lights on again.
You must always take the battery with you, even if you
want to ride without assistance as the lights will only
work with the battery.
14
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
Operating principle of assistance
The motor provides support as soon as you switch the assistance on and start pedalling.
The thrust delivered by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Your own pedalling effort
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and increases the thrust
accordingly. However, the thrust is limited by the
maximum motor output.
•• The assist level you have selected
With the "high assist level / HIGH" setting, the
power delivered by the motor is double your own
effort (1 : 2).
With the "medium assist level / Standard" setting,
the power delivered by the motor increases your
effort in a ratio of 1 : 1.3.
With the "low assist level / ECO" setting, the power
delivered by the motor is more than half your own
effort (1 : 0.75).
•• The speed at which you are currently travelling
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance
increases as you build up speed until the bike
reaches its maximum speed of roughly 36 km / h.
The assistance then reduces automatically until
you reach a speed of 45 km / h when it switches off.
This applies for the largest gear only. In all other
gears, the motor switches off earlier, depending on
the gear ratio.
Fast Pedelec 28"
increasing pedal
power and
assistance
reducing
assistance
assistance
switched off
Propulsive power
Propulsive power (pedal force +
electric assistance)
1.0
Pedal force
2
Electric assistance
Speed
36 km / h
Power-assist
mode = 1 : 2
45 km / h
Variation in electric assistance
Distance
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of its
power at low ambient temperatures.
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a large distance assisted by
the motor, select the lower gears, i.e. the ones that
are easier to pedal. Also select a low assist level.
"ECO" then appears on the control panel.
Discharge curve at normal temperatures
Discharge curve at low temperatures
Difference between normal and low temperature
Discharge capacity at normal temperatures
Discharge capacity (Ah) or hours of use
(cutoff voltage)
Rated voltage
Discharge capacity at low temperatures
Minimum voltage for
battery operation
5.2
Rate of discharge at different temperatures
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
15
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high assist level, e. g. when riding
uphill, the motor will support you with plenty of
power. However, this leads to higher consumption,
as with driving a car at high speed on the motorway. You will therefore have to recharge the battery sooner. You can conserve energy when riding
your bike not just by turning the pedals, but also
by applying even pressure throughout each crank
revolution.
•• Technical condition of your fast Pedelec
Make sure the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride
your bike with too little air in the tyres, this can
significantly increase the rolling resistance. The
distance you can travel also decreases if the brakes
are rubbing.
•• Ascents
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is detected by the power sensor which then allows the
motor to work harder.
Under ideal conditions, you can cover roughly 60 kilometres with the battery fully charged (18 Ah). You can expect
to cover a distance of roughly 35 kilometres using different modes of operation.
DISTANCE COVERED (1 : 2 ASSISTANCE,
32 KM / H ON AVERAGE UNDER FAVOURABLE CONDITIONS)
8 Ah battery
22 km
12 Ah battery
35 km
18 Ah battery
60 km
Distance covered using different batteries
16
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
5.3
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the travel distance.
The operating costs for power assist with an 18 Ah battery
are calculated as follows:
•• A new battery costs roughly 599 euros.
•• You can cover 48 km on average with one battery
charge.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1100 charging cycles x 48 km = 82,800 km
•• 599 euros: 82,800 km = 1.13 euro cents / km
•• You use roughly 0.620 kWh to fully charge the battery. Assuming a unit price of 20 euro cents / kWh,
it costs you 12.4 euro cents to fully charge the battery and cover a journey length of 60 km.
•• It costs you 0.20 euro cents / km to travel a distance of 60 km.
•• This means the cost of consumption and the battery is a maximum of 1.33 euro cents / km.
As Derby Cycle is a German manufacturer, the sample calculation is based on German energy prices. The operating
costs may therefore be different in locations where other
energy prices apply.
6 Battery
Your battery is a lithium cobalt battery, the ideal type of
lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery for this application. One of the
main benefits of this type of battery is its low weight combined with a high capacity. Li-ion batteries only weigh half
as much as comparable nickel metal hybride or nickelcadmium batteries.
This means you carry less battery weight and more battery
power.
6.1
Straightforward charging
›› There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
›› Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
›› If you are not using the battery, you must recharge
it after 6 months at the latest.
6.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as it prevents overcharging.
6.3
Straightforward storage
›› If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10 °C at three quarters of its
full charge capacity.
›› The battery enters sleep mode to prevent it from
totally discharging.
These benefits are available due to highly effective battery
management that has been adapted to this specific application and by tuning the battery for operation with a 300
watt motor.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or after you
have not used it for a while.
›› You should run the battery all the way down to
empty for the first three charging cycles. This allows the battery to reach its maximum capacity. If
you continuously run the battery to empty during
normal operation, this reduces its service life.
›› If you partially recharge the battery frequently during normal operation, this has a favourable effect
on its service life.
You should therefore partially recharge the battery
whenever possible: Do not run the battery all the
way down to empty and recharge it even after a
short period of operation.
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as sleep
mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at which the
battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed
to discharge unchecked for an extended period this
can lead to total discharging which damages the
battery. To "wake up" the battery, simply place it in
the charger for one minute.
›› If you are having problems with the battery, place
it in the charger for one minute. A reset occurs,
during which the battery management disables
sleep mode for example. After this, the battery will
work again.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10 °C and +30 °C. It takes longer
to charge the battery at low temperatures, the
battery will not charge up at temperatures higher
than +30 °C. Ideally, you should charge and store
the battery inside your house or in a warm garage
when the outside temperature is low. In this case
you should only fit the battery on your bike just
before using it.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods charged to 75% of its capacity at a temperature of +10 °C.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
17
Li-ion rechargeable battery
Battery may be
damaged
Long charging times
Optimum temperature range
for charging operation
-10 °C
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
Charging times at different temperatures
6.4
Battery information system
There is a control panel with five LEDs and a button
("Push") on the side of the battery that faces outwards.
The LEDs light up if you press the "Push" button. Information about the battery and its charge state is provided
based on the number of LEDs that light up and the way in
which they light up.
6.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
Press the "Push" button briefly, the LEDs light up and display the current battery charge.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
5 LEDs light up •••••
80 – 100%
4 LEDs light up ••••
60 – 80%
3 LEDs light up •••
40 – 60%
2 LEDs light up ••
20 – 40%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 20%
1 LED flashes ¡
< 10%
no display –
0%
E: Battery is empty
F: Battery is full
Charge state and battery capacity indicator
6.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
If you press the "Push" button for longer than five seconds, the LEDs show the current capacity of the battery.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
5 LEDs light up •••••
100 – 80%
4 LEDs light up ••••
80 – 60%
3 LEDs light up •••
60 – 40%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 20%
1 LED lights up •
20 – 0%
Capacity indicator
18
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
›› Check there is sufficient charge in the battery for
the journey you intend to make before setting off.
›› In winter the distance you can normally cover with
the battery operating normally is less. Only move
the battery from the warm room where you store
it and fit it on your Pedelec just before you set off.
This prevents low temperatures from reducing the
distance you can normally travel. A corresponding diagram is provided in ➠ Chapter 11 “Technical
data”.
›› The distance you can cover can vary depending on
the topography, your handling, the condition of the
battery and the assist level you are using.
›› If all diodes flash consecutively, or several flash
at the same time (2 – 3 diodes), the battery is
damaged.
Before taking the battery to your specialist cycle shop
to have it checked, put the battery in the charger for
one minute then test it again.
6.5
BATTERY
REMAINING
CAPACITY
~ DISTANCE COVERED
8 Ah
4.8 Ah
19,360 km
12 Ah
7.2 Ah
30,800 km
18 Ah
10.8 Ah
52,800 km
From the technical standpoint above therefore, the battery
is exhausted at this point. It also goes without saying that
the battery ages. Even if you do not use your battery, its
capacity reduces.
Providing you can still cover the journey distances with
this remaining battery capacity, you can of course continue using it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you
can take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who will
dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
›› You can extend the service life of the battery by
fully recharging it after every journey, however
short. The Panasonic li-ion cobalt battery has no
memory effect.
›› You can also extend the service life of the battery
by using the assistance selectively. Avoid, for example, using gears that make pedalling difficult
with the highest assist level activated.
Service life and warranty
The Panasonic centre motor is a fully-developed durable
and maintenance-free drive. It is a wear part with a twoyear warranty. As its power output is higher, wear parts
such as the drive and brakes are subject to higher loads
than they would be on a normal bike which is why they
wear out more quickly.
6.5.1 of battery
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts also come with a twoyear warranty.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are
•• the number of charge cycles and
•• the age of the battery.
When you have fully charged and discharged your battery
1,100 times, it will still have 60% of its initial capacity,
providing it has been well looked after:
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
19
7
Charger
Read the two stickers on the charger before using it for the
first time.
8 Troubleshooting
The control panel also indicates when faults and technical errors are present. A fault code appears in the LCD
display.
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery
using the charger provided, or a charger approved by
Derby Cycle.
If a fault develops or if the battery is in sleep mode, you
might be able to solve this problem by placing the battery
in the charger for one minute. The battery management
then checks the battery and can eliminate any faults that
have occurred.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
Control panel display
Have the electric drive inspected regularly by your
specialist cycle shop. Do not carry out any work on
the electric drive or battery yourself. Unless you have
sufficient expertise this could lead to a serious accident. As a basic rule, always consult your specialist
cycle shop if you have a problem with the electric
drive or the battery.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
20
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
You should only have the electrical components of
your Pedelec replaced with genuine parts. This makes
it safer for you and avoids problems when processing
warranty claims.
8.1
roblems / solutions:
P
Flash patterns and their meaning
If a problem occurs in the electrical system of your Pedelec, you should initially try to solve it by referring to the
following list which describes possible causes of errors
and provides corresponding solutions.
If you cannot solve the problem, consult your specialist
cycle shop.
8.1.1 No display
If nothing is shown in the LCD display, one of the following reasons/solutions may apply:
›› Is the battery sufficiently charged?
Charge the battery if necessary.
›› Is the battery capacity still sufficient?
Check the capacity. If the remaining capacity is not
enough, the battery must be replaced.
Check the actual battery capacity
8.1.2 B
attery charge state indicator flashing
or not visible
If the battery charge state indicator is flashing or not visible at all, one of the following causes/solutions may apply:
›› Is the battery sufficiently charged?
Charge the battery if necessary.
›› The second and fourth LEDs of the battery indicator
flash when you press the button on the battery. The
battery management has switched the battery off.
Put the battery in the charger and charge it.
›› If you continue to press the button on the battery
(test for battery capacity) and no LED lights up, the
battery management has switched the battery off.
Put the battery in the charger and charge it.
8.1.3 Display "E1"
If "E1" is displayed, the following cause/solution may
apply:
Error code
If you press the "Push" button for longer than five seconds, the LEDs show the capacity of the battery at present.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
5 LEDs light up •••••
100 – 80%
4 LEDs light up ••••
80 – 60%
3 LEDs light up •••
60 – 40%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 20%
1 LED lights up •
20 – 0%
Capacity of 18 Ah battery (example)
›› You have pushed down on the pedals shortly after
pressing the "Power" button. Switch the display off
then switch it back on and do not push down on the
pedals for roughly 2 seconds.
If "E1" is displayed the distance covered will not be
recorded. It will therefore no longer be possible to
adjust the assistance control and the power assist
will no longer work.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
21
8.1.4 Display "E9"
8.1.6 Additional possible sources of errors
If "E9" is displayed, the following cause/solution may
apply:
Error code
›› If you only pedal very gently, the power assist is
not enabled.
›› If the motor is not running and you cannot pinpoint
the cause, check the buttons, cables and plugs of
the electrical system.
If you find a break or a crack, do not try to repair the
fault yourself. Take your Pedelec to a specialist cycle
shop.
›› A problem occurred with the drive unit. Contact
your specialist cycle shop if this occurs.
If "E9" is displayed the distance covered will not
be recorded. It will therefore no longer be possible
to adjust the assistance control and the power assist will no longer work.
9 Cleaning
Remove the battery before you clean your Pedelec.
8.1.5 Assistance control indicator flashing
If the assistance control indicator is flashing although the
battery charge is sufficient, the following cause and solution may apply:
›› The drive unit is overloaded / overheated. The
battery management has switched itself on and
reduced the assistance. A short period follows in
which the drive recovers after which the full assistance output is available once again.
If this does not happen, contact your specialist
cycle shop.
22
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a damp cloth,
a sponge or a brush. You can obtain suitable cleaning
agents and additional information from your specialist
cycle shop.
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
10 Warnings
›› As this motor is more powerful, you may be riding at a much higher speed than you are used to
on your normal bike. Take this into account when
familiarising yourself with your fast Pedelec.
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs as you could burn yourself.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(25.2 volts). Never attempt to operate the Pedelec using power from a source other than a
suitable genuine battery. The designations of approved batteries are listed in Chapter 11 "Technical data".
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by the specialist cycle
shop.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if they could insert objects into the appliance through apertures in the housing as this
poses the danger of fatal electric shock.
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
23
11 Technical data
MOTOR
PANASONIC LI-ION BATTERY
Brushless electric motor
Voltage
25.2 V
Output
300 watts
Capacities
8 / 10 / 12 / 18 Ah
Maximum torque at drive pinion
17 Nm
Energy quantity
200 / 250 / 300 / 450 Wh
Gross weight of electric drive, battery,
control unit
7.8 kg (12 Ah battery)
Control
via power sensor
Maximum speed only possible with
travel speed switch
20 km / h
Assist levels
1 : 0.75 | 1 : 1.3 | 1 : 2
CAPACITY
[AH]
WEIGHT
[KG]
POSSIBLE APPLICATION
DCW
ITEM NO.
ITEM NO.
17017002
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17017012
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17019018
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
17019103
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
KD170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110003
NKY265B02
10
2.4
–
300 W
–
170110016
NKY267B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
170111002
NKY284B2
10
2.4
X
300 W
X
170111200
NKY306B2
8
1.9
X
300 W
X
170111201
NKY304B2
12
2.6
X
300 W
X
170111202
14069
18
3.1
X
300 W
X
CENTRE
FAST
FRONT
Possible applications of batteries
110%
105%
100%
95%
90%
85%
Capacity
80%
75%
70%
– 20 °C
– 10 °C
0 °C
Capacity curve at different temperatures
24
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
12 R
eplacing components of the
fast Pedelec
As your fast Pedelec is a Category L1e moped. As is the
case with other motor vehicles in Germany, it is necessary
to obtain a permit from the Federal Motor Transport Authority and the technical inspection authority (TÜV). This
fast Pedelec has such a permit.
During the approval process, specific components were
defined as being suitable for use with this vehicle. This
means that the permit for your fast Pedelec only remains
valid if exactly the same components in the approved
model are used.
12.1
omponents that can only be
C
replaced by equivalent parts or
approved parts
•• Frame
•• Fork
•• Motor unit
•• Battery
•• Tyres
•• Rims
If components are subsequently modified, the same requirements that apply with other motor vehicles take
effect. You must only use replacement parts that are certified as approved for your fast Pedelec. Alternatively, you
can have components approved individually by the technical inspection authority (TÜV).
•• Brake system
The following lists show which components of your fast
Pedelec can be replaced and what provisions apply.
•• Side stand
•• Front light
•• Back light
•• Licence plate holder
•• Handlebar
•• Stem
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
25
12.2 Spare tyres
To make it easier for you to choose a suitable spare tyre
if you need to, refer to the following list by the German
manufacturer Schwalbe. These tyres can be fitted on a lowpower category L1e moped:
MODEL
LINE
VERSION
SIZE
Marathon Supreme
Evolution
folding / wired
37-622
110 kg (6 bar)
Marathon Supreme
Evolution
folding / wired
50-559
140 kg (5 bar)
Marathon Dureme
Evolution
folding / wired
37-622
110 kg (6 bar)
Marathon Dureme
Evolution
folding / wired
50-559
140 kg (5 bar)
Marathon Extreme
Evolution
folding
37-622
115 kg (6 bar)
Marathon Extreme
Evolution
folding
50-559
140 kg (5 bar)
Marathon Plus
Performance
wired
37-622
110 kg (6 bar)
Marathon Plus
Performance
wired
47-559
125 kg (5 bar)
Marathon
Performance
wired
37-622
110 kg (6 bar)
Marathon
Performance
wired
50-559
140 kg (5 bar)
Big Apple
Performance
folding / wired
50-622
150 kg (5 bar)
Big Apple
Performance
folding / wired
50-559
125 kg (5 bar)
Big Apple
Performance
wired
50-305
70 kg (5 bar)
Big Apple
Performance
wired
50-203
70 kg (4 bar)
Kojak
Performance
folding / wired
35-622
110 kg (6.5 bar)
Smart Sam
Performance
wired
42-622
120 kg (6 bar)
Smart Sam
Performance
wired
54-559
140 kg (4 bar)
Crazy Bob
Performance
wired
60-507
130 kg (4.5 bar)
Energizer
Active
wired
37-622
85 kg (6 bar)
Energizer
Active
wired
40-622
95 kg (6 bar)
Energizer
Active
wired
47-559
90 kg (5 bar)
*max. load with specified tyre pressure
26
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
MAX. LOAD*
12.3 C
omponents that do not require a
certificate of approval
•• Cranks
•• Pedals:
providing type-approved pedal reflectors are
used.
•• Mudguard:
the front edge of the front mudguard must be
rounded.
•• Pannier rack
•• Saddle
•• Handlebar grip
•• Gear-shift components:
Only if the largest gear ratio is not modified.
•• Seatpost
•• Bell:
Can be replaced with an equivalent brightsounding bell.
•• Rear-view mirror:
Can be replaced with a different type-approved rear-view mirror.
•• Chain
•• Headset
•• Inner tube
•• Hubs
II User Manual Fast Pedelec
27
Wij wensen u veel plezier met uw nieuwe snelle Pedelec.
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Nadruk, ook gedeeltelijk, alleen met toestemming van
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Drukfouten, fouten en technische
wijzigingen voorbehouden.
III
User Manual
Pedelec with centre motor
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
5
Charger
4a
4b
LCD control panel
LED control panel
4
1
Battery
2
Battery lock
3
Motor unit
4
Control panel
5
2
1
3
2
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
4a
LED
4b
LCD
Charger
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
from us. This bike is equipped with an electric drive that
assists you when you are cycling. This will make your trip
much more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying
loads or riding into the wind. You can decide yourself how
much you want to use it. The purpose of this User Manual
is to help you get the most out of your Pedelec and use it
correctly.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury,
increased risk of falls or other injuries
Structure of User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
For more detailed information on your Pedelec, refer to
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data” .
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or
special information on using the bike
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec for example, refer
to the General User Manual.
NOTE about possible damage to property or
the environment
Even if you can't wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” carefully without fail before
use.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
3
Content
EC Declaration of Conformity
20126
2013
7
1Quick start 2Pedelec / fundamental legal principles 9
10
2.1Meaning for the rider 10
2.2Pushing assistance 10
3Charging the battery
15
4.2.1.8Automatic switch-off
16
4.2.1.9Measurement and display ranges16
4.2.1.10Battery charge state indicator
16
4.2.1.11Power output indicator
16
5Assistance by the electric motor
17
11
3.1Charging operation
11
3.2Fitting the battery 11
4Control panel (display)
4.2.1.7Reprogramming the language,
wheel circumference and LCD
contrast 12
5.1Operating principle of assistance
17
5.2Distance
18
5.3Riding your Pedelec efficiently
19
6Battery 6.1Straightforward charging
20
20
6.2High degree of safety due to battery
management20
4.1LED control panel
4.1.1Automatic switch-off
4.2LCD control panel
4.2.1Function of LCD control panel
4.2.1.1On / Off button
21
21
13
6.4.2Checking the battery capacity
21
13
6.5Service life and warranty 22
14
6.5.1of drive
22
14
6.5.2 of battery
22
4.2.1.3Changing the assist level
14
4.2.1.4Resetting recorded data
14
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
6.4Battery information system 6.4.1Checking the battery charge state
4.2.1.5Switching the display on and off 14
4
20
12
4.2.1.2Selector button for display panel 14
4.2.1.6Deleting all data
6.3Straightforward storage
14
7Charger 23
8Troubleshooting 23
8.1Problems / solutions: Flash patterns
and their meaning 24
8.1.1Pedelec with LED control panel
24
8.1.2Pedelec with LCD control panel
25
8.1.2.1No display
25
8.1.2.2
Battery charge state indicator
flashing or not visible
25
8.1.2.3Display “E1”
25
8.1.2.4Display “E9” 25
8.1.2.5Assistance control indicator
flashing26
8.1.2.6Additional possible sources
of errors
26
9Cleaning
26
10Warnings
26
11Technical data
27
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
5
EC Declaration of Conformity 2012
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 4471 / 966-0
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu C8-36, Agattu C8-26, Agattu C7, Agattu C3, Sahel Pro C8 Disc, Sahel Comp C8, Sahel C8
HS, Sahel C8, Sahel C7, Pro Connect C11 Disc, Pro Connect C8, Pro Connect C8 Disc, Pro Connect C9
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse
Model designation:Agattu C8 HS Impulse, Agattu XXL C8 Impulse, Agattu Premium C11 Impulse, Agattu C8
Impulse, Impulse XXL 8C, Impulse 8C HS, Impulse Premium 8C, Impulse 8C, Impulse
Compact, Sahel Compact, Tasman Classic C8, Tasman Tour XXL C8, Tasman City 8C, Tasman
Tour C8, Connect Lady C8, Connect Lady 8C
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove
Model designation:Groove F8, Groove F3
Product description:
Kalkhoff BionX
Model designation:Image BX27, Image BX24
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch
Model designation:Agattu B
Year of manufacture:
2012
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
21.09.2011
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
EC Declaration of Conformity 2013
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 44 71 / 966 - 111
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu P8-26V, Agattu P8-26V 8G, Pro Connect C8 Disc
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse Pedelec
Model designation:Agattu i8, Agattu Premium i11, Agattu XXL i8R, Agattu i8 HS, Impulse i8R HS, Impulse XXL
i8R, Impulse XXL i8, Impulse Premium i8R, Impulse i8R, Pro Connect i8 HS, Pro Connect i10,
Pro Connect i27, Sahel i8 light, Sahel i8, Sahel i8R, Sahel Compact i8, Sahel Compact i8R,
Sahel i11 Di2, Sahel i360 Harmony, Sahel i360, Tasman Classic i8, Tasman Classic i8R, Tasman
Tour XXL i8, Tasman Tour XXL i8R, Tasman Tour i8, Tasman Tour i8R, Tasman City i8 Roller,
Tasman City i7 Roller, Tasman City i8, Tasman City i8R
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove Pedelec
Model designation:Groove F8
Product description:
Kalkhoff Xion Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect R30, Pro Connect R27
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect B8, Pro Connect B9
Year of manufacture:
2013
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006 / 42 / EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004 / 108 / EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
14. 05. 2012
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
8
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
1
Quick start
›› 1. Charge the battery completely before riding for
the first time.
Unlocking the battery
›› 2. To remove the battery, grip the handle, insert
the key into the lock and turn it anticlockwise. The
battery is now unlocked.
›› 3. Tilt the battery sideways and lift it with both
hands out of the holder.
Tilt to remove
›› 4. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger. The battery LEDs light up or flash during
charging. You must fully charge the battery before
using it for the first time.
›› 5. Once all LEDs have gone out, take the battery
out of the docking station.
›› 6. Reinsert the battery into the holder on the
Pedelec from the left-hand side. Move the battery
outwards at an angle of roughly 45° as you do so,
as you did when you took it out of the holder. Move
the battery into the upright position until the locking mechanism engages. If the key is still in the
lock, you will need to turn it clockwise and pull it
out to allow the battery to lock in place.
›› If your Pedelec is equipped with an LED control
panel:
Push the "Power" button on the control panel on
the handlebar. Wait for 2 seconds before turning
the pedals. The drive system requires this time
when no force is applied to the pedals to adjust the
power sensor correctly.
›› 9. The intermediate power-assist mode appears
on the display panel of the LED control panel.
Press the "Mode" buttons to select the level of assistance: "gentle / LOW", "intermediate / MID" or
"powerful / HIGH“. Press this button once to change
the assist level by one level. You can increase or
reduce the assistance, depending on which "Mode"
button you press.
›› 10. If your Pedelec is equipped with a LCD control
panel:
Push the "On / Off" button on the control panel on
the handlebar. Wait for 2 seconds before turning
the pedals. The drive system requires this period
after switching on during which no force is applied
to the pedals to adjust the power sensor correctly.
Press the "Assist" button to select the power assist
mode. This works in both directions. The assistance output increases or decreases depending on
which “Assist” button you press. If you are using
the most powerful setting then press the button
again, you return to a mode without assistance.
Always operate one of the brakes before putting one
of your feet on a pedal as the motor pulls your bike
away immediately. This starting assistance is very
convenient, especially when starting on hills. If you
start off in road traffic or on unsurfaced roads without
controlling your speed, you could come off your bike
and seriously injure yourself.
›› 11. You can now ride off.
›› 7. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and that the key is no longer in the lock.
›› 8. If your Pedelec is equipped with a LCD control
panel: Continue at 10.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
9
2 P
edelec / fundamental legal
principles
The essential idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate assist level.
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater degree of security. Your Pedelec assists you with up to 250
watts of power which takes you up to a speed of 25 km / h.
In some EU countries, the Pedelec, like all other bikes,
must comply with certain regulations, the Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example.
Please observe the relevant explanations and general
information provided in the General User Manual.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling assistance, i.e. it can only "assist" the rider when he/
she turns the pedals.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km / h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
•• You do not legally have to have a driving licence.
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
10
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
2.2
Pushing assistance
You can have your specialist cycle shop fit what is known
as "pushing assistance" to your bike.
Button for pushing assistance
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly at a
maximum speed of 6 km / h without you having to turn the
pedals, e. g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage.
In Germany, if you were born later than 01. 04. 1965, you
must have a moped test certificate before you can fit the
pushing assistance. If you already have another type of
driving licence, this automatically includes the moped test
certificate.
The pushing assistance is not suitable for use as starting
assistance.
3 Charging the battery
3.1
To charge the battery, you have to take it out of the holder
on the Pedelec.
Before charging the battery, read the information on the
charger carefully.
Carry handle
Charging operation
›› 1. Take the charger provided out of its packaging
and plug the mains plug into a socket (230 V, observe type plate on the charger).
Battery charge
state indicator
Type plate on charger: Front and back
›› 2. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger.
Grip the battery by the handle, insert the key into the lock
and turn it anticlockwise. The battery is now unlocked and
can be removed from the Pedelec by tilting it sideways.
In doing so, hold on tight to the battery to prevent it from
being dropped.
›› 3. The charging operation starts. The battery LEDs
light up or flash. Once all 5 LEDs have gone out, the
battery is fully charged. You can leave the battery
standing in the charger. However, the charger always draws some current if you leave it plugged in.
›› 4. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the
socket once the charging operation is complete.
3.2
Fitting the battery
›› 1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of
the Pedelec from the left by tilting it outwards at
roughly 45°.
Unlocking the battery
›› 2. In doing so, you must insert the lateral guides
at the bottom of the battery into the guides of the
holder.
›› 3. Tilt the battery towards the bike until it engages in the locking mechanism. If the key is still
in the lock, turn it clockwise then pull it out to lock
the battery in place.
›› 4. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
Tilt to remove
You should now remove the key and keep it in a safe place
to prevent it from breaking off or being lost.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
11
4 Control panel (display)
4.1
LED control panel
You can specify the power assist level via the "Mode"
buttons. The LEDs next to the top button show how much
assistance the motor is currently providing.
All three LEDs light up for two seconds when the power is
switched on.
Please do not put your feet on the pedals during this time.
The power sensor is reset each time the power is switched
on in order for the power supply to the motor to be precisely controlled. A load must not be applied to the sensor
during these two seconds.
1a
1b
The intermediate assist level is subsequently selected
automatically.
2
1
2
Power assist mode selection buttons
On/off (power) button
The control panel on the handlebar has three buttons and
several display panels.
The display panel on the right next to the upper "Mode"
button shows the assist level being used via LEDs.
The "Power" button and corresponding display panel is
below this.
Press the "Power" button to switch the power assist on
and off.
DISPLAY LEDs
ASSIST LEVEL
RATIO
HIGH
powerful
1:2
MID
intermediate
1:1
LOW
gentle
1 : 0.5
Each time you press the "Mode" button the power assist
changes by one level. If you require more assistance,
press the "Mode" arrow that points upwards. If you require less assistance, press the "Mode" arrow that points
downwards.
The battery charge state is indicated by the LEDs next to
this button. All three LEDs light up for two seconds when
the power is switched on.
DISPLAY
(AFTER 2 SECONDS)
BATTERY CHARGE
STATE
3 LEDs light up •••
70 – 100%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 70%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 40%
1 LED flashes slowly ¡
< 10%
At this point you
notice a slight loss
of power.
1 LED flashes quickly ¡
~ 0%
The system shuts
down shortly afterwards.
Increase power assist
Once the highest assist level has been reached, the system
jumps to the lowest assist level the next time the button is
pressed and then moves back up through the levels.
If you require less assistance, press the "Mode" arrow that
points downwards.
Reduce power assist
12
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
The assistance reduces in stages; when you reach "LOW"
(the lowest assist level) it jumps back to "HIGH" (the highest assist level).
4.1.1 Automatic switch-off
If you stop and do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes,
the system switches off automatically. If you subsequently
want to ride using the assistance, you will have to switch
it back on via the control panel.
4.2
LCD control panel
6
5
2
3
4
1
1
On / Off
2
Light switch
3
Charge state indicator
4
Indicator for headlight
5
Power output indicator
(only visible when the bike is in motion)
7
15
6
Speed
7
Display of actual journey length
9
8
Average speed
10
9
Top speed
8
14
10 Total journey length
11 Display panel
12 Assist level
11
13
12
13 Selector button for display panel ("Mode")
14 Reduce assist level
15 Increase assist level
delete all data
Display switched off
Display switched on
Rear
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
13
4.2.1 Function of LCD control panel
4.2.1.1 On / Off button
Press the "On / Off" button to switch on the control panel
and drive.
The assist level that was active at the time the control
panel was switched off is automatically reinstated. The
back-lit display is turned on briefly then goes out. All
recording of data (trip, actual journey length, average
speed, top speed, total journey length) starts as soon
as you switch the control panel on and stops when you
switch it off.
4.2.1.2 Selector button for display panel
You can display the information "Trip", "Average speed",
"Top speed" and "Total journey length" consecutively
by pressing the selector button for the display panel
("Mode").
Reduce power assist
If you press the button that reduces the assist level, the
assistance reduces each time the button is pressed and
returns to the most powerful assist level when it reaches
the end of the loop.
In the "NO ASSIST / no assistance" mode, you ride the bike
normally without the assistance of the motor.
4.2.1.4 Resetting recorded data
The setting that was selected when you switched off is
also displayed first in this case.
If you press the selector button for the display panel for
longer than three seconds with the control panel switched
on, this resets the trip, average speed and top speed readings to zero. You cannot delete the total journey length
using this method.
4.2.1.3 Changing the assist level
4.2.1.5 Switching the display on and off
The back-lit display and LCD control panel display can
also be switched on even if the drive is not enabled. To
do this, press the button that switches the lights on. The
drive remains in "NO ASSIST / no assistance" mode. Now
you cannot change the assist level.
Increase power assist
The following assist levels are displayed one by one when
you press the button that increases the assist level: "NO
ASSIST / no assistance", "ECO / low assist level", "STANDARD / medium assist level", "HIGH / high assist level", followed once again by "NO ASSIST / no assistance". This
means that the amount of assistance increases each time
you press the button until you reach the highest level. If
you subsequently press the button, the assistance switches off.
14
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
If you press the light button when the control panel is
switched on, the back-lit display turns on.
If you press the light button when the light is on, the backlit display turns off. The power assist is still available and
you can change the assist level.
4.2.1.6 Deleting all data
Press the display ("Mode") selector button and the button
that deletes all data on the rear of the control panel at the
same time to delete all the data stored, including the total
journey length. The display then automatically switches
to settings mode for language, LCD contrast and wheel
circumference.
4.2.1.7 R
eprogramming the language, wheel circumference
and LCD contrast
Normal display
Display mode
Settings mode
Display selector button & ▼button for 3 sec.
Press light button to apply the settings
▼ button (setting selection)
Language
selection
▼ button
Adjust LCD
contrast
▼ button
Set
km / h or mph
▼ button
▼ button
Set
wheel circumference
▲ button
▲ button
▲ button
▲ button
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
(setting selection)
Set
journey length
▼button (setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Settings mode
language
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Settings mode
LCD contrast
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(4th digit)
Set
km / h or mph
▼button
▲button
Selector
button
display
Selector
button
display
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(6th digit)
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(4th digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Selector
button
display
* ▲button refers to the ▲button for assist level selection
* ▼button refers to the▼button for assist level selection
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
▲button
(setting selection)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(3rd digit)
Selector
button
display
Set wheel
circumference
(1st digit)
* to scroll more quickly, press ▲ / ▼buttons for more than 2 seconds
▼button
Set
total mileage
(4th digit)
Set wheel
circumference
(2nd digit)
Selector
button
display
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(5th digit)
Set wheel
circumference
(3rd digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(2nd digit)
Selector
button
display
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
Set
total mileage
(1st digit)
▼button
▲button
(setting selection)
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
15
4.2.1.8 Automatic switch-off
If you stop your Pedelec and it does not move for 10 minutes, the system switches off automatically. If you want to
use the assistance again, you will have to switch it back
on via the control panel.
4.2.1.9 Measurement and display ranges
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY RANGE
Speed
0.0 – 99.9 km / h
Journey length
0.0 – 99999 km
(once the distance reaches
9999.9 km, this is displayed without a decimal
place.)
Average speed
0 – 99.9 km / h
Top speed
0.0 – 99.9 km / h
Total journey length
0.0 – 99999 km
(once the distance reaches
9999.9 km, this is displayed without a decimal
place.)
4.2.1.10 Battery charge state indicator
Battery charge state indicator
This indicator helps you save power when riding which
means you can travel further.
The remaining battery charge is shown in 5 stages.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
5 LEDs light up •••••
80 – 100%
4 LEDs light up ••••
60 – 80%
3 LEDs light up •••
40 – 60%
2 LEDs light up ••
20 – 40%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 20%
1 LED flashes ¡
< 10%
no display –
0%
E: Battery is empty
F: Battery is full
4.2.1.11 Power output indicator
The power output indicator shows the actual power output
being requested and the actual power consumption in 6
stages (bars). This indicator helps you save power when
riding which means you can travel further. The fewer of
the 6 bars that are displayed, the lower the actual power
output of the motor and the consumption. If more bars are
visible, the power output and consumption of the motor is
higher.
IF YOU CAN
SEE...
THE BATTERY IS SUPPLYING
A CURRENT OF
6 bars
more than 20 amperes
5 bars
up to 16 – 20 A
4 bars
up to 12 – 16 A
3 bars
up to 8 – 12 A
2 bars
up to 2 – 8 A
1 bar
up to 0 – 2 A
If the power consumption is very low, no bars are
displayed.
16
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
5 Assistance by the electric motor
If your Pedelec is equipped with hub gears, you may
have to take more load off the pedals when changing
gears than you would normally do when riding your
conventional bike. This is due to the additional power
output of the electric motor. The hub gear system
contains a device that protects it against gear shifting
operations under excessive loads in order to preserve
the gear unit in the hub.
5.1
Operating principle of assistance
•• The assist level you have selected
With the "high assist level / HIGH" the power delivered by the motor is double your own effort (1 : 2).
With the "medium assist level / MID", the power
delivered by the motor matches your own effort
(1 : 1). With the "low assist level / LOW / ECO", the
power delivered by the motor is half your own effort (1 : 0.5).
•• The speed at which you are currently travelling
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance
increases as you build up speed until your bike
reaches its maximum speed of roughly 22 km / h.
The assistance then reduces automatically until
you reach a speed of roughly 25 km / h when it
switches off. This applies for the largest gear only.
In all other gears, the motor switches off earlier,
depending on the gear ratio.
The motor provides support as soon as you switch the assistance on and start pedalling.
The thrust delivered by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Your own pedalling effort
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and increases the thrust
accordingly. However, the thrust is limited by the
maximum motor output.
Pedelec 28" • 8-speed • Shimano
increasing pedal
power and
assistance
reducing
assistance
assistance
switched off
Propulsive power (pedal force +
electric assistance)
1.0
Propulsive power
Pedal force
Power-assist mode = 1 : 2
2
Electric assistance
Speed
22 km / h
25 km / h
Variation in electric assistance
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
17
5.2
Distance
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of its
power at low ambient temperatures.
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a large distance assisted by
the motor, select the lower gears, i.e. the ones
that are easier to pedal. Also change to "low assist
level / LOW / ECO".
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high assist level, e. g. when riding
uphill, the motor will provide support with plenty
of power. However, this leads to higher consumption, as with driving a car at high speed on the
motorway. You will therefore have to recharge the
battery sooner. You can conserve energy when riding your bike not just by turning the pedals, but
also by applying even pressure throughout each
crank revolution.
Discharge curve at normal temperatures
Discharge curve at low temperatures
Discharge capacity at normal temperatures
Discharge capacity (Ah) or hours of use
Rate of discharge at different temperatures
18
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
(cutoff voltage)
Difference between normal and low temperature
Minimum voltage for
battery operation
Rated voltage
Discharge capacity at low temperatures
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec
Make sure the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride
your bike with too little air in the tyres, this can
significantly increase the rolling resistance. The
distance you can travel also decreases if the brakes
are rubbing.
5.3
•• Ascents
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is detected by the power sensor which then allows the
motor to work harder.
The operating costs for power assist with an 18 Ah battery
are calculated as follows:
Under ideal conditions, you can cover roughly 140 km
with the battery fully charged (18 Ah). You can expect to
cover a distance of roughly 85 km using different modes of
operation.
DISTANCE COVERED (1 : 1 ASSISTANCE,
22 KM / H ON AVERAGE UNDER FAVOURABLE CONDITIONS)
8 Ah battery
60 km
12 Ah battery
90 km
18 Ah battery
140 km
Distance covered using different batteries
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the travel distance.
•• A new battery costs roughly 599 euros.
•• You can cover 112 km on average with one battery
charge.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1100 charging cycles x 112 km = 123,200 km
•• 599 euros: 123,200 km = 0.47 euro cents / km
•• You use roughly 0.620 kWh to fully charge the battery. Assuming a unit price of 20 euro cents / kWh,
it costs you 12.4 euro cents to fully charge the battery and cover a journey length of 112 km.
•• It costs you 0.20 euro cents / km to travel the minimum distance of 60 km.
•• It costs you 0.09 euro cents / km to travel the maximum distance of 140 km.
•• This means the cost of consumption and the battery is a maximum of 0.67 euro cents / km.
As Derby Cycle is a German manufacturer, the sample calculation is based on German energy prices. The operating
costs may therefore be different in locations where other
energy prices apply.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
19
6 Battery
Your battery is a lithium cobalt battery, the ideal type of
lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery for this application. One of the
main benefits of this type of battery is its low weight combined with a high capacity. Li-ion batteries only weigh half
as much as comparable nickel metal hybride or nickel-cadmium batteries. This means you carry less battery weight
and more battery power.
6.1
Straightforward charging
›› There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
›› Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
›› If you are not using the battery, you must recharge
it after 6 months at the latest.
6.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as it prevents overcharging.
6.3
Straightforward storage
›› If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10 °C at three quarters of its
full charge capacity.
›› The battery enters sleep mode to prevent it from
totally discharging.
›› These benefits are available due to highly effective
battery management that has been adapted to this
specific application and by tuning the battery for
operation with a 250 watt motor.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or after you
have not used it for a while.
›› You should run the battery all the way down to
empty for the first three charging cycles. This allows the battery to reach its maximum capacity.
›› If you continuously run the battery to empty during
normal operation, this reduces its service life.
›› If you partially recharge the battery frequently during normal operation, this has a favourable effect
on its service life.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the battery
whenever possible: Try not to run the battery all
the way down to empty and recharge it even after a
short period of operation.
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as sleep
mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at which the
battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed
to discharge unchecked for an extended period this
can lead to total discharging which damages the
battery. To "wake up" the battery, simply place it in
the charger for one minute.
›› If you are having problems with the battery, place
it in the charger for one minute. A reset occurs,
during which the battery management disables
sleep mode for example. After this, the battery will
work again.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10 °C and +30 °C. It takes longer
to charge the battery at low temperatures, the
battery will not charge up at temperatures higher
than +30 °C. Ideally, you should charge and store
the battery inside your house or in a warm garage
when the outside temperature is low. In this case
you should only fit the battery on your bike just
before using it.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods charged to 75% of its capacity at a temperature of +10°C.
20
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
Li-ion rechargeable battery
Battery may be
damaged
Long charging times
Optimum temperature range
for charging operation
-10 °C
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
Charging times at different temperatures
6.4
Battery information system
There is a control panel with five LEDs and a button
("Push") on the side of the battery that faces outwards.
The LEDs light up if you press the "Push" button. Information about the battery and its charge state is provided
based on the number of LEDs that light up and the way in
which they light up.
6.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
Press the "Push" button briefly, the LEDs light up and display the current battery charge state.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
5 LEDs light up •••••
80 – 100%
4 LEDs light up ••••
60 – 80%
3 LEDs light up •••
40 – 60%
2 LEDs light up ••
20 – 40%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 20%
1 LED flashes ¡
< 10%
no display –
0%
E: Battery is empty
F: Battery is full
Charge state and battery capacity indicator
6.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
If you press the "Push" button for longer than five seconds, the LEDs show the current capacity of the battery.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
5 LEDs light up •••••
100 – 80%
4 LEDs light up ••••
80 – 60%
3 LEDs light up •••
60 – 40%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 20%
1 LED lights up •
20 – 0%
Capacity indicator
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
21
›› Check there is sufficient charge in the battery for
the journey you intend to make before setting off.
›› In winter the distance you can normally cover with
the battery operating normally is less. Only move
the battery from the warm room where you store
it and fit it on your Pedelec just before you set off.
This prevents low temperatures from reducing the
distance you can normally travel. A corresponding diagram is provided in ➠ Chapter 11 “Technical
data”.
›› The distance you can cover can vary depending on
the topography, your handling, the condition of the
battery and the assist level you are using.
›› If all diodes flash consecutively, or several flash
at the same time (2 – 3 diodes), the battery is
damaged.
Before taking the battery to your specialist cycle shop
to have it checked, put the battery in the charger for
one minute then test it again.
6.5
Service life and warranty
6.5.1 of drive
The Panasonic centre motor is a fully-developed durable
and maintenance-free drive. It is a wear part with a twoyear warranty. As its power output is higher, wear parts
such as the drive and brakes are subject to higher loads
than they would be on a normal bike which is why they
wear out more quickly.
6.5.2 of battery
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts also come with a twoyear warranty.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
22
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are
•• the number of charge cycles and
•• the age of the battery.
When you have fully charged and discharged your battery
1,100 times, it will still have 60% of its initial capacity,
providing it has been well looked after:
BATTERY
REMAINING
CAPACITY
~ DISTANCE COVERED
8 Ah
4.8 Ah
19,360 km
12 Ah
7.2 Ah
30,800 km
18 Ah
10.8 Ah
52,800 km
From the technical standpoint above therefore, the battery
is exhausted at this point. It also goes without saying that
the battery ages. Even if you do not use your battery, its
capacity reduces.
Providing you can still cover the journey distances with
this remaining battery capacity, you can of course continue using it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you
can take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who will
dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
›› You can extend the service life of the battery by
fully recharging it after every journey, however
short. The Panasonic Li-cobalt battery has no
memory effect.
›› You can also extend the service life of the battery
by using the assistance selectively. Avoid, for example, using gears that make pedalling difficult
with the highest assist level activated.
7
Charger
Read the two stickers on the charger before using it for the
first time.
8 Troubleshooting
The control panel also indicates when faults and technical
errors are present.
If a fault occurs, the LEDs flash in a specific pattern and
with a specific rhythm. This indicates the cause of the
problem and makes it easier for you to find a solution.
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery
using the charger provided, or a charger approved by
Derby Cycle.
A fault code appears in the LCD display.
LED
LCD
If a fault develops or if the battery is in sleep mode, you
might be able to solve this problem by placing the battery
in the charger for one minute. The battery management
then checks the battery and can eliminate any faults that
have occurred.
Control panel displays
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
Have the electric drive inspected regularly by your
specialist cycle shop. Do not carry out any work on
the electric drive or battery yourself. Unless you have
sufficient expertise this could lead to a serious accident. As a basic rule, always consult your specialist
cycle shop if you have a problem with the electric
drive or the battery.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
You should only have the electrical components of
your Pedelec replaced with genuine parts. This makes
it safer for you and avoids problems when processing
warranty claims.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
23
8.1
roblems / solutions: Flash patterns
P
and their meaning
If a problem occurs in the electrical system of your Pedelec, you should initially try to solve it by referring to the
following list which describes possible causes of errors
and offers solutions. If the fault persists, consult your
specialist cycle shop.
8.1.1 Pedelec with LED control panel
ERROR CODE
24
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
CAUSE
SOLUTION
No power assist. The
power sensor could not
set itself correctly.
Perform restart. The
system performs the
calibration again. No
force should be applied
to the pedals during
this procedure which
takes roughly two seconds.
No power assist. A
problem occurred in
the drive unit.
Motor, sensor unit or
cable defective. Contact your specialist
cycle shop.
The motor output is
less.
The motor is overloaded.
Allow the motor to cool
down and reduce the
assistance.
The motor switches off.
The motor is extremely
overloaded.
Allow the motor to cool
down and reduce the
assistance.
No power assist.
The battery is nearly
empty.
Charge the battery immediately.
8.1.2 Pedelec with LCD control panel
8.1.2.3 Display "E1"
8.1.2.1 No display
If "E1" is displayed, the following cause/solution may
apply:
If nothing is shown in the LCD display, one of the following reasons/solutions may apply:
Error code
›› Is the battery sufficiently charged?
Charge the battery.
›› Is the battery capacity still sufficient?
Check the capacity. If the remaining capacity is not
enough, the battery must be replaced.
Check the actual battery capacity
If you press the "Push" button for longer than five seconds, the LEDs show the capacity of the battery at present.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
5 LEDs light up •••••
100 – 80%
4 LEDs light up ••••
80 – 60%
3 LEDs light up •••
60 – 40%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 20%
1 LED lights up •
20 – 0%
Capacity of 18 Ah battery (example)
8.1.2.2 Battery charge state indicator flashing or not visible
›› You have pushed down on the pedals shortly after
pressing the "Power" button. Switch the display off
then switch it back on and do not push down on the
pedals for roughly 2 seconds.
If "E1" is displayed the distance covered will not be
recorded. It will therefore no longer be possible to
adjust the assistance control and the power assist
will no longer work.
8.1.2.4 Display "E9"
If "E9" is displayed, the following cause/solution may
apply:
Error code
If the battery charge state indicator is flashing or not visible at all, one of the following causes/solutions may apply:
›› Is the battery sufficiently charged?
Charge the battery if necessary.
›› The second and fourth LEDs of the battery indicator
flash when you press the button on the battery. The
battery management has switched the battery off.
Put the battery in the charger and charge it.
›› If you continue to press the button on the battery
(test for battery capacity) and no LED lights up, the
battery management has switched the battery off.
Put the battery in the charger and charge it.
›› A problem occurred with the drive unit. Contact
your specialist cycle shop if this occurs.
If "E9" is displayed the distance covered will not
be recorded. It will therefore no longer be possible
to adjust the assistance control and the power assist will no longer work.
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
25
8.1.2.5 Assistance control indicator flashing
If the assistance control indicator is flashing although the
battery charge is sufficient, the following cause and solution may apply:
›› The drive unit is overloaded / overheated. The
battery management has switched itself on and
reduced the assistance. A short period follows in
which the drive recovers after which the full assistance output is available once again.
If this does not happen, contact your specialist
cycle shop.
8.1.2.6 Additional possible sources of errors
›› If you only pedal very gently, the power assist is
not enabled.
›› If the motor is not running and you cannot pinpoint
the cause, check the buttons, cables and plugs of
the electrical system.
If you find a break or a crack, do not try to repair the
fault yourself. Take your Pedelec to a specialist cycle
shop.
9 Cleaning
Remove the battery before you clean your Pedelec.
We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a damp cloth,
a sponge or a brush. You can obtain suitable cleaning
agents and additional information from your specialist
cycle shop.
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
26
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
10 Warnings
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs as you could burn yourself.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(25.2 volts). Never attempt to operate the
Pedelec using power from a source other
than a suitable genuine battery. The designations of approved batteries are listed in
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by the specialist cycle
shop.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if they could insert objects into the appliance through apertures in the housing as this
poses the danger of fatal electric shock.
11 Technical data
MOTOR
PANASONIC LI-ION BATTERY
Brushless electric motor
Voltage
25.2 V
Output
250 watts
Capacities
8 / 10 / 12 / 18 Ah
Maximum torque at drive pinion
13 Nm
Energy quantity
200 / 250 / 300 / 450 Wh
Gross weight of electric drive, battery,
control unit
7.8 kg (12 Ah battery)
Control
via power sensor
Assist levels
1 : 0.5 | 1 : 1 | 1 : 2
CAPACITY
[AH]
WEIGHT
[KG]
POSSIBLE APPLICATION
DCW
ITEM NO.
ITEM NO.
17017002
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17017012
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17019018
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
17019103
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
KD170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110003
NKY265B02
10
2.4
–
300 W
–
170110016
NKY267B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
170111002
NKY284B2
10
2.4
X
300 W
X
170111200
NKY306B2
8
1.9
X
300 W
X
170111201
NKY304B2
12
2.6
X
300 W
X
170111202
14069
18
3.1
X
300 W
X
CENTRE
FAST
FRONT
Possible applications of batteries
110%
105%
100%
95%
90%
85%
Capacity
80%
75%
70%
– 20 °C
– 10 °C
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
Capacity curve at different temperatures
III User Manual Pedelec with centre motor
27
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new Pedelec!
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction in whole or in part is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
IV
User Manual
Pedelec with front motor
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
3
Motor
4
5
Charger
LED control panel
4
1
2
3
2
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
1
Battery
2
Battery lock
3
Motor unit
4
Control panel
5
Charger
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
from us. This bike is equipped with an electric drive that
assists you when you are cycling. This will make your trip
much more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying
loads or riding into the wind. You can decide yourself how
much you want to use it. The purpose of this User Manual
is to help you get the most out of your Pedelec and use it
correctly.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury,
increased risk of falls or other injuries
Structure of User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
For more detailed information on your Pedelec, refer to
➠ Chapter 12 “Technical data”.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or
special information on using the bike
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec for example, refer
to the General User Manual.
NOTE about possible damage to property or
the environment
Even if you can't wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” carefully without fail before
use.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
3
Content
EC Declaration of Conformity
5Assistance by the electric motor
12
20125
20136
1Quick start 7
2Pedelec / fundamental legal principles 8
2.1Meaning for the rider 8
2.2Pushing assistance 8
5.1Operating principle of assistance
12
9
5.2Riding your Pedelec efficiently
13
3Charging the battery
6Battery 6.1Straightforward charging
14
6.2High degree of safety due to
battery management
14
6.3Straightforward storage
14
6.4Battery information system 15
3.1Charging operation
9
6.4.1Checking the battery charge state
15
3.2Fitting the battery 9
6.4.2Checking the battery capacity
15
4LED control panel (display)
10
4.1Switching the light on and off 11
4.2Automatic switch-off
11
6.5Service life and warranty 16
6.5.1the electric drive
16
6.5.2the battery
16
7Charger 17
8Troubleshooting 17
8.1Problems / solutions: Flash patterns
and their meaning 8.1.1Additional possible sources of errors
4
14
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
18
18
9Removing the front wheel
19
10Cleaning
20
11Warnings
21
12Technical data
22
EC Declaration of Conformity 2012
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 4471 / 966-0
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu C8-36, Agattu C8-26, Agattu C7, Agattu C3, Sahel Pro C8 Disc, Sahel Comp C8, Sahel C8
HS, Sahel C8, Sahel C7, Pro Connect C11 Disc, Pro Connect C8, Pro Connect C8 Disc, Pro Connect C9
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse
Model designation:Agattu C8 HS Impulse, Agattu XXL C8 Impulse, Agattu Premium C11 Impulse, Agattu C8
Impulse, Impulse XXL 8C, Impulse 8C HS, Impulse Premium 8C, Impulse 8C, Impulse
Compact, Sahel Compact, Tasman Classic C8, Tasman Tour XXL C8, Tasman City 8C, Tasman
Tour C8, Connect Lady C8, Connect Lady 8C
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove
Model designation:Groove F8, Groove F3
Product description:
Kalkhoff BionX
Model designation:Image BX27, Image BX24
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch
Model designation:Agattu B
Year of manufacture:
2012
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
21.09.2011
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
EC Declaration of Conformity 2013
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 44 71 / 966 - 111
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu P8-26V, Agattu P8-26V 8G, Pro Connect C8 Disc
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse Pedelec
Model designation:Agattu i8, Agattu Premium i11, Agattu XXL i8R, Agattu i8 HS, Impulse i8R HS, Impulse XXL
i8R, Impulse XXL i8, Impulse Premium i8R, Impulse i8R, Pro Connect i8 HS, Pro Connect i10,
Pro Connect i27, Sahel i8 light, Sahel i8, Sahel i8R, Sahel Compact i8, Sahel Compact i8R,
Sahel i11 Di2, Sahel i360 Harmony, Sahel i360, Tasman Classic i8, Tasman Classic i8R, Tasman
Tour XXL i8, Tasman Tour XXL i8R, Tasman Tour i8, Tasman Tour i8R, Tasman City i8 Roller,
Tasman City i7 Roller, Tasman City i8, Tasman City i8R
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove Pedelec
Model designation:Groove F8
Product description:
Kalkhoff Xion Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect R30, Pro Connect R27
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect B8, Pro Connect B9
Year of manufacture:
2013
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006 / 42 / EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004 / 108 / EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
14. 05. 2012
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
1
Quick start
›› 1. Charge the battery completely before riding for
the first time.
when no force is applied to the pedals to adjust the
power sensor correctly.
›› 9. The intermediate power-assist mode appears
on the display panel of the LED control panel.
Press the "Mode" buttons to select the amount of
assistance: "gentle / LOW", "intermediate / MID" or
"powerful / HIGH“. Press this button once to change
the assist level by one level. You can increase or
reduce the assistance, depending on which "Mode"
button you press.
Unlocking the battery
›› 2. To remove the battery, grip the handle, insert
the key into the lock and turn it anticlockwise. The
battery is now unlocked.
›› 3. Tilt the battery sideways and lift it with both
hands out of the holder.
Always operate one of the brakes before putting one
of your feet on a pedal as the motor pulls your bike
away immediately. This starting assistance is very
convenient, especially when starting on hills. If you
start off in road traffic or on unsurfaced roads without
controlling your speed, you could come off your bike
and seriously injure yourself.
›› 10. You can now ride off.
Tilt when removing
›› 4. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger. The battery LEDs light up or flash. You
must fully charge the battery before using it for the
first time.
›› 5. Once all LEDs have gone out, take the battery
out of the docking station.
›› 6. Reinsert the battery into the holder on the
Pedelec from the left-hand side. Move the battery
outwards at an angle of roughly 45° as you do so,
as you did when you took it out of the holder. Move
the battery into the upright position until the locking mechanism engages. If the key is still in the
lock, you will need to turn it clockwise and pull it
out to allow the battery to lock in place.
›› 7. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and that the key is no longer in the lock.
›› 8. Push the "Power" button on the control panel
on the handlebar. Wait for 2 seconds before turning the pedals. The drive system requires this time
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
7
2 P
edelec / fundamental legal
principles
The fundamental idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also do
this comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply to
get from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this
yourself by choosing an appropriate assist level.
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater
degree of security. Your Pedelec assists you with up to
250 watts of power which takes you up to the speed of
25 km / h.
In some EU countries, the Pedelec, like all other bikes,
must comply with certain regulations, the Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example.
Please observe the relevant explanations and general
information provided in the General User Manual.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling assistance, i.e. it can only "assist" the rider when he/
she turns the pedals.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km / h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the interest of
your own safety, however, you should never ride without
a helmet.
•• You do not legally have to have a driving licence.
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
8
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
2.2
Pushing assistance
You can have your specialist cycle shop fit what is known
as "pushing assistance" to your bike.
Button for pushing assistance
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly at a
maximum speed of 6 km / h without you having to turn the
pedals, e. g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage.
In Germany, if you were born later than 01. 04. 1965, you
must have a moped test certificate before you can fit the
pushing assistance. If you already have another type of
driving licence, this automatically includes the moped test
certificate.
The pushing assistance is not suitable for use as starting
assistance.
3 Charging the battery
3.1
To charge the battery, you have to take it out of the holder
on the Pedelec.
Before charging the battery, read the information on the
charger carefully.
Carry handle
Charging operation
›› 1. Take the charger provided out of its packaging
and plug the mains plug into a socket (230 V, observe type plate on the charger).
Battery charge
state indicator
Type plate on charger: Front and back
›› 2. Put the battery in the docking station of the
charger.
Grip the battery by the handle, insert the key into the lock
and turn it anticlockwise. The battery is now unlocked and
can be removed from the Pedelec by tilting it sideways.
In doing so, hold on tight to the battery to prevent it from
being dropped.
›› 3. The charging operation starts. The battery LEDs
light up or flash. Once all 5 LEDs have gone out, the
battery is fully charged. You can leave the battery
standing in the charger. However, the charger always draws some current if you leave it plugged in.
›› 4. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the
socket once the charging operation is complete.
3.2
Fitting the battery
›› 1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of
the Pedelec from the left by tilting it outwards at
roughly 45°.
Unlocking the battery
›› 2. In doing so, you must insert the lateral guides
at the bottom of the battery into the guides of the
holder.
›› 3. Tilt the battery towards the bike until it engages in the locking mechanism. If the key is still
in the lock, turn it clockwise then pull it out to lock
the battery in place.
›› 4. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
Tilt to remove
You should now remove the key and keep it in a safe place
to prevent it from breaking off or being lost.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
9
4 LED control panel (display)
3
You can specify the power assist level via the "Mode" buttons. The LEDs next to the top button show the level of
assistance you are currently receiving from the motor.
All three LEDs light up for two seconds when the power is
switched on.
1a
Please do not put your feet on the pedals during this time.
The power sensor is reset each time the power is switched
on in order for the power supply to the motor to be precisely controlled. A load must not be applied to the sensor
during this two second period.
1b
2
1
2
3
Power assist mode selection buttons
On/off (power) button
Button for lights
The control panel on the handlebar has three buttons and
several display panels.
The display panel on the right next to the upper "Mode"
button shows the level of active assistance via LEDs.
The "Power" button and corresponding display panel is
below this.
Press the "Power" button to switch the power assist on
and off.
The intermediate assist level is subsequently selected
automatically.
DISPLAY LEDs
ASSIST LEVEL
RATIO
HIGH
powerful
1:2
MID
intermediate
1:1
LOW
gentle
1:0.5
Each time you press the "Mode" button the power assist
changes by one level. If you require more assistance,
press the "Mode" arrow that points upwards. If you require less assistance, press the "Mode" arrow that points
downwards.
The battery charge state is indicated by the LEDs next to
this button. All three LEDs light up for two seconds when
the power is switched on.
DISPLAY
(AFTER 2 SECONDS)
BATTERY CHARGE
STATE
3 LEDs light up •••
70 – 100%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 70%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 40%
1 LED flashes slowly ¡
< 10%
At this point you
notice a slight loss
of power.
1 LED flashes quickly ¡
Increase power assist
Once the highest level has been reached, the system
jumps to the lowest assist level the next time the button is
pressed and then moves back up through the levels.
If you require less assistance, press the "Mode" arrow that
points downwards.
~ 0%
The system shuts
down shortly afterwards.
Reduce power assist
10
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
The assistance reduces in stages; when you reach "LOW"
(the lowest assistance level) it jumps back "HIGH" (the
highest assistance level).
4.1
Switching the light on and off
Button for lights
Press the button shown above to switch the Pedelec lighting on and off.
If you are riding with the lights on and switch off the assistance, the lights also switch off automatically. You must
therefore switch the lights on again.
You must always take the battery with you, even if you
want to ride without assistance as the lights will only
work with the battery.
4.2
Automatic switch-off
If you stop and do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes,
the system switches off automatically. If you subsequently
want to ride using the assistance, you will have to switch
it back on via the control panel.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
11
5 Assistance by the electric motor
5.1
Operating principle of assistance
The motor provides support as soon as you switch the assistance on and start pedalling.
The thrust delivered by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Your own pedalling effort
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and increases the thrust
accordingly. However, the thrust is limited by the
maximum motor output.
•• The assist level you have selected
With the "high assist level / HIGH" the power delivered by the motor is double your own effort (1 : 2).
With the "medium assist level / MID", the power
delivered by the motor matches your own effort
(1 : 1). With the "low assist level / LOW / ECO", the
power delivered by the motor is half your own effort (1 : 0.5).
The speed at which you are currently travelling
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance increases
as you build up your speed until your bike reaches its
maximum speed of roughly 19 km / h. The assistance
then reduces automatically and switches off at roughly
25 km / h. This happens irrespective of the gear you are
using.
increasing pedal
power and
assistance
Distance
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough of its own heat to not lose too
much of its power at low temperatures.
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a large distance assisted by
the motor, select the lower gears, i.e. the ones
that are easier to pedal. Also change to "low assist
level / LOW".
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high level of assistance, e. g. when
riding uphill, the motor will provide support with
plenty of power. However, this leads to higher consumption, as with driving a car at high speed on
the motorway. You will therefore have to recharge
the battery sooner. You can conserve energy when
riding your bike not just by turning the pedals, but
also by applying even pressure throughout each
crank revolution.
reducing
assistance
assistance
switched off
Propulsive force (pedal force +
electric assistance)
Propulsive power
Power assist mode = 1 : 2
2
Electric assistance
Speed
Variation in electric assistance
12
1.0
Pedal force
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
19 km / h
25 km / h
Discharge curve at normal temperatures
Discharge curve at low temperatures
Discharge capacity at normal temperatures
Discharge capacity (Ah) or hours of use
(cutoff voltage)
Rated voltage
Difference between normal and low temperature
Minimum voltage for
battery operation
Discharge capacity at low temperatures
Rate of discharge at different temperatures
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec
Make sure the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride
your bike with too little air in the tyres, this can
significantly increase the rolling resistance. The
distance you can travel also decreases if the brakes
are rubbing.
•• Ascents
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is detected by the power sensor which then allows the
motor to work harder.
Under ideal conditions, you can cover roughly 140 km
with the battery fully charged (18 Ah). You can expect to
cover a distance of roughly 85 km using different modes of
operation.
DISTANCE COVERED (1 : 1 ASSISTANCE,
22 KM / H ON AVERAGE UNDER FAVOURABLE CONDITIONS)
8 Ah battery
60 km
12 Ah battery
90 km
18 Ah battery
140 km
Distance covered using different batteries
5.2
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the travel distance.
The operating costs of power assist with an 18 Ah battery
work out as follows:
•• A new battery costs around 599 euro.
•• You can cover 112 km on average with one battery
charge. You can charge the battery roughly 1,100
times.
•• 1,100 charging cycles x 112 km = 123,200 km
•• 599 euros: 123,200 km = 0.47 euro cents / km
•• You use roughly 0.620 kWh to fully charge the battery. Assuming a unit price of 20 euro cents / kWh,
it costs you 12.4 euro cents to fully charge the battery and cover a journey length of 112 km.
•• It costs you 0.20 euro cents / km to travel the minimum distance of 60 km.
•• It costs you 0.09 euro cents / km to travel the maximum distance of 140 km.
•• This means the cost of consumption and the battery is a maximum of 0.67 euro cents / km.
As Derby Cycle is a German manufacturer, the sample calculation is based on German energy prices. The operating
costs may therefore be different in locations where other
energy prices apply.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
13
6 Battery
Your battery is a lithium cobalt battery, the ideal type of
lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery for this application. One of the
main benefits of this type of battery is its low weight combined with a high capacity. Li-ion batteries only weigh half
as much as comparable nickel metal hybride or nickel-cadmium batteries. This means you carry less battery weight
and more battery power.
6.1
Straightforward charging
›› There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
›› Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
›› If you are not using the battery, you must recharge
it after 6 months at the latest.
6.2
igh degree of safety due to
H
battery management
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as it prevents overcharging.
6.3
Straightforward storage
›› If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10 °C at three quarters of its
full charge capacity.
›› The battery enters sleep mode to prevent it from
totally discharging.
›› These benefits are available due to highly effective
battery management that has been adapted to this
specific application and by tuning the battery for
operation with a 250 watt motor.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or after you
have not used it for a while.
›› You should run the battery all the way down to
empty for the first three charging cycles. This allows the battery to reach its maximum capacity.
›› If you continuously run the battery to empty during
normal operation, this reduces its service life.
›› If you partially recharge the battery frequently during normal operation, this has a favourable effect
on its service life.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the battery
whenever possible: Try not to run the battery all
the way down to empty and recharge it even after a
short period of operation.
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as sleep
mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at which the
battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed
to discharge unchecked for an extended period this
can lead to total discharging which damages the
battery. To "wake up" the battery, simply place it in
the charger for one minute.
›› If you are having problems with the battery, place
it in the charger for one minute. A reset occurs,
during which the battery management disables
sleep mode for example. After this, the battery will
work again.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10 °C and +30 °C. It takes longer
to charge the battery at low temperatures, the
battery will not charge up at temperatures higher
than +30 °C. Ideally, you should charge and store
the battery inside your house or in a warm garage
when the outside temperature is low. In this case
you should only fit the battery on your bike just
before using it.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› The battery is ideally stored for longer periods
charged to 75% of its capacity at a temperature of
+10 °C.
14
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
Li-ion rechargeable battery
Battery may be
damaged
Long charging times
Optimum temperature range
for charging operation
-10 °C
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
Charging times at different temperatures
6.4
Battery information system
There is a control panel with five LEDs and a button
("Push") on the side of the battery that faces outwards.
The LEDs light up if you press the "Push" button. Information about the battery and its charge state is provided
based on the number of LEDs that light up and the way in
which they light up.
6.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
Press the "Push" button briefly, the LEDs light up and display the current battery charge state.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
5 LEDs light up •••••
80 – 100%
4 LEDs light up ••••
60 – 80%
3 LEDs light up •••
40 – 60%
2 LEDs light up ••
20 – 40%
1 LED lights up •
10 – 20%
1 LED flashes ¡
< 10%
no display –
0%
E: Battery is empty
F: Battery is full
Charge state and battery capacity indicator
6.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
If you press the "Push" button for longer than five seconds, the LEDs show the current capacity of the battery.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
5 LEDs light up •••••
100 – 80%
4 LEDs light up ••••
80 – 60%
3 LEDs light up •••
60 – 40%
2 LEDs light up ••
40 – 20%
1 LED lights up •
20 – 0%
Capacity of 18 Ah battery (example)
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
15
›› Check there is sufficient charge in the battery for
the journey you intend to make before setting off.
›› In winter the distance you can normally cover with
the battery operating normally is less. Only move
the battery from the warm room where you store
it and fit it on your Pedelec just before you set off.
This prevents low temperatures from reducing the
distance you can normally travel. A corresponding
diagram is provided in Chapter 12 “Technical data”.
›› The distance you cover can vary depending on the
topography, your handling, the condition of the
battery and the assist level you are using.
›› If all diodes flash consecutively, or several flash
at the same time (2 – 3 diodes), the battery is
damaged.
Before taking the battery to your specialist cycle shop
to have it checked, put the battery in the charger for
one minute then test it again.
6.5
Service life and warranty
6.5.1 the electric drive
The Panasonic front electric drive is a fully-developed
durable and maintenance-free electric drive. It is a wear
part for which a two-year warranty applies.
6.5.2 the battery
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts also come with a twoyear warranty.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. A fault does
not constitute normal ageing and battery wear.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are
•• the number of charge cycles and
•• the age of the battery.
16
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
When you have fully charged and discharged your battery
1,100 times, it will still have 60% of its initial capacity,
providing it has been well looked after:
BATTERY
REMAINING
CAPACITY
~ DISTANCE COVERED
8 Ah
4.8 Ah
19,360 km
12 Ah
7.2 Ah
30,800 km
18 Ah
10.8 Ah
52,800 km
From a technical standpoint therefore, the battery is
"used" at this point. It also goes without saying that the
battery ages. Even if you do not use your battery, its capacity reduces.
Providing you can still cover the journey distances with
this remaining battery capacity, you can of course continue using it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you
can take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who will
dispose of your battery and supply you with a new one.
›› You can extend the service life of the battery by
fully recharging it after every journey, even if it is
small. The Panasonic li-ion cobalt battery has no
memory effect.
›› You can also extend the service life of the battery
by using the assistance selectively. Avoid, for example, using gears that make pedalling difficult
with the most powerful assist level.
7
Charger
Read the two stickers on the charger before using it for the
first time.
8 Troubleshooting
The control panel also indicates when faults and technical errors are present. If a fault occurs, the LEDs flash in a
specific pattern and with a specific rhythm. This indicates
the cause of the problem and makes it easier for you to
find a solution.
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery
using the charger provided, or a charger approved by
Derby Cycle.
If a fault develops or if the battery is in sleep mode, you
might be able to solve this problem by placing the battery
in the charger for one minute. The battery management
then checks the battery and can eliminate any faults that
have occurred.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
Control panel display
Have the electric drive inspected regularly by your
specialist cycle shop. Do not carry out any work on
the electric drive or battery yourself. Unless you have
sufficient expertise this could lead to a serious accident. As a basic rule, always consult your specialist
cycle shop if you have a problem with the electric
drive or the battery.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
You should only have the electrical components of
your Pedelec replaced with genuine parts. This makes
it safer for you and avoids problems when processing
warranty claims.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
17
8.1
roblems / solutions: Flash patterns
P
and their meaning
If a problem occurs in the electrical system of your Pedelec, you should initially try to solve it by referring to the
following list which describes possible causes of errors
and offers solutions. If the fault persists, consult your
specialist cycle shop.
ERROR CODE
CAUSE
SOLUTION
No power assist. The
power sensor could not
set itself correctly.
Perform restart. The
system performs the
calibration again. No
force should be applied
to the pedals during
this procedure which
takes roughly two seconds.
No power assist. A
problem occurred in
the drive unit.
Motor, sensor unit or
cable defective. Contact your specialist
cycle shop.
The motor output is
less.
The motor is overloaded.
Allow the motor to cool
down and reduce the
assistance.
The motor switches off.
The motor is extremely
overloaded.
Allow the motor to cool
down and reduce the
assistance.
No power assist.
The battery is nearly
empty.
Charge the battery immediately.
.
8.1.1 Additional possible sources of errors
›› If you only pedal very gently, the power assist is
not enabled.
›› If the motor is not running and you cannot pinpoint
the cause, check the buttons, cables and plugs of
the electrical system.
18
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
If you find a break or a crack, do not try to repair the
fault yourself. Take your Pedelec to a specialist cycle
shop.
9 Removing the front wheel
As the motor is built into the front wheel, you must perform the following steps before you can remove the front
wheel:
›› To open the white connector, push a sharp object
(tip of a key or ball point pen) down onto the angled surface of the snap-in mechanism, as shown
below. You can pull the two connector halves apart
when pushing this surface back.
›› Take the battery out of the Pedelec.
Always remove the battery before removing the front
wheel and carrying out any subsequent work on the
motor as otherwise you could injure yourself.
›› Undo the two small hexagon socket screws on the
plastic cover that is fitted to the left of the front
wheel by turning them anticlockwise using a 3 mm
Allen key. Keep these in a safe place. Slide the cover to the left and take it off the fork.
White connector
›› To open the green connector, push a flat pointed
object (small screwdriver or small point of a key)
under the small tab. You can disconnect the two
connector halves while lifting the tab.
1
2
Green connector
1 + 2 Hexagon socket screws
›› Once the cover is removed, you should now be able
to see one white and one green cable connector.
Open these connectors and pull them apart.
›› The cables leading to the two connectors, exit from
a black plastic tube just in front of the two connectors. At this point, they are joined together with
metal braiding inside a metal clamp and fastened
with a crosshead screw. Unscrew and remove the
small screw by turning it anticlockwise.
1
2
Base plate with cables and connectors
1 Green connector
2 White connector
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
19
›› Undo the two hexagon socket screws on the left
behind the fork using a 5 mm Allen key. You need
to turn them anticlockwise.
10 Cleaning
Remove the battery before you clean your Pedelec.
Apply a max. tightening torque of 9.5 Nm to these
screws when putting the wheel back on
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
2
1
1 + 2 Hexagon socket screws on the fork
›› You can now start removing the front wheel.
›› Once you have put the front wheel back on, repeat
these steps in reverse. This ensures that your Pedelec will work properly.
For a detailed description on how to remove and install
the front wheel, refer to the General User Manual.
The General User Manual also contains all other bicyclerelated information on your Pedelec.
20
We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a damp cloth,
a sponge or a brush. You can obtain suitable cleaning
agents and additional information from your specialist
cycle shop.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
11 Warnings
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs as you could burn yourself.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(25.2 volts). Never attempt to operate the Pedelec using power from a source other than a
suitable genuine battery. The designations of
approved batteries are listed in ➠ Chapter 12
“Technical data”.
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by the specialist cycle
shop.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if they could insert objects into the appliance through apertures in the housing as this
poses the danger of fatal electric shock.
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
21
12 Technical data
MOTOR
PANASONIC LI-ION BATTERY
Hub motor with planetary gear
Voltage
25.2 V
Output
250 watts
Capacities
8 / 10 / 12 / 18 Ah
Maximum torque
16 Nm
Energy quantity
200 / 250 / 300 / 450 Wh
Gross weight of electric drive, battery,
control unit
7.0 kg (12 Ah battery)
Control
via power sensor
Assist levels
1 : 0.5 | 1 : 1 | 1 : 2
Speed of front wheel, at which the assistance switches off
202 rpm
CAPACITY
[AH]
WEIGHT
[KG]
POSSIBLE APPLICATION
DCW
ITEM NO.
ITEM NO.
17017002
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17017012
NKY226B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
17019018
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
17019103
NKY252B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
KD170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110010
NKY266B02
10
2.4
X
250 W
–
170110003
NKY265B02
10
2.4
–
300 W
–
170110016
NKY267B02
10
2.4
–
–
X
170111002
NKY284B2
10
2.4
X
300 W
X
170111200
NKY306B2
8
1.9
X
300 W
X
170111201
NKY304B2
12
2.6
X
300 W
X
170111202
14069
18
3.1
X
300 W
X
CENTRE
FAST
FRONT
Possible applications of batteries
110%
105%
100%
95%
90%
85%
Capacity
80%
75%
70%
– 20 °C
– 10 °C
0 °C
10 °C
Capacity curve at different temperatures
22
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
20 °C
30 °C
40 °C
50 °C
IV User Manual Pedelec with front motor
23
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new Pedelec!
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction in whole or in part is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
V
User Manual
Pedelec Impulse
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
5a
5b
4
LED control panel
LCD control panel
LCD display
6
Charger
4
5a 5b
1
Battery
2
Battery lock
3
Motor unit
4
LED control panel
5a LCD control panel
5b LCD display
6
2
1
3
2
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
Charger
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
featuring the innovative Impulse drive from our company.
This bike is equipped with an electric drive that assists
you when you are cycling. This will make your trip much
more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying loads
or riding into the wind. You can decide yourself how much
you want to use it. Your Pedelec is the first in the world
to feature a combination of centre motor and back-pedal
brake. The purpose of this User Manual is to help you get
the most out of your Pedelec and use it correctly.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury,
increased risk of falls or other injuries
Structure of User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
or special information on using the bike
More detailed information on your Pedelec is provided in
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec for example, refer
to the General User Manual.
NOTE regarding possible damage to property
or the environment
Even if you can’t wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should read ➠ Chapter
1 “Quick start” carefully without fail before use.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
3
Contents
EC Declaration of Conformity 20126
20137
1Quick start 2Legal principles 5.1.4Battery charge state indicator 16
5.1.5Troubleshooting
16
5.2LCD control panel with display
9
10
2.1Meaning for the rider 10
2.2Pushing assistance 10
3Special features of the Pedelec
with Impulse drive
10
4 Charging the battery
12
5.2.1On/Off button
19
5.2.2Buttons for power-assist level
19
5.2.3Display of the power-assist mode
19
5.2.4Battery charge state indicator
19
5.2.5Remaining range indicator
20
5.2.6Troubleshooting
20
5.2.6.1Condensation appearing
on the LCD display
4.1
Learning cycle
13
4.3Fitting the battery 13
5.1LED control panel 4
12
4.2Charging operation
5 Control panels
18
14
14
20
5.3Setting and programming the LCD display 21
5.3.1Delete trip data /
Delete overall data
21
5.3.2Device settings
21
5.3.2.1Contrast
21
5.3.2.2Brightness
21
5.3.2.3Language
21
5.3.2.4Wheel circumference
22
5.3.2.5Unit
22
5.1.1On/Off button
14
5.3.2.6Name
22
5.1.2Buttons for power-assist level
15
5.3.2.7Factory settings
22
5.1.3Display of the power-assist mode 15
5.3.2.8Software
22
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
5.3.3Cost specifications
23
5.3.3.1Fuel price
23
5.3.3.2Electricity costs
23
5.3.3.3Fuel consumption
23
5.3.3.4Fuel type
23
5.3.3.5Back
23
6Assistance by the electric motor
24
6.1Operating principle of assistance
24
6.2Distance
25
6.3Riding your Pedelec efficiently
25
7Battery 7.1Straightforward charging
7.1.1Learning cycle
8Charger 30
9Cleaning
31
10Warnings
31
11Technical data
32
26
26
26
7.2High degree of safety due to battery
management26
7.3Straightforward storage
26
7.4Battery information system 28
7.4.1Checking the battery charge state 28
7.4.2Checking the battery capacity
28
7.5Service life and warranty 29
7.5.1of the drive
29
7.5.2of the battery
29
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
5
EC Declaration of Conformity 2012
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 4471 / 966-0
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu C8-36, Agattu C8-26, Agattu C7, Agattu C3, Sahel Pro C8 Disc, Sahel Comp C8, Sahel C8
HS, Sahel C8, Sahel C7, Pro Connect C11 Disc, Pro Connect C8, Pro Connect C8 Disc, Pro Connect C9
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse
Model designation:Agattu C8 HS Impulse, Agattu XXL C8 Impulse, Agattu Premium C11 Impulse, Agattu C8
Impulse, Impulse XXL 8C, Impulse 8C HS, Impulse Premium 8C, Impulse 8C, Impulse
Compact, Sahel Compact, Tasman Classic C8, Tasman Tour XXL C8, Tasman City 8C, Tasman
Tour C8, Connect Lady C8, Connect Lady 8C
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove
Model designation:Groove F8, Groove F3
Product description:
Kalkhoff BionX
Model designation:Image BX27, Image BX24
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch
Model designation:Agattu B
Year of manufacture:
2012
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
21.09.2011
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
EC Declaration of Conformity 2013
The manufacturer:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 44 71 / 966 - 111
hereby declares that the following products:
Product description:
Kalkhoff Pedelec Panasonic
Model designation:Agattu P8-26V, Agattu P8-26V 8G, Pro Connect C8 Disc
Product description:
Kalkhoff Impulse Pedelec
Model designation:Agattu i8, Agattu Premium i11, Agattu XXL i8R, Agattu i8 HS, Impulse i8R HS, Impulse XXL
i8R, Impulse XXL i8, Impulse Premium i8R, Impulse i8R, Pro Connect i8 HS, Pro Connect i10,
Pro Connect i27, Sahel i8 light, Sahel i8, Sahel i8R, Sahel Compact i8, Sahel Compact i8R,
Sahel i11 Di2, Sahel i360 Harmony, Sahel i360, Tasman Classic i8, Tasman Classic i8R, Tasman
Tour XXL i8, Tasman Tour XXL i8R, Tasman Tour i8, Tasman Tour i8R, Tasman City i8 Roller,
Tasman City i7 Roller, Tasman City i8, Tasman City i8R
Product description:
Kalkhoff Groove Pedelec
Model designation:Groove F8
Product description:
Kalkhoff Xion Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect R30, Pro Connect R27
Product description:
Kalkhoff Bosch Pedelec
Model designation:Pro Connect B8, Pro Connect B9
Year of manufacture:
2013
comply with all of the relevant requirements of the Machinery Directive (2006 / 42 / EC).
Furthermore, the machine complies with all of the requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004 / 108 / EC).
The following harmonized standards have been applied:
DIN EN 15194Cycles – Electrically power-assisted cycles – EPAC cycles
DIN EN 14764City and trekking bikes – Safety requirements and test methods
Technical documentation filed at:
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Siemensstraße 1 – 3
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
Olaf Flunkert
Production, Purchasing and
Technology Manager
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
49661 Cloppenburg, Germany
14. 05. 2012
Karl-Heinz Lange
Design and Development Manager
8
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
1
Quick start
›› 1. Charge the battery completely before riding for
the first time. Charge temperature: 0 – 45°C
›› 2. Swivel the round charging socket cover on the
battery to one side.
›› 5. If you have charged the battery in the docking
station, reinsert the battery into the holder on the
Pedelec from the left-hand side. Tilt the battery
outwards at an angle of roughly 45° as you do so,
as you did when you took it out of the holder. Move
the battery into the upright position until the locking mechanism engages. If the key is still in the
lock, you will need to turn it clockwise and pull it
out as otherwise the battery will not lock in place.
›› 6. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and that the key is no longer in the lock.
If your Pedelec is equipped with an LCD control
panel:
›› 7. Push the Power button on the control panel on
the handlebar.
Now insert the four-pole plug of the charger into
the battery charging socket.
›› 8. The display panel now displays the medium
power-assist mode SPORT. Press the arrow buttons to select the level of assistance: STAND BY
(off), ECO (low), SPORT (medium) or POWER (high).
Press this button once to change the level of assistance by one level. This works both ways, depending on which arrow button you press.
The following applies for bikes which are equipped
with a back-pedal brake:
Charging the battery
›› 3. Insert the mains plug for the charger into the
socket.
You must fully charge the battery before using it for
the first time.
›› 4. Once all LEDs on the battery have gone out, pull
the charger plug out of the battery socket. Swivel
the cover back over the charging socket.
›› 9. The system will now perform a system check.
“Please move the pedals” will appear on the
screen. If you set off now the system will normally
detect a pedal movement in the “drive” and “backpedal brake” directions. This completes the safety
check, and you can ride as normal with assistance.
If you cannot feel any assistance, simply back-pedal
briefly and then pedal forwards again to trigger the
system check. If there is still no assistance being
delivered, the instruction “Please move the
pedals” will continue to be displayed. In this case
you should consult a specialist dealer.
You can also remove the battery from your Pedelec
and charge it in the docking station. For more information, refer to ➠ Chapter 4 “Charging the battery”.
You can now ride off just as you would if you were
riding a normal bike. The motor starts providing
assistance as soon as the rear wheel starts turning.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
9
2 Legal principles
2.2
The essential idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate assist level.
Your Pedelec is available in a version with or without
pushing assistance. Your specialist cycle shop can retrofit
a control panel with pushing assistance if required.
Pushing assistance
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater
degree of security. Your Pedelec assists you with an output
that adapts to your pedalling force up to roughly 25 km/h.
In some EU countries, the Pedelec, like all other bikes,
must comply with certain regulations, the Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example.
Please observe the relevant explanations and general
information provided in the General User Manual.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling
assistance, i.e. it can only “assist” the rider when
he/she turns the pedals.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km/h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
•• You do not legally have to have a driving license
(unless you own a model with pushing assistance,
➠ Chapter 2.2 “Pushing assistance”).
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
Button for pushing assistance
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly (at a
maximum speed of 6 km/h) without you having to turn the
pedals, e.g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage.
If you were born after 01. 04. 1965, you will need a moped
test certificate for the version with pushing assistance. If
you already have another type of driving licence, this
automatically includes the moped test certificate.
The pushing assistance is not suitable for use as starting
assistance.
3 S
pecial features of the Pedelec
with Impulse drive
Your Pedelec has special features that are designed to
enhance your safety and comfort, some of which are
unique worldwide.
›› The Impulse drive has been developed exclusively
to allow a centre motor to be installed without
having to dispense with the safety and convenience
of a back-pedal function.
This means you can rely on three brakes; the familiar
back-pedal brake and the powerful, modern rim brakes.
1
3
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
10
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
1
2
3
Rim brake, front
Back-pedal brake
Rim brake, rear
2
8. Gear
7. Gear
6. Gear
5. Gear
4. Gear
3. Gear
2. Gear
1. Gear
›› You can conveniently use the same key to lock/
unlock your battery and, where present, your frame
lock.
›› In contrast to a hub motor, the Impulse centre
motor centre motor drive allows you to ride within
the motor range that saves the most power or, if
required, the range in which the highest output is
available.
Output
›› With the Impulse drive, the amount of assistance
can be increased by selecting easier gears, when
starting or riding uphill for example. The motor
produces more power when your pedalling cadence
is higher.
20 km/h
Speed
Max.
speed
Output curves of the centre motor
Frame lock
Output curve of the hub motor
Battery lock
›› You can decide how you wish to put in your effort:
In the three highest gears, you can ride up to a
maximum speed of 25 km/h assisted by the motor.
You can, for example, go for a relaxed ride on the
flat with a low pedalling cadence. However, you
can also ride uphill using an easier gear and less
energy, simply by making the most of the highest
assisted speed. You should therefore either turn
the pedals more slowly (low cadence) with more
effort or turn them more quickly (high cadence)
with less effort.
OTHER CENTRE MOTOR
GEAR
CRANK REVOLUTIONS/MIN.
SPEED (KM/H)
IMPULSE DRIVE
MOTOR
SPEED
CRANK REVOLUTIONS/MIN.
SPEED (KM/H)
MOTOR
SPEED
1
71
8
3,000
86
12
4,300
2
71
10
3,000
86
13
4,300
3
71
12
3,000
86
15
4,300
4
71
13
3,000
86
19
4,300
5
71
16
3,000
86
22
4,300
6
71
19
3,000
85
25
4,200
7
71
22
3,000
73
25
3,650
8
71
25
3,000
64
25
3,200
The data provided is an example for the assistance function.
The data may vary depending on the model.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
11
4 Charging the battery
›› 1. Grip the battery by the handle, insert the key
into the lock and turn it anticlockwise.
›› You can charge the battery whilst it is on the
Pedelec (as described in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”).
Unlocking the battery
›› You can also remove the battery from the holder
and charge it in the docking station. This is recommended if it is cold outside, in order to charge the
battery in a warm room. The battery can be
charged at temperatures between 0 and 45°C.
›› 2. Now the battery is unlocked and can be
removed. To remove it, tilt the Pedelec to one side.
In doing so, hold on tight to the battery to prevent
it from being dropped.
Tilt when removing
›› 3. You should now remove the key and keep it in a
safe place to prevent it from breaking off or being
lost.
Carry handle
LED display panel
12
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
4.1
Learning cycle
After fully charging the battery for the first time and
thereafter roughly once every six months, you must
run the battery down until the system switches off.
This procedure (a so-called “learning cycle”) is necessary so that the battery management recognises
the changes in the capacity caused by age and wear
and tear, in other words, the performance level of
the battery. Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is
calculated anew and correctly represented. With this
procedure, you can prevent a sudden loss of electrical
assistance during an extended trip.
4.2
Charging operation
responding LED flashes. If this stage has been fully
charged, the LED will light up permanently. Now
the next LED will begin to flash.
After all five LEDs have gone out, the battery is
fully charged.
Before charging the battery, read the information on the
charger carefully.
›› 1. Take the charger and docking station provided
out of its packaging and plug the mains plug into a
socket (230 V, please observe type plate on the
charger).
›› 5. If the LED of the charger flashes red permanently, a charging fault has developed.
Take the battery out of the charger, then put it back
in. The charger tests the battery and performs
readjustments, if required. If the LED on the charger
still flashes, take the charger and battery to your
specialist dealer. He will test the devices and
replace them, if required.
›› 6. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the
socket once the charging operation is complete.
Type plates on charger and docking station
To charge the battery safely, the charger must be
placed on a suitable surface resting on its four
feet with the LED facing upwards. This is the only
way to ensure that the hot air around the battery
warmed during the charging operation can dissipate via the surrounding ventilation slots.
4.3
Fitting the battery
›› 1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of the
Pedelec from the left by tilting it outwards at
roughly 45°.
›› 2. Connect the charger to the docking station. The
LED in the docking station now lights up briefly in
red and then permanently in green.
›› 3. Put the battery in the holder of the docking
station. The battery and charger are connected. The
LED in the charger lights up in green.
Reinstalling the battery
›› 2. Make sure in doing so that the lateral guides at
the bottom of the battery are also inserted into the
guides in the holder.
›› 3. Tilt the battery towards the bike until it
engages in the locking mechanism. If the key is
still in the lock, turn it clockwise then pull it out to
lock the battery in place.
Battery in the docking station
›› 4. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
›› 4. The charging operation starts. The LED in the
charger now lights up green. The battery LEDs light
up one by one to indicate the progress of the charging operation. The battery is charged in five stages.
When charging of one stage is in progress, the corV User Manual Impulse Pedelec
13
5 Control panels
When buying your Impulse Pedelec, there are two different
control panels to choose from: with an LED or LCD display.
With the LED display, lit diodes display the information for
you, while more information is displayed with the LCD element. In addition, text and digits are shown on the display.
5.1
LED control panel
1a
On/Off button
If the model features pushing assistance, the switch for
this will be on the underside of the control panel.
3
4
2
1b
5
1
2
3
4
5
Buttons for power assist level
On/Off switch
Battery charge state indicator
Power-assist mode indicator
Button for pushing assistance (optional)
The control panel on the handlebar has three or four buttons (depending on the model) and two rows of LED indicators. The buttons used to control the level of assistance
are located on the left-hand side of the control panel.
Above and to the right you can see the row of LED indicators that shows which level of assistance has been activated and the current battery charge state.
Row of LED indicators for charge state and assistance
The “Power” button is located below the LEDs. Press this
button to switch the control panel on and off.
14
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
Button for pushing assistance
5.1.1 On/Off button
Press the “Power” button to switch the control panel on
and off.
After it has been switched on, the system is always in the
medium power-assist mode SPORT.
The following applies only to bikes which are equipped
with a back-pedal brake:
The system will now perform a system check. At this time,
the LED on the left will now come on for approx. two seconds, followed by all LEDs for approx. one second. If you
set off now, the system will normally detect a pedal movement in the “drive” and “back-pedal brake” directions.
This completes the system check, and you can ride as
normal with assistance.
If you cannot feel any assistance, simply back-pedal
briefly and then pedal forwards again to trigger the
system check. In the event that the LEDs continue to
flash in the pattern described above and the motor is
not providing any assistance, then you should consult
a specialist dealer.
5.1.2 Buttons for power-assist level
5.1.3 Display of the power-assist mode
You can specify the power-assist level via the arrow buttons.
The bottom row of LEDs on the right of the display next to
the buttons for selecting the power-assist level shows you
how much assistance the motor is currently providing.
Display of power-assist mode
DISPLAY
ASSIST LEVEL
POWER: The LED on the right
of the display will light up.
This means the assistance is
working hard.
Buttons for power-assist level
Each time you press an arrow button the power assist
changes by one level.
SPORT: The LED in the middle
of the display will light up. This
means the assistance is working
with a medium level of effort.
Each time you press the button with the arrow pointing
upwards, the assistance increases by one level from “no
assistance/stand by” through to the highest level: POWER.
ECO: The LED on the left of
the display will light up. This
means the assistance is working with a low level of effort.
STANDBY: battery indicator
still lights up (
)
Assist level
Increase power assist
Each time you press the button with the arrow pointing
downwards, the assistance decreases by one level from
POWER through to the no assistance level STAND BY.
›› The LED on the right of the display lights up when
the highest level of assistance (POWER) is activated. This means the assistance is working hard.
›› The LED in the centre of the display lights up when
the medium assist level (SPORT) is activated. This
means the assistance is working with a medium
level of effort.
›› The LED on the left of the display lights up when
the lowest assist level (ECO) is activated. This
means the assistance is only working with a low
level of effort.
Reduce power assist
›› If the assistance is switched off (STAND BY), only
the charge state indicator LEDs remain lit. You now
receive no assistance at all from the motor.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
15
5.1.4 Battery charge state indicator
5.1.5 Troubleshooting
The battery charge state indicator is located above the
row of LEDs that displays the power-assist mode.
The control panel shows you when faults occur. In such a
situation, the LEDs on the battery display will show a particular flash pattern:
Battery charge state indicator
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
100% – 80%
›› In that case, switch the system off and then back
on again.
80% – 60%
60% – 40%
›› If the problem occurs again, put the battery in the
charger, so that the battery management can eliminate an existing problem. You can also use another
approved battery.
40% – 20%
20% – 10%
›› If the flashing signal persists, have the system
checked by a specialist dealer.
< 10%
LED lights up
LED flashes
If all of the LEDs on the battery display flash simultaneously immediately after switching the system on, this
means that there is a problem with the battery communication.
LED off
Battery charge state
If the battery charge state falls below a minimum level,
the system switches off. No LEDs light up on the control
panel.
If you do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes, the
system switches off automatically. If you subsequently want to ride using the assistance, you will have to
switch it back on via the control panel.
If, shortly after setting off or during a journey, the lefthand LED blinks briefly and then all LEDs flash, this means
that one of the problems described below is present:
CAUSE
SOLUTION
Spoke magnet has
slipped out of position
Make sure the spoke magnet
has not slipped. It should
be as close as possible to
the sensor on the chain stay
(max. 5 mm clearance).
Speed sensor defective
Have your specialist cycle
shop check and, if necessary,
repair it.
Cable connection
defective
Have your specialist cycle
shop check and, if necessary,
repair it.
No connection between
motor unit and battery
›› Connect the battery to the
charger.
›› Use a different battery.
›› Have your specialist cycle
shop check the control
cable that runs from the
battery plug to the motor
unit.
16
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
1
2
1
2
Spoke magnet
Sensor on chain stay
Have the electric drive inspected regularly by your
specialist cycle shop. Do not carry out any work on
the electric drive or battery yourself. Unless you have
sufficient expertise this could lead to a serious
accident. As a basic rule, always consult your specialist cycle shop if you have a problem with the electric
drive or the battery.
Only for bikes which are equipped with a back-pedal brake:
If the left-hand LED begins to flash with a long flash, followed by short flashes from all LEDs, this means that you
have still to carry out the safety test for the “drive” or
“back-pedal brake” pedal positions or that the positions
were not recognised correctly.
›› In this case, move the pedals forward once and
then back once, until you can feel some resistance.
If the flashing signal disappears you can ride off
normally. If the flashing signal continues, you can
ride as if you were riding a bike without power
assist. Have a specialist dealer check your error
message and rectify the problem.
You should only have the electrical components of
your Pedelec replaced with genuine parts. This makes
it safer for you and avoids problems when processing
warranty claims.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
17
5.2
LCD control panel with display
LCD display
LCD control panel
1
2
2
3
4
1
4
5
3
5
1
2
3
4
5
Power
More powerful assistance
Less powerful assistance
Set
Pushing assistance
••
••
••
••
1
The “Power” button is located on the righthand side. Press once to switch the system on and
press a second time to switch it off.
2
3
The arrow buttons used to control the
level of assistance are located on the left-hand side
of the control panel.
4 The “Set” button is located between the arrow
buttons. Using this button, different displays can
be called up. Program the system with your desired
data.
5 If the model features pushing assistance, the
switch for this will be on the underside of the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
Speed
Power-assist mode
Battery charge state
Remaining distance display
Information area
The LCD display in the middle of the handlebar is divided
into five different display panels.
••
1
••
2
At the top on the left is your current speed.
Next to current speed on the right is a display
showing the selected power-assist mode.
3
••
At the top on the right is the battery symbol
which tells you the current charge state of your
Pedelec’s battery.
••
4 Below this, you can see the remaining distance
over which you will still receive assistance from
the current battery charge.
••
5 Along the bottom section of the display is a
long information area that can be used to display
the following information:
•• How much of its potential output the motor is
currently delivering.
•• The costs that have been incurred in the course
of the current trip and during the Pedelec’s
entire service life.
•• The savings achieved in both euros and CO2 in
comparison with the same journey by car.
•• The total number of kilometres covered by this
system.
•• Display of kilometres covered during the day
and overall.
18
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
•• Display of journey time during the current trip
and the top speed reached on this trip.
•• The average speed during the current trip and
the total distance covered.
5.2.3 Display of the power-assist mode
The LCD display shows you how much assistance the
motor is currently providing.
DISPLAY
5.2.1 On/Off button
ASSIST LEVEL
POWER: This means the
assistance is working hard.
Press the button to switch the LCD control panel on and
off.
SPORT: This means the
assistance is working with
a medium level of effort.
After switching on, the system is always in the display
mode in which you switched it off.
The following applies for bikes which are equipped with a
back-pedal brake:
ECO: This means the assistance is only working with a
low level of effort.
The system will now perform a system check. “Please
move the pedals” will appear on the screen. If you set off
now the system will normally detect a pedal movement in
the “drive” and “back-pedal brake” directions. This completes the safety check, and you can ride as normal with
assistance.
STANDBY: Battery indicator
still lights up (
)
If you cannot feel any assistance, simply back-pedal briefly
and then pedal forwards again to trigger the system check.
If there is still no assistance being delivered, the instruction
“Please move the pedals” will continue to be displayed. In
this case you should consult a specialist dealer.
5.2.2 Buttons for power-assist level
Assist level
5.2.4 Battery charge state indicator
The battery charge state display is located in the top
right-hand corner of the LCD display. Using a stylised battery divided into segments, it shows the charge remaining
in the battery.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
You can specify the power-assist level via the arrow buttons.
100 – 85.5%
Each time you press an arrow button the power assist
changes by one level.
85.5 – 71.5%
Each time you press the button with the arrow pointing
upwards, the assistance increases by one level from “no
assistance/stand by” through to the highest level: POWER.
Each time you press the button with the arrow pointing
downwards, the assistance decreases by one level from
POWER through to the lowest assistance level “no assistance/stand by”.
71.5 – 57.5%
57.5 – 42.4% 42.5 – 28.5%
28.5 – 14.5%
If the battery charge state falls below a minimum level,
the system switches off. Then the entire display fades and
goes off.
If you do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes, the system switches off automatically. If you subsequently want
to ride using the assistance, you will have to switch it
back on via the control panel.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
19
5.2.5 Remaining range indicator
5.2.6 Troubleshooting
Below and to the right of the charge state indicator, the
distance in km over which you can still travel with power
assist is displayed.
5.2.6.1 Condensation appearing on the LCD display
This “remaining range” is calculated using two measurements taken during the current journey. One short
and one long measurement give a representative
average value. If the conditions of the journey
change, for example, by riding up an incline after a
long, flat stretch, the value displayed can also change
at short notice. Please consider this factor when planning your trips.
If your bike has been exposed to wet conditions for an
extended period, e.g. after a trip in heavy rain, or if
there have been large differences in temperature, the
screen of the LCD display may steam up. This moisture does not impair the function of the display. It is
comparable with the steam on a pair of glasses when
you enter a warmer room having been outside. After
a short time in drier and warmer conditions, this condensation will vanish leaving no trace.
1 Spoke magnet
2Sensor on chain
stay
1
2
If all three LEDs flash simultaneously when switching on
or during a journey, the following fault is present:
TEXT
CAUSE
SOLUTION
Speed sensor signal
missing
Spoke magnet has slipped out of
position
›› Make sure the spoke magnet has not slipped.
It should be as close as possible to the sensor
on the chain stay (max. 5 mm clearance).
Speed sensor defective
›› Have your specialist cycle shop
check and, if necessary, repair it.
Cable connection defective
›› Have your specialist cycle shop
check and, if necessary, repair it.
No connection between motor
unit and battery
›› Connect the battery to the charger.
Battery communication
error
›› Use a different battery.
›› Have your specialist cycle shop check the
control cable that runs from the battery plug
to the motor unit.
Motor temperature is
too high
The motor has become too hot,
e.g. as a result of a long, steep
incline ridden in a high gear.
›› Allow the motor to cool down for a while
before resuming your journey.
Battery temperature is
too high
The battery has become too hot.
›› Allow the battery to cool down for a while
by not riding or by riding without assist. If
necessary place the battery in the charger for
a minute.
20
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
5.3
etting and programming the LCD
S
display
By pressing the Set button, you can switch between the
various displays within the information area (named
“main menu” in the illustration). Pressing and holding the
Set button will take you from any display in the information area/main menu to the menu sub-items
•• Delete trip data
•• Name (➠ 5.3.2.6)
•• Factory settings (➠ 5.3.2.7)
•• Software (➠ 5.3.2.8)
Using the two arrow keys on the control panel, you can
select the sub-items and confirm by pressing the Set button. The menu item “Back” will take you back to the main
menu.
•• Delete overall data
5.3.2.1 Contrast
•• Device settings
You can leave the contrast of the display at its preset
level or adjust it in 5% steps to between -35% to +20%
by pressing the two arrow keys. The change in contrast is
implemented immediately. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
•• Target cost
•• Back
You can select the menu sub-items using the two arrow
keys on the control panel. You can confirm your selection
by pressing the Set button. The respective contents are
then displayed for you. You can also make changes to the
settings. In order to return to the information area/main
menu display from the menu sub-items, you must select
the menu item “Back” and confirm by pressing the Set
button.
5.3.1 Delete trip data /
Delete overall data
Under the menu sub-items “Delete trip data” and “Delete
overall data”, you can delete the kilometres indicated for
the current day trip and the total kilometres covered. If
you wish to do so, select the option “Yes” using the arrow
keys on the control panel and then press the Set button
to confirm your selection. Then you will be taken back to
the menu sub-item display once more. If you select and
confirm the option “No”, the information remains in place
and you are, likewise, taken back to the menu sub-item
display.
5.3.2.2 Brightness
You can leave the brightness of the display at its preset
level or adjust it in 5% steps to between 0% and 50% by
pressing the two arrow keys. The change in brightness is
implemented immediately. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
5.3.2.3 Language
You can choose to have the information shown on the
display in the following languages:
•• Deutsch
•• English
•• Francais
•• Nederlands
•• Espanol
•• Italiano
5.3.2 Device settings
•• Suomi
Under the menu sub-item “Device settings”, you can
change the following display settings:
•• Dansk
•• Contrast (➠ 5.3.2.1)
•• Brightness (➠ 5.3.2.2)
You can select the relevant language using the two arrow
keys. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and
then takes you back to the menu sub-item display.
•• Language (➠ 5.3.2.3)
•• Wheel circumference (➠ 5.3.2.4)
•• Unit (➠ 5.3.2.5)
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
21
5.3.2.4 Wheel circumference
Pressing the Set button will take you to the section for
adjusting the wheel circumference. This can be set to any
value between 1510 mm and 2330 mm by pressing the
two arrow keys. Pressing the Set button confirms your
selection and then takes you back to the menu sub-item
display.
›› You can switch between lower case and capital letters by selecting “abc … / ABC …” on the right of the
display panel and pressing the Set button to confirm. The letters then immediately appear as lower
case or capital letters.
›› The use of spaces is not possible and underscores
must be used in their place.
›› By selecting “OK” using the two arrow keys on the
control panel and confirming using the Set button,
your entry is accepted and you are then taken back
to the menu sub-item display.
A change to the setting becomes necessary, for example, when you have the tyres on your Pedelec
exchanged for some of a different size. In order to
continue to display the correct data, the new wheel
circumference must be entered.
5.3.2.5 Unit
Under the sub-item “Unit”, you can choose whether information relating to distance travelled and speed is displayed in kilometres (km) or miles (mi). Using the arrow
keys on the control panel, select the option “km” or “mi”.
Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then
takes you back to the menu sub-item display.
5.3.2.6 Name
Under the sub-item “Name”, you can enter a name or some
text with a maximum of 21 characters which will be displayed when the LCD display is turned on or off.
›› To write, select one letter at a time from the alphabet displayed using the arrow keys and confirm
your selection by pressing the Set button. The
letter then appears in the text line above the row
of letters. At the end of the row of letters, you can
select a hyphen or an underscore and confirm by
pressing the Set button.
›› Errors can be corrected by selecting the right-hand
arrow and pressing the Set button. You can only
delete one letter each time.
22
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
5.3.2.7 Factory settings
Under the sub-item “Factory settings”, you are asked
whether you want to restore the settings which were preset upon leaving the factory. If you wish to do so, select
the option “Yes” using the arrow keys on the control panel
and then press the Set button to confirm your selection.
Then you will be taken back to the menu sub-item display
once more. If you select and confirm the option “No”, the
amended specifications remain in effect and you are, likewise, taken to the menu sub-item display once more.
5.3.2.8 Software
Via the sub-item “Software” you can access the sub-items
“Version” and “Update”, which can be selected using the
arrow keys on the control panel.
›› Pressing the Set button takes you to the respective
sub-item.
›› By selecting the sub-item “Back” and pressing the
Set button to confirm, you are taken to the menu
sub-item display once more.
›› The version of the motor software which is currently installed is displayed under the item “Version”. By pressing the Set button once again, you
are taken back to the menu sub-item display.
›› Under the sub-item “Update”, you can bring the
software up to date. A memory card is essential
for carrying out an update. If this is not present, a
message will be displayed to say that you need a
memory card. By pressing the Set button, you
return to the menu sub-item display.
5.3.3 Cost specifications
5.3.3.4 Fuel type
Via the menu sub-item “Target cost”, you can
access the sub-items:
Under the sub-item “Fuel type”, you can choose between
the options “Petrol” and “Diesel” by pressing the arrow
keys on the control panel. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
•• Fuel price (➠ 5.3.3.1)
•• Power cost (➠ 5.3.3.2)
•• Fuel consumption Ø (➠5.3.3.3)
•• Fuel type (➠ 5.3.3.4)
You can select the sub-items using the two arrow keys on
the control panel. Pressing the Set button takes you to the
respective sub-item. By selecting the sub-item “Back” and
pressing the Set button to confirm, you are taken to the
menu sub-item display once more.
The information regarding fuel type is necessary to enable
calculation of the money and CO2 saved in comparison
with the use of a car. This is displayed in the main menu of
the information area under “Overall system savings”.
5.3.3.5 Back
In order to return to the information area/main menu display from the menu sub-items, you must select the menu
item “Back” and confirm by pressing the Set button.
5.3.3.1 Fuel price
Under the sub-item “Fuel price”, you can specify the price
of the fuels petrol or diesel in euros (Eur) and cents (ct).
You can set this to a value in euros between 0 and 9 euros
and a value in cents between 0 and 99 cents by using the
two arrow keys on the control panel to move in 1 euro- and
1 cent-steps respectively. Once you have confirmed both
values by pressing the Set button, you are taken back to
the menu sub-item display.
The price information is necessary to enable calculation of
the money and CO2 saved in comparison with the use of a
car. This is displayed in the main menu of the information
area under “Overall system savings”.
5.3.3.2 Electricity costs
Under the sub-item “Power cost”, you can specify the price
of electricity in cents (ct). You can set this to a value of
between 0 and 99 cents by using the two arrow keys on
the control panel to move in 1 cent steps. Pressing the Set
button confirms your selection and then takes you back to
the display of menu sub-items.
5.3.3.3 Fuel consumption
You can enter the average fuel consumption which would
arise from the use of a car. You can set the consumption
in half-litre steps to between 0 and 20 litres. Pressing
the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you
back to the menu sub-item display.
The information regarding the average consumption is
necessary to enable calculation of the money and CO2
saved in comparison with the use of a car. This is displayed in the main menu of the information area under
“Overall system savings”.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
23
6 Assistance by the electric motor
6.1
•• The level of assistance you have selected
With the POWER assist level, the motor assists you
by producing its maximum output, which also consumes the most energy. With the SPORT assist level, the motor produces slightly less power. If you
have selected ECO, you receive the least amount of
assistance but have the battery’s maximum range
at your disposal.
Operating principle of assistance
If you switch on the assistance and start pedalling, the
motor starts as soon as the rear wheel is turning.
Power assist
POWER
other
Pedelec drive
HIGH
SPORT
MIDDLE
ECO
LOW
STANDBY
Pedalling torque
•• How fast you ride
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance
increases as you build up speed until it reaches its
maximum, just before the highest assisted speed is
achieved. The assistance then reduces automatically until you reach a speed of roughly 25 km/h when
it switches off. This gradual reduction makes the
transition to riding without power assist seem less
abrupt. This applies for the three highest gears.
In all other gears, the motor switches off earlier,
depending on the gear ratio. ➠ Chapter 3 “Special
features of the Pedelec with Impulse drive” contains
a table which shows the speeds at which the motor
is switched off.
The thrust produced by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Your own pedalling effort
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and delivers more power
than if you were only pedalling gently.
The assistance increases disproportionally if you
pedal harder. This increase is more pronounced
in the POWER mode than in the SPORT and ECO
modes.
The thrust is limited by the maximum motor output.
Impulse
Increasing
pedal power and
assistance
Reducing
assistance
Assistance
switched off
Propulsive power
Propulsive power (pedal force +
electrical assistance)
Pedal force
Electrical assistance
Speed
24
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
Max. assistance
Switch-off speed
6.2
Distance
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of its
power at low ambient temperatures.
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a large distance with power
assist, select the smaller gears, i.e. the ones that
are easier to pedal. Also select a low assist level
(ECO).
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high assist level, the motor will produce plenty of power to help you along. However,
just as with driving a car at high speed, this leads
to higher consumption. You will therefore have
to recharge the battery sooner. You can conserve
energy by keeping the load on the pedals even
throughout the entire crank revolution.
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec Make sure
the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride your bike
with too little air in the tyres, this can significantly
increase the rolling resistance. This applies to
smooth surfaces in particular, e. g. tarmac. If the
ground is uneven, as on a country path or gravel
track, rather low tyre pressure can lead to less
rolling resistance. This also increases the risk of a
puncture. Please consult your specialist cycle shop
about this.
The distance you can travel also decreases if the
brakes are rubbing.
•• Battery capacity
The current battery capacity
➠ Chapter 7.4.2 “Checking the battery capacity”
•• Topography
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is
detected by the power sensor which then allows
the motor to work harder.
Under ideal conditions, the range may reach 130 km with
the 11 Ah battery and 180 km with the 15 Ah battery.
These ranges have been achieved under the conditions
listed below.
IMPULSE BATTERY
11 AH
15 AH
Range
130 km
180 km
Temperature
10 – 15°C
10 – 15°C
Wind speed
windless
windless
Average speed
22 km/h
22 km/h
Assist level
ECO
ECO
Weight
105 – 110 kg
105 – 110 kg
6.3
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the travel distance.
The operating costs for battery-operated power assist are
calculated as follows:
•• A new battery costs roughly 599 euros.
•• You can cover 80 km on average with one battery
charge.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1,100 charging cycles x 80 km = 88,000 km
•• 599 euros: 88,000 km = 0.68 euro cents/km
•• You use roughly 0.565 kWh to fully charge the battery. Assuming a unit price of 20 euro cents/kWh,
it costs you 11.3 euro cents to fully charge the battery.
•• It costs you 0.14 euro cents/km to cover the average range of 80 km.
•• This means that the maximum cost of consumption
and the battery is 0.82 euro cents/km.
The sample calculation has been carried out based on German energy prices. The operating costs may therefore be
different in locations where other energy prices apply.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
25
7
Battery
Your battery is a lithium cobalt battery, the ideal type of
lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery for this application. One of the
main benefits of this type of battery is its low weight combined with a high capacity. Li-ion batteries only weigh half
as much as comparable nickel metal hydride or nickel-cadmium batteries. This means you carry less battery weight
and more battery power.
7.1
Straightforward charging
›› There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
›› Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
›› If you are not using the battery, you only have to
recharge it after 6 months.
7.1.1
Learning cycle
Once you have fully charged the battery for the first
time, you must run it down until the system switches
off. This procedure (a so-called “learning cycle”) is
necessary so that the battery management recognises
the changes in the capacity caused by age and wear
and tear, in other words, the performance level of the
battery.
Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is calculated
anew and correctly represented.
With this procedure, you can prevent a sudden loss of
electrical assistance during an extended trip.
26
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
7.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as it has in-built overcharging protection.
7.3
Straightforward storage
›› If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10°C at three quarters of its
full charge capacity.
›› The battery management switches the battery to
sleep mode to prevent it from totally discharging. This can occur after different lengths of time
without being used. Depending on the charge state
of the battery, this can occur earlier with a lower
charge and later with a higher charge. At the latest,
the management system activates the sleep mode
after 10 days without using the battery. The system
exits sleep mode when you connect the battery
to the charger or press the “Push” button on the
battery.
These benefits are available due to highly effective battery
management that has been adapted to this specific application and by tuning the battery for operation with a 250 watt
motor.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› If you are having problems with the battery, place
it in the charger for one minute. A reset occurs,
during which the battery management disables
sleep mode for example. After this, the battery will
work again.
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or if you have
not used it for a while.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10°C and +30°C. It takes longer
to charge the battery at low temperatures, the
battery will not charge up at temperatures higher
than +30°C. Ideally, you should charge and store
the battery inside your house or in a warm garage
when the outside temperature is low. In this case
you should only fit the battery on your bike just
before using it.
›› You should run the battery all the way down to
empty for the first three charging cycles. This
allows the battery to reach its maximum capacity.
If you continuously run the battery to empty during
normal operation, this reduces its service life.
If you partially recharge the battery frequently during normal operation, this has a favourable effect
on its service life.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the battery
whenever possible: Try not to run the battery all
the way down to empty and recharge it even after a
short period of operation.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods with a charge of between 50% and 75% at
a temperature of +10°C.
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as sleep
mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at which the
battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed
to discharge unchecked for an extended period this
can lead to total discharging which damages the
battery. To “wake up” the battery, simply place it in
the charger for one minute.
Long charging times
-10 °C
0 °C
Optimum temperature
range for charging
operation
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
Battery may be
damaged
40 °C
50 °C
Charging times at different temperatures
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
27
7.4
Battery information system
There is a display panel on the outer face of the battery
which includes five LEDs and a button with an LED (Push).
When you press the Push button, the LEDs light up. Information about the battery and its charge state is provided
based on the number of LEDs that light up and the way in
which they light up.
7.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
Press the Push button briefly; the LEDs light up and display the current battery charge state.
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
•••••
5 LEDs light up
100 – 84%
••••
4 LEDs light up
83 – 68%
•••
3 LEDs light up
67 – 51%
••
2 LEDs light up
50 – 34%
•
1 LED lights up
33 – 17%
¡
1 LED flashes
16 – 0%
5 LEDs flash quickly
0% or overloaded *
1. LED flashes quickly
Charging fault **
* All 5 LEDs flash quickly: The battery is empty and is
being switched off, or is overloaded.
›› If the battery is overloaded, it will switch back
on after a short idle period and can then be used
normally.
Charge state and battery capacity indicator
›› If the battery is empty, it will work once again
briefly following a short period of rejuvenation and
will then switch back off. It must now be charged.
** The 1st LED flashes quickly: A charging fault is present.
›› If this occurs, put the battery in the docking station
for a short period of time or insert the plug of the
charger into the battery. The charger performs a
readjustment. If the LED still flashes, take the
battery to your specialist cycle shop and have it
checked.
7.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
If you press the “Push” button for five seconds, the LEDs
show the current capacity of the battery.
DISPLAY
28
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
CAPACITY
•••••
5 LEDs light up
100 – 97%
••••
4 LEDs light up
96 – 80%
•••
3 LEDs light up
79 – 60%
••
2 LEDs light up
59 – 40%
•
1 LED lights up
39 – 20%
¡
1 LED flashes
< 20%
›› The range of the battery is less in winter due to the
lower temperatures. Only move the battery (from
the warm room where you store it) and fit it on
your Pedelec just before you set off. This will help
to prevent the effect of the low temperature on the
range of the battery. ➠ Chapter 7.5.2 “Service life
and warranty of the battery”
7.5
Service life and warranty
7.5.1 of the drive
The Impulse centre motor is a durable maintenance-free
drive. It is a wear part with a two-year warranty. As its
power output is higher, wear parts such as the drive and
brakes are subject to higher loads than they would be on a
normal bike. Due to the greater force acting on these
components, wear is more pronounced.
7.5.2 of the battery
•• the age of the battery.
A battery also ages during storage.
A lithium-nickel-cobalt-manganese battery loses
approx. 4-5% of its initial capacity per year and a
lithium-nickel-cobalt-aluminium-oxygen battery
approx 2-3%.
This means: Even if you do not use your battery, its
capacity reduces. With everyday use, you can
expect the battery to age by approximately 3-5%
per year as a result of ageing and charging processes.
•• You can extend the service life of the battery
by fully recharging it after every journey, however short. The Impulse Li-ion battery has no
memory effect.
•• You can also extend the service life of the
battery by using the assistance selectively.
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts come with a two-year
warranty.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal
ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are
•• the number of charging processes
After 1,100 charging cycles, your battery will
still have 60% of its initial capacity, providing it
has been well looked after. This means 6.6 Ah in
an 11 Ah battery and 7.2 Ah in a 15 Ah battery. A
charging cycle is defined as the sum of the individual charges until the charges reach the overall
capacity of the battery.
For example: You charge the battery with 5 Ah on
the first day, 2 Ah on the second day and 4 Ah on
the third day; the sum is 11 Ah. The battery has
thereby completed one charge cycle.
From the technical standpoint therefore, the battery is exhausted at this point. Providing you can
still cover the journey distances with the remaining
battery capacity, you can of course continue using
it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you can
take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who
will dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
29
8 Charger
Read the two type plates on the charger before using it for
the first time.
You can charge your Pedelec with Impulse drive directly
via a charging socket in the battery. The battery can
remain on the Pedelec when the charging operation is in
progress.
›› If a charging fault occurs, the LED in the charger
flashes red. In this case, the charging current is too
high.
›› Take the battery out of the charger, then put it back
in again.
›› If the error message appears again, the battery and
charger must be checked by a specialist dealer.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
You can also take the battery out of the holder and charge
it in the docking station. This is recommended if it is cold
outside, in order to charge the battery in a warm room.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
Battery in the docking station
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery
using the charger provided, or a charger approved
by us.
30
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
9 Cleaning
Remove the battery before you clean your Pedelec.
We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a damp cloth,
a sponge or a brush. You can obtain suitable cleaning
agents and additional information from your specialist
cycle shop.
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
10 Warnings
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by the specialist cycle
shop.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if there is a possibility they could
insert objects into the appliance through apertures in the housing. This poses the danger of
fatal electric shock.
›› When charging the battery, make absolutely sure
the charger is correctly supported on its four
feet. It must not be covered when in operation. It
must be possible for the heat produced to dissipate via the surrounding ventilation slots on the
top and bottom.
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs. You could burn yourself.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car,
remove the battery beforehand. Transport the
battery in a safe receptacle separately to the
Pedelec.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(36 volts). Never attempt to operate the
Pedelec using power from a source other
than a suitable genuine battery. The designations of approved batteries are listed in
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
31
11 Technical data
MOTOR
Brushless electric motor with gear unit and freewheel
Output
250 watts
Maximum torque
at chainring
40 Nm
Gross weight
of electric drive,
battery, control unit
Freewheel
motor
Back-pedal
motor
11 Ah
15 Ah
11 Ah
15 Ah
6.65
kg
6.75
kg
6.75
kg
6.85
kg
Control
via torque sensor and rotational speed sensor in motor
and speed sensor (on rear
wheel)
IMPULSE LI-ION BATTERY
Capacities
11 Ah
15 Ah
Voltage
36 V
36 V
Weight
2.85 kg
2.95 kg
32
V User Manual Impulse Pedelec
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new Pedelec
with Impulse drive.
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction, in whole or in part, is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
VI
User Manual
Impulse Ergo Pedelec
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
1
3
2
Control panel
Display
NuVinci Harmony gears
4a
4b
6
Charger and docking station
Chest belt
1
Control panel
2
Display
3
NuVinci Harmony gears
4a Charger
5a
3
5b
7
2
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
2
1
4b Docking station
5a Battery
5b Battery lock
6
Chest belt
7
Motor unit
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing the Impulse Ergo Pedelec from
our company. This bike is equipped with an electric drive
that assists you when you are cycling. This will make your
trip much more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying loads or riding into the wind. This bike has all of the
functions of the Impulse Pedelec, but has one particularly
innovative feature: The Ergo System.
With this bike, your heart rate controls the drive when
you use the ERGO mode. If your heart rate falls below
the preset value, the assistance provided by the drive is
automatically reduced. If your heart rate rises above the
set value, the assistance provided by the drive increases.
This enables an optimal heart rate range to be maintained
whilst riding, thus avoiding dangerous peaks in the heart
rate and training your endurance.
This system is complemented by NuVinci Harmony gears.
If your speed reduces or increases, the gears automatically adjust the gear ratio in automatic mode. This means
that you always pedal with the same pedalling cadence
irrespective of the speed.
The pedalling cadence describes how many times the
pedal crank of your Pedelec revolves in one minute.
Experts simply call it cadence.
The purpose of this User Manual is to help you get the
most out of your Impulse Ergo Pedelec and use it correctly. Please read the User Manual carefully before riding
your bike for the first time!
›› Even if you can’t wait to go for your first ride, in
the interest of your own safety you should read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” carefully without fail
before use.
›› We also strongly recommend reading this manual
and the General User Manual in their entirety.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING
regarding possible physical injury, increased
risk of falls or other injuries.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
or special information regarding the use of
the bike.
NOTE
regarding possible damage to property or the
environment.
Structure of the User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
More detailed information on your Pedelec is provided in
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec for example, refer
to the General User Manual.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
3
Warnings
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if there is a possibility they could insert objects into the appliance through apertures
in the housing. This poses the danger of fatal
electric shock.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(36 volts). Never attempt to operate the Pedelec
using power from a source other than a suitable
genuine battery. The designations of approved
batteries are listed in ➠ Chapter 11 “Technical
data”.
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs. You could burn yourself.
›› When charging the battery, make absolutely sure
that the charger is correctly supported. It must
not be covered when in operation.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› When removing the battery from your Pedelec,
ensure that it does not fall. This may cause irreparable damage to the battery housing. Information on how to deal with a damaged battery can
be found in ➠ Chapter 8.7 “Damaged batteries”.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open must only be carried out by a professional bike workshop and with the power source
removed.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, remove the battery beforehand. Transport the battery in a suitable transport container separately
from the Pedelec. A suitable transport container
can be obtained from your specialist cycle shop.
4
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
›› Damaged batteries may not be charged, and
further use is not permitted.
›› During the charging process, the battery must be
positioned on an even, non-flammable surface.
The charger must not be covered.
›› The battery may heat up during charging. A maximum temperature of 45°C may be reached. If the
battery becomes any warmer than this, suspend
the charging process immediately.
Recommendations
Disclaimer
The contents described hereafter are merely recommendations. Liability claims relating to damage or injury caused
by the use or disuse of the information presented therein
are strictly excluded. It is imperative that illnesses and
other physical disorders are brought to the attention of
a physician for diagnosis and treatment. The following
information in no way serves as a replacement for medical
treatment.
Question: What is the intended field of application of the
Impulse Ergo Pedelec?
The intended field of application is
•• heart rate-controlled training within the range of a
preset target heart rate irrespective of the profile
of the route (➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”).
Question: For whom is the Impulse Ergo Pedelec particularly suitable?
The Impulse Ergo Pedelec is particularly suitable for
people
•• with a low endurance capacity.
If you are unsure, it is imperative that you ask your
doctor whether you may use the Impulse Ergo
Pedelec.
•• who are unable to ride any faster than 25 km/h for
an extended period on a flat stretch.
•• with medical conditions who have undergone a
medical examination and have been instructed by a
physician as to the exercise parameters (heart rate
ranges) according to which they should train.
Question: For which field of application is the Impulse
Ergo Pedelec not suitable?
The Impulse Ergo Pedelec is not intended for
•• medical rehabilitation (rehab).
Question: What are the possible goals in heart rate-controlled training?
Question: When should I terminate training?
Possible goals include
Terminate your ride if
•• improvement in endurance capacity.
•• you begin to feel sick, dizzy or in any way unwell.
•• reduction in body fat.
•• increased mobility.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
5
Contents
Warnings4
5Control panel and display
17
5.1
17
Recommendations5
Disclaimer5
Content
6
1Quick start 8
1.1Riding in the ERGO power-assist mode
1.2Troubleshooting for the ERGO
power-assist mode
2 Legal principles 2.1Meaning for the rider 9
Basic functions
5.1.1Switching on/off
18
12
5.1.2 Pushing assistance
18
13
5.1.3Buttons for power-assist level
19
13
5.1.4 Display of the power-assist mode
19
5.1.5Battery charge state indicator
19
5.1.6Remaining range indicator
19
5.1.7Troubleshooting
20
3Special features of the Pedelec with
Impulse drive
13
4 Charging the battery
15
5.2Setting and programming the display
4.1
Removing the battery
15
4.2
Learning cycle
16
4.3Charging operation
16
4.4Fitting the battery 17
5.2.1Delete trip data /
Delete overall data
21
5.2.2 Device settings
21
5.2.2.1Contrast
21
5.2.2.2Brightness
21
5.2.2.3Language
21
5.2.2.4Wheel circumference
21
5.2.2.5Unit
22
5.2.2.6Name
22
5.2.2.7
22
Factory settings
5.2.2.8Software
6
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
20
22
5.2.3Target cost
22
8.4
Battery information system 30
5.2.3.1Fuel price
22
8.4.1Checking the battery charge state 30
5.2.3.2Electricity costs
23
8.4.2Checking the battery capacity
31
5.2.3.3Fuel consumption
23
5.2.3.4Fuel type
23
8.5.1Service life and warranty of the drive 31
5.2.4 ERGO settings
23
8.5.2Service life and warranty of the battery31
5.2.4.1Target heart rate
23
8.6Transportation and shipping of the battery 32
5.2.4.2
24
Warning heart rate
6 NuVinci Harmony gears
8.5Service life and warranty 8.6.1 Transportation
31
32
24
8.6.1.1
The E-Bike and your car
32
6.1
Automatic mode
24
8.6.1.2
The E-Bike on trains
32
6.2
Manual mode
25
8.6.1.3
The E-Bike on aeroplanes
32
6.3
Troubleshooting
25
7Assistance by the electric motor
26
7.1Operating principle of assistance
26
7.2
27
Power-assist modes
7.3Range
27
7.4Riding your Pedelec efficiently
28
8Battery 8.1Straightforward charging
8.1.1Learning cycle
32
8.7
Damaged batteries
32
8.8
Disposal of batteries
33
9Charger 33
10Cleaning
34
28
10.1 Cleaning the battery
34
28
10.2 Cleaning the motor
34
29
10.3 Cleaning the display
34
10.4 Cleaning the control panel
35
10.5 Cleaning the chest belt
35
8.2High degree of safety due to battery
management29
8.3Straightforward storage
8.6.2 Shipping
29
11Technical data
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
35
7
1
Quick start
1. Charge the battery completely before riding for the
first time. Charge temperature: 0°C – 45°C.
2. Swivel the round charging socket cover on the battery
to one side.
6. If you have charged the battery in the docking station,
reinsert the battery into the holder on the Pedelec
from the left-hand side. Tilt the battery outwards at an
angle of roughly 45° as you do so, as you did when you
took it out of the holder. Move the battery into the
upright position until the locking mechanism engages.
Installing the battery
3. Now insert the four-pole plug of the charger into the
battery charging socket.
If the key is still in the lock, you will need to turn it
clockwise and pull it out first as otherwise the battery
will not lock in place.
Charging the battery
4. Insert the mains plug of the charger into the socket.
You must fully charge the battery before using it for the
first time.
Locking the battery
7. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and
that the key is no longer in the lock.
8. Press the Set button on the control panel.
The display comes on.
You can also remove the battery from your Pedelec
for charging or storage and charge it in the docking
station. For more information on this subject, refer to
➠ Chapter 4 “Charging the battery”.
5. The charge state of the battery is indicated by five
LEDs. The battery LEDs light up or flash during charging. Once all of the LEDs on the battery have gone out,
the charging process is complete. Pull the plug of the
charger out of the charging socket. Swivel the cover
back over the charging socket.
8
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
9. Press the arrow buttons to select the level of assistance: STAND BY (off), ECO (low), SPORT (medium),
POWER (high) or ERGO (heart rate-controlled). The
assistance changes by one level each time you press
the button. This works both ways, depending on which
of the arrow buttons you press.
10. You can now ride off just as you would if you were
riding a normal bike. The motor starts providing assistance as soon as you begin to pedal.
As soon as the heart rate is displayed, you can adjust
the settings further.
From the first moment on, you have full assistance.
This is unfamiliar but comfortable. Practice starting
up in a safe location before venturing into the road
traffic.
1.1
iding in the ERGO power-assist
R
mode
1. Follow steps 1 to 9 in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
2. Put on the chest belt supplied. Ensure that it does not
slip and that the electrodes are always in contact with
the skin.
If the display does not detect the chest belt, the
prompt “Please put on chest belt” appears.
Chest belt
In this case, please refer to ➠ Chapter 1.2 “Troubleshooting for the ERGO power-assist mode” to find out
how to rectify this problem.
Moisten the reverse of the chest belt with electrode
gel or water before putting it on.
3. Navigate to the ERGO power-assist mode using the arrow buttons. The notification “Determine heart rate …”
appears on the display.
4. Now press the Set button for a minimum of four seconds. You are taken to the menu sub-items.
5. Navigate to the menu sub-item “ERGO settings” using
the arrow buttons. Press the Set button.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
9
Now you can set both a. the target heart rate and b. the
warning heart rate. Navigate to the desired item using
the arrow buttons and press the Set button.
a. Setting the target heart rate:
1. Select your optimal target heart rate using the
arrow buttons.
2. Press the Set button.
Observe the following points to determine your optimal target heart rate:
›› If necessary, you should undergo a sports-medical exercise test on a bicycle ergometer in order
to determine your performance level and physical condition (ask your health insurance provider
whether they will bear the cost of such a test).
›› If no data from sports-medical tests is available,
then you should use the following table as a
guide:
10
AGE
TARGET
HEART RATE
AGE
TARGET
HEART RATE
20
125
55
110
25
123
60
107
30
121
65
105
35
119
70
103
40
116
75
100
45
114
80
98
50
112
85
96
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
Heart rates differ from person to person. Variations occur as a result of illness (such as functional disorders of the thyroid gland), for example, or the intake of bradycardia- or tachycardiainducing medication (such as digitalis, calcium
antagonists or beta blockers).
b. Setting the warning heart rate:
1. Select your optimal warning heart rate using
the arrow buttons.
2. Press the Set button.
With a target heart rate in the range of the basic
endurance, a warning heart rate of 10 beats (target
heart rate + 10) is recommended. This means: If the
target heart rate is exceeded by 10 beats, an acoustic
warning signal sounds immediately, which repeats
every six seconds. If the target heart rate is exceeded
by 15 beats, two acoustic warning signals sound,
which repeat every five seconds. If the target heart
rate is exceeded by a minimum of 20 beats, three
acoustic warning signals sound, which repeat every
four seconds.
6. Once you have set the target and warning heart rates,
you can navigate to the item “Back” using the arrow
buttons.
7. Pressing the Set button will take you back to the menu
sub-items.
When the bike is stationary, you cannot switch from
minimum to maximum pedalling cadence, or vice
versa. You can only do this whilst riding.
8. Now you can adjust the settings further under the
other menu sub-items (➠ Chapter 5.2 “Setting and programming the display”) or navigate to the item “Back”
using the arrow buttons.
Pressing the Set button takes you back to the main
menu.
9. Now switch your NuVinci Harmony gears to automatic
mode. As soon as you move the twist-grip shifter, the
gears switch on. Press the motor symbol on the mode
button.
Automatic selection of the pedalling cadence
In order to effectively maintain a steady heart rate
whilst riding, we recommend the automatic mode.
Because as soon as you start to ride in manual mode,
you have to shift gear manually to ensure that you do
not exceed your target heart rate.
11. You can now ride off just as you would if you were
riding a normal bike. The motor starts providing assistance as soon as you begin to pedal.
From the first moment on, you have full assistance.
This is unfamiliar but comfortable. Practice starting
up in a safe location before venturing into the road
traffic.
›› As you begin your ride, it is highly probable that
your actual heart rate is below your target heart
rate. You receive very little assistance from the
drive or none at all. You move your Pedelec either totally or almost exclusively by means of
your own effort. As a result, your heart rate rises
and you keep moving closer to your target heart
rate. If you have reached your target heart rate
or even exceeded it, the motor provides assistance according to the riding situation. You can
call up the output delivered by your motor in the
information area ➠ Chapter 5.1 “Basic functions”.
10. Set the desired pedalling cadence using the twist-grip
shifter. The further forward you move the twist-grip
shifter, the faster the pedalling cadence becomes. The
number of boxes lit up in blue increases. The further
back you move the twist-grip shifter, the slower the
pedalling cadence becomes. The number of boxes lit
up in blue decreases. Once you have found your ideal
pedalling cadence, you can ride without even having
to change gear once. The automatic mode adapts the
gear ratio to the pedalling cadence you have set.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
11
›› Riding steadily for extended periods allows the
ERGO system to learn how you handle the bike
and adapt better to your own personal handling
style and the behaviour of your heart rate. It may
take some time to do so and the system must
“learn” these behaviours all over again if the
ERGO settings are readjusted.
›› If you have run the battery all the way down
to empty, the system switches off completely.
When this occurs, the NuVinci Harmony gears
no longer function either. After five minutes, the
battery will have recovered and you can switch
the system back on again. The display functions
once more. From now on, please only ride in the
mode “no assistance/stand by”. At this point
you can also operate the gears once more. In this
way, you can ride for another hour until the battery finally switches off. Attention: The battery
1.2
Observe the following points to avoid major shortterm variations in your heart rate:
›› Pedal evenly with a constant level of effort.
›› If you come to a hill, do not try to maintain the
same speed. But do try to maintain the same
level of physical effort. Of course, your speed
decreases as the incline becomes steeper
›› Do not sprint when riding.
roubleshooting for the ERGO
T
power-assist mode
TEXT
“Please put on chest
belt” permanently
shown on display
“Determine heart
rate …” permanently
shown on display
12
switches off as soon as you begin to ride using
the power-assist mode once more.
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The chest belt is too loose
•• Tighten the chest belt.
The battery of the chest belt is
empty
•• Change the battery. To do so, unscrew the battery
cover on the reverse of the chest belt using a coin
and exchange the battery beneath the cover for an
appropriate replacement battery ensuring that the
polarity is not reversed.
There is no layer of moisture
between the skin and the electrodes.
•• Moisten the chest belt with electrode gel or water
before putting it on.
The chest belt is dirty
•• Clean the chest belt with lukewarm water and a
mild soap solution.
Electromagnetic disturbance (highvoltage power lines, traffic lights,
MP3 players, overhead cables,
mobile phones, other training
devices)
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
•• Stay away from possible sources of disturbance.
•• First switch the Impulse ERGO Pedelec off, and
then on again.
2 Legal principles
The essential idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate power-assist mode.
3 S
pecial features of the Pedelec
with Impulse drive
Your Pedelec is equipped with special features that are
designed to enhance your safety and comfort:
•• A central display in the middle of the handlebar to
facilitate easy reading.
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater degree of security. Your Pedelec assists you with an output
that adapts to your pedalling force up to roughly 25 km/h.
•• The control panel can be reached easily and safely.
It can be mounted on the left-hand side.
The Pedelec, like all other bikes, must comply with the
national regulations for road safety. Please observe the
relevant explanations and general information provided in
the General User Manual.
•• With the Impulse drive, the amount of assistance
can be increased by selecting easier gears, when
starting or riding uphill for example. The motor
produces more power when your pedalling cadence
is higher.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling
assistance, i.e. it can only “assist” the rider when
he/she turns the pedals.
•• Charging the battery on the bike and separately.
•• You can conveniently use the same key to lock/
unlock your battery and, where present, your frame
lock.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km/h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
Frame lock
Battery lock
•• You do not legally have to have a driving licence.
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
•• You can decide how you wish to put in your effort:
In the three highest gears, you can ride up to a
maximum speed of 25 km/h assisted by the motor.
You can, for example, go for a relaxed ride on flat
land with a low pedalling cadence. However, you
can also ride uphill using an easier gear and less
energy, simply by making the most of the highest
assisted speed. You should therefore either turn
the pedals with a low pedalling cadence and more
effort or turn them with a higher pedalling cadence
and less effort.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
13
Of course, this only applies in the manual mode of
the NuVinci Harmony hub and is not recommended
in the ERGO mode.
IMPULSE DRIVE
GEAR
CRANK REVOLUTIONS / MIN.
SPEED (KM/H)
OTHER CENTRE MOTOR
MOTOR
SPEED
CRANK REVOLUTIONS / MIN.
MOTOR
SPEED
1
86
12
4,300
71
8
3,000
2
86
13
4,300
71
10
3,000
3
86
15
4,300
71
12
3,000
4
86
19
4,300
71
13
3,000
5
86
22
4,300
71
16
3,000
6
85
25
4,200
71
19
3,000
7
73
25
3,650
71
22
3,000
8
64
25
3,200
71
25
3,000
The data provided is an example for the function of the assistance.
The data may vary depending on the model.
Function of the assistance
Speed
Output curves of the centre motor
Output curve of the hub motor
Output curves
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
8th gear
7th gear
6th gear
5th gear
4th gear
3rd gear
2nd gear
Output
1st gear
•• In contrast to a hub motor, the Impulse centre motor drive always allows you to ride within the motor range that saves the most power or, if required,
the range in which the highest output is available.
14
SPEED (KM/H)
20 km/h
Max. speed
4 Charging the battery
4.1
Removing the battery
1. Grip the battery by the handle, insert the key into the
lock and turn it anticlockwise. Now the battery is unlocked.
›› You can charge the battery whilst it is on the
Pedelec (➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”).
Unlocking the battery
2. Tilt the battery sideways out of the Pedelec. Place the
battery down on a suitable surface. This should be dry,
even and non-flammable. In doing so, hold on tight to
the battery to avoid dropping it.
›› You can also take the battery out of the holder
and charge it in the docking station. This is recommended if it is cold outside, in order to charge
the battery in a warmer room. The battery can be
charged at temperatures between 0°C and 45°C.
Tilt when removing
3. You should now remove the key and keep it in a safe
place to prevent it from breaking off or being lost.
Carry handle
LED display panel
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
15
4.2
Learning cycle
After fully charging the battery for the first time and
thereafter roughly once every six months, you must
run the battery down until the system switches off.
This procedure (a so-called “learning cycle”) is necessary so that the battery management recognises
the changes in the capacity caused by age and wear
and tear, in other words, the performance level of
the battery. Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is
calculated anew and correctly represented. This also
allows the remaining distance display to function with
greater precision. With this procedure, you can prevent a sudden loss of electrical assistance during an
extended trip.
4.3
Charging operation
Before charging the battery, read the information on
the charger carefully.
1. Take the charger provided and the docking station out
of their packaging and plug the mains plug into a socket (110-230 V, please observe the type plate on the
charger).
hot air around the battery warmed during the charging
operation can dissipate via the surrounding ventilation slots.
3. Connect the plug of the charger to the docking station.
The LED in the charger now lights up briefly in red and
then permanently in green.
4. Put the battery in the charger. The battery and charger
are connected. The LED in the charger lights up in
green.
Battery in the docking station
5. The charging process begins. The LED of the charger
lights up in green. The battery LEDs light up one by
one to indicate the progress of the charging operation.
The battery is charged in five stages. When charging
of one stage is in progress, the corresponding LED
flashes. If this stage has been fully charged, the LED
will light up permanently. Now the next LED will begin
to flash. After all five LEDs have gone out, the battery
is fully charged.
6. If the LED on the charger flashes red permanently, a
charging fault has developed. In that case, disconnect
the battery from the charger, then connect it again.
The charger tests the battery and performs readjustments, if required. If the LED on the charger still flashes, take the charger and battery to your specialist
dealer who will test the device and replace it, if
required.
Charging fault
Type plates on charger and docking station
2. To charge the battery safely, the charger must be
placed on a dry, non-flammable surface resting on its
four feet and with the LED facing upwards. Do not cover the charger. This is the only way to ensure that the
16
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
7. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the socket
once the charging operation is complete.
5 Control panel and display
›› Damaged batteries may not be charged, and
further use is not permitted.
›› The battery may heat up during charging. A maximum temperature of 45°C may be reached. If the
battery becomes any warmer than this, suspend
the charging process immediately.
5.1
Basic functions
Control panel
4
1
4.4
Fitting the battery
1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of the Pedelec from the left by tilting it outwards at roughly
45°. In doing so, make sure that the lateral guides at
the bottom of the battery are also inserted into the
guides in the holder.
2
5
3
1Upper arrow button
(more powerful assistance)
2 Set button
3Lower arrow button
(less powerful assistance)
4 Pushing assistance
5 Power button
Reinstalling the battery
2. Tilt the battery towards the bike until it engages in the
locking mechanism. If the key is still in the lock, turn it
clockwise then pull it out to lock the battery in place.
3. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
•• On the left, you will find the 1 upper and
3 lower arrow buttons. The buttons have different functions depending on the item of the settings
menu at which you are located.
•• Between the arrow buttons is the 2 Set button. It
can be used to request a variety of displays.
•• The 4 pushing assistance is located at the top
on the right. This moves the Pedelec slowly (at a
maximum speed of 6 km/h) without you having to
turn the pedals.
•• The 5 power button is located at the bottom on
the right. This can be used to turn the system on
and off again.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
17
Display
2
1
5.1.1 Switching on/off
3
4
Press the power button to switch the Impulse system on.
After switching on, the system is always in the display
mode in which you switched it off.
5
1
2
3
4
5
Speed
Power-assist mode
Battery charge state
Remaining range indicator
Information area
If you cannot feel any assistance, simply back-pedal
briefly and then pedal forwards again to trigger the
system check. If there is still no assistance being
delivered, the instruction “Please move the pedals”
will continue to be displayed. In this case you should
consult a specialist dealer.
The display in the middle of the handlebar is divided into
five different display panels:
•• At the top on the left is your current 1 speed.
•• To the right of the current speed is a display showing the selected 2 power-assist mode.
•• At the top on the right is the 3 battery symbol
which tells you the current charge status of your
Pedelec’s battery.
In order to switch your Pedelec off again, press the power
button on the control panel.
5.1.2 Pushing assistance
•• Below this, in the 4 remaining range indicator,
you can see the remaining distance over which you
will still receive assistance from the current battery charge.
•• Along the bottom section of the display is a long
information area that can be used to display the
following information:
18
••
How much of its potential output the motor is
currently delivering.
••
The costs that have been incurred in the course
of the current trip and during the Pedelec’s
entire service life.
••
The saving achieved in both euros and CO2 in
comparison with the same journey by car.
••
The total number of kilometres covered by this
system.
••
Display of kilometres covered during the day
and overall.
••
Display of journey time during the current trip
and the top speed reached on this trip.
••
The average speed during the current trip and
the total distance covered.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly (at a
maximum speed of 6 km/h) without you having to turn the
pedals, e.g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage.
The pushing assistance is not suitable for use as starting assistance.
5.1.3 Buttons for power-assist level
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
•• You can specify the power-assist level using the
arrow buttons.
100-85.5%
85.5-71.5%
•• Each time you press an arrow button, the power
assist changes by one level.
71.5-57.5%
•• If you press the upper arrow button, the level of
assistance increases by one level each time you
press it.
57.5-42.4% •• If you press the lower arrow button, the assistance
becomes weaker each time you press it.
42.5-28.5%
28.5-14.5%
5.1.4 Display of the power-assist mode
The display shows you how much assistance the motor is
currently providing:
DISPLAY
ERGO
POWER
SPORT
ECO
ASSIST LEVEL
ERGO: The level of
assistance depends on your
heart rate.
ERGO
POWER
SPORT
POWER: This means the
assistance is working hard.
ECO
ERGO
POWER
SPORT
ECO
ERGO
POWER
SPORT
ECO
SPORT: This means the
assistance is working with
a medium level of effort.
ECO: This means the assistance is only working with a
low level of effort.
ERGO
POWER
SPORT
STANDBY: Battery indicator
still lights up (
)
ECO
Power-assist mode
Charge state indicator
If the battery charge state falls below a minimum level,
the assistance switches off via the motor.
If you do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes, the system switches off automatically. If you subsequently want
to ride using the assistance, you will have to switch it
back on using the power button.
5.1.6 Remaining range indicator
Below and to the right of the battery charge state indicator, the distance in km over which you can still travel with
power assist is displayed. This is the remaining range
indicator.
This “remaining distance” is calculated using two
measurements taken during the current journey. One
short and one long measurement give a representative average value. If the conditions of the journey
change, for example, by riding up an incline after a
long, flat stretch, the value displayed can also change
at short notice. Please consider this factor when planning your trips. You are probably familiar with this
effect from the remaining range indicator of your car.
5.1.5 Battery charge state indicator
The battery charge state indicator is located at the top on
the right of the display. Using a stylised battery divided
into segments, it shows the charge remaining in the battery. The lower the charge state of the battery is, the fewer
segments are displayed:
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
19
5.2
5.1.7 Troubleshooting
If your bike has been exposed to wet conditions for
an extended period, e.g. after a trip in heavy rain, or
if there have been large differences in temperature,
the screen of the display may steam up. This moisture does not impair the function of the display. It is
comparable with the steam on a pair of glasses when
you enter a warmer room having been outside. After
a short time in drier and warmer conditions, this condensation will vanish leaving no trace.
Setting
and programming the
display
You can switch between the various displays within the
information area (also referred to as the “main menu”) by
pressing the Set button.
Pressing and holding the Set button will take you from any
display in the information area to the menu sub-items:
•• Delete trip data
•• Delete overall data
•• Device settings
•• Target cost
•• ERGO settings
•• Back
TEXT
CAUSE
SOLUTION
•• Make sure the spoke magnet has not slipped.
It should be as close as possible to the sensor
on the chain stay (max. 5 mm clearance).
“Speed sensor signal
missing”
Spoke magnet has slipped out of
position
1
2
1 Spoke magnet
2Sensor on chain stay
Speed sensor defective
•• Please contact your specialist cycle shop.
Cable connection defective
•• Please contact your specialist cycle shop.
a. Connect the battery to the charger.
b. Use a different battery.
“Battery communication
error”
No connection between motor
unit and battery
“Motor temperature is too
high”
The motor has become too hot,
e.g. as a result of a long, steep
incline ridden in a high gear.
•• Allow your system to cool down before resuming your journey.
The battery has become too hot.
•• Allow the battery to cool down for a while by
not riding or by riding without assistance.
If necessary, place the battery in the charger
for a minute.
“Battery temperature is too
high”
20
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
c. Have your specialist cycle shop check the
control cable that runs from the battery plug
to the motor unit.
You can select the menu sub-items using the two arrow
buttons on the control panel. You can confirm your selection by pressing the Set button. The respective contents
are then displayed for you. In order to return to the information area/main menu display from the menu sub-items,
you must select the menu item “Back” and confirm by
pressing the Set button.
5.2.2.2 Brightness
5.2.1 D
elete trip data /
Delete overall data
5.2.2.3 Language
Under the menu sub-items “Delete trip data” and “Delete
overall data”, you can delete the kilometres indicated for
the current day trip and the total kilometres covered. If
you wish to do so, select the option “Yes” using the arrow
buttons on the control panel and then press the Set button
to confirm your selection. Then you will be taken back to
the menu sub-item display once more. If you select and
confirm the option “No”, the information remains in place
and you are, likewise, taken back to the menu sub-item
display.
5.2.2 Device settings
Under the menu sub-item “Device settings”, you can
change the following settings:
•• Contrast
•• Brightness
•• Language
•• Wheel circumference
•• Unit
•• Name
You can leave the brightness of the display at its preset
level or adjust it in 5% steps to between 0% and 50% by
pressing the two arrow buttons. The change in brightness
is implemented immediately. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
You can choose to have the information shown on the display in the following languages:
•• Deutsch
•• English
•• Français
•• Nederlands
•• Español
•• Italiano
•• Suomi
•• Dansk
You can select the relevant language using the two arrow
buttons. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection
and then takes you back to the menu sub-item display.
5.2.2.4 Wheel circumference
Pressing the Set button will take you to the section for
adjusting the wheel circumference. This can be set to any
value between 1510 mm and 2330 mm by pressing the two
arrow buttons on the control panel. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the
menu sub-item display.
•• Factory settings
•• Software
•• Back
Using the two arrow buttons on the control panel, you can
select the sub-items and confirm by pressing the Set button. The menu item “Back” will take you back to the information area/main menu.
A change to the setting becomes necessary, for
example, when you have the tyres on your Pedelec
exchanged for some of a different size. In order to
continue to display the correct data, the new wheel
circumference must be entered.
5.2.2.1 Contrast
You can leave the contrast of the display at its preset level
or adjust it in 5% steps to between -35% and +20% by
pressing the two arrow buttons. The change in contrast is
implemented immediately. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
21
5.2.2.5 Unit
5.2.2.8 Software
Under the sub-item “Unit”, you can choose whether information relating to distance travelled and speed is displayed in kilometres (km) or miles (mi). Using the arrow
buttons on the control panel, select the option “km” or
“mi”. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and
then takes you back to the menu sub-item display.
Via the sub-item “Software” you can access the sub-items
“Version” and “Update”, which can be selected using the
arrow buttons on the control panel.
5.2.2.6 Name
Under the sub-item “Name”, you can enter a name or some
text with a maximum of 21 characters which will be displayed when the display is turned on or off.
•• To write, select one letter at a time from the alphabet displayed using the arrow buttons and confirm
your selection by pressing the Set button. The
letter then appears in the text line above the row
of letters. At the end of the row of letters, you can
select a hyphen or an underscore and confirm by
pressing the Set button.
•• By selecting the sub-item “Back” and pressing the
Set button to confirm, you are taken to the menu
sub-item display once more.
•• The version of the motor software which is currently installed is displayed under the item “Version”. By pressing the Set button once again, you
are taken back to the menu sub-item display.
5.2.3 Target cost
Via the menu sub-item “Target cost”, you can access the
sub-items:
•• Errors can be corrected by selecting the right-hand
arrow and pressing the Set button. You can only
delete one letter each time.
•• Fuel price
•• You can switch between lower case and capital letters by selecting “abc … / ABC …” on the right of the
display panel and pressing the Set button to confirm. The letters then immediately appear as lower
case or capital letters.
•• Fuel consumption
•• The use of spaces is not possible and underscores
must be used in their place.
•• By selecting “OK” using the two arrow buttons on
the control panel and confirming using the Set button, your entry is accepted and you are then taken
back to the menu sub-item display.
5.2.2.7 Factory settings
Under the sub-item “Factory settings”, you are asked
whether you want to restore the settings which were preset upon leaving the factory. If you wish to do so, select
the option “Yes” using the arrow buttons on the control
panel and then press the Set button to confirm your selection. Then you will be taken back to the menu sub-item
display once more. If you select and confirm the option
“No”, the amended specifications remain in effect and you
are, likewise, taken to the menu sub-item display once
more.
22
•• Pressing the Set button takes you to the respective
sub-item.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
•• Power cost
•• Fuel type
You can select the sub-items using the two arrow buttons
on the control panel. Pressing the Set button takes you to
the respective sub-item. By selecting the sub-item “Back”
and pressing the Set button to confirm, you are taken to
the menu sub-item display once more.
5.2.3.1 Fuel price
Under the sub-item “Fuel price”, you can specify the price
of the fuels petrol or diesel in euros (EUR) and cents (ct).
You can set this to a value in euros between 0 and 9 euros
and a value in cents between 0 and 99 cents by using the
two arrow buttons on the control panel to move in 1 euroand 1 cent-steps respectively. Once you have confirmed
both values by pressing the Set button, you are taken back
to the menu sub-item display.
The price information is necessary to enable calculation of
the money and CO2 saved in comparison with the use of a
car. This is displayed in the main menu of the information
area under “Overall system savings”.
5.2.3.2 Electricity costs
5.2.4.1 Target heart rate
Under the sub-item “Power cost”, you can specify the price
of electricity in cents (ct). You can set this to a value of between 0 and 99 cents by using the two arrow buttons on
the control panel to move in 1 cent steps. Pressing the Set
button confirms your selection and then takes you back to
the menu sub-item display.
Under the sub-item “Target heart rate”, you can set your
optimal target heart rate. This can be set to a value of
between 40 and 240 by pressing the two arrow buttons on
the control panel. Pressing the Set button confirms your
selection and then takes you back to the menu sub-item
display.
5.2.3.3 Fuel consumption
You can enter the average fuel consumption which would
arise from the use of a car. You can set the consumption
in half-litre steps to between 0 and 20 litres. Pressing
the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you
back to the menu sub-item display.
The information regarding the average consumption is
necessary to enable calculation of the money and CO2
saved in comparison with the use of a car. This is displayed in the main menu of the information area under
“Overall system savings”.
Observe the following points to determine your optimal target heart rate:
›› If necessary, you should undergo a sports-medical exercise test on a bicycle ergometer in order
to determine your performance level and physical condition.
›› If no data from sports-medical tests is available,
you should use the following table as a guide:
5.2.3.4 Fuel type
Under the sub-item “Fuel type”, you can choose between
the options “Petrol” and “Diesel” by pressing the arrow
buttons on the control panel. Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then takes you back to the menu
sub-item display.
The information regarding fuel type is necessary to enable
calculation of the money and CO2 saved in comparison
with the use of a car. This is displayed in the main menu of
the information area under “Overall system savings”.
5.2.4 ERGO settings
Via the menu sub-item “ERGO settings”, you can access
the sub-items:
•• Target heart rate
AGE
TARGET
HEART RATE
AGE
TARGET
HEART RATE
20
125
55
110
25
123
60
107
30
121
65
105
35
119
70
103
40
116
75
100
45
114
80
98
50
112
85
96
Heart rates differ from person to person. Variations occur as a result of illness (such as functional disorders of the thyroid gland), for example, or the intake of bradycardia- or tachycardiainducing medication (such as digitalis, calcium
antagonists or beta blockers).
•• Warning heart rate
•• Back
You can select the sub-items using the arrow buttons on
the control panel. Pressing the Set button takes you to the
respective sub-item. By selecting the sub-item “Back” and
pressing the Set button to confirm, you are taken to the
menu sub-item display once more.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
23
5.2.4.2 Warning heart rate
6 NuVinci Harmony gears
Under the sub-item “Warning heart rate”, you can set your
optimal warning heart rate. You can set this to a value of
between “Target heart rate + 5” and “Target heart rate +
20” by using the two arrow buttons on the control panel.
Pressing the Set button confirms your selection and then
takes you back to the menu sub-item display.
As soon as you operate the twist-grip shifter or start
riding, the NuVinci Harmony gears switch on. Now decide
whether you prefer manual or automatic operation of the
NuVinci Harmony gears. Press the mode button to switch
to the desired mode.
Manual mode
Automatic mode
With a target heart rate in the range of the basic
endurance, a warning heart rate of 10 beats (target
heart rate + 10) is recommended. This means: If the
target heart rate is exceeded by 10 beats, an acoustic
warning signal sounds immediately, which repeats
every six seconds. If the target heart rate is exceeded
by 15 beats, two acoustic warning signals sound,
which repeat every five seconds. If the target heart
rate is exceeded by a minimum of 20 beats, three
acoustic warning signals sound, which repeat every
four seconds.
Mode buttons
We recommend the automatic mode for riding in the
ERGO power-assist mode. Because as soon as you
start to ride in manual mode, you have to shift gear
manually to ensure that you do not exceed your target
heart rate.
6.1
Automatic mode
Set the desired pedalling cadence using the twist-grip
shifter. You can choose between 12 different pedalling
cadences. The further forward you move the twist-grip
shifter, the faster the pedalling cadence becomes. The
number of boxes lit up in blue increases. The further back
you move the twist-grip shifter, the slower the pedalling
cadence becomes. The number of boxes lit up in blue decreases. The blue LEDs indicate the exact setting. Once
you have found your ideal pedalling cadence, you can ride
without even having to change gear once. The automatic
mode adapts the gear ratio to the rider’s preferred pedalling cadence.
Automatic selection of the pedalling cadence
24
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
6.2
Manual mode
Set the desired pedalling cadence using the twist-grip
shifter. You can choose between 12 different pedalling cadences. The further forward you move the twist-grip shifter, the faster the pedalling cadence becomes. The number
of boxes lit up in orange increases. The further back you
move the twist-grip shifter, the slower the pedalling cadence becomes. The number of boxes lit up in orange decreases. The orange LEDs indicate the exact setting.
Manual selection of the pedalling cadence
You cannot shift through the entire gear ratio range
of the NuVinci Harmony gears when the bike is stationary. If you shift between gear ratios with a large
differential when the bike is stationary, the Harmony
system will wait for the pedals or the bike to move.
6.3
Troubleshooting
TEXT
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The pedalling cadence no
longer adjusts itself correctly
Extraneous radiation or battery
was not connected for an extended
period of time
•• Ride slowly and hold down the mode button
on the NuVinci Harmony gears for between
five and seven seconds.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
25
7
Assistance by the electric motor
7.1
•• The level of assistance you have selected.
In the power-assist mode POWER, the motor
assists you with the highest output and therefore
also uses the most energy. If you ride in the SPORT
mode, the motor produces slightly less power.
If you have selected ECO, you receive the least
amount of assistance but have the battery’s maximum range at your disposal.
Operating principle of assistance
If you switch on the assistance and start pedalling, the
motor starts as soon as the rear wheel is turning.
Power assist
POWER
other
Pedelec drive
HIGH
SPORT
MIDDLE
ECO
LOW
STANDBY
Pedalling torque
Assistance provided by the Impulse motor comparison
The thrust delivered by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Your own pedalling effort.
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and delivers more power
than if you were only pedalling gently. The assistance increases proportionally if you pedal harder.
This increase is more pronounced in the POWER
mode than in the SPORT and ECO modes. The
thrust is limited by the maximum motor output.
Impulse
Increasing pedal
power and
assistance
Reducing
assistance
•• How fast you ride.
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance
increases as you build up speed until it reaches its
maximum, just before the highest assisted speed is
achieved. The assistance then reduces automatically and switches off at roughly 25 km/h, irrespective
of the gear you are in. Depending on the power-assist mode you are riding in, the transition between
riding with and without power assist may seem
more or less abrupt. This applies for the three highest gears. In all other gears, the motor switches off
earlier, depending on the gear ratio. ➠ Chapter 3
“Special features of the Pedelec with Impulse drive”
contains a table which shows the speeds at which
the motor is switched off.
Assistance
switched off
Propulsive power
Propulsive power (pedal force +
electrical assistance)
Pedal force
Electrical assistance
Speed
Max. assistance
Relationship between pedal force and electrical assistance
26
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
Switch-off speed
7.2
Power-assist modes
You can choose between the power-assist modes ERGO,
POWER, SPORT and ECO (➠ Chapter 5.1.4 “Display of the
power-assist mode”).
In the power-assist mode ERGO, the assistance provided
depends on your heart rate.
In the power-assist modes POWER and SPORT, the assistance works with a high or medium level of effort. Of
course, the range is reduced as a consequence.
The ECO mode provides you with harmonic, gentle assistance and a long range. It is advisable for beginners or
inexperienced riders to start with this mode.
its power at low ambient temperatures. The battery cells can discharge at temperatures of -15 to
+60°C. This is also the temperature range within
which you can use your battery.
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec
Make sure the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride
your bike with too little air in the tyres, this can
significantly increase the rolling resistance. This
applies to smooth surfaces in particular, e.g. tarmac. If the ground is uneven, as on a country path
or gravel track, a somewhat reduced tyre pressure
can lead to less rolling resistance. This also increases the risk of a puncture. Please consult your
specialist cycle shop about this. The distance you
can travel also decreases if the brakes are rubbing.
•• Battery capacity
The current battery capacity
(➠ Chapter 8.4.2 “Checking the battery capacity”).
If you wish to make any further adjustments to the
ride characteristics of your bike, please consult your
specialist cycle shop.
7.3
Range
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a large distance with power
assist, select the smaller gears, i.e. the ones that
are easier to pedal. Also select a low assist level
(ECO).
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high assist level, the motor will produce plenty of power to help you along. However,
just as with driving a car at high speed, this leads
to higher consumption. You will therefore have
to recharge the battery sooner. You can conserve
energy by keeping the load on the pedals even
throughout the entire crank revolution.
•• Topography
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is detected by the power sensor which then allows the
motor to work harder.
Under ideal conditions, the range may reach 120 km with
the 11 Ah battery and 205 km with the 17 Ah battery.
These ranges have been achieved under the conditions
listed below.
IMPULSE BATTERY
11 Ah
15 Ah
17 Ah
Range
120 km
180 km
205 km
Temperature
10-15°C
Wind speed
windless
Average speed
22 km/h
Assist level
Weight
ECO
(lowest assist level)
105-110 kg
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
27
7.4
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the range.
The operating costs for power assist with an 11 Ah battery
are calculated as follows:
•• A new battery costs roughly 599 euros.
8 Battery
Your battery is a lithium-ion battery, the ideal type of battery for this application.
One of the main benefits of this battery is its low weight
combined with a high capacity.
8.1
Straightforward charging
•• Throughout the total service life of a battery, you
can cover 80 kilometres with one charge cycle on
average.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1,100 charging cycles x 80 km = 88,000 km
•• 599 euros: 88,000 km = 0.68 euro cents per
kilometre.
•• You use roughly 0.565 kWh to fully charge the
battery. Assuming a unit price of 23.5 euro cents
per kWh, it costs you 13.27 euro cents to fully
charge the battery.
•• To cover the average range of 80 kilometres, it
costs you 67.67 euro cents.
•• This means the cost of consumption and the battery is a maximum of 0.85 euro cents/km.
The sample calculation has been carried out based on German energy prices. The operating costs may vary depending on the energy prices you pay.
›› Damaged batteries can not be charged, and
further use is not permitted.
›› The battery may heat up during charging. A maximum temperature of 45°C may be reached. If the
battery becomes any warmer than this, suspend
the charging process immediately.
›› During the charging process, the battery must be
positioned on an even, non-flammable surface.
The charger must not be covered.
•• There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
•• Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
•• If you are not using the battery, you have to recharge it after 6 months.
28
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
8.1.1 Learning cycle
›› Once you have fully charged the battery for the
first time, you must run it down until the system
switches off. Repeat this process roughly every
six months. This procedure (a so-called “learning
cycle”) is necessary so that the battery management recognises the changes in the capacity
caused by age and wear and tear, in other words,
the performance level of the battery. This is the
only way to enable adjustments to your remaining range indicator.
›› Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is calculated anew and correctly represented.
›› With this procedure, you can prevent a sudden
loss of electrical assistance during an extended
trip.
8.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
discharge. This can occur after different lengths of time
without being used. Depending on the charge state of the
battery, this can occur earlier with a lower charge and
later with a higher charge. At the latest, the management
system activates the sleep mode after 10 days without
using the battery. The system exits sleep mode when you
connect the battery to the charger or press the Push button on the battery.
These benefits are available due to highly effective battery
management that has been adapted to this specific application and by tuning the battery for operation with a 250
watt motor.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or if you have
not used it for a while.
›› If you continuously run the battery to empty
during normal operation, this reduces its service life. If you partially recharge the battery
frequently during normal operation, this has a
favourable effect on its service life.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the battery whenever possible: Try not to run the battery all the way down to empty and recharge it
even after a short period of operation.
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as it has in-built overcharging protection.
›› The battery management monitors the temperature of your battery and warns you of incorrect
use.
8.3
Straightforward storage
If you do not need your battery for a while, store it at a
temperature of +10°C at three quarters of its full charge
capacity. To do so, please remove the battery from the
bike, otherwise the battery may discharge and indicate
that it is full at the beginning of a ride, only to switch off
after a short distance. The battery management switches
the battery to sleep mode to prevent a so-called total
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as
sleep mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at
which the battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed to discharge unchecked for an
extended period this can lead to total discharging which damages the battery. To “wake up”
the battery, simply place it in the charger for one
minute.
›› If you are having problems with the battery,
place it in the charger for one minute. A reset
occurs, during which the battery management
disables sleep mode, for example. After this, the
battery will work again.
›› Ideally, you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10°C and +30°C. It takes
longer to charge the battery at low temperatures,
while the battery will not charge up at temperatures higher than +30°C. Ideally, you should
charge and store the battery inside your house or
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
29
in a warm garage when the outside temperature
is low. In this case you should only fit the battery
on your bike just before using it.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods with a charge state of 50% to 75% at a
temperature of +10°C.
8.4
DISPLAY
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
•••••
5 LEDs light up
100-84%
••••
4 LEDs light up
83-68%
•••
3 LEDs light up
67-51%
••
2 LEDs light up
50-34%
•
1 LED lights up
33-17%
¡
1 LED flashes
16-0%
No LED lights up
0%
5 LEDs flash quickly
0% or overloaded *
1st LED flashes quickly
Charging fault **
Battery information system
* All five LEDs flash quickly: The battery is empty and is
being switched off, or is overloaded.
There is a display panel on the outer face of the battery
with five LEDs and a red Push button. If you press the red
Push button, the LEDs light up. Information about the battery and its charge state is provided based on the number
of LEDs that light up and the way in which they light up.
•• If the battery is empty, it will work once again
briefly following a short period of rejuvenation and
will then switch back off. It must now be charged.
•• If the battery is overloaded, it will switch back
on after a short idle period and can then be used
normally.
** The first LED flashes quickly: A charging fault is present.
•• In that case, please remove the mains plug from
the socket and then plug it in again after a short
time. The charger performs a readjustment. In most
cases, this rectifies the fault.
8.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
•• If the LED continues to flash, overheating or undercooling of the battery may also be the cause. If, for
example, you charge the battery in a cold environment at a temperature below 0°C, or the battery
heats up to over 60°C during a long ascent, the
management switches off to protect the battery. In
such cases, the battery must be taken to a warmer
environment or cooled down.
If you press the red Push button, the LEDs light up and
display the current battery charge state.
•• If the LED still flashes, take the battery to your
specialist cycle shop and have it checked.
Charge state and battery capacity indicator
Long charging times
-10°C
0°C
Optimum temperature
range for charging
operation
10°C
Charging times at different temperatures
30
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
20°C
Battery may be
damaged
30°C
40°C
50°C
8.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
8.5.2 Service life and warranty of the battery
If you press the red Push button for five seconds, the LEDs
show the current capacity of the battery.
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts come with a two-year
warranty.
DISPLAY
CAPACITY
•••••
5 LEDs light up
100-97%
••••
4 LEDs light up
96-80%
•••
3 LEDs light up
79-60%
••
2 LEDs light up
59-40%
•
1 LED lights up
39-20%
¡
1 LED flashes
< 20%
›› The range of the battery is less in winter due to
the lower temperatures. Only move the battery
(from the warm room where you store it) and fit
it on your Pedelec just before you set off. This
will help to prevent the effect of the low temperature on the range of the battery (➠ Chapter 8.5.2
“Service life and warranty of the battery”).
›› If you have run the battery all the way down to
empty, the system switches off completely. In
this case, the NuVinci Harmony gears no longer
function either. After five minutes, the battery
will have recovered and you can switch the system back on again. The display functions once
more. From now on, please only ride in the mode
“no assistance/stand by”. At this point you can
also operate the gears once more. In this way,
you can ride for another hour until the battery finally switches off. Attention: The battery
switches off as soon as you begin to ride using
the power-assist mode once more.
8.5
Service life and warranty
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are:
•• the number of charging processes
After 1,100 charging cycles, your battery will still
have 60% of its initial capacity, providing it has
been well looked after. This means 6.6 Ah in an 11
Ah battery, 7.2 Ah in a 15.5 Ah battery and 10.2 Ah
in a 17 Ah battery. A charging cycle is defined as
the sum of the individual charges until the charges
reach the overall capacity of the battery.
For example: You charge the battery with 5 Ah on
the first day, 2 Ah on the second day and 4 Ah on
the third day; the sum is 11 Ah. The battery has
thereby completed one charge cycle.
From the technical standpoint therefore, the battery is exhausted at this point. Providing you can
still cover the journey distances with the remaining
battery capacity, you can of course continue using
it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you can
take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who
will dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
•• the age of the battery
A battery also ages during storage.
An 11 Ah battery with lithium-ion cells loses around
4-5% of its initial capacity each year. A 15 Ah battery with lithium-nickel-cobalt-aluminium-oxygen
cells around 2-3%.
This means: Even if you do not use your battery, its
capacity reduces. With everyday use, you can expect the battery to age by approximately 3-5% per
year as a result of ageing and charging processes.
••
You can extend the service life of the battery
by fully recharging it after every journey, however short. The Impulse Li-ion battery has no
memory effect.
••
You can also extend the service life of the battery by using the assistance selectively. Ideally,
you should ride in low gears with a high pedalling cadence.
8.5.1 Service life and warranty of the drive
The Impulse centre motor is a durable maintenance-free
drive. It is a wear part with a two-year warranty. As its
power output is higher, wear parts such as the drive and
brakes are subject to higher loads than they would be on a
normal bike. Due to the greater force acting on the components, wear is more pronounced.
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
31
••
8.6
If you always ride with maximum motor output,
your motor will always require a higher current.
Higher currents cause the battery to age more
quickly.
ransportation and shipping
T
of the battery
8.6.1 Transportation
›› Never transport damaged batteries. The safety
of damaged batteries cannot be guaranteed.
Scratches and small chips in the housing do not
constitute serious damage.
›› Damaged batteries may not be charged, and
further use is not permitted.
For the transportation of your Pedelec, we recommend
removing the battery from the Pedelec and packaging
it separately.
8.6.1.3 The E-Bike on aeroplanes
Your E-Bike is generally subject to the policies of the respective airline concerning bikes. Batteries are subject to
dangerous goods legislation. Therefore, they must not be
carried on passenger planes – neither in the cargo hold,
nor the cabin. Please contact the relevant airline for detailed information.
8.6.2 Shipping
›› Do not ship batteries! A battery is a hazardous
article which can overheat and catch fire in certain conditions.
›› The preparation and shipping of a battery may
only be carried out by trained personnel.
›› If you would like to return your Pedelec battery
for replacement, please always arrange this via
your specialist cycle shop. Specialist cycle shops
can have the battery picked up free of charge and
in compliance with dangerous goods legislation.
8.7
Damaged batteries
8.6.1.1 The E-Bike and your car
If you transport your E-Bike on a bike rack, ensure that it
is designed for the higher weight of an E-Bike. In order to
relieve the load on the rack and protect the battery from
climatic conditions, it must be transported inside the car.
In order to avoid a short-circuit, you can cover the plug
contacts on the bike and the battery using the cover or
adhesive tape.
8.6.1.2 The E-Bike on trains
In Germany, you can take your E-Bike with you on trains
which are marked with the bike symbol. To do so on German Intercity (IC) and EuroCity (EC) trains, you must book
a place for your bike in advance. As a rule, you may not
take bikes with you on German Intercity Express (ICE)
trains.
32
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
›› Damaged batteries may not be charged, and
further use is not permitted.
›› Never attempt to repair your battery. Specialists
are responsible for performing such repairs. If
your battery is damaged, contact your specialist
cycle shop. The specialists here will discuss the
next steps with you.
8.8
Disposal of batteries
Batteries are not to be disposed of with domestic waste.
Consumers are legally bound to dispose of used or damaged batteries at the locations designated for the purpose
(battery collection point or specialist cycle shop).
9 Charger
Read the type plates on the charger before using it for the
first time.
You can charge your Pedelec with Impulse drive directly
via a charging socket in the battery. The battery can
remain on the Pedelec whilst the charging operation is in
progress.
Recharging: Battery on the Pedelec
You can also take the battery out of the holder and charge
it in the docking station. This is recommended if it is cold
outside, in order to charge the battery in a warmer room.
The battery can be charged at temperatures between 0°C
and 45°C.
Recharging: Battery in the docking station
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
33
10 Cleaning
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery using the charger provided, or a charger approved by us.
•• If a charging fault occurs, the LED in the charger
flashes red. In this case, the charging current is too
high.
Charging fault
•• Disconnect the battery from the charger and then
connect it again. If the error message still appears,
the battery and charger must be checked by a specialist dealer.
›› Remove the battery before you clean your
Pedelec.
›› Do not use benzine, thinner, acetone or similar
agents in the cleaning procedures under any
circumstances. Likewise, the use of abrasive
cleaners and aggressive cleaning agents must
also be avoided.
›› Only use commercially available, household
cleaning agents and disinfectants (isopropyl
alcohol) or water. You can obtain suitable cleaning agents and additional information from your
specialist cycle shop.
›› We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a
damp cloth, a sponge or a brush.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
10.1 Cleaning the battery
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
10.2 Cleaning the motor
Dirt should be removed from the motor of your Pedelec
regularly, ideally using a dry brush or a damp (not wet)
cloth. Running water such as that from a hose pipe or even
a high-pressure cleaner must not be used for cleaning.
The ingress of water can destroy the motor. Therefore,
ensure that neither fluids nor moisture enter the motor at
any time during cleaning.
10.3 Cleaning the display
The housing of the display may only be cleaned with a
damp (not wet) cloth.
34
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
10.4 Cleaning the control panel
The control panel can be cleaned with a damp cloth where
necessary.
10.5 Cleaning the chest belt
Clean the chest belt regularly with water or a mild soap
solution.
11 Technical data
MOTOR
Brushless electric motor with gear unit and freewheel
Output
250 W rated output/
650 W maximum output
Maximum torque
at chainring
12 Nm rated torque/
40 Nm maximum torque
Gross weight
of electric drive,
battery, control unit
Freewheel motor
11 Ah
15.5 Ah
17 Ah
6.65 kg
6.75 kg
6.75 kg
Via torque sensor and rotational speed sensor in motor
and speed sensor (on rear
wheel)
Control
POSSIBLE APPLICATIONS
Maximum incline
10%
Maximum bodyweight
130 kg
IMPULSE LI-ION BATTERY
Capacities
11 Ah
15.5 Ah
17 Ah
Voltage
36 V
36 V
36 V
Weight
2.85 kg
2.95 kg
2.95 kg
VI User Manual | Impulse Ergo Pedelec
35
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new Impulse
Ergo Pedelec.
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction, in whole or in part, is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
VII
User Manual
Groove Pedelec
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
1
2
5
Battery and charger
Battery lock
4
3
Control panel
Motor unit
4
1
2
3
2
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
1
Battery
2
Battery lock
3
Motor unit
4
Control panel
5
Charger
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
featuring the innovative Groove drive from our company.
This bike is equipped with an electric drive that assists
you when you are cycling. This will make your trip much
more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying loads
or riding into the wind. You can decide yourself how much
you want to use it. The purpose of this User Manual is to
help you get the most out of your Pedelec and use it correctly.
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING about possible physical injury,
increased risk of falls or other injuries
Structure of User Manual
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
More detailed information on your Pedelec is provided in
➠ Chapter 12 “Technical data”.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or
special information on using the bike
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec for example, refer
to the General User Manual.
NOTE about possible damage to property or
the environment
Even if you can't wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” carefully without fail before
use.
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
3
Contents
1Quick start 5
6.1Operating principle of assistance
11
2Legal principles 6
6.2Distance
11
2.1Meaning for the rider 6
6.3Riding your Pedelec efficiently
12
2.2Pushing assistance 6
7Battery 12
3Special features of Pedelec with Groove drive
6
7.1Straightforward charging
4Charging the battery
7
7.2High degree of safety due to battery
management12
4.1Charging operation
4.2Fitting the battery 5 Control panel
5.1
On/Off button
5.2Switches for power-assist level
8
9
7.3Straightforward storage
12
7.4Battery information system 13
7.5Battery charge state
13
7.6
14
Service life and warranty 7.6.1 of the drive
14
8 Charger 14
9
9 Removing the front wheel
15
9
10Cleaning
16
5.3
Display of power-assist mode 10
11Warnings
16
5.4
Battery charge state indicator 10
12Technical data
17
6Assistance by the electric motor
4
8
12
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
11
1
Quick start
›› 1. Charge the battery completely before riding for
the first time.
›› 2. Open the round charging socket cover on the
back of the battery.
›› 5. If you have charged the battery somewhere
other than on the Pedelec, place the battery back
into the holder in the pannier rack by reinserting it
from behind. Once you have inserted the battery,
turn the key clockwise and then remove it, otherwise the battery will not lock into position.
›› 6. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and that the key is no longer in the lock.
›› 7. Press the round switch on the side of the battery housing. The red LED inside it lights up.
Charging socket
Now insert the plug of the charger into the battery
charging socket.
Switch, battery housing
›› 8. Push the POWER button on the control panel on
the handlebar.
Charging the battery
›› 3. Insert the mains plug for the charger into the
socket.
You must fully charge the battery before using it for
the first time.
›› 9. The display panel now displays the medium
power-assist mode SPORT. Press the Mode button
to select the level of assistance: ECO (low), SPORT
(medium) or POWER (high). Press this button once
to change the level of assistance by one level. Once
the POWER assist level has been activated, the assistance jumps back to ECO the next time the button is pressed.
›› 4. The battery is fully charged if all green LEDs on
the back of the battery light up when you press the
adjacent button.
You can ride off just as you would if you were riding a
normal bike. The power assist starts after roughly two
complete crank revolutions.
›› 10. You can now ride off.
Button on the battery
Pull the charger plug out of the battery socket.
Close the charging socket cover
You can also remove the battery from your Pedelec
and charge it somewhere else. For more information, refer to ➠ Chapter 4 “Charging the battery”.
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
5
2 Legal principles
2.2
The essential idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate assist level.
Your Pedelec is available in a version with or without pushing assistance.
Pushing assistance
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater
degree of security. Your Pedelec provides you with power
assistance, the level of which you can vary at the control
panel.
In some EU countries, the Pedelec, like all other bikes,
must comply with certain regulations, the Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations (StVZO) in Germany for example.
Please observe the relevant explanations and general
information provided in the General User Manual.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling assistance, i.e. it can only "assist" the rider when he/
she turns the pedals.
Button for pushing assistance
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly (at a
maximum speed of 6 km/h) without you having to turn the
pedals, e.g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
If you were born after 01. 04. 1965, you will need a moped
test certificate for the version with pushing assistance. If
you already have another type of driving licence, this automatically includes the moped test certificate.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
The pushing assistance is not suitable for use as starting
assistance.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km/h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
•• You do not legally have to have a driving license
(unless you own a model with pushing assistance,
➠ Chapter 2.2 “Pushing assistance”).
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
3 S
pecial features of Pedelec
with Groove drive
Your Pedelec is equipped with special features that are
designed to enhance your safety and comfort.
›› With the Groove drive, you can ride your Pedelec,
and also benefit from the convenience and safety of
a back-pedal function.
This means that you can rely on three brakes; the
familiar back-pedal brake and the powerful, modern rim brakes.
3
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
1
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
6
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
2
1
2
3
Rim brake, front
Back-pedal brake
Rim brake, rear
›› The Groove drive also makes it possible to ride
with power assistance even if you are only gently
turning the cranks.
›› Hold the battery by the recessed grip at the back of
the battery and turn the key anticlockwise.
›› This unlocks the battery and you can now remove it
by pulling it backwards out of the Pedelec. In doing so, hold on tight to the battery to prevent it
from being dropped.
If you decide to use the power assistance when only
gently turning the cranks, you will use a much greater
amount of power than if you were actively pedalling
at the same time.
4 Charging the battery
›› You can charge the battery whilst it is on the Pedelec (as described in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”).
Unlocking the battery
Removing the battery
›› You can also remove the battery from the holder
and charge it in the docking station. This is recommended if it is cold outside, in order to charge the
battery in a warm room.
›› You should now remove the key and keep it in a
safe place to prevent it from breaking off or being
lost.
LED display panel
Recessed grip
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
7
4.1
Charging operation
Before charging the battery, read the directions on the
charger carefully.
LEDs on the battery
›› 5. If the LED on the charger lights up green, the
battery is fully charged.
›› 6. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the
socket once the charging operation is complete.
You can also leave the charging cable plugged in
once the charging operation is complete. However,
the charger always draws some current if you leave
it plugged in.
Sticker on the underside of the charger
›› 1. Take the charger provided out of its packaging and plug the mains plug into a socket (230 V,
please observe type plate on the charger).
To charge the battery safely, the charger must be
placed on a suitable surface resting on its four feet
with the LED facing upwards.
4.2
Fitting the battery
›› 1. Push the battery into the rear of the battery
housing under the pannier rack.
To do this, the battery key must be inserted and
turned clockwise.
›› 2. The LED in the charger now lights up green.
›› 3. Insert the plug of the charger into the battery
charging socket. The battery and charger are connected.
Reinstalling the battery
Battery with charging cable plugged in
›› 2. Push the battery fully into the battery housing.
Now turn the key anticlockwise and then remove it
to lock the battery.
›› 3. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
›› 4. The charging process starts.
›› The LED in the charger now lights up red. You can
check the battery's charge state by pressing the
square button on the battery to the right of the
LEDs. The greater the number of LEDs that light up
the higher the charge state is.
8
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
›› 4. Push down the round rocker switch on the lefthand side of the battery housing. A red LED lights
up.
›› 5. The Pedelec is now ready for operation.
5 Control panel
5.1
On/Off button
Press the POWER button to switch the control panel on
and off.
2
3
1
4
After it has been switched on, the system is always in the
medium power-assist mode SPORT.
5.2
Switches for power-assist level
You can specify the power assist level via the Mode
button.
1
2
3
4
Button for power assist level
On/Off switch
Power-assist mode display
Battery charge state indicator
The control panel on the handlebar has two or three buttons (depending on the model) and two rows of LED indicators. The button used to control the level of assistance
is located on the left-hand side of the control panel.
Buttons for power assist level
To the right at the bottom you can see the LED display bar
which indicates the level of assistance which has been
activated and the current battery charge state.
Each time you press the Mode button, the assistance
changes by one level from ECO through to the highest level
POWER.
The POWER button is located above the LEDs.
Press this button to switch the control panel on and off.
If you require less assistance, press the Mode button until
the level of assistance moves from the highest back to the
lowest level.
Each time you press the Mode button the power assist
changes by one level.
On/Off button
If the model features pushing assistance, the switch for
this will be on the underside of the control panel.
Button for pushing assistance
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
9
5.3
Display of power-assist mode
The upper row of LED indicators on the right next to the
Mode button shows how much assistance the motor is currently providing.
5.4
Battery charge state indicator
The battery charge state indicator is located below the
row of LED indicators that displays the power-assist mode.
Battery charge state indicator
Display of power-assist mode
DISPLAY
ASSIST LEVEL
POWER
SPORT
ECO
Assist level
•• The LED on the right of the display lights up when
the highest level of assistance (POWER) is activated. This means the assistance is working hard.
•• The LED in the centre of the display lights up when
the medium assist level (SPORT) is activated. This
means the assistance is working with a medium
level of effort.
•• The LED on the left of the display lights up when
the lowest level (ECO) is activated and the assistance is working only with a low level of effort.
•• If all three battery charge state indicator LEDs
are lit, the battery charge is between 100 and
65%.
•• If two LEDs are lit, the battery charge is still between 65 and 35%.
•• If only one LED is lit, the battery charge is between only 35 and 10%.
•• If only one LED is flashing, the battery charge
is less than 10%. At this point you will notice a
slight loss of power.
•• If the battery charge state falls below a minimum
level, the system switches off. No LEDs light up
on the control panel.
DISPLAY
BATTERY
CHARGE STATE
100 % – 65 %
65 % – 35 %
35 % – 10 %
below 10 %
When using the eco mode and pedaling only lightly,
an irregular noise from the motor may be heard.
LED lights up
Battery charge state
10
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
LED flashes
LED off
6 Assistance by the electric motor
6.1
Distance
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
Operating principle of assistance
If you switch on the assistance and start pedalling, the
motor starts up once the cranks have completed roughly
two complete revolutions.
The amount of propulsion provided by the motor depends
on which level of assistance you have selected.
Motor output
(watts)
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of its
power at low ambient temperatures.
250
•• Level of assistance selected
If you wish to ride a long distance assisted by the
motor, select a low level of assistance (ECO).
150
•• Riding approach
You can ride assisted almost entirely by the motor
by turning the pedals very gently. However, this
uses more battery power. You can save power by
putting in more effort when turning the pedals.
70
Speed (km/h)
25
The motor can operate with three different power output
levels.
•• The motor delivers a continuous output of 70 watts
at the lowest level ECO, 150 watts at the medium
level SPORT, and 250 watts at the highest level
POWER.
•• When the switch is in the POWER position, the
motor assists you with the highest output and
therefore also uses the most energy. If you select
the SPORT assist level, the motor output is slightly
lower. If you select ECO, you will receive the lowest
level of assistance but will be able to use the maximum range of the battery.
••
6.2
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec
Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct. If you
ride your bike with too little air in the tyres, this
can significantly increase the rolling resistance.
This applies to smooth surfaces in particular, e. g.
tarmac. If the ground is uneven, as on a country
path or gravel track, rather low tyre pressure can
lead to less rolling resistance. This also increases
the risk of a puncture. Please consult your specialist dealer about this.
The distance you can travel also decreases if the
brakes are rubbing.
•• Topography
The motor uses more power when riding in hilly
rather than flat terrain.
The motor provides assistance until the Pedelec
reaches a speed of 25 km/h. It then switches off.
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
11
��
6.3
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for achieving
a long range.
The operating costs for battery-operated power assist are
calculated as follows:
7
Battery
Your battery is a lithium cobalt battery, the ideal lithiumion (Li-Ion) battery type for this application. One of the
main benefits of this type of battery is its low weight
combined with a high capacity. Li-Ion batteries only weigh
half as much as comparable nickel metal hydride or nickel-cadmium batteries. This means you carry less battery
weight and more battery power.
•• A new battery costs roughly 359 euros.
•• You can cover 45 km on average with one battery
charge.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1,100 charging cycles x 45 km = 49,500 km
•• 359 euros: 49,500 km = 0.7 euro cents / km
•• You use roughly 0.47 kWh to fully charge the battery. Assuming a unit price of 20 euro cents / kWh,
it costs you 9.4 euro cents to fully charge the battery.
•• It costs you 0.2 euro cents / km to cover the average range of 45 km.
•• This means that the maximum cost of consumption
and the battery is 0.9 euro cents/km.
The sample calculation has been carried out based on German energy prices. The operating costs may therefore be
different in locations where other energy prices apply.
7.1
Straightforward charging
›› There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
›› Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
›› If you are not using the battery, you only have to
recharge it after 6 months.
7.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
›› The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
›› You can simply leave the battery standing in the
charger as the device has in-built overcharging
protection.
7.3
Straightforward storage
›› If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10°C when the battery charge
is between 50 and 75%.
These benefits are available due to highly effective battery
management that has been adapted to this specific application and by tuning the battery for operation with a 250
watt motor.
12
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
7.4
Battery information system
There is a display panel on the top of the battery which
contains four LEDs and a button. The LEDs light up if you
press the button. Information about the battery and its
charge state is provided based on the number of LEDs that
light up and the way in which they light up.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or if you have
not used it for a while.
›› You should run the battery all the way down to
empty for the first three charging cycles. This allows the battery to reach its maximum capacity.
7.5
Battery charge state
Press the switch on the battery briefly to activate the LEDs
and see the current battery charge state.
If you continuously run the battery to empty during
normal operation, this reduces its service life.
If you partially recharge the battery frequently during normal operation, this has a favourable effect
on its service life.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the battery
whenever possible: Try not to run the battery all
the way down to empty and recharge it even after
short periods of operation.
Charge state indicator
DISPLAY
›› If you are having problems with the battery, place
it in the charger for one minute. This resets the battery. After this, the battery will work again.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10°C and +30°C. It takes longer
to charge the battery at low temperatures, the
battery will not charge up at temperatures higher
than +30°C. Ideally, you should charge and store
the battery inside your house or in a warm garage
when the outside temperature is low. In this case
you should only fit the battery on your bike just
before using it.
BATTERY CHARGE STATE
••••
4 LEDs light up
100 – 75%
•••
3 LEDs light up
75 – 50%
••
2 LEDs light up
50 – 25%
•
1 LED lights up
25 – 0%
›› If the battery is empty, it will work once again
briefly following a short period of rejuvenation and
will then switch back off. It must now be charged.
›› Check the battery charge before every trip to make
sure it is sufficient for the planned journey.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods with a charge of between 50% and 75% at
a temperature of +10°C.
Long charging times
-10 °C
0 °C
Optimum temperature
range for charging
process
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
Battery may be
damaged
40 °C
50 °C
Charging times at different temperatures
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
13
��
›› The range of the battery is less in winter due to the
lower temperatures. Only move the battery from
the warm room where you store it and fit it on your
Pedelec just before you set off. This will help reduce the effect of the low temperature on the range
of the battery.
›› The distance you can cover can vary depending on
the topography, the condition of the battery and
the assist level you are using.
7.6
Service life and warranty
7.6.1 of the drive
The Groove hub motor is a durable maintenance-free
drive. It is a wear part with a two-year warranty. As its
power output is higher, wear parts such as the tyres and
brakes are subject to higher loads than they would be on a
normal bike. Due to the greater force acting on these components, wear is more pronounced.
7.6.2 of the battery
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts come with a two-year
warranty.
The battery of course also ages over time. Even if you do
not use your battery, its capacity reduces. In general, the
battery is expected to age at a rate of 5% per year.
Providing you can still cover the journey distances with
the remaining battery capacity, you can of course continue
using it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you can
take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who will dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
›› You can extend the service life of the battery by fully recharging it after every journey, however short.
The Groove Li-Ion battery has no memory effect.
›› You can also extend the service life of the battery
by using the assist levels selectively. Avoid riding
with a high assist level when you are only gently
turning the pedals.
8 Charger
Read the two identification plates on the charger before
using it for the first time.
You can charge your Pedelec with Groove drive directly by
connecting the plug of the charger to the battery.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are
•• the number of charging cycles and
•• the age of the battery.
According to the technical definition, the battery is used if
its capacity is only 60% in the new condition.
Charging the battery
The battery can remain on the Pedelec during the charging
process.
You can also remove the battery from the holder on the
Pedelec and charge it somewhere else. This recommended
if it is cold outside, in order to charge the battery in a
warm room.
Battery with charging cable plugged in
14
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
9 Removing the front wheel
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery using the charger provided, or a charger approved by us.
If a problem occurs, remove the battery from the Pedelec and place it briefly in the charger. The charger
tests the battery and corrects any faults that may be
present.
If you need to remove the front wheel, to repair a puncture for example, this can be done in the same way as
removing the front wheel of a normal bike, excluding one
procedure.
›› The first thing you must do before releasing the
front wheel is to open the connection to the front
wheel motor.
›› Undo the locking nut for the electrical connector
which is located on the back of the fork. Take the upper half of the connector in one hand and the lower
half in the other and pull the two halves apart.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
1
›› Only place the charger in an upright, secure and
stable position on a suitable surface.
2
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
1
2
Locking nut
Cable tie
The lower half of the connector and the power cable are
fastened to the fork with two cable ties.
›› Slide the cable ties down and off the fork. You can
now remove the front wheel. You can find corresponding instructions in the section of this User
Manual that deals with general bike technology. If
you take the front wheel out of the fork, also pull
the cable and cable tie off the fork.
›› To reinstall the front wheel, slide the cable tie
with cable onto the fork leg before positioning the
wheel in the fork. Install the front wheel as described in the general section of this User Manual.
›› Next, reattach the two halves of the connector and
screw the lock nut firmly back on. Slide the two cable ties back up the fork until they remain in place
of their own accord and cannot slip.
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
15
��
10 Cleaning
Remove the battery before you clean your Pedelec.
We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a damp cloth,
a sponge or a brush. You can obtain suitable cleaning
agents and additional information from your specialist
cycle shop.
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
11 Warnings
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs. You could burn yourself.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car,
remove the battery beforehand. Transport the
battery in a safe receptacle, separately to the
Pedelec.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage
(36 volts). Never attempt to operate the Pedelec
using power from a source other than a suitable
genuine battery.
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by the specialist cycle
shop.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
16
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove
›› If risk free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if there is a possibility they could insert objects into the appliance through apertures
in the housing. This poses the danger of fatal
electric shock.
›› When charging the battery, make absolutely sure
the charger is correctly supported on its four
feet. It must not be covered when in operation.
The heat produced by the battery must be able to
dissipate.
›› Always engage the brake if you are at a traffic
light. If you move the pedals by accident, this
could start up the motor and cause the bike to
set off.
12 Technical data
MOTOR
Brushless electric motor with planetary gear unit and
freewheel
Output
250 watts
Maximum torque
35 Nm
Weight of motor
2.88 kg
Assist levels
70, 150, 250 watts
Switch-off speed
25 km/h at all
assist levels
Control
via speed sensor
GROOVE LI-ION BATTERY
Voltage
36 V
Capacities
9 Ah
Watt hours
324 Wh
Weight
2.4 kg
VII User Manual | Pedelec Groove�
17
��
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using
your new Pedelec with Groove drive.
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction in whole or in part is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications.
VIII
User Manual
Pedelec Xion
English
Derby Cycle Werke GmbH 2013
1a
1b
Control panel
2
Charger
Display
1a
1b
3
1a Control panel
4
5
2
VIII User Manual Xion Pedelec
1b Display
2
Charger
3
Battery
4
Battery lock
5
Motor unit
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Pedelec (pedal electric cycle)
with Xion drive from our company. This bike is equipped
with an innovative electric drive that assists you when
you are cycling. This will make your trip much more enjoyable if you are riding up hills, carrying loads or riding
into the wind. You can decide yourself how much you want
to use it.
The purpose of this User Manual is to help you get the
most out of your Pedelec and use it correctly.
Structure of the User Manual
In addition to texts and tables, the User Manual contains
the following symbols that denote important information
or dangers.
WARNING
regarding possible physical injury, increased
risk of falls or other injuries.
If you want to get started right away, refer to the brief
introduction in ➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”.
The individual steps are subsequently explained in detail,
supplemented by illustrations and diagrams.
More detailed information on your Pedelec is provided in
➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
or special information regarding the use of
the bike.
The information in this User Manual specifically refers to
your Pedelec only. For general information, on the bike
technology that features in your Pedelec, for example,
refer to the General User Manual.
NOTE
regarding possible damage to property or the
environment.
Even if you can’t wait to go for your first ride, in the
interest of your own safety you should at least read
➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start” before use.
We also strongly recommend reading this manual and
the General User Manual in their entirety.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
3
4
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
Warnings
›› Bear in mind that the Pedelec motor can heat up
on long ascents. Be careful not to touch it with
your hands, feet or legs. You could burn yourself.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car,
remove the battery beforehand. Transport the
battery in a suitable transport container separately from the Pedelec. A suitable transport
container can be obtained from your specialist
cycle shop.
›› Keep children away from electrical appliances. If
children are present, keep a close eye on them,
especially if there is a possibility they could
insert objects into the appliance through apertures in the housing. This poses the danger of fatal
electric shock.
›› When charging the battery, make absolutely sure
the charger is correctly supported. It must not be
covered when in operation.
›› The Pedelec operates using low voltage (36 volts).
Never attempt to operate the Pedelec using power
from a source other than a suitable genuine battery. The designations of approved batteries are
listed in ➠ Chapter 11 “Technical data”.
›› When removing the battery from your Pedelec,
ensure that it does not fall. This may cause irreparable damage to the battery housing. Information on how to deal with a damaged battery can
be found in ➠ Chapter 7.7 “Damaged batteries”.
›› Live parts may be exposed when you open covers
or remove parts. Connection points may also be
live. Maintenance or repairs on the device when
it is open and connected to the power supply
must only be carried out by a professional bike
workshop.
›› Damaged batteries may neither be recharged nor
continue to be used.
›› When carrying out adjustments and maintenance
or when cleaning the Pedelec, avoid crushing
cables or damaging them with sharp edges.
›› If risk-free operation of your Pedelec cannot be
assumed, take it out of operation and make sure
it cannot be used until you have it checked by a
specialist cycle shop. Risk-free operation is no
longer possible if live parts or the rechargeable
battery show signs of damage.
›› During the charging process, the battery and
charger must be placed on an even, nonflammable surface. Battery and charger must not
be covered.
›› The battery may heat up during charging. A maximum temperature of 45°C may be reached. If the
battery becomes any warmer than this, suspend
the charging process immediately.
›› Bear in mind that the vehicle is only designed
for a maximum speed of 70 km/h. Exceeding this
speed causes damage to the electrical components.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
5
Contents
1Quick start 2Legal principles 9
5.2Display
14
10
2.1Meaning for the rider 10
3Special features of the Pedelec
with Xion drive
11
4 Charging the battery
11
5.2.1Mounting and removal
of the display 15
5.2.2Display of the power-assist mode
and energy recovery
15
5.2.3 Battery charge state indicator
15
4.1
Removing the battery
11
5.2.4 Remaining range indicator
16
4.2
Learning cycle
12
5.2.5 Pushing assistance
16
4.3Charging operation
12
5.3
4.4Fitting the battery 13
5.4Programming and settings
5 Control panel and display
13
5.4.1 Tour Reset
17
13
5.4.2 Assist mode
17
5.4.3 Braking assistance
18
5.4.4 Pushing assistance
18
5.4.5Settings
18
5.1
6
Control panel 5.1.1Switching on/off
13
5.1.2Buttons for power-assist level
14
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
Troubleshooting
16
17
5.4.5.1
Date
18
5.4.5.2
Time
19
5.4.5.3
Language
19
5.4.5.4
Information
19
6Assistance by the electric motor
20
7.6Transportation and shipping
of the battery
7.6.1 Transportation
27
27
7.6.1.1
The E-Bike and your car
27
7.6.1.2
The E-Bike on trains
27
7.6.1.3
The E-Bike on aeroplanes
27
7.6.2 Shipping
27
6.1
Operating principle of assistance
20
7.7
Damaged batteries
27
6.2
Assist modes
20
7.8
Disposal of batteries
27
6.2.1 Energy recovery
21
6.2.2Braking assistance
21
6.3
Range
21
6.4
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
22
7 Battery
7.1
Straightforward charging
7.1.1 Learning cycle
23
23
23
7.3
24
7.4Battery information system 28
9 Removing and installing the rear wheel
29
23
7.2High degree of safety due to
battery management
Straightforward storage
8Charger 9.1
Removing the rear wheel
29
9.2
Installing the rear wheel
30
10 Cleaning
30
25
10.1 Cleaning the battery
30
7.4.1Checking the battery charge state 25
10.2 Cleaning the motor
30
7.4.2Checking the battery capacity
25
10.3 Cleaning the display
31
26
10.4 Cleaning the control panel
31
7.5Service life and warranty 7.5.1Service life and warranty
of the battery
26
11Technical data
31
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
7
8
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
1
Quick start
1. Charge the battery completely before riding for the
first time. Charge temperature: 0°C to 45°C.
2. Remove the cover from the charging socket.
6. If you removed the battery for charging, replace it in
the holder from the front/above. At the same time, the
key must be in the lock and must be turned anticlockwise. Press the battery down into the holder until the
locking mechanism engages. Now turn the key clockwise and remove it. The battery is now locked in place.
3. Connect the plug of the charger to the battery. When
positioned correctly, the plug is held in the socket by
magnets.
Installing the battery
Charging the battery
4. Insert the mains plug for the charger into the socket.
You must fully charge the battery before using it for the
first time.
You can also remove the battery from your Pedelec
and charge it elsewhere. For more information on this
subject, refer to ➠ Chapter 4 “Charging the battery”.
5. The charge state of the battery is indicated by five
LEDs. The battery LEDs light up or flash during charging. Once all of the LEDs have gone out, the battery is
fully charged.
Locking the battery
Be sure to make a note of the number engraved on
your key. In case you lose both keys, you have an
opportunity to obtain an appropriate replacement key
by quoting the correct number.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
9
7. Make sure that the battery is securely positioned and
that the key is no longer in the lock.
8. Press the diamond button on the control panel to
switch on the drive system.
9. The display panel now displays the medium powerassist mode. The assist level is represented by a bar
with a maximum of five light elements on the far left
of the display panel. By pressing one of the two arrow
buttons on the control panel, you can select the level
of assistance. Pressing once changes the level of assistance by one level. This works both ways, depending
on which arrow button you press.
10. You can also use the arrow button to set the assistance
from the motor to zero and begin energy recovery
(➠ Chapter 6.2.1 “Energy recovery”).
11. You can now ride off just as you would if you were
riding a normal bike. The motor starts providing assistance as soon as you begin to pedal.
2 Legal principles
The essential idea behind the Pedelec is not only to be
able to cover greater distances more quickly, but also
more comfortably. You can choose to relax and let the bike
do the work, exert yourself more physically, or simply get
from A to B as fast as possible. You can decide this yourself by choosing an appropriate power-assist mode.
This gives you more confidence on the road, as the powerful acceleration gives you more control and a greater
degree of security. Your Pedelec assists you with an output
that adapts to your pedalling force up to roughly 25 km/h.
The Pedelec, like all other bikes, must comply with the
national regulations for road safety. Please observe the
relevant explanations and general information provided in
the General User Manual.
These statutory requirements apply for a Pedelec:
•• The motor is designed only to provide pedalling
assistance, i.e. it can only “assist” the rider when
he/she turns the pedals.
•• The average motor output must not exceed 250 W.
From the first moment on, you have full assistance.
This is unfamiliar but comfortable. Practice starting
up in a safe location before venturing into the road
traffic.
•• As the speed increases, the rate at which the motor
output reduces must also increase more intensely.
•• The motor must switch off once the bike reaches a
speed of 25 km/h.
2.1
Meaning for the rider
•• You do not legally have to wear a helmet. In the
interest of your own safety, however, you should
never ride without a helmet.
•• You do not legally have to have a driving licence.
•• You do not legally have to have insurance.
•• No age restriction applies for a Pedelec.
•• The regulations governing the use of cycle paths
are the same as for normal bikes.
These regulations apply to you wherever you are in the
European Union. It is possible that different regulations
exist in other countries, also inside the EU in individual
cases. Before using your Pedelec abroad, find out about
the legal situation in the relevant country.
10
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
3 S
pecial features of the Pedelec
with Xion drive
Your Pedelec has special features that are designed to
enhance your safety and comfort, some of which are
unique worldwide.
4 Charging the battery
You can charge the battery whilst it is on the Pedelec
(➠ Chapter 1 “Quick start”).
•• The use of sprocket cassettes in combination with a
durable free wheel design.
•• A low or central centre of gravity thanks to the
favourable position of the battery (down tube, seat
tube battery). This ensures a pleasant ride.
•• A central display in the middle of the handlebar to
facilitate easy reading of data.
•• The control panel can be reached easily and safely.
It can be mounted on the left or right.
•• 250 W rated output/650 W maximum output.
•• Maximum torque of 41 Nm for powerful and safe
acceleration.
•• Quick-release device for simple, fast wheel
changes.
•• No gear unit – silent running.
•• Braking assistant – maintains the maximum speed
you previously selected when riding downhill
and recovers energy. This allows the battery to be
charged during downhill riding.
Charging the battery
Alternatively, you can take the battery out of its holder
and charge it in a separate location.
This is recommended if it is cold outside, in order to
charge the battery in a warmer room. The battery can be
charged at temperatures between 0°C and 45°C.
4.1
Removing the battery
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn it anticlockwise.
The battery is now unlocked.
•• Charging the battery on the bike and separately.
•• The drive system is compatible with commercially
available axle mounts for bike trailers. Please
familiarise yourself with the legal requirements
regarding the use of your Pedelec with a trailer.
Unlocking the battery
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
11
2. Grip the battery with both hands and lift it forwards/
upwards out of its holder. In doing so, hold on tight to
the battery to prevent it from being dropped. Place the
battery down on a suitable surface. This should be dry,
even and non-flammable.
4.3
Charging operation
Before charging the battery, read the information on
the charger carefully.
1. Take the charger provided out of its packaging and
plug the mains plug into a socket (110 to 230 V, please
observe type plate on the charger). To charge the battery safely, the charger must be placed on a suitable
surface. This should be dry and non-flammable.
Removing the battery
2. Connect the plug of the charger to the battery. When
positioned correctly, the plug is held in the socket by a
magnet.
3. You should now remove the key and keep it in a safe
place to prevent it from breaking off or being lost.
4.2
Learning cycle
After fully charging the battery for the first time and
thereafter roughly once every six months, you must run
the battery down until the system switches off. This
procedure (a so-called “learning cycle”) is necessary
so that the battery management recognises the changes in the capacity caused by age and wear and tear,
in other words, the performance level of the battery.
Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is calculated
anew and correctly represented. This also allows the
remaining range display to function with greater precision. With this procedure, you can prevent a sudden
loss of electrical assistance during an extended trip.
Charging the battery
3. The charging process begins. The LED on the charger
lights up red. The battery is charged in five stages.
When charging of one stage is in progress, the corresponding LED flashes. If this stage has been fully
charged, the LED will light up permanently. Now the
next LED will begin to flash. After all five LEDs have
gone out, the battery is fully charged.
4. If the LED on the charger flashes red permanently, a
charging fault has developed. In that case, disconnect
the battery from the charger, then connect it again. The
charger tests the battery and performs readjustments,
if required. If the LED on the charger still flashes, take
the charger and battery to your specialist dealer who
will test the device and replace it, if required.
5. To save power, pull the charger plug out of the socket
once the charging operation is complete.
12
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
5 Control panel and display
›› Damaged batteries may neither be charged, nor
continue to be used.
The Xion Pedelec can be controlled via two elements. The
display is located in the middle of the handlebar. The control panel can be found on the handlebar grip.
›› The battery may heat up during charging.
A maximum temperature of 45°C may be
reached. If the battery becomes any warmer than
this, suspend the charging process immediately.
4.4
Fitting the battery
1. Insert the battery into the battery holder of the Pedelec from the front/above. At the same time, the key
must be in the lock and must be turned anticlockwise.
Control panel and display
5.1
Control panel
1
Installing the battery
2
2. Press the battery down into the holder until the locking mechanism engages. Now turn the key clockwise
and remove it. The battery is now locked in place.
3
1
2
3
Upper arrow button
Diamond button
Lower arrow button
The three buttons each have different functions depending
on the item of the settings menu in which you are located.
5.1.1 Switching on/off
Locking the battery
3. Make sure the battery is firmly in place.
Press the diamond button to switch the Xion system on.
After a few seconds, the welcome screen appears, followed
by the start menu.
From there you can carry out further settings (➠ Chapter
5.4 “Programming and settings”).
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
13
To switch your Pedelec off, press the diamond button on
the control panel for around two seconds whilst in the
start menu. This will take you to the sub-menu.
Navigate to the item “Shutdown” using the arrow buttons
and confirm using the diamond button.
The display in the middle of the handlebar is divided into
five different display panels.
•• At the top on the right is your current 1 speed.
•• On the left is a display showing the 2 powerassist mode you have selected or the level of
energy recovery.
•• In the middle on the right hand-side is the 3
battery symbol, which tells you the current charge
status of your Pedelec’s battery.
Back
Shutdown
•• The remaining 4 range is displayed to the right
of the display for the 2 power-assist mode.
•• Below this you will see 5 the date or the time,
for example. In place of these, the following data
can also be called up:
5.1.2 Buttons for power-assist level
•• You can specify the power-assist level using the
arrow buttons.
•• Each time you press an arrow button, the power
assist changes by one level.
•• If you press the upper arrow button, the level of
assistance increases by one level each time you
press it.
•• If you press the lower arrow button, the assistance
becomes weaker each time you press it.
5.2
Display
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
14
Speed
Power-assist mode/energy recovery
Battery charge state
Remaining range
Variably adjustable display
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
••
Distance covered during the day (in km).
••
The journey time taken to cover this distance.
••
The average speed (in km/h).
••
The maximum speed reached
(in km).
••
The total mileage (in km).
••
The total journey time taken to cover this
distance.
••
The average speed based on this data
(in km/h).
••
Your personal contribution as the rider (in Wh).
••
The power consumption.
5.2.1 M
ounting and removal
of the display
Mounting:
Please always turn the display off first before you
remove it (➠ Chapter 5.1.1 “Switching on/off”).
Place the display on the display holder at an angle of
approx. 30 degrees.
Using light pressure, turn the display through 30 degrees
in a clockwise direction so that both components are
aligned with one another. In the process, you can clearly
feel the display lock into place.
›› In order to protect your Pedelec from undesirable use by third parties or theft, the display
should always be removed from the handlebar
when the Pedelec is not in use.
›› You can protect the display from theft by means
of a self-tapping countersunk screw for plastic.
Contact your specialist cycle shop about this.
Mounting the display
Removal:
Turn the display approx. 30 degrees anticlockwise on the
display holder. In doing so, the electrical connections are
undone and the display can be removed.
Removing the display
5.2.2 D
isplay of the power-assist mode
and energy recovery
You can also find information on the assist modes in
➠ Chapter 6.2 “Assist modes”.
The selected assist level is displayed graphically on the
far left of the display. Above the diamond you will see the
assist levels 1 to 5. The higher the selected assist level,
the more assistance the drive provides with constant
pedal force.
Assist levels
Below the diamond, the energy recovery is displayed.
You can set two different recuperation levels. The first
level yields 50% energy recovery, while the second yields
100%. In the second level, the maximum possible energy
recovery is achieved.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
15
5.2.3 Battery charge state indicator
5.2.5 Pushing assistance
The battery charge state indicator is located to the right of
the centre of the display. Using a stylised battery divided
into four segments, it shows the charge remaining in the
battery. The lower the charge state of the battery is, the
fewer segments are displayed.
First of all, pushing assistance must be activated in
programming mode (➠ Chapter 5.4.4 “Pushing assistance”).
1
2
Charge state indicator
1
2
To activate the pushing assistance, press and hold the
upper arrow button. To receive no further pushing assistance, release the button.
5.3
Troubleshooting
Battery full
Battery almost empty
If the battery charge state falls below a minimum level,
the assistance switches off via the motor. The display
remains active until the battery reaches the lowest possible charge state.
If you do not move your Pedelec for 10 minutes, the system switches off automatically. If you subsequently want
to ride using the assistance, you will have to switch it
back on using the diamond button.
If your bike has been exposed to wet conditions for
an extended period, e.g. after a trip in heavy rain, or
if there have been large differences in temperature,
the screen of the display may steam up. This moisture does not impair the function of the display. It is
comparable with the steam on a pair of glasses when
you enter a warmer room having been outside. After
a short time in drier and warmer conditions, this condensation will vanish leaving no trace.
5.2.4 Remaining range indicator
To the right of the display of the power-assist mode, the
distance in km over which you can still travel with power
assist is displayed. This is the remaining range indicator.
Error messages do not appear on the entire screen, but
rather in place of the battery display on the right-hand
side. All symbols remain permanently visible, with the
exception of the “Inspection due” symbol.
SYMBOL
This “remaining range” is calculated using two measurements taken during the current journey. One short
and one long measurement give a representative average value. If the conditions of the journey change,
for example, by riding up an incline after a long, flat
stretch, the value displayed can also change at short
notice. Please consider this factor when planning your
trips. You are probably familiar with this effect from
the remaining range indicator of your car.
16
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
CAUSE
SOLUTION
Battery almost
empty.
•• Recharge your
battery.
Inspection due.
•• Consult your specialist cycle shop.
Temperature is
too high. The
motor is too hot.
•• Allow your system
to cool down.
A fault has
occurred in the
system.
•• Please contact
your specialist
cycle shop.
5.4
Programming and settings
After switching on the Xion system, you can switch to the
programming mode by pressing the diamond button. This
only works when the Pedelec is at a standstill. It is always
possible when the “M” is visible in the diamond of the
power-assist mode.
5.4.1 Tour Reset
Under the menu sub-item “Tour Reset” you can delete
your tour data. As soon as you press the diamond button,
the tour kilometres, the average speed and the journey
time for the tour are deleted – and you are taken back to
the start menu.
You are taken to the menu sub-items
•• Back
•• Tour Reset
Assist mode
Brake assist
Push assist
Sengs
•• Assist mode
•• Brake assist
•• Push assist
•• Settings
You can select the menu sub-items using the arrow buttons on the control panel. You can confirm your selection
by pressing the diamond button. The respective contents
are then displayed for you. In order to return to the start
menu display from the menu sub-items, you must select
the menu item “Back” and confirm by pressing the diamond button.
5.4.2 Assist mode
Under the menu sub-item “Assist mode” you can set the
assist level of your motor. To do so, press the diamond
button and navigate to the desired mode. You can choose
between: ECO and Sport. Once you have decided, press
the diamond button.
Assist mode
Assist mode
Brake assist
Push assist
Sengs
DISPLAY
ASSIST LEVEL
ECO
This means the assistance is only working
with a low level of effort. Therefore, longer ranges can be achieved.
Sport
This means the assistance is working hard.
As a result, power consumption is higher
and the range shorter.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
17
5.4.3 Braking assistance
5.4.5 Settings
Under the menu sub-item “Brake assist” you can stipulate
whether you want to ride with or without braking
assistance. Press the diamond button and navigate to the
desired item using the arrow buttons. Once you have
decided, press the diamond button.
Under the menu sub-item “Settings”, you can set and
review the following sub-items:
Brake assist
Brake assist
on
Push assist
•• Date
•• Time
•• Language
•• Information
off
Sengs
5.4.5.1 Date
Brake assist
Brake assist
on
•• Back
from
Under the item “Date”, you can set the year, month and
day. To do so, press the diamond button and navigate to
the desired items using the arrow buttons. Confirm your
respective selection using the diamond button. Once you
have made selections relating to all items, you will see the
desired date on the display in the following format: DD.
Month YYYY. Pressing the diamond button takes you back
to the settings.
off
Sengs
Back
Date
Time
Language
5.4.4 Pushing assistance
The pushing assistance moves the Pedelec slowly (at a
maximum speed of 6 km/h) without you having to turn the
pedals, e.g. if you are manoeuvring in a tight space or are
pushing your Pedelec out of a basement garage. Select the
menu sub-item “Push assist” and press the diamond button. Under the menu sub-item “Push assist” you can stipulate whether you require pushing assistance to be “on” or
“off”. Confirm using the diamond button.
Year
Month
January
Push assist
Push assist
Sengs
on
off
Day
18
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
Date
5.4.5.2 Time
5.4.5.4 Information
Under the item “Time”, you can set the time. To do so,
press the diamond button and set the desired time in the
format hh:mm using the arrow buttons. Pressing the diamond button takes you back to the settings.
Under the item “Information”, you can call up information
about your software version, motor and battery. Navigate
to the desired item using the arrow buttons and confirm
using the diamond button. Pressing the diamond button
once more takes you back to the settings.
Sengs
Sengs
Back
Date
Time
Language
Time
Language
motor
baery
Hour
Minute
5.4.5.3 Language
Under the item “Language”, you can choose whether you
want to use the display in English or German. Navigate
to the desired item using the arrow buttons and confirm
using the diamond button. Pressing the diamond button
once more takes you back to the settings.
Sengs
Language
Date
Time
Language
German
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
19
6 A
ssistance by the
electric motor
6.1
Operating principle of assistance
If you switch on the assistance and start pedalling, the
motor provides assistance as soon as the rear wheel turns.
The thrust produced by the motor depends on three factors:
•• Y
our own pedalling effort.
The motor adapts to the force you apply. If you
pedal harder, e.g. uphill or when setting off, the
power sensor detects this and delivers more power
than if you were only pedalling gently. The assistance increases proportionally if you pedal harder.
The higher the assist level you have set, the more
distinct this assistance characteristic becomes
(➠ Chapter 5.1.2 “Buttons for power-assist level”).
•• The level of assistance you have selected.
In the highest assist level, the motor assists you
with the highest output and therefore also uses the
most energy. If you have selected the lowest assist
level, you receive the least amount of assistance
but have the battery’s maximum range at your
disposal.
•• How fast you ride
When you set off on your Pedelec, the assistance
increases as you build up speed until it reaches its
maximum, just before the highest assisted speed
is achieved. The assistance then reduces automatically and switches off at roughly 25 km/h, irrespective of the gear you are in. Depending on the
power-assist mode you are riding in, the transition
between riding with and without power assist may
seem more or less abrupt.
6.2
Assist modes
You can choose between the assist modes ECO and Sport
(➠ Chapter 5.4.2 “Assist mode”).
The ECO mode provides you with harmonic, gentle assistance and a long range. It is advisable for beginners or
inexperienced riders to start with this mode.
In the Sport mode, the assistance is powerful. Of course,
the range is reduced as a consequence.
Within the assist modes, you can adjust the assistance by
choosing between five levels.
If you wish to make any further adjustments to the
ride characteristics of your bike, please consult your
specialist cycle shop.
Xion
Increasing
pedal power and
assistance
Reducing
assistance
Assistance switched off
Propulsive power
Propulsive power (pedal
force + electrical assistance)
Pedal force
Electrical assistance
Speed
Max. assistance
Relationship between pedal force and electrical assistance
20
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
Switch-off speed
6.2.1 Energy recovery
In technology, “recovery” relates to the feeding of electricity back into the battery during downhill riding. This
means that, if you have set the energy recovery or braking assistance, you can charge the battery whilst riding
(➠ Chapter 6.2.2 “Braking assistance”).
The energy recovery can be set using the arrow buttons.
The higher the energy recovery setting, the stronger the
deceleration. This works in the speed range between 10
and 28 km/h and only while the battery has enough
capacity to store the electricity. This means that, when the
battery is fully charged, energy recovery does not work.
Energy recovery can only be activated when the battery
charge state falls below 90%.
If the hill is too steep or the gross weight of the bike is
too high, the braking assistance will switch itself off. If
you want to maintain this speed, you must brake using the
brakes on your bike.
As soon as you begin to pedal, the braking assistance
deactivates automatically. It activates once more as soon
as you stop pedalling and are riding at a speed below the
limit speed set.
Always be ready to brake, as the braking assistance
can switch off.
If electricity is being fed back into the battery, you will
see this symbol on the display:
You can, of course, always use the brakes on the bike to
bring the speed of the vehicle below the limit speed once
more.
Energy recovery
6.2.2 Braking assistance
6.3
Range
The distance you can travel using the power assist with
the battery fully charged depends on several factors:
If braking assistance is activated, you will see the following symbol on the display:
•• Selected assist level
If you want to cover a long distance with power assist, select the smaller gears, i.e. the ones that are
easier to pedal. Also select a low assist level.
Braking assistance
•• Handling
If you are riding in gears that are harder to pedal
and select a high assist level, the motor will produce plenty of power to help you along. However,
just as with driving a car at high speed, this leads
to higher consumption. You will therefore have
to recharge the battery sooner. You can conserve
energy by keeping the load on the pedals even
throughout the entire crank revolution.
The braking assistance should make riding downhill more
comfortable and safer for you.
You can set a “limit speed” of up to 25 km/h. The drive
system will then hold you at this speed when riding downhill. The output limit of the braking assistance is determined by the gradient of the route, the total weight of the
vehicle and the battery charge state. The battery charge
state must be no higher than 90%. The temperature range
of the battery must be between 0°C and 45°C.
•• Ambient temperature
If it is colder, you will travel a shorter distance
with the same battery charge.
To maximise the distance you can travel, keep the
battery in a heated room so that it is at room temperature when you fit it on your Pedelec.
As the battery discharges when the motor is in use,
it generates enough heat to not lose too much of
its power at low ambient temperatures. The battery cells can discharge at temperatures of -15 to
+60°C.
This is also the temperature range within which
you can use your battery.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
21
•• Technical condition of your Pedelec
Make sure the tyre pressure is correct. If you ride
your bike with too little air in the tyres, this can
significantly increase the rolling resistance. This
applies to smooth surfaces in particular, e.g.
tarmac. If the ground is uneven, as on a country
path or gravel track, a somewhat reduced tyre pressure can lead to less rolling resistance. This also
increases the risk of a puncture. Please consult
your specialist cycle shop about this. The distance
you can travel also decreases if the brakes are
rubbing.
•• Battery capacity
The current battery capacity (➠ Chapter 7.4.2
“Checking the battery capacity”).
•• Topography
You pedal harder when riding uphill. This is
detected by the power sensor which then allows
the motor to work harder.
Under ideal conditions, the range may reach
120 km with the 11 Ah battery and 180 km with the
15.5 Ah battery. These ranges have been achieved
under the conditions listed below.
XION BATTERY
11 AH
15.5 AH
Range
130 km
180 km
Temperature
10-15°C
10-15°C
Wind speed
windless
windless
Average speed
22 km/h
22 km/h
Assist level
ECO
(lowest assist
level)
ECO
(lowest assist
level)
Gross weight
105-110 kg
105-110 kg
22
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
6.4
Riding your Pedelec efficiently
You can monitor and influence the cost of your journeys
with the Pedelec yourself. You can reduce your consumption and therefore costs by following the tips for increasing the range.
The operating costs for power assist with an 11 Ah battery
are calculated as follows:
•• A new battery costs roughly 599 euros.
•• Throughout the total service life of a battery, you
can cover roughly 80 kilometres with one charge
cycle.
•• You can charge the battery roughly 1,100 times.
•• 1,100 charging cycles x 80 km = 88,000 km
•• 599 euros: 88,000 km = 0.68 euro cents per
kilometre.
•• You use roughly 0.565 kWh to fully charge the
battery. Assuming a unit price of 23.5 euro cents
per kWh, it costs you 13.27 euro cents to fully
charge the battery.
•• To cover the average range of 80 kilometres, it
costs you 67.67 euro cents.
•• This means the cost of consumption and the battery is a maximum of 0.85 euro cents/km.
The sample calculation has been carried out based on
German energy prices. The operating costs may vary
depending on the energy prices you pay.
7
Battery
7.1.1
Learning cycle
Your battery is a lithium-ion battery, the ideal type of
battery for this application.
One of the main benefits of this battery is its low weight
combined with a high capacity.
7.1
Straightforward charging
›› Damaged batteries can neither be charged, nor
continue to be used.
›› The battery may heat up during charging. A maximum temperature of 45°C may be reached. If the
battery becomes any warmer than this, suspend
the charging process immediately.
›› During the charging process, the battery must be
positioned on an even, non-flammable surface.
The charger must not be covered.
•• There is no memory effect. You can therefore fully
recharge your battery after every trip.
•• Recharge the battery after every trip. This means
you can set off immediately the next time you use
your bike and you also increase the service life of
the battery.
Once you have fully charged the battery for the first
time, you must run it down until the system switches
off. Repeat this process roughly every six months. This
procedure (a so-called “learning cycle”) is necessary
so that the battery management recognises the changes in the capacity caused by age and wear and tear, in
other words, the performance level of the battery. This
is the only way to enable adjustments to your remaining range indicator.
Afterwards, the capacity of the battery is calculated
anew and correctly represented.
With this procedure, you can prevent a sudden loss of
electrical assistance during an extended trip.
7.2
igh degree of safety due to battery
H
management
•• The battery cannot be damaged as a result of a
short-circuit. If this were to happen, the battery
management would switch off the battery.
•• You can simply leave the battery connected to the
charger as it has in-built overcharging protection.
•• The battery management monitors the temperature
of your battery and warns you of incorrect use.
•• If you are not using the battery, you have to
recharge it after 6 months.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
23
7.3
Straightforward storage
›› In the as-delivered condition, the battery is not
fully charged and is in what is referred to as
sleep mode. Sleep mode minimises the rate at
which the battery discharges itself. If the battery is allowed to discharge unchecked for an
extended period this can lead to total discharging which damages the battery. To “wake up” the
battery, simply charge it up again.
•• If you do not need your battery for a while, store it
at a temperature of +10°C at three quarters of its
full charge capacity.
•• The battery management switches the battery to
sleep mode to prevent a so-called total discharge.
This can occur after different lengths of time without being used. Depending on the charge state
of the battery, this can occur earlier with a lower
charge and later with a higher charge. The management system activates the sleep mode after
48 hours without using the battery. The system
exits sleep mode when you press the button with
LED on the battery.
›› If you are having problems with the battery,
charge it for one minute initially. A reset occurs,
during which the battery management disables
sleep mode, for example. After this, the battery
will work again.
›› Ideally you should charge the battery at a temperature of between +10°C and +30°C. It takes
longer to charge the battery at low temperatures,
while the battery will not charge up at temperatures higher than +45°C. Ideally, you should
charge and store the battery inside your house or
in a warm garage when the outside temperature
is low. In this case you should only fit the battery
on your bike just before using it.
These benefits are available due to highly effective
battery management that has been adapted to this
specific application and by tuning the battery for
operation with a 250 watt motor.
›› If you are transporting your Pedelec by car, take
the battery out of its holder and transport it
separately.
Observe the following points to increase the service
life of your Pedelec battery:
›› Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
you ride your bike for the first time or if you have
not used it for a while.
›› The battery should ideally be stored for longer
periods with a charge state of 50% to 75% at a
temperature of +10°C.
›› If you continuously run the battery to empty
during normal operation, this reduces its service life. If you partially recharge the battery
frequently during normal operation, this has a
favourable effect on its service life.
›› You should therefore partially recharge the
battery whenever possible: Try not to run the
battery all the way down to empty and recharge
it even after a short period of operation.
Long charging times
-10°C
0°C
Optimum temperature
range for charging
operation
10°C
Charging times at different temperatures
24
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
20°C
Battery may be
damaged
30°C
40°C
50°C
7.4
Battery information system
There is a display panel on the outer face of the battery
which includes five LEDs and a button with an LED. The
LEDs light up if you press the button. Information about
the battery and its charge state is provided based on the
number of LEDs that light up and the way in which they
light up.
* All five LEDs flash quickly: The battery is empty and is
being switched off, is overloaded or is going through the
start mode.
•• If the battery is empty, it will work once again
briefly following a short period of rejuvenation and
will then switch back off. It must now be recharged
•• If the battery is overloaded, it will switch back
on after a short idle period and can then be used
normally.
** The first LED flashes quickly: A charging fault is present.
•• In that case, please remove the mains plug from
the socket and then plug it in again after a short
time. The charger performs a readjustment. In most
cases, this rectifies the fault.
Battery charge state
7.4.1 Checking the battery charge state
Press the button with the LED briefly; the LEDs light up
and display the current battery charge state.
AFFICHAGE
ÉTAT DE CHARGE DE LA
BATTERIE
•••••
5 LEDs light up
100 – 80 %
••••
4 LEDs light up
80 – 60 %
•••
3 LEDs light up
60 – 40 %
••
2 LEDs light up
40 – 20 %
•
1 LED lights up
20 – 10 %
¡
1 LED flashes
10 – 0 %
5 LEDs flash
quickly
0 %, surcharge ou la
batterie est en mode de
démarrage*
1st LED flashes
quickly
Erreur de chargement **
•• If the LED continues to flash, overheating or undercooling of the battery may also be the cause. If, for
example, you charge the battery in a cold environment at a temperature below 0°C, or the battery
heats up to over 60°C during a long ascent, the
management switches off to protect the battery. In
such cases, the battery must be taken to a warmer
environment or cool down.
•• If the LED still flashes, take the battery to your
specialist cycle shop and have it checked.
7.4.2 Checking the battery capacity
When you press the button with the LED for approx. three
seconds, the LEDs indicate the charge state first, and then,
after a short pause, the current capacity of the battery. If
the LED in the largest panel lights up, then the battery has
a capacity of over 60%. If the capacity is below 60%, this
is indicated via the smallest LED. Only one of the two LEDs
can light up at any one time.
The range of the battery is less in winter due to the
lower temperatures. Only move the battery (from the
warm room where you store it) and fit it on your Pedelec just before you set off. This will help to prevent
the effect of the low temperature on the range of the
battery (➠ Chapter 7.5.1 “Service life and warranty
of the battery”).
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
25
7.5
Service life and warranty
Your Xion system is a high-quality drive system which was
manufactured in Germany. All components come with a
two-year warranty. The battery is a wear part (➠ Chapter
7.5.1 “Service life and warranty of the battery”). Bear in
mind that, due to the higher average speed and greater
distances that can be achieved with your Pedelec compared to a normal bike, all wear parts are subjected to
greater wear.
7.5.1 S
ervice life and warranty
of the battery
•• The age of the battery.
A battery also ages during storage.
An 11 Ah battery with lithium-ion cells loses around
4-5% of its initial capacity each year. A 15 Ah battery with lithium-nickel-cobalt-aluminiumoxygen cells around 2-3%.
This means: Even if you do not use your battery, its
capacity reduces. With everyday use, you can expect the battery to age by approximately 3-5% per
year as a result of ageing and charging processes.
••
You can extend the service life of the battery by
fully recharging it after every journey, however
short. The Xion Li-ion battery has no memory
effect.
••
You can also extend the service life of the battery by using the assistance selectively. Ideally,
you should ride in low gears with a high pedalling cadence.
••
If you always ride with maximum motor output,
your motor will always require a higher current.
Higher currents cause the battery to age more
quickly.
Batteries are wear parts. Wear parts come with a two-year
warranty.
If the battery develops a fault during this period, your
specialist cycle shop will of course replace it. Normal
ageing and battery wear do not constitute a fault.
The service life of the battery depends on different factors.
The most important wear-relevant factors are:
•• The number of charging processes
After 1,100 charging cycles, your battery will still
have 60% of its initial capacity, providing it has
been well looked after. This means 6.6 Ah in an
11 Ah battery and 7.2 Ah in a 15.5 Ah battery. A
charging cycle is defined as the sum of the individual charges until the charges reach the overall
capacity of the battery.
For example: You charge the battery with 5 Ah on
the first day, 2 Ah on the second day and 4 Ah on
the third day; the sum is 11 Ah. The battery has
thereby completed one charge cycle.
From the technical standpoint therefore, the battery is exhausted at this point. Providing you can
still cover the journey distances with the remaining
battery capacity, you can of course continue using
it. If the capacity is no longer sufficient, you can
take your battery to a specialist cycle shop who
will dispose of your battery and sell you a new one.
26
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
7.6
ransportation and shipping
T
of the battery
7.6.1 Transportation
›› Never transport damaged batteries. The safety
of damaged batteries cannot be guaranteed.
Scratches and small chips in the housing do not
constitute serious damage.
›› Damaged batteries may neither be charged, nor
continue to be used
›› For the transportation of your Pedelec, we
recommend removing the battery from the
Pedelec and packaging it separately.
›› Cover the contact socket in the battery holder
of your bike with the round socket cover. In this
way, no dirt can enter the contact socket.
7.6.1.3 The E-Bike on aeroplanes
Your E-Bike is generally subject to the policies of the
respective airline concerning bikes. Batteries are subject
to dangerous goods legislation. Therefore, they must not
be carried on passenger planes – neither in the cargo
hold, nor the cabin. Please contact the relevant airline for
detailed information.
7.6.2 Shipping
Do not ship batteries! A battery is a hazardous article
which can overheat and catch fire in
certain conditions.
The preparation and shipping of a battery may only be
carried out by trained personnel.
If you would like to return your Pedelec battery for
replacement, please always arrange this via your specialist cycle shop. Specialist cycle shops can have the battery
picked up free of charge and in compliance with dangerous goods legislation.
7.7
Damaged batteries
7.6.1.1 The E-Bike and your car
If you transport your E-Bike on a bike rack, ensure that it
is designed for the higher weight of an E-Bike. In order to
relieve the load on the rack and protect the battery from
climatic conditions, it must be transported inside the car.
7.6.1.2 The E-Bike on trains
In Germany, you can take your E-Bike with you on trains
which are marked with the bike symbol. To do so on
German Intercity (IC) and EuroCity (EC) trains, you must
book a place for your bike in advance. As a rule, you may
not take bikes with you on German Intercity Express (ICE)
trains.
›› Never attempt to repair your battery. Specialists
are responsible for performing such repairs. If
your battery is damaged, contact your specialist
cycle shop. The specialists here will discuss the
next steps with you.
›› Damaged batteries may neither be charged, nor
continue to be used
7.8
Disposal of batteries
Batteries are not to be disposed of with domestic waste.
Consumers are legally bound to dispose of used or damaged batteries at the locations designated for the purpose
(battery collection point or specialist cycle shop).
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
27
8 Charger
Read the type plates on the charger before using it for the
first time.
You can charge your Pedelec with Xion drive directly via a
charging socket in the battery. The battery can remain on
the Pedelec whilst the charging operation is in progress.
If used incorrectly, the device may be damaged or
inflict injuries.
›› Before cleaning the charger, always pull the plug
out of the socket to avoid a short-circuit and/or
physical injury.
›› Only use the charger in dry rooms.
›› Only place the charger in a secure stable position
on a suitable surface.
›› Do not cover the charger or place any objects on
it as otherwise it could overheat and catch fire.
Charging the battery
Alternatively, you can take the battery out of its holder
and charge it elsewhere.
This is recommended if it is cold outside, in order to
charge the battery in a warmer room. The battery can be
charged at temperatures between 0°C and 45°C.
Do not use other chargers. Only charge the battery using the charger provided, or a charger approved by us.
•• If a charging fault occurs, the LED in the charger
flashes red. In this case, the charging current is too
high.
•• Disconnect the battery from the charger and then
connect it again. If the error message still appears,
the battery and charger must be checked by a specialist dealer.
28
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
9 R
emoving and installing the rear
wheel
9.1
Remember that the motor carries additional weight
and the rear wheel is therefore heavier than normal!
Removing the rear wheel
1. First, shift the bike chain to the smallest sprocket.
2. Then disconnect the cable between the motor and the
battery.
Never hold or carry the rear wheel by the cable. This
poses the danger of the cable breaking.
6. On the left axle side of the motor, there is a detachable
component for torque support. Place this to one side,
so that it is not lost.
Disconnecting the cable
3. If your Pedelec is equipped with rim brakes,
unhook the brake cable at the brake body (➠ General
User Manual , Chapter 18.1 “Opening the brake”).
4. If your Pedelec is equipped with disc brakes, refer to
the section of the User Manual concerning the technology featured in the bike for information on their handling (➠ General User Manual , Chapter 18.1 “Opening
the brake”).
5. Release the quick-release device (➠ General User Manual, Chapter 9.2.2 “Operating the quick-release device”).
Then remove the rear wheel from the frame by rotating the rear derailleur backwards slightly, so that the
chainring can be fed past it more easily.
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
29
9.2
Installing the rear wheel
10 Cleaning
1. Place the torque support on the left axle side of the
motor (see point 2 in the image below).
Motormontage - Bremsseite
Motor mounting - side of the brake
1
6
5
7
2
3
4
ALBER-Komponenten
[1] Motor
[2] Drehmomentstütze
der von Ihnensupport
bestellten Variante (Abweichung zur Grafik möglich)
Placing
the intorque
Komponenten anderer Hersteller
[3] Unterlagscheibe
[4] Mutter, Anzugsmoment: 20 Nm
ACHTUNG: Zuerst die Mutter auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite anziehen, danach diese Mutter!
[5] Bremsscheibe
[6] Bremsensatz
[7] Rahmen des Fahrrads
Bitte beachten Sie bei Ihren Arbeiten die Vorgaben und Empfehlungen des jeweiligen Herstellers zur
Montage seiner Komponenten.
2. Then feed the rear wheel past the rear derailleur and
into the dropout on the frame.
ALBER Components
›› Remove the battery before you clean your
Pedelec.
›› Do not use benzine, thinner, acetone or similar
agents in the cleaning procedures under any
circumstances. Likewise, the use of abrasive
cleaners and aggressive cleaning agents must
also be avoided.
›› Only use commercially available, household
cleaning agents and disinfectants (isopropyl
alcohol) or water. You can obtain suitable cleaning agents and additional information from your
specialist cycle shop.
›› We recommend you clean your Pedelec with a
damp cloth, a sponge or a brush.
[1] Motor
[2] Torque receiver in the version ordered (might differ from drawing)
3.
If your
Pedelec has disc brakes, ensure that the brake
Components
of other manufacturers
[3] Washer
[4] Nut, fastening torque: 20 Nm
disc
is
placed
exactly in the centre between the brake
ATTENTION: Tighten this nut after the one on the opposite!
[5] Brake disc
[6] Brake
set
blocks.
[7] Bicycle frame
Please pay attention to the instructions of each manufacturer for the assembly of the appropriate
components.
4. Insert the rear wheel in the dropout so that the torque
support fits exactly and the ends of the axle sit entirely
4
within the dropout.
5. Close the quick-release device (➠ General User Manual, Chapter 18.6.2 “Inserting the rear wheel ”).
6. Connect the cable between the motor and the battery.
7. Attach the plug to the chain stay once more
using the rubber ring.
8. If your Pedelec has rim brakes, engage the brake cable
once more.
10.1 Cleaning the battery
Make sure when cleaning that water does not enter the
battery. Although the electrical components are sealed,
it is not advisable to clean the bike by spraying it with a
hose or a high-pressure cleaner. This could damage your
bike.
When wiping down the battery, be careful not to touch and
connect the contacts on the underside. This could cause
the battery to switch off.
10.2 Cleaning the motor
Dirt should be removed from the motor of your Pedelec
regularly, ideally using a dry brush or a damp (not wet)
cloth. Running water such as that from a hose pipe or even
a high-pressure cleaner must not be used for cleaning.
For precise details regarding the handling of rim or
disc brakes and quick-release devices, please refer to
the section of the User Manual concerning the technology featured in the bike.
30
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
The ingress of water can destroy the motor. Therefore,
ensure that neither fluids nor moisture enter the motor at
any time during cleaning.
Do not clean the motor when it is warm, e.g. immediately
after a trip. Wait until it has cooled down. Otherwise, the
motor may be damaged.
If the motor is removed, e.g. for cleaning purposes, it
must not be held or carried by the cables under any circumstances, as otherwise there is a risk that the cable will
break.
If the motor has been removed from the frame of the
Pedelec, the plug from the motor and the socket of the
cable leading to the battery pack must be checked for
possible contamination and, if necessary, cleaned carefully with a dry cloth before reconnecting.
10.3 Cleaning the display
The contacts of the base plate should be cleaned periodically using a contact spray in order to ensure their functionality.
The housing of the display may only be cleaned with a
damp (not wet) cloth.
10.4 Cleaning the control panel
The control panel can be cleaned with a damp cloth where
necessary.
11 Technical data
MOTOR
Brushless electric motor
Output
250 W rated output/
650 W maximum output
Maximum torque
12 Nm rated torque/40 Nm
maximum torque
Gross weight
of electric drive,
battery, control unit
11 Ah
15.5 Ah
7.8 kg
7.8 kg
Control
Via torque sensor and speed
sensor in the motor
XION LI-ION BATTERY
Capacities
11 Ah
15.5 Ah
Voltage
36 V
36 V
Gross weight
2.85 kg
2.85 kg
VIII User Manual Pedelec Xion
31
We hope you thoroughly enjoy using your new Pedelec
with Xion drive.
Copyright © 2013 Derby Cycle Werke GmbH
Reproduction in whole or in part is not permitted without the consent
of Derby Cycle Werke GmbH. Subject to misprints, errors and technical
modifications..
OBJ_DOKU-27936-002.fm Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:46 PM
T
RESE
Robert Bosch GmbH
Bosch eBike Systems
72703 Reutlingen
Germany
www.bosch-ebike.com
0 276 001 Y45 (2012.10) T / 142
Drive Unit Speed | Intuvia |
PowerPack 300 | PowerPack 400 | Charger
0 275 007 003 | 1 270 020 903 | 0 275 007 500 | 0 275 007 501 |
0 275 007 502 | 0 275 007 503 | 0 275 007 504 | 0 275 007 505 | 0 275 007 905
de
en
fr
es
it
nl
da
sv
no
fi
Originalbetriebsanleitung
Original instructions
Notice originale
Manual original
Istruzioni originali
Oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Original brugsanvisning
Bruksanvisning i original
Original driftsinstruks
Alkuperäiset ohjeet
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
2|
f
TURBO
SPORT
TOUR
ECO
OFF
e
a
b
MPH
KM/H
AMM
PMWH
MIN
MPH
KM/H
d
Reichweite
c
7
O
RB T
TU POR UR
S TO
M
K P
MH
/H
1
MWH
AM
INPH /H
PM
MM
KM
T
RESE
6
5
8
2
te
wei
h
c
i
Re
3
4
9
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
|3
10
11
14
12
13
A
B
17
O
EC
/H
KM
/H
KM
T
RESE
eite
chw
Rei
3
15
16
5–
17
Bosch eBike Systems
mm
4
18
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
4|
19
24
23
20
22
21
25
24
23
28
21
22
26
29
27
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
|5
C
25
25
24
26
24
23
23
26
28
27
27
D
19
24
23
20
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
6|
30
31
29
34
32
33
eBike Battery Charger 42-4/230
0 275 007 905
Input: 230V
Output: 42V
50Hz 1.5A
4A
Made in PRC
Robert Bosch GmbH, Reutlingen
For safe operation see manual. Risk of electric shock. Dry location use only. Charge only batteries of
WARNING
the Bosch eBike Systems. Other batteries may burst causing personal damage. Do not replace the plug
assembly as risk of fire or electric shock may result.
Para un funcionamiento con seguridad, ver el manual. Peligro de sacudida eléctrica. Utilice
PRECAUCION solamente
en lugares secos. Cargar únicamente baterías de sistemas eBike de Bosch.
Otras baterías podrían reventar, causando lesiones personales y daños. No reemplace el ensamblaje del enchufe,
ya que el resultado puede ser riesgo de incendio o sacudidas eléctricas.
Pour un fonctionnement sûr, reportez-vous au manuel. Risque de choc électrique. Utiliser en lieu sec
ATTENTION uniquement.
A utiliser uniquement avec les batteries des systèmes d’assistance électrique
eBike de Bosch. D 'autres batteries risqueraient d'éclater et de causer des blessures corporelles et des dommages.
Ne pas remplacer la connectique car un risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique pourrait en résulter.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
|7
E
30
31
F
26
35
21
34
35
Bosch eBike Systems
20
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–1
Antriebseinheit Drive Unit Speed/
Bediencomputer Intuvia
Sicherheitshinweise
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen. Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung
der Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
können elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder
schwere Verletzungen verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger).
 Öffnen Sie die Antriebseinheit nicht selbst. Die Antriebseinheit ist wartungsfrei und darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal und nur mit Original-Ersatzteilen
repariert werden. Damit wird sichergestellt, dass die Sicherheit der Antriebseinheit erhalten bleibt. Beim unberechtigten Öffnen der Antriebseinheit erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch.
 Alle an der Antriebseinheit montierten Komponenten
und alle anderen Komponenten des eBike-Antriebs
(z.B. Kettenblatt, Aufnahme des Kettenblatts, Pedale)
dürfen nur gegen baugleiche oder vom Fahrradhersteller speziell für Ihr eBike zugelassene Komponenten
ausgetauscht werden. Damit wird die Antriebseinheit vor
Überlastung und Beschädigung geschützt.
 Nehmen Sie den Akku aus dem eBike, bevor Sie Arbeiten (z.B. Montage, Wartung etc.) am eBike beginnen,
es mit dem Auto oder dem Flugzeug transportieren
oder es aufbewahren. Bei unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen
des Ein-/Ausschalters besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Die Funktion Anfahrhilfe darf ausschließlich beim Anfahren des eBikes verwendet werden. Haben die Räder
des eBikes beim Benutzen der Anfahrhilfe keinen Bodenkontakt, besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
 Beachten Sie alle nationalen Vorschriften zur Zulassung und Verwendung von eBikes.
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in der Betriebsanleitung des Akkus sowie in der Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Die Antriebseinheit ist ausschließlich zum Antrieb Ihres
eBikes bestimmt und darf nicht für andere Zwecke verwendet
werden.
Das eBike ist zur Verwendung auf befestigten Wegen bestimmt. Es ist nicht für den Wettbewerbsbetrieb zugelassen.
Abgebildete Komponenten
(siehe Seite 2–3)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellungen auf der Grafikseite.
Alle Darstellungen von Fahrradteilen außer Antriebseinheit,
Bediencomputer inkl. Bedieneinheit, Geschwindigkeitssensor und dazugehörigen Halterungen sind schematisch und
können bei Ihrem eBike abweichen.
1 Taste Anzeigenfunktion „i“
2 Taste Beleuchtung
3 Bediencomputer
4 Halterung Bediencomputer
5 Ein-Aus-Taste Bediencomputer
6 Reset-Taste „RESET“
7 USB-Buchse
8 Schutzkappe der USB-Buchse
9 Antriebseinheit
10 Bedieneinheit
11 Taste Anzeigenfunktion „i“ an der Bedieneinheit
12 Taste Wert senken/nach unten blättern „ –“
13 Taste Wert erhöhen/nach oben blättern „+“
14 Taste Anfahrhilfe „WALK“
15 Arretierung Bediencomputer
16 Blockierschraube Bediencomputer
17 Geschwindigkeitssensor
18 Speichenmagnet des Geschwindigkeitssensors
Anzeigenelemente Bediencomputer
a Anzeige Motorleistung
b Anzeige Unterstützungslevel
c Textanzeige
d Werteanzeige
e Tachometeranzeige
f Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–2
Technische Daten
Antriebseinheit
Sachnummer
Leistung
Drehmoment am Abtrieb
max.
Nennspannung
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Schutzart
Gewicht, ca.
Bediencomputer
Sachnummer
Ladestrom USB-Anschluss
max.
Ladespannung USBAnschluss
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Schutzart
Gewicht, ca.
Beleuchtung*
Nennspannung
Leistung
– Vorderlicht
– Rücklicht
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (staub- und
spritzwassergeschützt)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (staub- und
spritzwassergeschützt)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* abhängig von gesetzlichen Regelungen nicht in allen länderspezifischen Ausführungen über den eBike-Akku möglich
Montage
Akku einsetzen und entnehmen
Zum Einsetzen des Akkus in das eBike und zum Entnehmen lesen und beachten Sie die Betriebsanleitung des Akkus.
Bediencomputer einsetzen und entnehmen
(siehe Bild A)
Zum Einsetzen des Bediencomputers 3 schieben Sie ihn von
vorn in die Halterung 4.
Zum Entnehmen des Bediencomputers 3 drücken Sie auf die
Arretierung 15 und schieben ihn nach vorn aus der Halterung 4.
 Entnehmen Sie den Bediencomputer bei abgestelltem
eBike, damit der Antrieb nicht durch unberechtigte
Dritte benutzt werden kann. Ohne Bediencomputer kann
das eBike-System nicht eingeschaltet werden.
Bosch eBike Systems
Es ist auch möglich, den Bediencomputer in der Halterung gegen Entnahme zu sichern. Demontieren Sie dazu die Halterung 4 vom Lenker. Setzen Sie den Bediencomputer in die
Halterung. Schrauben Sie die Blockierschraube 16 von unten
in das dafür vorgesehene Gewinde der Halterung. Montieren
Sie die Halterung wieder auf dem Lenker.
Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen
(siehe Bild B)
Der Geschwindigkeitssensor 17 und der dazugehörige Speichenmagnet 18 müssen so montiert sein, dass sich der Speichenmagnet bei einer Umdrehung des Rades in einem Abstand von mindestens 5 mm und höchstens 17 mm am
Geschwindigkeitssensor vorbeibewegt.
Hinweis: Ist der Abstand zwischen Geschwindigkeitssensor
17 und Speichenmagnet 18 zu klein oder zu groß, oder ist der
Geschwindigkeitssensor 17 nicht richtig angeschlossen, fällt
die Tachometeranzeige e aus, und der eBike-Antrieb arbeitet
im Notlaufprogramm.
Lösen Sie in diesem Fall die Schraube des Speichenmagnets
18 und befestigen Sie den Speichenmagnet so an der Speiche, dass er in der richtigen Entfernung an der Markierung
des Geschwindigkeitssensors vorbeiläuft. Erscheint auch danach keine Geschwindigkeit in der Tachometeranzeige e,
wenden Sie sich bitte an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Betrieb
Inbetriebnahme
Voraussetzungen
Das eBike-System kann nur aktiviert werden, wenn folgende
Voraussetzungen erfüllt sind:
– Ein ausreichend geladener Akku ist eingesetzt (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
– Der Bediencomputer ist richtig in die Halterung eingesetzt
(siehe „Bediencomputer einsetzen und entnehmen“, Seite
Deutsch–2).
– Der Geschwindigkeitssensor ist richtig angeschlossen
(siehe „Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen“, Seite
Deutsch–2).
eBike-System ein-/ausschalten
Zum Einschalten des eBike-Systems haben Sie folgende
Möglichkeiten:
– Ist der Bediencomputer bereits eingeschaltet, wenn er in
die Halterung gesetzt wird, dann wird das eBike-System
automatisch eingeschaltet.
– Drücken Sie bei eingesetztem Bediencomputer und eingesetztem Akku einmal kurz die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 des Bediencomputers.
– Drücken Sie bei eingesetztem Bediencomputer die EinAus-Taste des Akkus (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–3
Hinweis: Die Pedale des eBikes dürfen beim Einschalten des
eBike-Systems nicht belastet sein, weil sonst die Motorleistung eingeschränkt wird. In der Textanzeige c erscheint die
Fehlermeldung „Pedal entlasten“.
Wurde das eBike-System versehentlich mit belasteten Pedalen eingeschaltet, dann schalten Sie es aus und ohne Belastung erneut ein.
Der Antrieb wird aktiviert, sobald Sie in die Pedale treten (außer in der Funktion Anfahrhilfe, siehe „Anfahrhilfe ein-/ausschalten“, Seite Deutsch–4). Die Motorleistung richtet sich
nach den Einstellungen am Bediencomputer.
Sobald Sie im Normalbetrieb aufhören, in die Pedale zu treten, oder sobald Sie eine Geschwindigkeit von 45 km/h erreicht haben, wird die Unterstützung durch den eBike-Antrieb
abgeschaltet. Der Antrieb wird automatisch wieder aktiviert,
sobald Sie in die Pedale treten und die Geschwindigkeit unter
45 km/h liegt.
Zum Ausschalten des eBike-Systems haben Sie folgende
Möglichkeiten:
– Drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 des Bediencomputers.
– Schalten Sie den Akku an dessen Ein-Aus-Taste aus (siehe
Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
– Entnehmen Sie den Bediencomputer aus der Halterung.
Wird etwa 10 min lang keine Leistung des Antriebs abgerufen
(z.B., weil das eBike steht) und keine Taste an Bediencomputer oder Bedieneinheit gedrückt, schaltet sich das eBike-System aus Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Anzeigen und Einstellungen des Bediencomputers
Energieversorgung des Bediencomputers
Sitzt der Bediencomputer in der Halterung 4, ist ein ausreichend geladener Akku in das eBike eingesetzt und das eBikeSystem eingeschaltet, dann wird der Bediencomputer über
den Akku des eBikes mit Energie versorgt.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
erfolgt die Energieversorgung über einen internen Akku. Ist
der interne Akku beim Einschalten des Bediencomputers
schwach, erscheint für 3 s „Mit Fahrrad verbind.“ in der
Textanzeige c. Danach schaltet sich der Bediencomputer wieder aus.
Zum Aufladen des internen Akkus setzen Sie den Bediencomputer wieder in die Halterung 4 (wenn ein Akku in das eBike
eingesetzt ist). Schalten Sie den eBike-Akku an dessen EinAus-Taste ein (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
Sie können den Bediencomputer auch über den USB-Anschluss aufladen. Öffnen Sie dazu die Schutzkappe 8. Verbinden Sie die USB-Buchse 7 des Bediencomputers über ein
passendes USB-Kabel mit einem handelsüblichen USB-Ladegerät oder dem USB-Anschluss eines Computers (5 V Ladespannung; max. 500 mA Ladestrom). In der Textanzeige c
des Bediencomputers erscheint „USB verbunden“.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bediencomputer ein-/ausschalten
Zum Einschalten des Bediencomputers drücken Sie kurz die
Ein-Aus-Taste 5. Der Bediencomputer kann (bei ausreichend
geladenem internen Akku) auch eingeschaltet werden, wenn
er nicht in die Halterung eingesetzt ist.
Zum Ausschalten des Bediencomputers drücken Sie die EinAus-Taste 5.
Ist der Bediencomputer nicht in die Halterung eingesetzt,
schaltet er sich nach 1 min ohne Tastendruck aus Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
Die Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige f zeigt den Ladezustand des
eBike-Akkus an, nicht den des internen Akkus des Bediencomputers. Der Ladezustand des eBike-Akkus kann ebenfalls
an den LEDs am Akku selbst abgelesen werden.
In der Anzeige f entspricht jeder Balken im Akkusymbol etwa
20 % Kapazität:
100 % bis 80 % Kapazität
20 % bis 5 % Kapazität, der Akku sollte nachgeladen werden.
Weniger als 5 % Kapazität, die Unterstützung des
Antriebs ist nicht mehr möglich. Die LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige am Akku erlöschen.
Wenn die eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku betrieben wird
(länderspezifisch), dann reicht die Kapazität beim ersten Auftauchen des leeren Akkusymbols noch für etwa 2 Stunden Beleuchtung. Wenn das Symbol zu blinken beginnt, ist auch die
Beleuchtung nur noch für kurze Zeit möglich.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleibt der zuletzt angezeigte Akku-Ladezustand gespeichert.
Unterstützungslevel einstellen
Sie können am Bediencomputer einstellen, wie stark Sie der
eBike-Antrieb beim Treten unterstützt. Der Unterstützungslevel kann jederzeit, auch während der Fahrt, geändert werden.
Hinweis: In einzelnen Ausführungen ist es möglich, dass der
Unterstützungslevel voreingestellt ist und nicht geändert werden kann. Es ist auch möglich, dass weniger Unterstützungslevel zur Auswahl stehen als hier angegeben.
Folgende Unterstützungslevel stehen maximal zur Verfügung:
– „OFF“: Der Antrieb ist abgeschaltet, das eBike kann wie
ein normales Fahrrad allein durch Treten fortbewegt werden.
– „ECO“: wirksame Unterstützung bei maximaler Effizienz,
für maximale Reichweite
– „TOUR“: gleichmäßige Unterstützung, für Touren mit großer Reichweite
– „SPORT“: kraftvolle Unterstützung, für sportives Fahren
auf bergigen Strecken sowie für Stadtverkehr
– „TURBO“: maximale Unterstützung bis in hohe Trittfrequenzen, für sportives Fahren
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–4
Zum Erhöhen des Unterstützungslevels drücken Sie die Taste
„+“ 13 an der Bedieneinheit so oft, bis der gewünschte Unterstützungslevel in der Anzeige b erscheint, zum Senken die
Taste „ –“ 12.
Die abgerufene Motorleistung erscheint in der Anzeige a. Die
maximale Motorleistung hängt vom gewählten Unterstützungslevel ab.
Unterstützungslevel
„ECO“
„TOUR“
„SPORT“
„TURBO“
Motorleistung*
(Kettenschaltung)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Die Motorleistung kann bei einzelnen Ausführungen abweichen.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleibt der zuletzt angezeigte Unterstützungslevel gespeichert, die Anzeige a der Motorleistung bleibt leer.
Anfahrhilfe ein-/ausschalten
Die Anfahrhilfe kann als zusätzliche Unterstützung auf den
ersten Metern dienen, wenn das Anfahren erschwert ist (wie
z.B. an der Ampel oder am Berg).
 Die Funktion Anfahrhilfe darf ausschließlich beim Anfahren des eBikes verwendet werden. Haben die Räder
des eBikes beim Benutzen der Anfahrhilfe keinen Bodenkontakt, besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
Zum Einschalten der Anfahrhilfe drücken Sie die Taste
„WALK“ 14 an der Bedieneinheit und halten sie gedrückt.
Der Antrieb des eBikes wird eingeschaltet.
Die Anfahrhilfe wird ausgeschaltet, sobald eines der folgenden Ereignisse eintritt:
– Sie lassen die Taste „WALK“ 14 los,
– Sie drücken eine andere Taste am Bediencomputer,
– Sie treten vorwärts oder schnell rückwärts in die Pedale,
– die Räder des eBikes werden blockiert (z.B. durch Bremsen oder Anstoßen an ein Hindernis),
– die Geschwindigkeit überschreitet 18 km/h.
Beleuchtung ein-/ausschalten
Je nach länderspezifischen Vorschriften sind zwei Ausführungen der Beleuchtung möglich:
– Über den Bediencomputer können gleichzeitig Vorderlicht, Rücklicht und Display-Hintergrundbeleuchtung einund ausgeschaltet werden.
In dieser Ausführung erscheint beim Einschalten der Beleuchtung „Licht an“ und beim Ausschalten der Beleuchtung „Licht aus“ für ca. 1 s in der Textanzeige c.
– Es kann nur die Display-Hintergrundbeleuchtung ein- und
ausgeschaltet werden, Vorder- und Rücklicht des eBikes
sind unabhängig vom Bediencomputer.
Bei beiden Ausführungen drücken Sie zum Ein- und Ausschalten der Beleuchtung jeweils die Taste 2.
Bosch eBike Systems
Geschwindigkeits- und Entfernungsanzeigen
In der Tachometeranzeige e wird immer die aktuelle Geschwindigkeit angezeigt.
In der Funktionsanzeige (Kombination von Textanzeige c
und Werteanzeige d) stehen folgende Funktionen zur Auswahl:
– „Reichweite“: voraussichtliche Reichweite der vorhandenen Akkuladung (bei gleichbleibenden Bedingungen wie
Unterstützungslevel, Streckenprofil usw.)
– „Strecke“: seit dem letzten Reset zurückgelegte Entfernung
– „Fahrzeit“: Fahrzeit seit dem letzten Reset
– „Durchschnitt“: seit dem letzten Reset erreichte Durchschnittsgeschwindigkeit
– „Maximal“: seit dem letzten Reset erreichte Maximalgeschwindigkeit
– „Uhrzeit“: aktuelle Uhrzeit
Drücken Sie zum Wechsel in der Anzeigefunktion die Taste
„i“ 1 am Bediencomputer oder die Taste „i“ 11 an der Bedieneinheit so oft, bis die gewünschte Funktion angezeigt wird.
Zum Reset von „Strecke“, „Fahrzeit“ und „Durchschnitt“
wechseln Sie zu einer dieser drei Funktionen und drücken
dann die Taste „RESET“ 6 so lange, bis die Anzeige auf Null
gesetzt ist. Damit sind auch die Werte der beiden anderen
Funktionen zurückgesetzt.
Zum Reset von „Maximal“ wechseln Sie zu dieser Funktion
und drücken dann die Taste „RESET“ 6 so lange, bis die Anzeige auf Null gesetzt ist.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleiben alle Werte der Funktionen gespeichert und können
weiterhin angezeigt werden.
Grundeinstellungen anzeigen/anpassen
Anzeigen und Änderungen der Grundeinstellungen sind unabhängig davon möglich, ob der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt ist oder nicht.
Um in das Menü Grundeinstellungen zu gelangen, drücken Sie
gleichzeitig so lange die Taste „RESET“ 6 und die Taste „i“ 1,
bis in der Textanzeige c „Einstellungen“ erscheint.
Drücken Sie zum Wechsel zwischen den Grundeinstellungen die Taste „i“ 1 am Bediencomputer so oft, bis die gewünschte Grundeinstellung angezeigt wird. Ist der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt, können Sie auch die
Taste „i“ 11 an der Bedieneinheit drücken.
Um die Grundeinstellungen zu ändern, drücken Sie zum
Verringern bzw. Blättern nach unten die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 neben der Anzeige „ –“ oder zum Erhöhen bzw. Blättern nach
oben die Taste Beleuchtung 2 neben der Anzeige „+“.
Ist der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt, dann ist
die Änderung auch mit den Tasten „ –“ 12 bzw. „+“ 13 an der
Bedieneinheit möglich.
Um die Funktion zu verlassen und eine geänderte Einstellung
zu speichern, drücken Sie die Taste „RESET“ 6 für 3 s.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–5
Folgende Grundeinstellungen stehen zur Auswahl:
– „Einheit km/mi“: Sie können Geschwindigkeit und Entfernung in Kilometern oder Meilen anzeigen lassen.
– „Zeitformat“: Sie können die Uhrzeit im 12-Stundenoder im 24-Stunden-Format anzeigen lassen.
– „Uhrzeit“: Sie können die aktuelle Uhrzeit einstellen. Längeres Drücken auf die Einstelltasten beschleunigt die Änderung der Uhrzeit.
Anzeige Fehlercode
Die Komponenten des eBike-Systems werden ständig automatisch überprüft. Wird ein Fehler festgestellt, erscheint der
entsprechende Fehlercode in der Textanzeige c.
Drücken Sie eine beliebige Taste am Bediencomputer 3 oder
an der Bedieneinheit 10, um zur Standardanzeige zurückzukehren.
Abhängig von der Art des Fehlers wird der Antrieb gegebenenfalls automatisch abgeschaltet. Die Weiterfahrt ohne UnCode
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
Ursache
interner Fehler der Antriebseinheit
Verbindungsproblem der Antriebseinheit
Fehler des Geschwindigkeitssensors
Verbindungsproblem der Beleuchtung
Verbindungsproblem des Bediencomputers
Temperatur der Antriebseinheit zu
hoch (über 40 °C)
interner Elektronikfehler des Akkus
Temperatur des Akkus zu hoch (über
40 °C)
Temperatur des Akkus zu niedrig
(unter –10 °C)
Verbindungsproblem des Akkus
falsche Akkupolung
– „Deutsch“: Sie können die Sprache der Textanzeigen ändern. Zur Auswahl stehen Deutsch, Englisch, Französisch,
Spanisch, Italienisch und Niederländisch.
– „Strecke gesamt“: Anzeige der gesamten mit dem eBike
zurückgelegten Entfernung (nicht änderbar)
– „Betriebszeit gesamt“: Anzeige der gesamten Fahrdauer
mit dem eBike (nicht änderbar)
terstützung durch den Antrieb ist aber jederzeit möglich. Vor
weiteren Fahrten sollte das eBike überprüft werden.
 Lassen Sie alle Überprüfungen und Reparaturen ausschließlich von einem autorisierten Fahrradhändler
ausführen. Wird ein Fehler trotz Ihrer Abhilfe weiterhin
angezeigt, wenden Sie sich ebenfalls an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Abhilfe
Antriebseinheit überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Lassen Sie die Antriebseinheit abkühlen. Die Weiterfahrt ohne eBikeAntrieb ist möglich und beschleunigt die Abkühlung der Antriebseinheit.
Akku überprüfen lassen
Lassen Sie den Akku abkühlen. Die Weiterfahrt ohne eBike-Antrieb ist
möglich und beschleunigt die Abkühlung des Akkus.
Lassen Sie den Akku in einem warmen Raum langsam aufwärmen.
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Laden Sie den Akku mit dem original Bosch Ladegerät wie in dessen
Betriebsanleitung beschrieben auf.
Eine oder mehrere Tasten des Bedien- Prüfen Sie, ob Tasten verklemmt sind, z.B. durch eingedrungenen
computers sind blockiert.
Schmutz. Reinigen Sie die Tasten gegebenenfalls.
Verbindungsproblem der Bedienein- Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
heit
Eine oder mehrere Tasten der Bedien- Prüfen Sie, ob Tasten verklemmt sind, z.B. durch eingedrungenen
einheit sind blockiert.
Schmutz. Reinigen Sie die Tasten gegebenenfalls.
Verbindungsproblem der Antriebsein- Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
heit
Verbindungsproblem des Akkus
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Kommunikationsfehler der KompoAnschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
nenten untereinander
* nur bei eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku (länderspezifisch)
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–6
Code
430
490
Ursache
Abhilfe
interner Akku des Bediencomputers Bediencomputer aufladen (in der Halterung oder über USB-Anschluss)
leer
interner Fehler des Bediencomputers Bediencomputer überprüfen lassen
* nur bei eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku (länderspezifisch)
Energieversorgung externer Geräte über USBAnschluss
Mithilfe des USB-Anschlusses können die meisten Geräte, deren Energieversorgung über USB möglich ist (z.B. diverse Mobiltelefone), betrieben bzw. aufgeladen werden.
Voraussetzung für das Laden ist, dass der Bediencomputer
und ein ausreichend geladener Akku in das eBike eingesetzt
sind.
Öffnen Sie die Schutzkappe 8 des USB-Anschluss am Bediencomputer. Verbinden Sie den USB-Anschluss des externen
Geräts über ein passendes USB-Kabel mit der USB-Buchse 7
am Bediencomputer.
Hinweise zum Fahren mit dem eBike-System
Wann arbeitet der eBike-Antrieb?
Der eBike-Antrieb unterstützt Sie beim Fahren, solange Sie in
die Pedale treten. Ohne Pedaltreten erfolgt keine Unterstützung. Die Motorleistung ist immer abhängig von der beim Treten eingesetzten Kraft.
Setzen Sie wenig Kraft ein, wird die Unterstützung geringer
sein, als wenn Sie viel Kraft einsetzen. Das gilt unabhängig
vom Unterstützungslevel.
Der eBike-Antrieb schaltet sich automatisch bei Geschwindigkeiten über 45 km/h ab. Fällt die Geschwindigkeit unter
45 km/h, steht der Antrieb automatisch wieder zur Verfügung.
Eine Ausnahme gilt für die Funktion Anfahrhilfe, in der das
eBike ohne Pedaltreten mit geringer Geschwindigkeit gefahren werden kann.
Sie können das eBike jederzeit auch ohne Unterstützung wie
ein normales Fahrrad fahren, indem Sie entweder das eBikeSystem ausschalten oder den Unterstützungslevel auf „OFF“
stellen. Das Gleiche gilt bei leerem Akku.
Zusammenspiel des eBike-Systems mit der Schaltung
Auch mit eBike-Antrieb sollten Sie die Schaltung wie bei einem normalen Fahrrad benutzen (beachten Sie dazu die Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes).
Unabhängig von der Art der Schaltung ist es ratsam, während
des Schaltvorganges das Treten kurz zu unterbrechen. Dadurch wird das Schalten erleichtert und die Abnutzung des
Antriebsstranges reduziert.
Durch die Wahl des richtigen Ganges können Sie bei gleichem
Krafteinsatz die Geschwindigkeit und die Reichweite erhöhen.
Bosch eBike Systems
Erste Erfahrungen sammeln
Es ist empfehlenswert, die ersten Erfahrungen mit dem eBike
abseits vielbefahrener Straßen zu sammeln.
Probieren Sie unterschiedliche Unterstützungslevel aus. Sobald Sie sich sicher fühlen, können Sie mit dem eBike wie mit
jedem Fahrrad am Verkehr teilnehmen.
Testen Sie die Reichweite Ihres eBikes unter unterschiedlichen Bedingungen, bevor Sie längere, anspruchsvolle Fahrten planen.
Einflüsse auf die Reichweite
Die Reichweite wird von vielen Faktoren beeinflusst, wie zum
Beispiel:
– Unterstützungslevel,
– Schaltverhalten,
– Art der Reifen und Reifendruck,
– Alter und Pflegezustand des Akkus,
– Streckenprofil (Steigungen) und -beschaffenheit (Fahrbahnbelag),
– Gegenwind und Umgebungstemperatur,
– Gewicht von eBike, Fahrer und Gepäck.
Deshalb ist es nicht möglich, die Reichweite vor Antritt einer
Fahrt konkret vorherzusagen. Allgemein gilt jedoch:
– Bei gleicher Motorleistung des eBike-Antriebs: Je weniger
Kraft Sie einsetzen müssen, um eine bestimmte Geschwindigkeit zu erreichen (z.B. durch optimales Benutzen der
Schaltung), umso weniger Energie wird der eBike-Antrieb
verbrauchen und umso größer wird die Reichweite einer
Akkuladung sein.
– Je höher der Unterstützungslevel bei ansonsten gleichen
Bedingungen gewählt wird, umso geringer ist die Reichweite.
Pfleglicher Umgang mit dem eBike
Beachten Sie die Betriebs- und Lagertemperaturen der eBikeKomponenten. Schützen Sie Antriebseinheit, Bediencomputer und Akku vor extremen Temperaturen (z.B. durch intensive Sonneneinstrahlung ohne gleichzeitige Belüftung). Die
Komponenten (besonders der Akku) können durch extreme
Temperaturen beschädigt werden.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–7
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Halten Sie alle Komponenten Ihres eBikes sauber, insbesondere die Kontakte von Akku und dazugehöriger Halterung.
Reinigen Sie sie vorsichtig mit einem feuchten, weichen Tuch.
Alle Komponenten inklusive der Antriebseinheit dürfen nicht
ins Wasser getaucht oder mit einem Hochdruckreiniger gereinigt werden.
Für Service oder Reparaturen am eBike wenden Sie sich bitte
an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zum eBike-System und seinen Komponenten
wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
Die Akkus unterliegen den Anforderungen des Gefahrgutrechts. Die Akkus können durch den privaten Benutzer ohne
weitere Auflagen auf der Straße transportiert werden.
Beim Transport durch gewerbliche Benutzer oder beim Transport durch Dritte (z.B. Lufttransport oder Spedition) sind besondere Anforderungen an Verpackung und Kennzeichnung
zu beachten (z.B. Vorschriften des ADR). Bei Bedarf kann bei
der Vorbereitung des Versandstückes ein Gefahrgut-Experte
hinzugezogen werden.
Versenden Sie die Akkus nur, wenn das Gehäuse unbeschädigt ist. Kleben Sie offene Kontakte ab und verpacken Sie den
Akku so, dass er sich nicht in der Verpackung bewegt. Bitte
beachten Sie auch eventuelle weiterführende nationale Vorschriften.
Bei Fragen zum Transport der Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Beim Händler können Sie auch
eine geeignete Transportverpackung bestellen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Entsorgung
Antriebseinheit, Bediencomputer inkl. Bedieneinheit, Akku, Geschwindigkeitssensor, Zubehör und
Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie eBikes und ihre Komponenten nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Elektrogeräte und gemäß
der europäischen Richtlinie 2006/66/EG
müssen defekte oder verbrauchte Akkus/
Batterien getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwendung zugeführt werden.
Der im Bediencomputer integrierte Akku darf nur zur Entsorgung entnommen werden. Durch das Öffnen der Gehäuseschale kann der Bediencomputer zerstört werden.
Geben Sie nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Akkus und Bediencomputer bitte bei einem autorisierten Fahrradhändler ab.
Li-Ion:
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise im Abschnitt „Transport“, Seite Deutsch–7.
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–8
Li-Ionen-Akku PowerPack
Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen.
Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise
und Anweisungen können
elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen
verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger), es sei denn, es wird ausdrücklich auf die Bauform Bezug genommen.
 Nehmen Sie den Akku aus dem eBike, bevor Sie Arbeiten (z.B. Montage, Wartung etc.) am eBike beginnen,
es mit dem Auto oder dem Flugzeug transportieren
oder es aufbewahren. Bei unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen
des Ein-/Ausschalters besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Öffnen Sie den Akku nicht. Es besteht die Gefahr eines
Kurzschlusses. Bei geöffnetem Akku entfällt jeglicher
Garantieanspruch.
Schützen Sie den Akku vor Hitze (z.B. auch vor
dauernder Sonneneinstrahlung), Feuer und
dem Eintauchen in Wasser. Es besteht Explosionsgefahr.
 Halten Sie den nicht benutzten Akku fern von Büroklammern, Münzen, Schlüsseln, Nägeln, Schrauben
oder anderen kleinen Metallgegenständen, die eine
Überbrückung der Kontakte verursachen könnten. Ein
Kurzschluss zwischen den Akkukontakten kann Verbrennungen oder Feuer zur Folge haben. Bei in diesem Zusammenhang entstandenen Kurzschlussschäden entfällt jeglicher Anspruch auf Garantie durch Bosch.
 Bei falscher Anwendung kann Flüssigkeit aus dem
Akku austreten. Vermeiden Sie den Kontakt damit. Bei
zufälligem Kontakt mit Wasser abspülen. Wenn die
Flüssigkeit in die Augen kommt, nehmen Sie zusätzlich
ärztliche Hilfe in Anspruch. Austretende Akkuflüssigkeit
kann zu Hautreizungen oder Verbrennungen führen.
 Bei Beschädigung und unsachgemäßem Gebrauch des
Akkus können Dämpfe austreten. Führen Sie Frischluft
zu und suchen Sie bei Beschwerden einen Arzt auf. Die
Dämpfe können die Atemwege reizen.
 Laden Sie den Akku nur mit original Bosch Ladegeräten. Bei Benutzung von nicht original Bosch Ladegeräten
kann eine Brandgefahr nicht ausgeschlossen werden.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Verwenden Sie den Akku nur in Verbindung mit eBikes
mit original Bosch eBike-Antriebssystem. Nur so wird
der Akku vor gefährlicher Überlastung geschützt.
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in den Betriebsanleitungen von Ladegerät und Antriebseinheit/Bediencomputer sowie in der
Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Abgebildete Komponenten (siehe Seite 4–5)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellungen auf den Grafikseiten.
Alle Darstellungen von Fahrradteilen außer den Akkus und ihren Halterungen sind schematisch und können bei Ihrem
eBike abweichen.
19 Halterung des Gepäckträger-Akkus
20 Gepäckträger-Akku
21 Betriebs- und Ladezustandsanzeige
22 Ein-Aus-Taste
23 Schlüssel des Akkuschlosses
24 Akkuschloss
25 Obere Halterung des Standard-Akkus
26 Standard-Akku
27 Untere Halterung des Standard-Akkus
28 Tragegurt
29 Ladegerät
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–9
Technische Daten
Li-Ionen-Akku
Sachnummer
– Standard-Akku schwarz
– Standard-Akku weiß
– Gepäckträger-Akku
Nennspannung
Nennkapazität
Energie
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Zulässiger Ladetemperaturbereich
Gewicht, ca.
Schutzart
Montage
 Stellen Sie den Akku nur auf sauberen Flächen auf. Vermeiden Sie insbesondere die Verschmutzung der Ladebuchse und der Kontakte, z.B. durch Sand oder Erde.
Akku vor der ersten Benutzung prüfen
Prüfen Sie den Akku, bevor Sie ihn das erste Mal aufladen
oder mit Ihrem eBike benutzen.
Drücken Sie dazu die Ein-Aus-Taste 22 zum Einschalten des
Akkus. Leuchtet keine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 auf,
dann ist der Akku möglicherweise beschädigt.
Leuchtet mindestens eine, aber nicht alle LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21, dann laden Sie den Akku vor der ersten Benutzung voll auf.
 Laden Sie einen beschädigten Akku nicht auf und benutzen Sie ihn nicht. Wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Akku laden
 Benutzen Sie nur das im Lieferumfang Ihres eBikes enthaltene oder ein baugleiches original Bosch Ladegerät.
Nur dieses Ladegerät ist auf den bei Ihrem eBike verwendeten Li-Ionen-Akku abgestimmt.
Hinweis: Der Akku wird teilgeladen ausgeliefert. Um die volle
Leistung des Akkus zu gewährleisten, laden Sie ihn vor dem
ersten Einsatz vollständig mit dem Ladegerät auf.
Der Akku muss zum Laden aus dem eBike entnommen werden.
Lesen und beachten Sie zum Laden des Akkus die Betriebsanleitung des Ladegerätes.
Der Akku kann jederzeit aufgeladen werden, ohne die Lebensdauer zu verkürzen. Eine Unterbrechung des Ladevorganges
schädigt den Akku nicht.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 300
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 502
36
8,2
300
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (staub- und spritzwassergeschützt)
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 505
36
11
400
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (staub- und spritzwassergeschützt)
Der Akku ist mit einer Temperaturüberwachung ausgestattet,
welche ein Aufladen nur im Temperaturbereich zwischen 0 °C
und 40 °C zulässt.
Befindet sich der Akku außerhalb des Ladetemperaturbereiches, blinken drei LEDs der
Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Trennen Sie den Akku vom Ladegerät und lassen sie ihn austemperieren.
Schließen Sie den Akku erst wieder an das Ladegerät an,
wenn er die zulässige Ladetemperatur erreicht hat.
Ladezustandsanzeige
Die fünf grünen LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 zeigen bei
eingeschaltetem Akku den Ladezustand des Akkus an.
Dabei entspricht jede LED etwa 20 % Kapazität. Bei vollständig geladenem Akku leuchten alle fünf LEDs.
Der Ladezustand des eingeschalteten Akkus wird außerdem im
Bediencomputer angezeigt. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die
Betriebsanleitung von Antriebseinheit und Bediencomputer.
Liegt die Kapazität des Akkus unter 5 %, erlöschen alle LEDs
der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 am Akku, es gibt aber noch eine
Anzeigefunktion des Bediencomputers.
Akku einsetzen und entnehmen
(siehe Bilder C – D)
 Schalten Sie den Akku immer aus, wenn Sie ihn in die
Halterung einsetzen oder aus der Halterung entnehmen.
Damit der Akku eingesetzt werden kann, muss der Schlüssel
23 im Schloss 24 stecken und das Schloss muss aufgeschlossen sein.
Zum Einsetzen des Standard-Akkus 26 setzen Sie ihn mit
den Kontakten auf die untere Halterung 27 am eBike. Kippen
Sie ihn bis zum Anschlag in die obere Halterung 25.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–10
Zum Einsetzen des Gepäckträger-Akkus 20 schieben Sie
ihn mit den Kontakten voran bis zum Einrasten in die Halterung 19 im Gepäckträger.
Prüfen Sie, ob der Akku fest sitzt. Schließen Sie den Akku immer am Schloss 24 ab, weil sich sonst das Schloss öffnen und
der Akku aus der Halterung fallen kann.
Ziehen Sie den Schlüssel 23 nach dem Abschließen immer
aus dem Schloss 24. Damit verhindern Sie, dass der Schlüssel herausfällt bzw. dass der Akku bei abgestelltem eBike
durch unberechtigte Dritte entnommen wird.
Zum Entnehmen des Standard-Akkus 26 schalten Sie ihn
aus und schließen das Schloss mit dem Schlüssel 23 auf. Kippen Sie den Akku aus der oberen Halterung 25 und ziehen Sie
ihn am Tragegurt 28 aus der unteren Halterung 27.
Zum Entnehmen des Gepäckträger-Akkus 20 schalten Sie
ihn aus und schließen das Schloss mit dem Schlüssel 23 auf.
Ziehen Sie den Akku aus der Halterung 19.
Betrieb
Inbetriebnahme
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
Ein-/Ausschalten
Das Einschalten des Akkus ist eine der Möglichkeiten, das
eBike-System einzuschalten. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die
Betriebsanleitung von Antriebseinheit und Bediencomputer.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einschalten des Akkus bzw. des
eBike-Systems, dass das Schloss 24 abgeschlossen ist.
Hinweis: Die Pedale des eBikes sollen beim Einschalten des
eBike-Systems nicht belastet sein, weil sonst die Leistung des
eBike-Antriebs eingeschränkt wird.
Zum Einschalten des Akkus drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste
22. Die LEDs der Anzeige 21 leuchten auf und zeigen gleichzeitig den Ladezustand an.
Hinweis: Liegt die Kapazität des Akkus unter 5 %, leuchtet am
Akku keine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Es ist nur am
Bediencomputer erkennbar, ob das eBike-System eingeschaltet ist.
Zum Ausschalten des Akkus drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste
22 erneut. Die LEDs der Anzeige 21 erlöschen. Das eBikeSystem wird damit ebenfalls ausgeschaltet.
Wird etwa 10 min lang keine Leistung des eBike-Antriebs abgerufen (z.B., weil das eBike steht) und keine Taste an Bediencomputer oder Bedieneinheit des eBikes gedrückt,
schalten sich das eBike-System und damit auch der Akku aus
Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Bosch eBike Systems
Der Akku ist durch die „Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)“ gegen Tiefentladung, Überladung, Überhitzung und Kurzschluss
geschützt. Bei Gefährdung schaltet sich der Akku durch eine
Schutzschaltung automatisch ab.
Wird ein Defekt des Akkus erkannt, blinken zwei LEDs der
Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an
einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Hinweise für den optimalen Umgang mit dem
Akku
Die Lebensdauer des Akkus kann verlängert werden, wenn er
gut gepflegt und vor allem bei den richtigen Temperaturen gelagert wird.
Mit zunehmender Alterung wird sich die Kapazität des Akkus
aber auch bei guter Pflege verringern.
Eine wesentlich verkürzte Betriebszeit nach der Aufladung
zeigt an, dass der Akku verbraucht ist. Sie können den Akku
ersetzen.
Sollte der Tragegurt 28 des Standard-Akkus defekt sein, dann
lassen Sie ihn von einem Fahrradhändler austauschen.
Akku vor und während der Lagerung nachladen
Laden Sie den Akku vor längerer Nichtbenutzung auf etwa
60 % auf (3 bis 4 LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 leuchten).
Prüfen Sie nach 6 Monaten den Ladezustand. Leuchtet nur
noch eine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21, dann laden Sie
den Akku wieder auf etwa 60 % auf.
Hinweis: Wird der Akku längere Zeit in leerem Zustand aufbewahrt, kann er trotz der geringen Selbstentladung beschädigt
und die Speicherkapazität stark verringert werden.
Es ist nicht empfehlenswert, den Akku dauerhaft am Ladegerät angeschlossen zu lassen.
Lagerungsbedingungen
Lagern Sie den Akku möglichst an einem trockenen, gut belüfteten Platz. Schützen Sie ihn vor Feuchtigkeit und Wasser. Bei
ungünstigen Witterungsbedingungen ist es z.B. empfehlenswert, den Akku vom eBike abzunehmen und bis zum nächsten
Einsatz in geschlossenen Räumen aufzubewahren.
Der Akku kann bei Temperaturen von –10 °C bis +60 °C
gelagert werden. Für eine lange Lebensdauer ist jedoch eine
Lagerung bei ca. 20 °C Raumtemperatur vorteilhaft.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die maximale Lagertemperatur nicht
überschritten wird. Lassen Sie den Akku z.B. im Sommer
nicht im Auto liegen und lagern Sie ihn außerhalb direkter
Sonneneinstrahlung.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–11
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Halten Sie den Akku sauber. Reinigen Sie ihn vorsichtig mit
einem feuchten, weichen Tuch. Der Akku darf nicht ins Wasser getaucht oder mit Wasserstrahl gereinigt werden.
Ist der Akku nicht mehr funktionsfähig, wenden Sie sich bitte
an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zu den Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
 Notieren Sie Hersteller und Nummer des Schlüssels 23.
Bei Verlust der Schlüssel wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Geben Sie dabei Schlüsselhersteller und -nummer an.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Entsorgung
Akkus, Zubehör und Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie die Akkus nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Elektrogeräte und gemäß
der europäischen Richtlinie 2006/66/EG
müssen defekte oder verbrauchte Akkus/
Batterien getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwendung zugeführt werden.
Geben Sie nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Akkus bitte bei einem
autorisierten Fahrradhändler ab.
Li-Ion:
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise im Abschnitt „Transport“, Seite
Deutsch–11.
Transport
Die Akkus unterliegen den Anforderungen des Gefahrgutrechts. Die Akkus können durch den privaten Benutzer ohne
weitere Auflagen auf der Straße transportiert werden.
Beim Transport durch gewerbliche Benutzer oder beim Transport durch Dritte (z.B. Lufttransport oder Spedition) sind besondere Anforderungen an Verpackung und Kennzeichnung
zu beachten (z.B. Vorschriften des ADR). Bei Bedarf kann bei
der Vorbereitung des Versandstückes ein Gefahrgut-Experte
hinzugezogen werden.
Versenden Sie die Akkus nur, wenn das Gehäuse unbeschädigt ist. Kleben Sie offene Kontakte ab und verpacken Sie den
Akku so, dass er sich nicht in der Verpackung bewegt. Bitte
beachten Sie auch eventuelle weiterführende nationale Vorschriften.
Bei Fragen zum Transport der Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Beim Händler können Sie auch
eine geeignete Transportverpackung bestellen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–12
Ladegerät Charger
Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen.
Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise
und Anweisungen können
elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen
verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger).
Halten Sie das Ladegerät von Regen oder Nässe
fern. Beim Eindringen von Wasser in ein Ladegerät
besteht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Laden Sie nur für eBikes zugelassene Bosch Li-IonenAkkus. Die Akkuspannung muss zur Akku-Ladespannung des Ladegerätes passen. Ansonsten besteht
Brand- und Explosionsgefahr.
 Halten Sie das Ladegerät sauber. Durch Verschmutzung
besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Überprüfen Sie vor jeder Benutzung Ladegerät, Kabel
und Stecker. Benutzen Sie das Ladegerät nicht, sofern
Sie Schäden feststellen. Öffnen Sie das Ladegerät
nicht selbst und lassen Sie es nur von qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal und nur mit Original-Ersatzteilen reparieren. Beschädigte Ladegeräte, Kabel und Stecker erhöhen das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Betreiben Sie das Ladegerät nicht auf leicht brennbarem Untergrund (z.B. Papier, Textilien etc.) bzw. in
brennbarer Umgebung. Wegen der beim Laden auftretenden Erwärmung des Ladegerätes besteht Brandgefahr.
 Bei Beschädigung und unsachgemäßem Gebrauch des
Akkus können Dämpfe austreten. Führen Sie Frischluft
zu und suchen Sie bei Beschwerden einen Arzt auf. Die
Dämpfe können die Atemwege reizen.
 Beaufsichtigen Sie Kinder. Damit wird sichergestellt,
dass Kinder nicht mit dem Ladegerät spielen.
 Kinder und Personen, die aufgrund ihrer physischen,
sensorischen oder geistigen Fähigkeiten oder ihrer Unerfahrenheit oder Unkenntnis nicht in der Lage sind,
das Ladegerät sicher zu bedienen, dürfen dieses Ladegerät nicht ohne Aufsicht oder Anweisung durch eine
verantwortliche Person benutzen. Andernfalls besteht
die Gefahr von Fehlbedienung und Verletzungen.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in den Betriebsanleitungen von Akku und
Antriebseinheit/Bediencomputer sowie in der Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
 Auf der Unterseite des Ladegerätes befindet sich eine
Kurzfassung wichtiger Sicherheitshinweise in englischer,
französischer und spanischer Sprache (in der Darstellung
auf der Grafikseite mit Nummer 33 gekennzeichnet) und
mit folgendem Inhalt:
– Für eine sichere Benutzung beachten Sie die Betriebsanleitung. Risiko eines elektrischen Schocks.
– Nur in trockener Umgebung benutzen.
– Laden Sie nur Akkus des Bosch eBike-Systems. Andere
Akkus können explodieren und Verletzungen verursachen.
– Ersetzen Sie das Netzkabel nicht. Es besteht Brandund Explosionsgefahr.
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Abgebildete Komponenten
(siehe Seite 6–7)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellung des Ladegerätes auf der Grafikseite.
20 Gepäckträger-Akku
21 Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
26 Standard-Akku
29 Ladegerät
30 Gerätebuchse
31 Gerätestecker
32 Lüftungsöffnungen
33 Sicherheitshinweise Ladegerät
34 Ladestecker
35 Buchse für Ladestecker
Technische Daten
Ladegerät
Sachnummer
Nennspannung
Frequenz
Akku-Ladespannung
Ladestrom
Zulässiger Ladetemperaturbereich
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
Die Angaben gelten für eine Nennspannung [U] von 230 V. Bei abweichenden Spannungen und in länderspezifischen Ausführungen können
diese Angaben variieren.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–13
Ladegerät
Ladezeit
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Anzahl der Akkuzellen
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Gewicht entsprechend
EPTA-Procedure 01/2003
Schutzart
Charger
h
h
°C
°C
kg
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0,8
IP 40
Die Angaben gelten für eine Nennspannung [U] von 230 V. Bei abweichenden Spannungen und in länderspezifischen Ausführungen können
diese Angaben variieren.
Hinweis: Achten Sie darauf, dass das Ladegerät während des
Ladevorgangs gut belüftet ist und die Lüftungsöffnungen 32
auf beiden Seiten nicht verdeckt sind.
Der Akku ist vollständig geladen, wenn alle fünf LEDs der Anzeige 21 dauerhaft leuchten. Der Ladevorgang wird automatisch unterbrochen.
Trennen Sie das Ladegerät vom Stromnetz und den Akku vom
Ladegerät.
Beim Trennen des Akkus vom Ladegerät wird der Akku automatisch abgeschaltet.
Sie können den Akku jetzt in das eBike einsetzen.
Fehler – Ursachen und Abhilfe
Ursache
Abhilfe
Zwei LEDs am Akku blinken
Akku defekt
an autorisierten Fahrradhändler wenden
Drei LEDs am Akku blinken
Betrieb
 Stellen Sie den Akku nur auf sauberen Flächen auf. Vermeiden Sie insbesondere die Verschmutzung der Ladebuchse und der Kontakte, z.B. durch Sand oder Erde.
Inbetriebnahme
Ladegerät anschließen (siehe Bilder E–F)
 Beachten Sie die Netzspannung! Die Spannung der
Stromquelle muss mit den Angaben auf dem Typenschild
des Ladegerätes übereinstimmen. Mit 230 V gekennzeichnete Ladegeräte können auch an 220 V betrieben werden.
Stecken Sie den Gerätestecker 31 des Netzkabels in die
Gerätebuchse 30 am Ladegerät.
Schließen Sie das Netzkabel (länderspezifisch) an das Stromnetz an.
Schalten Sie den Akku aus und entnehmen Sie ihn aus der Halterung am eBike. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die Betriebsanleitung des Akkus.
Stecken Sie den Ladestecker 34 des Ladegerätes in die Buchse
35 am Akku.
Ladevorgang
Der Ladevorgang beginnt, sobald das Ladegerät mit dem
Akku und dem Stromnetz verbunden ist.
Hinweis: Der Ladevorgang ist nur möglich, wenn sich die
Temperatur des Akkus im zulässigen Ladetemperaturbereich
befindet.
Während des Ladevorgangs leuchten die LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 am Akku. Jede dauerhaft leuchtende LED
entspricht etwa 20 % Kapazität Aufladung. Die blinkende LED
zeigt die Aufladung der nächsten 20 % an.
 Seien Sie vorsichtig, wenn Sie das Ladegerät während
des Ladevorgangs berühren. Tragen Sie Schutzhandschuhe. Das Ladegerät kann sich insbesondere bei hohen
Umgebungstemperaturen stark erhitzen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Akku zu warm oder zu kalt
Akku vom Ladegerät trennen
und austemperieren lassen,
bis der Ladetemperaturbereich erreicht ist
Schließen Sie den Akku erst
wieder an das Ladegerät an,
wenn er die zulässige Ladetemperatur erreicht hat.
Kein Ladevorgang möglich (keine Anzeige am Akku)
Stecker nicht richtig einge- alle Steckverbindungen übersteckt
prüfen
Kontakte am Akku vorsichtig
Kontakte am Akku verschmutzt
reinigen
Lüftungsöffnungen 32 des
Lüftungsöffnungen 32 reiniLadegerätes verstopft oder gen und Ladegerät gut belüfverdeckt
tet aufstellen
Steckdose, Kabel oder Lade- Netzspannung überprüfen,
gerät defekt
Ladegerät vom Fahrradhändler überprüfen lassen
Akku defekt
an autorisierten Fahrradhändler wenden
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Deutsch–14
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Sollte das Ladegerät ausfallen, wenden Sie sich bitte an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zum Ladegerät wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Entsorgung
Ladegeräte, Zubehör und Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie Ladegeräte nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der Europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG über Elektro- und ElektronikAltgeräte und ihrer Umsetzung in nationales
Recht müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige
Ladegeräte getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–1
Drive Unit Speed/
Drive HMI Intuvia
Safety Notes
Read all safety warnings and all instructions. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions may result in electric shock, fire
and/or serious injury.
Save all safety warnings and instructions for future reference.
The term “battery pack” used in these operating instructions
refers both to standard battery packs (battery packs with
holder on the bike frame) and to rack-type battery packs (battery packs with holder in the rear rack/carrier).
 Do not open the drive unit yourself. The drive unit is
maintenance-free and may be repaired only through a
qualified repair person and only using original spare
parts. This will ensure that the safety of the drive unit is
maintained. Unauthorised opening of the drive unit will
void any and all warranty claims.
 All components mounted to the drive unit and all other
components of the eBike drive (e.g., the chainwheel,
chainwheel seat, pedals) may be replaced only against
identical components or components specifically approved for your eBike by the bicycle manufacturer. This
protects the drive unit against overload and damage.
 Remove the battery pack from the eBike before working on the eBike (e.g., assembling, maintenance, etc.),
transporting it via car or plane, or storing it. Danger of
injury when accidentally actuating the On/Off switch.
 The start-assistance function may only be used when
starting (driving off) the eBike. Danger of injury when
the wheels of the eBike do not have ground contact while
using the start-assistance function.
 Use only original Bosch battery packs approved for
your eBike by the manufacturer. Using other battery
packs can lead to injuries and pose a fire hazard. When using other battery packs, Bosch shall not assume any liability and warranty.
 Please observe all national regulations on registering
and using eBikes.
 Please read and observe the safety warnings and instructions enclosed in the operating instructions of the
battery pack as well as in the operating instructions of
your eBike.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Product Description and
Specifications
Intended Use
The drive unit is intended exclusively for your eBike and may
not be used for other purposes.
The eBike is intended for use on paved paths. It is not permitted for use in competition.
Product Features
(see page 2–3)
The numbering of the product features refers to the illustrations on the graphics page.
All representations of bike components, with exception of the
drive unit, drive HMI incl. operating unit, speed sensor and
corresponding holders, are schematic and can deviate from
your eBike.
1 Display-function button “i”
2 Illumination button
3 Drive HMI
4 Holder for drive HMI
5 Drive HMI On/Off button
6 “RESET” button
7 USB port
8 Protective cap of USB port
9 Drive unit
10 Operating unit
11 Display-function button “i” on the operating unit
12 Reduce value/scroll down button “ –”
13 Increase value/scroll up button “+”
14 Start-assistance button “WALK”
15 Lock latch for drive HMI
16 Locking screw for drive HMI
17 Speed sensor
18 Spoke magnet of the speed sensor
Indication Elements, Drive HMI
a Motor-output indicator
b Assistance-level indicator
c Text indication
d Value indication
e Speed indication
f Battery charge-control indicator
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–2
Technical Data
Drive Unit
Article number
Power output
Output torque, max.
Rated voltage
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
Drive HMI
Article number
Max. charging current, USB
connection.
Charging voltage, USB connection
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
Lighting*
Rated voltage
Power output
– Front light
– Rear light
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (dust and splash
water protected)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (dust and splash
water protected)
kg
0.15
V
W
W
6
2.7
0.3
* Not possible via the eBike battery pack in all country-specific versions,
depending on the statutory regulations
Assembly
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack
For inserting and removing the battery pack in/from the
eBike, please read and observe the battery pack operating instructions.
Inserting and Removing the Drive HMI
(see figure A)
To insert the drive HMI 3, slide it from the front into the
holder 4.
To remove the drive HMI 3, press the lock latch 15 and slide
the drive HMI toward the front out of the holder 4.
 Remove the drive HMI when parking the eBike, so that
the drive cannot be used by unauthorised persons.
Without the drive HMI, the eBike system cannot be
switched on.
Bosch eBike Systems
The drive HMI can also be secured in the holder against removing. For this, remove the holder 4 from the handlebar. Insert the drive HMI into the holder. Screw the locking screw 16
from below into the corresponding thread in the holder.
Mount the holder onto the handlebar again.
Checking the Speed Sensor
(see figure B)
The speed sensor 17 and its spoke magnet 18 must be
mounted in such a manner that the spoke magnet, after a turn
of the wheel, moves past the speed sensor with a clearance of
at least 5 mm, yet no more than 17 mm.
Note: If the clearance between speed sensor 17 and spoke
magnet 18 is too small or too large, or if the speed sensor 17
is not properly connected, the speed indication e will fail, and
the eBike drive will operate in emergency mode.
In this case, loosen the screw of the spoke magnet 18 and fasten the spoke magnet to the spoke in such a manner that it
runs past the mark of the speed sensor at the correct clearance. When the speed is still not being indicated in the speed
indication e after this, please refer to an authorised bicycle
dealer.
Operation
Initial Operation
Requirements
The eBike system can only be activated when the following requirements are met:
– A sufficiently charged battery pack is inserted (see operating instructions of the battery pack).
– The drive HMI is properly inserted in the holder (see “Inserting and Removing the Drive HMI”, page English–2).
– The drive HMI is properly connected (see “Checking the
Speed Sensor”, page English–2).
Switching the eBike System On/Off
Options for switching on the eBike system:
– If the drive HMI is already switched on when inserting it in
the holder, the eBike system is automatically switched on.
– When the drive HMI and the battery pack are inserted,
briefly press the On/Off button 5 of the drive HMI once.
– When the drive HMI is inserted, press the On/Off button of
the battery pack (see battery pack operating instructions).
Note: When switching on the eBike system, the pedals of the
eBike must not be subject to load, as otherwise the motor output capacity will be limited. The error message “Release
pedal” is displayed in text indication c.
If the eBike system was inadvertently switched on with load
applied to the pedals, then switch it off and then on again
without load.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–3
The drive is activated as soon as you step into the pedals (except when in start-assistance mode, see “Switching Start-assistance On/Off”, page English–4). The motor output depends on the settings of the drive HMI.
As soon as you stop pedaling when in normal operation, or as
soon as you have reached a speed of 45 km/h, the assistance
from the eBike drive is switched off. The drive is automatically
re-activated as soon you start pedaling again and the speed is
below 45 km/h.
Options for switching off the eBike system:
– Press the On/Off button 5 of the drive HMI.
– Switch the battery pack off by its On/Off button (see battery pack operating instructions.)
– Remove the drive HMI out of its holder.
When no power output of the drive is requested for approx.
10 minutes (e. g., because the eBike is parked) and no button
of the drive HMI or operating unit is pressed, the battery pack
automatically switches off to save energy.
Indications and Settings of the Drive HMI
Power Supply of the Drive HMI
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, a sufficiently
charged battery pack is inserted in the eBike and the eBike
system is switched on, power is supplied to the drive HMI via
the eBike's battery pack.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, it is supplied
with power via an internal battery pack. If the internal battery
pack is low when switching on the drive HMI, “Attach to bike”
is displayed for 3 s in text indication c. Afterwards, the drive
HMI switches off again.
To recharge the internal battery pack, insert the drive HMI into the holder 4 (a battery pack must be inserted in the eBike).
Switch the eBike battery pack off by its On/Off button (see
battery pack operating instructions).
The drive HMI can also be charged via USB connection. Open
protective cap 8 for this. Using a matching USB cable, connect the USB port 7 of the drive HMI to a commercially available USB charger or to the USB port of a computer; (5 V charging voltage; max. 500 mA charging current). “USB
connected” is displayed in text indication c of the drive HMI.
Switching the drive HMI On/Off
To switch on the drive HMI, briefly press the On/Off button 5.
When the internal battery pack is sufficiently charged, the
drive HMI can also be switched on when not inserted in the
holder.
To switch off the drive HMI, press the On/Off button 5.
When the drive HMI is not inserted in the holder and no button
is pressed, it automatically switches off after 1 min to save energy.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Battery Charge-control Indicator
The battery-pack charge-control indicator f indicates the
charge condition of the eBike’s battery pack, and not the
charge condition of the drive HMI’s internal battery pack. The
charge condition of the eBike’s battery pack can also be read
from the battery pack’s LEDs.
On indicator f, each bar of the battery pack symbol is equivalent to a capacity of approx. 20 %:
100 % to 80 % capacity
20 % to 5 % capacity; the battery pack should be
recharged.
Less than 5 % capacity; drive assistance is no longer possible. The LEDs of the charge-control indicator on the battery pack go out.
When the eBike lighting is powered via the battery pack
(country-specific), the capacity upon first indication of the
empty battery pack symbol will be sufficient for approx.
2 hours of lighting. When the symbol begins to flash, the lighting will continue to operate only for a short period.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, the last indicated battery pack charge condition is stored.
Setting the Assistance Level
The level of assistance of the eBike drive when pedaling can
be adjusted via the drive HMI. The assistance level can be
changed anytime, even during riding.
Note: For individual versions, it is possible that the the assistance level is pre-set and cannot be changed. It is also possible that less assistance levels are available for selection than
listed here.
The following assistance levels (max.) are available:
– “OFF”: The drive is switched off, the eBike can be operated
as a normal bicycle through pedaling.
– “ECO”: Effective assistance at maximum efficiency for
maximum cruising range
– “TOUR”: Uniform assistance, for touring with long cruising
range
– “SPORT”: Powerful assistance for sportive riding off road
as well as for urban traffic
– “TURBO”: Maximum assistance, supporting highest cadence for sportive riding
To increase the assistance level, press the “+” button 13 on
the operating unit until the desired assistance level is displayed in indicator b; to decrease the assistance level, press
the “ –” button 12.
The requested motor output is displayed in indicator a. The
maximum motor output depends on the selected assistance
level.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–4
Assistance Level
“ECO”
“TOUR”
“SPORT”
“TURBO”
Motor Output*
(Derailleur)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* The motor output can vary for individual versions.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, the last indicated assistance level is stored; the motor-output indicator a remains empty.
Switching Start-assistance On/Off
The start-assistance function can be used for additional support on the first meters when starting is difficult (e. g., at a
traffic light or when starting uphill).
 The start-assistance function may only be used when
starting (driving off) the eBike. Danger of injury when
the wheels of the eBike do not have ground contact while
using the start-assistance function.
To activate the start-assistance function, press and hold the
“WALK” button 14 on the operating unit. The eBike’s drive is
activated.
The start-assistance function is switched off as soon as any
of the following incidents occur:
– You release “WALK” button 14,
– You press another button on the drive HMI,
– You pedal in forward or quickly in backward direction,
– The wheels of the eBike are blocked (e. g., through braking
or running against an obstruction),
– Your speed exceeds 18 km/h.
Switching the Lighting On/Off
Depending on country-specific regulations, two lighting versions are possible:
– The front light, rear light and display backlight can be
switched on and off at the same time via the drive HMI.
In this version, “Lights on” is displayed for approx. 1 s in
text indication c when switching on, and “Lights off” when
switching off.
– Only the display backlight can be switched on and off; the
front and rear light of the eBike are independent of the
drive HMI.
For both versions, the lighting is switched on and off by
pressing button 2.
Speed and Distance Indication
The speed indication e always displays the current speed.
The following functions are available in the function indication (combination of text indication c and value indication d):
– “Range”: Estimated range of the available battery-pack
charge (for constant conditions such as assistance level,
route profile, etc.)
– “Distance”: Distance covered since the last reset
– “Trip time”: Trip time since the last reset
Bosch eBike Systems
– “Avg. Speed”: Average speed achieved since the last reset
– “Max. Speed”: Maximum speed achieved since the last reset
– “Clock”: Current time
To switch between the indication functions, press the “i”
button 1 on the drive HMI or the “i” button 11 on the operating
unit until the desired function is displayed.
To reset “Distance”, “Trip time” and “Avg. Speed”, switch to
any of the three functions and then press and hold the
“RESET” button 6 until the indication is set to zero. This also
resets the values of the other two functions.
To reset the “Max. Speed”, switch to this function and then
press and hold the “RESET” button 6 until the indication is set
to zero.
When the drive HMI is removed from the holder 4, all function
values remain stored and can be viewed.
Displaying/Adapting Basic Settings
The basic settings can be displayed and changed no matter if
the drive HMI is in the holder 4 or not.
To access the basic settings menu, press and hold the
“RESET” button 6 and the “i” button 1 until “Configuration”
is displayed in text indication c.
To switch between the basic settings, press the “i” button 1
on the drive HMI until the desired basic setting is displayed.
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, you can also press
the “i” button 11 on the operating unit.
To change the basic settings, press the On/Off button 5 next
to the “ –” indication to decrease the value or scroll down, or
the illumination button 2 next to the “+” indication to increase
the value or scroll up.
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, you can also
change the values with the “ –” button 12 or the “+” button 13
on the operating unit.
To exit the function and store a changed setting, press the
“RESET” button 6 for 3 s.
The following basic settings are available:
– “unit km/mi”: The speed and distance can be displayed either in kilometres or miles.
– “time format”: The time can be displayed either in the
12 hour or 24 hour format.
– “clock”: The current time can be set here. Pressing and
holding the setting buttons fast-forwards the setting
speed.
– “English”: The language for text indication can be
changed. The available languages are German, English,
French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch.
– “odometer”: Indicates the total distance travelled with the
eBike (not changeable).
– “power-on hours”: Indicates the total travel duration with
the eBike (not changeable).
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–5
Error Code Indication
The components of the eBike system are continuously and automatically monitored. When an error is detected, the respective error code is indicated in text indication c.
To return to the standard indication, press any button on the
drive HMI 3 or on the operating unit 10.
Depending on the type of error, the drive is automatically shut
off if required. Continued travel without assistance from the
Code
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Cause
Internal error of the drive unit
Connection problem of the drive unit
Error of the speed sensor
Connection problem of the lighting
system
Connection problem of the drive HMI
Temperature of the drive unit too high
(above 40 °C)
Internal electronic error of battery
pack
Temperature of the battery pack too
high (above 40 °C)
Temperature of the battery pack too
low (below –10 °C)
Connection problem of battery pack
Incorrect polarity of battery pack
drive is possible at any time. However, have the eBike
checked before attempting new trips.
 Have all inspections and repairs carried out only by an
authorised bicycle dealer. When an error is still displayed
despite corrective measures, please also refer to an
authorised bicycle dealer.
Corrective Measure
Have the drive unit checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Have the speed sensor checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Allow the drive unit to cool down. Continued travel without assistance
from the eBike drive is possible and speeds up the cooling of the drive
unit.
Have battery pack checked
Allow the battery pack to cool down. Continued travel without eBike drive
is possible and speeds up the cooling of the battery pack.
Allow the battery pack to warm up slowly in a warm location.
Have connections and contacts checked
Charge the battery pack with the original Bosch charger as described in
the operating instructions.
One or more buttons of the drive HMI Check if any buttons are blocked, e.g. from dirt or debris. Clean the
are blocked.
buttons, if required.
Connection problem of the operating Have connections and contacts checked
unit
One or more buttons of the operating Check if any buttons are blocked, e.g. from dirt or debris. Clean the
unit are blocked.
buttons, if required.
Connection problem of the drive unit Have connections and contacts checked
Connection problem of battery pack Have connections and contacts checked
Communication error among the com- Have connections and contacts checked
ponents
Internal battery pack of drive HMI
Charge drive HMI (in holder or via USB port)
empty
Internal error of the drive HMI
Have the drive HMI checked
* only for eBike lighting via battery pack (country-specific)
Power Supply of External Devices via USB
Connection
With the USB connection, it is possible to operate and charge
most devices whose power supply is possible via USB (e.g.,
various mobile phones).
Prerequisite for the charging is that the drive HMI and a sufficiently charged battery pack are inserted in the eBike.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Open the protective cap 8 of the USB port on the drive HMI.
Using a matching USB cable, connect the USB port of the external device to the USB port 7 of the drive HMI.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–6
Notes on Riding with the eBike System
When does the eBike Drive Operate?
The eBike drive supports you when riding, as long as you step
into the pedals. Without pedaling, there is no assistance. The
motor output always depends on the amount of your pedaling
power.
When applying less pedaling power, the assistance or support
will be lower than when applying a lot of pedaling power. This
applies independent of the assistance Level.
The eBike drive automatically switches off at speeds in excess
of 45 km/h. When the speed falls below 45 km/h, the drive is
automatically available again.
An exception applies for the start-assistance function, in
which the eBike can be driven at low speed without pedaling.
The eBike can also be ridden as a normal bicycle without assistance at any time, by either switching off the eBike system
or setting the assistance level to “OFF”. The same applies
when the battery pack is empty.
For these reasons, it is not possible to predict an accurate operating range before starting your ride. General rules:
– For the same motor output of the eBike drive: The less
power or force that you have to bring about to reach a certain speed (e.g. through optimal use of the gears), the less
energy the eBike drive will consume, and the greater the
range for a battery-pack charge.
– The higher the assistance level under otherwise same conditions, the lower the range.
Careful Handling of the eBike
Please observe the operating and storage temperatures of the
eBike components. Protect the drive unit, drive HMI and battery pack against extreme temperatures (e.g. from intense
sunlight without adequate ventilation). The components (especially the battery pack) can become damaged through extreme temperatures.
Maintenance and Service
Interaction of the eBike System with the Bicycle Gears
The bicycle gears should be used as with a normal bicycle,
even with eBike drive (please observe the operating instructions of your eBike).
Independent of the type of gearing, it is recommended to
briefly interrupt the pedaling while changing gears. This
makes changing gears easier and reduces the wear of the
drive train.
By selecting the right gear, you can increase the speed and
range with the same pedaling effort.
Maintenance and Cleaning
Gathering First Experience
It is recommended to gather first experience with the eBike
away from roads with heavy traffic.
Try out the different assistance levels. As soon as you feel
safe, you can participate in traffic with the eBike as with any
other bicycle.
Test the operating range of your eBike under different conditions before planning longer and more challenging rides.
In case of questions concerning the eBike system and its components, please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer.
For contact data of authorised bicycle dealers, please refer to
www.bosch-ebike.com
Influences on the Operating Range
The operating range depends on many factors, such as:
– Assistance level,
– Gear-switching behaviour,
– Bicycle tyres and tyre pressure,
– Age and condition of the battery pack,
– Route profile (inclines) and road or path conditions (road
or path surface),
– Head wind and ambient temperature,
– Weight of the eBike, rider and equipment/luggage
Bosch eBike Systems
Keep all components of your eBike clean, especially the battery-pack contacts and corresponding holder contacts. Clean
them carefully with a soft, damp cloth.
All components including the drive unit may not be immersed
in water or cleaned with a high-pressure cleaner.
For service or repairs on the eBike, please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer.
After-sales Service and Customer Assistance
Transport
The battery packs are subject to the Dangerous Goods Legislation requirements. Private users can transport battery
packs by road without further requirements.
When being transported by commercial users or third parties
(e.g. via air transport or forwarding agency), special requirements on packaging and labelling must be observed (e.g. ADR
Regulations). For preparation of the item being shipped, an
expert for hazardous material can be consulted as required.
Dispatch battery packs only when the housing is undamaged.
Tape or mask off open contacts and pack up the battery pack
in such a manner that it cannot move around in the packaging.
Please also observe possibly more detailed national regulations.
In case of questions concerning transport of the battery
packs, please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer. Bicycle
dealers can also provide suitable transport packaging.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–7
Disposal
The drive unit, drive HMI (incl. operating unit), battery pack, speed sensor, accessories and packaging
should be sorted for environmental-friendly recycling.
Do not dispose of eBikes and their components into household waste!
Only for EC countries:
According to the European Guideline
2002/96/EC, electrical devices/tools that
are no longer usable, and according to the
European Guideline 2006/66/EC, defective or used battery packs/batteries, must
be collected separately and disposed of in
an environmentally correct manner.
The integrated battery pack in the drive HMI may only be removed for disposal. Opening the housing shell can damage or
destroy the drive HMI.
Please return battery packs that are no longer usable to an authorised bicycle dealer.
Li-ion:
Please observe the instructions in section “Transport”, page English–6.
Subject to change without notice.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–8
Lithium ion battery pack PowerPack
Safety Notes
Read all safety warnings and
all instructions. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions may result in electric
shock, fire and/or serious injury.
Save all safety warnings and instructions for future reference.
The term “battery pack” used in these operating instructions
refers both to standard battery packs (battery packs with
holder on the bike frame) and to rack-type battery packs (battery packs with holder in the rear rack/carrier), except when
explicitly referring to the design type.
 Remove the battery pack from the eBike before working on the eBike (e.g., assembling, maintenance, etc.),
transporting it via car or plane, or storing it. Danger of
injury when accidentally actuating the On/Off switch.
 Do not open the battery pack. Danger of short-circuiting.
Opening the battery pack voids any and all warranty
claims.
Protect the battery pack against heat (e. g., also against continuous intense sunlight), fire
and immersing into water. Danger of explosion.
 Keep the battery pack not being used away from paper
clips, coins, keys, nails, screws or other small metal objects, that can make a connection from one terminal to
another. Shorting the battery-pack terminals together
may cause burns or a fire. For short-circuiting damage
caused in this manner, any and all warranty claims through
Bosch shall be invalid.
 Under abusive conditions, liquid may be ejected from
the battery pack. Avoid contact. If contact accidentally
occurs, flush with water. If liquid contacts eyes, additionally seek medical help. Liquid ejected from the battery pack may cause skin irritations or burns.
 Vapours can escape in case of damage and improper
use of the battery pack. Provide for fresh air and seek
medical attention in case of complaints. The vapours
can irritate the respiratory system.
 Charge the battery pack only with original Bosch battery chargers. When using non-original Bosch chargers,
the danger of fire cannot be excluded.
 Use the battery pack only together with eBikes that
have an original Bosch eBike drive system. This is the
only way to protect the battery pack against dangerous
overload.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Use only original Bosch battery packs approved for
your eBike by the manufacturer. Using other battery
packs can lead to injuries and pose a fire hazard. When using other battery packs, Bosch shall not assume any liability and warranty.
 Please read and observe the safety warnings and instructions enclosed in the operating instructions of the
charger and drive unit/drive HMI (Human Machine Interface), as well as in the operating instructions of your
eBike.
Product Description and
Specifications
Product Features
(see page 4–5)
The numbering of the product features refers to the illustrations on the graphics pages.
All representations of bike components, with exception of the
battery packs and their holders, are schematic and can deviate from your eBike.
19 Holder of the rack-type battery pack
20 Rack-type battery pack
21 Operation and charge-control indicator
22 On/Off button
23 Key of the battery pack lock
24 Battery-pack lock
25 Upper holder of the standard battery pack
26 Standard battery pack
27 Bottom holder of the standard battery pack
28 Carrying strap
29 Battery charger
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–9
Technical Data
Lithium ion battery pack
Article number
– Standard battery pack, black
– Standard battery pack, white
– Rack-type battery pack
Rated voltage
Rated capacity
Energy
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Allowable charging temperature range
Weight, approx.
Degree of protection
Assembly
 Place down the battery pack only on clean surfaces. In
particular, avoid soiling the charge socket and the contacts, e. g. by means of sand or ground.
Checking the Battery Pack Before Using for the
First Time
Check the battery pack before charging it or using it with your
eBike for the first time.
For this, press the On/Off button 22 to switch on the battery
pack. When no LED of the charge-control indicator 21 lights
up, the battery pack may be damaged.
When at least one, but not all LEDs of the charge-control indicator 21 is lit, then fully charge the battery pack before using
for the first time.
 Do not charge a damaged battery pack and do not use
it. Please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer.
Charging the Battery Pack
 Use only the charger provided with your eBike or an
identical original Bosch charger. Only this charger is
matched to the lithium-ion battery pack used in your eBike.
Note: The battery pack is supplied partially charged. To ensure full battery pack capacity, completely charge the battery
pack in the charger before using for the first time.
The battery pack must be removed from the eBike for charging.
For charging the battery pack, read and observe the operating
instructions of the charger.
The battery pack can be charged any time without reducing
the service life. Interrupting the charging procedure does not
cause damage to the battery pack.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8.2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2.5
2.5
IP 54 (dust and splash water IP 54 (dust and splash water
protected)
protected)
The battery pack is equipped with a temperature control indicator, which enables charging only within a temperature
range between 0 °C and 40 °C.
When the battery pack is not
within the charging-temperature range, three LEDs of the
charge-control indicator 21
flash. Disconnect the battery pack from the charger until its
temperature has adjusted.
Do not connect the battery pack to the charger until it has
reach the allowable charging temperature.
Charge-control Indicator
When the battery pack is switched on, the five green LEDs of
the charge-control indicator 21 indicate the charge condition
of the battery pack.
In this, each LED indicates approx. 20 % capacity. When the
battery pack is completely charged, all five LEDs light up.
Additionally, the charge condition of the switched on battery
pack is indicated on the drive HMI. Read and observe the operating instructions of the drive unit and the drive HMI.
When the capacity of the battery pack is below 5 %, all LEDs
of charge-control indicator 21 on the battery pack go out;
however, the drive HMI does provide an additional indication
function.
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack
(see figures C–D)
 Always switch the battery pack off when inserting or
removing it from the holder.
In order for the battery pack to be inserted, the key 23 must
be inserted into the lock 24 and the lock must be unlocked.
To insert the standard battery pack 26, place it via the contacts onto the bottom holder 27 on the eBike. Pivot the battery pack to the stop into the upper holder 25.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–10
To insert the rack-type battery pack 20, slide it with the
contacts facing ahead until it engages in the holder 19 of the
rear rack/carrier.
Check if the battery pack is tightly seated. Always lock the
battery pack with lock 24, as otherwise the lock can open and
the battery pack could fall out of the holder.
After locking, always remove the key 23 from the lock 24.
This prevents the key from falling out and the battery pack
from being removed from unauthorised persons when the
eBike is parked.
To remove the standard battery pack 26, switch it off and
unlock the lock with the key 23. Pivot the battery pack out of
the upper holder 25 and pull it by the carrying strap 28 out of
the bottom holder 27.
To remove the rack-type battery pack 20, switch it off and
unlock the lock with the key 23. Pull the battery pack out of
the holder 19.
Operation
Initial Operation
 Use only original Bosch battery packs approved for
your eBike by the manufacturer. Using other battery
packs can lead to injuries and pose a fire hazard. When using other battery packs, Bosch shall not assume any liability and warranty.
Switching On and Off
Switching the battery pack on is one of the possibilities to
start the eBike system. Read and observe the operating instructions of the drive unit and the drive HMI.
Before switching on the battery pack or the eBike system,
check that the lock 24 is locked.
Note: When switching on the eBike system, the pedals of the
eBike may not be subject to load, as otherwise the output capacity of the drive will be limited.
To switch on the battery pack, press the On/Off button 22.
The LEDs of indicator 21 light up and at the same time indicate the charge condition.
Note: When the battery-pack capacity is below 5 %, none of
the LEDs of charge-control indicator 21 will light up. Only the
drive HMI will indicate if the eBike system is switched on.
To switch off the battery pack, press the On/Off button 22
again. The LEDs of indicator 21 go out. This also switches off
the eBike system.
When no power output of the eBike drive is requested for approx. 10 minutes (e. g., because the eBike is parked) and no
button of the drive HMI or operating unit is pressed, the eBike
system and thus the battery pack automatically switch off to
save energy.
Bosch eBike Systems
The battery pack is protected against deep discharging, overcharging, overheating and short-circuiting through the “Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)”. In case of hazardous situations,
a protective circuit automatically switches off the battery
pack.
When a defect of the battery
pack is detected, two LEDs of
the charge-control indicator 21
flash. In this case, please refer
to an authorised bicycle dealer.
Notes for Optimum Handling of the Battery Pack
The battery-pack life can be prolonged when being properly
maintained and especially when being operated and stored at
the right temperatures.
With increasing age, however, the battery-pack capacity will
diminish, even when properly maintained.
A significantly reduced operating period after charging indicates that the battery pack is worn out and must be replaced.
You can replace the battery pack yourself.
In case the carrying strap 28 of the standard battery pack
should be defective, please have it replaced by a bicycle dealer.
Recharging the Battery Pack prior to and during Storage
When not using the battery pack for a longer period, charge it
to approx. 60 % (3 to 4 LEDs lit on the charge-control indicator 21).
Check the charge condition after 6 months. When only one
LED of the charge-control indicator 21 lights up, recharge the
battery pack again approx. 60 %.
Note: When the battery pack is stored discharged (empty) for
longer periods, it can become damaged despite the low selfdischarging and the battery-pack capacity may be strongly reduced.
It is not recommended to have the battery pack connected
permanently to the charger.
Storage Conditions
Store the battery pack in a dry, well-ventilated location. Protect the battery pack against moisture and water. Under unfavourable weather conditions, it is recommended e. g. to remove the battery pack from the eBike and store it in an
enclosed location until being used again.
The battery pack can be stored at temperatures between
–10 °C and +60 °C. For a long battery-pack life, however,
storing the battery pack at a room temperature of approx.
20 °C is of advantage.
Take care that the maximal storage temperature is not exceeded. As an example, do not leave the battery pack in a vehicle in summer and store it out of direct sunlight.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–11
Maintenance and Service
Maintenance and Cleaning
Keep the battery pack clean. Clean the battery pack carefully
with a soft, damp cloth. The battery pack may not be immersed in water or cleaned with a water jet.
When the battery pack is no longer operative, please refer to
an authorised bicycle dealer.
After-sales Service and Customer Assistance
In case of questions concerning the battery packs, please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer.
 Note down the manufacturer and the number of the key
23. In case of loss of the keys, please refer to an authorised
bicycle dealer. Please provide the name of the manufacturer and the number of the key.
For contact data of authorised bicycle dealers, please refer to
www.bosch-ebike.com
Disposal
Battery packs, accessories and packaging should be
sorted for environmental-friendly recycling.
Do not dispose of the battery packs into household waste!
Only for EC countries:
According to the European Guideline
2002/96/EC, electrical devices/tools that
are no longer usable, and according to the
European Guideline 2006/66/EC, defective or used battery packs/batteries, must
be collected separately and disposed of in
an environmentally correct manner.
Please return battery packs that are no longer usable to an authorised bicycle dealer.
Li-ion:
Please observe the instructions in section “Transport”, page English–11.
Transport
The battery packs are subject to the Dangerous Goods Legislation requirements. Private users can transport battery
packs by road without further requirements.
When being transported by commercial users or third parties
(e.g. via air transport or forwarding agency), special requirements on packaging and labelling must be observed (e.g. ADR
Regulations). For preparation of the item being shipped, an
expert for hazardous material can be consulted as required.
Dispatch battery packs only when the housing is undamaged.
Tape or mask off open contacts and pack up the battery pack
in such a manner that it cannot move around in the packaging.
Please also observe possibly more detailed national regulations.
In case of questions concerning transport of the battery
packs, please refer to an authorised bicycle dealer. Bicycle
dealers can also provide suitable transport packaging.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Subject to change without notice.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–12
Charger
Safety Notes
Read all safety warnings and
all instructions. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions may result in electric
shock, fire and/or serious injury.
Save all safety warnings and instructions for future reference.
The term “battery pack” used in these operating instructions
refers both to standard battery packs (battery packs with
holder on the bike frame) and to rack-type battery packs (battery packs with holder in the rear rack/carrier).
Keep the charger away from rain or moisture. The
penetration of water into a battery charger increases
the risk of an electric shock.
 Only charge eBike-approved Bosch lithium-ion battery
packs. The battery-pack voltage must match the battery-pack charging voltage of the charger. Otherwise
there is danger of fire and explosion.
 Keep the battery charger clean. Contamination can lead
to danger of an electric shock.
 Before each use, check the battery charger, cable and
plug. If damage is detected, do not use the battery
charger. Never open the battery charger yourself.
Have repairs performed only by a qualified technician
and only using original spare parts. Damaged battery
chargers, cables and plugs increase the risk of an electric
shock.
 Do not operate the battery charger on easily inflammable surfaces (e. g., paper, textiles, etc.) or surroundings. The heating of the battery charger during the charging process can pose a fire hazard.
 Vapours can escape in case of damage and improper
use of the battery pack. Provide for fresh air and seek
medical attention in case of complaints. The vapours
can irritate the respiratory system.
 Supervise children. This will ensure that children do not
play with the charger.
 Children or persons that owing to their physical, sensory or mental limitations or to their lack of experience or
knowledge, are not capable of securely operating the
charger, may only use this charger under supervision
or after having been instructed by a responsible person. Otherwise, there is danger of operating errors and injuries.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Please read and observe the safety warnings and instructions enclosed in the operating instructions of the
battery pack and drive unit/drive HMI, as well as in the
operating instructions of your eBike.
 A short version of important safety warnings in English,
French and Spanish with the following content can be
found on the bottom side of the charger (marked with number 33 in the representation on the graphics page):
– For safe operation see manual. Risk of electric shock.
– Dry location use only.
– Charge only batteries of the Bosch eBike Systems. Other batteries may burst causing personal damage.
– Do not replace the plug assembly as risk of fire or electric shock may result.
Product Description and
Specifications
Product Features
(see page 6–7)
The numbering of the product features refers to the illustration of the battery charger on the graphics page.
20 Rack-type battery pack
21 Battery charge-control indicator
26 Standard battery pack
29 Battery charger
30 Charger socket
31 Plug-in connector
32 Ventilation openings
33 Safety warnings, charger
34 Charge connector
35 Socket for charge connector
Technical Data
Battery Charger
Article number
Rated voltage
Frequency
Output voltage
Charging current
Allowable charging temperature
range
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
The values given are valid for a nominal voltage [U] of 230 V. For different voltages and models for specific countries, these values can vary.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–13
Battery Charger
Charging time
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Number of battery cells
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Weight according to
EPTA-Procedure 01/2003
Degree of protection
Charger
h
h
°C
°C
kg
2.5
3.5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0.8
IP 40
The values given are valid for a nominal voltage [U] of 230 V. For different voltages and models for specific countries, these values can vary.
The battery pack is completely charged when all five LEDs of
indicator 21 light up continuously. The charge procedure is
automatically ended.
Disconnect the charger from the mains supply and the battery
pack from the charger.
When disconnecting the battery pack from the charger, the
battery pack is automatically switched off.
The battery pack can now be inserted into the eBike.
Troubleshooting – Causes and Corrective
Measures
Cause
Corrective Measure
Two LEDs of the battery
pack flashing
Battery pack defective
Refer to an authorised bicycle
dealer
Three LEDs of the battery
pack flashing
Operation
 Place down the battery pack only on clean surfaces. In
particular, avoid soiling the charge socket and the contacts, e. g. by means of sand or ground.
Initial Operation
Connecting the Charger (see figures E–F)
 Observe the mains voltage! The voltage of the power
supply must correspond with the data given on the nameplate of the battery charger. Battery chargers marked with
230 V can also be operated with 220 V.
Plug the charger plug 31 of the power cord into the charger
socket 30 of the charger.
Connect the mains cable (country-specific) to the mains supply.
Switch the battery pack off and remove it from the holder of
the eBike. For this, read and observe the operating instructions of the battery pack.
Insert the charger plug 34 of the battery charger into the socket 35 on the battery pack.
Charging Procedure
The charging procedure begins as soon as the charger is connected with the battery pack and the mains supply.
Note: The charging procedure is only possible when the temperature of the battery pack is within the allowable chargingtemperature range.
During the charging procedure, the LEDs of charge-control indicator 21 on the battery pack light up. Each continuously lit
LED is equivalent to a charge capacity of approx. 20 %. The
flashing LED indicates the charging of the next 20 %.
 Use caution when touching the charger during the
charging procedure. Wear protective gloves. Especially
in high ambient temperatures, the charger can heat up
considerably.
Note: Pay attention that the charger is well ventilated during
the charging procedure and that the ventilation openings 32
on both sides are not clogged or contaminated.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Battery pack too warm or too Disconnect the battery pack
cold
from the charger and allow to
adjust to the ambient temperature until the charging-temperature range is reached.
Do not connect the battery
pack to the charger until it has
reach the allowable charging
temperature.
No charging procedure possible (no indication on battery
pack)
Plug not inserted correctly
Check all plug connections
Contacts of battery pack
Carefully clean the contacts
soiled
of the battery pack
Ventilation openings 32 of
Clean ventilation openings
the charger clogged or con- 32 and set up charger well
ventilated
taminated
Socket outlet, cable or charg- Check mains voltage, have
er defective
charger checked through
bicycle dealer
Battery pack defective
Refer to an authorised bicycle
dealer
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
English–14
Maintenance and Service
Maintenance and Cleaning
If the charger should fail, please refer to an authorised bicycle
dealer.
After-sales Service and Customer Assistance
In case of questions concerning the charger, please refer to an
authorised bicycle dealer.
For contact data of authorised bicycle dealers, please refer to
www.bosch-ebike.com
Disposal
Battery chargers, accessories and packaging should be sorted for environmental-friendly recycling.
Do not dispose of battery chargers into household waste!
Only for EC countries:
According to the European Guideline
2002/96/EC for Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and its implementation
into national right, battery chargers that are
no longer usable must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmental
correct manner.
Subject to change without notice.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–1
Unité d’entraînement Drive Unit Speed/
Ordinateur de commande Intuvia
Avertissements de sécurité
Lire tous les avertissements de sécurité et
toutes les instructions. Ne pas suivre les
avertissements et instructions peut donner
lieu à un choc électrique, un incendie et/ou une
blessure sérieuse.
Conserver tous les avertissements et toutes les instructions pour pouvoir s’y reporter ultérieurement.
Le terme « accu » utilisé dans cette notice d’utilisation se réfère aussi bien aux accus standards (accus avec fixation sur le
cadre du vélo) qu’aux accus du porte-bagages (accus avec
fixation dans le porte-bagages).
 N’ouvrez pas l’unité d’entraînement vous-même. L’unité d’entraînement ne nécessite pas d’entretien ne doit
être réparée que par une personne qualifiée et seulement avec des pièces de rechange d’origine. Ceci permet d’assurer la sécurité de l’unité d’entraînement. Une ouverture non autorisée de l’unité d’entraînement annule
tous droits de garantie.
 Tous les éléments montés sur l’unité d’entraînement et
tous les autres éléments de l’entraînement du vélo
électrique (par ex. plateau, fixation du plateau, pédales) ne doivent être remplacés que par des éléments
d’un type similaire ou spécialement autorisés par le fabricant de vélo pour votre vélo électrique. Ceci permet
de protéger l’unité d’entraînement d’une surcharge et de
dommages.
 Retirez l’accu du vélo électrique avant d’effectuer des
travaux (par ex. montage, entretien etc.) sur le vélo
électrique, avant de le transporter en voiture ou en avion ou de le stocker. Risques de blessures en cas d’activation accidentelle de l’interrupteur Marche/Arrêt.
 La fonction d’aide au démarrage ne doit être utilisée
que quand vous démarrez le vélo électrique. Les roues
du vélo électrique doivent être en contact avec le sol
lorsque l’aide au démarrage est utilisée, sinon il y a danger
de blessures.
 N’utilisez que les accus d’origine Bosch autorisés par le
fabricant pour votre vélo électrique. L’utilisation de tout
autre accumulateur peut entraîner des blessures et des
risques d’incendie. Bosch décline toute responsabilité et
garantie dans le cas d’utilisation d’autres accus.
 Respectez tous les règlementations nationales spécifiques à l’autorisation et l’utilisation de vélos électriques.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité et les instructions de la notice d’utilisation de l’accu ainsi que
celles de la notice d’utilisation de votre vélo électrique.
Description et performances du
produit
Utilisation conforme
L’unité d’entraînement est conçue exclusivement pour l’entraînement de votre vélo électrique et ne doit pas être utilisée
à d’autres fins.
Le vélo électrique est conçu pour une utilisation sur des chemins à sol stabilisé. Il n’est pas agréé pour être utilisé dans des
compétitions.
Eléments de l’appareil
(voir page 2–3)
La numérotation des éléments se réfère à la représentation
sur la page graphique.
Toutes les représentations d’éléments de vélo à l’exception
de l’unité d’entraînement, de l’ordinateur de commande y
compris ’unité de commande, du capteur de vitesse et de
leurs fixations sont schématiques et peuvent différer des éléments réellement installés sur votre vélo électrique.
1 Touche pour la fonction d’affichage « i »
2 Touche pour l’éclairage
3 Ordinateur de commande
4 Fixation de l’ordinateur de commande
5 Touche Marche/Arrêt pour l’ordinateur de commande
6 Touche de remise à zéro « RESET »
7 Douille USB
8 Capuchon de protection de la douille USB
9 Unité d’entraînement
10 Unité de commande
11 Touche pour la fonction d’affichage « i » sur l’unité de
commande
12 Touche pour baisser la valeur/feuilleter vers le bas « – »
13 Touche pour augmenter la valeur/feuilleter
vers le haut « + »
14 Touche pour l’aide au démarrage « WALK »
15 Blocage de l’ordinateur de commande
16 Vis de blocage de l’ordinateur de commande
17 Capteur de vitesse
18 Aimant de rayon du capteur de vitesse
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–2
Montage
Eléments d’affichage de l’ordinateur de commande
a Puissance du moteur
b Affichage du niveau d’assistance
c Texte affiché
d Affichage des valeurs
e Indicateur tachymétrique
f Voyant lumineux indiquant l’état de charge de l’accu
Montage et démontage de l’accu
Pour monter l’accu dans le vélo électrique, lisez et respectez
la notice d’utilisation de l’accu.
Insérer et retirer l’ordinateur de commande
(voir figure A)
Caractéristiques techniques
Unité d’entraînement
N° d’article
Puissance
Couple max. de l’entraînement
Tension nominale
Température de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Type de protection
Poids, env.
Ordinateur de commande
N° d’article
Courant de charge max. de
la connexion USB
Tension de charge de la
connexion USB
Température de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Type de protection
Poids, env.
Eclairage*
Tension nominale
Puissance
– Lampe avant
– Lampe arrière
W
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
Nm
V
50
36
°C
°C
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (étanche à la
poussière et aux
projections d’eau)
4
kg
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
5
°C
°C
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (étanche à la
poussière et aux
projections d’eau)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* en fonction des prescriptions légales, pas possible dans toutes les versions nationales via l’accu du vélo électrique
Bosch eBike Systems
Pour monter l’ordinateur de commande 3 poussez-le de devant dans sa fixation 4.
Pour retirer l’ordinateur de commande 3 appuyez sur le dispositif de blocage 15 et poussez-le vers l’avant pour le sortir
de sa fixation 4.
 Retirez l’ordinateur de commande lorsque le vélo électrique est garé pour éviter que des tiers non autorisés
n’utilisent l’entraînement. Le système eBike ne peut pas
être mis en marche sans ordinateur de commande.
Il est également possible de sécuriser l’ordinateur de commande dans sa fixation pour empêcher qu’il n’en soit enlevé.
Pour ce faire, démontez la fixation 4 du guidon. Montez l’ordinateur de commande dans sa fixation. Vissez la vis de blocage
16 par le bas dans le filet prévu de la fixation. Remontez la
fixation sur le guidon.
Contrôle du capteur de vitesse (voir figure B)
Le capteur de vitesse 17 et l’aimant de rayon 18 doivent être
montés de sorte à ce que l’aimant du rayon dépasse le capteur
de vitesse à une distance de 5 mm min. et de 17 mm max.
lorsque la roue tourne.
Note : Si la distance entre le capteur de vitesse 17 et l’aimant
de rayon 18 est trop faible ou trop élevée ou si le capteur de
vitesse 17 n’est pas correctement branché, l’indicateur tachymétrique e ne fonctionne pas, et l’entraînement du vélo
électrique travaille en mode d’urgence.
Dans un tel cas, desserrez la vis de l’aimant de rayon 18 et
fixez l’aimant de rayon sur le rayon de sorte à ce qu’il dépasse
le marquage du capteur de vitesse à la distance correcte. Si
l’indicateur tachymétrique e n’affiche toujours pas de vitesse,
adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé.
Fonctionnement
Mise en service
Conditions préalables
Le système eBike ne peut être activé que si les conditions suivantes sont remplies :
– Un accu suffisamment chargé est inséré (voir notice d’utilisation de l’accu).
– L’ordinateur de commande est correctement monté dans
sa fixation (voir « Insérer et retirer l’ordinateur de
commande », page Français–2).
– Le capteur de vitesse est correctement connecté (voir
« Contrôle du capteur de vitesse », page Français–2).
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–3
Mise marche/Arrêt du système eBike
Pour mettre le système eBike en marche, vous avez les possibilités suivantes :
– Si l’ordinateur de commande est déjà allumé quand il est
monté dans sa fixation, le système eBike sera automatiquement mis en marche.
– Une fois l’ordinateur de commande monté et l’accu en
place, appuyez une fois brièvement sur la touche
Marche/Arrêt 5 de l’ordinateur de commande.
– Une fois l’ordinateur de commande monté, appuyez sur la
touche Marche/Arrêt de l’accu (voir notice d’utilisation de
l’accu).
Note : Les pédales du vélo électrique ne doivent pas être sollicitées lorsque le système eBike est mis en marche, sinon la
puissance du moteur serait réduite. Dans le texte affiché c apparaît le message d’erreur « Relâcher la pédale ».
Si le système eBike est mis en marche par mégarde alors que
les pédales sont sollicitées, éteignez-le et remettez-le en
marche sans sollicitation.
L’entraînement est activé dès que l’on pédale (sauf si vous
êtes en fonction aide au démarrage, voir « Mise en marche/arrêt de l’aide au démarrage », page Français–4). La puissance
du moteur dépend des réglages de l’ordinateur de commande.
Dès que vous arrêtez de pédaler en mode normal ou dès que
vous avez atteint une vitesse de 45 km/h, l’entraînement du
vélo électrique éteint l’assistance. L’entraînement est automatiquement activé à nouveau dès que vous pédalez et que la
vitesse est inférieure à 45 km/h.
Pour arrêter le système eBike, vous avez les possibilités
suivantes :
– Appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt 5 de l’ordinateur de
commande.
– Éteignez l’accu avec sa propre touche Marche/Arrêt (voir la
notice d’utilisation de l’accu)
– Enlevez l’ordinateur de commande de sa fixation.
Si l’entraînement n’est pas sollicité pendant 10 min. (par ex.
parce que le vélo électrique est arrêté) et qu’aucune touche
de l’ordinateur de commande ou de l’unité de commande n’a
été activée, le système eBike s’éteint automatiquement pour
économiser l’énergie.
Affichages et réglages de l’ordinateur de
commande
Alimentation en énergie de l’ordinateur de commande
Si l’ordinateur de commande se trouve dans la fixation 4 et
qu’un accu suffisamment chargé est monté dans le vélo électrique, l’ordinateur de commande est alimenté au moyen de
l’accumulateur du vélo électrique.
Si l’on retire l’ordinateur de commande de la fixation 4, l’alimentation en énergie se fait au moyen d’un accu interne. Si
l’accu interne est trop faible lorsqu’on met en marche l’ordinateur de commande, « Connecter au vélo » est affiché pen0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
dant 3 sec sur l’écran c. Ensuite, l’ordinateur de commande
s’arrête à nouveau.
Pour recharger l’accu interne, montez l’ordinateur de commande à nouveau dans la fixation 4 (si un accu est monté dans
le vélo électrique). Eteignez l’accu du vélo électrique avec sa
propre touche Marche/Arrêt (voir la notice d’utilisation de
l’accu).
Vous pouvez également recharger l’ordinateur de commande
via la connexion USB. Pour ce faire, ouvrez le capuchon de
protection 8. Connectez la douille USB 7 de l’ordinateur de
commande au moyen d’un câble USB approprié avec un chargeur USB disponible dans le commerce ou la douille USB d’un
ordinateur (5 V tension de charge ; max. 500 mA courant de
charge). Dans le texte affiché c de l’ordinateur de commande
« USB connectée » est affiché.
Allumer/éteindre l’ordinateur de commande
Pour mettre l’ordinateur de commande en marche, appuyez
une fois brièvement sur l’interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 5. L’ordinateur de commande peut (si son accu interne est suffisamment rechargé) être également mis en marche alors qu’il n’est
pas encore monté dans sa fixation.
Pour arrêter l’ordinateur de commande, appuyez sur la
touche Marche/Arrêt 5.
Si l’ordinateur de commande n’est pas monté dans sa fixation,
il s’éteint automatiquement au bout de 1 min sans activation
de touche pour économiser l’énergie.
Voyant lumineux indiquant l’état de charge de l’accu
L’affichage de l’état de charge de l’accu f Indique l’état de
charge de l’accu du vélo électrique, pas de l’accu interne de
l’ordinateur de commande. L’état de charge de l’accu du vélo
électrique peut également être contrôlé au moyen des LED
sur l’accu même.
Sur l’affichage f chaque barre du symbole d’accu représente
environ 20 % de capacité :
100 % à 80 % de capacité
20 % à 5 % de capacité, il faut recharger l’accu.
Moins de 5 % de capacité, l’assistance de l’entraînement n’est plus possible. Les LED de l’affichage
de l’état de charge de l’accu s’éteignent.
Si l’éclairage du vélo électrique se fait au moyen de l’accu (suivant les versions dans les différents pays), la capacité sera
suffisante pour 2 heures d’éclairage environ après la première apparition du symbole d’accu vide. Quand le symbole
commence à clignoter, l’éclairage n’est plus possible que pendant une courte durée.
Si l’ordinateur de commande est retiré de sa fixation 4 l’état
de charge de l’accu affiché en dernier reste mémorisé.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–4
Réglage du niveau d’assistance
Vous pouvez régler sur l’ordinateur de commande la puissance de l’entraînement du vélo électrique selon vos besoins.
Le niveau d’assistance peut être modifié à tout moment même
pendant que vous roulez.
Note : Dans certaines versions, il est possible que le niveau
d’assistance soit préréglé et ne puisse pas être modifié. Il est
également possible que moins de niveaux d’assistance soient
disponibles qu’indiqués ici.
Les niveaux d’assistance suivants sont disponibles :
– « OFF » : L’entraînement est hors-service, le vélo électrique peut être utilisé comme un vélo normal en pédalant.
– « ECO » : assistance effective avec efficacité maximale,
pour portée maximale
– « TOUR » : assistance régulière, pour des tours de grande
portée
– « SPORT » : assistance puissante, pour parcours sportifs
sur des chemins montagneux ainsi que pour la circulation
urbaine
– « TURBO » : assistance maximale jusqu’à des fréquences
de pédalage élevées, pour parcours sportifs
Pour passer à un niveau d’assistance plus élevé, appuyez plusieurs fois sur la touche « + » 13 de l’unité de commande jusqu’à ce que le niveau d’assistance apparaisse sur l’écran b,
pour passer à un niveau d’assistance plus bas, sur la touche
« – » 12.
La puissance du moteur lue apparaît sur l’écran a. La puissance maximale du moteur dépend du niveau d’assistance sélectionné.
Niveau d’assistance
« ECO »
« TOUR »
« SPORT »
« TURBO »
Puissance du moteur*
(dérailleur)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* La puissance du moteur peut différer pour certaines versions.
Si l’on retire l’ordinateur de commande de la fixation 4, le niveau d’assistance reste mémorisé, l’affichage a de la puissance de moteur reste vide.
Mise en marche/arrêt de l’aide au démarrage
L’aide au démarrage peut servir d’assistance supplémentaire
sur les premiers mètres si le démarrage est difficile (tel que
par ex. aux feux de circulation ou en montagne).
 La fonction d’aide au démarrage ne doit être utilisée
que quand vous démarrez le vélo électrique. Les roues
du vélo électrique doivent être en contact avec le sol
lorsque l’aide au démarrage est utilisée, sinon il y a danger
de blessures.
Pour mettre en marche l’aide du démarrage, appuyez sur la
touche « WALK » 14 de l’unité de commande et maintenez-la
appuyée. L’entraînement du vélo électrique sera mis en
marche.
Bosch eBike Systems
L’aide au démarrage sera arrêtée dès que surviendra l’un des
événements suivants :
– vous relâchez la touche « WALK » 14,
– vous appuyez sur une autre touche de l’ordinateur de commande,
– vous pédalez en avant ou rapidement en arrière,
– les roues du vélo électrique sont bloquées (par ex. par les
freins ou si vous heurtez un obstacle),
– la vitesse dépasse 18 km/h.
Allumer/éteindre l’éclairage
En fonction des règlementations nationales, deux versions
d’éclairage sont possibles :
– L’ordinateur de commande permet de mettre en marche
ou d’éteindre simultanément la lampe avant, la lampe arrière et l’éclairage d’arrière plan de l’écran.
Dans cette version, « Feux allumés » est affiché sur l’écran
c pendant 1 sec. environ lorsqu’on allume la lampe et
« Feux éteints » lorsqu’on éteint la lampe.
– Seul l’éclairage d’arrière plan de l’écran peut être allumé ou
éteint, la lampe avant et la lampe arrière du vélo électrique
sont indépendantes de l’ordinateur de commande.
Dans les deux modèles, pour allumer ou éteindre l’éclairage, appuyez sur la touche 2.
Affichages de vitesse et de distance
L’indicateur tachymétrique e affiche toujours la vitesse actuelle.
Dans l’affichage du fonctionnement (combinaison entre affichage du texte c et des valeurs d), les fonctions suivantes
sont à disposition :
– « Autonomie » : autonomie prévisible vu la charge actuelle
de l’accu (dans des conditions telles que niveau d’assistance, profil du parcours etc. restant constantes)
– « Distance parcourue » : distance parcourue depuis la
dernière remise à zéro
– « temps de trajet » : temps de trajet depuis la dernière remise à zéro
– « Vitesse Moyenne » : la vitesse moyenne atteinte depuis
la dernière remise à zéro
– « Vitesse Maximale » : la vitesse maximale atteinte depuis
la dernière remise à zéro
– « Heure » : heure actuelle
Pour passer de l’affichage d’une valeur à une autre, appuyez plusieurs fois sur la touche « i » 1 de l’ordinateur de
commande ou sur la touche « i » 11 de l’unité de commande
jusqu’à ce que la fonction souhaitée soit affichée.
Pour remettre à zéro la « Distance parcourue », le « temps
de trajet » ou la « Vitesse moyenne », faites afficher l’une de
ces trois fonctions et appuyez ensuite sur la touche « RESET »
6 jusqu’à ce que l’affichage soit revenu à zéro. Les valeurs des
deux autres fonctions seront ainsi également remises à zéro.
Pour remettre à zéro la « Vitesse maximale », passez à l’affichage de cette fonction et appuyez sur la touche « RESET » 6
jusqu’à ce que l’affichage soit revenu à zéro.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–5
Si l’ordinateur de commande est retiré de sa fixation 4 toutes
les valeurs des différentes fonctions restent sauvegardées et
peuvent être réaffichées ultérieurement.
Afficher/personnaliser la configuration de base
L’affichage ou la personnalisation de la configuration de base
peuvent être effectués indépendamment de si l’ordinateur de
commande est monté dans sa fixation 4 ou non.
Pour passer au menu Configuration de base, appuyez simultanément plusieurs fois sur la touche « RESET » 6 et la touche
« i » 1 jusqu’à ce que « Configuration » apparaisse sur le texte
affiché c.
Pour passer de l’affichage d’une configuration de base à
une autre, appuyez sur la touche « i » 1 de l’ordinateur de
commande jusqu’à ce que la configuration de base souhaitée
soit affichée. Si l’ordinateur de commande est monté dans la
fixation 4, vous pouvez également appuyer sur la touche « i »
11 de l’unité de commande.
Pour modifier la configuration de base, appuyez pour une
réduction ou feuilleter vers le bas sur la touche Marche/Arrêt
5 à côté de l’affichage « – » ou pour une augmentation ou
feuilleter vers le haut la touche Eclairage 2 à côté de l’affichage « + ».
Affichage code d’erreur
Le éléments du système eBike sont contrôlés automatiquement en permanence. Si un défaut est détecté, le code défaut
correspondant est affiché dans l’affichage de texte c.
Appuyez sur une touche quelconque de l’ordinateur de commande 3 ou de l’unité de commande 10 pour revenir à l’affichage standard.
En fonction du type d’erreur, l’entraînement est éventuellement automatiquement arrêté. Il est cependant à tout temps
Code
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
Cause
Erreur interne de l’unité d’entraînement
Problème de connexion de l’unité d’entraînement
Erreur du capteur de vitesse
Problème de connexion de l’éclairage
Problème de connexion de l’ordinateur de commande
Température de l’unité d’entraînement
trop élevée (supérieure à 40 °C)
Si l’ordinateur de commande est dans sa fixation 4, vous pouvez également effectuer les modifications avec les touches
« – » 12 ou « + » 13 de l’unité de commande.
Pour quitter la fonction et sauvegarder la configuration effectuée, appuyez sur la touche « RESET » 6 pendant 3 sec.
Les configurations de base suivantes sont à disposition :
– « unité km/mi » : vous pouvez afficher la vitesse et la distance parcourue en kilomètres ou en miles.
– « format de l’heure » : vous pouvez afficher l’heure au format 12 heures ou 24 heures.
– « heure » : vous pouvez régler l’heure actuelle. Maintenir
appuyée la touche de réglage accélère la course de l’horloge.
– « Français » : vous pouvez modifier la langue du texte affiché. À disposition sont l’allemand, l’anglais, le français,
l’espagnol, l’italien et le néerlandais.
– « distance cumulée » : affichage de la distance totale parcourue par le vélo électrique (non modifiable)
– « Temps de fonctionn. » : affichage de la durée totale de
fonctionnement du vélo électrique (non modifiable)
possible de continuer à rouler sans être assisté par l’entraînement. Il est recommandé de faire contrôler le vélo électrique
avant d’autres parcours.
 Ne faites effectuer tous les travaux de contrôle et de
réparation que par un vélociste autorisé. Si une erreur
est toujours affichée malgré vos soins pour remédier au
problème, adressez-vous alors à un vélociste autorisé.
Remède
Faire contrôler l’unité d’entraînement
Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
Faire contrôler le capteur de vitesse
Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
Laissez refroidir l’unité d’entraînement. La continuation de la course sans
entraînement du vélo électrique est possible et accélère le refroidissement de l’unité d’entraînement.
Défaut électronique interne de l’accu Faire contrôler l’accu
Température de l’accu trop élevée
Laisser refroidir l’accu La continuation de la course sans entraînement du
(plus de 40 °C)
vélo électrique est possible et accélère le refroidissement de l’accu.
Température de l’accu trop basse
Laissez l’accu se réchauffer lentement dans un endroit chaud.
(moins de –10 °C)
* seulement pour éclairage par accu du vélo électrique (suivant les versions dans les différents pays)
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–6
Code
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Cause
Problème de connexion de l’accu
Mauvaise polarité de l’accu
Remède
Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
Rechargez l’accu au moyen du chargeur d’origine Bosch suivant les informations données dans la notice d’utilisation de ce dernier.
Une ou plusieurs touches de l’ordina- Contrôlez si les touches sont coincées, par ex. par des encrassements
teur de commande sont bloquées.
profonds. Le cas échéant, nettoyez les touches.
Problème de connexion de l’unité de Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
commande
Une ou plusieurs touches de l’unité de Contrôlez si les touches sont coincées, par ex. par des encrassements
commande sont bloquées.
profonds. Le cas échéant, nettoyez les touches.
Problème de connexion de l’unité d’en- Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
traînement
Problème de connexion de l’accu
Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
Erreur de communication des compo- Faire contrôler les raccords et connexions
sants entre eux
Accu interne de l’ordinateur de com- Recharger l’ordinateur de commande (dans sa fixation ou par la
mande vide
connexion USB)
Erreur interne de l’ordinateur de com- Faire contrôler l’ordinateur de commande
mande
* seulement pour éclairage par accu du vélo électrique (suivant les versions dans les différents pays)
Alimentation en énergie d’appareils externes par
la connexion USB
Au moyen du douille USB, il est possible de faire fonctionner
ou de charger la plupart des appareils pouvant être alimentés
par USB (p.ex. téléphones portables).
Condition préalable au chargement est que l’ordinateur de
commande et un accu suffisamment chargé soient montés sur
le vélo électrique.
Ouvrez le capuchon de protection 8 de la douille USB de l’ordinateur de commande. Connectez la prise USB de l’appareil
externe au moyen d’un câble USB à la douille USB 7 de l’ordinateur de commande.
Instructions pour utiliser le système eBike
Quand est-ce que l’entraînement du vélo électrique
travaille ?
L’entraînement du vélo électrique vous aide pendant votre
course tant que vous pédalez. Sans pédaler, aucune assistance. La puissance du moteur dépend toujours de la force
appliquée lorsque vous pédalez.
Si vous appliquez peu de force, l’assistance est moins forte
que lorsque vous appliquez plus de force. Et cela indépendamment du niveau d’assistance.
L’entraînement du vélo électrique s’arrête automatiquement
à une vitesse supérieure à 45 km/h. Si la vitesse tombe audessous de 45 km/h, l’entraînement est automatiquement à
nouveau disponible.
La fonction aide au démarrage est une exception ; dans cette
fonction, le vélo électrique peut être utilisé sans pédaler en
faible vitesse.
Bosch eBike Systems
Vous pouvez à tout moment utiliser le vélo électrique comme
un vélo normal sans assistance, si vous éteignez le système
eBike ou si vous mettez le niveau d’assistance sur « OFF ». Il
en va de même si l’accu est vide.
Interaction entre le système eBike et la vitesse
Même avec entraînement de vélo électrique vous devriez utiliser la vitesse comme pour un vélo normal (respectez la notice d’utilisation de votre vélo électrique).
Indépendamment du type de vitesse, il est recommandé d’arrêter brièvement de pédaler pendant que vous changez de vitesse. Ceci facilite le changement de vitesse et réduit l’usure
de l’arbre d’entraînement.
En choisissant la vitesse appropriée, vous pouvez augmenter
la vitesse et la portée en appliquant la même force.
Faire les premières expériences
Il est recommandé de faire les premières expériences avec le
vélo électrique à l’écart de rues fortement fréquentées.
Essayez les différents niveaux d’assistance à disposition. Dès
que vous vous sentez sûr de vous, vous pouvez circuler avec
le vélo électrique comme avec tout autre vélo.
Essayez la portée de votre vélo électrique dans différentes
conditions avant de planifier un parcours long et exigeant.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–7
Influences sur la portée
L’autonomie est influencée par beaucoup de facteurs, tels
que par exemple :
– le niveau d’assistance,
– la manière de changer les vitesses,
– le type et la pression des pneus,
– l’âge et l’état de l’accu,
– le profil (montées) et les caractéristiques (surface de la
route) du parcours,
– le vent de face et les températures ambiantes,
– le poids du vélo électrique, du conducteur et des bagages.
Pour cette raison il n’est pas possible de prédire concrètement la portée avant un parcours. Mais en général vaut :
– Pour une même puissance de moteur de l’entraînement du
vélo électrique : Plus la force que vous devez appliquer
pour atteindre une certaine vitesse sera faible (par ex. par
une utilisation optimale des vitesses), plus l’énergie
consommée par l’entraînement sera faible et plus grande
sera l’autonomie d’une charge d’accu.
– Plus le niveau d’assistance sélectionné sera élevé, même
dans des conditions constantes, moins l’autonomie sera
grande.
Maniement soigneux du vélo électrique
Respectez les températures de fonctionnement et de stockage des éléments du vélo électrique. Protégez l’unité d’entraînement, l’ordinateur de commande et l’accu de températures extrêmes (par ex. exposition intensive au soleil sans
aération). Les éléments (surtout l’accu) peuvent être endommagés par des températures extrêmes.
Entretien et Service Après-Vente
Nettoyage et entretien
Maintenez tous les éléments de votre vélo électrique propres,
surtout les contacts de l’accu et les fixations. Nettoyez-les
avec précaution à l’aide d’un chiffon humidifié et doux.
Ne plongez pas dans l’eau les éléments, y compris l’unité de
l’entraînement et ne les nettoyez pas à l’aide d’un nettoyeur
haute pression.
Pour le Service Après-Vente ou des réparations sur votre vélo
électrique, adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé.
Service Après-Vente et Assistance Des Clients
Pour toutes les questions concernant le système eBike et ses
éléments, adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé.
Vous trouverez les données de contact de vélocistes autorisés
sur le site internet www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
Les accus sont soumis aux règlements de transport des matières dangereuses. L’utilisateur privé peut transporter les accus par la route sans conditions supplémentaires.
Lors d’un transport par des utilisateurs commerciaux ou par
des tiers (par ex. transport aérien ou entreprise de transport), les prescriptions particulières pour l’emballage et le
marquage doivent être respectées (par ex. prescriptions de
l’ADR). Au besoin, faire appel à un expert en transport de matières dangereuses pour la préparation de l’envoi.
N’expédiez pas l’accu si le boîtier est endommagé. Recouvrez
les contacts à l’air libre et emballez l’accu de manière à ce qu’il
ne se déplace pas dans l’emballage. Veuillez également respecter des règlementations supplémentaires nationales
éventuellement en vigueur.
Pour toute question concernant le transport de l’accu, adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé. Vous pouvez également commander un emballage de transport approprié auprès d’un
commerçant spécialisé.
Elimination des déchets
L’unité d’entraînement, l’ordinateur de commande y
compris l’unité de commande, l’accu, le capteur de vitesse, ainsi que leurs accessoires et emballages,
doivent pouvoir suivre chacun une voie de recyclage
appropriée.
Ne jetez pas les vélos électriques et leurs éléments dans les
ordures ménagères !
Seulement pour les pays de l’Union Européenne :
Conformément à la directive européenne
2002/96/CE, les équipements électriques
dont on ne peut plus se servir, et conformément à la directive européenne
2006/66/CE, les accus/piles usés ou défectueux doivent être isolés et suivre une
voie de recyclage appropriée.
L’accu intégré à l’ordinateur de commande ne doit en être retiré que pour son élimination. Ouvrir la coque du boîtier peut
détruire l’ordinateur de commande.
Déposez les accus et l’ordinateur de commande dont on ne
peut plus se servir auprès d’un vélociste autorisé.
Lithium ion :
Respectez les indications données
dans le chapitre « Transport », page
Français–7.
Sous réserve de modifications.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–8
Accu Li-ions PowerPack
Avertissements de sécurité
Lire tous les avertissements
de sécurité et toutes les instructions. Ne pas suivre les
avertissements et instructions
peut donner lieu à un choc
électrique, un incendie et/ou une blessure sérieuse.
Conserver tous les avertissements et toutes les instructions pour pouvoir s’y reporter ultérieurement.
Le terme « accu » utilisé dans cette notice d’utilisation se réfère également aux accus standards (accus avec fixation sur le
cadre de vélo) et accus de porte-bagages (accus avec fixation
dans le porte-bagages), à moins que référence ne soit faite au
modèle.
 Retirez l’accu du vélo électrique avant d’effectuer des
travaux (par ex. montage, entretien etc.) sur le vélo
électrique, avant de le transporter en voiture ou en avion ou de le stocker. Risques de blessures en cas d’activation accidentelle de l’interrupteur Marche/Arrêt.
 Ne pas ouvrir l’accu. Risque de court-circuit. L’ouverture
de l’accu entraîne l’annulation de la garantie.
Protégez l’accu de toute source de chaleur (par
ex. d’une exposition permanente au soleil) de
feu, et ne le plongez pas dans l’eau. Il peut y avoir
risque d’explosion.
 Tenez l’accu non-utilisé à l’écart de toutes sortes d’objets métalliques tels qu’agrafes, pièces de monnaie,
clés, clous, vis ou autres, car un pontage pourrait provoquer un court-circuit. Un court-circuit entre les
contacts d’accu peut provoquer des brûlures ou un incendie. La garantie de Bosch est annulée dans en cas de dommages provoqués par un court-circuit survenant dans ce
contexte.
 En cas d’une utilisation erronée, du liquide peut
s’échapper de l’accumulateur. Evitez tout contact. En
cas de contact accidentel, nettoyez à l’eau. Si le liquide
entre en contact avec les yeux, veuillez alors consulter
un médecin. La substance liquide qui s’échappe de l’accumulateur peut entraîner des irritations de la peau ou causer
des brûlures.
 En cas d’endommagement et d’utilisation non
conforme de l’accumulateur, des vapeurs peuvent
s’échapper. Ventilez le lieu de travail et, en cas de malaises, consultez un médecin. Les vapeurs peuvent irriter
les voies respiratoires.
 Ne recharger l’accu qu’avec un chargeur d’origine
Bosch. En cas d’utilisation d’un chargeur autre qu’en chargeur d’origine Bosch, un risque d’incendie ne peut être exclu.
Bosch eBike Systems
 N’utilisez l’accu qu’avec des vélos électriques équipés
d’un entraînement de vélo électrique d’origine Bosch.
Ceci protège l’accu contre une surcharge dangereuse.
 N’utilisez que les accus d’origine Bosch autorisés par le
fabricant pour votre vélo électrique. L’utilisation de tout
autre accumulateur peut entraîner des blessures et des
risques d’incendie. Bosch décline toute responsabilité et
garantie dans le cas d’utilisation d’autres accus.
 Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité et les instructions se trouvant dans les notices d’utilisation du
chargeur et de l’unité d’entraînement/de l’ordinateur
de commande ainsi que dans la notice d’utilisation de
votre vélo électrique.
Description et performances du
produit
Eléments de l’appareil
(voir page 4–5)
La numérotation des éléments se réfère à la représentation
sur les pages graphiques.
Toutes les représentations d’éléments de vélo à l’exception
des accus et des fixations sont schématiques et peuvent différer pour votre vélo électrique.
19 Fixation de l’accu de porte-bagages
20 Accu de porte-bagages
21 Voyant de fonctionnement et d’état de charge
22 Touche Marche/Arrêt
23 Clé de la serrure de l’accu
24 Serrure de l’accu
25 Fixation supérieure de l’accu standard
26 Accu standard
27 Fixation inférieure de l’accu standard
28 Sangle
29 Chargeur
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–9
Caractéristiques techniques
Accu Lithium-ion
N° d’article
– Accu standard noir
– Accu standard blanc
– Accu de porte-bagages
Tension nominale
Capacité nominale
Énergie
Température de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Plage de température de charge admissible
Poids, env.
Type de protection
Montage
 Ne placez l’accu que sur des surfaces propres. Évitez
tout encrassement de la douille de charge et des contacts,
par ex. par du sable ou de la terre.
Contrôler l’accu avant la première utilisation
Contrôlez l’accu avant de le recharger ou de l’utiliser avec
votre vélo électrique la première fois.
Pour ce faire, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt 22 pour
mettre l’accu en marche. Si aucune des LED de l’affichage de
l’état de charge 21 ne s’allume, l’accu pourrait être endommagé.
Si au moins une des LED s’allume mais pas la totalité des LED
de l’affichage de l’état de charge 21, alors rechargez l’accu à
fond avant la première utilisation.
 Ne chargez pas un accu endommagé et ne l’utilisez pas.
Adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé.
Charge de l’accu
 N’utiliser que le chargeur d’origine Bosch fourni avec le
vélo électrique ou un chargeur identique. Seul ce chargeur est adapté à l’accu à ions lithium utilisé dans votre vélo électrique.
Note : L’accu est fourni en état de charge faible. Afin de garantir la puissance complète de l’accu, rechargez-le complètement dans le chargeur avant la première mise en service.
Pour recharger l’accu, il faut le retirer du vélo électrique.
Pour charger l’accu, lisez et respectez la notice d’utilisation du
chargeur.
L’accu à ions lithium peut être rechargé à tout moment, sans
que sa durée de vie n’en soit réduite. Le fait d’interrompre le
processus de charge n’endommage pas l’accu.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8,2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2,5
2,5
IP 54 (étanche à la poussière IP 54 (étanche à la poussière
et aux projections d’eau)
et aux projections d’eau)
L’accu est équipé d’un contrôle de température qui ne permet
de charger l’accu que dans une plage de température entre
0 °C et 40 °C.
Si l’accu se trouve à l’extérieur
de la plage de température prévue, trois LED de l’affichage de
l’état de charge 21 clignotent.
Débranchez l’accu du chargeur et laissez-le reprendre une
température adéquate.
Ne rebranchez l’accu au chargeur que quand il a repris une
température de charge admissible.
Voyant lumineux indiquant l’état de charge
Les cinq LED de l’affichage de l’état de charge 21 indiquent,
quand l’accu est allumé, dans quel état de charge il se trouve.
Chaque LED correspond à environ 20 % de capacité. Si l’accu
est complètement rechargé, les cinq LED s’allument.
L’état de charge de l’accu allumé est également indiqué par
l’ordinateur de commande. Lisez et respectez la notice d’utilisation de l’unité d’entraînement et de l’ordinateur de commande.
Si la capacité de l’accu est inférieure à 5 %, toutes les LED du
voyant lumineux indiquant l’état de charge de l’accu 21
s’éteignent, mais il y a toujours la fonction d’affichage de l’ordinateur de commande.
Montage et démontage de l’accu
(voir figures C–D)
 Eteignez toujours l’accu pour le monter ou pour le retirer de la fixation.
Pour pouvoir monter l’accu. la clé 23 doit se trouver dans la
serrure 24 et la serrure doit être ouverte.
Pour monter l’accu standard 26, mettez-le en place avec les
contacts sur la fixation du bas 27 sur le vélo électrique. Basculez-le à fond dans la fixation du haut 25.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–10
Pour mettre en place l’accu du porte-bagages 20, enfoncez-le, côté contact, dans la fixation 19 du porte-bagages jusqu’à ce qu’il s’encliquette.
Contrôlez le bon positionnement de l’accu. Fermez toujours
l’accu à l’aide de la serrure 24 car sinon, la serrure pourrait
s’ouvrir et l’accu tomber de la fixation.
Après avoir fermé la serrure à clé, retirer toujours la clé 23 de
la serrure 24. Ceci permet d’éviter que la clé ne tombe ou que
l’accu ne soit retiré par une tierce personne non autorisée,
lorsque le vélo électrique est garé.
Pour enlever l’accu standard 26, éteignez-le puis ouvrez la
serrure avec la clé 23. Faites basculer l’accu de la fixation supérieure 25 et tirez sur la sangle 28 pour le faire sortir de la
fixation inférieure 27.
Pour enlever l’accu du porte-bagages 20, éteignez-le puis
ouvrez la serrure avec la clé 23. Faites basculer l’accu pour le
sortir de sa fixation 19.
Fonctionnement
Mise en service
 N’utilisez que les accus d’origine Bosch autorisés par le
fabricant pour votre vélo électrique. L’utilisation de tout
autre accumulateur peut entraîner des blessures et des
risques d’incendie. Bosch décline toute responsabilité et
garantie dans le cas d’utilisation d’autres accus.
Mise en marche/arrêt
Allumer l’accu est une des possibilités permettant de mettre
le système eBike en marche. Lisez et respectez la notice d’utilisation de l’unité d’entraînement et de l’ordinateur de commande.
Avant d’allumer l’accu ou de mettre le système eBike en
marche, vérifiez que la serrure 24 est fermée à clé.
Note : Les pédales du vélo électrique ne doivent pas être sollicitées lorsque le système eBike est mis en marche, sinon la
puissance de l’entraînement du vélo électrique serait réduite.
Pour allumer l’accu, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt 22.
Les LED de l’affichage 21 s’allument et indiquent en même
temps l’état de charge.
Note : Si la capacité de l’accu baisse à moins de 5 %, la totalité
des LED de l’affichage de l’état de charge 21 est éteinte. Seul
l’ordinateur de commande indique si le système eBike est mis
en marche.
Pour éteindre l’accu, appuyez à nouveau sur la touche
Marche/Arrêt 22. Les LED de l’affichage 21 s’éteignent. Le
système eBike est en même temps également éteint.
Si l’entraînement du vélo électrique n’est pas sollicité pendant 10 min. (par ex. parce que le vélo électrique est arrêté)
et qu’aucune touche de l’ordinateur de commande ou de l’unité de commande n’a été activée, le système eBike s’éteint automatiquement pour économiser l’énergie.
Bosch eBike Systems
L’accu est protégé par l’« Electronic Cell Protection (ECP) »
contre décharge profonde, surcharge, surchauffe et courtcircuit. En cas de danger, l’accu s’éteint automatiquement
grâce à un dispositif d’arrêt de protection.
Si un défaut de l’accu est détecté, deux LED de l’affichage de
l’état de charge 21 clignotent.
Dans ce cas, veuillez consulter
un vélociste autorisé.
Indications pour le maniement optimal de
l’accumulateur
La durée de vie de l’accu peut être prolongée s’il est bien entretenu et surtout s’il est utilisé et stocké à des températures
appropriées.
Toutefois, en dépit d’un bon entretien, la capacité de l’accu se
réduira avec l’âge.
Si l’autonomie de l’accu diminue considérablement après
qu’une recharge a été effectuée, c’est que l’accu est usagé.
Vous pouvez remplacer l’accu.
Si la sangle 28 de l’accu standard était défectueuse, faites-la
remplacer par une vélociste.
Recharger l’accu avant et pendant le stockage
Quand vous n’utilisez pas le vélo électrique pendant une période prolongée, rechargez l’accu à environ 60 % (3 à 4 LED
de l’affichage de l’état de charge 21 sont allumés).
Contrôlez après 6 mois l’état de charge. Si aucune des LED de
l’affichage de l’état de charge 21 n’est allumée, rechargez l’accu à nouveau à environ 60 %.
Note : Si l’accu est stocké vide pendant une durée prolongée,
il peut être endommagé malgré la faible autodécharge et sa
capacité peut être considérablement réduite.
Il n’est pas recommandé de laisser l’accu raccordé en permanence au chargeur.
Conditions de stockage
Si possible, stockez l’accu dans un endroit sec et bien aéré.
Protégez-le de l’humidité et de l’eau. Dans des conditions météorologiques défavorables, il est par ex. recommandé de retirer l’accu du vélo électrique et de le stocker jusqu’à la prochaine utilisation dans des locaux fermés.
L’accu peut être stocké à des températures comprises entre
–10 °C et +60 °C. Pour une longue durée de vie, un stockage
à une température ambiante d’env. 20 °C est recommandé.
Veillez à ne pas dépasser la température maximale de stockage. Ne laissez pas l’accu trop longtemps dans une voiture
surtout en été et maintenez-le à l’abri d’une exposition directe
au soleil.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–11
Entretien et Service Après-Vente
Nettoyage et entretien
Maintenez l’accu propre. Nettoyez-le avec précaution à l’aide
d’un chiffon doux humidifié. Ne plongez pas l’accu dans l’eau
et ne le nettoyez pas au jet d’eau.
Si l’accu ne peut plus fonctionner, veuillez vous adresser à un
vélociste autorisé.
Service Après-Vente et Assistance Des Clients
Pour toute question concernant les accus, consultez un vélociste autorisé.
 Notez le fabricant et le numéro de la clé 23. Au cas où
vous perdriez la clé, adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé.
Indiquez-lui le fabricant et le numéro de la clé.
Vous trouverez les données de contact de vélocistes autorisés
sur le site internet www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
Les accus sont soumis aux règlements de transport des matières dangereuses. L’utilisateur privé peut transporter les accus par la route sans conditions supplémentaires.
Lors d’un transport par des utilisateurs commerciaux ou par
des tiers (par ex. transport aérien ou entreprise de transport), les prescriptions particulières pour l’emballage et le
marquage doivent être respectées (par ex. prescriptions de
l’ADR). Au besoin, faire appel à un expert en transport de matières dangereuses pour la préparation de l’envoi.
N’expédiez pas l’accu si le boîtier est endommagé. Recouvrez
les contacts à l’air libre et emballez l’accu de manière à ce qu’il
ne se déplace pas dans l’emballage. Veuillez également respecter des règlementations supplémentaires nationales
éventuellement en vigueur.
Pour toute question concernant le transport de l’accu, adressez-vous à un vélociste autorisé. Vous pouvez également commander un emballage de transport approprié auprès d’un
commerçant spécialisé.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Elimination des déchets
Les accus ainsi que leurs accessoires et emballages
doivent pouvoir suivre chacun une voie de recyclage
appropriée.
Ne jetez pas les accus dans les ordures ménagères !
Seulement pour les pays de l’Union Européenne :
Conformément à la directive européenne
2002/96/CE, les équipements électriques
dont on ne peut plus se servir, et conformément à la directive européenne
2006/66/CE, les accus/piles usés ou défectueux doivent être isolés et suivre une
voie de recyclage appropriée.
Déposez les accus dont on ne peut plus se servir auprès d’un
vélociste autorisé.
Lithium ion :
Respectez les indications données
dans le chapitre « Transport », page
Français–11.
Sous réserve de modifications.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–12
Chargeur Charger
Avertissements de sécurité
Lire tous les avertissements
de sécurité et toutes les instructions. Ne pas suivre les
avertissements et instructions
peut donner lieu à un choc
électrique, un incendie et/ou une blessure sérieuse.
Conserver tous les avertissements et toutes les instructions pour pouvoir s’y reporter ultérieurement.
Le terme « accu » utilisé dans cette notice d’utilisation se réfère aussi bien aux accus standards (accus avec fixation sur le
cadre du vélo) qu’aux accus du porte-bagages (accus avec
fixation dans le porte-bagages).
N’exposez pas le chargeur à la pluie ou à des conditions humides. Dans le cas de pénétration d’eau dans
un chargeur il y a le risque d’un choc électrique.
 Ne charger que des accus Li-ion autorisés par Bosch
pour les vélos électriques. La tension d’accumulateurs
doit correspondre à la tension de charge de l’accumulateur du chargeur. Sinon, il y a risque d’incendie et d’explosion.
 Maintenir le chargeur propre. Un encrassement augmente le risque de choc électrique.
 Avant toute utilisation, contrôler le chargeur, la fiche
et le câble. Ne pas utiliser le chargeur si des défauts
sont constatés. Ne pas démonter le chargeur soi-même
et ne le faire réparer que par une personne qualifiée et
seulement avec des pièces de rechange d’origine. Des
chargeurs, câbles et fiches endommagés augmentent le
risque d’un choc électrique.
 Ne pas utiliser le chargeur sur un support facilement inflammable (tel que papier, textiles etc.) ou dans un environnement inflammable. L’échauffement du chargeur
lors du processus de charge augmente le risque d’incendie.
 En cas d’endommagement et d’utilisation non
conforme de l’accumulateur, des vapeurs peuvent
s’échapper. Ventilez le lieu de travail et, en cas de malaises, consultez un médecin. Les vapeurs peuvent irriter
les voies respiratoires.
 Ne laissez pas les enfants sans surveillance. Veillez à ce
que les enfants ne jouent pas avec le chargeur.
 Les enfants et les personnes souffrant d’un handicap
physique, sensoriel ou mental ou n’ayant pas l’expérience et/ou les connaissances nécessaires, ne doivent
pas utiliser le chargeur à moins qu’elles ne soient surveillées par une personne responsable de leur sécurité
ou qu’elles aient été instruites quant au maniement du
chargeur. Sinon, il y a un risque de mauvaise utilisation et
de blessures.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité et les instructions se trouvant dans les notices d’utilisation des
accus et de l’unité d’entraînement/de l’ordinateur de
commande ainsi que dans la notice d’utilisation de
votre vélo électrique.
 En dessous du chargeur se trouve un abrégé des consignes
de sécurité les plus importantes en anglais, français et espagnol (marqué du numéro 33 sur la figure de la page graphique) avec le contenu suivant :
– Pour un fonctionnement sûr, reportez-vous au manuel.
Risque de choc électrique.
– Utiliser en lieu sec uniquement.
– A utiliser uniquement avec les batteries des systèmes
d’assistance électrique eBike de Bosch. D’autres batteries risqueraient d’eclater et de causer des blessures
corporelles et des dommages.
– Ne pas remplacer la connectique car un risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique pourrait en résulter.
Description et performances du
produit
Eléments de l’appareil (voir page 6–7)
La numérotation des éléments de l’appareil se réfère à la représentation du chargeur sur la page graphique.
20 Accu de porte-bagages
21 Voyant lumineux indiquant l’état de charge de l’accu
26 Accu standard
29 Chargeur
30 Prise d’appareil
31 Fiche de l’appareil
32 Orifices d’aération
33 Consignes de sécurité du chargeur
34 Fiche de charge
35 Prise pour fiche de charge
Caractéristiques techniques
Chargeur
N° d’article
Tension nominale
Fréquence
Tension de charge de l’accu
Courant de charge
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
Ces indications sont valables pour une tension nominale de [U] 230 V.
Ces indications peuvent varier pour des tensions plus basses ainsi que
pour des versions spécifiques à certains pays.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–13
Chargeur
Plage de température de charge
admissible
Durée de charge
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Nombre cellules de batteries
rechargeables
Température de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Poids suivant EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Type de protection
Charger
°C
0...+40
h
h
2,5
3,5
°C
°C
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
kg
0,8
IP 40
Ces indications sont valables pour une tension nominale de [U] 230 V.
Ces indications peuvent varier pour des tensions plus basses ainsi que
pour des versions spécifiques à certains pays.
Fonctionnement
 Soyez prudent lorsque vous touchez le chargeur pendant le processus de charge. Porter des gants de protection. Le chargeur peut s’échauffer fortement surtout en
cas de température ambiante élevée.
Note : Veillez à ce que le chargeur soit bien aéré pendant le
processus de charge et que les orifices d’aération 32 des
deux côtés ne soient pas couverts.
L’accu est complètement rechargé quand les cinq LED de l’affichage 21 sont allumés en permanence. Le processus de
charge est automatiquement interrompu.
Déconnectez le chargeur du réseau électrique et l’accu du
chargeur.
Lorsque l’accu est déconnecté du chargeur, il est automatiquement éteint.
Vous pouvez maintenant monter l’accu sur le vélo électrique.
Défaut – Causes et remèdes
Cause
Remède
Deux LED de l’accu
clignotent
Accu défectueux
Consulter un vélociste
autorisé
Trois LED de l’accu
clignotent
 Ne placez l’accu que sur des surfaces propres. Évitez
tout encrassement de la douille de charge et des contacts,
par ex. par du sable ou de la terre.
Mise en service
Raccordement du chargeur (voir figures E– F)
 Tenez compte de la tension du réseau ! La tension de la
source de courant doit correspondre aux indications se
trouvant sur la plaque signalétique du chargeur. Les chargeurs marqués 230 V peuvent également fonctionner sous
220 V.
Branchez la fiche 31 du câble secteur à la douille de l’appareil
30 sur le chargeur.
Branchez le câble de secteur (différent selon le pays) sur le réseau d’alimentation électrique.
Éteignez l’accu et retirez-le de la fixation sur le vélo électrique.
Lisez et respectez la notice d’utilisation de l’accu.
Branchez la fiche de charge 34 du chargeur à la douille 35 sur
l’accu.
Processus de charge
Le processus de charge commence dès que le chargeur est
raccordé à l’accu et au réseau électrique.
Note : Le processus de charge n’est possible que si la température de l’accu se trouve dans la plage de température de
charge admissible.
Pendant le processus de charge, les voyants de l’affichage de
l’état de charge 21 s’allument en rouge sur l’accu. Chaque
LED allumée en permanence correspond à environ 20 % de
capacité de charge. La LED clignotante indique le processus
de charge des 20 % suivants.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
L’accumulateur est trop
chaud ou trop froid
Débrancher l’accu du chargeur et le laisser reprendre
une température adéquate
comprise dans la plage de
températures indiquée.
Ne rebranchez l’accu au
chargeur que quand il a repris
une température de charge
admissible.
Recharge impossible (pas d’affichage sur l’accu)
La fiche n’est pas correcte- Contrôler toutes les
connexions
ment enfichée
Contacts de l’accu encrassés Nettoyer prudemment les
contacts de l’accu
Les orifices d’aération 32 du Nettoyer les orifices d’aérachargeur sont obturés ou
tion 32 et positionner le
couverts
chargeur de sorte à ce qu’il
soit bien aéré
Prise de courant, câble ou
Vérifier la tension du secteur,
chargeur défectueux
faire contrôler le chargeur par
un vélociste
Accu défectueux
Consulter un vélociste
autorisé
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Français–14
Entretien et Service Après-Vente
Nettoyage et entretien
Au cas où le chargeur tomberait en panne, adressez-vous à un
vélociste autorisé.
Service Après-Vente et Assistance Des Clients
Pour toute question concernant le chargeur, adressez-vous à
un vélociste autorisé.
Vous trouverez les données de contact de vélocistes autorisés
sur le site internet www.bosch-ebike.com
Elimination des déchets
Les chargeurs ainsi que leurs accessoires et emballages,
doivent pouvoir suivre chacun une voie de recyclage appropriée.
Ne jetez pas les chargeurs avec les ordures ménagères !
Seulement pour les pays de l’Union Européenne :
Conformément à la directive européenne
2002/96/CE relative aux déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques et la
mise en vigueur conformément aux législations nationales, les chargeurs dont on ne
peut plus se servir doivent être isolés et
suivre une voie de recyclage appropriée.
Sous réserve de modifications.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–1
Unidad motriz Drive Unit Speed/
Ordenador de control Intuvia
Instrucciones de seguridad
Lea íntegramente todas las indicaciones de
seguridad e instrucciones. En caso de no atenerse a las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones siguientes, puede ocasionarse una descarga eléctrica, un incendio y/o lesión grave.
Guarde todas las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones para posibles consultas futuras.
El término “acumulador” empleado en estas instrucciones de
uso se refiere indistintamente tanto a los acumuladores estándar (acumuladores de fijación al cuadro de la bicicleta) como a los acumuladores para portaequipajes (acumuladores
de fijación al portaequipajes).
 No abra la unidad motriz por su propia cuenta, y solamente déjela reparar por un profesional, empleando
para ello piezas de recambio originales. Solamente así
se mantiene la seguridad de la unidad motriz. La apertura
no autorizada de la unidad motriz anula el derecho de garantía.
 Todos los componentes montados en la unidad motriz,
así como todos los demás componentes del accionamiento de la eBike (p.ej., el plato, portaplatos, pedales) solamente deberán sustituirse por componentes
de iguales dimensiones o por componentes especialmente homologados por el fabricante de su eBike. Con
ello se evita una sobrecarga o deterioro de la unidad motriz.
 Desmonte el acumulador de la eBike antes de realizar
trabajos en esta última (p.ej. montaje, mantenimiento,
etc.) al transportarla en el coche o avión, o al guardarla.
En caso contrario podría accidentarse al accionar fortuitamente el interruptor de conexión/desconexión.
 La función de asistencia al arrancar deberá usarse exclusivamente para poner a rodar la eBike. Puede llegar a
lesionarse si las ruedas de la eBike no están tocando el firme en el momento de utilizar la asistencia al arrancar.
 Únicamente utilice acumuladores originales Bosch homologados por el fabricante de su eBike. El uso de otro
tipo de acumuladores puede acarrear lesiones e incluso un
incendio. Si se aplican acumuladores de otro tipo Bosch
declina cualquier responsabilidad y el derecho a garantía.
 Observe la prescripciones nacionales en cuanto al permiso de circulación y uso de la eBike.
 Lea y aténgase a las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones que figuran en las instrucciones de uso del
acumulador y de la eBike.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Descripción y prestaciones del
producto
Utilización reglamentaria
La unidad motriz ha sido diseñada exclusivamente para accionar su eBike y no deberá utilizarse con otro fin.
La eBike ha sido diseñada para circular en caminos afirmados. No es apta para participar en competiciones.
Componentes principales
(ver página 2–3)
La numeración de los componentes está referida a las imágenes en la página ilustrada.
A excepción de la unidad motriz, ordenador de control incl.
cuadro de mandos, captador de velocidad y de los soportes
pertinentes, las piezas de la bicicleta solamente se representan de forma esquemática y pueden ser diferentes en su
eBike.
1 Tecla Función de indicación “i”
2 Botón de iluminación
3 Ordenador de control
4 Soporte del ordenador de control
5 Tecla Conexión/desconexión del ordenador de control
6 Tecla Reset “RESET”
7 Puerto USB
8 Capuchón del puerto USB
9 Unidad motriz
10 Cuadro de mandos
11 Tecla Función de indicación “i” en cuadro de mandos
12 Tecla Reducir valor/Hojear hacia abajo “ –”
13 Tecla Aumentar valor/Hojear hacia arriba “+”
14 Tecla Asistencia al arrancar “WALK”
15 Bloqueo del ordenador de control
16 Tornillo de bloqueo del ordenador de control
17 Captador de velocidad
18 Imán de fijación a los radios para el captador de
velocidad
Elementos de indicación del ordenador de control
a Indicador de potencia del motor
b Indicador del modo de asistencia
c Indicador de textos
d Indicador numérico
e Velocímetro
f Indicador de estado de carga del acumulador
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–2
Datos técnicos
Unidad motriz
Nº de artículo
Potencia
Par de giro en eje de salida,
máx.
Tensión nominal
Temperatura de operación
Temperatura de
almacenamiento
Grado de protección
Peso, aprox.
Ordenador de control
Nº de artículo
Corriente de carga USB,
máx.
Tensión de carga en puerto
USB
Temperatura de operación
Temperatura de
almacenamiento
Grado de protección
Peso, aprox.
Iluminación*
Tensión nominal
Potencia
– Luz delantera
– Luz trasera
W
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
Nm
V
°C
50
36
–5...+40
°C
–10...+50
IP 54 (protección
contra polvo y salpicaduras de agua)
kg
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
5
–5...+40
°C
–10...+50
IP 54 (protección
contra polvo y salpicaduras de agua)
kg
0,15
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* dependiente de la regulación legal, por lo que la alimentación a través
del acumulador de la eBike no está disponible en la ejecución para ciertos países
Montaje
Montaje y desmontaje del acumulador
Para montar y desmontar el acumulador de la eBike lea y aténgase a las instrucciones de uso del mismo.
Montaje y desmontaje del ordenador de control
(ver figura A)
Para montar el ordenador de control 3 empújelo hacia delante en el soporte 4.
Para desmontar el ordenador de control 3 presione la pestaña del bloqueo 15 y sáquelo hacia atrás del soporte 4.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Desmonte el ordenador de control al estacionar la
eBike para evitar que el accionamiento sea utilizado
por terceros. Sin el ordenador de control no es posible conectar el sistema de la eBike.
También es posible evitar que el ordenador de control pueda
sacarse del soporte. Para ello, desmonte el soporte 4 del manillar. Monte el ordenador de control en el soporte. Enrosque
el tornillo de bloqueo 16 desde abajo en la rosca prevista para
tal fin en el soporte. Vuelva a fijar el soporte al manillar.
Comprobación del captador de velocidad
(ver figura B)
El captador de velocidad 17 y el imán de fijación a los radios
18 deberán montarse de forma que éste se encuentre a una
distancia entre 5 mm y máximo 17 mm al quedar encarado
con el captador de velocidad.
Observación: Si la separación entre el captador de velocidad
17 y el imán 18 fuese demasiado pequeña o demasiado grande, o si el captador de velocidad 17 no estuviese correctamente conectado, el velocímetro e no funciona y el accionamiento de la eBike trabaja entonces con el programa de
emergencia.
En ese caso afloje el tornillo del imán 18 y sujete este último al
radio de manera que mantenga la distancia correcta respecto
a la marca que lleva el captador de velocidad. Si tras este ajuste el velocímetro e sigue sin indicar la velocidad, diríjase a una
tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Operación
Puesta en marcha
Requisitos
El sistema de la eBike solamente puede activarse si se cumplen los siguientes requisitos:
– El acumulador empleado está suficientemente cargado
(ver instrucciones de uso del acumulador).
– Ordenador de control correctamente fijado a su soporte
(ver “Montaje y desmontaje del ordenador de control”, página Español–2).
– Captador de velocidad correctamente conectado y ajustado (ver “Comprobación del captador de velocidad”, página
Español–2).
Conexión y desconexión del sistema de la eBike
El sistema de la eBike se puede conectar de las siguientes formas:
– Si el ordenador de control ya está conectado al montarlo
en el soporte, el sistema de la eBike es conectado automáticamente.
– Estando montados el ordenador de control y el acumulador, pulse brevemente la tecla de Conexión/desconexión
5 del ordenador de control.
– Estando montado el ordenador de control pulse brevemente la tecla de Conexión/desconexión del acumulador
(ver instrucciones de uso del acumulador).
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–3
Observación: Al conectar el sistema de la eBike no deberán
presionarse los pedales de la eBike ya que ello reduciría la potencia del motor. En el indicador de textos c aparece el aviso
de fallo “No pisar pedal”.
Si el sistema de la eBike se conectó en el momento de presionar los pedales, desconéctelo y vuélvalo a conectar sin ejercer ahora ninguna presión.
El accionamiento se activa en el momento en que Ud. comience a pedalear (excepto en la función de Asistencia al arrancar,
ver “Conexión/desconexión de la Asistencia al arrancar”, página Español–4). La potencia a la que opera el motor depende de los ajustes realizados en su ordenador de control.
Durante el funcionamiento normal de la eBike el accionamiento de la misma se desactiva en el momento de que Ud. deje de
pedalear o alcance una velocidad de 45 km/h. El accionamiento vuelve a reactivarse automáticamente al volver a pedalear, siempre que la velocidad de marcha sea inferior a
45 km/h.
El sistema de la eBike se puede desconectar de las siguientes
formas:
– Pulse la tecla de conexión/desconexión 5 del ordenador de
control.
– Desconecte el acumulador con la tecla de Conexión/desconexión del mismo (ver instrucciones de uso del acumulador).
– Retire el ordenador de control del soporte.
Si en el transcurso de 10 min el accionamiento sigue inactivo
(p ej., al estar detenida la eBike) y no se ha pulsado ninguna
tecla del ordenador de control o cuadro de mandos, el sistema de la eBike se desconecta automáticamente con el fin de
ahorrar energía.
Indicadores y ajuste del ordenador de control
Alimentación del ordenador de control
Una vez montado el ordenador de control en el soporte 4 y conectado el sistema de la eBike, el acumulador de la eBike,
siempre que esté suficientemente cargado, se ocupa de alimentar el ordenador de control.
Si el ordenador de control se saca del soporte 4 éste es alimentado entonces por el acumulador que incorpora. Si la tensión de éste es muy baja al conectar el ordenador de control,
durante 3 s aparece “Conectar a bicicleta” en el indicador de
textos c. Seguidamente se desconecta el ordenador de control.
Para recargar el acumulador interno del ordenador de control
vuelva a montarlo en el soporte 4 (siempre que tenga montado un acumulador en la eBike). Conecte el acumulador con la
tecla de Conexión/desconexión del mismo (ver instrucciones
de uso del acumulador).
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Ud. también puede recargar el ordenador de control a través
del puerto USB. Para ello, abra el capuchón 8. Conecte al
puerto USB 7 del ordenador de control un cable USB apropiado y su otro extremo a un cargador USB de tipo comercial o al
puerto USB de un ordenador (tensión de carga 5 V; corriente
de carga máx. 500 mA). En el indicador de textos c del ordenador de control aparece “USB conectado”.
Conexión/desconexión del ordenador de control
Para conectar el ordenador de control pulse brevemente la
tecla de Conexión/desconexión 5. El ordenador de control
puede conectarse también sin tenerlo montado en el soporte
(siempre que su acumulador integrado esté suficientemente
cargado).
Para desconectar el ordenador de control pulse brevemente
la tecla de Conexión/desconexión 5.
Si el ordenador de control no está montado en el soporte, éste se desconecta si no se ha pulsado una tecla durante 1 min,
para ahorrar energía.
Indicador de estado de carga del acumulador
El indicador del estado de carga del acumulador f sólo muestra el nivel de carga del acumulador de la eBike y no el del que
incorpora el ordenador de control. El nivel de carga del acumulador de la eBike puede determinarse asimismo en los LED
de éste.
En el indicador f cada segmento del símbolo del acumulador
corresponde aprox. a un 20 % de capacidad:
80 % a 100 % de capacidad
5 % a 20 % de capacidad; el acumulador debe recargarse.
Capacidad menor a un 5 %, no es posible utilizar el
accionamiento. Los LED del indicador de estado
de carga del acumulador se apagan.
Si la iluminación de la eBike es alimentada por el acumulador
(según país), desde el momento en que se presenta por primera vez el símbolo en blanco del acumulador, la autonomía
de iluminación es de aprox. 2 horas. Si el símbolo comienza a
parpadear, la iluminación solamente puede utilizarse solamente corto tiempo.
Si el ordenador de control se saca del soporte 4 se memoriza
el actual nivel de carga del acumulador mostrado en el display.
Ajuste del modo de asistencia
Ud. puede fijar en el ordenador de control en que medida desea ser asistido por el accionamiento de la eBike al pedalear.
El modo de asistencia puede modificarse en todo momento,
incluso durante la marcha.
Observación: En ciertas ejecuciones puede que venga
preajustado fijo el modo de asistencia y no sea posible modificarlo. También es posible que no exista una diversidad de
modos de asistencia tan amplia como la aquí indicada.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–4
A lo sumo están disponibles los siguientes modos de asistencia:
– “OFF”: Accionamiento desconectado; desplazamiento de
la eBike con los pedales como una bicicleta convencional.
– “ECO”: eficaz asistencia de gran rendimiento para una autonomía máxima
– “TOUR”: asistencia uniforme para recorridos de gran alcance
– “SPORT”: enérgica asistencia para una conducción deportiva en trayectos montañosos o para circular en ciudad
– “TURBO”: Asistencia máxima, incluso al pedalear velozmente, para una conducción deportiva
Para aumentar el nivel de asistencia pulse la tecla “+” 13 en
el cuadro de mandos tantas veces como sea necesario hasta
visualizar el nivel de asistencia deseado en el indicador b, y
para reducirlo, pulse la tecla “ –” 12.
La potencia del motor demandada se representa en la pantalla a. La potencia máxima del motor depende del nivel de asistencia seleccionado.
Modo de asistencia
“ECO”
“TOUR”
“SPORT”
“TURBO”
Potencia del motor*
(Cambio externo)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* La potencia del motor puede variar según la ejecución.
Si el ordenador de control se saca del soporte 4 se memoriza
el actual nivel de asistencia y el indicador a de la potencia del
motor queda en blanco.
Conexión/desconexión de la Asistencia al arrancar
La Asistencia al arrancar puede emplearse como ayuda adicional en los primeros metros de recorrido en situaciones de
salida más difíciles (p. ej. en un semáforo o en una subida).
 La función de asistencia al arrancar deberá usarse exclusivamente para poner a rodar la eBike. Puede llegar a
lesionarse si las ruedas de la eBike no están tocando el firme en el momento de utilizar la asistencia al arrancar.
Para conectar la Asistencia al arrancar mantenga pulsada la
tecla “WALK” 14 del cuadro de mandos. Se conecta el accionamiento de la eBike.
La Asistencia al arrancar se desconecta al presentarse una de
las siguientes situaciones:
– Si suelta la tecla “WALK” 14.
– Si pulsa otra tecla en el ordenador de control.
– Si pedalea hacia delante o si pedalea rápidamente hacia
atrás.
– Si se bloquean las ruedas de la eBike (p. ej. al frenar o al
chocar contra un obstáculo).
– Si la velocidad es superior a 18 km/h.
Bosch eBike Systems
Conexión/desconexión de la iluminación
Para satisfacer las prescripciones vigentes en los respectivos
países existen dos ejecuciones para la iluminación:
– Con el ordenador de control pueden conectarse y desconectarse simultáneamente la luz delantera y trasera y la retroiluminación de la pantalla.
En esta ejecución, al conectar la iluminación aparece en el
indicador de textos c durante aprox. 1 s “Luz encendida”
y al desconectarla “Luz apagada”.
– Solamente puede conectarse y desconectarse la retroiluminación de la pantalla; las luces delantera y trasera de la
eBike se conectan independientemente del ordenador de
control.
En ambas ejecuciones pulse la tecla 2 para conectar y desconectar la iluminación.
Indicadores de velocidad y distancia
En el velocímetro e se indica siempre la velocidad actual.
En el indicador de función (combinación de indicador de textos c e indicador numérico d) puede elegirse entre las siguientes funciones:
– “Autonomía restante”: autonomía previsible con la carga
actual del acumulador (manteniendo las mismas condiciones como el modo de asistencia, características del terreno, etc.)
– “Recorrido”: recorrido cubierto desde la última puesta a
cero (reset)
– “Tiempo de marcha”: Tiempo de marcha desde el último
reset
– “Velocidad media”: velocidad promedio alcanzada desde
la última puesta a cero (reset)
– “Velocidad máxima”: velocidad máxima alcanzada desde
la última puesta a cero (reset)
– “Hora”: hora actual
Para acceder al indicador de función pulse la tecla “i” 1 del
ordenador de control, o la tecla “i” 11 del cuadro de mandos
tantas veces como sea necesario hasta visualizar la función
deseada.
Para efectuar el Reset (puesta cero) de la “Recorrido”,
“Tiempo de marcha” y “Velocidad media” cambie a una de
estas tres funciones y mantenga pulsada la tecla “RESET” 6
hasta poner a cero el indicador. Con ello se ponen a cero también las otras dos funciones.
Para efectuar el Reset de la “Velocidad máxima” acceda a esta función y mantenga pulsada la tecla “RESET” 6 hasta poner
a cero el valor indicado.
Si el ordenador de control se saca del soporte 4 quedan memorizados y pueden seguirse visualizando todos los valores
de las funciones.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–5
Visualización/adaptación de los ajustes básicos
La visualización y modificación de los ajustes básicos puede
llevarse a cabo teniendo montado o no el ordenador de control en el soporte 4.
Para acceder al menú Ajustes básicos mantenga simultáneamente pulsadas la tecla “RESET” 6 y la tecla “i” 1 hasta representarse “Configuración” en el indicador de textos c.
Para seleccionar los parámetros en los ajustes básicos pulse la tecla “i” 1 tantas veces como sea necesario hasta visualizar el parámetro deseado. Si el ordenador de control está
montado en el soporte 4, Ud. puede pulsar también la tecla “i”
11 del cuadro de mandos.
Para modificar los parámetros de los ajustes básicos pulse
la tecla de conexión/desconexión 5 junto al indicador “ –” si
desea reducir su valor u hojear hacia abajo, o bien, la tecla de
iluminación 2 junto al indicador “+”, si lo que desea es aumentar el valor u hojear hacia arriba.
Si el ordenador de control está montado en el soporte 4 es po-
sible realizar el cambio también con las teclas “ –” 12 o “+” 13
del cuadro de mandos.
Para abandonar la función y memorizar el cambio realizado
pulse la tecla “RESET” 6 3 s.
Puede elegir entre los siguientes ajustes básicos:
– “Unidad km/mi”: Representación de la velocidad y distancia en kilómetros o millas.
– “Formato de hora”: Representación de la hora en formato
de 12 ó 24 horas.
– “Hora”: Permite ajustar la hora. Al mantener pulsadas las
teclas de ajuste el cambio de la hora es más rápido.
– “Español”: Permite ajustar el idioma mostrado en el display. Puede elegirse entre español, alemán, inglés, francés, italiano y holandés.
– “Recorrido total”: Indicación del recorrido total (no modificable) realizado con la eBike
– “Total horas funcion.”: Indicación de tiempo de marcha
total (no modificable) realizado con la eBike
Indicador de código de fallos
Los componentes del sistema de la eBike son permanentemente controlados de forma automática. En caso de detectarse un fallo aparece el respectivo código de fallos en el indicador de textos c.
Pulse una tecla cualquiera del ordenador de control 3 o del
cuadro de mandos 10 para regresar a la indicación estándar.
Según el tipo de fallo puede que se desactive automáticamente el accionamiento. Sin embargo, es posible continuar la
marcha en todo momento sin recurrir al accionamiento. Antes
de volver a circular con ella deberá hacerse controlar la eBike.
 Deje que todas las comprobaciones y reparaciones
sean realizadas exclusivamente en una tienda de bicicletas autorizada. Si a pesar de que Ud. haya subsanado
el fallo éste se sigue visualizando, diríjase asimismo a una
tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Código
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
Causa
Fallo interno de la unidad motriz
Problema de conexión en la unidad
motriz
Fallo en captador de velocidad
Problema de conexión en la iluminación
Problema de conexión del ordenador
de control
Temperatura excesiva en la unidad
motriz (más de 40 °C)
Solución
Haga verificar la unidad motriz
Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
Haga verificar el captador de velocidad
Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
Deje que se enfríe la unidad motriz. Es posible continuar circulando sin el
accionamiento de la eBike lo cual además agiliza el enfriamiento de la unidad motriz.
Fallo interno en el sistema electrónico Deje verificar el acumulador
del acumulador
Temperatura excesiva del acumulador Deje que se enfríe el acumulador. Es posible continuar circulando sin el
(más de 40 °C)
accionamiento de la eBike lo cual además agiliza el enfriamiento del acumulador.
Temperatura demasiado baja en el
Mantenga el acumulador en un cuarto caliente para permitir que se calienacumulador (inferior a –10 °C)
te lentamente.
Problema de conexión del acumulador Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
* solamente si la iluminación de la eBike funciona con el acumulador (según ejecución país)
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–6
Código
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Causa
Polaridad incorrecta del acumulador
Solución
Cargue el acumulador con el cargador original Bosch según se describe en
sus instrucciones de uso.
Bloqueo de una o varias teclas del or- Verifique si las teclas están atascadas, p.ej., al haber penetrado suciedenador de control
dad. Si procede, limpie las teclas.
Problema de conexión en el cuadro de Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
mandos
Bloqueo de una o varias teclas del cua- Verifique si las teclas están atascadas, p.ej., al haber penetrado suciedro de mandos.
dad. Si procede, limpie las teclas.
Problema de conexión en la unidad
Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
motriz
Problema de conexión del acumulador Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
Error de comunicación entre los com- Deje verificar las conexiones y las uniones
ponentes
El acumulador interno del ordenador Recargar el ordenador de control (en el soporte o vía puerto USB)
de control está descargado
Fallo interno del ordenador de control Haga verificar el ordenador de control
* solamente si la iluminación de la eBike funciona con el acumulador (según ejecución país)
Alimentación de aparatos externos vía puerto
USB
A través del puerto USB pueden funcionar o recargarse la mayoría de los aparatos previstos para ser alimentados vía USB
(p. ej. diversos móviles).
Para poder efectuar la carga es necesario que estén montados en la eBike el ordenador de control y un acumulador suficientemente cargado.
Abra el capuchón 8 del puerto USB del ordenador de control.
Conecte el puerto USB del aparato externo a través de un cable USB apropiado con el puerto USB 7 del ordenador de control.
Instrucciones para la conducción con el sistema
de la eBike
¿Cuándo trabaja el accionamiento de la eBike?
El accionamiento de la eBike le asiste siempre que Ud. vaya
pedaleando. La asistencia cesa cuando deja de pedalear. La
potencia del motor depende siempre de la fuerza aplicada al
pedalear.
Si la fuerza aplicada es baja la asistencia es menor que al aplicar gran fuerza. Ello es independiente del modo de asistencia
seleccionado.
El accionamiento de la eBike se desactiva automáticamente a
velocidades superiores a 45 km/h. Si la velocidad queda por
debajo de 45 km/h el accionamiento se activa nuevamente de
forma automática.
Queda exceptuado de ello la función de Asistencia al arrancar
en la que la eBike puede circular a baja velocidad sin pedalear.
Bosch eBike Systems
Siempre que Ud. lo desee puede circular también sin la asistencia motorizada con la eBike, igual que con una bicicleta
convencional, ya sea desconectando el sistema de la eBike o
ajustando el nivel de asistencia a “OFF”. Lo mismo es válido
con un acumulador vacío.
Interacción entre el sistema de la eBike y el cambio
También con el accionamiento de la eBike el cambio deberá
utilizarse igual que en una bicicleta convencional (consulte al
respecto las instrucciones de uso de su eBike).
Independientemente del tipo de cambio empleado es recomendable dejar de pedalear brevemente antes de efectuar un
cambio de marcha. Ello no sólo facilita el cambio de marcha
sino que también reduce el desgaste del mecanismo de accionamiento.
Seleccionando el cambio de marcha correcto Ud. puede aumentar la velocidad y el alcance aplicando la misma fuerza
muscular.
Acumulación de experiencia
Se recomienda ir adquiriendo experiencia con la eBike en lugares alejados de carreteras con mucho tráfico.
Pruebe diferentes modos de asistencia. Cuando se sienta seguro Ud. podrá circular con su eBike en el tráfico igual que con
cualquier otra bicicleta.
Compruebe la autonomía de eBike bajo condiciones diferentes antes de realizar unos recorridos más largos y difíciles.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–7
Influencias sobre la autonomía
La autonomía se ve afectada por múltiples factores como, por
ejemplo:
– Modo de asistencia.
– Uso del cambio.
– Tipo y presión del neumático.
– Antigüedad y estado del acumulador.
– Características del terreno (pendientes) y del firme (tipo
de pavimento).
– Viento de frente y temperatura ambiente.
– Peso de la eBike, del ciclista y del equipaje.
Por ello es imposible predecir con certeza la autonomía para
un recorrido específico. Sin embargo, en términos generales
puede decirse:
– A igual potencia del motor en el accionamiento de la eBike:
Cuanto menor sea el esfuerzo que Ud. tenga que realizar
para alcanzar una velocidad concreta (p. ej. utilizando de
forma óptima el cambio de marchas) tanto menor será la
energía consumida por el accionamiento de la eBike y tanto mayor la autonomía con una carga del acumulador.
– Cuanto mayor sea el nivel de asistencia, manteniendo
iguales las demás condiciones, tanto menor será la autonomía obtenida.
Trato cuidadoso de la eBike
Tenga en cuenta las temperaturas de servicio y almacenaje de
los componentes de la eBike. No exponga la unidad motriz, el
ordenador de control, y el acumulador a temperaturas extremas (p. ej. sol intenso sin circulación de aire). Los componentes (especialmente el acumulador) pueden dañarse si se exponen a temperaturas extremas.
Mantenimiento y servicio
Mantenimiento y limpieza
Mantenga limpios los componentes de su eBike, especialmente los contactos del acumulador y del respectivo soporte.
Límpielos con cuidado con un paño húmedo y suave.
Todos los componentes inclusive la unidad motriz no deberán
sumergirse en agua ni tratarse con una limpiadora de alta presión.
Para el servicio técnico o la reparación de la eBike diríjase a
una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Servicio técnico y atención al cliente
En todas las consultas sobre el sistema de la eBike y sus componentes diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Las direcciones de tiendas de bicicletas autorizadas las encuentra en la página de internet www.bosch-ebike.com
Transporte
Los acumuladores están sujetos a los requerimientos fijados
en la legislación sobre mercancías peligrosas. Los acumuladores pueden ser transportados por carretera por el usuario
particular sin más imposiciones.
En caso de transporte por usuarios comerciales o envío por
terceros (p. ej., transporte aéreo o agencia de transportes)
deberán considerarse las exigencias especiales en cuanto a
su embalaje e identificación (p. ej. prescripciones ADR). Si
fuese preciso, puede recurrirse a un experto en mercancías
peligrosas al preparar la pieza para su envío.
Únicamente envíe acumuladores si su carcasa no está dañada. Si los contactos no van protegidos cúbralos con cinta adhesiva y embale el acumulador de manera que éste no se pueda mover dentro del embalaje. Observe también las
prescripciones adicionales que pudieran existir al respecto
en su país.
En todas las consultas referentes al transporte de los acumuladores diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada. En dichas tiendas puede Ud. adquirir también un embalaje de
transporte apropiado.
Eliminación
La unidad motriz, el ordenador de control incl. cuadro
de mandos, el acumulador, el captador de velocidad,
los accesorios y embalajes deberán someterse a un
proceso de recuperación que respete el medio ambiente.
¡No arroje las eBike ni sus componentes a la basura!
Sólo para los países de la UE:
Los aparatos eléctricos inservibles, así como los acumuladores/pilas defectuosos o
agotados deberán acumularse por separado para ser sometidos a un reciclaje ecológico tal como lo marcan las Directivas Europeas 2002/96/CE y 2006/66/CE,
respectivamente.
El acumulador integrado en el ordenador de control solamente deberá desmontarse para ser desechado. Al abrir la semicarcasa puede que se dañe el ordenador de control.
Entregue los acumuladores y ordenadores de control inservibles en una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Iones de Litio:
Observe las indicaciones comprendidas en el apartado “Transporte”, página Español–7.
Reservado el derecho de modificación.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–8
PowerPack con acumuladores de Iones de Litio
Instrucciones de seguridad
Lea íntegramente todas las
indicaciones de seguridad e
instrucciones. En caso de no
atenerse a las indicaciones de
seguridad e instrucciones siguientes, puede ocasionarse una descarga eléctrica, un incendio y/o lesión grave.
Guarde todas las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones para posibles consultas futuras.
El término “acumulador” empleado en estas instrucciones de
uso se refiere indistintamente tanto a los acumuladores estándar (acumuladores de fijación al cuadro de la bicicleta) como a los acumuladores para portaequipajes (acumuladores
de fijación al portaequipajes), excepto en aquellos casos en
los que se haga referencia expresa a la forma constructiva.
 Desmonte el acumulador de la eBike antes de realizar
trabajos en esta última (p.ej. montaje, mantenimiento,
etc.) al transportarla en el coche o avión, o al guardarla.
En caso contrario podría accidentarse al accionar fortuitamente el interruptor de conexión/desconexión.
 No abra el acumulador. De lo contrario, podría producirse un cortocircuito. Si se abre el acumulador se denegará
la garantía.
Proteja el acumulador del calor excesivo (p. ej.
también de una exposición prolongada al sol),
del fuego y de una inmersión en agua. Existe el
riesgo de explosión.
 Si no utiliza el acumulador, guárdelo separado de clips,
monedas, llaves, clavos, tornillos o demás objetos metálicos que pudieran puentear sus contactos. El cortocircuito de los contactos del acumulador puede causar
quemaduras o un incendio. En los daños derivados de un
cortocircuito por los motivos antedichos Bosch anula cualquier derecho a garantía.
 La utilización inadecuada del acumulador puede provocar fugas de líquido. Evite el contacto con él. En caso de
un contacto accidental enjuagar el área afectada con
abundante agua. Si ha penetrado líquido en los ojos recurra además inmediatamente a un médico. El líquido
del acumulador puede irritar la piel o producir quemaduras.
 Si el acumulador se daña o usa de forma inapropiada
puede que éste emane vapores. Ventile con aire fresco
el recinto y acuda a un médico si nota alguna molestia.
Los vapores pueden irritar las vías respiratorias.
 Únicamente cargue el acumulador con cargadores originales Bosch. Al utilizar cargadores que no sean originales Bosch no puede excluirse un peligro de incendio.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Únicamente utilice el acumulador en eBikes equipadas
con el sistema motriz para eBikes original Bosch. Solamente así queda protegido el acumulador contra una sobrecarga peligrosa.
 Únicamente utilice acumuladores originales Bosch homologados por el fabricante de su eBike. El uso de otro
tipo de acumuladores puede acarrear lesiones e incluso un
incendio. Si se aplican acumuladores de otro tipo Bosch
declina cualquier responsabilidad y el derecho a garantía.
 Lea y aténgase a las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones que figuran en las instrucciones de uso del
cargador y de la unidad motriz/ordenador de control,
así como en las instrucciones de uso de su eBike.
Descripción y prestaciones del
producto
Componentes principales
(ver página 4–5)
La numeración de los componentes está referida a las imágenes en las páginas ilustradas.
A excepción de los acumuladores y sus soportes, las piezas de
la bicicleta solamente se representan de forma esquemática y
pueden ser diferentes en su eBike.
19 Soporte del acumulador para portaequipajes
20 Acumulador para portaequipajes
21 Indicador de funcionamiento y estado de carga
22 Tecla de conexión/desconexión
23 Llave de la cerradura del acumulador
24 Cerradura del acumulador
25 Soporte superior del acumulador estándar
26 Acumulador estándar
27 Soporte inferior del acumulador estándar
28 Correa de transporte
29 Cargador
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–9
Datos técnicos
Acumulador de Iones de Litio
Nº de artículo
– Acumulador estándar negro
– Acumulador estándar blanco
– Acumulador para portaequipajes
Tensión nominal
Capacidad nominal
Energía
Temperatura de operación
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Margen admisible de la temperatura de carga
Peso, aprox.
Grado de protección
Montaje
 Únicamente deposite el acumulador sobre superficies
limpias. Ponga especial cuidado de no ensuciar el conector
hembra para carga ni los contactos con arena o tierra, p.ej.
Control del acumulador antes del primer uso
Compruebe el acumulador antes de cargarlo o utilizarlo por
primera vez en su eBike.
Para ello conecte el acumulador pulsando la tecla de Conexión/desconexión 22. Si no se enciende ningún LED del indicador de estado de carga 21, es probable que el acumulador esté dañado.
Si se enciende uno o algunos de los LED (pero no todos ellos)
del indicador de estado de carga 21 recargue completamente
el acumulador antes de su primer uso.
 No recargue ni utilice un acumulador dañado. Diríjase a
una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Recarga del acumulador
 Únicamente use el cargador que se suministra con su
eBike u otro original Bosch del mismo tipo. Solamente
este cargador ha sido especialmente adaptado al acumulador de iones de litio empleado en su eBike.
Observación: El acumulador se suministra parcialmente cargado. Con el fin de obtener la plena potencia del acumulador,
antes de su primer uso, cárguelo completamente con el cargador.
Para recargar el acumulador es necesario desmontarlo de la
eBike.
Lea y aténgase a las instrucciones de uso del cargador al cargar el acumulador.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8,2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2,5
2,5
IP 54 (protección contra
IP 54 (protección contra
polvo y salpicaduras de agua) polvo y salpicaduras de agua)
El acumulador puede recargarse siempre que se quiera, sin
que ello merme su vida útil. Una interrupción del proceso de
carga no afecta al acumulador.
El acumulador viene equipado con un control de temperatura
que únicamente permite su recarga dentro de un margen de
temperatura entre 0 °C y 40 °C.
Si el acumulador se encuentra
fuera del margen de la temperatura de carga parpadean tres
LED del indicador de estado de
carga 21. Desconecte el acumulador del cargador y permita
que alcance la temperatura correcta.
No conecte de nuevo el acumulador al cargador hasta que haya alcanzado la temperatura de carga correcta.
Indicador de estado de carga
El nivel de carga del acumulador se señaliza mediante los cinco LED verdes del indicador de carga 21.
Cada uno de los LED corresponde por lo tanto a una capacidad aprox. de 20 %. Si el acumulador está completamente
cargado se encienden los cinco LED.
Una vez conectado el acumulador el nivel de carga se muestra
además en el ordenador de control. Lea y considere al respecto las instrucciones de uso de la unidad motriz y del ordenador de control.
Si la capacidad del acumulador es inferior a un 5 % se apagan
todos los LED del indicador de estado de carga 21, pero queda encendida la pantalla del ordenador de control.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–10
Montaje y desmontaje del acumulador
(ver figuras C–D)
 Siempre desconecte el acumulador al montarlo o desmontarlo del soporte.
Para poder montar el acumulador es necesario que la llave 23
esté metida en la cerradura 24 y que ésta esté abierta.
Para montar el acumulador estándar 26 colóquelo con los
contactos orientados hacia el soporte inferior 27 en la eBike.
Abátalo hasta el tope hacia el soporte superior 25.
Para montar el acumulador para portaequipajes 20 empújelo con los contactos mirando hacia el frente hasta enclavarlo
en el soporte 19 del portaequipajes.
Controle si ha quedado firmemente sujeto el acumulador.
Siempre cierre el acumulador con la cerradura 24 para evitar
que el acumulador se salga del soporte.
Saque siempre la llave 23 de la cerradura 24 después de cerrarla. Así evitará que se pierda la llave, o que al tener estacionada la eBike le sea sustraído el acumulador.
Para desmontar el acumulador estándar 26 desconéctelo
primero y abra entonces la cerradura con la llave 23. Abata
hacia atrás el acumulador para desprenderlo del soporte superior 25 y sáquelo del soporte inferior 27 agarrándolo de la
correa de transporte 28.
Para desmontar el acumulador para portaequipajes 20
desconéctelo primero y abra entonces la cerradura con la llave 23. Tire del acumulador para sacarlo del soporte 19.
Operación
Puesta en marcha
 Únicamente utilice acumuladores originales Bosch homologados por el fabricante de su eBike. El uso de otro
tipo de acumuladores puede acarrear lesiones e incluso un
incendio. Si se aplican acumuladores de otro tipo Bosch
declina cualquier responsabilidad y el derecho a garantía.
Conexión/desconexión
La conexión del acumulador es una de las posibilidades que
existen para conectar el sistema de la eBike. Lea y considere
al respecto las instrucciones de uso de la unidad motriz y del
ordenador de control.
Antes de conectar el acumulador o el sistema de la eBike asegúrese de que la cerradura 24 esté cerrada.
Observación: Al conectar el sistema de la eBike no deberán
presionarse los pedales de la eBike ya que ello reduciría la potencia del accionamiento de la eBike.
Para conectar el acumulador pulse la tecla de Conexión/desconexión 22. Los LED de la pantalla 21 se iluminan e indican
seguidamente el nivel de carga.
Bosch eBike Systems
Observación: Si la capacidad del acumulador fuese inferior a
un 5 %, en el indicador de estado de carga 21 del acumulador
no se enciende ningún LED. Solamente en el ordenador de
control es posible apreciar en ese caso si el sistema de la
eBike está conectado.
Para desconectar el acumulador pulse nuevamente la tecla
de Conexión/desconexión 22. Los LED de la pantalla 21 se
apagan. Con ello se desconecta asimismo el sistema de la
eBike.
Si en el transcurso de 10 min el accionamiento sigue inactivo
(p. ej., al estar detenida la eBike) y no se ha pulsado ninguna
tecla del ordenador de control o cuadro de mandos de la
eBike, el sistema de la eBike, y con ello también el acumulador, se desconectan automáticamente con el fin de ahorrar
energía.
El acumulador va protegido contra alta descarga, sobrecarga,
sobretemperatura y cortocircuito por “Electronic Cell Protection (ECP) (Protección Electrónica de Celdas)”. En esos casos, un circuito de protección se encarga de desconectar automáticamente el acumulador.
Si se detecta un daño en el acumulador parpadean los dos LED
del indicador de estado de carga 21. Diríjase en ese caso a
una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Indicaciones para el trato óptimo del acumulador
La vida útil del acumulador puede prolongarse si éste se trata
apropiadamente y ante todo si se almacena respetando el
margen de temperatura prescrito.
Aún así, a medida que va envejeciendo el acumulador, su capacidad irá mermando.
Si después de haberlo recargado, el tiempo de funcionamiento del acumulador fuese muy corto, ello es síntoma de que está agotado. Puede sustituir entonces el acumulador.
Si está dañada la correa de transporte 28 del acumulador estándar deje sustituirla en una tienda de bicicletas.
Recarga del acumulador antes y durante su almacenaje
Si pretende no utilizar el acumulador durante largo tiempo,
recárguelo a aprox. un 60 % (deberán estar encendidos 3 a 4
LED del indicador de estado de carga 21).
Controle el nivel de carga pasados 6 meses. Si sólo se enciende un LED del indicador de estado de carga 21 vuelva a recargar el acumulador un 60 %, aprox.
Observación: Si el acumulador se guarda durante largo tiempo estando descargado, a pesar de su baja autodescarga, éste puede llegar a dañarse y reducirse considerablemente su
capacidad.
No se recomienda dejar permanentemente conectado el acumulador al cargador.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–11
Condiciones para el almacenaje
Se aconseja guardar el acumulador en un lugar seco y bien
ventilado. Protéjalo de la humedad y del agua. Si las condiciones atmosféricas son adversas se recomienda, p. ej., desmontar el acumulador de la eBike y guardarlo hasta su próxima utilización en un recinto cerrado.
El acumulador puede almacenarse dentro de un margen de
temperatura de –10 °C a +60 °C. Sin embargo, para lograr
un larga vida útil es recomendable almacenarlo a una temperatura ambiente aprox. de 20 °C.
Preste atención a no rebasar la temperatura de almacenaje
máxima. P. ej., no deje el acumulador en el coche en verano y
guárdelo de manera que no quede directamente expuesto al
sol.
Mantenimiento y servicio
Mantenimiento y limpieza
Mantenga limpio el acumulador. Límpielo con cuidado con un
paño húmedo y suave. El acumulador no deberá sumergirse
en agua ni limpiarse con un chorro de agua.
Si su acumulador ya no funciona acuda por favor a una tienda
de bicicletas autorizada.
Servicio técnico y atención al cliente
En todas las consultas sobre acumuladores diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
 Anote el fabricante y el número de la llave 23. En caso
de pérdida de la llave diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada. Deberá indicar entonces el fabricante y el número de la llave.
Las direcciones de tiendas de bicicletas autorizadas las encuentra en la página de internet www.bosch-ebike.com
En todas las consultas referentes al transporte de los acumuladores diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada. En dichas tiendas puede Ud. adquirir también un embalaje de
transporte apropiado.
Eliminación
Los acumuladores, accesorios y embalajes deberán
someterse a un proceso de recuperación que respete
el medio ambiente.
¡No arroje los acumuladores a la basura!
Sólo para los países de la UE:
Los aparatos eléctricos inservibles, así como los acumuladores/pilas defectuosos o
agotados deberán acumularse por separado para ser sometidos a un reciclaje ecológico tal como lo marcan las Directivas Europeas 2002/96/CE y 2006/66/CE,
respectivamente.
Entregue los acumuladores inservibles en una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Iones de Litio:
Observe las indicaciones comprendidas en el apartado “Transporte”, página Español–11.
Reservado el derecho de modificación.
Transporte
Los acumuladores están sujetos a los requerimientos fijados
en la legislación sobre mercancías peligrosas. Los acumuladores pueden ser transportados por carretera por el usuario
particular sin más imposiciones.
En caso de transporte por usuarios comerciales o envío por
terceros (p. ej., transporte aéreo o agencia de transportes)
deberán considerarse las exigencias especiales en cuanto a
su embalaje e identificación (p. ej. prescripciones ADR). Si
fuese preciso, puede recurrirse a un experto en mercancías
peligrosas al preparar la pieza para su envío.
Únicamente envíe acumuladores si su carcasa no está dañada. Si los contactos no van protegidos cúbralos con cinta adhesiva y embale el acumulador de manera que éste no se pueda mover dentro del embalaje. Observe también las
prescripciones adicionales que pudieran existir al respecto
en su país.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–12
Cargador Charger
Instrucciones de seguridad
Lea íntegramente todas las
indicaciones de seguridad e
instrucciones. En caso de no
atenerse a las indicaciones de
seguridad e instrucciones siguientes, puede ocasionarse una descarga eléctrica, un incendio y/o lesión grave.
Guarde todas las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones para posibles consultas futuras.
El término “acumulador” empleado en estas instrucciones de
uso se refiere indistintamente tanto a los acumuladores estándar (acumuladores de fijación al cuadro de la bicicleta) como a los acumuladores para portaequipajes (acumuladores
de fijación al portaequipajes).
No exponga el cargador a la lluvia y evite que penetren líquidos en su interior. La penetración de agua
en el cargador comporta un mayor riesgo de electrocución.
 Solamente cargue acumuladores de iones de litio
Bosch homologados para eBikes. La tensión del acumulador deberá corresponder a la tensión de carga del
cargador. En caso de no atenerse a ello podría originarse
un incendio o explosión.
 Siempre mantenga limpio el cargador. La suciedad puede comportar un riesgo de electrocución.
 Antes de cada utilización verificar el estado del cargador, cable y enchufe. No utilice el cargador en caso de
detectar algún desperfecto. Jamás intente abrir el cargador por su propia cuenta, y solamente hágalo reparar
por personal técnico cualificado empleando exclusivamente piezas de repuesto originales. Un cargador, cable
y enchufe deteriorados comportan un mayor riesgo de
electrocución.
 No utilice el cargador sobre una base fácilmente inflamable (p.ej. papel, tela, etc.) ni en un entorno inflamable. Puesto que el cargador se calienta durante el proceso
de carga existe un peligro de incendio.
 Si el acumulador se daña o usa de forma inapropiada
puede que éste emane vapores. Ventile con aire fresco
el recinto y acuda a un médico si nota alguna molestia.
Los vapores pueden irritar las vías respiratorias.
 Vigile a los niños. Con ello se evita que los niños jueguen
con el cargador.
 Los niños y personas que por sus condiciones físicas,
sensoriales o mentales, o por su falta de experiencia o
conocimientos no estén en disposición de manejar el
cargador de forma segura, no deberán utilizar este cargador sin ser supervisados o instruidos por una persoBosch eBike Systems
na responsable. En caso contrario existe el riesgo de un
manejo incorrecto y de lesión.
 Lea y aténgase a las indicaciones de seguridad e instrucciones que figuran en las instrucciones de uso del
acumulador y de la unidad motriz/ordenador de control, así como en las instrucciones de uso de su eBike.
 En la parte inferior del cargador figuran de forma abreviada
importantes instrucciones de seguridad en español, inglés
y francés (ver posición 33 en la ilustración) con el siguiente contenido:
– Para un funcionamiento con seguridad, ver el manual.
Peligro de sacudida eléctrica.
– Utilice solamente en lugares secos.
– Cargar únicamente baterías de sistemas eBike de
Bosch. Otras baterías podrían reventar, causando lesiones personales y daños.
– No reemplace el ensamblaje del enchufe, ya que el resultado puede ser riesgo de incendio o sacudidas eléctricas.
Descripción y prestaciones del
producto
Componentes principales (ver página 6–7)
La numeración de los componentes está referida a la imagen
del cargador en la página ilustrada.
20 Acumulador para portaequipajes
21 Indicador del estado de carga del acumulador
26 Acumulador estándar
29 Cargador
30 Conector hembra del aparato
31 Enchufe del aparato
32 Rejillas de refrigeración
33 Instrucciones de seguridad del cargador
34 Conector del cargador
35 Conector hembra para el cargador
Datos técnicos
Cargador
Nº de artículo
Tensión nominal
Frecuencia
Tensión de carga del acumulador
Corriente de carga
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
Estos datos son válidos para una tensión nominal de [U] 230 V. Los valores pueden variar para otras tensiones y en ejecuciones específicas
para ciertos países.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–13
Cargador
Margen admisible de la temperatura de carga
Tiempo de carga
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Nº de celdas
Temperatura de operación
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Peso según EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Grado de protección
Charger
°C
0...+40
h
h
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
°C
°C
kg
0,8
IP 40
Estos datos son válidos para una tensión nominal de [U] 230 V. Los valores pueden variar para otras tensiones y en ejecuciones específicas
para ciertos países.
Operación
 Tenga cuidado al tocar el cargador durante el proceso
de carga. Utilice guantes de protección. El cargador
puede llegar a calentarse fuertemente, especialmente si la
temperatura ambiente es alta.
Observación: Preste atención a que el cargador esté bien
ventilado durante el proceso de carga y que no estén obstruidas las rejillas de refrigeración 32 en ambos lados.
El acumulador se encuentra completamente cargado al encenderse permanentemente los cinco LED del indicador 21.
El proceso de carga es interrumpido automáticamente.
Desconecte el cargador de la red y el acumulador del cargador.
Al desconectar del cargador el acumulador éste último se desconecta automáticamente.
Acto seguido puede Ud. montar el acumulador en la eBike.
Fallos – causas y soluciones
Causa
Solución
Parpadeo de dos LED del
acumulador
Acumulador defectuoso
Acuda a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada
Parpadeo de tres LED del
acumulador
 Únicamente deposite el acumulador sobre superficies
limpias. Ponga especial cuidado de no ensuciar el conector
hembra para carga ni los contactos con arena o tierra, p.ej.
Puesta en marcha
Conexión del cargador (ver figuras E–F)
 ¡Preste atención a la tensión de red! La tensión de alimentación deberá coincidir con aquella indicada en la placa de características del cargador. Los cargadores para
230 V pueden funcionar también a 220 V.
Introduzca el enchufe 31 del cable de red en el conector hembra 30 del cargador.
Conecte el enchufe (específico de cada país) a la red.
Desconecte el acumulador y desmóntelo del soporte de la
eBike. Para ello lea y aténgase a las instrucciones de uso del
acumulador.
Conecte el conector macho 34 del cargador al conector hembra 35 del acumulador.
Proceso de carga
El proceso de carga comienza nada más conectar al acumulador el cargador teniendo éste conectado a la red.
Observación: La carga solamente puede llevarse a cabo si la
temperatura del acumulador se encuentra dentro del campo
admisible.
Durante la carga se encienden los LED del indicador de estado
de carga 21 del acumulador. Cada LED permanentemente encendido supone un incremento de capacidad aprox. de un
20 %. El LED parpadeante señaliza la carga del 20 % siguiente.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Acumulador demasiado caliente o frío
Desconecte del cargador el
acumulador y deje que se
atempere a la temperatura de
carga admisible.
No conecte de nuevo el acumulador al cargador hasta
que haya alcanzado la temperatura de carga correcta.
No es posible cargar (ninguna indicación en el
acumulador)
Enchufe incorrectamente in- Verificar todas las conexiotroducido
nes por enchufe
Contactos del acumulador, Limpiar con cuidado los
sucios
contactos del acumulador
Rejillas de refrigeración 32 Limpiar las rejillas de refrigedel cargador obstruidas o cu- ración 32 y colocar el cargabiertas
dor de manera pueda ventilarse bien
Toma de corriente, cable o Verificar la tensión de red,
cargador defectuoso
dejar comprobar el cargador
en la tienda de bicicletas
Acumulador defectuoso
Acuda a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Español–14
Mantenimiento y servicio
Mantenimiento y limpieza
Si el cargador llegase a averiarse diríjase a una tienda de bicicletas autorizada.
Servicio técnico y atención al cliente
En todas las consultas sobre el cargador diríjase a una tienda
de bicicletas autorizada.
Las direcciones de tiendas de bicicletas autorizadas las encuentra en la página de internet www.bosch-ebike.com
Eliminación
Los cargadores, accesorios y embalajes deberán someterse a
un proceso de recuperación que respete el medio ambiente.
¡No arroje los cargadores a la basura!
Sólo para los países de la UE:
Conforme a la Directiva Europea
2002/96/CE sobre aparatos eléctricos y
electrónicos inservibles, tras su transposición en ley nacional, deberán acumularse
por separado los cargadores para ser sometidos a un reciclaje ecológico.
Reservado el derecho de modificación.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–1
Unità di azionamento Drive Unit Speed/
Computer di controllo Intuvia
Norme di sicurezza
Leggere tutte le indicazioni di sicurezza e le
istruzioni operative. In caso di mancato rispetto delle indicazioni di sicurezza e delle
istruzioni operative possono verificarsi scosse
elettriche, incendi e/o lesioni gravi.
Conservare tutte le indicazioni di sicurezza e le istruzioni
operative per ogni esigenza futura.
Il termine utilizzato nelle presenti istruzioni per l’uso «batteria
ricaricabile» si riferisce allo stesso modo a batterie ricaricabili
standard (batterie ricaricabili con supporto sul telaio della bicicletta) e a batterie ricaricabili per montaggio al portapacchi
(batterie ricaricabili con supporto nel portapacchi).
 Non aprire da soli l’unità di azionamento. L’unità di
azionamento non necessita di manutenzione e può essere riparata esclusivamente da personale specializzato ed impiegando solo pezzi di ricambio originali. In
questo modo viene garantita la salvaguardia della sicurezza dell’unità di azionamento. In caso di apertura non autorizzata dell’unità di azionamento decadrà qualsiasi pretesa
di garanzia.
 Tutti i componenti montati sull’unità di azionamento e
tutti gli altri componenti dell’azionamento dell’eBike
(p.es. ingranaggio catena, supporto dell’ingranaggio
catena, pedali) possono essere sostituiti esclusivamente da componenti uguali strutturalmente oppure omologati dal produttore della bicicletta specificatamente
per la Vostra eBike. In questo modo l’unità di azionamento
viene protetta da sovraccarico e danneggiamento.
 Rimuovere la batteria ricaricabile dalla eBike prima di
iniziare interventi (p. es. montaggio, manutenzione
ecc.) alla eBike, prima di trasportarla con l’auto o l’aereo oppure prima di conservarla. In caso di azionamento
accidentale dell’interruttore di avvio/arresto esiste pericolo di lesioni.
 La funzione aiuto all’avviamento deve essere utilizzata
esclusivamente all’avviamento dell’eBike. Se durante
l’impiego dell’aiuto all’avviamento le ruote dell’eBike non
hanno alcun contatto con il terreno esiste il pericolo di lesioni.
 Utilizzare esclusivamente batterie ricaricabili originali
Bosch che sono state omologate dal produttore per
l’eBike. L’impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse da quelle
consigliate potrà comportare il pericolo di lesioni e d’incendio. In caso di impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse,
Bosch non si assumerà alcuna responsabilità civile e garanzia.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Osservare tutte le norme nazionali relative all’immatricolazione ed impiego di eBike.
 Leggere ed osservare le indicazioni di sicurezza e le
istruzioni operative indicate nelle istruzioni per l’uso
della batteria ricaricabile e nelle istruzioni per l’uso
dell’eBike.
Descrizione del prodotto e
caratteristiche
Uso conforme alle norme
L’unità di azionamento è destinata esclusivamente all’azionamento della Vostra eBike e non deve essere utilizzata per altri
scopi.
L’eBike è prevista per impiego su percorsi pavimentati. La
stessa non è omologata per gare.
Componenti illustrati
(vedi pagina 2–3)
La numerazione dei componenti si riferisce alle illustrazioni riportate sulla pagina con la rappresentazione grafica.
Tutte le illustrazioni delle parti della bicicletta ad eccezione
dell’unità di azionamento, del computer di controllo inclusa
unità di comando, del sensore della velocità ed i rispettivi supporti sono riportate in modo schematico e possono essere differenti dalla Vostra eBike.
1 Tasto funzione di visualizzazione «i»
2 Tasto illuminazione
3 Computer di controllo
4 Supporto del computer di controllo
5 Tasto di accensione/spegnimento computer di controllo
6 Tasto reset «RESET»
7 Presa USB
8 Copertura di protezione della presa USB
9 Unità di azionamento
10 Unità di comando
11 Tasto funzione di visualizzazione «i» sull’unità di
comando
12 Tasto ridurre valore/sfogliare verso il basso « –»
13 Tasto aumentare valore/sfogliare verso l’alto «+»
14 Tasto aiuto all’avviamento «WALK»
15 Bloccaggio computer di controllo
16 Vite di bloccaggio computer di controllo
17 Sensore di velocità
18 Magnete per raggi del sensore di velocità
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–2
Montaggio
Elementi di visualizzazione computer di controllo
a Visualizzazione potenza del motore
b Visualizzazione livello di assistenza
c Visualizzazione testo
d Visualizzazione valori
e Visualizzazione tachimetro
f Visualizzazione dello stato di carica della batteria
Inserimento e rimozione della batteria
ricaricabile
Per l’inserimento e la rimozione della batteria ricaricabile
nell’eBike leggere ed osservare le istruzioni per l’uso della batteria ricaricabile stessa.
Dati tecnici
Unità di azionamento
Codice prodotto
Potenza
Coppia sull’azionamento
max.
Tensione nominale
Temperatura di esercizio
Temperatura di magazzino
Tipo di protezione
Peso ca.
Computer di controllo
Codice prodotto
Corrente di ricarica
collegamento USB max.
Tensione di ricarica
collegamento USB
Temperatura di esercizio
Temperatura di magazzino
Tipo di protezione
Peso ca.
Illuminazione*
Tensione nominale
Potenza
– Luce anteriore
– Luce posteriore
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (protezione
contro la polvere e
contro gli spruzzi
dell’acqua)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (protezione
contro la polvere e
contro gli spruzzi
dell’acqua)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
Inserimento e rimozione del computer di
controllo (vedi figura A)
Per l’inserimento del computer di controllo 3 spingerlo dal
davanti nel supporto 4.
Per la rimozione del computer di controllo 3 premere sul
bloccaggio 15 e spingerlo in avanti fuori dal supporto 4.
 Togliere il computer di controllo quando l’eBike è parcheggiata affinché l’azionamento non possa essere utilizzato da terzi non autorizzati. Senza il computer di controllo il sistema eBike non può essere attivato.
È anche possibile assicurare contro rimozione il computer di
controllo nel supporto. Per effettuare questa operazione
smontare il supporto 4 dal manubrio. Inserire il computer di
controllo nel supporto. Avvitare dal basso la vite di bloccaggio
16 nella filettatura prevista allo scopo del supporto. Montare
di nuovo il supporto sul manubrio.
Controllo del sensore di velocità (vedi figura B)
Il sensore di velocità 17 ed il relativo magnete per raggi 18 devono essere montati in modo tale che durante un giro della
ruota il magnete per raggi si muova davanti al sensore di velocità ad una distanza minima di 5 mm e massima di 17 mm.
Nota bene: Se la distanza tra il sensore di velocità 17 ed il magnete per raggi 18 è troppo piccola o troppo grande oppure se
il sensore di velocità 17 non è collegato correttamente, non avviene alcuna visualizzazione tachimetro e e l’azionamento
dell’eBike lavora nel programma funzionamento d’emergenza.
In questo caso allentare la vite del magnete per raggi 18 e fissare il magnete ai raggi in modo tale che lo stesso passi davanti
alla marcatura del sensore di velocità alla distanza corretta. Se
anche dopo queste operazioni non compare alcuna velocità
sulla visualizzazione tachimetro e, rivolgersi ad un rivenditore
autorizzato per biciclette.
2,7
0,3
* in funzione delle norme di legge, non è possibile in tutti i modelli specifici dei paesi di impiego tramite la batteria ricaricabile eBike
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–3
Uso
Messa in funzione
Presupposti
Il sistema eBike può essere attivato solamente se sono soddisfatti i seguenti presupposti:
– È inserita una batteria ricaricabile sufficientemente carica
(vedi istruzioni per l’uso della batteria ricaricabile).
– Il computer di controllo è inserito correttamente nel supporto (vedi «Inserimento e rimozione del computer di
controllo», pagina Italiano–2).
– Il sensore di velocità è collegato correttamente (vedi «Controllo del sensore di velocità», pagina Italiano–2).
Attivazione/disattivazione del sistema eBike
Per l’attivazione del sistema eBike vi sono le seguenti possibilità:
– Se il computer di controllo è già acceso quando viene inserito nel supporto, il sistema eBike viene attivato automaticamente.
– Con computer di controllo inserito e batteria ricaricabile
inserita premere una volta brevemente il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 5 del computer di controllo.
– Con computer di controllo inserito premere il tasto di accensione/spegnimento della batteria ricaricabile (vedi
istruzioni per l’uso della batteria ricaricabile).
Nota bene: All’attivazione del sistema eBike i pedali dell’eBike non devono essere caricati poiché altrimenti la potenza del
motore verrebbe limitata. Nella visualizzazione testo c compare la segnalazione di errore «Scaricare il pedale».
Se il sistema eBike è stata attivato accidentalmente con pedali caricati, disattivarlo ed inserirlo di nuovo senza carico.
L’azionamento viene attivato non appena si inizia a pedalare
(ad eccezione che nella funzione aiuto all’avviamento, vedi
«Attivazione/disattivazione dell’aiuto all’avviamento», pagina
Italiano–4). La potenza del motore dipende dalle regolazioni
sul computer di controllo.
Nel funzionamento normale non appena si smette di pedalare
oppure non appena viene raggiunta una velocità di 45 km/h,
l’assistenza tramite l’azionamento eBike viene disattivata.
L’azionamento viene attivato di nuovo automaticamente non
appena si ricomincia a pedalare e la velocità è inferiore a
45 km/h.
Per la disattivazione del sistema eBike vi sono le seguenti
possibilità:
– Premere il tasto di accensione e spegnimento 5 del computer di controllo:
– Disattivare la batteria ricaricabile al suo tasto di accensione/spegnimento (vedi istruzioni per l’uso della batteria ricaricabile).
– Rimuovere il computer di controllo dal supporto.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Se per ca. 10 min non viene richiesto alcun intervento
dell’azionamento (p. es. poiché l’eBike è ferma) e non viene
premuto alcun tasto sul computer di controllo o sull’unità di
comando, il sistema eBike si disattiva automaticamente per
ragioni di risparmio energetico.
Visualizzazioni e regolazioni del computer di
controllo
Alimentazione di corrente del computer di controllo
Se il computer di controllo è posizionato nel supporto 4 e
nell’eBike è inserita una batteria ricaricabile sufficientemente
carica ed il sistema eBike è attivato, il computer di controllo
viene alimentato di corrente tramite la batteria ricaricabile
dell’eBike.
Se il computer di controllo viene rimosso dal supporto 4 l’alimentazione di corrente avviene tramite una batteria ricaricabile interna. Se all’accensione del computer di controllo la
batteria ricaricabile interna è quasi scarica, compare per 3 s
«Collegare a bicic.» nella visualizzazione testo c. Successivamente il computer di controllo si spegne di nuovo.
Per la ricarica della batteria ricaricabile interna inserire di
nuovo il computer di controllo nel supporto 4 (se é inserita
una batteria ricaricabile nell’eBike). Attivare la batteria ricaricabile eBike al suo tasto di accensione/spegnimento (vedi
istruzioni per l’uso della batteria ricaricabile).
È possibile ricaricare il computer di controllo anche tramite il
collegamento USB. Per effettuare questo aprire la copertura
di protezione 8. Collegare la presa USB 7 del computer di controllo, tramite un cavo USB adatto, ad una stazione di ricarica
USB comunemente in commercio oppure al collegamento
USB di un computer (5 V tensione di ricarica; max. 500 mA
corrente di ricarica). Nella visualizzazione testo c del computer di controllo compare «USB connessa».
Accensione/spegnimento del computer di controllo
Per l’accensione del computer di controllo premere brevemente il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 5. Il computer di
controllo può essere acceso anche (con batteria ricaricabile
interna sufficientemente carica) se lo stesso non è inserito nel
supporto.
Per lo spegnimento del computer di controllo premere il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 5.
Se il computer di controllo non è inserito nel supporto, dopo
1 min in cui non viene premuto alcun tasto lo stesso si spegne
automaticamente per ragioni di risparmio energetico.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–4
Visualizzazione dello stato di carica della batteria
L’indicatore dello stato di carica della batteria f visualizza lo
stato di carica della batteria ricaricabile dell’eBike e non della
batteria ricaricabile interna del computer di controllo. Lo stato di carica della batteria ricaricabile dell’eBike può essere rilevato anche ai LED sulla batteria ricaricabile stessa.
Nella visualizzazione f ogni barretta nel simbolo della batteria
ricaricabile corrisponde a circa il 20 % della capacità.
da 100 % a 80 % della capacità
da 20 % a 5 % dell’autonomia, la batteria ricaricabile dovrebbe essere ricaricata.
Inferiore al 5 % dell’autonomia, non è più possibile
l’assistenza dell’azionamento. I LED dell’indicatore
dello stato di carica sulla batteria ricaricabile si
spengono.
Se l’illuminazione dell’eBike viene fatta funzionare tramite la
batteria ricaricabile (specifico del paese di impiego), l’autonomia è sufficiente poi, a partire dalla prima comparsa del
simbolo vuoto della batteria ricaricabile, per ancora circa
2 ore di illuminazione. Quando il simbolo inizia a lampeggiare,
anche l’illuminazione è possibile ancora solo per un breve lasso di tempo.
Se il computer di controllo viene rimosso dal supporto 4, rimane memorizzato lo stato di carica della batteria ricaricabile
visualizzato per ultimo.
Regolazione del livello di assistenza
È possibile regolare al computer di controllo, quanto intensa
dovrà essere l’assistenza dell’azionamento eBike durante la
pedalata. Il livello di assistenza può essere modificato in qualsiasi momento, anche durante la guida.
Nota bene: In singoli modelli è possibile che il livello di assistenza sia preimpostato e che non possa essere cambiato. È
anche possibile che vi siano a disposizione per la selezione
meno livelli di assistenza di quelli indicati nelle presenti istruzioni.
Sono a disposizione al massimo i seguenti livelli di assistenza:
– «OFF»: L’azionamento è disinserito, l’eBike può essere
mossa come una bicicletta normale semplicemente pedalando.
– «ECO»: assistenza efficace alla massima efficienza, per
massima autonomia
– «TOUR»: assistenza regolare, per percorsi con grande autonomia
– «SPORT»: assistenza energica, per guida sportiva su percorsi di montagna nonché per traffico cittadino
– «TURBO»: Assistenza massima fino alle massime frequenze di pedalata, per guida sportiva
Per aumentare il livello di assistenza premere il tasto «+» 13
sull’unità di comando fino a quando compare nella visualizzazione b il livello di assistenza desiderato, per ridurre premere
il tasto « –» 12.
Bosch eBike Systems
La potenza del motore richiamata compare nella visualizzazione a. La potenza del motore massima dipende dal livello di
assistenza selezionato.
Livello di assistenza
«ECO»
«TOUR»
«SPORT»
«TURBO»
Potenza del motore*
(Cambio a catena)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* In singoli modelli la potenza del motore può differire.
Se il computer di controllo viene rimosso dal supporto 4, rimane memorizzato il livello di assistenza visualizzato per ultimo,
la visualizzazione a della potenza del motore rimane vuota.
Attivazione/disattivazione dell’aiuto all’avviamento
L’aiuto all’avviamento può servire quale ulteriore assistenza
per i primi metri quando l’avviamento è più difficoltoso (come
ad. es. al semaforo oppure in salita).
 La funzione aiuto all’avviamento deve essere utilizzata
esclusivamente all’avviamento dell’eBike. Se durante
l’impiego dell’aiuto all’avviamento le ruote dell’eBike non
hanno alcun contatto con il terreno esiste il pericolo di lesioni.
Per l’ attivazione dell’aiuto all’avviamento premere il tasto
«WALK» 14 sull’unità di comando e tenerlo premuto. L’azionamento dell’eBike viene inserito.
L’aiuto all’avviamento viene disattivato non appena si verifica uno dei seguenti avvenimenti:
– Viene rilasciato il tasto «WALK» 14,
– Viene premuto un altro tasto sul computer di controllo,
– Si pedala in avanti oppure velocemente indietro,
– Le ruote dell’eBike vengono bloccate (ad es. frenando oppure urtando contro un ostacolo),
– La velocità supera 18 km/h.
Accensione/spegnimento dell’illuminazione
A seconda delle norme specifiche del paese di impiego sono
possibili due tipi di illuminazione:
– Tramite il computer di controllo possono essere accese e
spente contemporaneamente la luce anteriore, la luce posteriore e l’illuminazione di fondo del display.
In questo tipo di illuminazione compare all’accensione
dell’illuminazione «Luce accesa» e allo spegnimento
dell’illuminazione «Luce spenta» per ca. 1 s nella visualizzazione testo c.
– È possibile accendere e spegnere solamente l’illuminazione di fondo del display, la luce anteriore e la luce posteriore
dell’eBike sono indipendenti dal computer di controllo.
In entrambe le versioni per l’accensione e lo spegnimento
dell’illuminazione premere ogni volta il tasto 2.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–5
Visualizzazioni della velocità e della distanza
Nella visualizzazione tachimetro e viene sempre visualizzata la velocità attuale.
Nella visualizzazione funzioni (combinazione della visualizzazione testo c e visualizzazione valori d) sono disponibili per
la selezione le seguenti funzioni:
– «Distanza rimasta»: probabile autonomia della carica
presente della batteria ricaricabile (a condizioni, come livello di assistenza, profilo del percorso ecc.,immutate)
– «Distanza» : distanza percorsa dall’ultimo reset
– «Tempo percorso»: tempo percorso dall’ultimo reset
– «Velocità media»: velocità media raggiunta dall’ultimo reset
– «Velocità massima»: velocità massima raggiunta dall’ultimo reset
– «Ora»: ora attuale
Per cambiare nella funzione di visualizzazione premere il
tasto «i» 1 sul computer di controllo oppure il tasto «i» 11
sull’unità di comando fino a quando viene visualizzata la funzione desiderata.
Per il reset di «Distanza», «Tempo percorso» e «Velocità
media» cambiare in una di queste tre funzioni e premere poi
il tasto «RESET» 6 fino a quando la visualizzazione viene azzerata. In questo modo sono ripristinati anche i valori delle altre
due funzioni.
Per il reset di «Velocità massima» cambiare in questa funzione e premere poi il tasto «RESET» 6 fino a quando la visualizzazione viene azzerata.
Se il computer di controllo viene rimosso dal supporto 4 tutti
i valori delle funzioni rimangono memorizzati e possono essere ancora visualizzati.
Visualizzazione codice errore
I componenti del sistema eBike vengono costantemente controllati automaticamente. Se viene individuato un errore, compare nella visualizzazione testo c il relativo codice di errore.
Premere un tasto a scelta sul computer di controllo 3 o
sull’unità di comando 10 per ritornare alla visualizzazione
standard.
In funzione del tipo di errore, l’azionamento viene eventualmente disattivato automaticamente. Il proseguimento della
Codice
100
101
Visualizzazione/adattamento delle regolazioni di base
Visualizzazione e modifiche delle regolazioni di base sono
possibili indipendentemente dal fatto che il computer di controllo sia o meno inserito nel supporto 4.
Per arrivare nel menu regolazioni di base premere contemporaneamente il tasto «RESET» 6 ed il tasto «i» 1 fino a quando
nella visualizzazione testo compare c «Configurazione».
Per commutare tra le regolazioni di base premere il tasto
«i» 1 sul computer di controllo fino a quando viene visualizzata la regolazione di base desiderata. Se il computer di controllo è inserito nel supporto 4 è possibile premere anche il tasto
«i» 11 sull’unità di comando.
Per modificare le regolazioni di base premere il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 5 vicino alla visualizzazione « –» per
ridurre e sfogliare verso il basso oppure per aumentare e sfogliare verso l’alto premere il tasto illuminazione 2 vicino alla visualizzazione «+».
Se il computer di controllo è inserito nel supporto 4 allora la
modifica è possibile anche con i tasti « –» 12 e «+» 13
sull’unità di comando.
Per abbandonare la funzione e memorizzare una regolazione
modificata premere il tasto «RESET» 6 per 3 s.
Possono essere selezionate le seguenti regolazioni di base:
– «Unità km/mi»: È possibile visualizzare la velocità e la distanza in chilometri oppure in miglia.
– «Formato ora»: È possibile visualizzare l’ora nel formato
12 ore oppure 24 ore.
– «Ora»: È possibile regolare l’ora attuale. Una pressione
prolungata sui tasti di regolazione accelera la modifica
dell’ora.
– «Italiano»: È possibile modificare la lingua delle visualizzazioni testo. È possibile selezionare tra tedesco, inglese,
francese, spagnolo, italiano ed olandese.
– «Distanza totale»: Visualizzazione della distanza totale
percorsa fino ad ora con l’eBike (non modificabile)
– «Tempo totale»: Visualizzazione della durata totale percorsa con l’eBike (non modificabile)
corsa senza assistenza tramite l’azionamento è tuttavia possibile in ogni momento. Prima di ulteriori corse l’eBike dovrebbe essere controllata.
 Lasciare effettuare tutti i controlli e le riparazioni
esclusivamente da un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette. Se nonostante il rimedio continua ad essere visualizzato un errore, anche in questo caso rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Causa
Rimedi
Errore interno dell’unità di azionamento Fare controllare l’unità di azionamento
Problema di collegamento dell’unità di Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
azionamento
* solo per l’illuminazione dell’eBike tramite la batteria ricaricabile (specifico del paese di impiego)
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–6
Codice
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Causa
Errore del sensore di velocità
Problema di collegamento dell’illuminazione
Problemi di collegamento del computer
di controllo
Temperatura dell’unità di azionamento
troppo alta (superiore a 40 °C)
Errore interno dell’elettronica della
batteria ricaricabile
Temperatura della batteria ricaricabile
troppo alta (superiore a 40 °C)
Rimedi
Fare controllare il sensore di velocità
Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
Lasciare raffreddare l’unità di azionamento. Il proseguimento della corsa
senza azionamento dell’eBike è possibile ed accelera il raffreddamento
dell’unità di azionamento.
Fare controllare la batteria ricaricabile
Lasciare raffreddare la batteria ricaricabile. Il proseguimento della corsa
senza azionamento dell’eBike è possibile ed accelera il raffreddamento
della batteria ricaricabile.
Temperatura della batteria ricaricabile Lasciare riscaldare lentamente la batteria ricaricabile in un ambiente
troppo bassa (inferiore a –10 °C)
caldo.
Problema di collegamento della batteria Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
ricaricabile
Polarizzazione della batteria ricaricabile Ricaricare la batteria ricaricabile con la stazione di ricarica originale
errata
Bosch come descritto nelle sue istruzioni per l’uso.
Uno o più tasti del computer di controllo Controllare se i tasti sono incastrati ad es. a causa di sporcizia che è
sono bloccati.
penetrata. Se necessario, pulire i tasti.
Problema di collegamento dell’unità di Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
comando
Uno o più tasti dell’unità di comando
Controllare se i tasti sono incastrati ad es. a causa di sporcizia che è
sono bloccati.
penetrata. Se necessario, pulire i tasti.
Problema di collegamento dell’unità di Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
azionamento
Problema di collegamento della batteria Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
ricaricabile
Errore di comunicazione dei componenti Fare controllare raccordi e collegamenti
uno con l’altro
Batteria ricaricabile interna del
Ricaricare il computer di controllo (nel supporto oppure tramite
computer di controllo scarica
collegamento USB)
Errore interno del computer di controllo Fare controllare il computer di controllo
* solo per l’illuminazione dell’eBike tramite la batteria ricaricabile (specifico del paese di impiego)
Alimentazione di energia di apparecchi esterni
tramite il collegamento USB
Con l’ausilio del collegamento USB possono essere fatti funzionare o ricaricati la maggior parte degli apparecchi la cui alimentazione di energia è possibile tramite USB (p.es. diversi
cellulari).
Presupposto per la ricarica è che nell’eBike siano inseriti il
computer di controllo ed una batteria ricaricabile sufficientemente carica.
Aprire la copertura di protezione 8 del collegamento USB sul
computer di controllo. Collegare il collegamento USB dell’apparecchio esterno, tramite un cavo USB adatto, alla presa
USB 7 sul computer di controllo.
Bosch eBike Systems
Indicazioni per la guida con il sistema eBike
Quando lavora l’azionamento eBike?
L’azionamento dell’eBike assiste durante la guida fintanto che
si pedala. Senza pedalata non avviene alcuna assistenza. La
potenza del motore dipende sempre dalla forza impiegata durante la pedalata.
Impiegando poca forza, l’assistenza sarà inferiore rispetto
all’impiego di molta forza. Questo vale indipendentemente
dal livello di assistenza.
L’azionamento eBike si disattiva automaticamente in caso di
velocità superiori a 45 km/h. Se la velocità si abbassa sotto
45 km/h, l’azionamento è di nuovo disponibile automaticamente.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–7
Vi è un’eccezione per la funzione aiuto all’avviamento ovvero
quella in cui l’eBike può muoversi a bassa velocità senza azionamento dei pedali.
È possibile utilizzare in qualsiasi momento l’eBike come una
bicicletta normale anche senza l’assistenza disattivando il sistema eBike oppure posizionando il livello di assistenza su
«OFF». La stessa cosa vale in caso di batteria ricaricabile scarica.
Interazione del sistema eBike con il cambio
Anche con l’azionamento eBike il cambio dovrebbe essere utilizzato come in una bicicletta normale (osservare a riguardo le
istruzioni per l’uso dell’eBike).
Indipendentemente dal tipo del cambio è consigliabile durante il cambio di marcia interrompere brevemente di pedalare.
In questo modo il cambio di marcia diventa più facile e si riduce l’usura degli organi di azionamento.
Grazie alla selezione della marcia corretta è possibile con lo
stesso impiego di forza aumentare la velocità e l’autonomia.
Prime corse di prova
Si consiglia di effettuare le prime esperienze con l’eBike lontano da strade con molto traffico.
Provare differenti livelli di assistenza. Non appena Vi sentirete
sicuri potrete guidare con l’eBike nel traffico come con ogni
bicicletta.
Provare l’autonomia dell’eBike con differenti condizioni prima
di organizzare corse più lunghe ed impegnative.
Influssi sull’autonomia
L’autonomia viene influenzata da molti fattori, come ad esempio:
– Livello di assistenza,
– Comportamento nel cambio di marcia,
– Tipo di pneumatici e pressione dei pneumatici.
– Invecchiamento e condizioni della batteria ricaricabile,
– Profilo del percorso (salite) e condizione del percorso (rivestimento della carreggiata),
– Vento contrario e temperatura ambientale.
– Peso dell’eBike, ciclista e bagaglio.
Per questa ragione non è possibile prevedere concretamente
l’autonomia prima della presenza di un fattore. In linea di massima vale tuttavia:
– Alla stessa potenza del motore dell’azionamento eBike:
tanto inferiore sarà la forza da impiegare per raggiungere
una determinata velocità (p. es. tramite l’uso ottimale del
cambio marcia), tanto inferiore sarà l’energia che l’azionamento dell’eBike consumerà e tanto maggiore sarà l’autonomia di una carica della batteria ricaricabile.
– Tanto maggiore sarà selezionato il livello di assistenza, a
condizioni altrimenti uguali, tanto più limitata sarà l’autonomia.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Trattamento e cura dell’eBike
Osservare le temperature di funzionamento e di magazzinaggio dei componenti dell’eBike. Proteggere l’unità di azionamento, il computer di controllo e la batteria ricaricabile da
temperature estreme (p. es. tramite irradiamento solare intensivo senza contemporanea aerazione). I componenti (in
modo particolare la batteria ricaricabile) possono venire danneggiati da temperature estreme.
Manutenzione ed assistenza
Manutenzione e pulizia
Mantenere puliti tutti i componenti dell’eBike, in modo particolare i contatti della batteria ricaricabile ed il relativo supporto. Pulirli con cautela con uno straccio umido e morbido.
Tutti i componenti, inclusa l’unità di azionamento non devono
essere immersi in acqua oppure puliti con un’idropulitrice.
Per Service e riparazioni all’eBike rivolgersi ad un rivenditore
autorizzato di biciclette.
Servizio di assistenza ed assistenza clienti
Per tutte le domande relative al sistema eBike ed ai suoi componenti rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Le informazioni per contattare rivenditori autorizzati di biciclette sono riportate sulla pagina web
www.bosch-ebike.com
Trasporto
Le batterie ricaricabili sono soggette ai requisiti di legge relativi a merci pericolose. Le batterie ricaricabili possono essere
trasportate su strada tramite l’utente privato senza ulteriori
precauzioni.
In caso di trasporto tramite utente commerciale oppure in caso di trasporto tramite terzi (p. es. trasporto aereo oppure
spedizioniere) devono essere osservati particolari requisiti
relativi ad imballo e marcatura (ad es. norme dell’ADR). In caso di necessità per la preparazione del pezzo da spedire si può
ricorrere ad un esperto per merce pericolosa.
Spedire le batterie ricaricabili solamente se la carcassa non è
danneggiata. Coprire con nastro adesivo i contatti scoperti ed
imballare la batteria ricaricabile in modo tale che non si muova nell’imballo. Vi preghiamo di osservare anche eventuali, ulteriori norme nazionali.
In caso di domande relative al trasporto delle batterie ricaricabili rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Presso il rivenditore è possibile ordinare anche un imballo per
il trasporto adatto.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_DOKU-28060-002.fm Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 2:48 PM
Italiano–8
Smaltimento
Avviare ad un riciclaggio rispettoso dell’ambiente
l’unità di azionamento, il computer di controllo inclusa
unità di comando, la batteria ricaricabile, il sensore di
velocità, accessori ed imballaggi non più impiegabili.
Non gettare l’eBike ed i suoi componenti tra i rifiuti domestici!
Solo per i Paesi della CE:
Conformemente alla direttiva europea
2002/96/CE gli apparecchi elettrici diventati inservibili e, in base alla direttiva europea 2006/66/CE, le batterie ricaricabili/batterie difettose o consumate devono
essere raccolte separatamente ed essere
inviate ad una riutilizzazione ecologica.
La batteria ricaricabile integrata nel computer di controllo
può essere rimossa solamente per lo smaltimento. Aprendo la
copertura della carcassa il computer di controllo può essere
danneggiato irreparabilmente.
Vi preghiamo di consegnare batterie ricaricabili e computer di
controllo non più utilizzabili ad un rivenditore autorizzato di
biciclette.
Li-Ion:
Si prega di tener presente le indicazioni riportare nel paragrafo «Trasporto»,
pagina Italiano–7.
Con ogni riserva di modifiche tecniche.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–9
Batteria ricaricabile agli ioni di litio PowerPack
Norme di sicurezza
Leggere tutte le indicazioni
di sicurezza e le istruzioni
operative. In caso di mancato
rispetto delle indicazioni di sicurezza e delle istruzioni operative possono verificarsi scosse elettriche, incendi e/o lesioni gravi.
Conservare tutte le indicazioni di sicurezza e le istruzioni
operative per ogni esigenza futura.
Il termine utilizzato nelle presenti istruzioni per l’uso «batteria
ricaricabile» si riferisce allo stesso modo a batterie ricaricabili
standard (batterie ricaricabili con supporto sul telaio della bicicletta) e a batterie ricaricabili per montaggio al portapacchi
(batterie ricaricabili con supporto nel portapacchi) ad eccezione se viene fatto espressamente riferimento al tipo di costruzione.
 Rimuovere la batteria ricaricabile dalla eBike prima di
iniziare interventi (p. es. montaggio, manutenzione
ecc.) alla eBike, prima di trasportarla con l’auto o l’aereo oppure prima di conservarla. In caso di azionamento
accidentale dell’interruttore di avvio/arresto esiste pericolo di lesioni.
 Non aprire la batteria ricaricabile. Esiste il pericolo di un
cortocircuito. In caso di batteria ricaricabile aperta decadrà qualsiasi pretesa di garanzia.
Proteggere la batteria ricaricabile dal calore
(p. es. anche dall’irradiamento solare continuo), dal fuoco e dall’immersione in acqua. Esiste pericolo di esplosione.
 Tenere lontano la batteria ricaricabile non utilizzata da
graffette, monete, chiavi, chiodi, viti oppure altri piccoli oggetti metallici che potrebbero causare un’esclusione dei contatti. Un corto circuito tra i contatti della batteria ricaricabile può causare incendi oppure fuoco. In
caso di cortocircuiti verificatisi in relazione a queste condizioni decadrà qualsiasi pretesa di garanzia tramite Bosch.
 In caso di impiego errato può fuoriuscire liquido dalla
batteria ricaricabile. Evitare il contatto con il liquido
stesso. In caso di contatto accidentale sciacquare con
acqua. Se il liquido dovesse venire a contatto con gli occhi richiedere anche l’intervento di un medico. Il liquido
della batteria ricaricabile che fuoriesce può causare irritazioni della pelle o ustioni.
 In caso di danneggiamento ed un uso non corretto della
batteria ricaricabile possono fuoriuscire vapori. Aerare con aria fresca ed in caso di disturbi rivolgersi ad un
medico. I vapori possono irritare le vie respiratorie.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Ricaricare la batteria ricaricabile esclusivamente con
stazioni di ricarica originali Bosch. In caso di impiego di
stazioni di ricarica non originali Bosch non può essere
escluso il pericolo di incendio.
 Utilizzare la batteria ricaricabile esclusivamente insieme all’eBike con sistema di azionamento eBike originale Bosch. Solo in questo modo la batteria ricaricabile viene protetta da sovraccarico pericoloso.
 Utilizzare esclusivamente batterie ricaricabili originali
Bosch che sono state omologate dal produttore per
l’eBike. L’impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse da quelle
consigliate potrà comportare il pericolo di lesioni e d’incendio. In caso di impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse,
Bosch non si assumerà alcuna responsabilità civile e garanzia.
 Leggere ed osservare le indicazioni di sicurezza e le
istruzioni operative riportate nelle istruzioni per l’uso
della stazione di ricarica ed unità di azionamento/computer di controllo nonché nelle istruzioni per l’uso
dell’eBike.
Descrizione del prodotto e
caratteristiche
Componenti illustrati
(vedi pagina 4–5)
La numerazione dei componenti si riferisce alle illustrazioni riportate sulle pagine con la rappresentazione grafica.
Tutte le illustrazioni delle parti della bicicletta, ad eccezione
delle batterie ricaricabili e dei loro supporti, sono riportate in
modo schematico e possono essere differenti dalla Vostra
eBike.
19 Supporto della batteria ricaricabile per montaggio al
portapacchi
20 Batteria ricaricabile per montaggio al portapacchi
21 Indicatore funzionamento e stato di carica
22 Tasto di accensione/spegnimento
23 Chiave del dispositivo di chiusura della batteria
ricaricabile
24 Dispositivo di chiusura della batteria ricaricabile
25 Supporto superiore della batteria ricaricabile standard
26 Batteria ricaricabile standard
27 Supporto inferiore della batteria ricaricabile standard
28 Cinghia portante
29 Stazione di ricarica
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–10
Dati tecnici
Batteria ricaricabile agli ioni di litio
Codice prodotto
– Batteria ricaricabile standard nera
– Batteria ricaricabile standard bianca
– Batteria ricaricabile per montaggio al portapacchi
Tensione nominale
Capacità nominale
Energia
Temperatura di esercizio
Temperatura di magazzino
Campo ammesso di temperatura di ricarica
Peso ca.
Tipo di protezione
Montaggio
 Applicare la batteria ricaricabile esclusivamente su superfici pulite. Evitare in modo particolare l’imbrattamento
della presa di carica e dei contatti, p.es. tramite sabbia o
terra.
Controllo della batteria ricaricabile prima del
primo utilizzo
Controllare la batteria ricaricabile prima di effettuare la prima
ricarica oppure prima dell’impiego con l’eBike.
Per effettuare questo controllo premere il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 22 per l’attivazione della batteria ricaricabile. Se nessun LED dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21 è acceso esiste la possibilità che la batteria ricaricabile sia
danneggiata.
Se almeno un LED di tutti i LED dell’indicatore dello stato di
carica 21 è illuminato, ricaricare completamente la batteria ricaricabile prima del primo utilizzo.
 Non ricaricare una batteria ricaricabile danneggiata e
non utilizzarla. Rivolgersi ad un rivenditore di biciclette
autorizzato.
Ricarica della batteria
 Utilizzare esclusivamente la stazione di ricarica originale Bosch contenuta nel volume di fornitura dell’eBike
oppure una uguale strutturalmente. Solo questa stazione di ricarica è idonea per la batteria ricaricabile agli ioni di
litio utilizzata nell’eBike.
Nota bene: La batteria ricaricabile viene fornita parzialmente
carica. Per garantire tutta la potenza della batteria ricaricabile, prima del primo impiego ricaricarla completamente con la
stazione di ricarica.
Per la ricarica la batteria ricaricabile deve essere rimossa
dall’eBike.
Bosch eBike Systems
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 300
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 502
36
8,2
300
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (protezione contro la
polvere e contro gli spruzzi
dell’acqua)
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 505
36
11
400
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (protezione contro la
polvere e contro gli spruzzi
dell’acqua)
Per la ricarica della batteria ricaricabile leggere ed osservare
le istruzioni per l’uso della stazione di ricarica.
La batteria ricaricabile può essere ricaricata in qualsiasi momento senza ridurne la durata. Un’interruzione dell’operazione di ricarica non danneggia la batteria ricaricabile.
La batteria ricaricabile è dotata di un controllo della temperatura che consente una ricarica esclusivamente nel campo di
temperatura tra 0 °C e 40 °C.
Se la batteria ricaricabile si trova al di fuori del campo di temperatura di ricarica, i tre LED
dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21 lampeggiano. Staccare la batteria ricaricabile dalla
stazione di ricarica e lasciarla adattare alla temperatura ambientale.
Collegare di nuovo la batteria ricaricabile alla stazione di ricarica solamente quando la stessa avrà raggiunto la temperatura di ricarica ammissibile.
Indicatore dello stato di carica
I cinque LED verdi dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21 indicano, con batteria ricaricabile attivata, lo stato di carica della
batteria ricaricabile stessa.
Ogni LED corrisponde a circa il 20 % della capacità. Quando la
batteria ricaricabile è completamente carica sono illuminati
tutti i cinque LED.
Lo stato di carica della batteria ricaricabile attivata viene inoltre visualizzato sul computer di controllo. A riguardo leggere
ed osservare le istruzioni per l’uso dell’unità di azionamento e
del computer di controllo.
Se l’autonomia della batteria ricaricabile è inferiore al 5 %,
tutti i LED dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21 sulla batteria
ricaricabile si spengono, rimane tuttavia ancora una funzione
di visualizzazione del computer di controllo.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–11
Inserimento e rimozione della batteria
ricaricabile (vedere figure C–D)
 Disattivare sempre la batteria ricaricabile quando la
stessa viene inserita nel supporto oppure viene rimossa dal supporto stesso.
Affinché la batteria ricaricabile possa essere inserita, la chiave 23 deve essere inserita nel dispositivo di chiusura 24 ed il
dispositivo di chiusura deve essere aperto.
Per l’inserimento della batteria ricaricabile standard 26
applicare la stessa con i contatti sul supporto inferiore 27
sull’eBike. Ribaltarla fino all’arresto nel supporto superiore
25.
Per l’inserimento della batteria ricaricabile per montaggio
al portapacchi 20 spingerla con i contatti in avanti fino allo
scatto in posizione nel supporto 19 nel portapacchi.
Controllare che la batteria ricaricabile sia posizionata in modo
fisso. Chiudere sempre a chiave la batteria ricaricabile sul dispositivo di chiusura 24 poiché in caso contrario il dispositivo
di chiusura può aprirsi e la batteria ricaricabile può cadere dal
supporto.
Togliere sempre la chiave 23 dal dispositivo di chiusura 24
dopo la chiusura. In questo modo viene evitata la caduta della
chiave ovvero che la batteria ricaricabile venga rimossa da
parte di terzi non autorizzati in caso di eBike parcheggiata.
Per la rimozione della batteria ricaricabile standard 26 disinserirla ed aprire il dispositivo di chiusura con la chiave 23.
Inclinare la batteria ricaricabile dal supporto superiore 25 e tirandola alla cinghia portante 28 estrarla dal supporto inferiore 27.
Per la rimozione della batteria ricaricabile per montaggio
al portapacchi 20 disinserirla ed aprire il dispositivo di chiusura con la chiave 23. Rimuovere la batteria ricaricabile dal
supporto 19.
Uso
Messa in funzione
 Utilizzare esclusivamente batterie ricaricabili originali
Bosch che sono state omologate dal produttore per
l’eBike. L’impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse da quelle
consigliate potrà comportare il pericolo di lesioni e d’incendio. In caso di impiego di batterie ricaricabili diverse,
Bosch non si assumerà alcuna responsabilità civile e garanzia.
Nota bene: All’attivazione del sistema eBike i pedali dell’eBike non devono essere caricati poiché altrimenti la potenza
dell’azionamento dell’eBike verrebbe limitata.
Per l’attivazione della batteria ricaricabile premere il tasto di
accensione/spegnimento 22. I LED del’indicatore 21 si accendono e indicano contemporaneamente lo stato di carica.
Nota bene: Se l’autonomia della batteria ricaricabile è inferiore al 5 %, sulla batteria ricaricabile non è acceso alcun LED
dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21. L’attivazione del sistema eBike è visibile solamente sul computer di controllo.
Per lo spegnimento della batteria ricaricabile premere di
nuovo il tasto di accensione/spegnimento 22. I LED dell’indicatore 21 si spengono. In questo modo il sistema eBike viene
spento anch’esso.
Se per ca. 10 min non viene richiesto alcun intervento
dell’azionamento eBike (p. es. poiché l’eBike è ferma) e non
viene premuto alcun tasto sul computer di controllo o sull’unità di comando dell’eBike, il sistema eBike e di conseguenza
anche la batteria ricaricabile si disattivano automaticamente
per ragioni di risparmio energetico.
La batteria ricaricabile è protetta tramite l’«Electronic Cell
Protection (ECP)» contro lo scaricamento totale, il sovraccarico, il surriscaldamento ed il cortocircuito. In caso di pericolo
la batteria ricaricabile si spegne automaticamente tramite un
interruttore automatico.
Se viene individuato un difetto
della batteria ricaricabile, lampeggiano due LED dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21. In
questo caso rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Indicazioni per l’uso ottimale della batteria
ricaricabile
La durata della batteria ricaricabile può essere prolungata se
la stessa viene sottoposta ad attenta cura e soprattutto se viene conservata a temperature corrette.
Con l’aumento dell’invecchiamento tuttavia anche in caso di
attenta cura, l’autonomia della batteria ricaricabile si ridurrà.
Un tempo di funzionamento notevolmente ridotto dopo la ricarica indica che la batteria ricaricabile è consumata. È possibile sostituire la batteria ricaricabile.
Se la cinghia portante 28 della batteria ricaricabile standard
dovesse essere difettosa, farla sostituire da un rivenditore di
biciclette.
Accensione/spegnimento
L’attivazione della batteria ricaricabile è una delle possibilità
per inserire il sistema eBike. A riguardo leggere ed osservare
le istruzioni per l’uso dell’unità di azionamento e del computer
di controllo.
Controllare prima dell’attivazione della batteria ricaricabile e
del sistema eBike che il dispositivo di chiusura 24 sia chiuso.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–12
Ricarica della batteria ricaricabile prima e durante la conservazione
Prima di un lungo periodo di non impiego ricaricare la batteria
ricaricabile per circa il 60 % (da 3 a 4 LED dell’indicatore dello
stato di carica 21 sono illuminati).
Dopo 6 mesi controllare lo stato di carica. Se è illuminato ancora solo un LED dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21, ricaricare di nuovo la batteria ricaricabile a circa il 60 %.
Nota bene: Se la batteria ricaricabile viene conservata scarica per un periodo più lungo, è possibile che, nonostante l’autoscarica limitata, la stessa si danneggi e che la capacità di carica venga notevolmente ridotta.
Non è consigliabile lasciare collegata permanentemente la
batteria ricaricabile alla stazione di ricarica.
Condizioni di magazzinaggio
Conservare la batteria ricaricabile possibilmente in un posto
asciutto e ben areato. Proteggerla da umidità ed acqua. In caso di condizioni atmosferiche sfavorevoli è ad es. consigliabile togliere la batteria ricaricabile dall’eBike e conservarla in
ambienti chiusi fino all’impiego successivo.
La batteria ricaricabile può essere immagazzinata a temperature da –10 °C fino a +60 °C. Per una lunga durata è tuttavia
favorevole un magazzinaggio a ca. 20 °C temperatura ambiente.
Prestare attenzione affinché la temperatura massima di magazzinaggio non venga superata. Non lasciare la batteria ricaricabile p. es. in estate nell’automobile ed immagazzinarla in
un luogo non soggetto a irradiamento solare diretto.
Manutenzione ed assistenza
Manutenzione e pulizia
Mantenere pulita la batteria ricaricabile. Pulirla con cautela
con uno straccio umido e morbido. La batteria ricaricabile
non deve essere immersa nell’acqua oppure pulita con un getto d’acqua.
Se la batteria ricaricabile non è più funzionante rivolgersi ad
un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Trasporto
Le batterie ricaricabili sono soggette ai requisiti di legge relativi a merci pericolose. Le batterie ricaricabili possono essere
trasportate su strada tramite l’utente privato senza ulteriori
precauzioni.
In caso di trasporto tramite utente commerciale oppure in caso di trasporto tramite terzi (p. es. trasporto aereo oppure
spedizioniere) devono essere osservati particolari requisiti
relativi ad imballo e marcatura (ad es. norme dell’ADR). In caso di necessità per la preparazione del pezzo da spedire si può
ricorrere ad un esperto per merce pericolosa.
Spedire le batterie ricaricabili solamente se la carcassa non è
danneggiata. Coprire con nastro adesivo i contatti scoperti ed
imballare la batteria ricaricabile in modo tale che non si muova nell’imballo. Vi preghiamo di osservare anche eventuali, ulteriori norme nazionali.
In caso di domande relative al trasporto delle batterie ricaricabili rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Presso il rivenditore è possibile ordinare anche un imballo per
il trasporto adatto.
Smaltimento
Avviare ad un riciclaggio rispettoso dell’ambiente batterie ricaricabili, accessori ed imballaggi inutilizzabili.
Non gettare le batterie ricaricabili tra i rifiuti domestici!
Solo per i Paesi della CE:
Conformemente alla direttiva europea
2002/96/CE gli apparecchi elettrici diventati inservibili e, in base alla direttiva europea 2006/66/CE, le batterie ricaricabili/batterie difettose o consumate devono
essere raccolte separatamente ed essere
inviate ad una riutilizzazione ecologica.
Vi preghiamo di consegnare batterie ricaricabili non più utilizzabili ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Li-Ion:
Si prega di tener presente le indicazioni riportare nel paragrafo «Trasporto»,
pagina Italiano–12.
Servizio di assistenza ed assistenza clienti
Per tutte le domande relative alle batterie ricaricabili rivolgersi ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
 Annotarsi il produttore ed il numero della chiave 23. In
caso di perdita della chiave rivolgersi presso un rivenditore
autorizzato di biciclette. Indicare al rivenditore il produttore ed il numero della chiave.
Le informazioni per contattare rivenditori autorizzati di biciclette sono riportate sulla pagina web
www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
Con ogni riserva di modifiche tecniche.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–13
Stazione di ricarica – Charger
Norme di sicurezza
Leggere tutte le indicazioni
di sicurezza e le istruzioni
operative. In caso di mancato
rispetto delle indicazioni di sicurezza e delle istruzioni operative possono verificarsi scosse elettriche, incendi e/o lesioni gravi.
Conservare tutte le indicazioni di sicurezza e le istruzioni
operative per ogni esigenza futura.
Il termine utilizzato nelle presenti istruzioni per l’uso «batteria
ricaricabile» si riferisce allo stesso modo a batterie ricaricabili
standard (batterie ricaricabili con supporto sul telaio della bicicletta) e a batterie ricaricabili per montaggio al portapacchi
(batterie ricaricabili con supporto nel portapacchi).
Tenere la stazione di ricarica lontana da pioggia o
umidità. In caso di infiltrazione di acqua in una stazione di ricarica esiste il rischio di una scossa elettrica.
 Ricaricare esclusivamente batterie ricaricabili agli ioni
di litio Bosch omologate per eBike. La tensione della
batteria ricaricabile deve essere adatta alla tensione di
ricarica batteria della stazione di ricarica. In caso contrario esiste pericolo di incendio ed esplosione.
 Avere cura di mantenere il caricabatteria sempre pulito. Attraverso accumuli di sporcizia si crea il pericolo di
una scossa elettrica.
 Prima di ogni impiego controllare il caricabatteria, il
cavo e la spina. Non utilizzare il caricabatteria in caso
doveste riscontrare dei danni. Non aprire mai personalmente il caricabatteria e farlo riparare soltanto da personale qualificato e soltanto con pezzi di ricambio originali. In caso di caricabatterie per batterie, cavi e spine
danneggiate si aumenta il pericolo di una scossa elettrica.
 Non utilizzare il caricabatteria su basi facilmente infiammabili (p. es. carta, tessuti ecc.) oppure in ambienti infiammabili. Per via del riscaldamento del caricabatteria che si ha durante la fase di ricarica si viene a creare il
pericolo di incendio.
 In caso di danneggiamento ed un uso non corretto della
batteria ricaricabile possono fuoriuscire vapori. Aerare con aria fresca ed in caso di disturbi rivolgersi ad un
medico. I vapori possono irritare le vie respiratorie.
 Sorvegliare i bambini. In questo modo viene assicurato
che i bambini non giocano con la stazione di ricarica.
 Bambini e persone che a causa delle loro capacità fisiche, sensoriali o mentali oppure a cui manchi esperienza
o conoscenza non sono in grado di utilizzare la stazione
di ricarica in modo sicuro, non devono utilizzare questa
stazione di ricarica senza la sorveglianza oppure l’istru0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
zione da parte di una persona responsabile. In caso contrario esiste il pericolo di impiego errato e di lesioni.
 Leggere ed osservare le indicazioni di sicurezza e le
istruzioni operative riportate nelle istruzioni per l’uso
della batteria ricaricabile ed unità di azionamento/computer di controllo nonché nelle istruzioni per
l’uso dell’eBike.
 Sul lato inferiore della stazione di ricarica è riportato un riassunto delle indicazioni di sicurezza più importanti in lingua inglese, francese e spagnolo (contrassegnate nell’illustrazione sulla pagina grafica con il numero 33) e con il
seguente contenuto:
– Per un impiego sicuro osservare le istruzioni per l’uso.
Rischio di una scossa elettrica.
– Utilizzare esclusivamente in ambiente asciutto.
– Ricaricare esclusivamente batterie ricaricabili del sistema eBike Bosch. Altre batterie ricaricabili possono
esplodere e causare lesioni.
– Non sostituire il cavo elettrico. Esiste pericolo di incendio ed esplosione.
Descrizione del prodotto e
caratteristiche
Componenti illustrati (vedi pagina 6–7)
La numerazione dei componenti illustrati si riferisce all’illustrazione della stazione di ricarica sulla pagina con la rappresentazione grafica.
20 Batteria ricaricabile per montaggio al portapacchi
21 Indicatore dello stato di carica della batteria
26 Batteria ricaricabile standard
29 Stazione di ricarica
30 Presa dell’apparecchio
31 Spina dell’apparecchio
32 Aperture di ventilazione
33 Indicazioni di sicurezza stazione di ricarica
34 Spina di ricarica
35 Presa per la spina di ricarica
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–14
Dati tecnici
Stazione di ricarica
Codice prodotto
Tensione nominale
Frequenza
Tensione di ricarica della batteria
Corrente di carica
Campo ammesso di temperatura
di ricarica
Tempo di ricarica
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Numero degli elementi della
batteria ricaricabile
Temperatura di esercizio
Temperatura di magazzino
Peso in funzione della
EPTA-Procedure 01/2003
Tipo di protezione
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
h
h
2,5
3,5
°C
°C
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
kg
0,8
IP 40
I dati sono validi per una tensione nominale [U] di 230 V. In caso di tensioni differenti e di modelli specifici dei paesi di impiego, questi dati
possono variare.
Uso
 Applicare la batteria ricaricabile esclusivamente su superfici pulite. Evitare in modo particolare l’imbrattamento
della presa di carica e dei contatti, p.es. tramite sabbia o
terra.
Messa in funzione
Collegamento della stazione di ricarica (vedi figure E–F)
 Osservare la tensione di rete! La tensione della rete deve
corrispondere a quella indicata sulla stazione di ricarica.
Stazioni di ricarica previste per l’uso con 230 V possono
essere azionate anche a 220 V.
Inserire la spina dell’apparecchio 31 del cavo elettrico nella
presa dell’apparecchio 30 sulla stazione di ricarica.
Collegare il cavo elettrico (specifico del paese di impiego) alla
rete elettrica.
Disattivare la batteria ricaricabile e toglierla dal supporto
sull’eBike. A tal fine leggere ed osservare le istruzioni per l’uso
della batteria ricaricabile.
Inserire la spina di ricarica 34 del dispositivo di carica nella
presa 35 sulla batteria ricaricabile.
Bosch eBike Systems
Operazione di ricarica
L’operazione di ricarica inizia non appena la stazione di ricarica è collegata alla batteria ricaricabile ed alla rete elettrica.
Nota bene: L’operazione di ricarica è possibile solamente se
la temperatura della batteria ricaricabile si trova nel campo di
temperatura di ricarica ammissibile.
Durante l’operazione di ricarica sono illuminati i LED dell’indicatore dello stato di carica 21 sulla batteria ricaricabile. Ogni
LED illuminato permanentemente corrisponde a ca. 20 % della capacità di ricarica. Il LED lampeggiante indica la ricarica
del prossimo 20 %.
 Procedere con cautela in caso di contatto con la stazione di ricarica durante l’operazione di ricarica. Mettere i
guanti di protezione. In modo particolare in caso di elevate temperature ambientali la stazione di ricarica può riscaldarsi notevolmente.
Nota bene: Prestare attenzione affinchè la stazione di ricarica
durante l’operazione di ricarica sia ben arieggiata e le aperture di ventilazione 32 su entrambi i lati non siano coperte.
La batteria ricaricabile è completamente carica quando sono illuminati permanentemente tutti i cinque LED dell’indicatore
21. L’operazione di ricarica viene interrotta automaticamente.
Staccare la stazione di ricarica dalla rete elettrica e la batteria
ricaricabile dalla stazione di ricarica.
Staccando la batteria ricaricabile dalla stazione di ricarica la
batteria ricaricabile viene disattivata automaticamente.
Adesso è possibile inserire la batteria ricaricabile nell’eBike.
Anomalie – cause e rimedi
Causa
Rimedi
Due LED sulla batteria
ricaricabile lampeggiano
Batteria ricaricabile difettosa Rivolgersi ad un rivenditore
autorizzato di biciclette
Tre LED sulla batteria
ricaricabile lampeggiano
Batteria ricaricabile troppo
calda o troppo fredda
Staccare la batteria ricaricabile dalla stazione di ricarica e
lasciarla adattare alla temperatura ambientale fino a
quando é raggiunto il campo
di temperatura di ricarica
Collegare di nuovo la batteria
ricaricabile alla stazione di ricarica solamente quando la
stessa avrà raggiunto la temperatura di ricarica ammissibile.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 15 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Italiano–15
Causa
Rimedi
Operazione di ricarica impossibile (nessuna indicazione
sulla batteria ricaricabile)
Spina non inserita corretta- Controllare tutti i collegamenmente
ti a spina
Contatti sulla batteria ricari- Pulire con cautela i contatti
cabile sporchi
sulla batteria ricaricabile
Aperture di ventilazione 32 Pulire le aperture di ventiladella stazione di ricarica inta- zione 32 e posizionare la
sate oppure coperte
stazione di ricarica in modo
che sia ben arieggiata
Presa, cavo o stazione di rica- Controllare la tensione di rerica difettosi
te, fare controllare la stazione
di ricarica da un rivenditore di
biciclette
Batteria ricaricabile difettosa Rivolgersi ad un rivenditore
autorizzato di biciclette
Manutenzione ed assistenza
Manutenzione e pulizia
Qualora la stazione di ricarica dovesse guastarsi rivolgersi ad
un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Servizio di assistenza ed assistenza clienti
Per tutte le domande relative alla stazione di ricarica rivolgersi
ad un rivenditore autorizzato di biciclette.
Le informazioni per contattare rivenditori autorizzati di biciclette sono riportate sulla pagina web
www.bosch-ebike.com
Smaltimento
Avviare ad un riciclaggio rispettoso dell’ambiente la stazione
di ricarica, gli accessori dismessi e gli imballaggi.
Non gettare tra i rifiuti domestici le stazioni di ricarica dismesse!
Solo per i Paesi della CE:
Conformemente alla norma della direttiva
2002/96/CE sui rifiuti di apparecchiature
elettriche ed elettroniche (RAEE) ed all’attuazione del recepimento nel diritto nazionale, le stazioni di ricarica diventate inservibili devono essere raccolte separatamente
ed essere inviate ad una riutilizzazione ecologica.
Con ogni riserva di modifiche tecniche.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–1
Aandrijfeenheid Drive Unit Speed/
Bedieningscomputer Intuvia
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Product- en vermogensbeschrijving
Lees alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen. Als de veiligheidsvoorschriften en
aanwijzingen niet in acht worden genomen,
kan dit een elektrische schok, brand en/of ernstig letsel tot gevolg hebben.
Bewaar alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen
voor toekomstig gebruik.
Het in deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruikte begrip „accu” heeft
zowel betrekking op standaardaccu’s (accu’s bevestigd aan
het fietsframe) als op bagagedrageraccu’s (accu bevestigd in
de bagagedrager).
 Open de aandrijfeenheid niet zelf. De aandrijfeenheid
is onderhoudsvrij en mag alleen door gekwalificeerd
personeel en alleen met originele vervangingsonderdelen worden gerepareerd. Daarmee wordt gewaarborgd dat de veiligheid van de aandrijfeenheid in stand
blijft. Als de aandrijfeenheid door onbevoegden wordt geopend, vervalt de aanspraak op garantie.
 Alle op de aandrijfeenheid gemonteerde componenten
en alle andere componenten van de aandrijving van de
eBike (bijv. kettingblad, opname van kettingblad, pedalen) mogen alleen worden vervangen door componenten met een identieke constructie of door componenten die door de fietsfabrikant speciaal voor uw
eBike zijn toegestaan. Daardoor wordt de aandrijfeenheid beschermd tegen overbelasting en beschadiging.
 Neem de accu uit de eBike voordat u begint met werkzaamheden (zoals montage, onderhoud, enz.) aan de
eBike, voordat u deze per auto of vliegtuig vervoert en
voordat u deze opbergt. Bij per ongeluk bedienen van de
aan/uit-schakelaar bestaat verwondingsgevaar.
 De functie starthulp mag uitsluitend bij het wegrijden
met de eBike worden gebruikt. Als de wielen van de
eBike bij het gebruik van de starthulp geen contact met de
grond maken, bestaat gevaar voor letsel.
 Gebruik alleen originele Bosch accu’s die door de fabrikant voor uw eBike zijn toegestaan. Het gebruik van andere accu’s kan tot letsel en brandgevaar leiden. Bij gebruik van andere accu’s wordt door Bosch geen
aansprakelijkheid aanvaard en geen garantie geboden.
 Neem alle nationale voorschriften voor de toelating en
het gebruik van eBikes in acht.
 Lees de veiligheids- en overige voorschriften in de gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu en in de gebruiksaanwijzing van de eBike en neem deze in acht.
Gebruik volgens bestemming
Bosch eBike Systems
De aandrijfeenheid is uitsluitend bestemd voor de aandrijving
van uw eBike en mag niet voor andere doeleinden worden gebruikt.
De eBike is bestemd voor gebruik op verharde wegen. De
eBike is niet goedgekeurd voor wedstrijdgebruik.
Afgebeelde componenten
(zie pagina 2–3)
De componenten zijn genummerd zoals op de pagina met afbeeldingen.
Alle afbeeldingen van fietsonderdelen behalve aandrijfeenheid, bedieningscomputer incl. bedieningseenheid, snelheidssensor en bijbehorende houders zijn schematisch en
kunnen afwijken van de onderdelen van uw eBike.
1 Toets indicatiefunctie „i”
2 Toets verlichting
3 Bedieningscomputer
4 Houder bedieningscomputer
5 Aan-uit-toets bedieningscomputer
6 Reset-toets „RESET”
7 USB-aansluitopening
8 Beschermkapje van USB-aansluiting
9 Aandrijfeenheid
10 Bedieningseenheid
11 Toets indicatiefunctie „i” op bedieningseenheid
12 Toets waarde verlagen/omlaag „ –”
13 Toets waarde verhogen/omhoog „+”
14 Toets starthulp „WALK”
15 Vergrendeling bedieningscomputer
16 Blokkeerschroef bedieningscomputer
17 Snelheidssensor
18 Spaakmagneet van snelheidssensor
Indicatie-elementen bedieningscomputer
a Indicatie motorvermogen
b Indicatie ondersteuningsniveau
c Tekstdisplay
d Waarde-indicatie
e Snelheidsmeterindicatie
f Accuoplaadindicatie
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–2
Technische gegevens
Aandrijfeenheid
Zaaknummer
Capaciteit
Draaimoment aan uitgaande
as max.
Nominale spanning
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Bewaartemperatuur
Beschermingsklasse
Gewicht, ca.
Bedieningscomputer
Zaaknummer
Laadstroom
USB-aansluiting max.
Laadspanning
USB-aansluiting
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Bewaartemperatuur
Beschermingsklasse
Gewicht, ca.
Verlichting*
Nominale spanning
Capaciteit
– Voorlicht
– Achterlicht
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (stof- en spatwaterbescherming)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (stof- en spatwaterbescherming)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* Afhankelijk van wettelijke regelingen niet in alle, per land verschillende
uitvoeringen via accu van eBike mogelijk
Montage
Accu inzetten of verwijderen
Lees de gebruiksaanwijzing voor het in de eBike plaatsen en
het eruit verwijderen van de accu en neem de voorschriften in
acht.
Bedieningscomputer aanbrengen en verwijderen
(zie afbeelding A)
Voor het inzetten van de bedieningscomputer 3 duwt u deze
van voren in de houder 4.
Voor het verwijderen van de bedieningscomputer 3 drukt u
op de vergrendeling 15 en duwt u deze naar voren uit de houder 4.
 Verwijder de bedieningscomputer als u de eBike
parkeert, zodat de aandrijving niet door anderen kan
worden gebruikt. Zonder bedieningscomputer kan het
eBike-systeem niet ingeschakeld worden.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
De bedieningscomputer kan ook zo in de houder worden geborgd dat deze niet worden verwijderd. Demonteer daarvoor
de houder 4 van het stuur. Zet de bedieningscomputer in de
houder. Draai de blokkeerschroef 16 van onderen in de daarvoor voorziene schroefdraad van de houder. Monteer de houder weer op het stuur.
Snelheidssensor controleren (zie afbeelding B)
De snelheidssensor 17 en de bijbehorende spaakmagneet 18
moeten zodanig gemonteerd zijn dat de spaakmagneet bij een
omwenteling van het wiel op een afstand van minimaal 5 mm
en maximaal 17 mm langs de snelheidssensor beweegt.
Opmerking: Als de afstand tussen snelheidssensor 17 en
spaakmagneet 18 te groot is of de snelheidssensor 17 niet
juist is aangesloten, valt de snelheidsmeterindicatie e uit en
werkt de aandrijving van de eBike in het noodprogramma.
Draai in dit geval de schroef van de spaakmagneet 18 los en
bevestig de spaakmagneet zodanig op de spaak dat deze op
de juiste afstand langs de markering van de snelheidssensor
loopt. Als er ook daarna geen snelheid op de snelheidsmeterindicatie e verschijnt, dient u contact op te nemen met een erkende rijwielvakhandel.
Gebruik
Ingebruikneming
Voorwaarden
Het eBike-systeem kan alleen worden geactiveerd als aan de
volgende voorwaarden is voldaan:
– Er is een voldoende opgeladen accu geplaatst (zie gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu).
– De bedieningscomputer is correct in de houder geplaatst
(zie „Bedieningscomputer aanbrengen en verwijderen”,
pagina Nederlands–2).
– De snelheidssensor is correct aangesloten (zie „Snelheidssensor controleren”, pagina Nederlands–2).
eBike-systeem in- en uitschakelen
Als u het eBike-systeem wilt inschakelen, heeft u de volgende mogelijkheden:
– Is de bedieningscomputer al ingeschakeld wanneer deze in
de houder geplaatst wordt, wordt het eBike-systeem automatisch ingeschakeld.
– Druk bij ingezette bedieningscomputer en ingezette accu
eenmaal kort op de aan-uit-toets 5 van de bedieningscomputer.
– Druk bij ingezette bedieningscomputer op de aan-uit-toets
van de accu (zie gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu).
Opmerking: De pedalen van de eBike mogen bij het inschakelen van het eBike-systeem niet belast zijn. Anders wordt het
vermogen van de aandrijving beperkt. In de tekstindicatie c
verschijnt de foutmelding „Pedaal ontlasten”.
Als het eBike-systeem bij vergissing met belaste pedalen is ingeschakeld, dient u deze uit te schakelen en zonder belasting
opnieuw in te schakelen.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–3
De aandrijving wordt geactiveerd zodra u op de pedalen trapt
(behalve in de functie starthulp, zie „Starthulp in- en uitschakelen”, pagina Nederlands–4). Het motorvermogen is afhankelijk van de instellingen op de bedieningscomputer.
Zodra u bij normaal gebruik niet meer op de pedalen trapt of
zodra u een snelheid van 45 km per uur heeft bereikt, wordt
de ondersteuning door de aandrijving van de eBike uitgeschakeld. De aandrijving wordt automatisch weer geactiveerd zodra u op de pedalen trapt of de snelheid onder 45 km per uur
daalt.
Als u het eBike-systeem wilt uitschakelen, heeft u de volgende mogelijkheden:
– Druk op de aan/uit-toets 5 van de bedieningscomputer.
– Schakel de accu met de aan-uit-toets van de accu uit (zie
gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu.)
– Verwijder de bedieningscomputer uit de houder.
Als er ca. 10 minuten geen vermogen van de aandrijving
wordt opgevraagd (bijv. omdat de eBike stilstaat) en er geen
toets op de bedieningscomputer of bedieningseenheid wordt
ingedrukt, wordt het eBike-systeem automatisch uitgeschakeld om energie te besparen.
Indicaties en instellingen van de bedieningscomputer
Energievoorziening van de bedieningscomputer
Als de bedieningscomputer in de houder 4 zit, een voldoende
opgeladen accu in de eBike geplaatst is en het eBike-systeem
ingeschakeld is, wordt de bedieningscomputer door de accu
van de eBike van energie voorzien.
Als de bedieningscomputer uit de houder 4 wordt genomen,
vindt de energievoorziening plaats via een interne accu. Als
de interne accu bij het inschakelen van de bedieningscomputer zwak is, verschijnt gedurende 3 seconden „Met fiets verbinden” in het tekstdisplay c. Daarna wordt de bedieningscomputer uitgeschakeld.
Als u de interne accu wilt opladen, plaatst u de bedieningscomputer weer in de houder 4 (als een accu in de eBike geplaatst is). Schakel de accu van de eBike met de aan-uit-toets
van de accu uit (zie gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu).
U kunt de bedieningscomputer ook via de USB-aansluiting opladen. Open daarvoor het beschermkapje 8. Verbind de USBaansluiting 7 van de bedieningscomputer via een geschikte
USB-kabel met een in de handel verkrijgbaar USB-oplaadapparaat of de USB-aansluiting van een computer (laadspanning
5 V, laadstroom max. 500 mA). In de tekstindicatie c van de
bedieningscomputer verschijnt „USB aangesloten”.
Bedieningscomputer in- en uitschakelen
Als u de bedieningscomputer wilt inschakelen, drukt u kort
op de aan-uit-toets 5. De bedieningscomputer kan (als de interne accu voldoende is opgeladen) ook worden ingeschakeld
als deze niet in de houder is geplaatst.
Als u de bedieningscomputer wilt uitschakelen, drukt u op de
aan/uit-toets 5.
Bosch eBike Systems
Als de bedieningscomputer niet in de houder is geplaatst,
wordt deze om energie te besparen uitgeschakeld zodra er
1 minuten lang geen toets is ingedrukt.
Accuoplaadindicatie
De accuoplaadindicatie f geeft de oplaadtoestand van de
eBike-accu aan, niet die van de interne accu van de bedieningscomputer. De oplaadtoestand van de eBike-accu kan
eveneens op de leds van de accu worden afgelezen.
In de indicatie f komt elk streepje in het accusymbool overeen
met ongeveer 20 % van de capaciteit:
100 tot 80 % capaciteit
20 tot 5 % capaciteit. De accu moet worden opgeladen.
Minder dan 5 % capaciteit. De ondersteuning van
de aandrijving is niet meer mogelijk. De leds van de
oplaadindicatie van de accu gaan uit.
Als de verlichting van de eBike via de accu werkt (per land verschillend), is de capaciteit wanneer het lege accusymbool
voor het eerst verschijnt nog voldoende voor ca. 2 uur verlichting. Als het symbool begint te knipperen, is ook de verlichting
nog gedurende korte tijd mogelijk.
Als de bedieningscomputer uit de houder 4 wordt genomen,
blijft de laatst weergegeven accuoplaadtoestand opgeslagen.
Ondersteuningsniveau instellen
U kunt op de bedieningscomputer instellen in welke mate de
aandrijving van de eBike tijdens het trappen ondersteuning
biedt. Het ondersteuningsniveau kan op elk moment gewijzigd worden, ook tijdens het rijden.
Opmerking: In sommige uitvoeringen is het ondersteuningsniveau mogelijk vooraf ingesteld en kan dit niet worden gewijzigd. Het is ook mogelijk dat er uit minder ondersteuningsniveaus dan hier vermeld kan worden gekozen.
De volgende ondersteuningsniveaus staan maximaal ter beschikking:
– „OFF”: De aandrijving is uitgeschakeld. De eBike kan net
als een normale fiets alleen door trappen worden voortbewogen.
– „ECO”: effectieve ondersteuning met maximale efficiëntie
voor maximaal bereik
– „TOUR”: gelijkmatige ondersteuning voor tochten met
groot bereik
– „SPORT”: krachtige ondersteuning voor sportief rijden op
heuvelachtige stukken en voor rijden in de stad
– „TURBO”: maximale ondersteuning bij flink doortrappen,
voor sportief rijden
Als u het ondersteuningsniveau wilt verhogen, drukt u de
toets „+” 13 op de bedieningseenheid zo vaak in tot het gewenste ondersteuningsniveau in de indicatie b verschijnt. Als
u het ondersteuningsniveau wilt verlagen, drukt u op de toets
„ –” 12.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–4
Het opgevraagde motorvermogen verschijnt in de indicatie a.
Het maximale motorvermogen is afhankelijk van het gekozen
ondersteuningsniveau.
Ondersteuningsniveau
„ECO”
„TOUR”
„SPORT”
„TURBO”
Motorvermogen*
(Kettingschakeling)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Het motorvermogen kan bij sommige uitvoeringen afwijken.
Als de bedieningscomputer uit de houder 4 wordt genomen,
blijft het laatst weergegeven ondersteuningsniveau opgeslagen. De indicatie a van het motorvermogen blijft leeg.
Starthulp in- en uitschakelen
De starthulp kan als extra ondersteuning tijdens de eerste meters dienen, als wegrijden lastig is (bijv. bij een verkeerslicht
of op een helling).
 De functie starthulp mag uitsluitend bij het wegrijden
met de eBike worden gebruikt. Als de wielen van de
eBike bij het gebruik van de starthulp geen contact met de
grond maken, bestaat gevaar voor letsel.
Als u de starthulp wilt inschakelen, drukt u op de toets
„WALK” 14 van de bedieningseenheid en houdt u deze ingedrukt. De aandrijving van de eBike wordt ingeschakeld.
De starthulp wordt uitgeschakeld zodra zich een van de volgende gebeurtenissen voordoet:
– U laat de toets „WALK” 14 los.
– U drukt op een andere toets van de bedieningscomputer.
– U trapt snel vooruit of achteruit op de pedalen.
– De wielen van de eBike worden geblokkeerd (bijv. door
remmen of stoten tegen een obstakel).
– De snelheid komt boven 18 km per uur.
Verlichting in- en uitschakelen
Afhankelijk van per land verschillende voorschriften zijn twee
uitvoeringen van de verlichting mogelijk.
– Met de bedieningscomputer kunnen tegelijkertijd voorlicht, achterlicht en display-achtergrondverlichting in- of
uitgeschakeld worden.
In deze uitvoering verschijnt bij het inschakelen van de verlichting „Licht aan” en bij het uitschakelen van de verlichting „Licht uit” gedurende ca. 1 seconde in de tekstindicatie c.
– Alleen de display-achtergrondverlichting kan in- of uitgeschakeld worden. Voor- en achterlicht van de eBike zijn onafhankelijk van de bedieningscomputer.
Bij beide uitvoeringen drukt u voor het in- en uitschakelen
van de verlichting op de toets 2.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Snelheids- en afstandsindicaties
In de snelheidsmeterindicatie e wordt altijd de actuele snelheid weergegeven.
In de functie-indicatie (combinatie van tekstindicatie c en
waarde-indicatie d) kunt u kiezen uit de volgende functies:
– „Bereik”: te verwachten bereik met de aanwezige acculading (bij gelijkblijvende voorwaarden zoals ondersteuningsniveau, routeprofiel, enz.)
– „Afstand”: sinds de laatste reset afgelegde afstand
– „Rijtijd”: Rijtijd sinds de laatste reset
– „Gemiddelde”: sinds de laatste reset bereikte gemiddelde
snelheid
– „Maximum”: sinds de laatste reset bereikte maximale
snelheid
– „Tijd”: actuele tijd
Druk voor de overgang naar de indicatiefunctie de toets „i”
1 van de bedieningscomputer of de toets „i” 11 van de bedieningseenheid zo vaak in tot de gewenste functie wordt weergegeven.
Voor een reset van „Afstand”, „Rijtijd” en „Gemiddelde”
gaat u naar een van deze drie functies en drukt u vervolgens zo
lang op de toets „RESET” 6 tot de indicatie op nul wordt gezet. Daarmee heeft ook een reset plaatsgevonden van de
waarden van de beide andere functies.
Voor een reset van „Maximum” gaat u naar deze functie en
drukt u vervolgens zo lang op de toets „RESET” 6 tot de indicatie op nul wordt gezet.
Wordt de bedieningscomputer uit de houder 4 genomen, blijven alle waarden van de functies opgeslagen en kunnen deze
verder worden weergegeven.
Basisinstellingen weergeven en aanpassen
Weergeven en wijzigen van de basisinstellingen is mogelijk, of
de bedieningscomputer nu in de houder 4 is gezet of niet.
Als u naar het menu Basisinstellingen wilt gaan, drukt u tegelijkertijd zo lang op de toets „RESET” 6 en de toets „i” 1 tot in
de tekstindicatie c „Instellingen” verschijnt.
Druk voor het wisselen tussen de basisinstellingen zo vaak
op de toets „i” 1 op de bedieningscomputer tot de gewenste
basisinstelling wordt weergegeven. Is de bedieningscomputer in de houder 4 geplaatst, kunt u ook op de toets „i” 11 van
de afstandsbediening drukken.
Bij het wijzigen van de basisinstellingen drukt u voor het verlagen resp. omlaag bewegen op de aan-uit-toets 5 naast de indicatie „ –” of voor het verhogen resp. omhoog bewegen op de
toets Verlichting 2 naast de indicatie „+”.
Als de bedieningscomputer in de houder 4 is geplaatst, is wijzigen ook met de toetsen „ –” 12 resp. „+” 13 van de bedieningseenheid mogelijk.
Als u de functie wilt verlaten en een gewijzigde instelling wilt opslaan, drukt u gedurende 3 seconden op de toets „RESET” 6.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–5
U kunt kiezen uit de volgende basisinstellingen:
– „Eenheid km/mi”: U kunt snelheid en afstand in kilometers of mijlen laten weergeven.
– „Tijdformaat”: U kunt de tijd in de 12-uur- of 24-uur-indeling laten weergeven.
– „Tijd”: U kunt de actuele tijd instellen. Als u de insteltoetsen langer indrukt, verandert de tijdsaanduiding sneller.
Indicatie foutcode
De componenten van het eBike-systeem worden voortdurend
automatisch gecontroleerd. Als een fout wordt vastgesteld,
verschijnt de desbetreffende foutcode in de tekstindicatie c.
Druk op een willekeurige toets van bedieningscomputer 3 of
bedieningseenheid 10 om naar de standaardindicatie terug
te keren.
Afhankelijk van de aard van de fout wordt de aandrijving indien nodig automatisch uitgeschakeld. Verder rijden zonder
Code
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
Oorzaak
Interne fout van aandrijfeenheid
Verbindingsprobleem van aandrijfeenheid
Fout van snelheidssensor
Verbindingsprobleem van verlichting
Verbindingsprobleem van bedieningscomputer
Temperatuur van aandrijfeenheid te
hoog (boven 40 °C)
Interne elektronicafout van de accu
Temperatuur van accu te hoog (boven
40 °C)
Temperatuur van de accu te laag (minder dan –10 °C)
Verbindingsprobleem van de accu
Verkeerde accupoolrichting
– „Nederlands”: U kunt de taal van de tekstindicaties wijzigen. U kunt kiezen uit Duits, Engels, Frans, Spaans, Italiaans en Nederlands.
– „Afstand totaal”: Weergave van de totale met de eBike
afgelegde afstand (kan niet gewijzigd worden).
– „Gebruiksduur totaal”: Weergave van de totale tijdsduur
waarmee met de eBike is gereden (kan niet gewijzigd
worden).
ondersteuning door de aandrijving is echter altijd mogelijk.
Laat de eBike controleren voordat u er opnieuw mee gaat rijden.
 Laat alle controles en reparaties uitsluitend door een
erkende rijwielhandel uitvoeren. Als een fout nog steeds
wordt weergegeven ondanks uw poging om deze op te lossen, dient u eveneens contact met een erkende rijwielhandel op te nemen.
Oplossing
Aandrijfeenheid laten controleren
Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
Snelheidssensor laten controleren
Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
Laat de aandrijfeenheid afkoelen. Verder rijden zonder eBike-aandrijving
is mogelijk en versnelt de afkoeling van de aandrijfeenheid.
Accu later controleren
Laat de accu afkoelen. Verder rijden zonder eBike-aandrijving is mogelijk
en versnelt de afkoeling van de accu.
Laat de accu in een warme ruimte langzaam warm worden.
Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
Laad de accu alleen op met met het originele Bosch oplaadapparaat zoals
in de bijbehorende gebruiksaanwijzing beschreven.
Een of meer toetsen van de bedieControleer of er toetsen zijn vastgeklemd, bijv. door binnengedrongen
ningscomputer zijn geblokkeerd.
vuil. Reinig de toetsen indien nodig.
Verbindingsprobleem van bedienings- Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
eenheid
Een of meer toetsen van de bedieControleer of er toetsen zijn vastgeklemd, bijv. door binnengedrongen
ningseenheid zijn geblokkeerd.
vuil. Reinig de toetsen indien nodig.
Verbindingsprobleem van aandrijfeen- Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
heid
Verbindingsprobleem van de accu
Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
Communicatiefout van de componen- Aansluitingen en verbindingen laten controleren
ten onderling
* Alleen bij verlichting van de eBike via de accu (per land verschillend)
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–6
Code
430
490
Oorzaak
Oplossing
Interne accu van de bedieningscompu- Bedieningscomputer opladen (in de houder of via USB-aansluiting)
ter leeg
Interne fout van de bedieningscompu- Bedieningscomputer laten controleren.
ter
* Alleen bij verlichting van de eBike via de accu (per land verschillend)
Energievoorziening van extern apparaten via
USB-aansluiting
Met de USB-aansluiting kunnen de meeste apparaten die via
USB van stroom kunnen voorzien (bijvoorbeeld diverse mobiele telefoons) gebruikt en opgeladen worden.
Voorwaarde voor het laden is dat de bedieningscomputer en
een voldoende opgeladen accu in de eBike zijn geplaatst.
Open het beschermkapje 8 van de USB-aansluiting van de bedieningscomputer. Verbind de USB-aansluiting van het externe apparaat via een passende USB-kabel met de USB-aansluiting 7 van de bedieningscomputer.
Aanwijzingen voor het rijden met het
eBike-systeem
Wanneer werkt de eBike-aandrijving?
De eBike-aandrijving ondersteunt u tijdens het rijden zolang u
op de pedalen trapt. Als u niet op de pedalen trapt, vindt geen
ondersteuning plaats. Het motorvermogen is altijd afhankelijk
van de kracht die u tijdens het trappen uitoefent.
Als u weinig kracht uitoefent, is de ondersteuning geringer
dan wanneer u veel kracht uitoefent. Dat geldt onafhankelijk
van het ondersteuningsniveau.
De eBike-aandrijving wordt automatisch uitgeschakeld bij
snelheden boven 45 km per uur. Als de snelheid onder 45 km
per uur daalt, staat de aandrijving automatisch weer ter beschikking.
Een uitzondering geldt voor de functie starthulp, waarin met
de eBike langzaam kan worden gereden zonder op de pedalen
te trappen.
U kunt met de eBike altijd ook zonder ondersteuning net als
met een normale fiets rijden, als u het eBike-systeem uitschakelt of het ondersteuningsniveau op „OFF” instelt. Hetzelfde
geldt als de accu leeg is.
Samenspel van eBike-systeem en versnellingen
Ook met de eBike-aandrijving kunt u de versnellingen net als
bij een normale fiets gebruiken (zie daarvoor de gebruiksaanwijzing van uw eBike).
Onafhankelijk van de aard van de versnelling is het raadzaam
om tijdens het schakelen het trappen kort te onderbreken.
Daardoor wordt het schakelen vergemakkelijkt en de slijtage
van de aandrijflijn beperkt.
Door de keuze van de juiste versnelling kunt u bij gelijke
krachtsinspanning de snelheid en het bereik vergroten.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Eerste ervaringen opdoen
Geadviseerd wordt om de eerste ervaringen met de eBike op
te doen op een weg zonder druk verkeer.
Probeer verschillende ondersteuningsniveaus uit. Zodra u
zich zeker voelt, kunt u met de eBike net als met elke andere
fiets aan het verkeer deelnemen.
Test het bereik van uw eBike onder verschillende omstandigheden voordat u een langere tocht plant die meer van u eist.
Invloeden op het bereik
Het bereik wordt door vele factoren beïnvloedt, zoals:
– ondersteuningsniveau,
– schakelgedrag,
– bandentype en bandendruk,
– ouderdom en onderhoudstoestand van de accu,
– profiel (hellingen) en aard (wegverharding) van de route,
– tegenwind en omgevingstemperatuur,
– gewicht van eBike, fietser en bagage.
Daarom is een concrete voorspelling van het bereik voor het
begin van een tocht niet mogelijk. In het algemeen geldt echter:
– Bij gelijk motorvermogen van eBike-aandrijving: hoe minder kracht u hoeft te benutten om een bepaalde snelheid te
bereiken (bijv. door optimaal gebruik van de versnellingen), des te minder energie de eBike-aandrijving zal verbruiken en des te groter het bereik van een acculading zal
zijn.
– Hoe hoger het ondersteuningsniveau bij verder gelijke omstandigheden wordt gekozen, des te geringer het bereik.
Verzorging en onderhoud van de eBike
Houd rekening met de bedrijfs- en bewaartemperaturen van
de componenten van de eBike. Bescherm aandrijfeenheid,
bedieningscomputer en accu tegen extreme temperaturen
(bijv. bij fel zonlicht zonder voldoende ventilatie). De componenten (in het bijzonder de accu) kunnen door extreme temperaturen beschadigd worden.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–7
Onderhoud en service
Onderhoud en reiniging
Houd alle componenten van de eBike schoon, in het bijzonder
de contacten van de accu en de bijbehorende houder. Reinig
deze voorzichtig met een zachte, vochtige doek.
Geen van de componenten, ook de aandrijfeenheid niet, mogen in water worden ondergedompeld of met een hogedrukreiniger worden gereinigd.
Neem voor service of reparaties aan de eBike contact op met
een erkende rijwielhandel.
Klantenservice en advies
Neem bij alle vragen over het eBike-systeem en zijn componenten contact op met een erkende rijwielhandel.
Contactgegevens van de erkende rijwielhandel vindt u op de
internetpagina www.bosch-ebike.com
Vervoer
Voor de accu’s gelden de eisen ten aanzien van gevaarlijke
stoffen. De accu’s kunnen door particuliere gebruikers zonder
verdere voorwaarden over de weg worden vervoerd.
Bij vervoer door zakelijke gebruikers of bij vervoer door derden (bijv. luchtvervoer of vervoersbedrijf) moeten bijzondere
eisen ten aanzien van verpakking en markering in acht worden
genomen (bijv. ADR-voorschriften). Indien gewenst kan bij de
voorbereiding van de verzending een deskundige voor gevaarlijke stoffen worden geraadpleegd.
Verzend de accu’s alleen als de behuizing onbeschadigd is.
Plak blootliggende contacten af en verpak de accu zodanig
dat deze niet in de verpakking beweegt. Neem ook eventuele
overige nationale voorschriften in acht.
Neem bij alle vragen over het vervoer van de accu’s contact op
met een erkende rijwielhandel. Bij de rijwielhandel kunt u ook
een geschikte transportverpakking bestellen.
Bosch eBike Systems
Afvalverwijdering
Aandrijfeenheid, bedieningscomputer incl. bedieningseenheid, accu, snelheidssensor, toebehoren en
verpakkingen moeten op een voor het milieu verantwoorde wijze worden gerecycled.
Gooi een eBike of componenten daarvan niet bij het huisvuil!
Alleen voor landen van de EU:
Volgens de Europese richtlijn 2002/96/EG
moeten niet meer bruikbare elektrische apparaten en volgens de Europese richtlijn
2006/66/EG moeten defecte of lege accu’s
en batterijen apart worden ingezameld en
op een voor het milieu verantwoorde wijze
worden gerecycled.
De in de bedieningscomputer geïntegreerde accu mag alleen
worden verwijderd als deze moet worden afgevoerd. Door het
openen van de behuizing kan de bedieningscomputer onherstelbaar beschadigd worden.
Geef niet meer te gebruiken accu’s en bedieningscomputers
af bij een erkende rijwielhandel.
Li-ion:
Lees de aanwijzingen in het gedeelte
„Vervoer”, pagina Nederlands–7 en
neem deze in acht.
Wijzigingen voorbehouden.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–8
Lithiumionaccu PowerPack
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Lees alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen.
Als de veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen niet in
acht worden genomen, kan dit
een elektrische schok, brand en/of ernstig letsel tot gevolg
hebben.
Bewaar alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen
voor toekomstig gebruik.
Het in deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruikte begrip „accu” heeft
zowel betrekking op standaardaccu’s (accu’s bevestigd aan
het fietsframe) als op bagagedrageraccu’s (accu bevestigd in
de bagagedrager) tenzij het type uitdrukkelijk genoemd
wordt.
 Neem de accu uit de eBike voordat u begint met werkzaamheden (zoals montage, onderhoud, enz.) aan de
eBike, voordat u deze per auto of vliegtuig vervoert en
voordat u deze opbergt. Bij per ongeluk bedienen van de
aan/uit-schakelaar bestaat verwondingsgevaar.
 Open de accu niet. Er bestaat gevaar voor kortsluiting. Als
de accu geopend wordt, vervalt elke aanspraak op garantie.
Bescherm de accu tegen hitte (bijv. ook tegen
langdurig fel zonlicht), vuur en onderdompeling in water. Er bestaat explosiegevaar.
 Voorkom aanraking van de niet-gebruikte accu met paperclips, munten, sleutels, spijkers, schroeven en andere kleine metalen voorwerpen die overbrugging van
de contacten kunnen veroorzaken. Kortsluiting tussen
de accucontacten kan brandwonden of brand tot gevolg
hebben. Bij in dit verband ontstane schade door kortsluiting vervalt elke aanspraak op garantie door Bosch.
 Bij verkeerd gebruik kan vloeistof uit de accu lekken.
Voorkom contact daarmee. Bij onvoorzien contact met
water afspoelen. Als de vloeistof in de ogen komt, dient
u bovendien een arts te raadplegen. Gelekte accuvloeistof kan tot huidirritaties en brandwonden leiden.
 Bij beschadiging en onjuist gebruik van de accu kunnen
er dampen vrijkomen. Zorg voor frisse lucht en raadpleeg bij klachten een arts. De dampen kunnen de luchtwegen irriteren.
 Laad de accu alleen met originele Bosch-oplaadapparaten op. Bij gebruik van niet-originele Bosch-oplaadapparaten kan brandgevaar niet worden uitgesloten.
 Gebruik de accu alleen in combinatie met een eBike
met origineel Bosch eBike-aandrijfsysteem. Alleen zo
wordt de accu tegen gevaarlijke overbelasting beschermd.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Gebruik alleen originele Bosch accu’s die door de fabrikant voor uw eBike zijn toegestaan. Het gebruik van andere accu’s kan tot letsel en brandgevaar leiden. Bij gebruik van andere accu’s wordt door Bosch geen
aansprakelijkheid aanvaard en geen garantie geboden.
 Lees de veiligheids- en overige voorschriften in de gebruiksaanwijzing van het oplaadapparaat, de gebruiksaanwijzing van aandrijfeenheid en bedieningscomputer en de gebruiksaanwijzing van de eBike en neem
deze in acht.
Product- en vermogensbeschrijving
Afgebeelde componenten
(zie pagina 4–5)
De componenten zijn genummerd zoals op de pagina’s met afbeeldingen.
Alle afbeeldingen van fietsonderdelen behalve de accu’s en
hun houders zijn schematisch en kunnen afwijken van de onderdelen van uw eBike.
19 Houder van bagagedrageraccu
20 Bagagedrageraccu
21 Bedrijfs- en oplaadindicatie
22 Aan/uit-toets
23 Sleutel van accuslot
24 Accuslot
25 Bovenste houder van standaardaccu
26 Standaardaccu
27 Onderste houder van standaardaccu
28 Draagriem
29 Oplaadapparaat
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–9
Technische gegevens
Lithiumionaccu
Zaaknummer
– Standaardaccu zwart
– Standaardaccu wit
– Bagagedrageraccu
Nominale spanning
Nominale capaciteit
Energie
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Bewaartemperatuur
Toegestaan oplaadtemperatuurbereik
Gewicht, ca.
Beschermingsklasse
Montage
 Plaats de accu alleen op een schone ondergrond. Voorkom in het bijzonder het vuil worden van de oplaadaansluiting en de contacten, bijv. door zand of aarde.
Accu voor het eerste gebruik controleren
Controleer de accu voordat u deze voor de eerste keer oplaadt of met uw eBike gebruikt.
Druk daarvoor op de aan-uit-toets 22 voor het inschakelen
van de accu. Als er geen led van de oplaadindicatie 21 brandt,
is de accu mogelijk beschadigd.
Als er minstens een led brandt, maar niet alle leds van de oplaadindicatie 21 branden, dient u de accu voor het eerste gebruik volledig op te laden.
 Laad een beschadigde accu niet op en gebruik deze
niet. Neem contact op met een erkende rijwielhandel.
Accu opladen
 Gebruik alleen het met uw eBike meegeleverde originele Bosch-oplaadapparaat of een origineel Bosch-oplaadapparaat van hetzelfde type. Alleen dit oplaadapparaat is afgestemd op de bij de eBike gebruikte
lithiumionaccu.
Opmerking: De accu wordt gedeeltelijk opgeladen geleverd.
Om de volledige capaciteit van de accu te verkrijgen, laadt u
voor het eerste gebruik de accu volledig met het oplaadapparaat op.
De accu moet voor het opladen uit de eBike worden genomen.
Lees voor het opladen van de accu de gebruiksaanwijzing van
het oplaadapparaat en neem de voorschriften in acht.
De accu kan op elk moment worden opgeladen zonder de levensduur te verkorten. Een onderbreking van het opladen
schaadt de accu niet.
Bosch eBike Systems
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 300
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 502
36
8,2
300
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (stof- en spatwaterbescherming)
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 505
36
11
400
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (stof- en spatwaterbescherming)
De accu is voorzien van een temperatuurbewaking die ervoor
zorgt dat de accu alleen in het temperatuurbereik tussen 0 °C
en 40 °C kan worden opgeladen.
Bevindt de accu zich buiten het
oplaadtemperatuurbereik,
knipperen drie leds van de oplaadindicatie 21. Maak de accu
los van het oplaadapparaat en laat deze op temperatuur
komen.
Sluit de accu pas weer aan op het oplaadapparaat als deze de
toegestane oplaadtemperatuur heeft bereikt.
Oplaadindicatie
De vijf groene leds van de oplaadindicatie 21 geven de oplaadtoestand van de accu aan als de accu ingeschakeld is.
Daarbij komt elke led overeen met ca. 20 % van de capaciteit.
Als de accu volledig is opgeladen, branden alle vijf leds.
De oplaadtoestand van de ingeschakelde accu wordt bovendien in de bedieningscomputer aangegeven. Lees daarvoor
de gebruiksaanwijzing van aandrijfeenheid en bedieningscomputer en neem de voorschriften in acht.
Als de capaciteit van de accu daalt beneden 5 %, gaan alle
leds van de oplaadindicatie 21 van de accu uit. Er is echter
nog een indicatiefunctie van de bedieningscomputer.
Accu inzetten of verwijderen
(zie afbeeldingen C–D)
 Schakel de accu altijd uit als u deze in de houder plaatst
of uit de houder neemt.
Om de accu te kunnen plaatsen, moet de sleutel 23 in het slot
24 steken en het slot moet geopend zijn.
Voor het plaatsen van de standaardaccu 26 zet u deze met de
contacten op de onderste houder 27 van de eBike. Kantel de
accu tot deze niet meer verder kan in de bovenste houder 25.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–10
Voor het plaatsen van de bagagedrageraccu 20 duwt u deze
met de contacten naar voren in de houder 19 in de bagagedrager tot de accu vastklikt.
Controleer of de accu stevig vast zit. Sluit de accu altijd met
het slot 24 af. Anders kan het slot opengaan en kan de accu uit
de houder vallen.
Trek de sleutel 23 na het afsluiten altijd uit het slot 24. Daarmee voorkomt u dat de sleutel eruit valt of de accu van een geparkeerde eBike door anderen wordt meegenomen.
Voor het verwijderen van de standaardaccu 26 schakelt u
deze uit en opent u het slot met de sleutel 23. Kantel de accu
uit de bovenste houder 25 en trek deze aan de draagriem 28
uit de onderste houder 27.
Voor het verwijderen van de bagagedrageraccu 20 schakelt u deze uit en opent u het slot met de sleutel 23. Trek de
accu uit de houder 19.
Gebruik
Ingebruikneming
 Gebruik alleen originele Bosch accu’s die door de fabrikant voor uw eBike zijn toegestaan. Het gebruik van andere accu’s kan tot letsel en brandgevaar leiden. Bij gebruik van andere accu’s wordt door Bosch geen
aansprakelijkheid aanvaard en geen garantie geboden.
In- en uitschakelen
Het inschakelen van de accu is een van de mogelijkheden om
het eBike-systeem in te schakelen. Lees daarvoor de gebruiksaanwijzing van aandrijfeenheid en bedieningscomputer en neem de voorschriften in acht.
Controleer voor het inschakelen van de accu of het eBike-systeem dat het slot 24 afgesloten is.
Opmerking: De pedalen van de eBike dienen bij het inschakelen van het eBike-systeem niet belast te zijn. Anders wordt het
vermogen van de eBike-aandrijving beperkt.
Als u de accu wilt inschakelen, drukt u op de aan-uit-toets 22.
De leds van de indicatie 21 gaan branden en geven tegelijkertijd de oplaadtoestand aan.
Opmerking: Als de capaciteit van de accu onder 5 % daalt,
brandt er geen led van de oplaadindicatie 21. Alleen op de bedieningscomputer is herkenbaar of het eBike-systeem is ingeschakeld.
Als u de accu wilt uitschakelen, drukt u opnieuw op de aanuit-toets 22. De leds van de indicatie 21 gaan uit. Het eBikesysteem wordt daarmee eveneens uitgeschakeld.
Als er ca. 10 minuten geen vermogen van de eBike-aandrijving wordt opgevraagd (bijv. omdat de eBike stilstaat) en er
geen toets op de bedieningscomputer of bedieningseenheid
van de eBike wordt ingedrukt, worden het eBike-systeem en
daardoor ook de accu automatisch uitgeschakeld om energie
te besparen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
De accu is door „Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)” beschermd
tegen overmatig ontladen, overmatig opladen, oververhitting
en kortsluiting. Bij gevaar wordt de accu door een veiligheidsschakeling automatisch uitgeschakeld.
Wordt een defect van de accu
herkend, knipperen twee leds
van de oplaadindicatie 21.
Neem in dit geval contact op
met een erkende rijwielhandel.
Aanwijzingen voor de optimale omgang met de
accu
De levensduur van de accu kan worden verlengd als deze
goed wordt behandeld en met name bij de juiste temperaturen wordt bewaard.
Met toenemende ouderdom zal de capaciteit van de accu echter ook bij goede verzorging afnemen.
Een duidelijk kortere gebruiksduur na het opladen geeft aan
dat de accu versleten is. U kunt de accu vervangen.
Mocht de draagriem 28 van de standaardaccu defect zijn,
dient u deze door een rijwielhandel te laten vervangen.
Accu voor en tijdens het bewaren opladen
Laad de accu op tot ongeveer 60 % (3 tot 4 leds van de oplaadindicatie 21 branden) voordat u deze voor lange tijd opbergt.
Controleer de oplaadtoestand na 6 maanden. Als er nog maar
één led van de oplaadindicatie 21 brandt, dient u de accu
weer tot ca 60 % op te laden.
Opmerking: Als de accu lange tijd in lege toestand wordt bewaard, kan deze ondanks de geringe zelfontlading worden beschadigd en kan de opslagcapaciteit sterk worden verminderd.
Het is niet aan te raden de accu langdurig aan het oplaadapparaat aangesloten te laten.
Bewaaromstandigheden
Bewaar de accu bij voorkeur op een droge en goed geventileerde plaats. Bescherm deze tegen vocht en water. Bij ongunstige weersomstandigheden is het bijv. aan te raden om
de accu van de eBike te nemen en tot het volgende gebruik in
een gesloten ruimte te bewaren.
De accu kan bij temperaturen van –10 °C tot +60 °C worden
bewaard. Voor een lange levensduur is echter bewaren bij een
temperatuur van ca. 20 °C gunstig.
Let erop dat de maximale bewaartemperatuur niet wordt
overschreden. Laat de accu bijv. in de zomer niet in de auto
liggen en bewaar deze niet in fel zonlicht.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–11
Onderhoud en service
Onderhoud en reiniging
Houd de accu schoon. Reinig deze voorzichtig met een zachte, vochtige doek. De accu mag niet in water worden ondergedompeld of met een waterstraal worden gereinigd.
Als de accu niet meer werkt, dient u contact op te nemen met
een erkende rijwielhandel.
Klantenservice en advies
Neem bij alle vragen over het vervoer van de accu’s contact op
met een erkende rijwielhandel.
 Noteer fabrikant en nummer van de sleutel 23. Neem bij
verlies van de sleutels contact op met een erkende rijwielhandel. Vermeld daarbij fabrikant en nummers van de sleutels.
Contactgegevens van de erkende rijwielhandel vindt u op de
internetpagina www.bosch-ebike.com
Vervoer
Voor de accu’s gelden de eisen ten aanzien van gevaarlijke
stoffen. De accu’s kunnen door particuliere gebruikers zonder
verdere voorwaarden over de weg worden vervoerd.
Bij vervoer door zakelijke gebruikers of bij vervoer door derden (bijv. luchtvervoer of vervoersbedrijf) moeten bijzondere
eisen ten aanzien van verpakking en markering in acht worden
genomen (bijv. ADR-voorschriften). Indien gewenst kan bij de
voorbereiding van de verzending een deskundige voor gevaarlijke stoffen worden geraadpleegd.
Verzend de accu’s alleen als de behuizing onbeschadigd is.
Plak blootliggende contacten af en verpak de accu zodanig
dat deze niet in de verpakking beweegt. Neem ook eventuele
overige nationale voorschriften in acht.
Neem bij alle vragen over het vervoer van de accu’s contact op
met een erkende rijwielhandel. Bij de rijwielhandel kunt u ook
een geschikte transportverpakking bestellen.
Bosch eBike Systems
Afvalverwijdering
Accu’s, toebehoren en verpakkingen dienen op een
voor het milieu verantwoorde manier te worden hergebruikt.
Gooi de accu’s niet bij het huisvuil.
Alleen voor landen van de EU:
Volgens de Europese richtlijn 2002/96/EG
moeten niet meer bruikbare elektrische apparaten en volgens de Europese richtlijn
2006/66/EG moeten defecte of lege accu’s
en batterijen apart worden ingezameld en
op een voor het milieu verantwoorde wijze
worden gerecycled.
Geef niet meer te gebruiken accu’s af bij een erkende rijwielhandel.
Li-ion:
Lees de aanwijzingen in het gedeelte
„Vervoer”, pagina Nederlands–11 en
neem deze in acht.
Wijzigingen voorbehouden.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–12
Oplaadapparaat Charger
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Lees alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen.
Als de veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen niet in
acht worden genomen, kan dit
een elektrische schok, brand en/of ernstig letsel tot gevolg
hebben.
Bewaar alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en aanwijzingen
voor toekomstig gebruik.
Het in deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruikte begrip „accu” heeft
zowel betrekking op standaardaccu’s (accu’s bevestigd aan
het fietsframe) als op bagagedrageraccu’s (accu bevestigd in
de bagagedrager).
Houd het oplaadapparaat uit de buurt van regen en
vocht. Bij het binnendringen van water in een oplaadapparaat bestaat het risico van een elektrische schok.
 Laad alleen voor eBikes toegestane Bosch-lithiumionaccu’s op. De accuspanning moet bij de oplaadspanning van het oplaadapparaat passen. Anders bestaat er
brand- en explosiegevaar.
 Houd het oplaadapparaat schoon. Door vervuiling bestaat gevaar voor een elektrische schok.
 Controleer voor elk gebruik oplaadapparaat, kabel en
stekker. Gebruik het oplaadapparaat niet als u een beschadiging hebt vastgesteld. Open het oplaadapparaat
niet zelf en laat het alleen door gekwalificeerd personeel en alleen met originele vervangingsonderdelen repareren. Beschadigde oplaadapparaten, kabels en stekkers vergroten het risico van een elektrische schok.
 Gebruik het oplaadapparaat niet op een gemakkelijk
brandbare ondergrond (zoals papier of textiel) of in
een brandbare omgeving. Vanwege de bij het opladen
optredende verwarming van het oplaadapparaat bestaat
brandgevaar.
 Bij beschadiging en onjuist gebruik van de accu kunnen
er dampen vrijkomen. Zorg voor frisse lucht en raadpleeg bij klachten een arts. De dampen kunnen de luchtwegen irriteren.
 Houd toezicht op kinderen. Daarmee wordt gewaarborgd
dat kinderen niet met het oplaadapparaat spelen.
 Kinderen en personen die op grond van hun fysieke,
zintuiglijke of geestelijke vermogens, hun onervarenheid of hun gebrek aan kennis niet in staat zijn het oplaadapparaat veilig te bedienen, mogen dit oplaadapparaat niet zonder toezicht of instructie door een
verantwoordelijke persoon gebruiken. Anders bestaat
het gevaar van verkeerde bediening en lichamelijk letsel.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Lees de veiligheids- en overige voorschriften in de gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu, de gebruiksaanwijzing
van aandrijfeenheid en bedieningscomputer en de gebruiksaanwijzing van de eBike en neem deze in acht.
 Aan de onderzijde van het oplaadapparaat bevindt zich
een kort overzicht van belangrijke veiligheidsvoorschriften
in het Engels, Frans en Spaans (in de afbeelding op de pagina met afbeeldingen met nummer 33 aangeduid) met de
volgende inhoud:
– Neem voor een veilig gebruik de gebruiksaanwijzing in
acht. Risico van een elektrische schok.
– Alleen in droge omgeving gebruiken.
– Laad alleen accu’s van het Bosch eBike-System op. Andere accu’s kunnen exploderen en letsel veroorzaken.
– Vervang het netsnoer niet. Er bestaat brand- en explosiegevaar.
Product- en vermogensbeschrijving
Afgebeelde componenten
(zie pagina 6–7)
De componenten zijn genummerd zoals op de afbeelding van
het oplaadapparaat op de pagina met afbeeldingen.
20 Bagagedrageraccu
21 Accu-oplaadindicatie
26 Standaardaccu
29 Oplaadapparaat
30 Apparaataansluiting
31 Apparaatstekker
32 Ventilatieopeningen
33 Veiligheidsvoorschriften oplaadapparaat
34 Oplaadstekker
35 Contactbus voor oplaadstekker
Technische gegevens
Oplaadapparaat
Zaaknummer
Nominale spanning
Frequentie
Oplaadspanning accu
Laadstroom
Toegestaan oplaadtemperatuurbereik
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
De gegevens gelden voor nominale spanningen [U] 230 V. Bij afwijkende spanningen en bij per land verschillende uitvoeringen kunnen deze
gegevens afwijken.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–13
Oplaadapparaat
Oplaadtijd
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Aantal accucellen
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Bewaartemperatuur
Gewicht volgens EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Beschermingsklasse
Charger
h
h
°C
°C
kg
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0,8
IP 40
De gegevens gelden voor nominale spanningen [U] 230 V. Bij afwijkende spanningen en bij per land verschillende uitvoeringen kunnen deze
gegevens afwijken.
Gebruik
De accu is volledig opgeladen als alle vijf leds van de indicatie
21 continu branden. Het opladen wordt automatisch onderbroken.
Koppel het oplaadapparaat los van het stroomnet en de accu
van het oplaadapparaat.
Als de accu van het oplaadapparaat wordt losgekoppeld,
wordt de accu automatisch uitgeschakeld.
U kunt de accu nu in de eBike plaatsen.
Oorzaken en oplossingen van fouten
Oorzaak
Oplossing
Twee leds op de accu
knipperen
Accu defect
Contact opnemen met erkende rijwielhandel
Drie leds op de accu
knipperen
 Plaats de accu alleen op een schone ondergrond. Voorkom in het bijzonder het vuil worden van de oplaadaansluiting en de contacten, bijv. door zand of aarde.
Ingebruikneming
Oplaadapparaat aansluiten (zie afbeeldingen E–F)
 Let op de netspanning! De spanning van de stroombron
moet overeenkomen met de gegevens op het typeplaatje
van het oplaadapparaat. Met 230 V aangeduide oplaadapparaten kunnen ook met 220 V worden gebruikt.
Steek de apparaatstekker 31 van het netsnoer in de apparaataansluiting 30 op het oplaadapparaat.
Sluit het netsnoer (verschilt per land) op het stroomnet aan.
Schakel de accu uit en verwijder deze uit de houder op de
eBike. Lees daarvoor de gebruiksaanwijzing van de accu en
neem de voorschriften in acht.
Steek de oplaadstekker 34 van het oplaadapparaat in de aansluiting 35 van de accu.
Opladen
Het opladen begint zodra het oplaadapparaat met de accu en
het stroomnet verbonden is.
Opmerking: Het opladen is alleen mogelijk als de temperatuur van de accu binnen het toegestane oplaadtemperatuurbereik ligt.
Tijdens het opladen branden de leds van de oplaadindicatie
21 op de accu. Elke continu brandende led komt overeen met
ca. 20 % van de capaciteit van de lading. De knipperende led
geeft het opladen van de volgende 20 % aan.
 Wees voorzichtig als u het oplaadapparaat tijdens het
opladen aanraakt. Draag werkhandschoenen. Het oplaadapparaat kan in het bijzonder bij hoge omgevingstemperaturen zeer heet worden.
Opmerking: Let erop dat het oplaadapparaat tijdens het opladen goed van lucht wordt voorzien en de ventilatieopeningen 32 aan beide zijden niet zijn afgedekt.
Bosch eBike Systems
Accu te warm of te koud
Accu van oplaadapparaat
losmaken en op temperatuur
laten komen tot het oplaadtemperatuurbereik wordt
bereikt.
Sluit de accu pas weer aan op
het oplaadapparaat als deze
de toegestane oplaadtemperatuur heeft bereikt.
Geen opladen mogelijk (geen indicatie op accu)
Stekker niet goed ingestoAlle insteekverbindingen
ken.
controleren
Contacten van accu vuil
Contacten van accu voorzichtig reinigen
Ventilatieopeningen 32 van Ventilatieopeningen 32
oplaadapparaat verstopt of reinigen en oplaadapparaat
neerzetten op een plaats met
afgedekt
voldoende luchttoevoer
Stopcontact, kabel of oplaad- Netspanning controleren, opapparaat defect
laadapparaat door rijwielhandel laten controleren
Accu defect
Contact opnemen met
erkende rijwielhandel
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Nederlands–14
Onderhoud en service
Onderhoud en reiniging
Mocht het oplaadapparaat niet meer werken, neem dan contact op met een erkende rijwielhandel.
Klantenservice en advies
Neem bij alle vragen over het oplaadapparaat contact op met
een erkende rijwielhandel.
Contactgegevens van de erkende rijwielhandel vindt u op de
internetpagina www.bosch-ebike.com
Afvalverwijdering
Oplaadapparaten, toebehoren en verpakkingen moeten op
een voor het milieu verantwoorde wijze worden hergebruikt.
Gooi oplaadapparaten niet bij het huisvuil!
Alleen voor landen van de EU:
Volgens de Europese richtlijn 2002/96/EG
over elektrische en elektronische oude apparaten en de omzetting van de richtlijn in
nationaal recht moeten niet meer bruikbare
oplaadapparaten apart worden ingezameld
en op een voor het milieu verantwoorde wijze worden hergebruikt.
Wijzigingen voorbehouden.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–1
Drivenhed Drive Unit Speed/
Cykelcomputer Intuvia
Sikkerhedsinstrukser
Læs alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger. Overholdes sikkerhedsinstrukserne og
anvisningerne ikke, er der risiko for elektrisk
stød, brand og/eller alvorlige kvæstelser.
Opbevar alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger til senere brug.
Begrebet „akku“, der anvendes i nærværende brugsanvisning, gælder både for standard-akkuer (akkuer med holder på
cykelstel) og bagagebærer-akkuer (akkuer med holder i bagagebærer).
 Forsøg ikke selv at åbne drivenheden. Drivenheden er
vedligeholdelsesfri og må kun repareres af kvalificeret, specialiseret personale og kun med originale reservedele. Dermed sikres størst mulig sikkerhed af drivenheden. Åbnes drivenheden uberettiget, bortfalder
garantikravet.
 Alle komponenter, der er monteret på drivenheden, og
alle andre komponenter til eBike-drevet (f.eks. kædeblad, kædebladets holder, pedaler) må kun erstattes af
komponenter, der er bygget på samme måde, eller af
komponenter, der er godkendt af cykelproducenten
specielt til din eBike. Dermed beskyttes drivenheden
mod overbelastning og beskadigelse.
 Tag akkuen ud af eBike, før du begynder at arbejde
(f.eks. montere, vedligeholde osv.) på eBike, før du
transporterer den med bilen eller flyveren eller opbevarer den. Utilsigtet betjening af start-stop-kontakten er
forbundet med kvæstelsesfare.
 Funktionen starthjælp må udelukkende bruges til at
starte eBiken. Har eBikens hjul ikke nogen kontakt med
jorden, når starthjælpen bruges, kan man komme til skade.
 Brug kun originale Bosch akkuer, der er blevet godkendt til din eBike af produenten. Brug af andre akkuer
kan føre til kvæstelser og er forbundet med brandfare.
Bosch fraskriver sig ansvaret, og garantien bortfalder, hvis
der bruges andre akkuer.
 Følg alle nationale forskrifter vedr. registrering/godkendelse og brug af eBikes.
 Læs og følg sikkerhedsinstrukserne og anvisningerne i
akkuens brugsanvisning samt i brugsanvisningen til
din eBike.
Bosch eBike Systems
Beskrivelse af produkt og ydelse
Beregnet anvendelse
Drivenheden er udelukkende beregnet til at trække din eBike
og må ikke bruges til andre formål.
eBike er beregnet til gader og veje med fast undergrund. Den
er ikke godkendt til konkurrenceformål.
Illustrerede komponenter
(se side 2–3)
Nummereringen af de illustrerede komponenter refererer til
illustrationerne på den grafiske side.
Alle illustrationer af cykeldele undtagen drivenhed, cykelcomputer inkl. betjeningsenhed, hastighedssensor og tilhørende
holdere er skematiske og kan afvige fra din eBike.
1 Taste indikatorfunktion „i“
2 Taste til belysning
3 Cykelcomputer
4 Holder cykelcomputer
5 Tænd-sluk-taste cykelcomputer
6 Reset-taste „RESET“
7 USB-bøsning
8 Beskyttelseskappe til USB-bøsning
9 Drivenhed
10 Betjeningsenhed
11 Taste visefunktion „i“ på betjeningsenheden
12 Taste værdi sænkes/bladre nedad „ –“
13 Taste værdi øges/bladre opad „+“
14 Taste starthjælp „WALK“
15 Fastlåsning cykelcomputer
16 Blokeringsskrue cykelcomputer
17 Hastighedssensor
18 Egemagnet for hastighedssensor
Indikatorelementer cykelcomputer
a Visning motoreffekt
b Indikator understøtningsniveau
c Tekstvisning
d Værdivisning
e Indikator fartmåler
f Indikator for akkuens opladningstilstand
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–2
Tekniske data
Drivenhed
Typenummer
Effekt
Omdrejningsmoment på
udgang maks.
Nominel spænding
Driftstemperatur
Opbevaringstemperatur
Tæthedsgrad
Vægt, ca.
Cykelcomputer
Typenummer
Ladestrøm
USB-tilslutning maks.
Ladespænding
USB-tilslutning
Driftstemperatur
Opbevaringstemperatur
Tæthedsgrad
Vægt, ca.
Belysning*
Nominel spænding
Effekt
– forlys
– baglys
W
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
Nm
V
°C
°C
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (støv- og sprøjtevandsbeskyttet)
kg
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (støv- og sprøjtevandsbeskyttet)
kg
0,15
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* afhængigt af de lovmæssige regler og bestemmelser ikke mulig i alle
landespecifikke udførelser via eBike-akkuen
Montering
Isætning og udtagning af akkuen
Læs og følg akkuens brugsanvisning mht. hvordan akkuen
sættes i og tages ud af eBike.
Isætning og udtagning af cykelcomputeren
(se Fig. A)
Cykelcomputeren 3 sættes i ved at skubbe den ind i holderen
forfra 4.
Cykelcomputeren 3 tages af ved at trykke på låsen 15 og
skubbe den ud af holderen fremad 4.
 Fjern altid cykelcomputeren, før eBike stilles fra et
sted, så drevet ikke kan bruges af uberettiget tredjemand. eBike-systemet kan ikke tændes uden cykelcomputer.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Det er også muligt at sikre cykelcomputeren i holderen, så den
ikke kan tages ud. Demonter hertil holderen 4 fra styret. Anbring cykelcomputeren i holderen. Skru blokeringsskruen 16
nedefra ind i gevindet på holderen. Monter holderen på styret
igen.
Kontrol af hastighedssensoren (se Fig. B)
Hastighedssensoren 17 og den tilhørende egemagnet 18 skal
være monteret på en sådan måde, at egemagneten bevæger
sig forbi hastighedssensoren i en afstand på mindst 5 mm og
maks. 17 mm, når hjulet drejer en omdrejning.
Bemærk: Er afstanden mellem hastighedssensor 17 og egemagnet 18 for lille eller for stor, eller er hastighedssensoren
17 ikke tilsluttet rigtigt, fungerer fartmålerindikatoren ikke e,
og eBike-drevet arbejder i nødkørselsprogrammet.
Løsn i dette tilfælde skruen i egemagneten 18 fastgør egemagneten på egen på en sådan måde, at den løber forbi hastighedssensorens markering i den rigtige afstand. Fremkommer der heller ikke herefter nogen hastighed i
fartmålerindikatoren e, bedes du kontakte en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Brug
Ibrugtagning
Forudsætninger
eBike-systemet kan kun aktiveres, hvis følgende forudsætninger er opfyldt:
– En tilstrækkeligt opladt akku er sat i (se akkuens brugsanvisning).
– Cykelcomputeren er sat rigtigt ind i holderen (se „Isætning
og udtagning af cykelcomputeren“, side Dansk–2).
– Hastighedssensoren er tilsluttet rigtigt (se „Kontrol af hastighedssensoren“, side Dansk–2).
eBike-system tændes/slukkes
eBike-systemet tændes på følgende måder:
– Er cykelcomputeren allerede tændt, når den sættes ind i
holderen, tændes eBike-systemet automatisk.
– Tryk kort en gang på tænd-sluk-tasten 5 på cykelcomputeren, når cykelcomputeren og akkuen er sat i.
– Tryk på akkuens tænd-sluk-tasten, når cykelcomputeren
er sat i (se akkuens brugsanvisning).
Bemærk: Pedalerne på eBike må ikke være belastet, når
eBike-systemet tændes, da motoreffekten ellers begrænses.
I tekstvisningen c fremkommer fejlmeldingen „Release pedal“ (aflast pedal).
Er eBike-systemet ved et tilfælde blevet tændt med belastede
pedaler, skal du slukke for det og så tænde for det igen uden
belastning.
Drevet aktiveres, så snart du træder i pedalerne (undtagen i
funktionen starthjælp, se „Tænd/sluk for starthjælpen“, side
Dansk–4). Motoreffekten retter sig efter indstillingerne på
cykelcomputeren.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–3
Så snart du holder op med at træde i pedalerne i normal funktion, eller så snart du har nået en hastighed på 45 km/h, slukkes understøtningen af drevet på eBike. Drevet aktiveres
automatisk igen, så snart du træder på pedalerne, og hastigheden er under 45 km/h.
eBike-systemet slukkes på følgende måder:
– Tryk på tænd-sluk-tasten 5 på cykelcomputeren.
– Sluk for akkuen med dens tænd-sluk-taste (se akkuens
brugsanvisning.)
– Tag cykelcomputeren ud af holderen.
Påvirkes drevet ikke i ca. 10 min (f.eks. fordi eBike står stille),
og der ikke trykkes på nogen taste på cykelcomputer eller betjeningsenhed, slukker eBike-systemet automatisk for at spare på energien.
Visning og indstillinger på cykelcomputeren
Energiforsyning til cykelcomputeren
Sidder cykelcomputeren i holderen 4, er en tilstrækkeligt ladet akku sat i eBike og er eBike-systemet tændt, forsynes cykelcomputeren med energi via eBikens akku.
Tages cykelcomputeren ud af holderen 4, sikres energiforsyningen via en intern akku. Er den interne akku svag, når cykelcomputeren tændes, fremkommer „Attach to bike“ (forbind
med cykel) i tekstvisningen c i 3 s. Herefter slukker cykelcomputeren igen.
Den interne akku oplades ved at sætte cykelcomputeren ind i
holderen 4 igen (hvis en akku er sat ind i eBiken). Tænd for
eBike-akkuen med dens tænd-sluk-taste (se akkuens brugsanvisning).
Du kan også oplade cykelcomputeren via USB-tilslutningen.
Åbn hertil beskyttelseskappen 8. Forbind USB-bøsningen 7
på cykelcomputeren via et passende USB-kabel med et almindeligt USB-ladeaggregat eller USB-tilslutningen på en computer (5 V ladespænding; maks. 500 mA ladestrøm). I tekstvisningen c på cykelcomputeren fremkommer „USB
connected“ (USB forbundet).
Cykelcomputer tændes/slukkes
Cykelcomputeren tændes ved at trykke på tænd-sluk-tasten
5. Cykelcomputeren kan (hvis den interne akku er tilstrækket
ladet) også tændes, selv om den ikke sidder i holderen.
Cykelcomputeren slukkes ved at trykke på tænd-sluk-tasten 5.
Er cykelcomputeren ikke sat ind i holderen, slukker den automatisk, hvis tasten ikke er blevet trykket ind i 1 min for at spare på energien.
Indikator for akkuens opladningstilstand
Akku-ladetilstandsindikatoren f viser ladetilstanden på eBikeakkuen og ikke på cykelcomputerens interne akku. eBike-akkuens ladetilstand kan ligeledes aflæses på LED-lamperne på
akkuen.
Bosch eBike Systems
I indikatoren f svarer hver bjælke i akkusymbolet til ca. 20 %
kapacitet:
100 % til 80 % kapacitet
20 % til 5 % kapacitet, akkuen bør efterlades.
Mindre end 5 % kapacitet, det er ikke mere muligt
at understøtte drevet. Ladetilstandsindikatorens
LED-lamper på akkuen slukker.
Hvis eBike belysningen kører via akkuen (landespecifikt), er
der kapacitet til endnu ca. 2 timer belysning, når det tomme
akkusymbol fremkommer første gang. Når symbolet begynder at blinke, fungerer belysningen herefter kun i meget kort
tid.
Tages cykelcomputeren ud af holderen 4, gemmes den sidst
viste akku-ladetilstand.
Understøtningsniveau indstilles
På cykelcomputeren kan du indstille, hvor meget eBike-drevet
skal understøtte dig, når du træder på pedalerne. Understøtningsniveauet kan ændres til enhver tid, også under kørslen.
Bemærk: I enkelte udførelser er det muligt, at understøtningsniveauet er forindstillet og ikke kan ændres. Det er også
muligt, at færre understøtningsniveauer står til rådighed end
det er angivet her.
Følgende understøtningsniveauer står maks. til rådighed:
– „OFF“: Drevet er slukket, eBike kan bevæges fremad ved
at træde på pedalerne lige som på en normal cykel.
– „ECO“: Effektiv understøtning ved maks. effektivitet, til
maks. rækkevidde
– „TOUR“: Jævn understøtning, til ture med stor rækkevidde
– „SPORT“: Kraftfuld understøtning, til sporty kørsel på
bjergede strækninger samt til bytrafik
– „TURBO“: Maks. understøtning indtil høje trædefrekvenser, til sportiv kørsel
Understøtningsniveauet øges ved at trykke på tasten „+“ 13
på betjeningsenheden igen og igen, til det ønskede understøtningsniveau fremkommer i indikatoren b, og sænkes ved at
trykke på tasten „ –“ 12.
Den fremhentede motoreffekt fremkommer i indikatoren a.
Den maks. motoreffekt afhænger af det valgte understøtningsniveau.
Understøtningsniveau
„ECO“
„TOUR“
„SPORT“
„TURBO“
Motoreffekt*
(Kædekobling)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Motoreffekten kan afvige ved enkelte udførelser.
Tages cykelcomputeren ud af holderen 4, gemmes det sidst
viste understøtningsniveau, indikatoren a til motoreffekten
forbliver tom.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–4
Tænd/sluk for starthjælpen
Starthjælpen kan bruges som ekstra understøtning de første
meter, hvis det er besværligt at komme i gang (som f.eks. ved
lyskrydset eller oppe på bjerget).
 Funktionen starthjælp må udelukkende bruges til at
starte eBiken. Har eBikens hjul ikke nogen kontakt med
jorden, når starthjælpen bruges, kan man komme til skade.
Starthjælpen tændes ved at trykke på tasten „WALK“ 14 på
betjeningsenheden og holde den nede. Drevet på eBiken tændes.
Starthjælpen slukkes, så snart en af følgende hændelser opstår:
– du slipper tasten „WALK“ 14,
– du trykker på en anden taste på cykelcomputeren,
– du træder fremad eller hurtigt tilbage på pedalerne,
– eBikens hjul blokeres (f.eks. fordi du bremser eller støder
imod en forhindring),
– hastigheden overskrider 18 km/timen.
Tænding/slukning af belysningen
To belysningsudførelser er mulige afhængigt af de landespecifikke forskrifter:
– Med cykelcomputeren kan forlys, baglys og displaybaggrundsbelysning tændes og slukkes.
I denne udførelse fremkommer „Lights on“ (lys tændt),
når der tændes for lyset, og „Lights off“ (lys slukket), når
der slukkes for lyset, i ca. 1 s i tekstindikatoren c.
– Kun display-baggrundsbelysningen kan tændes og slukkes, for- og baglyset på eBike er uafhændige af cykelcomputeren.
På begge udførelser trykkes på tasten 2 for at tænde og slukke for belysningen.
Hastigheds- og afstandsvisninger
I fartmålerindikatoren e vises altid den aktuelle hastighed.
I funktionsindikatoren (kombination af tekstvisning c og
værdivisning d) kan der vælges mellem følgende funktioner:
– „Range“ (rækkevidde): Forventet rækkevidde for den eksisterende akkuladning (ved ensblivende betingelser som
f.eks. understøtningsniveau, strækningsprofil osv.)
– „Distance“ (strækning): Afstand, der er tilbagelagt siden
sidste reset
– „Trip time“ (køretid): Køretid siden sidste reset
– „Avg. Speed“ (gennemsnit): Gennemsnitlig hastighed,
der er nået siden sidste reset
– „Max. Speed“ (maks.): Maksimal hastighed, der er nået
siden sidste reset
– „Clock“ (klokkeslæt): Aktuelt klokkeslæt
Tryk for at skifte i indikatorfunktionen på tasten „i“ 1 på cykelcomputeren eller på tasten „i“ 11 på betjeningsenheden
igen og igen, til den ønskede funktion vises.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Til reset af „Distance“ (strækning), „Trip time“ (køretid) og
„Avg. Speed“ (gennemsnit) skift da til en af disse tre funktioner og tryk så på tasten „RESET“ 6, indtil indikatoren står på
nul (0). Dermed er også værdierne for de to andre funktioner
nulstillet.
Til reset af „Max. Speed“ (maksimal) skift da til denne funktion
og tryk så på tasten „RESET“ 6, til indikatoren står på nul (0).
Tages cykelcomputeren ud af holderen 4, er alle funktionernes værdier gemt og kan stadigvæk vises.
Grundindstillinger vises/tilpasses
Indikatorer og ændringer af grundindstillingerne er mulige
uafhængigt af, om cykelcomputeren er sat ind i holderend 4
eller ej.
Der springes til menuen Grundindstillinger ved at trykke på tasten „RESET“ 6 og tasten „i“ 1 samtidigt, til c „Configuration“ (indstillinger) fremkommer i tekstvisningen.
Tryk for at skifte mellem grundindstilingerne på tasten „i“
1 på cykelcomputeren igen og igen, til den ønskede grundindstilling vises. Er cykelcomputeren sat ind i holderen 4, kan du
også trykke på tasten „i“ 11 på betjeningsenheden.
Grundindstillingerne ændres (forringe eller bladre nedad)
ved at trykke på tænd-sluk-tasten 5 ved siden af indikatoren
„ –“ eller (øge eller bladre opad) ved at trykke på tasten belysning 2 ved siden af indikatoren „+“.
Er cykelcomputeren sat ind i holderen 4, kan ændringen også
gennemføres med tasterne „ –“ 12 eller „+“ 13 på betjeningsenheden.
Funktionen forlades og en ændret indstilling gemmes ved at
trykke på tasten „RESET“ 6 i 3 s.
Der kan vælges mellem følgende grundindstillinger:
– „unit km/mi“ (enhed km/mi): Du kan få vist hastighed og
afstand i kilometer eller miles.
– „time format“ (tidsformat): Du kan få vist klokkeslættet i
et 12-timers- eller i 24-timers-format.
– „clock“ (klokkeslæt): Det aktuelle klokkeslæt kan indstilles. Et længere tryk på indstillingstasterne fremskynder
ændringen af klokkeslættet.
– „English“ (engelsk): Sproget i tekstvisningerne kan ændres. Der kan vælges mellem følgende sprog: tysk, engelsk, fransk, spansk, italiensk og nederlandsk.
– „odometer“ (strækning total): Visning af den samlede
strækning, der er tilbagelagt med eBiken (kan ikke ændres)
– „power-on hours“ (driftstid total): Visning af den samlede køretid med eBiken (kan ikke ændres)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–5
Visning af fejlkode
eBike-systemets komponenter kontrolleres automatisk hele
tiden. Konstateres en fejl, fremkommer den pågældende fejlkode i tekstvisningen c.
Tryk på en vilkårlig taste på cykelcomputeren 3 eller på betjeningsenheden 10 for at vende tilbage til standardvisningen.
Code
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Årsag
Intern fejl på drivenheden
Forbindelsesproblem for drivenheden
Fejl på hastighedssensoren
Forbindelsesproblem for belysningen
Forbindelsesproblem for cykelcomputeren
Drivenhedens temperatur er for høj
(over 40 °C)
Intern elektronisk fejl på akkuen
Akkuens temperatur er for høj (over
40 °C)
Akkuens temperatur er for lav (under
–10 °C)
Forbindelsesproblem for akkuen
Forkert akkupoling
Drevet slukkes i givet fald automatisk afhængigt af fejltypen.
En viderekørsel uden understøtning er dog til enhver tid mulig. Før yderligere kørsler bør eBike kontrolleres.
 Lad alt kontrol- og reparationsarbejde udelukkende udføre af en autoriseret cykelforhandler. Vises en fejl, selv
om den er blevet afhjulpet, bedes du ligeledes kontakte en
autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Afhjælpning
Få drivenheden kontrolleret
Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Få hastighedssensoren kontrolleret
Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Lad drivenheden afkøle. En viderekørsel uden eBike-drevet er mulig og
fremskynder afkølingen af drivenheden.
Få akkuen kontrolleret
Lad akkuen afkøle. En viderekørsel uden eBike-drevet er mulig og
fremskynder afkølingen af akkuen.
Lad akkuen opvarme langsomt i et varmt rum.
Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Oplad akkuen med det originale Bosch ladeaggregat som beskrevet i dets
brugsanvisning.
En eller flere taster på cykelcompute- Kontroller, om taster er klemt fast f.eks. på grund af indtrængt snavs.
ren er blokeret.
Rengør i givet fald tasterne.
Forbindelsesproblem med betjenings- Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
enheden
En eller flere taster på betjeningsenhe- Kontroller, om taster er klemt fast f.eks. på grund af indtrængt snavs.
den er blokerede.
Rengør i givet fald tasterne.
Forbindelsesproblem for drivenheden Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Forbindelsesproblem for akkuen
Få tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
Kommunikationsfejl blandt kompoFå tilslutninger og forbindelser kontrolleret
nenterne
Cykelcomputerens interne akku er
Oplad cykelcomputeren (i holderen eller via USB-tilslutningen)
tom
Intern fejl på betjeningscomputeren Få cykelcomputeren kontrolleret
* Kun til eBike-belysning via akkuen (landespecifik)
Energiforsyning af eksterne apparater via USBtilslutning
Ved hjælp af USB-tilslutningen kan de fleste apparater, hvis
energiforsyning er mulig via USB (f.eks. diverse mobiltelefoner), drives og oplades.
En opladning forudsætter, at cykelcomputeren og en tilstrækkeligt opladet akku er anbragt i eBike.
Bosch eBike Systems
Åbn beskyttelseskappen 8 på USB-tilslutningen på cykelcomputeren. Forbind USB-tilslutningen på det eksterne apparat
med USB-bøsningen 7 på cykelcomputeren via et passende
USB-kabel.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–6
Henvisninger vedr. kørsel med eBike-systemet
Hvornår arbejder eBike-drevet?
eBike-drevet understøtter dig under kørslen, så længe du træder i pedalerne. Understøtningen fungerer kun, så længe der
trædes i pedalerne. Motoreffekten afhænger altid af den
kraft, der investeres, når der trædes i pedalerne.
Investerer du lidt kraft, er understøtningen ikke så stor, som
hvis du investerer meget kraft. Det gælder uafhængigt af understøtningsniveauet.
eBike-drevet slukker automatisk ved hastigheder over
45 km/h. Underskrider hastigheden 45 km/h, står drevet
igen automatisk til rådighed.
En undtagelse gælder for funktionen starthjælp, hvor du kan
køre på eBike uden at træde på pedalerne ved lav hastighed.
Du kan til enhver tid bruge eBike som en almindelig cykel, også uden understøtning; dette gøres ved at slukke for eBike-systemet eller ved at stille understøtningsniveauet på „OFF“.
Det samme gælder, hvis akkuen er tom.
Samspil mellem eBike-systemet og gearet
Også med eBike-drevet bør du bruge gearsystemet som på en
normal cykel (læs brugsanvisningen til din eBike).
Uafhængigt af gearsystemets type tilrådes det af afbryde
trædningen kort under gearskiftet. Derved gøres det nemmere at skifte gear og drivstrengen slides ikke så hurtigt.
Vælges det rigtige gear, kan du ved ensblivende kraftforbrug
øge hastigheden og rækkevidden.
De første erfaringer
Det anbefales at samle de første anbefalinger med eBike på
gader og veje med lidt trafik.
Prøv forskellige understøtningsniveauer. Så snart du føler dig
sikker, kan du også køre med eBike lige som en almindelig cykel på gader og veje med almindelig trafik.
Test rækkevidden for din eBike under forskellige betingelser,
før du planlægger længere og mere krævende ture.
Påvirkninger af rækkevidden
Rækkevidden påvirkes af mange faktorer som f.eks.:
– Understøtningsniveau,
– Gearskifteadfærd,
– Dækkenes og dæktrykkets art,
– Akkuens alder og pasningstilstand,
– Strækningsprofil (stigninger) og -beskaffenhed (kørebanens belægning),
– Modvind og omgivelsestemperatur,
– Vægt for eBike, cyklist og bagage.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Derfor er det ikke muligt at forudsige rækkevidden konkret,
før du starter en cykeltur med din eBike. Generelt gælder dog
følgende:
– Ved samme motoreffekt fra eBike-drevet: Jo mindre kraft
du skal bruge for at nå en bestemt hastighed (f.eks. fordi
gearsystemet bruges optimalt), jo mindre energi har eBikens drev brug for og jo større er rækkevidden, som en akkuopladning kan klare.
– Jo højere understøtningsniveauet vælges ved ellers ens
betingelser, desto kortere er rækkevidden.
Omhyggelig pasning af din eBike
Følg drifts- og opbevaringstemperaturerne for eBike-komponenterne. Beskyt drivenhed, cykelcomputer og akku mod
ekstreme temperaturer (f.eks. fra intensive solstråler uden
samtidig udluftning). Komponenterne (især akkuen) kan blive
beskadiget som følge af ekstreme temperaturer.
Vedligeholdelse og service
Vedligeholdelse og rengøring
Hold alle komponenter rene på din eBike, især kontakterne til
akku og tilhørende holder. Rengør den forsigtigt med en fugtig, blød klud.
Alle komponenter inkl. drivenhed må hverken dyppes i vand
eller rengøres med en højtryksrenser.
Til service eller reparation af eBike bedes du kontakte en
autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Ved alle spørgsmål vedr. eBike-systemet og dets komponenter bedes du kontakte en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Kontaktdata for autoriserede cykelforhandlere findes på internetsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
Akkuerne skal overholde kravene i retten om farligt gods. Akkuerne kan transporteres af den private bruger på gader og
veje uden yderligere pålæg.
Transporteres de af erhvervsmæssige brugere eller af tredjemand (f.eks. lufttransport eller spedition), skal særlige krav til
emballage og mærkning overholdes (f.eks. forskrifter fra
ADR). Her skal man efter behov kontakte en faregodsekspert,
før forsendelsesstykket forberedes.
Send kun akkuerne, hvis huset er ubeskadiget. Tilklæb åbne
kontakter og indpak akkuen på en sådan måde, at den ikke
kan bevæge sig i emballagen. Følg også eventuelle yderligere
nationale forskrifter.
Spørgsmål vedr. transport af akkuerne bedes stillet til en
autoriseret cykelforhandler. Hos forhandleren kan du også
bestille en egnet transportemballage.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–7
Bortskaffelse
Drivenhed, cykelcomputer inkl. betjeningsenhed,
akku, hastighedssensor, tilbehør og emballage skal
genbruges på en miljøvenlig måde.
Smid ikke eBikes og deres komponenter ud sammen med det
almindelige husholdningsaffald!
Gælder kun i EU-lande:
Iht. det europæiske direktiv 2002/96/EF
skal kasseret elektroværktøj og iht. det
europæiske direktiv 2006/66/EF skal defekte eller opbrugte akkuer/batterier indsamles separat og genbruges iht. gældende
miljøforskrifter.
Akkuen, der er integreret i cykelcomputeren, må kun tages
ud, når den skal bortskaffes. Cykelcomputeren kan blive ødelagt, hvis husets skal åbnes.
Aflever gamle akkuer og cykelcomputere til en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Li-Ion:
Læs og overhold henvisningerne i afsnit „Transport“, side Dansk–6.
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–8
Li-ion-akku PowerPack
Sikkerhedsinstrukser
Læs alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger. Overholdes sikkerhedsinstrukserne og
anvisningerne ikke, er der risiko for elektrisk stød, brand
og/eller alvorlige kvæstelser.
Opbevar alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger til senere brug.
Begrebet „akku“, der anvendes i nærværende brugsanvisning, gælder både for standard-akkuer (akkuer med holder på
cykelstel) og bagagebærer-akkuer (akkuer med holder i bagagebærer), medmindre der refereres udtrykkeligt til konstruktionen.
 Tag akkuen ud af eBike, før du begynder at arbejde
(f.eks. montere, vedligeholde osv.) på eBike, før du
transporterer den med bilen eller flyveren eller opbevarer den. Utilsigtet betjening af start-stop-kontakten er
forbundet med kvæstelsesfare.
 Åbn ikke akkuen. Fare for kortslutning. Garantien bortfalder, hvis akkuen åbnes.
Beskyt akkuen mod varme (f.eks. også mod varige solstråler), brand og dypning i vand. Fare
for eksplosion.
 Ikke benyttede akkuer må ikke komme i berøring med
kontorclips, mønter, nøgler, søm, skruer eller andre
små metalgenstande, da disse kan kortslutte kontakterne. En kortslutning mellem akku-kontakterne øger risikoen for kvæstelser i form af forbrændinger eller brand.
Opstår der i denne sammenhæng kortslutningsskader,
bortfalder ethvert garantikrav over for Bosch.
 Hvis akkuen anvendes forkert, kan der slippe væske ud
af akkuen. Undgå at komme i kontakt med denne væske. Hvis det alligevel skulle ske, skylles med vand. Søg
læge, hvis væsken kommer i øjnene. Udstrømmende
akku-væske kan give hudirritation eller forbrændinger.
 Beskadiges akkuen eller bruges den forkert, kan der sive dampe ud. Tilfør frisk luft og søg læge, hvis du føler
dig utilpas. Dampene kan irritere luftvejene.
 Lad kun akkuen med originale ladeaggregater fra
Bosch. Bruges ikke originale Bosch ladeaggregater, kan fare for brand ikke udelukkes.
 Brug kun akkuen i forbindelse med eBikes med originalt Bosch eBike-drivsystem. Kun på denne måde beskyttes akkuen mod farlig overbelastning.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Brug kun originale Bosch akkuer, der er blevet godkendt til din eBike af produenten. Brug af andre akkuer
kan føre til kvæstelser og er forbundet med brandfare.
Bosch fraskriver sig ansvaret, og garantien bortfalder, hvis
der bruges andre akkuer.
 Læs og følg sikkerhedsinstrukserne og anvisningerne i
brugsanvisningerne til ladeaggregat og drivenhed/cykelcomputer samt i brugsanvisningen til din eBike.
Beskrivelse af produkt og ydelse
Illustrerede komponenter
(se side 4–5)
Nummereringen af de illustrerede komponenter refererer til
illustrationerne på de grafiske side.
Alle illustrationer af cykeldele undtagen akkuerne og de tilhørende holdere er skematiske og kan afvige fra din eBike.
19 Holder til bagagebærer-akku
20 Bagagebærer-akku
21 Drifts- og ladetilstandsvisning
22 Start-stop-tasten
23 Nøgle til akku-lås
24 Akku-lås
25 Øverste holder til standard-akku
26 Standard-akku
27 Nederste holder til standard-akku
28 Bærerem
29 Ladeaggregat
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–9
Tekniske data
Li-ion-akku
Typenummer
– Standard-akku sort
– Standard-akku hvid
– Bagagebærer-akku
Nominel spænding
Nominel kapacitet
Energi
Driftstemperatur
Opbevaringstemperatur
Tilladt temperaturområde for opladning
Vægt, ca.
Tæthedsgrad
Montering
 Stil kun akkuen på rene overflader. Undgå især en tilsmudsning af ladebøsningen og kontakterne (f.eks. fra
sand eller jord).
Kontrol af akku før første brug
Kontroller akkuen, før den oplades første gang eller før du
bruger den sammen med din eBike.
Tryk hertil på tænd-sluk-tasten 22 for at tænde for akkuen.
Lyser der ikke nogen LED-lampe i ladetilstandsindikatoren
21, er akkuen evt. beskadiget.
Lyser mindst en LED-lampe, men ikke alle LED-lamper i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21, oplades akkuen helt, før den tages i
brug første gang.
 Oplad ikke en beskadiget akku og tag den ikke i brug.
Kontakt en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Akku lades
 Brug kun det originale ladeaggregat fra Bosch, der følger med din eBike, eller et ladeaggregat, der er bygget
på samme måde. Kun dette ladeaggregat er afstemt i forhold til den Li-ion-akku, der bruges på din eBike.
Bemærk: Akkuen er til dels opladet ved udleveringen. For at
sikre at akkuen fungerer 100 %, oplades den fuldstændigt i ladeaggregatet, før den tages i brug første gang.
Akkuen skal tages ud af eBiken for at blive opladt.
Læs og følg ladeaggregatets brugsanvisning vedr. opladning
af akkuen.
Akkuen kan oplades til enhver tid, uden at levetiden forkortes.
En afbrydelse af opladningen beskadiger ikke akkuen.
Akkuen er udstyret med en temperaturovervågning, som kun
tillader en opladning i et temperaturområde mellem 0 °C og
40 °C.
Bosch eBike Systems
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8,2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2,5
2,5
IP 54 (støv- og sprøjtevands- IP 54 (støv- og sprøjtevandsbeskyttet)
beskyttet)
Findes akkuen uden for ladetemperaturområdet, blinker tre
LED-lamper på ladetilstandsindikatoren 21. Afbryd akkuen
fra ladeaggregatet og lad den temperere.
Tilslut først akkuen til ladeaggregatet, når den har nået den tilladte ladetemperatur.
Ladetilstandsindikator
De fem grønne LED-lamper i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 viser
akkuens ladetilstand, når akkuen er tændt.
Hver LED-lampe svarer til ca. 20 % af kapaciteten. Når akkuen
er helt opladt, lyser alle fem LED-lamper.
Ladetilstanden for den tændte akku vises desuden i cykelcomputeren. Læs og følg hertil brugsanvisningen for drivenheden og cykelcomputeren.
Er akkuens kapacitet under 5 %, slukker alle LED-lamper i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 på akkuen, dog er der endnu en indikatorfunktion i cykelcomputeren.
Isætning og udtagning af akkuen (se Fig. C–D)
 Sluk altid for akkuen, før du sætter den ind i holderen
eller tager den ud af holderen.
For at akkuen kan sættes i, skal nøglen 23 sidde i låsen 24, og
låsen være låst op.
Til isætning af standard-akkuen 26 sættes dens kontakter
på den nederste holder 27 på eBiken. Vip den helt ind i den
øverste holderen 25.
Til isætning af bagagebærer-akkuen 20 skubbes dens kontakter frem, til den falder i hak i holderen 19 i bagagebæreren.
Kontroller, at akkuen sidder fast. Aflås altid akkuen med låsen
24, da låsen ellers kan åbne, og akkuen kan falde ud af holderen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–10
Fjern altid nøglen 23 fra låsen 24 efter aflåsningen. Dermed
forhindrer du, at nøglen falder ud, og at akkuen fjernes af en
uberettiget tredjemand, når eBiken stilles fra.
Til udtagning af standard-akkuen 26 slukkes den, og låsen
åbnes med nøglen 23. Vip akkuen ud af den øverste holder 25
og træk den vha. bæreremmen 28 ud af den nederste holder
27.
Til udtagning af bagagebærer-akkuen 20 slukkes den, og
låsen åbnes med nøglen 23. Træk akkuen ud af holderen 19.
Brug
Ibrugtagning
 Brug kun originale Bosch akkuer, der er blevet godkendt til din eBike af produenten. Brug af andre akkuer
kan føre til kvæstelser og er forbundet med brandfare.
Bosch fraskriver sig ansvaret, og garantien bortfalder, hvis
der bruges andre akkuer.
Tænd/sluk
eBike-systemet kan bl.a. tændes ved at tænde for akkuen.
Læs og følg hertil brugsanvisningen for drivenheden og cykelcomputeren.
Kontroller før akkuen eller eBike-systemet tændes, at låsen
24 er aflåst.
Bemærk: Pedalerne på eBike må ikke være belastet, når
eBike-systemet tændes, da eBike-drevets ydelse ellers begrænses.
Akkuen tændes ved at trykke på tænd-sluk-tasten 22. LEDlamperne i indikatoren 21 lyser og viser samtidigt ladetilstanden.
Bemærk: Ligger akkuens kapacitet under 5 %, lyser ingen
LED-lampe i ladetilstandsindikatoren på akkuen 21. Kun på
cykelcomputeren kan det ses, om eBike-systemet er tændt.
Akkuen slukkes ved at trykke på tænd-sluk-tasten 22 en gang
til. LED-lamperne i indikatoren 21 slukker. eBike-systemet
slukkes dermed ligeledes.
Påvirkes eBike-drevet ikke i ca. 10 min (f.eks. fordi eBike står
stille), og trykkes der ikke på nogen taste på eBikens cykelcomputer eller betjeningsenhed, slukker eBike-systemet og
dermed også akkuen automatisk for at spare på energien.
Akkuen er beskyttet mod afladning, overladning, overophedning og kortslutning vha. „Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)“. I
tilfælde af fare slukker akkuen automatisk vha. en beskyttelseskobling.
Registreres en defekt på akkuen, blinker to LED-lamper på ladetilstandsindikatoren 21.
Kontakt i dette tilfælde en autoriseret forhandler.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Henvisninger til optimal håndtering af akkuen
Akkuens levetid kan forlænges, hvis den passes godt, og især
hvis den opbevares ved de rigtige temperaturer.
Akkuens kapacitet forringes, jo ældre den bliver, også selv om
den plejes godt.
Når driftstiden efter opladningen forkortes væsentligt, er det
tegn på, at akkuen er slidt op. Du kan erstatte akkuen.
Skulle bæreremmen 28 til standard-akkuen være defekt, skal
den udskiftes af en cykelforhandler.
Akku efterlades før og under opbevaringen
Oplad akkuen til ca. 60 % (3 til 4 LED-lamper i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 lyser), før den tages ud af brug i længere tid.
Kontroller ladetilstanden efter 6 måneder. Lyser kun en LEDlampe i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21, oplades akkuen igen til
ca. 60 %.
Bemærk: Opbevares akkuen i tom tilstand i længere tid, kan
den blive beskadiget på trods af den lille selvafladning, og lagerkapaciteten forringes betydelig.
Det kan ikke anbefales at lade akkuen være tilsluttet varigt til
ladeaggregatet.
Opbevaringsbetingelser
Opbevar helst akkuen et tørt og godt ventileret sted. Beskyt
den mod fugtighed og vand. Ved ugunstige vejrbetingelser
kan det f.eks. anbefales at fjerne akkuen fra eBiken og opbevare den i lukkede rum, indtil den tages i brug igen.
Akkuen kan opbevares ved temperaturer fra –10 °C til
+60 °C. Til en længere levetid skal de helst opbevares ved en
stuetemperatur på ca. 20 °C.
Sørg for, at den maksimale opbevaringstemperatur ikke overskrides. Sørg for, at akkuen f.eks. om sommeren ikke opbevares i bilen, og opbevar den sådan, at den ikke udsættes for direkte solstråler.
Vedligeholdelse og service
Vedligeholdelse og rengøring
Renhold akkuen. Rengør den forsigtigt med en fugtig, blød
klud. Akkuen må hverken dyppes i vand eller rengøres med en
vandstråle.
Fungerer akkuen ikke mere, bedes du kontakte en autoriseret
cykelforhandler.
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Spørgsmål vedr. akkuer bedes stillet til en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
 Noter producent og nummer på nøglen 23. Hvis nøglen
tabes, bedes du henvende dig til en autoriseret cykelforhandler. Husk at angive nøgleproducent og nøglenummer.
Kontaktdata for autoriserede cykelforhandlere findes på internetsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–11
Transport
Akkuerne skal overholde kravene i retten om farligt gods. Akkuerne kan transporteres af den private bruger på gader og
veje uden yderligere pålæg.
Transporteres de af erhvervsmæssige brugere eller af tredjemand (f.eks. lufttransport eller spedition), skal særlige krav til
emballage og mærkning overholdes (f.eks. forskrifter fra
ADR). Her skal man efter behov kontakte en faregodsekspert,
før forsendelsesstykket forberedes.
Send kun akkuerne, hvis huset er ubeskadiget. Tilklæb åbne
kontakter og indpak akkuen på en sådan måde, at den ikke
kan bevæge sig i emballagen. Følg også eventuelle yderligere
nationale forskrifter.
Spørgsmål vedr. transport af akkuerne bedes stillet til en
autoriseret cykelforhandler. Hos forhandleren kan du også
bestille en egnet transportemballage.
Bortskaffelse
Akku, tilbehør og emballage skal genbruges på en miljøvenlig måde.
Smid ikke akkuen ud sammen med det almindelige husholdningsaffald!
Gælder kun i EU-lande:
Iht. det europæiske direktiv 2002/96/EF
skal kasseret elektroværktøj og iht. det
europæiske direktiv 2006/66/EF skal defekte eller opbrugte akkuer/batterier indsamles separat og genbruges iht. gældende
miljøforskrifter.
Aflever gamle akkuer til en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Li-Ion:
Læs og overhold henvisningerne i afsnit „Transport“, side Dansk–11.
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–12
Ladeaggregat Charger
Sikkerhedsinstrukser
Læs alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger. Overholdes sikkerhedsinstrukserne og
anvisningerne ikke, er der risiko for elektrisk stød, brand
og/eller alvorlige kvæstelser.
Opbevar alle sikkerhedsinstrukser og anvisninger til senere brug.
Begrebet „akku“, der anvendes i nærværende brugsanvisning, gælder både for standard-akkuer (akkuer med holder på
cykelstel) og bagagebærer-akkuer (akkuer med holder i bagagebærer).
Ladeaggregatet må ikke udsættes for regn eller
fugtighed. Indtrængning af vand i et ladeaggregat er
forbundet med risiko for elektrisk stød.
 Lad kun Bosch li-ion-akkuer, der er godkendt til eBikes.
Akkuspændingen skal passe til ladeaggregatets akkuladespænding. Ellers er der fare for brand og eksplosion.
 Renhold ladeaggregatet. Snavs øger faren for elektrisk
stød.
 Kontrollér ladeaggregat, kabel og stik før brug. Anvend
ikke ladeaggregatet, hvis det er beskadiget. Forsøg ikke at åbne ladeaggregatet og sørg for at det repareres
af kvalificerede fagfolk, og at der kun benyttes originale reservedele. Beskadigede ladeaggregater, kabler og
stik øger risikoen for elektrisk stød.
 Anvend ikke ladeaggregatet på let brændbar undergrund (f.eks. papir, tekstiler osv.) eller i brændbare
omgivelser. Pas på! Ladeaggregatet bliver varmt under
opladningen. Brandfare!
 Beskadiges akkuen eller bruges den forkert, kan der sive dampe ud. Tilfør frisk luft og søg læge, hvis du føler
dig utilpas. Dampene kan irritere luftvejene.
 Sørg for, at børn er under opsyn. Dermed sikres det, at
børn ikke leger med ladeaggregatet.
 Børn og personer, der på grund af deres fysiske, sensoriske eller psykiske evner eller uerfarenhed eller
ukendskab ikke er i stand til at betjene ladeaggregatet,
må ikke bruge dette ladeaggregat uden opsyn eller instruktion fra en ansvarlig person. Ellers er der fare for
fejlbetjening og kvæstelser.
 Læs og følg sikkerhedsinstrukserne og anvisningerne i
brugsanvisningerne til akku og drivenhed/cykelcomputer samt i brugsanvisningen til din eBike.
 På undersiden af ladeaggregatet findes en kort vejledning
om vigtige sikkerhedsinstrukser på engelsk, fransk og
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
spansk (i illustrationen på grafiksiden er den kendetegnet
med nummer 33) og med følgende indhold:
– Følg brugsanvisningen for at sikre en rigtig brug. Risiko
for elektrisk chock.
– Må kun bruges i tørre omgivelser.
– Lad kun akkuer, der er beregnet til Bosch eBike-systemet. Andre akkuer kan eksplodere og føre til kvæstelser.
– Erstat ikke netkablet. Fare for brand og eksplosion.
Beskrivelse af produkt og ydelse
Illustrerede komponenter (se side 6–7)
Nummereringen af de illustrerede komponenter refererer til
illustrationen af ladeaggregatet på illustrationssiden.
20 Bagagebærer-akku
21 Akku-ladetilstandsindikator
26 Standard-akku
29 Ladeaggregat
30 Bøsning
31 Stik
32 Ventilationsåbninger
33 Sikkerhedsforskrifter ladeaggregat
34 Ladestik
35 Bøsning til ladestik
Tekniske data
Ladeaggregat
Typenummer
Nominel spænding
Frekvens
Akku-opladningsspænding
Ladestrøm
Tilladt temperaturområde for
opladning
Ladetid
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Antal akkuceller
Driftstemperatur
Opbevaringstemperatur
Vægt svarer til EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Tæthedsgrad
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
h
h
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
°C
°C
kg
0,8
IP 40
Angivelserne gælder for en nominel spænding [U] på 230 V. Disse angivelser kan variere ved afvigende spændinger og i landespecifikke udførelser.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Dansk–13
Brug
Årsag
 Stil kun akkuen på rene overflader. Undgå især en tilsmudsning af ladebøsningen og kontakterne (f.eks. fra
sand eller jord).
Ibrugtagning
Afhjælpning
Tre LED-lamper blinker på
akkuen
Akku for varm eller for kold
Tilslutning af ladeaggregatet (se Fig. E–F)
 Kontrollér netspændingen! Strømkildens spænding skal
stemme overens med angivelserne på ladeaggregatets typeskilt. Ladeaggregater til 230 V kan også tilsluttes 220 V.
Sæt netkablets stik 31 ind i bøsningen 30 på ladeaggregatet.
Tilslut netkablet (landespecifik) til strømnettet.
Sluk for akkuen og tag den ud af holderen på eBiken. Læs og
overhold akkuens brugsanvisning.
Sæt ladeaggregatets ladestik 34 i bøsningen 35 på akkuen.
Opladning
Opladningen starter, så snart ladeaggregatet er forbundet
med akkuen og strømnettet.
Bemærk: Opladningen er kun mulig, hvis akkuens temperatur
befinder sig i det tilladte ladetemperaturområde.
Under opladningen lyser LED-lamperne i ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 på akkuen. Hver konstant lysende LED-lampe svarer
ca. til 20 % kapacitet opladning. Den blinkende LED-lampe viser opladningen af de næste 20 %.
 Vær forsigtig, hvis du berører ladeaggregatet under
opladningen. Brug beskyttelseshandsker. Ladeaggregatet kan blive meget varmt især ved høje omgivelsestemperaturer.
Bemærk: Vær opmærksom på, at ladeaggregatet er godt ventileret under opladningen og at ventilationsåbningerne 32 ikke er tildækket på begge sider.
Akkuen er helt opladt, når alle fem LED-lamper i indikatoren
21 lyser hele tiden. Opladningen afbrydes automatisk.
Afbryd ladeaggregatet fra strømnettet og akkuen fra ladeaggregatet.
Når akkkuen afbrydes fra ladeaggregatet, slukkes akkuen
automatisk.
Nu kan du sætte akkuen ind i eBiken.
Fejl – Årsager og afhjælpning
Årsag
Afhjælpning
To LED-lamper blinker på
akkuen
Akku defekt
Kontakt en autoriseret cykelforhandler
Afbryd akkuen fra ladeaggregatet og lad den afkøle, til ladetemperaturområdet er nået
Tilslut først akkuen til ladeaggregatet, når den har nået
den tilladte ladetemperatur.
Opladning er ikke mulig (ingen visning på akkuen)
Stik er ikke sat rigtigt i
Kontroller alle stikforbindelser
Kontakter er snavsede på
Rengør forsigtigt kontakter
akku
på akku
Ladeaggregatets ventilatiRengør ventilationsåbninger
onsåbninger 32 er tilstoppet 32 og opstil ladeaggregat
eller tildækket
godt ventileret
Stikdåse, kabel eller ladeag- Kontroller netspænding, få
gregat er defekt
ladeaggregat kontrolleret af
cykelforhandler
Kontakt en autoriseret cykelAkku defekt
forhandler
Vedligeholdelse og service
Vedligeholdelse og rengøring
Skulle ladeaggregatet svigte, bedes du kontakte en autoriseret cykelforhandler.
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Spørgsmål vedr. ladeaggregatet bedes stillet til en autoriseret
cykelforhandler.
Kontaktdata for autoriserede cykelforhandlere findes på internetsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Bortskaffelse
Ladeaggregater, tilbehør og emballage skal genbruges på en
miljøvenlig måde.
Smid ikke ladeaggregater ud sammen med det almindelige
husholdningsaffald!
Gælder kun i EU-lande:
Iht. det europæiske direktiv 2002/96/EF
om affald af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr
skal kasserede ladeaggregater indsamles
separat og genbruges iht. gældende miljøforskrifter.
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–1
Drivenhet Drive Unit Speed/
Manöverdator Intuvia
Säkerhetsanvisningar
Produkt- och kapacitetsbeskrivning
Läs noga igenom alla säkerhetsanvisningar
och instruktioner. Fel som uppstår till följd av
att säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna inte följts kan orsaka elstöt, brand
och/eller allvarliga personskador.
Ta väl vara på säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna för framtida behov.
Begreppet ”batteri” som används i denna bruksanvisning hänför sig till både standardbatterier (batterier med fäste på
cykelramen) och pakethållarbatterier (batterier med fäste i
pakethållaren).
 Öppna inte själv drivenheten. Drivenheten är underhållsfri och får endast repareras med originalreservdelar av kvalificerad yrkespersonal. Detta garanterar att
drivenhetens säkerhet upprätthålls. Om drivenheten öppnas utan berättigande gäller inte längre garantin.
 Alla komponenter som monterats på drivenheten och
alla andra komponenter på elcykelns drivning (t.ex.
kedjehjul, kedjehjulets stöd och pedaler) får endast
ersättas med komponenter av samma slag eller med av
cykeltillverkaren speciellt för din elcykel godkända
komponenter. Detta skyddar drivenheten mot överbelastning och skada.
 Ta bort batteriet från elcykeln innan arbeten (t. ex.
montering, underhåll m.m.) startas på elcykeln, före
den transporteras i bil och flygplan eller lagras. Vid oavsiktligt aktivering av strömställaren finns risk för personskada.
 Funktionen för starthjälp får endast användas när elcykeln startas. Om elcykelns hjul inte har kontakt med marken när starthjälpen används finns risk för personskada.
 Använd endast originalbatterier från Bosch som tillverkaren rekommenderat för din elcykel. Om andra batterier används, finns risk för kroppsskada och brand. Om
andra batterier används fritar sig Bosch från allt ansvar och
garantiåtagande.
 Beakta alla nationella föreskrifter för registrering och
användning av elcykeln.
 Läs och beakta säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna i batteriets bruksanvisning samt bruksanvisningen för din elcykel.
Ändamålsenlig användning
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Drivenheten är uteslutande avsedd för drivning av din elcykel
och får inte användas för andra ändamål.
Elcykeln är avsedd för belagda vägar. Elcykeln är inte godkänd för tävlingar.
Illustrerade komponenter
(se sidan 2–3)
Numreringen av avbildade komponenter hänvisar till illustrationerna på grafiksidan.
Förutom drivenhet, manöverdator inkl. manöverenhet, hastighetssensor och tillhörande fästen är cykeldelarnas alla
illustrationer schematiska och kan därför avvika från din elcykel.
1 Knapp indikeringsfunktion ”i”
2 Knapp för belysning
3 Manöverdator
4 Manöverdatorns fäste
5 På-Av-knapp manöverdator
6 Återställningsknapp ”RESET”
7 USB-kontaktdon
8 USB-kontaktdonets skyddskåpa
9 Drivenhet
10 Manöverenhet
11 Knapp för indikeringsfunktion ”i” på manöverenheten
12 Knapp för sänk värdet/bläddra nedåt ” –”
13 Knapp för öka värdet/bläddra uppåt ”+”
14 Knapp för starthjälp ”WALK”
15 Låsning av manöverdatorn
16 Blockeringsskruv på manöverdatorn
17 Hastighetssensor
18 Hastighetssensorns ekermagnet
Indikeringselement på manöverdatorn
a Indikering av motoreffekt
b Indikering av assistansnivå
c Textindikering
d Värdesindikering
e Hastighetsmätarens display
f Indikering av batteriets laddningstillstånd
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–2
Tekniska data
Drivenhet
Produktnummer
Effekt
Vridmoment vid kraftuttag
max.
Märkspänning
Driftstemperatur
Lagringstemperatur
Kapslingsklass
Vikt, ca.
Manöverdator
Produktnummer
Laddström USB-kontaktdon
max.
Laddspänning
USB-kontaktdon
Driftstemperatur
Lagringstemperatur
Kapslingsklass
Vikt, ca.
Belysning*
Märkspänning
Effekt
– Framljus
– Bakljus
Kontroll av hastighetssensorn (se bild B)
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (damm- och
spolsäker)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (damm- och
spolsäker)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* beroende på lagliga bestämmelser kan elcykelns batteri inte användas
för alla landsspecifika utföranden
Montage
Insättning och uttagning av batteriet
För insättning av batteriet på elcykeln och för borttagning se
batteriets bruksanvisning.
Insättning och borttagning av manöverdatorn
(se bild A)
För insättning av manöverdatorn 3 skjut framifrån in den i
fästet 4.
För borttagning av manöverdatorn 3 tryck på spärren 15 och
skjut ut den framåt ur fästet 4.
 Ta bort manöverdatorn från parkerad elcykel för att
obefogad person inte ska kunna använda drivenheten.
Utan manöverdator kan elcykelsystemet inte kopplas på.
Det är även möjligt att som skydd mot stöld låsa manöverdatorn i fästet. Demontera fästet 4 från styret. Placera manöverdatorn i fästet. Skruva in blockeringsskruven 16 underifrån i
avsedd gänga på fästet. Återmontera fästet på styret.
Bosch eBike Systems
Hastighetssensorn 17 och tillhörande ekermagnet 18 måste
monteras så att ekermagneten vid ett hjulvarv passerar hastighetssensorn på ett avstånd om minst 5 mm och högst
17 mm.
Anvisning: Om avståndet mellan hastighetssensorn 17 och
ekermagneten 18 är för litet eller för stort eller är hastighetssensorn 17 inte korrekt ansluten, fungerar inte indikeringen
på hastighetsmätaren e och elcykelns drivenhet fungerar i
nödkörningsprogram.
Lossa i detta fall ekermagnetens 18 skruv och fäst ekermagneten så att den på korrekt avstånd passerar markeringen på
hastighetssensorn. Om hastighetsmätaren e fortfarande saknar indikering, kontakta en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
Drift
Driftstart
Förutsättningar
Elcykel-systemet kan aktiveras endast under följande förutsättningar:
– Ett fulladdat batteri har satts in (se batteriets bruksanvisning).
– Manöverdatorn sitter korrekt i fästet (se ”Insättning och
borttagning av manöverdatorn”, sida Svenska–2).
– Hastighetssensorn är korrekt ansluten (se ”Kontroll av hastighetssensorn”, sida Svenska–2).
In-/urkoppling av elcykelsystemet
För inkoppling av elcykelsystemet finns följande alternativ.
– Om manöverdatorn redan är påkopplad när den placeras i
fästet slås elcykelsystemet automatiskt på.
– Tryck vid insatt manöverdator och insatt batteri helt kort
på manöverdatorns På-Av-knapp 5.
– Tryck vid insatt manöverdator batteriets På-Av-knapp (se
batteriets bruksanvisning).
Anvisning: Elcykelns pedaler får inte belastas när elcykelsystemet kopplas på, i annat fall begränsas motoreffekten. I textindikeringen c visas felmeddelandet ”Release pedal”
(avlasta pedalen).
Om elcykelsystemet oavsiktligt påkopplats med belastade
pedaler, koppla i detta fall från och åter på utan belastning.
Drivenheten aktiveras så fort du trampar pedalerna (förutom
vid starthälpfunktionen, se ”Till-/frånkoppling av starthjälpen”, sida Svenska–3). Motoreffekten är relaterad till inställningarna på manöverdatorn.
Så fort du slutat trampa pedalerna i normaldrift eller en hastighet på 45 km/h uppnåtts, frånkopplar elcykeldriften assistansen. Drivningen aktiveras åter automatiskt när pedalerna
trampas och en hastighet på 45 km/h underskrids.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–3
För urkoppling av elcykelsystemet finns följande alternativ:
– Tryck manöverdatorns På-Av-knapp 5.
– Koppla från batteriet med På-Av-knappen (se batteriets
bruksanvisning.)
– Ta manöverdatorn ur fästet.
Om cykelns drivenhet under ca 10 minuter inte upptar ström
(t. ex. när elcykeln står stilla) och ingen knapp tryckts på
manöverdatorn eller manöverenheten kopplas elcykelsystemet automatiskt från för att spara energi.
Manöverdatorns indikeringar och inställningar
Manöverdatorns energiförsörjning
När manöverdatorn sitter i fästet 4 och ett fulladdat batteri
placerats i elcykeln och elcykelsystemet kopplats på försörjs
manöverdatorn via elcykelns batteri med energi.
Om manöverdatorn tas ur fästet 4 får den energi från ett
internt batteri. Om det interna batteriet vid inkoppling av
manöverdatorn har låg kapacitet, visas för 3 s ”Attach to
bike” (anslut till cykeln) på textdisplayen c. Därefter kopplar
manöverdatorn åter från.
För uppladdning av det interna batteriet placera åter manöverdatorn i fästet 4 (när ett batteri sitter på elcykeln). Koppla
från elcykelns batteri med På-Av-knappen (se batteriets
bruksanvisning.)
Manöverdatorn kan också laddas upp via USB-kontaktdonet.
Öppna dammskyddet 8. Anslut manöverdatorns USB-kontaktdon 7 med en lämplig USB-kabel till en gängse USB-laddare eller till USB-kontaktdonet på en dator (5 V laddspänning; max. 500 mA laddström). På manöverdatorns
textdisplay c visas ”USB connected” (USB kopplad).
Manöverdatorns in-/urkoppling
För Inkoppling av manöverdatorn tryck På-/Av-knappen 5.
Manöverdatorn kan även kopplas på (vid tillräckligt laddat
batteri) när den inte sitter i fästet.
För frånkoppling av manöverdatorn tryck På-Av-knappen 5.
För att spara energi när manöverdatorn inte sitter i fästet,
kopplas den automatiskt från om knappen inte trycks under
1 minuter.
Indikering av batteriets laddningstillstånd
Batteriladdningsindikatorn f indikerar elcykelbatteriets laddningstillstånd, men inte tillståndet för manöverdatorns
interna batteri. Elcykelbatteriets laddningstillstånd kan avläsas med hjälp av LED på själva batteriet.
På displayen f motsvarar varje stapel i batterisymbolen en
kapacitet på ungefär 20 %:
100 % till 80 % kapacitet
Kapacitet mellan 20 % och 5 %, batteriet måste
laddas upp.
När batteriet försörjer elcykelns belysning (landsspecifikt)
räcker kapaciteten när första tomma batterisymbolen dyker
upp ännu till för ca 2 timmars belysning. När symbolen börjar
blinka, slocknar belysningen efter en liten stund.
Om manöverdatorn tas ur fästet 4, kvarstår senast sparat batteriladdningstillstånd.
Inställning av assistansgrad
På manöverdatorn kan elcykeldrivenhetens hjälp för pedaltramp ställas in. Assistansgraden kan när som helst ändras
även under körning.
Anvisning: På vissa utföranden kan den förinställda assistansen inte ändras. Det kan även hända att endast färre assistansfunktioner finns att tillgå än vad som här anges.
Maximalt följande assistansgrader finns att tillgå:
– ”OFF”: (Från) Drivenheten är nu frånkopplad och elcykeln
kan med pedalerna drivas som en vanlig cykel.
– ”ECO”: aktiv hjälp vid maximal effektivitet, för maximal
räckvidd
– ”TOUR”: konstant hjälp, för långdistansturer
– ”SPORT”: kraftig hjälp, för sportig cykling på bergig
sträcka samt för stadstrafik
– ”TURBO”: maximal assistans upp till hög pedalfrekvens,
för sportig cykling
För ökning av assistansgraden tryck knappen ”+” 13 på
manöverenheten tills önskad assistansgrad visas på displayen b, för sänkning tryck knappen ” –” 12.
Upptagen motoreffekt visas på displayen a. Den maximala
motoreffekten är beroende av vald assistansgrad.
Assistansnivå
”ECO”
”TOUR”
”SPORT”
”TURBO”
Motoreffekt*
(Kedjeväxel)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Motoreffekten kan avvika på enskilda utföranden.
Om manöverdatorn tas ur fästet 4 kvarstår senast visad assistansgrad sparad, på displayen a indikeras ingen motoreffekt.
Till-/frånkoppling av starthjälpen
Starthjälpen kan hjälpa till ett par meter om cykeln startar
trögt (som t. ex. vid trafikljus eller uppförsbacke).
 Funktionen för starthjälp får endast användas när elcykeln startas. Om elcykelns hjul inte har kontakt med marken när starthjälpen används finns risk för personskada.
För inkoppling av starthjälpen tryck knappen ”WALK” 14 på
manöverenheten och håll den nedtryckt. Elcykelns drivenhet
kopplas in.
När kapaciteten underskrider 5 % ger drivenheten
inte längre stöd. Laddningsdisplayens LED på batteriet slocknar.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–4
Starthjälpen slås från så fort ett av följande moment inträffar:
– när du släpper knappen ”WALK” 14,
– trycker en annan knapp på manöverdatorn,
– trampar pedalerna framåt eller snabbt bakåt,
– när elcykelns hjul blockeras (t. ex. vid bromsning eller om
cykeln stöter mot ett hinder),
– hastigheten överskrider 18 km/h.
Slå på och av belysningen
Alltefter landsspecifika föreskrifter finns cykellyse i två utföranden:
– Via manöverdatorn kan samtidigt framlyse, baklyse och
displayens bakgrundsbelysning tändas och släckas.
I detta utförande visas vid påkoppling av lyset ”Lights on”
(tänt lyse) och vid frånkoppling av lyset ”Lights off”
(släckt lyse) för ca 1 s på textdisplayen c.
– Endast displayens bakgrundsbelysning kan slås på och av,
fram- och baklyset på elcykeln är oberoende av
manöverdatorn.
För båda utförandena trycker du för På och Av för belysningen knappen 2.
Hastighets- och avståndsindikeringar
På hastighetsmätaren e indikeras alltid aktuell hastighet.
I funktionsindikeringen (kombination av textindikering c
och värdeindikering d) kan följande funktioner väljas:
– ”Range” (körsträcka): sannolik körsträcka med aktuell
batteriladdning (vid oföränderliga villkor som hjälpnivå,
linjeprofil m.m.)
– ”Distance” (sträcka): åkt distans från senaste återställning
– ”Trip time” (tripptid): Tripptid från senaste nollställning
– ”Avg. Speed” (medelhastighet): medelhastighet från
senaste nollställning
– ”Max. Speed” (max. hastighet): max. hastighet från
senaste nollställning
– ”Clock” (klocka): aktuellt klockslag
Tryck för omkoppling av indikeringsfunktionen knappen
”i” 1 på manöverdatorn eller knappen ”i” 11 på manöverenheten tills önskad funktion visas.
För Reset av ”Distance” (sträcka), ”Trip time” (tripptid) och
”Avg. Speed” (medelhastighet) koppla om till en av dess tre
funktioner och tryck sedan knappen ”RESET” 6 tills indikeringen nollställs. Härvid nollställs även de båda andra funktionerna.
För Reset av ”Max. Speed” (max. hastighet) koppla om till
denna funktion och tryck sedan knappen ”RESET” 6 tills indikeringen nollställs.
När manöverdatorn tas ur fästet 4 kvarstår och sparas funktionernas alla värden och kan i fortsättningen visas.
Bosch eBike Systems
Visning/anpassning av grundinställningarna
Indikeringar och ändringar av grundinställningar kan göras
oberoende av om manöverdatorn är i fästet 4 eller inte.
För att hämta menyn för grundinställningar tryck samtidigt
knappen ”RESET” 6 och knappen ”i” 1 tills textdisplayen visar
c ”Configuration” (inställningar).
Tryck för omkoppling mellan grundinställningarna knappen ”i” 1 på manöverdatorn tills önskad grundinställning
visas. När manöverdatorn är insatt i fästet 4 kan även knappen ”i” 11 på manöverenheten tryckas.
För ändring av grundinställningar, tryck för minskning resp.
bläddring nedåt På-Av-knappen 5 bredvid displayen ” –” eller
för ökning resp. bläddring uppåt knappen för belysning 2
bredvid displayen ”+”.
Är manöverdatorn insatt i fästet 4 kan ändringen även ske
med knapparna ” –” 12 resp. ”+” 13 på manöverenheten.
För att gå ur funktionen och spara ändrad inställning, tryck
knappen ”RESET” 6 för 3 s.
Följande grundinställningar står till buds:
– ”unit km/mi” (enhet km/mi): Hastigheten och avståndet
kan visas i km eller engelsk mil.
– ”time format” (tidsformat): Klockslaget kan visas i formatet 12 timmar eller 24 timmar.
– ”clock” (klocka): Aktuell tid kan ställas in. Håll inställningsknapparna längre tid nedtryckta för snabbare ändring av tiden.
– ”English” (Engelska): Du kan ändra textindikeringens
språk. Du kan välja mellan tyska, engelska, franska, spanska, italienska och nederländska.
– ”odometer” (total sträcka): Indikering av total körsträcka
med elcykeln (kan inte ändras)
– ”power-on hours” (total drifttid): Indikering av total körtid med elcykeln (kan inte ändras)
Indikering av felkod
Komponenterna på elcykelsystemet kontrolleras ständigt och
automatiskt. Om ett fel konstateras visas respektive felkod på
textdisplayen c.
Tryck en valfri knapp på manöverdatorn 3 eller på manöverenheten 10 för återgång till standardindikering.
Beroende på felets typ kopplas drivningen eventuellt automatiskt från. Fortsatt åkning utan hjälpmotor är alltid möjlig.
Före långa turer ska elcykeln kontrolleras.
 Låt alltid en auktoriserad cykelhandlare kontrollera
och reparera cykeln. Om ett åtgärdat fel fortfarande indikeras, kontakta en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–5
Kod
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Orsak
Internt fel i drivenheten
Drivenheten med anknytningsproblem
Fel i hastighetssensorn
Belysningen med anknytningsproblem
Manöverdatorn med anknytningsproblem
Drivenhetens temperatur är för hög
(över 40 °C)
internt elektronikfel i batteriet
Batteriets temperatur är för hög (över
40 °C)
Batteriets temperatur är för låg (under
–10 °C)
Batteriet har kopplingsproblem
felaktig batteripolning
Åtgärd
Kontrollera drivenheten
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Låt hastighetssensorn kontrolleras
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Låt drivenheten svalna. Åkning utan elcykelns hjälpmotor är möjlig och
dessutom kyls drivenheten snabbare.
Låt batteriet kontrolleras
Låt batteriet svalna. Elcykeln kan köras vidare utan hjälpmotor och
samtidigt kyls batteriet snabbare.
Låt batteriet långsamt värmas upp i ett varmt rum.
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Ladda batteriet med Bosch originalladdaren enligt beskrivning i bruksanvisningen.
Kontrollera att knapparna inte råkat i kläm t.ex. till följd av smuts. Rengör
i så fall knapparna.
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Kontrollera att knapparna inte råkat i kläm t.ex. till följd av smuts. Rengör
i så fall knapparna.
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
Kontrollera anslutningarna och förbindelserna
En eller flera knappar på manöverdatorn är blockerade.
Manöverenhetens kopplingsproblem
En eller flera knappar är blockerade på
manöverenheten.
Drivenheten med anknytningsproblem
Batteriet har kopplingsproblem
Komponenterna har inbördes kommunikationsfel
Manöverdatorns interna batteri är
Ladda upp manöverdatorn (i fästet eller via USB-kontaktdonet)
tomt
Internt fel på manöverdatorn
Låt manöverdatorn kontrolleras
* Endast med elcykelbelysning från batteriet (landsspecifikt)
Energiförsörjning av externa enheter via USBkontaktdonet
Med hjälp av USB-anslutningen kan de flesta apparaterna drivas och laddas upp när såvida elförsörjningen sker via USB
(t.ex. diverse mobiltelefoner).
Förutsättningen för laddning är att manöverdatorn och ett tillräckligt laddat batteri satts in i elcykeln.
Öppna USB-kontaktdonets dammskydd 8 på manöverdatorn.
Anslut den externa enhetens USB-kontaktdon med en lämplig
USB-kabel till USB-hylsdonet 7 på manöverdatorn.
Anvisningar för åkning med elcykelsystemet
Hur fungerar elcykelns hjälpmotor?
Elcykelns drivenhet ger hjälp under den tid pedalerna trampas. Utan pedaltramp ger drivenheten ingen hjälp. Motoreffekten är alltid beroende av den kraft du använder vid tramp.
Är kraften låg kommer även hjälpen att bli mindre än vid högre
kraft. Detta gäller oberoende av assistansnivån.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Elcykelns hjälpmotor kopplas automatiskt från när hastigheten överskrider 45 km/h. När hastigheten sjunker under
45 km/h kopplas hjälpmotorn åter till.
Ett undantag gäller för starthjälpfunktionen; elcykeln kan utan
pedaltramp köras med låg hastighet.
Elcykeln kan när som helst utan assistans köras som en vanlig
cykel genom att koppla från elcykelsystemet eller genom att
ställa assistansgraden i läge ”OFF”. Samma sak gäller för tomt
batteri.
Elcykelsystemets samspel med växeln
Växeln ska även med elcykelns hjälpmotor användas som på
en vanlig cykel (beakta elcykelns bruksanvisning).
Oberoende av växelns typ rekommenderar vi att under växling
avbryta pedaltrampet. Härvid underlättas växlingen varvid
kraftöverföringens slitage minskar.
Genom att välja rätt växelläge kan med en och samma kraft
hastigheten och räckvidden ökas.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–6
Lär av erfarenhet
Vi rekommenderar att du lär dig hantera elcykeln avsides trafikerade vägar.
Jämför olika assistansnivåer. När du är säker på din sak, kan
du med elcykeln delta i trafiken som med en vanlig cykel.
Testa elcykelns räckvidd under olika villkor innan du startar
för längre turer.
Räckvidden påverkas av
Körsträckan påverkas dock av många fler faktorer som exempelvis:
– assistansnivå,
– växlingssätt,
– däckens typ och lufttryck,
– batteriets ålder och tillstånd,
– vägprofil (motlut) och -beskaffenhet (vägens beläggning),
– motvind och omgivningstemperatur,
– elcykelns, cyklistens och bagagets vikt.
Därför är det inte möjligt att konkret före en tripp förutsäga
räckvidden. Allmänt gäller:
– Vid drivenhetens samma motoreffekt: Ju mindre kraft du
måste använda för att uppnå en viss hastighet (t. ex. vid
optimal växling), desto mindre energi förbrukar elcykelns
drivenhet och desto längre blir körsträckan med en batteriladdning.
– Ju högre assistansgraden är under samma villkor, desto
kortare blir körsträckan.
Sköt elcykeln väl
Beakta elcykelkomponenternas drifts- och lagringstemperatur. Skydda drivenheten, manöverdatorn och batteriet mot
extrem temperatur (t. ex. vid intensiv solbestrålning utan ventilation). Komponenterna (speciellt batteriet) kan skadas vid
extrema temperaturer.
Underhåll och service
Underhåll och rengöring
Håll elcykelns alla komponenter rena, detta gäller speciellt
batteriets kontakter och tillhörande fäste. Rengör försiktigt
med en fuktig, mjuk trasa.
Komponenterna och drivenheten får inte doppas i vatten och
inte heller rengöras med högtrycksaggregat.
För underhåll och reparation av elcykeln kontakta en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
Transport
Batterierna är underkastade kraven för farligt gods. En privat
person kan utan ytterligare förpliktelser transportera batterierna på allmän väg.
Vid transport genom rörelsedrivande person eller tredje person (t.ex. flygfrakt eller spedition) ska speciella villkor för förpackning och märkning beaktas (t.ex. föreskrifterna i ADR).
I detta fall måste vid förberedelse av transport en expert för
farligt gods konsulteras.
Batterier får försändas endast om höljet är oskadat. Tejpa
öppna kontakter och förpacka batteriet så att det inte kan
röras i förpackningen. Ta även hänsyn till eventuella nationella föreskrifter.
Vid alla frågor beträffande transport av batterier kontakta en
auktoriserad cykelhandlare. Hos handlaren kan du även
beställa en lämplig transportförpackning.
Avfallshantering
Drivenheten, manöverdatorn inkl. manöverenheten,
batteriet, hastighetssensorn, tillbehör och förpackning skall omhändertas på miljövänligt sätt för återvinning.
Släng inte elcykeln eller tillhörande komponenter i hushållsavfall!
Endast för EU-länder:
Enligt europeiska direktivet 2002/96/EG
måste obrukbara elapparater och enligt
europeiska direktivet 2006/66/EG felaktiga eller förbrukade batterier separat
omhändertas och på miljövänligt sätt lämnas in för återvinning.
I manöverdatorn inbyggt batteri får demonteras endast för
avfallshantering. Om kåpan öppnas finns risk för att manöverdatorn förstörs.
Lämna in obrukbara batterier och manöverdatorer till en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
Li-jon:
Beakta anvisningarna i avsnittet
”Transport”, sida Svenska–6.
Ändringar förbehålles.
Kundservice och kundkonsulter
Vid frågor beträffande elcykelsystemet och dess komponenter kontakta en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
För auktoriserade cykelhandlare kan du hitta kontaktadresser
på internetsidan www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–7
Litiumjonbatteri PowerPack
Säkerhetsanvisningar
Läs noga igenom alla säkerhetsanvisningar och instruktioner. Fel som uppstår till
följd av att säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna
inte följts kan orsaka elstöt, brand och/eller allvarliga personskador.
Ta väl vara på säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna för framtida behov.
Begreppet ”batteri” som används i denna bruksanvisning hänför sig till både standardbatterier (batterier med fäste på
cykelramen) och pakethållarbatterier (batterier med fäste i
pakethållaren) om inte hänvisning uttryckligen görs till byggform.
 Ta bort batteriet från elcykeln innan arbeten (t. ex.
montering, underhåll m.m.) startas på elcykeln, före
den transporteras i bil och flygplan eller lagras. Vid oavsiktligt aktivering av strömställaren finns risk för personskada.
 Öppna inte batteriet. Detta kan leda till kortslutning. Om
batteriet öppnats lämnas ingen garanti.
Skydda batteriet mot hög värme (t. ex. längre
solbestrålning), eld och neddoppning i vatten.
Explosionsrisk föreligger.
 Håll gem, mynt, nycklar, spikar, skruvar och andra små
metallföremål på avstånd från reservbatteriet för att
undvika en bygling av kontakterna. En kortslutning mellan batterikontakterna kan leda till brännskador eller
brand. För skada som uppstår genom kortslutning fritar sig
Bosch från allt ansvar och ingen garanti lämnas.
 Om batteriet används på fel sätt finns risk för att
vätska rinner ur batteriet. Undvik all kontakt med vätskan. Vid oavsiktlig kontakt spola med vatten. Om
vätska kommer i kontakt med ögonen uppsök dessutom läkare. Batterivätskan kan medföra hudirritation
och brännskada.
 Ur skadat eller felanvänt batteri kan ångor avgå. Tillför
friskluft och uppsök läkare vid åkommor. Ångorna kan
leda till irritation i andningsvägarna.
 Ladda batteriet endast med Bosch originalladdare. Om
inte Bosch originalladdare används, kan brandrisk inte
uteslutas.
 Använd batteriet endast i kombination med elcyklar;
med original Bosch elcykeldrivsystem. På så sätt skyddas batteriet mot farlig överbelastning.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Använd endast originalbatterier från Bosch som tillverkaren rekommenderat för din elcykel. Om andra batterier används, finns risk för kroppsskada och brand. Om
andra batterier används fritar sig Bosch från allt ansvar och
garantiåtagande.
 Läs noga säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna i
bruksanvisningarna för laddare och drivenhet/manöverdator samt elcykelns bruksanvisning.
Produkt- och kapacitetsbeskrivning
Illustrerade komponenter
(se sidan 4–5)
Numreringen av avbildade komponenter hänvisar till illustrationerna på grafiksidorna.
Förutom batterierna och tillhörande fästen är alla illustrationer av cykeldelarna schematiska och kan därför avvika från
din elcykel.
19 Fäste för pakethållarbatteriet
20 Pakethållarbatteri
21 Indikering av drift och laddningstillstånd
22 På-/Av-knapp
23 Batterilåsets nyckel
24 Batterilås
25 Standardbatteriets övre fäste
26 Standardbatteri
27 Standardbatteriets undre fäste
28 Bärrem
29 Laddare
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–8
Tekniska data
Litiumjonbatteri
Produktnummer
– Standardbatteri svart
– Standardbatteri vitt
– Pakethållarbatteri
Märkspänning
Nominell kapacitet
Energi
Driftstemperatur
Lagringstemperatur
Tillåtet temperaturområde för laddning
Vikt, ca.
Kapslingsklass
Montage
 Ställ upp batteriet på en ren yta. Se till att laddningshylsan och kontakterna inte nedsmutsas med t. ex. sand eller
jord.
Kontroll av batteriet före första användningen
Kontrollera batteriet innan det för första gången laddas upp
eller används på elcykeln.
Tryck på På/Av-knappen 22 för inkoppling av batteriet. Om
ingen LED tänds på laddningsdisplayen 21 är batteriet eventuellt skadat.
Om minst en, men inte alla LED tänds på laddningsdisplayen
21, ladda fullständigt upp batteriet innan det används för första gången.
 Ett skadat batteri får inte laddas upp och inte heller
användas. Kontakta en auktoriserad cykelaffär.
Ladda batteriet
 Använd endast med din elcykel levererad Bosch originalladdare eller laddare i samma konstruktion. Endast
denna typ av laddare är anpassad till litiumjonbatteriet för
elcykeln.
Anvisning: Batteriet levereras delladdat. För full effekt ska
batteriet före första användningen med laddaren laddas upp
fullständigt.
Batteriet måste för laddning tas bort från elcykeln.
För laddning av batteriet läs och beakta laddarens bruksanvisning.
Batteriet kan när som helst laddas upp eftersom detta inte
påverkar livslängden. Batteriet skadas inte om laddning
avbryts.
Batteriet är försett med en temperaturövervakning som
endast tillåter laddning inom ett temperaturområde mellan
0 °C och 40 °C.
Bosch eBike Systems
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8,2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2,5
2,5
IP 54 (damm- och spolsäker) IP 54 (damm- och spolsäker)
Om batteriet ligger utanför temperaturområdet för laddning
blinkar tre LED på laddningsindikatorn 21. Ta bort batteriet
från laddaren och låt det tempereras.
Anslut batteriet till laddaren först sedan tillåten laddningstemperatur uppnåtts.
Laddningsdisplay
De fem gröna LED på laddningsdisplayen 21 visar laddningstillståndet för påkopplat batteri.
Härvid motsvarar varje LED en kapacitet på ungefär 20 %. På
ett fullständigt laddat batteri lyser alla fem LED.
Det påkopplade batteriets laddningstillstånd indikeras dessutom i manöverdatorn. Läs och beakta bruksanvisningen för
drivenheten och manöverdatorn.
Om batteriets kapacitet underskrider 5 % slocknar alla LED
på batteriets laddningsdisplay 21 men i manöverdatorn kvarstår ännu en indikering.
Insättning och uttagning av batteriet
(se bilder C–D)
 Frånkoppla batteriet när det sätts in i eller tas ur fästet.
För att batteriet ska kunna sättas in måste nyckeln 23 sitta i
låset 24 och låset vara upplåst.
Vid insättning av standardbatteriet 26 lägg kontakterna
mot elcykelns undre fäste 27. Fäll sedan ned batteriet mot
anslag i övre fästet 25.
Vid insättning av pakethållarbatteriet 20 skjut upp batteriet med kontakterna framåt tills det snäpper fast i fästet 19
på pakethållaren.
Kontrollera att batteriet sitter stadigt. Lås alltid batteriets lås
24, i annat fall kan låset gå upp och batteriet falla ur fästet.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–9
Efter låsning dra alltid nyckeln 23 ur låset 24. Härvid undviks
att nyckeln faller ur låset eller att en olovlig person tillgriper
batteriet vid parkerad elcykel.
Vid borttagning av standardbatteriet 26 frånkoppla batteriet och öppna låset med nyckeln 23. Tippa batteriet ur övre
fästet 25 och dra batteriet med bärremmen 28 ur undre fästet 27.
Vid borttagning av standardbatteriet 20 frånkoppla batteriet
och öppna låset med nyckeln 23. Dra batteriet ur fästet 19.
Anvisningar för optimal hantering av batteriet
Drift
Efterladda batteriet före och under lagring
Om batteriet inte används under en längre tid ska det laddas
upp till ungefär 60 % (3 eller 4 LED tänds på laddningsdisplayen 21).
Kontrollera laddningstillståndet efter 6 månader. Är nu
endast en LED tänd på laddningsdisplayen 21, ladda upp batteriet igen till ca 60 %.
Anvisning: Om batteriet under en längre tid lagras utan laddning kan det även om självurladdningen är låg skadas varvid
ackumulatorkapaciteten kraftigt reduceras.
Låt inte batteriet permanent vara anslutet till laddaren.
Driftstart
 Använd endast originalbatterier från Bosch som tillverkaren rekommenderat för din elcykel. Om andra batterier används, finns risk för kroppsskada och brand. Om
andra batterier används fritar sig Bosch från allt ansvar och
garantiåtagande.
In- och urkoppling
En möjlighet är att efter inkoppling av batteriet slå på elcykelsystemet. Läs och beakta bruksanvisningen för drivenheten
och manöverdatorn.
Kontrollera innan batteriet resp. elcykelsystemet kopplas på
att låset 24 är låst.
Anvisning: Elcykelns pedaler får inte belastas när elcykelsystemet kopplas på, i annat fall begränsas elcykeldrivningens
effekt.
För Inkoppling av batteriet tryck På-/Av-knappen 22. Lysdioderna på displayen 21 tänds och visar samtidigt batteriets
laddningstillstånd.
Anvisning: Om batteriets kapacitet underskrider 5 % tänds
ingen LED på batteriets laddningsdisplay 21. Endast manöverdatorn indikerar att elcykelsystemet är inkopplat.
För frånkoppling av batteriet tryck åter på På-Av knappen
22. Lysdioderna på displayen 21 slocknar. Nu frånkopplas
även elcykelsystemet.
För att spara energi när cykelns drivenhet under ca 10 minuter inte upptar ström (t. ex. när elcykeln står stilla) och ingen
knapp tryckts på manöverdatorn eller manöverenheten kopplas elcykelsystemet automatiskt från och sålunda även batteriet.
Batteriet är genom ”Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)” skyddat
mot djupurladdning, överladdning, överhettning och kortslutning. Vid risk för fara kopplar en skyddskoppling automatiskt
från batteriet.
Om ett fel i batteriet konstateras, blinkar två LED på laddningsindikatorn 21. Kontakta i
detta fall en auktoriserad cykelaffär.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Batteriets livslängd kan förlängas om det sköts väl och drivs
samt lagras vid korrekt temperatur.
Vid åldring försämras batteriets kapacitet även om det sköts
väl.
Är brukstiden efter uppladdning onormalt kort tyder det på
att batteriet är förbrukat. Batteriet kan bytas.
Om standardbatteriets bärrem 28 är defekt låt en cykelhandlare byta ut den.
Lagringsvillkor
Lagra batteriet på en möjligast torr och välventilerad plats.
Skydda batteriet mot fukt och vatten. Vid ogynnsam väderlek
rekommenderar vi att ta bort batteriet från elcykeln och att
förvara det inomhus för nästa användning.
Batteriet kan lagras vid temperaturer mellan –10 °C och
+60 °C. För en lång livslängd rekommenderas en lagring vid
en rumstemperatur på ca 20 °C.
Kontrollera att högsta lagringstemperaturen inte överskrids.
Låt därför inte batteriet t. ex. under sommaren ligga kvar i
bilen och lagra det inte heller i direkt solsken.
Underhåll och service
Underhåll och rengöring
Håll batteriet rent. Rengör försiktigt med en fuktig, mjuk
trasa. Batteriet får inte doppas i vatten och inte heller rengöras med vattenstråle.
Om batteriet inte längre fungerar, kontakta en auktoriserad
cykelhandlare.
Kundservice och kundkonsulter
Vid alla frågor beträffande transport av batterier kontakta en
auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
 Anteckna nyckelns tillverkare och nummer 23. Om
nyckeln går förlorad kontakta en auktoriserad cykelhandlare. ange härvid nyckelns tillverkare och nummer.
För auktoriserade cykelhandlare kan du hitta kontaktadresser
på internetsidan www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–10
Transport
Batterierna är underkastade kraven för farligt gods. En privat
person kan utan ytterligare förpliktelser transportera batterierna på allmän väg.
Vid transport genom rörelsedrivande person eller tredje person (t.ex. flygfrakt eller spedition) ska speciella villkor för förpackning och märkning beaktas (t.ex. föreskrifterna i ADR).
I detta fall måste vid förberedelse av transport en expert för
farligt gods konsulteras.
Batterier får försändas endast om höljet är oskadat. Tejpa
öppna kontakter och förpacka batteriet så att det inte kan
röras i förpackningen. Ta även hänsyn till eventuella nationella föreskrifter.
Vid alla frågor beträffande transport av batterier kontakta en
auktoriserad cykelhandlare. Hos handlaren kan du även
beställa en lämplig transportförpackning.
Avfallshantering
Batteri, tillbehör och förpackning ska omhändertas
på miljövänligt sätt för återvinning.
Släng inte batterier i hushållsavfall!
Endast för EU-länder:
Enligt europeiska direktivet 2002/96/EG
måste obrukbara elapparater och enligt
europeiska direktivet 2006/66/EG felaktiga eller förbrukade batterier separat
omhändertas och på miljövänligt sätt lämnas in för återvinning.
Lämna in obrukbara batterier till en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
Li-jon:
Beakta anvisningarna i avsnittet
”Transport”, sida Svenska–10.
Ändringar förbehålles.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–11
Laddare Charger
Säkerhetsanvisningar
Läs noga igenom alla säkerhetsanvisningar och instruktioner. Fel som uppstår till
följd av att säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna
inte följts kan orsaka elstöt, brand och/eller allvarliga personskador.
Ta väl vara på säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna för framtida behov.
Begreppet ”batteri” som används i denna bruksanvisning hänför sig till både standardbatterier (batterier med fäste på
cykelramen) och pakethållarbatterier (batterier med fäste i
pakethållaren).
Skydda laddaren mot regn och väta. Tränger vatten
in i laddaren ökar risken för elstöt.
 Ladda endast för elcyklar godkända Bosch litiumjonbatterier. Batteriets spänning måste passa till laddarens laddspänning. I annat fall finns risk för brand och
explosion.
 Håll laddaren ren. Förorening kan leda till elektrisk stöt.
 Kontrollera laddare, kabel och stickkontakt före varje
användning. En skadad laddare får inte användas. Du
får själv aldrig öppna laddaren, låt den repareras av
kvalificerad fackman och endast med originalreservdelar. Skadade laddare, ledningar eller stickkontakter
ökar risken för elektrisk stöt.
 Använd inte laddaren på lättantändligt underlag (t. ex.
papper, textilier mm) resp. i brännbar omgivning. Vid
laddningen värms laddaren upp vilket kan medföra brandrisk.
 Ur skadat eller felanvänt batteri kan ångor avgå. Tillför
friskluft och uppsök läkare vid åkommor. Ångorna kan
leda till irritation i andningsvägarna.
 Håll barn under uppsikt. Barn får inte leka med laddaren.
 Laddaren får inte användas av barn eller personer med
begränsad fysisk, sensorisk eller psykisk förmåga eller
som saknar den erfarenhet och kunskap som krävs för
säker hantering. Undantag görs om personen övervakas av en ansvarig person som även kan undervisa i laddarens användning. I annat fall finns risk för felhantering
och personskada.
 Läs noga säkerhetsanvisningarna och instruktionerna i
bruksanvisningarna för laddare och drivenhet/manöverdator samt elcykelns bruksanvisning.
 På laddarens undre sida finns ett sammandrag av viktiga
säkerhetsanvisningar på engelska, franska och spanska
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
(märkta i illustrationen på grafiksidan med nummer 33)
med följande innehåll:
– För säker användning ska bruksanvisningen beaktas.
Risk för elstöt.
– Använd endast i torr omgivning.
– Ladda endast batterier för Bosch elcykelsystemet. Risk
finns att andra batterier exploderar och orsakar personskada.
– Byt inte ut nätsladden. I annat fall finns risk för brand
och explosion.
Produkt- och kapacitetsbeskrivning
Illustrerade komponenter (se sidan 6–7)
Numreringen av komponenterna hänvisar till illustration av
laddaren på grafiksidan.
20 Pakethållarbatteri
21 Indikering av batteriets laddningstillstånd
26 Standardbatteri
29 Laddare
30 Apparathylsdon
31 Apparatkontakt
32 Ventilationsöppningar
33 Säkerhetsanvisningar för laddaren
34 Laddstickkontakt
35 Hylsdon för laddkontakt
Tekniska data
Laddare
Produktnummer
Märkspänning
Frekvens
Batteriladdningsspänning
Laddningsström
Tillåtet temperaturområde för
laddning
Laddningstid
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Antal battericeller
Driftstemperatur
Lagringstemperatur
Vikt enligt EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Kapslingsklass
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
h
h
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
°C
°C
kg
0,8
IP 40
Uppgifterna gäller för en märkspänning på [U] 230 V. Vid avvikande
spänning och för utföranden i vissa länder kan uppgifterna variera.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Svenska–12
Drift
Orsak
 Ställ upp batteriet på en ren yta. Se till att laddningshylsan och kontakterna inte nedsmutsas med t. ex. sand eller
jord.
Driftstart
Anslutning av laddaren (se bilder E–F)
 Beakta nätspänningen! Kontrollera att strömkällans
spänning överensstämmer med uppgifterna på laddarens
typskylt. Laddare märkta med 230 V kan även anslutas till
220 V.
Anslut sedan nätkabelns stickkontakt 31 till apparathylsdonet 30 på laddaren.
Anslut (landsspecifik) nätkabel till strömnätet.
Frånkoppla batteriet och ta bort det ur fästet på elcykeln. Läs
och följ batteriets bruksanvisning.
Anslut laddarens stickkontakt 34 till hylsan 35 på batteriet.
Laddning
Laddningen startar genast när laddaren med insatt batteri
kopplats till strömnätet.
Anvisning: Laddning är endast möjlig om batteriets temperatur ligger inom tillåtet temperaturområde för laddning.
Under laddning lyser laddningsdisplayens 21 LED på batteriet. Varje kontinuerligt tänd LED motsvarar en laddad kapacitet på ungefär 20 %. En blinkande LED indikerar att nästa
laddning till 20 % pågår.
 Var försiktig om du under laddning berör laddaren. Bär
skyddshandskar. Laddaren kan bli mycket het speciellt
vid hög omgivningstemperatur.
Anvisning: Kontrollera att laddaren under laddning är välventilerad och att ventilationsöppningarna 32 på båda sidorna
inte är övertäckta.
Batteriet är fullständigt laddat när de fem lysdioderna lyser
kontinuerligt på displayen 21. Laddningen avbryts automatiskt.
Bryt strömmen till laddaren och koppla bort batteriet från laddaren.
Batteriet frånkopplas automatiskt när det tas ur laddaren.
Batteriet kan nu anslutas till elcykeln.
Fel – Orsak och åtgärd
Orsak
Åtgärd
Två LED blinkar på batteriet
Batteriet är defekt
kontakta en auktoriserad
cykelhandlare
Åtgärd
Tre LED blinkar på batteriet
Batteriet är för varmt eller
kallt
Ta bort batteriet från laddaren och låt batteriets temperatur utjämnas tills temperaturområdet uppnås
Anslut batteriet till laddaren
först sedan tillåten laddningstemperatur uppnåtts.
Laddning kan inte ske (ingen indikering på batteriet)
Stickkontakten sitter inte
kontrollera alla stickanslutkorrekt
ningar
Batteriets kontakter är ned- rengör försiktigt batteriets
smutsade
kontakter
Laddarens ventilationsöpp- rengör ventilationsöppningningar 32 är tilltäppta eller arna 32 och ställ upp laddaren så att den ventileras väl
övertäckta
Nätuttaget, nätsladden eller kontrollera nätspänningen
laddaren är defekt
och låt en cykelhandlare kontrollera laddaren
Batteriet är defekt
kontakta en auktoriserad
cykelhandlare
Underhåll och service
Underhåll och rengöring
Om laddaren fallerar, ta kontakt med en auktoriserad cykelhandlare.
Kundservice och kundkonsulter
Vid alla frågor beträffande laddaren kontakta en auktoriserad
cykelhandlare.
För auktoriserade cykelhandlare kan du hitta kontaktadresser
på internetsidan www.bosch-ebike.com
Avfallshantering
Laddare, tillbehör och förpackning ska omhändertas på miljövänligt sätt för återvinning.
Släng inte laddare i hushållsavfall!
Endast för EU-länder:
Enligt europeiska direktivet 2002/96/EG
för kasserade elektriska och elektroniska
apparater och dess modifiering till nationell
rätt måste obrukbara laddare omhändertas
separat och på miljövänligt sätt lämnas in
för återvinning.
Ändringar förbehålles.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–1
Drivenhet Drive Unit Speed/
Styreenhet Intuvia
Sikkerhetsinformasjon
Produkt- og ytelsesbeskrivelse
Les alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser. Feil ved overholdelsen av sikkerhetsinformasjonene og instruksene kan forårsake elektrisk støt, brann og/eller alvorlige
skader.
Ta vare på alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser for
fremtidig bruk.
I driftsinstruksen brukes uttrykket «Batteri» som gjelder både
for standard-batterier (batterier med holder på sykkelrammen) og bagasjebrett-batterier (batterier med holder på bagasjebrettet).
 Du må ikke åpne drivenheten på egen hånd. Drivenheten trenger ikke vedlikehold og må kun åpnes av kvalifisert fagpersonale og kun repareres med original-reservedeler. Slik opprettholdes drivenhetens sikkerhet.
Hvis drivenheten åpnes uten tillatelse, mister garantien sin
gyldighet.
 Alle komponenter som er montert på drivenheten og alle andre komponenter til el-sykkel-driften (f.eks. kjedeskive, feste for kjedeskive, pedaler) må kun skiftes
ut mot samme type komponenter eller komponenter
som er godkjent av sykkelprodusenten spesielt for
denne el-sykkelen. Slik beskyttes drivenheten mot overbelastning og skader.
 Ta batteriet ut av el-sykkelen før du begynner å arbeide
(f.eks. montering, vedlikehold etc.) på el-sykkelen,
transporterer den med bil eller fly eller oppbevarer
den. Ved utilsiktet betjening av på-/av-bryteren er det fare
for skader.
 Funksjonen starthjelp må utelukkende benyttes når elsykkelen startes. Dersom hjulene til el-sykkelen ikke har
bakkekontakt når starthjelpen benyttes, er det fare for skader.
 Benytt bare original Bosch batterier som er godkjent
av produsenten for el-sykkelen. Bruken av andre batterier kan føre til skader og brannfare. Ved bruk av andre batterier overtar Bosch intet ansvar og ingen garanti.
 Følg alle nasjonale forskrifter om godkjenning og bruk
av el-sykkelen.
 Les og følg sikkerhetsinformasjonene og instruksene i
driftsinstruksen for batteriet og i driftsinstruksen for
el-sykkelen.
Formålsmessig bruk
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Drivenheten skal utelukkende brukes til drift av el-sykkelen og
må ikke brukes til andre formål.
El-sykkelen er beregnet til bruk på veier med fast veidekke.
Den er ikke tillatt til konkurranseformål.
Illustrerte komponenter
(se side 2–3)
Nummereringen av de illustrerte komponentene gjelder for
bildene på illustrasjonssiden.
Alle illustrasjoner av sykkeldeler unntatt drivenheten, styreenheten inkl. betjeningsenhet, hastighetssensoren og de tilhørende holderne er skjematiske og kan avvike fra el-sykkelen
din.
1 Tast indikatorfunksjon «i»
2 Tast for belysning
3 Styreenhet
4 Holder for styreenheten
5 På/av-tast styreenhet
6 Reset-tast «RESET »
7 USB-kontakt
8 Beskyttelseshette for USB-kontakten
9 Drivenhet
10 Betjeningsenhet
11 Tast indikatorfunksjon «i » på betjeningsenheten
12 Tast redusere verdi/bla nedover « –»
13 Tast øke verdi/bla oppover «+»
14 Tast starthjelp «WALK »
15 Låsing styreenhet
16 Sperreskrue styreenhet
17 Hastighetssensor
18 Ekemagnet til hastighetssensoren
Indikatorelementer på styreenheten
a Indikator motoreffekt
b Indikator støttetrinn
c Tekstindikator
d Verdiindikator
e Tachometerindikator
f Batteri-ladetilstandsindikator
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–2
Tekniske data
Drivenhet
Produktnummer
Ytelse
Utgående dreiemoment
max.
Nominell spenning
Driftstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Beskyttelsestype
Vekt, ca.
Styreenhet
Produktnummer
Ladestrøm USB-kontakt
max.
Ladespenning USB-kontakt
Driftstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Beskyttelsestype
Vekt, ca.
Belysning*
Nominell spenning
Ytelse
– Frontlykt
– Baklykt
Kontroll av hastighetssensoren (se bilde B)
W
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
Nm
V
°C
°C
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (støv- og sprutvannbeskyttet)
kg
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
V
°C
°C
500
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (støv- og sprutvannbeskyttet)
kg
0,15
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* avhengig av lovbestemmelser ikke mulig på alle nasjonale modeller
med el-sykkel-batteri
Montering
Innsetting og fjerning av batteriet
For innsetting og for fjerning av batteriet i el-sykkelen må du
lese og følge driftsinstruksen for batteriet.
Innsetting og fjerning av styreenheten
(se bilde A)
For innsetting av styreenheten 3 skyver du den forfra inn i
holderen 4.
For fjerning av styreenheten 3 trykker du på låsingen 15 og
skyver den fremover ut av holderen 4.
 Fjern styreenheten når du har satt fra deg el-sykkelen
slik at drivverket ikke kan brukes av uberettigede tredjepersoner. Uten styreenhet kan el-sykkel-systemet ikke
innkoples.
Det er også mulig å sikre styreenheten i holderen mot at den
fjernes. Demonter til dette holderen 4 fra styret. Sett styreenheten inn i holderen. Skru sperreskruen 16 nedenfra inn i
gjengene på holderen. Monter holderen igjen på styret.
Bosch eBike Systems
Hastighetssensoren 17 og den tilhørende ekemagneten 18
må være montert slik at ekemagneten ved omdreining av hjulet beveger seg i en avstand på minst 5 mm og maksimalt
17 mm fra hastighetssensoren.
Merk: Hvis avstanden mellom hastighetssensor 17 og ekemagnet 18 er for liten eller for stor eller hastighetssensoren
17 ikke er riktig tilkoplet, svikter tachometerindikatoren e, og
el-sykkel-driften arbeider i nødprogrammet.
Du må da løsne skruen på ekemagneten 18 og feste ekemagneten slik på eken, at den går forbi markeringen til hastighetssensoren i en så liten avstand som mulig. Hvis det deretter
fortsatt ikke vises en hastighet på tachometerindikatoren e,
må du henvende deg til en autorisert sykkel-forhandler.
Bruk
Igangsetting
Forutsetninger
Systemet til el-sykkelen kan kun aktiveres når følgende forutsetninger er oppfylt:
– Et tilstrekkelig ladet batteri er satt inn (se driftsinstruksen
for batteriet).
– Styreenheten er satt riktig inn i holderen (se «Innsetting og
fjerning av styreenheten», side Norsk–2).
– Hastighetssensoren er tilkoplet riktig (se «Kontroll av hastighetssensoren», side Norsk–2).
Inn-/utkopling av el-sykkel-systemet
For innkopling av el-sykkel-systemet har du følgende muligheter:
– Hvis styreenheten allerede er innkoplet når den settes inn
i holderen, koples el-sykkel-systemet automatisk inn.
– Trykk ved innsatt styreenhet og innsatt batteri en gang kort
på på-av-tasten 5 til styreenheten.
– Trykk ved innsatt styreenhet på på-av-tasten til batteriet
(se batteriets driftsinstruks).
Merk: Pedalene til el-sykkelen må ikke være belastet ved innkopling av el-sykkel-systemet, ellers innskrenkes motoreffekten. I tekstindikatoren c vises feilmeldingen «Release pedal»
(avlast pedal).
Dersom el-sykkel-systemet ved en feiltagelse ble innkoplet
med belastede pedaler, kopler du det ut og inn igjen uten belastning.
Drivverket blir aktivert så snart du trør på pedalene (unntatt
ved funksjonen starthjelp, se «Inn-/utkopling av starthjelpen», side Norsk–3). Motoreffekten retter seg etter innstillingene på styreenheten.
Når du i normaldrift slutter å trø på pedalene eller når du har
nådd en hastighet på 45 km/h, koples støtten fra el-sykkeldrivverket ut. Drivverket aktiveres automatisk igjen når du
trør på pedalene og hastigheten er under 45 km/h.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–3
For utkopling av el-sykkel-systemet har du følgende muligheter:
– Trykk på på-av-tasten 5 til styreenheten.
– Kople ut batteriet på på-/av-tasten (se driftsinstruks for
batteriet.)
– Ta styreenheten ut av holderen.
Hvis det ikke aktiveres en driveffekt i løpet av ca. 10 min
(f.eks. fordi el-sykkelen står stille) og det ikke trykkes på noen
tast på styreenheten eller betjeningsenheten, koples el-sykkel-systemet automatisk ut for å spare energi.
Anvisninger og innstillinger på styreenheten
Energitilførsel for styreenheten
Når styreenheten sitter i holderen 4, et tilstrekkelig ladet batteri er satt inn i el-sykkelen og el-sykkel-systemet blir koplet
inn, så forsynes styreenheten med energi fra batteriet til elsykkelen.
Når styreenheten tas ut av holderen 4 skjer energitilførselen
via et internt batteri. Dersom det interne batteriet er for svakt
når styreenheten koples inn, vises i 3 s «Attach to bike» (kople til sykkel) i tekstindikatoren c. Deretter koples styreenheten ut igjen.
For opplading av det interne batteriet setter du styreenheten
igjen inn i holderen 4 (når et batteri er satt inn i el-sykkelen).
Kople inn batteriet til el-sykkelen på på-/av-tasten (se driftsinstruks for batteriet.)
Du kan også lade opp styreenheten via USB-porten. Åpne til
dette beskyttelseshetten 8. Kople USB-kontakten 7 til styreenheten via en passende USB-kabel til et vanlig USB-ladeapparat eller til USB-porten på en datamaskin (5 V ladespenning, max. 500 mA ladestrøm). I tekstindikatoren c til
styreenheten vises «USB connected» (USB tilkoplet).
Innkopling/utkopling av styreenheten
For innkopling av styreenheten trykker du kort på på-av-tasten 5. Styreenheten kan (ved tilstrekkelig ladet internt batteri) også koples inn når den ikke er satt inn i holderen.
For utkopling av styreenheten trykker du på på-av-tasten 5.
Hvis styreenheten ikke er satt inn i holderen, utkoples den automatisk uten tastetrykk etter 1 min for å spare energi.
Batteri-ladetilstandsindikator
Batteri-ladeindikatoren f viser ladetilstanden til el-sykkelen,
ikke til det interne batteriet til styreenheten. Ladetilstanden
til el-sykkelen kan likeledes avleses på LEDene på batteriet.
I indikatoren f tilsvarer hver strek på batterisymbolet ca. 20 %
kapasitet:
100 % til 80 % kapasitet
20 % til 5 % kapasitet, batteriet bør opplades.
Mindre enn 5 % kapasitet, driftsstøtte er ikke lenger mulig. LEDene på batteri-ladeindikatoren slukner.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Når belysningen for el-sykkelen brukes via batteriet (avhengig
av landet hvor du bor i), er kapasiteten tilstrekkelig for belysning i ca. 2 timer etter at symbolet tomt batteri vises for første
gang. Når symbolet begynner å blinke, kan belysningen kun
fortsatt brukes i kort tid.
Når styreenheten tas ut av holderen 4, blir den sist viste ladetilstand til batteriet lagret.
Innstilling av støttetrinnet
På styreenheten kan du stille inn hvor sterkt el-sykkelens drivverk skal støtte deg når du trør. Støttetrinnet kan endres når
som helst, også under syklingen.
Merk: På enkelte modeller er det mulig at støttetrinnet er stilt
inn på forhånd og ikke kan endres. Det er også mulig at det
står færre trinn til disposisjon enn de som er angitt her.
Følgende støttetrinn står maksimalt til disposisjon:
– «OFF»: Drivverket er utkoplet, el-sykkelen kan brukes som
en normal sykkel, kun ved å trø.
– «ECO»: virksom støtte ved maksimal effektivitet, for maksimal rekkevidde
– «TOUR»: jevn støtte, for turer med stor rekkevidde
– «SPORT»: kraftig støtte, for sportslig sykling i bratte områder og byer
– «TURBO»: maksimal støtte opptil høye trø-frekvenser, for
sportslig sykling
For øking av støttetrinnet trykker du på tasten «+» 13 på betjeningsenheten så ofte til det ønskede støttetrinnet vises på
indikatoren b, for senking tasten « –» 12.
Den valgte motoreffekten vises i indikatoren a. Den maksimale motoreffekten er avhengig av det valgte støttetrinnet.
Støttetrinn
«ECO»
«TOUR»
«SPORT»
«TURBO»
Motoreffekt*
(Kjedegir)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Motoreffekten kan avvike ved enkelte utførelser.
Når styreenheten tas ut av holderen, 4 blir det sist viste støttetrinnet lagret, indikatoren a til motoreffekten blir tom.
Inn-/utkopling av starthjelpen
Starthjelpen kan tjene som ekstra støtte på de første meterne, når starten er vanskelig (som f.eks. ved trafikklys eller i
bakke).
 Funksjonen starthjelp må utelukkende benyttes når elsykkelen startes. Dersom hjulene til el-sykkelen ikke har
bakkekontakt når starthjelpen benyttes, er det fare for skader.
For innkopling av starthjelpen trykker du på tasten «WALK »
14 på betjeningsenheten og hold den trykt inne. Drivverket til
el-sykkelen innkoples.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–4
Starthjelpen utkoples, så snart en av de følgende hendelsene
inntreffer:
– Du slipper tasten «WALK » 14,
– du trykker en annen tast på styreenheten,
– du trør fremover eller raskt bakover på pedalene,
– hjulene til el-sykkelen blokkeres (f.eks. ved bremsing eller
støt mot et hinder).
– hastigheten overskrider 18 km/h.
Inn-/utkopling av belysningen
Alt etter nasjonale bestemmelser er to utførelder for belysningen mulig:
– Via styreenheten kan samtidig frontlys, baklys og displayets bakgrunnsbelysning slås på og av.
I denne utførelsen vises ved innkoplingen av belysningen
«Lights on» (lys på) og ved utkopling av belysningen
«Lights off» (lys av) i ca. 1 s i tekstindikatoren c.
– Det kan kun displayets bakgrunnsbelysning slås på og av,
frontlys og baklys til el-sykkelen er uavhengige av styreenheten.
På begge modellene trykker du for inn- og utkopling av belysningen henholdsvis på tasten 2.
Hastighets- og avstandsindikatorer
På tachometerindikatoren e vises alltid aktuell hastighet.
På funksjonsindikatoren (kombinasjon av tekstindikator c
og verdiindikator d) står følgende funksjoner til disposisjon:
– «Range» (rekkevidde): forventet rekkevidde for eksisterende batterilading (ved konstante betingelser som støttetrinn, strekningsprofil osv.)
– «Distance» (strekning): tilbakelagt avstand siden siste
reset
– «Trip time» (kjøretid): kjøretid siden siste reset
– «Avg. Speed» (gjennomsnitt): oppnådd gjennomsnittshastighet siden siste reset
– «Max. Speed» (maksimal): oppnådd maksimalhastighet
siden siste reset
– «Clock» (klokkeslett): aktuelt klokkeslett
Trykk til skifting i indikatorfunksjonen på tasten «i » 1 på
styreenheten eller på tasten «i » 11 på betjeningsenheten så
ofte til den ønskede funksjonen vises på indikatoren.
For reset av «Distance» (strekning), «Trip time» (kjøretid)
og «Avg. Speed» (gjennomsnitt) skifter du til en av disse tre
funksjonene og trykker så på tasten «RESET» 6 helt til indikatoren er nullstilt. Ved dette er også verdiene til de to andre
funksjonene nullstilt.
For reset av «Max. Speed» (maksimal) skifter du til denne
funksjonen og trykker så på tasten «RESET» 6 helt til indikatoren er nullstilt.
Når styreenheten tas ut av holderen 4, blir alle verdiene til
funksjonene lagret og kan fortsatt vises.
Bosch eBike Systems
Visning/tilpasning av grunninnstillingene
Visning og endringer av grunninnstillingene er mulig uavhengig av om styreenheten er satt inn i holderen 4 eller ikke.
For å skifte til menyen grunninnstillinger, trykker du samtidig
så lenge på tastene «RESET» 6 og på tasten «i » 1, helt til c
«Configuration» (innstillinger) vises på tekstindikatoren.
Trykk til skifting mellom grunninnstillingene på tasten «i »
1 på styreenheten helt til ønsket grunninnstilling vises. Er styreenheten satt inn i holderen 4, kan du også trykke på tasten
«i» 11 på betjeningsenheten.
For å endre grunninnstillingene trykker du for redusering/bla nedover på-av-tasten 5 ved siden av indikatoren « –»
eller for øking eller bla oppover på tasten belysning 2 ved siden av indikatoren «+».
Er styreenheten satt inn i holderen 4, er endringen også mulig
med tastene « –» 12 hhv. «+» 13 på betjeningsenheten.
For å forlate funksjonen og lagre en endret innstilling, trykk på
tasten «RESET» 6 i 3 s.
Følgende grunninnstillinger står til disposisjon:
– «unit km/mi» (enhet km/mi): Slik kan du la deg vise hastigheten og tilbakelagt avstand i kilometer eller engelske
mil.
– «time format» (tidsformat): Du kan la deg vise klokkeslettet i 12-timers- eller i 24-timers-format.
– «clock» (klokkeslett): Du kan stille inn det aktuelle klokkeslettet. Ved å trykke lenger på innstillingstastene endrer
du klokkeslettet raskere.
– «English» (engelsk): Du kan endre språket på tekstindikatoren. Du kan velge mellom tysk, engelsk, fransk, spansk,
italiensk og nederlandsk.
– «odometer» (total strekning): Anvisning av den totale
strekningen tilbakelagt med el-sykkelen (kan ikke endres)
– «power-on hours» (total driftstid): Anvisning av den totale kjøretiden med el-sykkelen (kan ikke endres)
Feilkode-indikator
Komponentene til el-sykkel-systemet kontrolleres kontinuerlig automatisk. Hvis det registreres en feil, vises den tilsvarende feilkoden i tekstindikatoren c.
Trykk på en annen tast på styreenheten 3 eller på betjeningsenheten 10 for å vende tilbake til standardindikatoren.
Avhengig av feiltypen koples drivverket eventuelt også automatisk ut. Videresykling uten støtte fra drivverket er alltid mulig. el-sykkelen bør sjekkes før videre turer.
 La alle kontroller og reparasjoner utelukkende utføres
av en autorisert sykkel-forhandler. Hvis en feil fortsatt
anvises, til tross for at den er utbedret, må du også henvende deg til en autorisert sykkel-forhandler.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–5
Kode
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Årsak
Intern feil på drivenheten
Forbindelsesproblem for drivenheten
Feil på hastighetssensoren
Forbindelsesproblem på belysningen
Forbindelsesproblem på styreenheten
For høy temperatur på drivenheten
(over 40 °C)
Intern elektronisk feil på batteriet
Batteriets temperatur for høy (over
40°C)
Batteriets temperatur for lav (under
–10 °C)
Forbindelsesproblem på batteriet
Feil poling på batteriet
Utbedring
La drivenheten sjekkes
La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
La hastighetssensoren sjekkes
La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
La drivenheten avkjøle. Videresykling uten el-sykkel-drift er mulig og
kjøler drivenheten hurtigere.
La batteri kontrolleres
La batteriet avkjøles. Det er mulig å sykle videre uten el-sykkel-drivverk og
det fremskynder avkjølingen av batteriet.
La batteriet langsomt varmes opp i et varmt rom.
La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
Lad opp batteriet med original Bosch ladeapparatet som beskrevet i dets
driftsinstruks.
En eller flere taster på styreenheten er Sjekk om tastene er klemt fast, f.eks. fordi det er kommet inn smuss.
blokkert.
Rengjør tastene eventuelt.
Forbindelsesproblem på betjenings- La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
enheten
En eller flere taster på betjeningsenhe- Sjekk om tastene er klemt fast, f.eks. fordi det er kommet inn smuss.
ten er blokkert.
Rengjør tastene eventuelt.
Forbindelsesproblem for drivenheten La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
Forbindelsesproblem på batteriet
La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
Kommunikasjonsfeil av komponente- La kontakter og forbindelser sjekkes
ne med hverandre
Internt batteri i styreenheten tomt
Lad opp styreenheten (i holderen eller via USB-porten)
Intern feil på styreenheten
La styreenheten kontrolleres
* kun med el-sykkel-belysning via batteriet (nasjonal innstilling)
Energitilførsel til eksterne apparater via USBport
Ved hjelp av USB-porten kan de fleste apparatene med mulig
energitilførsel via USB (f.eks. diverse mobiltelefoner) brukes
hhv. lades opp.
Forutsetning for oppladingen er at styreenheten og et tilstrekkelig ladet batteri er satt inn i el-sykkelen.
Åpne beskyttelseshetten 8 til USB-porten på styreenheten.
Forbind USB-porten til det eksterne apparatet via en passende USB-kabel med USB-kontakten 7 på styreenheten.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Henvisninger til sykling med el-sykkel-systemet
Når virker el-sykkel-drivverket?
El-sykkel-drivverket støtter deg ved syklingen, så lenge du
trør på pedalene. Uten pedaltråkking kommer ingen støtte.
Motoreffekten er alltid avhengig av kreftene du bruker til tråkking.
Hvis du bruker lite krefter, vil støtten bli mindre enn hvis du
bruker mange krefter. Dette gjelder uavhengig av støttetrinnet.
El-sykkel-drivverket koples automatisk ut ved hastigheter
over 45 km/h. Når hastigheten synker til under 45 km/h, står
drivverket automatisk til disposisjon igjen.
Med unntak av starthjelp-funksjonen, der kan el-sykkelen brukes i lav hastighet uten å trø på pedalene.
Du kan alltid bruke el-sykkelen uten støtte og sykle som med
en vanlig sykkel, enten ved å kople ut el-sykkel-systemet eller
sette støttetrinnet på «OFF» . Det samme gjelder hvis batteriet er tomt.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–6
Samspill av el-sykkel-systemet med giret
Også med el-sykkel-drivverk skal du bruke giret som på en
vanlig sykkel (følg da driftsinstruksen for el-sykkelen).
Uavhengig av giretypen, anbefales det å avbryte tråkkingen et
øyeblikk mens du girer. Slik forenkles giringen og slitasjen på
drivstrengen reduseres.
Med valg av riktig gir kan du øke hastigheten og rekkevidden
med samme mengde krefter.
Samle første erfaringer
Det anbefales å samle første erfaringer med el-sykkelen litt
avsides fra trafikkerte veier.
Prøv forskjellige støttetrinn. Med en gang du føler deg sikker,
kan du med el-sykkelen sykle i trafikken som med en vanlig
sykkel.
Test rekkevidden til el-sykkelen under forskjellige vilkår før du
planlegger lengre, krevende turer.
Innflytelser på rekkevidden
Rekkevidden påvirkes av mange faktorer som for eksempel:
– støttetrinn
– giring,
– type dekk og dekktrykk,
– batteriets alder og pleietilstand,
– strekningsprofil (bakker) og -tilstand (veibelegg),
– motvind og omgivelsestemperatur,
– vekt til el-sykkel, syklist og bagasje.
Derfor er det ikke mulig å beregne rekkevidden helt konkret
før en tur påbegynnes. Men generelt gjelder:
– Ved den samme motoreffekten til el-sykkel-drivverket: Jo
mindre krefter du må bruke for å oppnå en viss hastighet
(f.eks. med optimal bruk av giret), desto mindre energi forbruker el-sykkel-drivverket og desto større er rekkevidden
for en batteri-opplading.
– Jo høyere støttenivået velges ved ellers like vilkår, desto
mindre er rekkevidden.
God bruk av el-sykkelen
Ta hensyn til drifts- og lagringstemperaturene for el-sykkelkomponentene. Beskytt drivenheten, styreenheten og batteriet mot ekstreme temperaturer (f.eks. fra intensiv solinnstråling uten samtidig ventilasjon). Komponentene (spesielt batteriet) kan skades av ekstreme temperaturer.
Service og vedlikehold
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Ved alle spørsmål til el-sykkel-systemet og dets komponenter, ta kontakt med en autorisert sykkelforhandler.
Kontaktinformasjoner til autoriserte sykkelforhandlere finner
du på internettsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
For batteriene gjelder kravene i loven om farlig gods. En privat
bruker kan transportere batteriene uten ytterligere pålegg på
vanlige veier.
Ved transport som utføres av yrkesmessige brukere eller ved
transport av tredjepersoner (f.eks. lufttransport eller spedisjon) må det oppfylles spesielle krav til emballasje og merking
(f.eks. de tyske forskriftene ADR). Ved behov kan du konsultere en ekspert for farlig gods ved forberedelse av forsendelsen.
Send batteriene kun hvis huset ikke er skadet. Lim igjen de
åpne kontaktene og pakk batteriet slik at det ikke beveger seg
i emballasjen. Ta også hensyn til eventuelle videregående nasjonale bestemmelser.
Henvend deg til en autorisert sykkelforhandler ved spørsmål
om transport av batteriene. Hos forhandleren kan du også bestille en egnet transportemballasje.
Deponering
Drivenhet, styreenhet inkl. betjeningsenhet, batteri,
hastighetssensor, tilbehør og emballasje må leveres
inn til en miljøvennlig gjenvinning.
El-sykkelen og deres komponenter må ikke kastes i vanlig
søppel!
Kun for EU-land:
Iht. det europeiske direktivet 2002/96/EF
om gamle elektriske apparater og iht. det
europeiske direktivet 2006/66/EF må defekte eller oppbrukte batterier/oppladbare
batterier samles inn adskilt og leveres inn til
en miljøvennlig resirkulering.
Batteriet som er integrert i styreenheten må kun fjernes for
deponering. Styreenheten kan bli ødelagt når huset åpnes.
Lever ubrukelige batterier og styreenheter til en autorisert
sykkelforhandler.
Li-ion:
Ta hensyn til informasjonene i avsnittet «Transport», side Norsk–6.
Vedlikehold og rengjøring
Hold alle komponentene på el-sykkelen rene, spesielt kontaktene på batteri og den tilhørende holderen. Rengjør dem forsiktig med en fuktig, myk klut.
Alle komponentene inklusiv drivenheten må ikke dyppes i
vann eller rengjøres med en høytrykkspyler.
Til service og reparasjon av el-sykkelen henvender du deg til
en autorisert sykkel-forhandler.
Bosch eBike Systems
Rett til endringer forbeholdes.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–7
Li-ion-batteri PowerPack
Sikkerhetsinformasjon
Les alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser. Feil ved
overholdelsen av sikkerhetsinformasjonene og instruksene
kan forårsake elektrisk støt,
brann og/eller alvorlige skader.
Ta vare på alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser for
fremtidig bruk.
I driftsinstruksen brukes uttrykket «Batteri» som gjelder både
for standard-batterier (batterier med holder på sykkelrammen) og bagasjebrett-batterier (batterier med holder på bagasjebrettet), dersom det ikke uttrykkelig refereres til byggeformen.
 Ta batteriet ut av el-sykkelen før du begynner å arbeide
(f.eks. montering, vedlikehold etc.) på el-sykkelen,
transporterer den med bil eller fly eller oppbevarer
den. Ved utilsiktet betjening av på-/av-bryteren er det fare
for skader.
 Åpne ikke batteriet. Det er fare for en kortslutning. Ved
åpnet batteri bortfaller ethvert garantikrav.
Beskytt batteriet mot varme (f.eks. også mot
varig solinnstråling), ild og nedsenking i vann.
Det er eksplosjonsfare.
 Hold batterier som ikke benyttes borte fra binderser,
mynter, nøkler, spiker, skruer eller andre mindre metallgjenstander som kan forårsake en brokopling av
kontaktene. En kortslutning mellom batterikontaktene
kan føre til forbrenninger eller til brann. Ved kortslutninger
som er oppstått i denne sammenheng bortfaller ethvert garantikrav ved Bosch.
 Ved feil bruk kan væske lekke ut av batteriet. Unngå
kontakt. Skyll med vann ved tilfeldig kontakt. Dersom
væske er kommet i øynene, konsulter lege i tillegg. Batterivæske som lekker ut kan føre til hudirritasjoner eller
forbrenninger.
 Ved skader på og usakkyndigbruk av batteriet kan
damper slippe ut. Tilfør friskluft og oppsøk lege ved
plager. Damper kan irritere luftveiene.
 Lad batteriet kun med orignale Bosch ladeapparater.
Ved bruk av ikke originale Bosch ladeapparater kan en
brannfare ikke utelukkes.
 Bruk batteriet kun i forbindelse med el-sykler med original Bosch el-sykkel- drivsystem. Bare slik beskyttes
batteriet mot farlig overlast.
 Benytt bare original Bosch batterier som er godkjent
av produsenten for el-sykkelen. Bruken av andre batterier kan føre til skader og brannfare. Ved bruk av andre batterier overtar Bosch intet ansvar og ingen garanti.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Les og følg sikkerhetsinformasjonene og anvisningene
i driftsinstruksene for ladeapparat og drivenhet/styreenhet og i driftsinstruksen for el-sykkelen.
Produkt- og ytelsesbeskrivelse
Illustrerte komponenter
(se side 4–5)
Nummereringen av de illustrerte komponentene gjelder for
bildene på illustrasjonssiden.
Alle illustrasjoner av sykkeldeler unntatt batteriene og holderne er skjematiske og kan avvike fra el-sykkelen din.
19 Holder for bagasjebrett-batteriet
20 Bagasjebrett-batteri
21 Drifts- og ladetilstandsindikator
22 På-/av-tast
23 Nøkkel til batterilåsen
24 Batterilås
25 Øvre holder til standard-batteriet
26 Standard-batteri
27 Nedre holder til standard-batteriet
28 Bærerem
29 Ladeapparat
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–8
Tekniske data
Li-ion-batteri
Produktnummer
– Standard-batteri svart
– Standard-batteri hvitt
– Bagasjebrett-batteri
Nominell spenning
Nominell kapasitet
Energi
Driftstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Godkjent ladetemperaturområde
Vekt, ca.
Beskyttelsestype
Montering
 Plasser batteriet kun på rene flater. Unngå spesielt at ladekontakten og andre kontakter tilsmusses, f.eks. av sand
eller jord.
Sjekk batteriet før førstegangs bruk
Sjekk batteriet før du lader det opp for første gang eller bruker
det med el-sykkelen.
Trykk da på på-av-tasten 22 til innkopling av batteriet. Hvis
det ikke lyser en LED på ladeindikatoren 21, er batteriet eventuelt skadet.
Hvis minst en, men ikke alle LEDene på ladeindikatoren lyser
21, må du lade batteriet helt opp før førstegangs bruk.
 Ikke lad opp eller bruk et skadet batteri. Henvend deg til
en autorisert sykkelforhandler.
Lading av batteriet
 Bruk kun Bosch ladeapparatet som er med i leveranseprogrammet til din el-sykkel eller et original Bosch ladeapparat av identisk type. Kun dette ladeapparatet er
tilpasset til Li-ion batteriet som brukes på el-sykkelen.
Merk: Batteriet leveres delvis oppladet. For å sikre full effekt
fra batteriet må du lade det fullstendig opp i ladeapparatet før
førstegangs bruk.
Batteriet må tas ut av el-sykkelen til opplading.
Les og følg driftsinstruksen for ladeapparatet til opplading av
batteriet.
Batteriet kan lades opp til enhver tid uten at levetiden forkortes. Det skader ikke batteriet å avbryte oppladingen.
Batteriet er utstyrt med en temperaturovervåking som muliggjør en opplading kun i temperaturområdet mellom 0 °C og
40 °C.
Bosch eBike Systems
PowerPack 300
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 502
0 275 007 505
36
36
8,2
11
300
400
–10...+40
–10...+40
–10...+60
–10...+60
0...+40
0...+40
2,5
2,5
IP 54 (støv- og sprutvannbe- IP 54 (støv- og sprutvannbeskyttet)
skyttet)
Hvis batteriet befinner seg
utenfor ladetemperaturområdet, blinker de tre LEDene på ladeindikatoren 21. Kople batteriet fra ladeapparatet og la det tempereres.
Kople batteriet først til ladeapparatet når det har oppnådd
den tillatte ladetemperaturen.
Ladetilstandsindikator
De fem grønne LEDene på ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 viser
batteriets ladetilstand ved innkoplet batteri.
Hver LED tilsvarer ca. 20 % kapasitet. Ved et helt oppladet
batteri lyser alle fem LEDene.
Ladetilstanden til det innkoplede batteriet anvises dessuten
på styreenheten. Les og følg driftsinstruksen for drivenhet og
styreenhet.
Hvis batterikapasiteten er under 5 %, slukner alle LEDene på
ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 på batteriet, men det finnes
fremdeles en visning på styrenheten.
Innsetting og fjerning av batteriet
(se bildene C–D)
 Slå batteriet alltid av når du setter det inn eller tar det
ut av holderen.
For at batteriet kan settes inn, må nøkkelen 23 stå i låsen 24
og låsen må være låst opp.
For innsetting av standard-batteriet 26 setter du det med
kontaktene på den nedre holderen 27 på el-sykkelen. Vipp
det helt inn i øvre holder 25.
For innsetting av bagasjebrett-batteriet 20 skyver du det
med kontaktene foran til det smekker inn i holderen 19 på bagasjebrettet.
Sjekk om batteriet sitter godt fast. Lås batteriet alltid med låsen 24, fordi låsen ellers kan åpne og batteriet kan da falle ut
av holderen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–9
Trekk nøkkelen 23 etter låsingen alltid ut av låsen 24. Slik forhindrer du at nøkkelen faller ut hhv. at batteriet tas ut av uberettigede tredjepersoner når el-sykkelen er parkert.
For fjerning av standard-batteriet 26 slår du det av og låser
opp låsen med nøkkelen 23. Vipp batteriet ut av den øvre holderen 25 og trekk det i bæreremmen 28 ut av den nedre holderen 27.
For fjerning av bagasjebrett-batteriet 20 slår du det av og
låser opp låsen med nøkkelen 23. Trekk batteriet ut av holderen 19.
Bruk
Igangsetting
 Benytt bare original Bosch batterier som er godkjent
av produsenten for el-sykkelen. Bruken av andre batterier kan føre til skader og brannfare. Ved bruk av andre batterier overtar Bosch intet ansvar og ingen garanti.
Inn-/utkobling
Å kople inn batteriet er en mulighet for å kople inn el-sykkelsystyemet. Les og følg driftsinstruksen for drivenhet og styreenhet.
Før batteriet hhv. el-sykkel-systemet koples inn, må du sjekke
om låsen 24 er låst.
Merk: Pedalene til el-sykkelen må ikke være belastet ved innkopling av el-sykkel-systemet, ellers innskrenkes el-sykkeldrivverkets effekt.
For innkopling av batteriet trykker du på på-av-tasten 22.
LEDene på indikatoren 21 lyser og anviser samtidig ladetilstanden.
Merk: Hvis batterikapasiteten er under 5 %, lyser det ikke en
LED på batteriets ladetilstandsindikator 21. Det vises kun på
styreenheten om el-sykkel-systemet er innkoplet.
For utkopling av batteriet trykker du på på-av-tasten 22 på
nytt. LEDene på indikatoren 21 slukner. El-sykkel-systemet
koples ved dette likeledes ut.
Hvis det ikke aktiveres en effekt fra el-sykkel-drivverket i løpet
av ca. 10 min (f.eks. fordi el-sykkelen står stille) og det ikke
trykkes på noen tast på styreenheten eller betjeningsenheten
til el-sykkelen, koples el-sykkel-systemet og dermed også batteriet automatisk ut for å spare energi.
Batteriet er ved «Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)» beskyttet
mot total utladning, overoppheting og kortslutning. Ved fare
utkoples batteriet automatisk med en beskyttelseskopling.
Hvis det oppdages en defekt på
batteriet, blinker to LEDer på
ladetilstandsindikatoren 21.
Henvend deg i dette tilfelle til en
autorisert sykkelforhandler.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Henvisninger til optimal håndtering av batteriet
Levetiden til batteriet kan forlenges hvis det vedlikeholdes
godt, og fremfor alt lagres ved korrekt temperatur.
Med økende alder reduseres batteriets kapasitet også ved bra
vedlikehold.
En vesentlig kortere driftstid etter opplading er et tegn på at
batteriet er oppbrukt. Du kan skifte ut batteriet.
Hvis bæreremmen 28 til standard-batteriet skulle være defekt, la den skiftes ut av en sykkel-forhandler.
Etteropplading av batteriet før og under lagring
Lad batteriet opp til ca. 60 % før det tas ut av drift i lengre tid
(3 til 4 LEDer på ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 lyser).
Sjekk ladetilstanden etter 6 måneder. Hvis kun en LED på ladetilstandsindikatoren 21 lyser, må batteriet lades opp til ca.
60 % igjen.
Merk: Hvis batteriet oppbevares i tom tilstand over lengre tid,
kan det til tross for lav selvutlading skades og lagringskapasiteten kan reduseres sterkt.
Det anbefales ikke å la batteriet stå konstant tilkoplet til ladeapparatet.
Lagringsvilkår
Batteriet må helst lagres på et tørt, godt ventilert sted. Beskytt det mot fuktighet og vann. Ved ugunstige værforhold anbefales det f.eks. å fjerne batteriet fra el-sykkelen og oppbevare det i et lukket rom til neste bruk.
Batteriet kan lagres ved temperaturer fra –10 °C opptil
+60 °C. For å oppnå en lang levetid er det fordelaktig med ca.
20 °C romtemperatur.
Pass på at den maksimale lagertemperaturen ikke overskrides. La ikke batteriet f.eks. ligge i bilen om sommeren og oppbevar det utenfor direkte solinnstråling.
Service og vedlikehold
Vedlikehold og rengjøring
Hold batteriet rent. Rengjør det forsiktig med en fuktig, myk
klut. Batteriet må ikke dyppes i vann eller rengjøres med en
vannstråle.
Hvis batteriet ikke lenger er funksjonsdyktig, henvend deg til
en autorisert sykkelforhandler.
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Henvend deg til en autorisert sykkelforhandler ved spørsmål
til batteriene.
 Skriv opp produsenten og nummeret på nøkkelen 23.
Hvis du mister nøkkelen må du henvende deg til en autorisert sykkelforhandler. Oppgi da nøkkelprodusent og -nummer.
Kontaktinformasjoner til autoriserte sykkelforhandlere finner
du på internettsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–10
Transport
For batteriene gjelder kravene i loven om farlig gods. En privat
bruker kan transportere batteriene uten ytterligere pålegg på
vanlige veier.
Ved transport som utføres av yrkesmessige brukere eller ved
transport av tredjepersoner (f.eks. lufttransport eller spedisjon) må det oppfylles spesielle krav til emballasje og merking
(f.eks. de tyske forskriftene ADR). Ved behov kan du konsultere en ekspert for farlig gods ved forberedelse av forsendelsen.
Send batteriene kun hvis huset ikke er skadet. Lim igjen de
åpne kontaktene og pakk batteriet slik at det ikke beveger seg
i emballasjen. Ta også hensyn til eventuelle videregående nasjonale bestemmelser.
Henvend deg til en autorisert sykkelforhandler ved spørsmål
om transport av batteriene. Hos forhandleren kan du også bestille en egnet transportemballasje.
Deponering
Batterier, tilbehør og emballasje skal tilføres en miljøvennlig gjenvinning.
Batteriene må ikke kastes i husholdningsavfallet!
Kun for EU-land:
Iht. det europeiske direktivet 2002/96/EF
om gamle elektriske apparater og iht. det
europeiske direktivet 2006/66/EF må defekte eller oppbrukte batterier/oppladbare
batterier samles inn adskilt og leveres inn til
en miljøvennlig resirkulering.
Lever ubrukelige batterier til en autorisert sykkelforhandler.
Li-ion:
Ta hensyn til informasjonene i avsnittet «Transport», side Norsk–10.
Rett til endringer forbeholdes.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–11
Ladeapparat Charger
Sikkerhetsinformasjon
Les alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser. Feil ved
overholdelsen av sikkerhetsinformasjonene og instruksene
kan forårsake elektrisk støt,
brann og/eller alvorlige skader.
Ta vare på alle sikkerhetsinformasjoner og instrukser for
fremtidig bruk.
I driftsinstruksen brukes uttrykket «Batteri» som gjelder både
for standard-batterier (batterier med holder på sykkelrammen) og bagasjebrett-batterier (batterier med holder på bagasjebrettet).
Hold ladeapparatet unna regn eller fuktighet. Dersom det kommer vann i et ladeapparat, øker risikoen
for elektriske støt.
 Lad kun opp Bosch Li-ion batterier som er godkjent for
el-sykler. Batterispenningen må passe til ladeapparatets batteri-ladespenning. Ellers er det fare for brann og
eksplosjon.
 Hold ladeapparatet rent. Smuss fører til fare for elektriske støt.
 Før hver bruk må du kontrollere ladeapparatet, ledningen og støpselet. Ikke bruk ladeapparatet hvis du registrerer skader. Du må ikke åpne ladeapparatet selv
og la det alltid kun repareres av kvalifisert fagpersonale og kun med originale reservedeler. Skadet ladeapparat, ledning og støpsel øker risikoen for elektriske støt.
 Ikke bruk ladeapparatet på lett brennbar undergrunn
(f. eks. papir, tekstiler etc.) eller i brennbare omgivelser. Ladeapparatet oppvarmes under oppladingen og det
er derfor fare for brann.
 Ved skader på og usakkyndigbruk av batteriet kan
damper slippe ut. Tilfør friskluft og oppsøk lege ved
plager. Damper kan irritere luftveiene.
 Barn må være under oppsyn. Slik kan du sørge for at barn
ikke leker med ladeapparatet.
 Barn og personer, som på grunn av sine fysiske, sensoriske eller åndelige evner eller sin uerfarenhet eller
manglende kunnskaper ikke er i stand til å betjene ladeapparatet sikkert, må ikke bruke dette ladeapparatet uten oppsyn eller anvisning av en ansvarlig person.
Ellers er det fare for feil betjening og skader.
 Les og følg sikkerhetsinformasjon og instruksene i
driftsinstruksene til batteri og drivenhet/styreenhet
samt i driftsinstruksen for din el-sykkel.
 På undersiden av ladeapparatet befinner det seg en kort
versjon av viktige sikkerhetsinstrukser på engelsk, fransk
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
og spansk (merket med nummer 33 på bildet på illustrasjonssiden) og med følgende innhold:
– Ta hensyn til bruksanvisningen for sikker bruk. Fare for
elektrisk støt.
– Må kun brukes i tørre omgivelser.
– Lad kun batterier til Bosch el-sykkel-systemet. Andre
batterier kan eksplodere og forårsake skader.
– Skift ikke ut nettledningen. Det er fare for brann og eksplosjon.
Produkt- og ytelsesbeskrivelse
Illustrerte komponenter (se side 6–7)
Nummereringen av de illustrerte komponentene gjelder for
bildet av ladeapparatet på illustrasjonssiden.
20 Bagasjebrett-batteri
21 Batteri-ladeindikator
26 Standard-batteri
29 Ladeapparat
30 Apparatkontakt
31 Apparatstøpsel
32 Ventilasjonsåpninger
33 Sikkerhetsinformasjoner ladeapparat
34 Ladestøpsel
35 Kontakt for ladestøpsel
Tekniske data
Ladeapparat
Produktnummer
Nominell spenning
Frekvens
Batteri-ladespenning
Ladestrøm
Godkjent ladetemperaturområde
Oppladingstid
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Antall battericeller
Driftstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Vekt tilsvarende EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Beskyttelsestype
V~
Hz
V
A
°C
h
h
°C
°C
kg
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
0...+40
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0,8
IP 40
Informasjonene gjelder for nominell spenning [U] på 230 V. Ved avvikende spenning og på visse nasjonale modeller kan disse informasjonene variere noe.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Norsk–12
Bruk
Årsak
Utbedring
Tre LEDer på batteriet
blinker
 Plasser batteriet kun på rene flater. Unngå spesielt at ladekontakten og andre kontakter tilsmusses, f.eks. av sand
eller jord.
Igangsetting
Tilkopling av ladeapparat (se bildene E–F)
 Ta hensyn til strømspenningen! Spenningen til strømkilden må stemme overens med angivelsene på ladeapparatets typeskilt. Ladeapparater som er merket med 230 V
kan også brukes med 220 V.
Sett apparatstøpselet 31 til nettledningen i apparatkontakten
30 på ladeapparatet.
Koble nettledningen (avhengig av landet) til strømnettet.
Slå av batteriet og ta det ut av holderen på el-sykkelen. Les og
følg til dette driftsinstruksen for batteriet.
Sett ladestøpselet 34 til ladeapparatet inn i kontakten 35 på
batteriet.
Opplading
Oppladingen begynner så snart ladeapparatet er forbundet
med batteriet og strømnettet.
Merk: Oppladingen er kun mulig når temperaturen på batteriet befinner seg i tillatt ladetemperaturområde.
Under oppladingen lyser LEDene på ladetilstandsindikatoren
21 på batteriet. Hver varig lysende LED tilsvarer ca. 20 % kapasitet på oppladingen. Den blinkende LEDen anviser oppladingen til de neste 20 %.
 Vær forsiktig hvis du berører ladeapparatet i løpet av
oppladingen. Bruk vernehansker. Ladeapparatet kan
varmes sterkt opp, spesielt ved høye omgivelsestemperaturer.
Merk: Pass på at ladeapparatet er godt ventilert i løpet av
oppladingen og at ladeåpningene 32 på begge sider ikke er tildekket.
Batteriet er fullstendig oppladet når alle fem LEDene på indikatoren 21 lyser kontinuerlig. Oppladingen avbrytes automatisk.
Kople ladeapparatet fra strømnettet og batteriet fra ladeapparatet.
Når batteries koples fra ladeapparatet slås batteriet automatisk av.
Du kan nå sette batteriet inn i el-sykkelen.
Feil – Årsaker og utbedring
Årsak
Utbedring
To LEDer på batteriet
blinker
Batteriet er defekt
Henvend deg til autorisert
sykkelforhandler
Bosch eBike Systems
Batteriet er for varmt eller for Kople ladeapparatet fra batkaldt
teriet og la det tempereres til
ladetemperaturområdet er
oppnådd
Kople batteriet først til ladeapparatet når det har oppnådd den tillatte ladetemperaturen.
Ingen opplading mulig (ingen visning på batteriet)
Støpselet er ikke satt riktig Sjekk alle stikkforbindelsene
inn
Kontaktene på batteriet er til- Rengjør kontaktene på battesmusset
riet forsiktig
Ventilasjonsåpningene 32 på Rengjør ventilasjonsåpningeladeapparatet er tettet eller ne 32 og plasser ladeapparatildekket
tet slik at det er godt ventilert
Stikkontakt, ledning eller la- Sjekk nettspenningen, la ladeapparat er defekt
deapparatet kontrolleres av
en sykkel-forhandler
Henvend deg til autorisert
Batteriet er defekt
sykkelforhandler
Service og vedlikehold
Vedlikehold og rengjøring
Hvis ladeapparatet skulle svikte, må du henvende deg til en
autorisert sykkel-forhandler.
Kundeservice og kunderådgivning
Hvis du har spørsmål om ladeapparatet, må du henvende deg
til en autorisert sykkel-forhandler.
Kontaktinformasjoner til autoriserte sykkelforhandlere finner
du på internettsiden www.bosch-ebike.com
Deponering
Ladeapparater, tilbehør og emballasje må leveres inn til miljøvennlig gjenvinning.
Ikke kast ladeapparater i vanlig søppel!
Kun for EU-land:
Jf. det europeiske direktivet 2002/96/EF
vedr. gamle elektriske og elektroniske apparater og tilpassingen til nasjonale lover
må gamle ladeapparater som ikke lenger
kan brukes samles inn og leveres inn til en
miljøvennlig resirkulering.
Rett til endringer forbeholdes.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–1
Käyttövoimayksikkö Drive Unit Speed/
Käyttötietokone Intuvia
Turvallisuusohjeita
Lue kaikki turvallisuus- ja käyttöohjeet. Turvallisuus- ja käyttöohjeiden noudattamisen laiminlyönti saattaa johtaa sähköiskuun, tulipaloon ja/tai vakavaan loukkaantumiseen.
Säilytä kaikki turvallisuus- ja käyttöohjeet myöhempää
käyttöä varten.
Tässä käyttöohjeessa käytetty käsite ”akku” viittaa sekä vakioakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on polkupyörän rungossa),
että tavaratelineakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on tavaratelineessä).
 Älä avaa käyttövoimayksikköä itse. Käyttövoimayksikkö on huoltovapaa, sen saa korjata ainoastaan ammattitaitoiset henkilöt, alkuperäisiä varaosia käyttäen. Täten varmistat, että käyttövoimayksikkö säilyy turvallisena.
Takuun voimassaolo loppuu jos käyttövoimayksikkö avataan luvatta.
 Kaikkia käyttövoimayksikköön asennettuja osia ja
kaikkia muita eBike:n käyttövoiman osia (esim. ketjupyörä, ketjupyörän kiinnitin, polkimet) saa vaihtaa ainoastaan rakenteeltaan samanlaisiin tai polkupyörän
valmistajan erityisesti sinun eBike:si sallittuihin osiin.
Täten käyttövoimayksikkö suojataan ylikuormalta ja vaurioitumiselta.
 Irrota akku eBike:sta ennen kaikkia siihen kohdistuvia
töitä (esim. asennus, huolto jne.) sekä kun kuljetat
eBike:a autolla, lentokoneessa tai säilytät sitä. Käynnistyskytkimen tahaton painallus aikaansaa loukkaantumisvaaran.
 Toimintoa liikkeellelähtöapu saa käyttää ainoastaan
eBike:n liikkeellelähdössä. Jos eBike:n pyörät eivät kosketa maata liikkeellelähtöapua käytettäessä, on olemassa
loukkaantumisvaara.
 Käytä ainoastaan alkuperäisiä Bosch-akkuja, joita valmistaja sallii sinun eBike:ssa. Muiden akkujen käyttö
saattaa johtaa loukkaantumiseen ja tulipaloon. Muita akkuja käytettäessä takuu raukeaa eikä Bosch ota mitään vastuuta.
 Noudata kaikkia kansallisia eBike:n hyväksyntään ja
käyttöön liittyviä määräyksiä.
 Lue ja noudata akun ja eBike:si käyttöohjeiden turvallisuus- ja muita ohjeita.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Tuotekuvaus
Määräyksenmukainen käyttö
Käyttövoimayksikkö on tarkoitettu ainoastaan polkupyöräsi
käyttövoimaksi, eikä sitä saa käyttää muihin tarkoituksiin.
eBike on tarkoitettu käytettäväksi päällystetyillä teillä. Sitä ei
saa käyttää kilpailuissa.
Kuvassa olevat osat
(katso sivu 2–3)
Kuvassa olevien osien numerointi viittaa grafiikkasivussa oleviin kuviin.
Kaikki polkupyörän osien kuvat, käyttövoimayksikköä, käyttötietokonetta käyttöyksikköineen, nopeustunnistinta ja niihin
kuuluvia pidikkeitä lukuun ottamatta, ovat kaavamaisia ja ne
voivat poiketa sinun eBike:ssa.
1 Näyttötoiminnon painike ”i”
2 Valaistuksen painike
3 Käyttötietokone
4 Käyttötietokoneen pidike
5 Käyttötietokoneen käynnistyspainike
6 Nollauspainike ”RESET”
7 USB-liitäntä
8 USB-liitännän suojakansi
9 Käyttövoimayksikkö
10 Käyttöyksikkö
11 Näyttötoiminnon painike ”i” käyttöyksikössä
12 Arvon alennus/alaspäin selailun painike ” –”
13 Arvon korotus/ylöspäin selailun painike ”+”
14 Liikkeellelähtöavun painike ”WALK”
15 Käyttötietokoneen lukitus
16 Käyttötietokoneen lukitusruuvi
17 Nopeusanturi
18 Nopeusanturin puolamagneetti
Käyttötietokoneen näyttöelimet
a Moottoritehon näyttö
b Tehostustason näyttö
c Tekstinäyttö
d Arvonnäyttö
e Nopeusmittarin näyttö
f Akun lataustilan näyttö
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–2
Tekniset tiedot
Käyttövoimayksikkö
Tuotenumero
Teho
Vääntömomentti voiman
ulosotossa maks.
Nimellisjännite
Käyttölämpötila
Varastointilämpötila
Suojaus
Paino n.
Käyttötietokone
Tuotenumero
USB-liitännän maks. latausvirta
USB-liitännän latausjännite
Käyttölämpötila
Varastointilämpötila
Suojaus
Paino n.
Valaistus*
Nimellisjännite
Teho
– Etuvalo
– Takavalo
W
Drive Unit Speed
0 275 007 003
350
Nm
V
°C
°C
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (pöly- ja roiskevesisuojattu)
kg
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
V
°C
°C
500
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (pöly- ja roiskevesisuojattu)
kg
0,15
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* lainsäädöstä riippuen ei eBike:n akun kautta toimiva valaistus ole mahdollinen kaikissa maakohtaisissa malleissa
Asennus
Akun asennus ja irrotus
Lue ja noudata akun käyttöohjetta koskien akun asentamista
ja irrotusta eBike:sta.
Käyttötietokoneen asennus ja irrotus
(katso kuva A)
Asenna käyttötietokone 3 työntämällä se edestäpäin pidikkeeseen 4.
Irrota käyttötietokone 3 painamalla lukitusta 15 ja työntämällä se eteenpäin irti pidikkeestä 4.
 Poista käyttötietokone pysäköidystä eBike:sta, jotta
sivullinen ei luvattomasti voi käyttää käyttölaitetta. Ilman käyttötietokonetta eBike-järjestelmää ei voida käynnistää.
Bosch eBike Systems
On myös mahdollista estää käyttötietokoneen irrotus pidikkeestä. Irrota sitä varten pidike 4 ohjaustangosta. Aseta käyttötietokone pidikkeeseen. Kierrä lukitusruuvi 16 alhaaltapäin
sitä varten olevaan pidikkeen kierteeseen. Asenna pidike takaisin ohjaustankoon.
Nopeusanturin tarkistus (katso kuva B)
Nopeusanturin 17 ja siihen kuuluvan puolamagneetin 18 tulee olla niin asennettuja, että pyörän pyöriessä yhden kierroksen puolamagneetti liikkuu nopeusanturin ohi vähintään
5 mm ja korkeintaan 17 mm etäisyydellä.
Huomio: Jos etäisyys nopeusanturista 17 puolamagneettiin
18 on liian pieni tai liian suuri tahi, jos nopeusanturi 17 on liitetty väärin, jää nopeusmittarin näyttö e puuttumaan ja eBikekäyttölaite toimii hätäkäyntiohjelmassa.
Avaa tässä tapauksessa puolamagneetin 18 ruuvi ja kiinnitä
puolamagneetti puolaan (pinnaan) niin, että se ohittaa nopeusanturin merkintää oikealla etäisyydellä. Jos nopeusmittarin
näyttö e ei vielä tämänkään jälkeen näytä nopeutta, käänny
valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen.
Käyttö
Käyttöönotto
Edellytykset
eBike-järjestelmä voidaan aktivoida vain, jos seuraavat edellytykset täyttyvät:
– riittävästi ladattu akku on asennettuna (katso akun käyttöohje).
– Käyttötietokone on asennettu pidikkeeseen oikealla tavalla (katso ”Käyttötietokoneen asennus ja irrotus”, sivu
Suomi–2).
– Nopeusanturi on liitetty oikein (katso ”Nopeusanturin tarkistus”, sivu Suomi–2).
eBike-järjestelmän käynnistys ja pysäytys
eBike-järjestelmän käynnistykseen sinulla on seuraavat
mahdollisuudet:
– eBike-järjestelmä käynnistyy automaattisesti, jos käyttötietokone jo on kytkettynä, kun se asennetaan pidikkeeseen.
– Paina asennetulla käyttötietokoneella ja asennetulla akulla
kerran lyhyesti käyttötietokoneen käynnistyspainiketta 5.
– Paina asennetulla käyttötietokoneella akun käynnistyspainiketta (katso akun käyttöohje).
Huomio: eBike:n polkimia ei saa kuormittaa kun eBike-järjestelmä käynnistetään, muuten se rajoittaa moottoritehoa.
Tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy vikailmoitus ”Release pedal” (vapauta poljin).
Jos eBike-järjestelmä vahingossa käynnistetään kun polkimia
kuormitetaan, se kytkeytyy pois päältä ja sitten uudelleen
päälle, kun kuormitus poistuu.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–3
Käyttölaite aktivoituu heti kun painat poljinta (paitsi liikkeellelähtöaputoiminnassa, katso ”Liikkeellelähtöavun käynnistys
ja pysäytys”, sivu Suomi–3). Moottorin teho riippuu käyttötietokoneeseen tehdyistä asetuksista.
Heti kun normaalikäytössä lopetat paineen polkimelta tai heti,
kun olet saavuttanut nopeuden 45 km/h, eBike-käyttölaite
kytkee tehostuksen pois päältä. Käyttölaite aktivoituu uudelleen heti, kun painat poljinta ja nopeus on alle 45 km/h.
eBike-järjestelmän pysäyttämiseen sinulla on seuraavat
mahdollisuudet:
– paina käyttötietokoneen käynnistyspainiketta 5:
– Kytke akku pois sen käynnistyspainikkeella (katso akun
käyttöohje).
– Ota käyttötietokone ulos pidikkeestä.
Jos 10 minuutin aikana ei käyttövoimaa käytetä (esim. koska
eBike on paikallaan), eikä mitään käyttötietokoneen tai käyttöyksikön painiketta paineta, akku kytkeytyy automaattisesti
pois päältä energian säästämiseksi.
Käyttötietokoneen näytöt ja asetukset
Käyttötietokoneen energiahuolto
Jos käyttötietokone on pidikkeessä 4 ja eBike:en on asetettu
riittävästi ladattu akku, eBike-järjestelmä saa energiansa eBike:n akusta.
Jos käyttötietokone poistetaan pidikkeestä 4, sen energiahuolto tapahtuu sisäisestä akusta. Jos sisäinen akku on heikko kun käyttötietokone käynnistetään, tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy kolmeksi sekunniksi teksti ”Attach to bike” (yhdistä
polkupyörään). Tämän jälkeen käyttötietokone taas pysähtyy.
Sisäisen akun lataat asettamalla käyttötietokone takaisin pidikkeeseen 4 (kun eBike:ssa on akku). Kytke akku päälle sen
käynnistyspainikkeella (katso akun käyttöohje).
Voit ladata käyttötietokoneen myös USB-liitännän kautta.
Avaa suojakansi 8. Liitä käyttötietokoneen USB-liitin 7 sopivalla USB-johdolla yleismalliseen USB-latauslaitteeseen tai
tietokoneen USB-liitäntään (5 V latausjännite; maks. 500 mA
latausvirta). Käyttötietokoneen tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy
”USB connected” (liitetty USB-liitäntään).
Käyttötietokoneen käynnistys/pysäytys
Käynnistä käyttötietokone painamalla lyhyesti käynnistyspainiketta 5. Käyttötietokoneen voi (riittävästi ladatulla sisäisellä akulla) käynnistää myös, kun se ei ole pidikkeessä.
Pysäytä käyttötietokone painamalla käynnistyspainiketta 5.
Jos käyttötietokone ei ole pidikkeessä, kytkeytyy se ilman
painikkeiden painallusta automaattisesti pois päältä 1:n minuutin kuluttua energian säästämiseksi.
Akun lataustilan näyttö
Akun lataustilan näyttö f osoittaa eBike:n akun varaustilanteen, ei käyttötietokoneen sisäisen akun varausta. eBikeakun varaustilanne voidaan myös nähdä itse akun LED:eistä.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Näytössä f jokainen akkutunnuksen palkki vastaa noin 20 %
kapasiteetistä:
100 % … 80 % kapasiteetti
20 % ... 5 % kapasiteetti, lataa akku.
Alle 5 % kapasiteetti, käyttölaitteen tehostus ei
enää toimi. Akun lataustilan näytön LED:it sammuvat.
Jos eBike-valaistus käyttää akkua (maakohtainen), kapasiteetti riittää vielä 2 tunnin valaistukseen, kun tyhjän akun tunnus ilmestyy ensimmäisen kerran. Kun tunnus alkaa vilkkua,
toimii valaistus enää vähän aikaa.
Jos käyttötietokone poistetaan pidikkeestä 4, akun viimeisin
osoitettu varaustilanne säilyy muistissa.
Tehostustason asetus
Käyttötietokoneen avulla voit säätää kuinka paljon eBikekäyttölaite tehostaa polkemista. Tehostustasoa voi milloin
vain, myös ajon aikana, muuttaa.
Huomio: Yksittäisissä malleissa on mahdollista, että tehostustaso on valmiiksi asetettu, jolloin sitä ei voi muuttaa. On
myös mahdollista, että valittavissa on tässä esitettyä vähemmän tehostustasoja.
Käytettävissä on korkeintaan seuraavat tehostustasot:
– ”OFF”: Käyttölaite on poiskytkettynä, Bike:a voidaan polkea tavallisen pyörän tavoin ilman tehostusta.
– ”ECO”: aktiivinen tehostus suurimmalla tehokkuudella
suurinta mahdollista toimintamatkaa varten
– ”TOUR”: tasainen tehostus pitkiä toimintamatkoja varten
– ”SPORT”: voimakas tehostus urheilulliseen ajoon mäkisillä
osuuksilla sekä kaupunkiliikenteeseen
– ”TURBO”: suurin tehostus suurella poljinnopeudella urheilulliseen ajoon
Nosta tehostustasoa painamalla käyttöyksikön painiketta ”+”
13 niin monta kertaa, että haluttu tehostustaso ilmestyy näyttöön b. Alenna tehostustasoa painamalla painiketta ” –” 12.
Moottorin kyseinen teho ilmestyy näyttöön a. Moottorin suurin mahdollinen teho riippuu valitusta tehostustasosta.
Tehostustaso
”ECO”
”TOUR”
”SPORT”
”TURBO”
Moottorin teho*
(Ketjukytkentä)
30 %
100 %
180 %
250 %
* Moottorin teho saattaa poiketa yksittäisissä malleissa.
Jos käyttötietokone poistetaan pidikkeestä 4, viimeisin osoitettu tehostustaso säilyy muistissa, moottoritehon näyttö a
pysyy tyhjänä.
Liikkeellelähtöavun käynnistys ja pysäytys
Liikkeellelähtöapu voi toimia lisätehostuksena ensimmäisillä
metreillä, jos liikkeellelähtö on vaikeutunut (kuten esim, liikennevaloissa tai ylämäessä).
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–4
 Toimintoa liikkeellelähtöapu saa käyttää ainoastaan
eBike:n liikkeellelähdössä. Jos eBike:n pyörät eivät kosketa maata liikkeellelähtöapua käytettäessä, on olemassa
loukkaantumisvaara.
Käynnistä liikkeellelähtöapu painamalla käyttöyksikön painiketta ”WALK” 14, ja pitämällä se painettuna. eBike:n käyttölaite käynnistyy.
Liikkeellelähtöapu kytkeytyy pois päältä heti, kun jokin seuraavista tapahtuu:
– päästät painikkeen”WALK” 14 vapaaksi,
– painat käyttötietokoneen jotain muuta painiketta,
– poljet eteenpäin tai nopeasti taaksepäin,
– eBike:n pyörät lukkiutuvat (esim. jarruttamalla tai törmäämällä esteeseen),
– nopeus ylittää 18 km/h.
Valaistuksen kytkentä päälle ja pois päältä
Riippuen maakohtaisista määräyksistä on olemassa kaksi
mahdollista toteutusta valaistukselle:
– Käyttötietokoneen kautta voidaan etuvalo, takavalo ja näytön taustavalaistus samanaikaisesti kytkeä päälle ja pois
päältä.
Tässä toteutuksessa tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy n. 1 s ajaksi
”Lights on” (valot sytytetty), kun valaistus kytketään päälle ja ”Lights off” (valot sammutettu), kun valaistus kytketään pois päältä.
– Vain näytön taustavalaistus voidaan kytkeä päälle ja pois
päältä, eBike:n etu- ja takavalo ovat riippumattomia käyttötietokoneesta.
Paina kummassakin versiossa painiketta 2 Valaistuksen kytkeminen päälle ja pois päältä.
Nopeus- ja etäisyysnäytöt
Nopeusmittarin näytössä e näkyy aina senhetkinen nopeus.
Toiminnon näytössä (tekstinäytön c ja arvonäytön d yhdistelmä) voidaan valita seuraavista toiminnoista:
– ”Range” (toimintamatka): todennäköinen toimintamatka
akun senhetkisellä varauksella (olosuhteiden kuten tehostustason, matkan profiilin jne. säilyessä samanlaisina)
– ”Distance” (matka): viimeisestä nollauksesta kuljettu
matka
– ”Trip time” (ajoaika): ajoaika edellisestä nollauksesta
– ”Avg. Speed” (keskinopeus):viimeisimmän nollauksen
jälkeen saavutettu keskinopeus
– ”Max. Speed” (suurin nopeus): viimeisimmän nollauksen
jälkeen saavutettu suurin nopeus
– ”Clock” (kelloaika): kyseinen kelloaika
Paina näyttötoiminnon vaihtamiseksi käyttötietokoneen
painiketta ”i” 1 tai käyttöyksikön painiketta ”i” 11 niin monta
kertaa, että haluttu toiminto näkyy näytössä.
Nollaa Reset ”Distance” (matka), ”Trip time” (ajoaika) ja
”Avg. Speed” (keskinopeus) vaihtamalla johonkin näistä kolmesta toiminnoista ja painamalla sitten painiketta ”RESET” 6
kunnes näytössä on nolla. Tällöin myös kahden muun toiminnon arvot nollantuvat.
Bosch eBike Systems
Nollaa ”Max. Speed” (suurin nopeus) vaihtamalla tähän toimintoon ja painamalla sitten painiketta ”RESET” 6 kunnes
näytössä on nolla.
Jos käyttötietokone poistetaan pidikkeestä 4, säilyy kaikkien
toimintojen arvot muistissa ja ovat edelleen näytettävissä.
Perussäätöjen näyttö/sovitus
Perussäätöjen näyttö ja muutokset ovat mahdollisia siitä riippumatta, onko käyttötietokone pidikkeessä 4 tai ei.
Pääset perussäätöjen valikkoon painamalla samanaikaisesti
painiketta ”RESET” 6 ja painiketta ”i” 1, kunnes tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy ”Configuration” (asetukset).
Paina perussäätöjen vaihtamiseksi käyttötietokoneen painiketta ”i” 1, niin monta kertaa, että haluttu perussäätö näkyy
näytössä. Jos käyttötietokone on pidikkeessä 4, voit painaa
myös käyttöyksikön painiketta ”i” 11.
Paina perussäätöjen muuttamiseksi pienemmiksi tai alaspäin selataksesi käynnistyspainiketta 5 näytön ” –” vieressä,
suuremmiksi tai ylöspäin selataksesi valaistuksen painiketta
2 näytön ”+” vieressä.
Jos käyttötietokone on pidikkeessä 4, on muutos mahdollinen myös käyttöyksikön painikkeilla ” –” 12 tai ”+” 13.
Poistu toiminnosta ja tallenna muutettu säätö painamalla painiketta ”RESET” 6 3 s ajan.
Seuraavista perussäädöistä voit valita:
– ”unit km/mi” (yksikkö km/mi): voit valita näytön nopeusja matkayksiköksi kilometrin tai mailin.
– ”time format” (aikamuoto): voit valita kelloajan muodoksi 12-tunnin tai 24 tunnin näytön.
– ”clock” (kelloaika): voit asettaa oikean kelloajan. Säätöpainikkeiden pitempi painallus nopeuttaa kelloajan muutoksen.
– ”English” (englanti): voit muuttaa tekstinäytön kielen.
Vaihtoehtoiset kielet ovat saksa, englanti, ranska, espanja,
italia ja hollanti.
– ”odometer” (matka yhteensä): eBike:lla toistaiseksi kuljettu kokonaismatka (ei muutettavissa)
– ”power-on hours” (käyttöaika yhteensä): eBike:lla toistaiseksi käytetty kokonaisajoaika (ei muutettavissa)
Vikakoodin näyttö
eBike:n osat tarkistetaan koko ajan automaattisesti. Jos vika
todetaan, tekstinäyttöön c ilmestyy vastaava vikakoodi.
Paina mielivaltaista käyttötietokoneen 3 tai käyttöyksikön 10
painiketta palataksesi vakionäyttöön.
Riippuen vian laadusta käyttölaite kytkeytyy tarvittaessa automaattisesti pois päältä. Matkan jatkaminen ilman käyttölaitteen tehostusta on kuitenkin aina mahdollista. Anna tarkista
eBike ennen seuraavia matkoja.
 Jätä kaikki tarkistukset ja korjaukset ainoastaan valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan suoritettaviksi. Jos vika
esiintyy edelleen korjauksistasi huolimatta, käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–5
Koodi
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Syy
käyttövoimayksikön sisäinen vika
ongelmia käyttövoimayksikön liitännöissä
vika nopeusanturissa
ongelmia valaistuksessa
ongelmia käyttötietokoneen liitännöissä
käyttövoimayksikön lämpötila on liian
korkea (yli 40 °C)
Akun sisäinen elektroniikkavika
Akun lämpötila on liian korkea (yli
40 °C)
Akun lämpötila on liian alhainen (alle
–10 °C)
Ongelmia akun liitännöissä
akun väärä napaisuus
Korjaus
anna tarkistaa käyttövoimayksikkö
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
anna tarkistaa nopeusanturi
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
Anna käyttövoimayksikön jäähtyä. Matkan jatkaminen ilman eBike-käyttölaitetta on mahdollista ja se nopeuttaa käyttövoimayksikön jäähtymistä.
anna tarkistaa akku
anna akun jäähtyä. Matkan jatkaminen ilman eBike-käyttölaitetta on
mahdollista ja se nopeuttaa akun jäähtymistä.
anna akun lämmetä hitaasti lämpimässä huoneessa.
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
Lataa akku alkuperäisellä Bosch-latauslaitteella sen käyttöohjeessa
selostetulla tavalla.
Yksi tai useampi käyttötietokoneen
Tarkista ovatko painikkeet jumissa esim. sisään päässeen lian takia.
painike on lukkiutunut.
Puhdista painikkeet tarvittaessa.
Käyttöyksikön yhteydessä ongelma
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
Käyttöyksikön yksi tai useampi painike Tarkista ovatko painikkeet jumissa esim. sisään päässeen lian takia.
on lukkiutunut.
Puhdista painikkeet tarvittaessa.
ongelmia käyttövoimayksikön liitän- anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
nöissä
Ongelmia akun liitännöissä
anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
Komponenttien välinen kommunikaa- anna tarkistaa liitokset ja kytkennät
tiovika
Käyttötietokoneen sisäinen akku on lataa käyttötietokone (pidikkeessä tai USB-liitännän kautta)
tyhjä
käyttötietokoneen sisäinen vika
anna tarkistaa käyttötietokone
* vain jos eBike-valaistus tulee akusta (maakohtainen)
Ulkoisten laitteiden energiahuolto USB-liitännän
kautta
USB-liitännän avulla voidaan käyttää tai ladata useimmat laitteet, joiden energiahuolto USB:n kautta on mahdollinen
(esim. eräät matkapuhelimet).
Latauksen edellytyksenä on, että käyttötietokone ja riittävästi
ladattu akku on asennettu eBike:en.
Avaa käyttötietokoneen USB-liitännän suojakansi 8. Liitä ulkoisen laitteen USB-liitäntä sopivan USB-johdon avulla käyttötietokoneen USB-liitäntään 7.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Ajovihjeitä eBike-järjestelmän käyttöön
Milloin eBike-käyttölaite toimii?
eBike-käyttölaite tehostaa ajoa aina, kun poljet. Polkematta
tehostus ei toimi. Moottorin teho riippuu aina siitä voimasta,
jolla poljet.
Kun käytät vähän voimaa, tehostus on pienempi kuin paljon voimaa käyttäessäsi. Tämä pätee riippumatta tehostustasosta.
eBike-käyttölaite kytkeytyy automaattisesti pois yli 45 km/h
nopeudessa. Kun nopeus putoaa alle 45 km/h, käyttölaite on
automaattisesti taas käytettävissä.
Liikkeellelähtöaputoiminnon poikkeuksena on eBike:n ajaminen pienellä nopeudella polkematta.
Voit myös milloin vain ajaa eBike:a ilman tehostusta kuten tavallista polkupyörää, joko kytkemällä eBike-järjestelmä pois
päältä tai asettamalla tehostustaso asentoon ”OFF”. Sama
koskee tilannetta, jolloin akku on tyhjä.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–6
eBike-järjestelmän yhteispeli vaihteiden kanssa
Käytä vaihteita kuten tavallisessa polkupyörässä myös eBikekäyttölaiteen kanssa (noudata eBike:n käyttöohjetta).
Kaikessa vaihtamisessa on suositeltavaa hetkeksi keskeyttää
polkeminen vaihtamisen ajaksi. Tällöin vaihtaminen on helpompaa ja voimansiirron kuluminen on pienempi.
Valitsemalla vaihde oikein voit nostaa nopeutta ja pidentää
toimintamatkaa käyttövoimaa lisäämättä.
Ensimmäisten kokemusten hankkiminen
On suositeltavaa hankkia ensimmäiset kokemukset eBike:n
kanssa muualla kuin vilkkaasti liikennöidyillä kaduilla.
Kokeile erilaisia tehostustasoja. Kun olet saavuttanut varmuuden, voit käyttää eBike:a liikenteessä, kuten mitä tahansa polkupyörää.
Kokeile eBike:si toimintamatkaa erilaisissa olosuhteissa, ennen kuin suunnittelet pitkiä, vaativia matkoja.
Toimintamatkaan vaikuttavat tekijät
Toimintamatkaan vaikuttavat kuitenkin monet tekijät, kuten
esimerkiksi:
– tehostustaso
– vaihteiden valinta,
– rengasmalli ja renkaiden ilmanpaine,
– akun ikä ja hoitotila,
– matkan profiili (nousut) ja tien ominaisuus (päällystys),
– vastatuuli ja ympäristön lämpötila,
– eBike:n, pyöräilijän ja matkatavaran paino.
Tämän takia ei ole mahdollista ennustaa toimintamatkaa konkreettisesti ennen liikkeellelähtöä. Yleisesti pätee kuitenkin:
– eBike:n käyttölaitteen samalla moottoriteholla: mitä vähemmän voimaa käytät määrätyn nopeuden saavuttamiseksi (esim. vaihtamalla optimaalisesti), sitä vähemmän
energiaa eBike:n käyttölaite kuluttaa, ja sitä pidemmälle
pääset yhdellä akun latauksella.
– Mitä suuremman tehostustaseen valitset muuten samanlaisissa olosuhteissa, sitä lyhyemmäksi muodostuu toimintamatka.
eBike:n hoito ja käsittely
Ota huomioon eBike-osien käyttö- ja varastointilämpötilat.
Suojaa käyttövoimayksikkö, käyttötietokone ja akku äärimmäiseltä lämpötilalta (esim. suoralta auringonpaisteelta ilman
samanaikaista tuuletusta). Osat (erityisesti akku) voivat vaurioitua äärimmäisestä lämpötilasta.
Hoito ja huolto
Huolto ja asiakasneuvonta
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen kaikissa
eBike-järjestelmään ja sen osiin liittyvissä kysymyksissä.
Valtuutettujen polkupyöräkauppiaiden yhteystiedot löydät internetsivulta www.bosch-ebike.com
Kuljetus
Akut ovat vaara-ainelain määräysten alaisia. Yksityinen käyttäjä saa kuljettaa akkuja kadulla ilman erikoistoimenpiteitä.
Ammattimaisessa kuljetuksessa tai toimitettaessa sivullisen
kautta (esim.: lentorahti tai huolinta) on noudatettava pakkausta ja merkintää koskevia erikoisvaatimuksia (esim. ADR:n
määräyksiä). Tällöin voi tarvittaessa käyttää vaara-aineasiantuntijaa lähetyksen valmistelussa.
Lähetä akkuja ainoastaan, jos kotelo on vaurioitumaton. Teippaa avoimet liittimet ja pakkaa akku niin, että se ei pääse liikkumaan pakkauksessa. Ota myös huomioon mahdolliset tarkemmat kansalliset määräykset.
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen akun kuljetukseen liittyvissä kysymyksissä. Kauppiaalta voit myös tilata
sopivan kuljetuspakkauksen.
Hävitys
Käyttövoimayksikkö, käyttötietokone käyttöyksikköineen, akku, nopeusanturi, lisätarvikkeet ja pakkaukset tulee toimittaa ympäristöystävälliseen uusiokäyttöön.
Älä heitä eBike:a tai sen osia talousjätteisiin!
Vain EU-maita varten:
Eurooppalaisen direktiivin 2002/96/EY
mukaan käyttökelvottomat sähkölaitteet ja
eurooppalaisen direktiivin 2006/66/EY
mukaan vialliset tai loppuun käytetyt
akut/paristot täytyy kerätä erikseen ja toimittaa ympäristöystävälliseen kierrätykseen.
Käyttötietokoneen sisäänrakennetun akun saa irrottaa ainoastaan hävitystä varten. Kotelon avaaminen saattaa tuhota
käyttötietokoneen.
Luovuta käytöstä poistetut akut ja käyttötietokoneet valtuutetulle polkupyöräkauppiaalle.
Litiumioni:
Katso ohjeita kappaleessa ”Kuljetus”,
sivu Suomi–6.
Huolto ja puhdistus
Pidä eBike:si osat puhtaana, etenkin akun liittimet ja pidike.
Puhdista niitä varovasti kostealla, pehmeällä liinalla.
Mitään osaa (käyttövoimayksikkö mukaan luettuna) ei saa
upottaa veteen tai puhdistaa painepesurilla.
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen eBike:n
huoltoa ja korjauksia varten.
Bosch eBike Systems
Oikeus teknisiin muutoksiin pidätetään.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–7
Litiumioniakku Powerpack
Turvallisuusohjeita
Lue kaikki turvallisuus- ja
käyttöohjeet. Turvallisuus- ja
käyttöohjeiden noudattamisen laiminlyönti saattaa johtaa
sähköiskuun, tulipaloon ja/tai
vakavaan loukkaantumiseen.
Säilytä kaikki turvallisuusohjeet ja käyttöohjeet myöhempää käyttöä varten.
Tässä käyttöohjeessa käytetty käsite ”akku” viittaa sekä vakioakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on polkupyörän rungossa),
että tavaratelineakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on tavaratelineen alla) paitsi, jos nimenomaan viitataan rakenteeseen.
 Irrota akku eBike:sta ennen kaikkia siihen kohdistuvia
töitä (esim. asennus, huolto jne.) sekä kun kuljetat
eBike:a autolla, lentokoneessa tai säilytät sitä. Käynnistyskytkimen tahaton painallus aikaansaa loukkaantumisvaaran.
 Älä avaa akkua. On olemassa oikosulun vaara. Jos akku on
avattu, takuu raukeaa.
Suojaa akku kuumuudelta (esim. myös pitkäaikaiselta auringonpaisteelta), tulelta ja veteen
upotukselta. On olemassa räjähdysvaara.
 Pidä irrallista akkua loitolla paperinliittimistä, kolikoista, avaimista, nauloista, ruuveista tai muista pienistä
metalliesineistä, jotka voivat oikosulkea akun koskettimet. Akkukoskettimien välinen oikosulku saattaa aiheuttaa palovammoja tai johtaa tulipaloon. Bosch hylkää aina
tässä yhteydessä syntyneiden oikosulkuvahinkojen takuuvaatimukset.
 Väärästä käytöstä johtuen saattaa akusta vuotaa nestettä. Vältä koskettamasta nestettä. Huuhtele vedellä,
jos vahingossa kosketat nestettä. Jos nestettä pääsee
silmiin, tarvitaan tämän lisäksi lääkärin apua. Akusta
vuotava neste saattaa aiheuttaa ärsytystä ja palovammoja.
 Jos akku vaurioituu tai sitä käytetään asiaankuulumattomalla tavalla, saattaa siitä purkautua höyryjä. Tuuleta raikkaalla ilmalla ja hakeudu lääkärin luo, jos haittoja ilmenee. Höyryt voivat ärsyttää hengitysteitä.
 Lataa akku ainoastaan alkuperäisillä Bosch-latauslaitteilla. Käytettäessä muita kuin Boschin alkuperäisiä latauslaitteita ei tulipalovaaraa voi sulkea pois.
 Käytä akkua ainoastaan yhdessä eBike:n ja alkuperäisien Boschin eBike käyttölaitteiden kanssa. Vain täten
suojaat akkua vaaralliselta ylikuormitukselta.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Käytä ainoastaan alkuperäisiä Bosch-akkuja, joita valmistaja sallii sinun eBike:ssa. Muiden akkujen käyttö
saattaa johtaa loukkaantumiseen ja tulipaloon. Muita akkuja käytettäessä takuu raukeaa eikä Bosch ota mitään vastuuta.
 Lue ja noudata latauslaitteen ja käyttövoimayksikön/käyttötietokoneen sekä eBike:si käyttöohjeiden
turvallisuusohjeita.
Tuotekuvaus
Kuvassa olevat osat
(katso sivu 4–5)
Kuvassa olevien osien numerointi viittaa grafiikkasivuissa oleviin kuviin.
Kaikki polkupyörän osien kuvat, akkuja ja niiden pidikkeitä lukuun ottamatta, ovat kaavamaisia ja ne voivat poiketa sinun
eBike:ssa.
19 Tavaratelineakun pidike
20 Tavaratelineakku
21 Käyttö- ja lataustilanäyttö
22 Käynnistyspainike
23 Akkulukon avain
24 Akkulukko
25 Vakioakun yläpidike
26 Vakioakku
27 Vakioakun alapidike
28 Kantohihna
29 Latauslaite
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–8
Tekniset tiedot
Litiumioniakku
Tuotenumero
– Musta vakioakku
– Valkoinen vakioakku
– Tavaratelineakku
Nimellisjännite
Nimellinen kapasiteetti
Energia
Käyttölämpötila
Varastointilämpötila
Sallittu latauslämpötila-alue
Paino n.
Suojaus
Asennus
 Aseta akku vain puhtaalle pinnalle. Vältä etenkin lataushylsyn ja koskettimien likaantumista esim. hiekasta tai
mullasta.
Akun tarkistus ennen ensimmäistä käyttöä
Tarkista akku, ennen kuin lataat sitä ensimmäistä kertaa tai
käytät sitä eBike:ssasi.
Paina käynnistyspainiketta 22 akun kytkemiseksi. Jos lataustilan näytössä 21 ei syty yhtään LED:iä, akku on mahdollisesti
viallinen.
Jos vähintään yksi lataustilan näytön 21 LED syttyy, mutta eivät kaikki, lataa akku täyteen ennen ensimmäistä käyttöä.
 Älä lataa viallista akkua äläkä käytä sitä. Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen.
Akun lataus
 Käytä eBike:n toimitukseen kuuluvaa tai saman rakenteen omaavaa alkuperäistä Bosch latauslaitetta. Vain
tämä latauslaite on sovitettu eBike:ssasi olevalle litiumioniakulle.
Huomio: Akku toimitetaan osittain ladattuna. Jotta akun täysi
teho olisi taattu, lataa akku täyteen latauslaitteessa ennen ensimmäistä käyttöä.
Akku on poistettava eBike:sta latausta varten.
Lue ja noudata akkua ladattaessa latauslaitteen käyttöohjetta.
Akkua voidaan ladata milloin vain, lyhentämättä sen elinikää.
Latauksen keskeytys ei vaurioita akkua.
Akku on varustettu lämpötilanvalvonnalla, joka sallii lataamisen vain akun lämpötilan ollessa välillä 0 °C ja 40 °C.
Bosch eBike Systems
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 300
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 502
36
8,2
300
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (pöly- ja
roiskevesisuojattu)
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 505
36
11
400
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (pöly- ja
roiskevesisuojattu)
Jos akku on latauslämpötilaalueen ulkopuolella, varaustilan
näytön 21 kolme LED:iä vilkkuvat. Irrota akku latauslaitteesta
ja anna sen temperoida.
Liitä akku uudelleen latauslaitteeseen vasta, kun se on saavuttanut sallitun latauslämpötilan.
Lataustilan merkkivalo
Akun lataustilan 21 viisi vihreää LED:iä osoittaa akun varaustilan sen ollessa kytkettynä.
Tällöin jokainen LED vastaa n. 20 % akun kapasiteetista Akun
ollessa täysin ladattu kaikki viisi LED:iä palaa.
Kytketyn akun varaustilan näkee lisäksi käyttötietokoneesta.
Lue ja noudata tätä varten käyttövoimayksikön ja käyttötietokoneen käyttöohjeita.
Jos akun kapasiteetti on alle 5 %, akussa sijaitsevan lataustilan näytön 21 kaikki LED:it sammuvat, käyttötietokoneessa
on kuitenkin vielä näyttötoiminto.
Akun asennus ja irrotus (katso kuvat C–D)
 Kytke aina akku pois päältä ennen kuin asetat sen pidikkeeseen tai otat sen pidikkeestä.
Jotta akku voidaan asentaa, on avaimen 23 oltava lukossa 24
ja lukon oltava avattuna.
Asenna vakioakku 26 asettamalla sen koskettimet eBike:n
alapidikkeeseen 27. Käännä se vasteeseen asti yläpidikkeeseen 25.
Asenna tavaratelineakku 20 työntämällä se koskettimet
edellä vasteeseen asti tavaratelineen pidikkeeseen 19.
Tarkista, että akku on tiukasti paikallaan. Lukitse aina akku lukolla 24, koska lukko muuten saattaa aueta ja akku voi pudota
pidikkeestä.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–9
Poista aina avain 23 lukosta 24 lukitsemisen jälkeen. Täten
estät avaimen putoamasta ja sen, että sivullinen luvattomasti
irrottaa akun pysäköidystä polkupyörästä.
Irrota vakioakku 26 kytkemällä se pois päältä ja avaamalla
lukko avaimella 23. Käännä akku ulos yläpidikkeestä 25 ja vedä se kantohihnaa 28 käyttäen ulos alapidikkeestä 27.
Irrota tavaratelineakku 20 kytkemällä se pois päältä ja avaamalla lukko avaimella 23. Vedä akku ulos pidikkeestä 19.
Käyttö
Käyttöönotto
 Käytä ainoastaan alkuperäisiä Bosch-akkuja, joita valmistaja sallii sinun eBike:ssa. Muiden akkujen käyttö
saattaa johtaa loukkaantumiseen ja tulipaloon. Muita akkuja käytettäessä takuu raukeaa eikä Bosch ota mitään vastuuta.
Käynnistys ja pysäytys
Akun kytkentä on yksi eBike-järjestelmän käynnistyksen mahdollisuuksista. Lue ja noudata tätä varten käyttövoimayksikön
ja käyttötietokoneen käyttöohjeita.
Tarkista ennen akun tai eBike-järjestelmän käynnistämistä,
että lukko 24 on lukittuna.
Huomio: eBike:n polkimia ei saa kuormittaa kun eBike-järjestelmä käynnistetään, muuten se rajoittaa eBike:n käyttölaitteen tehoa.
Kytke akku painamalla käynnistyspainiketta 22. Näytön 21
LED:it syttyvät ja näyttävät samalla varaustilan.
Huomio: Jos akun kapasiteetti on alle 5 %, ei akun lataustilan
näytössä 21 syty yhtään LED-merkkivaloa. Ainoastaan käyttötietokoneesta voi päätellä onko eBike-järjestelmä kytkettynä.
Kytke pois akku painamalla käynnistyspainiketta 22 uudelleen. Näytön 21 LED:it sammuvat. Myös eBike-järjestelmä on
tällöin poiskytkettynä.
Jos 10 minuutin aikana ei eBiken-käyttölaitteen tehoa käytetä
(esim. koska eBike on paikallaan), eikä mitään käyttötietokoneen tai käyttöyksikön painiketta paineta, eBike-järjestelmä
ja siten myös akku kytkeytyvät automaattisesti pois päältä
energian säästämiseksi.
”Elektroninen kennojen suojaus (ECP)” suojaa akkua syväpurkaukselta, ylilataukselta, ylikuumenemiselta ja oikosululta.
Vaaratilanteessa akku kytkeytyy automaattisesti pois suojakytkennän avulla.
Jos akussa todetaan vika, varaustilan näytön 21 kaksi
LED:iä vilkkuu. Käänny tällöin
valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
Ohjeita akun optimaaliseen käsittelyyn
Akun elinikää voidaan pidentää, jos se hoidetaan hyvin ja
etenkin, jos se varastoidaan oikeassa lämpötilassa.
Ikääntymisen myötä akun kapasiteetti pienenee kuitenkin
myös oikein hoidettuna.
Huomattavasti lyhentynyt käyttöaika latauksen jälkeen osoittaa, että akku on loppuun käytetty. Voit vaihtaa akkua.
Jos vakioakun kantohihna 28 on viallinen, anna polkupyöräkauppiaan vaihtaa se uuteen.
Akun lataus ennen varastointia ja sen aikana
Lataa akku ennen pitkää käyttötaukoa noin 60 % kapasiteettiin (3 ... 4 LED:iä palaa lataustilan näytössä 21).
Tarkista varaustilanne 6 kuukauden jälkeen. Jos lataustilan
näytössä 21 palaa enää yksi LED, lataa akku uudelleen n.
60 % kapasiteettiin.
Huomio: Jos akku säilytetään kauan tyhjänä, saattaa se pienestä itsepurkauksesta huolimatta vaurioitua, jolloin varauskyky pienenee huomattavasti.
Ei ole suositeltavaa pitää akkua jatkuvasti kytkettynä latauslaitteeseen.
Varastointivaatimukset
Säilytä akku mahdollisuuksien mukaan kuivassa, hyvin tuuletetussa tilassa. Suojaa akku kosteudelta ja vedeltä. Epäsuotuisissa sääolosuhteissa on esim. suositeltavaa irrottaa akku
eBike:sta ja säilyttää se suljetussa tilassa seuraavaan käyttökertaan asti.
Akku voidaan varastoida lämpötilassa –10 °C ... +60 °C. Pitkää elinikää varten on kuitenkin varastointi n. 20 °C huonelämpötilassa eduksi.
Varmista, ettei suurinta sallittua varastointilämpötilaa ylitetä.
Älä esim. jätä akkua kesällä autoon ja säilytä se poissa suorasta auringonvalosta.
Hoito ja huolto
Huolto ja puhdistus
Pidä akku puhtaana. Puhdista sitä varovasti kostealla, pehmeällä liinalla. Akkua ei saa upottaa veteen tai puhdistaa vesisuihkussa.
Jos akku ei enää toimi, käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen.
Huolto ja asiakasneuvonta
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen kaikissa
akkuun liittyvissä kysymyksissä.
 Merkitse muistiin avaimen 23 valmistaja ja numero.
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen, jos
avain häviää. Ilmoita tällöin avaimen valmistaja ja numero.
Valtuutettujen polkupyöräkauppiaiden yhteystiedot löydät internetsivulta www.bosch-ebike.com
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–10
Kuljetus
Akut ovat vaara-ainelain määräysten alaisia. Yksityinen käyttäjä saa kuljettaa akkuja kadulla ilman erikoistoimenpiteitä.
Ammattimaisessa kuljetuksessa tai toimitettaessa sivullisen
kautta (esim.: lentorahti tai huolinta) on noudatettava pakkausta ja merkintää koskevia erikoisvaatimuksia (esim. ADR:n
määräyksiä). Tällöin voi tarvittaessa käyttää vaara-aineasiantuntijaa lähetyksen valmistelussa.
Lähetä akkuja ainoastaan, jos kotelo on vaurioitumaton. Teippaa avoimet liittimet ja pakkaa akku niin, että se ei pääse liikkumaan pakkauksessa. Ota myös huomioon mahdolliset tarkemmat kansalliset määräykset.
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen akun kuljetukseen liittyvissä kysymyksissä. Kauppiaalta voit myös tilata
sopivan kuljetuspakkauksen.
Hävitys
Toimita akut, lisätarvikkeet ja pakkausmateriaali ympäristöystävälliseen jätteiden kierrätykseen.
Älä heitä akkuja talousjätteisiin!
Vain EU-maita varten:
Eurooppalaisen direktiivin 2002/96/EY
mukaan käyttökelvottomat sähkölaitteet ja
eurooppalaisen direktiivin 2006/66/EY
mukaan vialliset tai loppuun käytetyt
akut/paristot täytyy kerätä erikseen ja toimittaa ympäristöystävälliseen kierrätykseen.
Luovuta käytöstä poistetut akut valtuutetulle polkupyöräkauppiaalle.
Litiumioni:
Katso ohjeita kappaleessa ”Kuljetus”,
sivu Suomi–10.
Oikeus teknisiin muutoksiin pidätetään.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–11
Latauslaite Charger
Turvallisuusohjeita
Lue kaikki turvallisuus- ja
käyttöohjeet. Turvallisuus- ja
käyttöohjeiden noudattamisen laiminlyönti saattaa johtaa
sähköiskuun, tulipaloon ja/tai
vakavaan loukkaantumiseen.
Säilytä kaikki turvallisuusohjeet ja käyttöohjeet myöhempää käyttöä varten.
Tässä käyttöohjeessa käytetty käsite ”akku” viittaa sekä vakioakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on polkupyörän rungossa),
että tavaratelineakkuihin (akut, joiden pidike on tavaratelineessä).
Pidä latauslaite poissa sateesta ja kosteudesta.
Jos vettä tunkeutuu latauslaitteen sisään on sähköiskun riski olemassa.
 Lataa ainoastaan eBike:lle sallittuja litiumioniakkuja.
Akun jännitteen tulee vastata latauslaitteen latausjännitettä. Muussa tapauksessa syntyy tulipalo- ja räjähdysvaara.
 Pidä latauslaite puhtaana. Likaantuminen lisää sähköiskun vaaraa.
 Tarkista latauslaite, johto ja pistoke, ennen jokaista
käyttöä. Älä käytä latauslaitetta jos huomaat siinä olevan vaurioita. Älä avaa latauslaitetta itse. Anna ainoastaan ammattitaitoisten henkilöiden korjata se alkuperäisiä varaosia käyttäen. Vahingoittuneet latauslaitteet,
johdot tai pistokkeet kasvattavat sähköiskun vaaraa.
 Älä käytä latauslaitetta helposti palavalla alustalla
(esim. paperi, kangas jne.) tai palavassa ympäristössä.
Latauslaitteen kuumeneminen latauksen aikana synnyttää
tulipalovaaran.
 Jos akku vaurioituu tai sitä käytetään asiaankuulumattomalla tavalla, saattaa siitä purkautua höyryjä. Tuuleta raikkaalla ilmalla ja hakeudu lääkärin luo, jos haittoja ilmenee. Höyryt voivat ärsyttää hengitysteitä.
 Pidä lapsia silmällä. Täten varmistat, että lapset eivät leiki
latauslaitteen kanssa.
 Lapset ja henkilöt, jotka fyysisten, aistillisten tai henkisten kykyjensä, kokemattomuutensa tai puuttuvan
tietonsa takia eivät turvallisesti voi käyttää latauslaitetta, eivät saa käyttää sitä ilman vastuullisen henkilön
valvontaa tai neuvontaa. Muussa tapauksessa on olemassa väärinkäytön ja loukkaantumisen vaara.
 Lue ja noudata akun ja käyttövoimayksikön/käyttötietokoneen sekä eBike:si käyttöohjeiden turvallisuus- ja
muita ohjeita.
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
 Latauslaitteen pohjassa on lyhennelmä tärkeistä turvallisuusohjeista englanniksi, ranskaksi ja espanjaksi (grafiikkasivun kuvassa merkitty numerolla 33), sisältö on seuraava:
– Noudata käyttöohjetta turvallista käyttöä varten. Sähköiskun vaara.
– Käytä vain kuivassa ympäristössä.
– Lataa ainoastaan Bosch-eBike-järjestelmän akkuja.
Muut akut voivat räjähtää ja aiheuttaa loukkaantumisia.
– Älä vaihda verkkojohtoa. On olemassa tulipalo- ja räjähdysvaara.
Tuotekuvaus
Kuvassa olevat osat (katso sivu 6–7)
Kuvassa olevien osien numerointi viittaa grafiikkasivussa olevaan latauslaitteen kuvaan.
20 Tavaratelineakku
21 Akun latausvalvontanäyttö
26 Vakioakku
29 Latauslaite
30 Laitehylsy
31 Laitepistoke
32 Tuuletusaukot
33 Latauslaitteen turvallisuusohjeet
34 Latauspistoke
35 Latauspistokkeen liitin
Tekniset tiedot
Latauslaite
Tuotenumero
Nimellisjännite
Taajuus
Akun latausjännite
Latausvirta
Sallittu latauslämpötila-alue
Latausaika
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Akkukennojen lukumäärä
Käyttölämpötila
Varastointilämpötila
Paino vastaa EPTA-Procedure
01/2003
Suojaus
V~
Hz
V
A
°C
h
h
°C
°C
kg
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
0...+40
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0,8
IP 40
Tiedot koskevat 230 V nimellisjännitettä [U]. Poikkeavilla jännitteillä ja
maakohtaisissa malleissa nämä tiedot voivat vaihdella.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1557-002.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:14 PM
Suomi–12
Käyttö
Syy
 Aseta akku vain puhtaalle pinnalle. Vältä etenkin lataushylsyn ja koskettimien likaantumista esim. hiekasta tai
mullasta.
Käyttöönotto
Latauslaitteen liitäntä (katso kuvat E–F)
 Ota huomioon verkkojännite! Virtalähteen jännitteen tulee vastata laitteen tyyppikilvessä olevia tietoja. 230 V
merkittyjä laitteita voidaan käyttää myös 220 V verkoissa.
Työnnä sitten verkkojohdon laitepistoke 31 latauslaitteen laitehylsyyn 30.
Liitä verkkojohto (maakohtainen) sähköverkkoon.
Kytke akku pois päältä ja poista se eBike:n pidikkeestä. Lue ja
noudata akun käyttöohjetta.
Työnnä latauslaitteen latauspistoke 34 akun hylsyyn 35.
Lataustapahtuma
Lataustapahtuma alkaa heti kun latauslaite on kytketty akkuun ja sähköverkkoon.
Huomio: Lataustapahtuma on mahdollinen vain, jos akun
lämpötila on sallitulla latauslämpötila-alueella.
Lataustapahtuman aikana akussa olevat lataustilan näytön 21
LED:it palavat. Jokainen pysyvästi palaava LED vastaa latauksessa n. 20 % akun kapasiteetista. Vilkkuva LED näyttää seuraavan 20 % latauksen.
 Ole varovainen, jos kosketat latauslaitetta latauksen
aikana. Käytä suojakäsineitä. Latauslaite saattaa tulla
hyvin kuumaksi, etenkin korkeassa ympäristön lämpötilassa.
Huomio: Varmista, että latauslaite on hyvin tuuletettu latauksen aikana ja että tuuletusaukot 32 kummallakin puolella ovat
vapaat.
Akku on täysin ladattu, kun lataustilan näytön 21 kaikki viisi
LED:iä palaa pysyvästi. Lataus keskeytyy automaattisesti.
Irrota latauslaite sähköverkosta ja akku latauslaitteesta.
Kun akku poistetaan latauslaitteesta se kytkeytyy automaattisesti pois päältä.
Voit nyt asettaa akun eBike:iin.
Viat – Syyt ja korjaus
Syy
Akku on viallinen
Korjaus
Kaksi LED:iä vilkkuu akussa
käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen
Korjaus
Kolme LED:iä vilkkuu
akussa
Akku on liian kuuma tai liian
kylmä
Irrota akku latauslaitteesta ja
anna akun lämpötilan asettua, kunnes latauslämpötilaalue on saavutettu.
Liitä akku uudelleen latauslaitteeseen vasta, kun se on
saavuttanut sallitun latauslämpötilan.
Lataaminen ei ole mahdollista (akussa ei näy mitään
merkkivaloa)
pistoke on asennettu väärin tarkista kaikki pistokeliitännät
Akun koskettimet likaantu- puhdista akun koskettimet
neet
varovasti
latauslaitteen tuuletusaukot puhdista tuuletusaukot 32 ja
32 ovat tukossa tai peitettyjä aseta latauslaite hyvin tuuletettuun paikkaan
pistorasia, verkkojohto tai la- tarkista verkkojännite, anna
tauslaite on viallinen
polkupyöräkauppiaan tarkistaa latauslaite
Akku on viallinen
käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen
Hoito ja huolto
Huolto ja puhdistus
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen, jos latauslaite menee rikki.
Huolto ja asiakasneuvonta
Käänny valtuutetun polkupyöräkauppiaan puoleen kaikissa
latauslaitteeseen liittyvissä kysymyksissä.
Valtuutettujen polkupyöräkauppiaiden yhteystiedot löydät internetsivulta www.bosch-ebike.com
Hävitys
Latauslaitteet, lisätarvikkeet ja pakkaukset tulee toimittaa
ympäristöystävälliseen uusiokäyttöön.
Älä heitä latauslaitteita talousjätteisiin!
Vain EU-maita varten:
Eurooppalaisen vanhoja sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaitteita koskevan direktiivin
2002/96/EY ja sen kansallisten lakien
muunnosten mukaan, tulee käyttökelvottomat sähkötyökalut kerätä erikseen ja toimittaa ympäristöystävälliseen uusiokäyttöön.
Oikeus teknisiin muutoksiin pidätetään.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 Y45 | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 12:44 PM
T
RESE
Robert Bosch GmbH
Bosch eBike Systems
72703 Reutlingen
Germany
www.bosch-ebike.com
0 276 001 YYY (2012.10) T / 142
Drive Unit Cruise | Intuvia |
PowerPack 300 | PowerPack 400 | Charger
0 275 007 006 | 0 275 007 007 | 1 270 020 903 | 0 275 007 500 | 0 275 007 501 |
0 275 007 502 | 0 275 007 503 | 0 275 007 504 | 0 275 007 505 | 0 275 007 905
de
en
fr
es
it
nl
da
sv
no
fi
Originalbetriebsanleitung
Original instructions
Notice originale
Manual original
Istruzioni originali
Oorspronkelijke gebruiksaanwijzing
Original brugsanvisning
Bruksanvisning i original
Original driftsinstruks
Alkuperäiset ohjeet
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
2|
f
TURBO
SPORT
TOUR
ECO
OFF
e
a
b
MPH
KM/H
AMM
PMWH
MIN
MPH
KM/H
d
Reichweite
c
7
O
RB T
TU POR UR
S TO
M
K P
MH
/H
1
MWH
AM
INPH /H
PM
MM
KM
T
RESE
6
5
8
2
te
wei
h
c
i
Re
3
4
9
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
|3
10
11
14
12
13
A
B
17
O
EC
/H
KM
/H
KM
T
RESE
eite
chw
Rei
3
15
16
5–
17
Bosch eBike Systems
mm
4
18
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
4|
19
24
23
20
22
21
25
24
23
28
21
22
26
29
27
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
|5
C
25
25
24
26
24
23
23
26
28
27
27
D
19
24
23
20
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
6|
30
31
29
34
32
33
eBike Battery Charger 42-4/230
0 275 007 905
Input: 230V
Output: 42V
50Hz 1.5A
4A
Made in PRC
Robert Bosch GmbH, Reutlingen
For safe operation see manual. Risk of electric shock. Dry location use only. Charge only batteries of
WARNING
the Bosch eBike Systems. Other batteries may burst causing personal damage. Do not replace the plug
assembly as risk of fire or electric shock may result.
Para un funcionamiento con seguridad, ver el manual. Peligro de sacudida eléctrica. Utilice
PRECAUCION solamente
en lugares secos. Cargar únicamente baterías de sistemas eBike de Bosch.
Otras baterías podrían reventar, causando lesiones personales y daños. No reemplace el ensamblaje del enchufe,
ya que el resultado puede ser riesgo de incendio o sacudidas eléctricas.
Pour un fonctionnement sûr, reportez-vous au manuel. Risque de choc électrique. Utiliser en lieu sec
ATTENTION uniquement.
A utiliser uniquement avec les batteries des systèmes d’assistance électrique
eBike de Bosch. D 'autres batteries risqueraient d'éclater et de causer des blessures corporelles et des dommages.
Ne pas remplacer la connectique car un risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique pourrait en résulter.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
|7
E
30
31
F
26
35
21
34
35
Bosch eBike Systems
20
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–1
Antriebseinheit Drive Unit Cruise/
Bediencomputer Intuvia
Sicherheitshinweise
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen. Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung
der Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
können elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder
schwere Verletzungen verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger).
 Öffnen Sie die Antriebseinheit nicht selbst. Die Antriebseinheit ist wartungsfrei und darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal und nur mit Original-Ersatzteilen
repariert werden. Damit wird sichergestellt, dass die Sicherheit der Antriebseinheit erhalten bleibt. Beim unberechtigten Öffnen der Antriebseinheit erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch.
 Alle an der Antriebseinheit montierten Komponenten
und alle anderen Komponenten des eBike-Antriebs
(z.B. Kettenblatt, Aufnahme des Kettenblatts, Pedale)
dürfen nur gegen baugleiche oder vom Fahrradhersteller speziell für Ihr eBike zugelassene Komponenten
ausgetauscht werden. Damit wird die Antriebseinheit vor
Überlastung und Beschädigung geschützt.
 Nehmen Sie den Akku aus dem eBike, bevor Sie Arbeiten (z.B. Montage, Wartung etc.) am eBike beginnen,
es mit dem Auto oder dem Flugzeug transportieren
oder es aufbewahren. Bei unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen
des Ein-/Ausschalters besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Die Funktion Schiebehilfe darf ausschließlich beim
Schieben des eBikes verwendet werden. Haben die
Räder des eBikes beim Benutzen der Schiebehilfe keinen
Bodenkontakt, besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
 Beachten Sie alle nationalen Vorschriften zur Zulassung und Verwendung von eBikes.
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in der Betriebsanleitung des Akkus sowie in der Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Die Antriebseinheit ist ausschließlich zum Antrieb Ihres
eBikes bestimmt und darf nicht für andere Zwecke verwendet
werden.
Das eBike ist zur Verwendung auf befestigten Wegen bestimmt. Es ist nicht für den Wettbewerbsbetrieb zugelassen.
Abgebildete Komponenten
(siehe Seite 2–3)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellungen auf der Grafikseite.
Alle Darstellungen von Fahrradteilen außer Antriebseinheit,
Bediencomputer inkl. Bedieneinheit, Geschwindigkeitssensor und dazugehörigen Halterungen sind schematisch und
können bei Ihrem eBike abweichen.
1 Taste Anzeigenfunktion „i“
2 Taste Beleuchtung
3 Bediencomputer
4 Halterung Bediencomputer
5 Ein-Aus-Taste Bediencomputer
6 Reset-Taste „RESET“
7 USB-Buchse
8 Schutzkappe der USB-Buchse
9 Antriebseinheit
10 Bedieneinheit
11 Taste Anzeigenfunktion „i“ an der Bedieneinheit
12 Taste Wert senken/nach unten blättern „ –“
13 Taste Wert erhöhen/nach oben blättern „+“
14 Taste Schiebehilfe „WALK“
15 Arretierung Bediencomputer
16 Blockierschraube Bediencomputer
17 Geschwindigkeitssensor
18 Speichenmagnet des Geschwindigkeitssensors
Anzeigenelemente Bediencomputer
a Anzeige Motorleistung
b Anzeige Unterstützungslevel
c Textanzeige
d Werteanzeige
e Tachometeranzeige
f Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–2
Technische Daten
Antriebseinheit
Sachnummer
Leistung
Drehmoment am Abtrieb
max.
Nennspannung
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Schutzart
Gewicht, ca.
Bediencomputer
Sachnummer
Ladestrom USB-Anschluss
max.
Ladespannung
USB-Anschluss
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Schutzart
Gewicht, ca.
Beleuchtung*
Nennspannung
Leistung
– Vorderlicht
– Rücklicht
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Cruise
0 275 007 006/
0 275 007 007
250
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (staub- und
spritzwassergeschützt)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (staub- und
spritzwassergeschützt)
0,15
kg
V
W
W
6
2,7
0,3
* abhängig von gesetzlichen Regelungen nicht in allen länderspezifischen Ausführungen über den eBike-Akku möglich
Montage
Akku einsetzen und entnehmen
Zum Einsetzen des Akkus in das eBike und zum Entnehmen lesen und beachten Sie die Betriebsanleitung des Akkus.
Bediencomputer einsetzen und entnehmen
(siehe Bild A)
Zum Einsetzen des Bediencomputers 3 schieben Sie ihn von
vorn in die Halterung 4.
Zum Entnehmen des Bediencomputers 3 drücken Sie auf die
Arretierung 15 und schieben ihn nach vorn aus der Halterung 4.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Entnehmen Sie den Bediencomputer bei abgestelltem
eBike, damit der Antrieb nicht durch unberechtigte
Dritte benutzt werden kann. Ohne Bediencomputer kann
das eBike-System nicht eingeschaltet werden.
Es ist auch möglich, den Bediencomputer in der Halterung gegen Entnahme zu sichern. Demontieren Sie dazu die Halterung 4 vom Lenker. Setzen Sie den Bediencomputer in die
Halterung. Schrauben Sie die Blockierschraube 16 von unten
in das dafür vorgesehene Gewinde der Halterung. Montieren
Sie die Halterung wieder auf dem Lenker.
Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen
(siehe Bild B)
Der Geschwindigkeitssensor 17 und der dazugehörige Speichenmagnet 18 müssen so montiert sein, dass sich der Speichenmagnet bei einer Umdrehung des Rades in einem Abstand von mindestens 5 mm und höchstens 17 mm am
Geschwindigkeitssensor vorbeibewegt.
Hinweis: Ist der Abstand zwischen Geschwindigkeitssensor
17 und Speichenmagnet 18 zu klein oder zu groß, oder ist der
Geschwindigkeitssensor 17 nicht richtig angeschlossen, fällt
die Tachometeranzeige e aus, und der eBike-Antrieb arbeitet
im Notlaufprogramm.
Lösen Sie in diesem Fall die Schraube des Speichenmagnets
18 und befestigen Sie den Speichenmagnet so an der Speiche, dass er in der richtigen Entfernung an der Markierung
des Geschwindigkeitssensors vorbeiläuft. Erscheint auch danach keine Geschwindigkeit in der Tachometeranzeige e,
wenden Sie sich bitte an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Betrieb
Inbetriebnahme
Voraussetzungen
Das eBike-System kann nur aktiviert werden, wenn folgende
Voraussetzungen erfüllt sind:
– Ein ausreichend geladener Akku ist eingesetzt (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
– Der Bediencomputer ist richtig in die Halterung eingesetzt
(siehe „Bediencomputer einsetzen und entnehmen“, Seite
Deutsch–2).
– Der Geschwindigkeitssensor ist richtig angeschlossen
(siehe „Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen“, Seite
Deutsch–2).
eBike-System ein-/ausschalten
Zum Einschalten des eBike-Systems haben Sie folgende
Möglichkeiten:
– Ist der Bediencomputer bereits eingeschaltet, wenn er in
die Halterung gesetzt wird, dann wird das eBike-System
automatisch eingeschaltet.
– Drücken Sie bei eingesetztem Bediencomputer und eingesetztem Akku einmal kurz die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 des Bediencomputers.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–3
– Drücken Sie bei eingesetztem Bediencomputer die EinAus-Taste des Akkus (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
Hinweis: Die Pedale des eBikes dürfen beim Einschalten des
eBike-Systems nicht belastet sein, weil sonst die Motorleistung eingeschränkt wird. In der Textanzeige c erscheint die
Fehlermeldung „Pedal entlasten“.
Wurde das eBike-System versehentlich mit belasteten Pedalen eingeschaltet, dann schalten Sie es aus und ohne Belastung erneut ein.
Der Antrieb wird aktiviert, sobald Sie in die Pedale treten
(außer in der Funktion Schiebehilfe, siehe „Schiebehilfe
ein-/ausschalten“, Seite Deutsch–4). Die Motorleistung richtet sich nach den Einstellungen am Bediencomputer.
Sobald Sie im Normalbetrieb aufhören, in die Pedale zu treten, oder sobald Sie eine Geschwindigkeit von 25 km/h erreicht haben, wird die Unterstützung durch den eBike-Antrieb
abgeschaltet. Der Antrieb wird automatisch wieder aktiviert,
sobald Sie in die Pedale treten und die Geschwindigkeit unter
25 km/h liegt.
Zum Ausschalten des eBike-Systems haben Sie folgende
Möglichkeiten:
– Drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 des Bediencomputers.
– Schalten Sie den Akku an dessen Ein-Aus-Taste aus (siehe
Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
– Entnehmen Sie den Bediencomputer aus der Halterung.
Wird etwa 10 min lang keine Leistung des Antriebs abgerufen
(z.B., weil das eBike steht) und keine Taste an Bediencomputer oder Bedieneinheit gedrückt, schaltet sich das eBike-System aus Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Anzeigen und Einstellungen des Bediencomputers
Energieversorgung des Bediencomputers
Sitzt der Bediencomputer in der Halterung 4, ist ein ausreichend geladener Akku in das eBike eingesetzt und das eBikeSystem eingeschaltet, dann wird der Bediencomputer über
den Akku des eBikes mit Energie versorgt.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen, erfolgt die Energieversorgung über einen internen Akku. Ist der
interne Akku beim Einschalten des Bediencomputers schwach,
erscheint für 3 s „Mit Fahrrad verbind.“ in der Textanzeige c.
Danach schaltet sich der Bediencomputer wieder aus.
Zum Aufladen des internen Akkus setzen Sie den Bediencomputer wieder in die Halterung 4 (wenn ein Akku in das eBike
eingesetzt ist). Schalten Sie den eBike-Akku an dessen EinAus-Taste ein (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Akkus).
Sie können den Bediencomputer auch über den USB-Anschluss aufladen. Öffnen Sie dazu die Schutzkappe 8. Verbinden Sie die USB-Buchse 7 des Bediencomputers über ein
passendes USB-Kabel mit einem handelsüblichen USB-Ladegerät oder dem USB-Anschluss eines Computers (5 V Ladespannung; max. 500 mA Ladestrom). In der Textanzeige c
des Bediencomputers erscheint „USB verbunden“.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Bediencomputer ein-/ausschalten
Zum Einschalten des Bediencomputers drücken Sie kurz die
Ein-Aus-Taste 5. Der Bediencomputer kann (bei ausreichend
geladenem internen Akku) auch eingeschaltet werden, wenn
er nicht in die Halterung eingesetzt ist.
Zum Ausschalten des Bediencomputers drücken Sie die EinAus-Taste 5.
Ist der Bediencomputer nicht in die Halterung eingesetzt,
schaltet er sich nach 1 min ohne Tastendruck aus Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
Die Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige f zeigt den Ladezustand des
eBike-Akkus an, nicht den des internen Akkus des Bediencomputers. Der Ladezustand des eBike-Akkus kann ebenfalls
an den LEDs am Akku selbst abgelesen werden.
In der Anzeige f entspricht jeder Balken im Akkusymbol etwa
20 % Kapazität:
100 % bis 80 % Kapazität
20 % bis 5 % Kapazität, der Akku sollte nachgeladen werden.
Weniger als 5 % Kapazität, die Unterstützung des
Antriebs ist nicht mehr möglich. Die LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige am Akku erlöschen.
Wenn die eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku betrieben wird
(länderspezifisch), dann reicht die Kapazität beim ersten Auftauchen des leeren Akkusymbols noch für etwa 2 Stunden Beleuchtung. Wenn das Symbol zu blinken beginnt, ist auch die
Beleuchtung nur noch für kurze Zeit möglich.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleibt der zuletzt angezeigte Akku-Ladezustand gespeichert.
Unterstützungslevel einstellen
Sie können am Bediencomputer einstellen, wie stark Sie der
eBike-Antrieb beim Treten unterstützt. Der Unterstützungslevel kann jederzeit, auch während der Fahrt, geändert werden.
Hinweis: In einzelnen Ausführungen ist es möglich, dass der
Unterstützungslevel voreingestellt ist und nicht geändert werden kann. Es ist auch möglich, dass weniger Unterstützungslevel zur Auswahl stehen als hier angegeben.
Folgende Unterstützungslevel stehen maximal zur Verfügung:
– „OFF“: Der Antrieb ist abgeschaltet, das eBike kann wie
ein normales Fahrrad allein durch Treten fortbewegt werden.
– „ECO“: wirksame Unterstützung bei maximaler Effizienz,
für maximale Reichweite
– „TOUR“: gleichmäßige Unterstützung, für Touren mit großer Reichweite
– „SPORT“: kraftvolle Unterstützung, für sportives Fahren
auf bergigen Strecken sowie für Stadtverkehr
– „TURBO“: maximale Unterstützung bis in hohe Trittfrequenzen, für sportives Fahren
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–4
Zum Erhöhen des Unterstützungslevels drücken Sie die Taste
„+“ 13 an der Bedieneinheit so oft, bis der gewünschte Unterstützungslevel in der Anzeige b erscheint, zum Senken die
Taste „ –“ 12.
Die abgerufene Motorleistung erscheint in der Anzeige a. Die
maximale Motorleistung hängt vom gewählten Unterstützungslevel ab.
Unterstützungslevel
„ECO“
„TOUR“
„SPORT“
„TURBO“
Motorleistung*
Kettenschaltung
30 %
100 %
170 %
250 %
Nabenschaltung
30 %
90 %
150 %
200 %
* Die Motorleistung kann bei einzelnen Ausführungen abweichen.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleibt der zuletzt angezeigte Unterstützungslevel gespeichert, die Anzeige a der Motorleistung bleibt leer.
Schiebehilfe ein-/ausschalten
Die Schiebehilfe kann Ihnen das Schieben des eBikes erleichtern. Die Geschwindigkeit in dieser Funktion ist abhängig vom
eingelegten Gang und kann maximal 6 km/h erreichen. Je kleiner der gewählte Gang ist, desto geringer ist die Geschwindigkeit in der Funktion Schiebehilfe (bei voller Leistung).
 Die Funktion Schiebehilfe darf ausschließlich beim
Schieben des eBikes verwendet werden. Haben die
Räder des eBikes beim Benutzen der Schiebehilfe keinen
Bodenkontakt, besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
Zum Einschalten der Schiebehilfe drücken Sie die Taste
„WALK“ 14 an der Bedieneinheit und halten sie gedrückt.
Der Antrieb des eBikes wird eingeschaltet.
Die Schiebehilfe wird ausgeschaltet, sobald eines der folgenden Ereignisse eintritt:
– Sie lassen die Taste „WALK“ 14 los,
– Sie treten vorwärts oder schnell rückwärts in die Pedale,
– die Räder des eBikes werden blockiert (z.B. durch Bremsen oder Anstoßen an ein Hindernis),
– die Geschwindigkeit überschreitet 6 km/h.
Beleuchtung ein-/ausschalten
Je nach länderspezifischen Vorschriften sind zwei Ausführungen der Beleuchtung möglich:
– Über den Bediencomputer können gleichzeitig Vorderlicht, Rücklicht und Display-Hintergrundbeleuchtung einund ausgeschaltet werden.
In dieser Ausführung erscheint beim Einschalten der Beleuchtung „Licht an“ und beim Ausschalten der Beleuchtung „Licht aus“ für ca. 1 s in der Textanzeige c.
– Es kann nur die Display-Hintergrundbeleuchtung ein- und
ausgeschaltet werden, Vorder- und Rücklicht des eBikes
sind unabhängig vom Bediencomputer.
Bei beiden Ausführungen drücken Sie zum Ein- und Ausschalten der Beleuchtung jeweils die Taste 2.
Bosch eBike Systems
Geschwindigkeits- und Entfernungsanzeigen
In der Tachometeranzeige e wird immer die aktuelle Geschwindigkeit angezeigt.
In der Funktionsanzeige (Kombination von Textanzeige c
und Werteanzeige d) stehen folgende Funktionen zur Auswahl:
– „Reichweite“: voraussichtliche Reichweite der vorhandenen Akkuladung (bei gleichbleibenden Bedingungen wie
Unterstützungslevel, Streckenprofil usw.)
– „Strecke“: seit dem letzten Reset zurückgelegte Entfernung
– „Fahrzeit“: Fahrzeit seit dem letzten Reset
– „Durchschnitt“: seit dem letzten Reset erreichte Durchschnittsgeschwindigkeit
– „Maximal“: seit dem letzten Reset erreichte Maximalgeschwindigkeit
– „Uhrzeit“: aktuelle Uhrzeit
Drücken Sie zum Wechsel in der Anzeigefunktion die Taste
„i“ 1 am Bediencomputer oder die Taste „i“ 11 an der Bedieneinheit so oft, bis die gewünschte Funktion angezeigt wird.
Zum Reset von „Strecke“, „Fahrzeit“ und „Durchschnitt“
wechseln Sie zu einer dieser drei Funktionen und drücken
dann die Taste „RESET“ 6 so lange, bis die Anzeige auf Null
gesetzt ist. Damit sind auch die Werte der beiden anderen
Funktionen zurückgesetzt.
Zum Reset von „Maximal“ wechseln Sie zu dieser Funktion
und drücken dann die Taste „RESET“ 6 so lange, bis die Anzeige auf Null gesetzt ist.
Wird der Bediencomputer aus der Halterung 4 entnommen,
bleiben alle Werte der Funktionen gespeichert und können
weiterhin angezeigt werden.
Grundeinstellungen anzeigen/anpassen
Anzeigen und Änderungen der Grundeinstellungen sind unabhängig davon möglich, ob der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt ist oder nicht.
Um in das Menü Grundeinstellungen zu gelangen, drücken Sie
gleichzeitig so lange die Taste „RESET“ 6 und die Taste „i“ 1,
bis in der Textanzeige c „Einstellungen“ erscheint.
Drücken Sie zum Wechsel zwischen den Grundeinstellungen die Taste „i“ 1 am Bediencomputer so oft, bis die gewünschte Grundeinstellung angezeigt wird. Ist der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt, können Sie auch die
Taste „i“ 11 an der Bedieneinheit drücken.
Um die Grundeinstellungen zu ändern, drücken Sie zum
Verringern bzw. Blättern nach unten die Ein-Aus-Taste 5 neben der Anzeige „ –“ oder zum Erhöhen bzw. Blättern nach
oben die Taste Beleuchtung 2 neben der Anzeige „+“.
Ist der Bediencomputer in die Halterung 4 eingesetzt, dann ist
die Änderung auch mit den Tasten „ –“ 12 bzw. „+“ 13 an der
Bedieneinheit möglich.
Um die Funktion zu verlassen und eine geänderte Einstellung
zu speichern, drücken Sie die Taste „RESET“ 6 für 3 s.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–5
Folgende Grundeinstellungen stehen zur Auswahl:
– „Einheit km/mi“: Sie können Geschwindigkeit und Entfernung in Kilometern oder Meilen anzeigen lassen.
– „Zeitformat“: Sie können die Uhrzeit im 12-Stundenoder im 24-Stunden-Format anzeigen lassen.
– „Uhrzeit“: Sie können die aktuelle Uhrzeit einstellen. Längeres Drücken auf die Einstelltasten beschleunigt die Änderung der Uhrzeit.
Anzeige Fehlercode
Die Komponenten des eBike-Systems werden ständig automatisch überprüft. Wird ein Fehler festgestellt, erscheint der
entsprechende Fehlercode in der Textanzeige c.
Drücken Sie eine beliebige Taste am Bediencomputer 3 oder
an der Bedieneinheit 10, um zur Standardanzeige zurückzukehren.
Abhängig von der Art des Fehlers wird der Antrieb gegebenenfalls automatisch abgeschaltet. Die Weiterfahrt ohne UnCode
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
Ursache
interner Fehler der Antriebseinheit
Verbindungsproblem der Antriebseinheit
Fehler des Geschwindigkeitssensors
Verbindungsproblem der Beleuchtung
Verbindungsproblem des Bediencomputers
Temperatur der Antriebseinheit zu
hoch (über 40 °C)
interner Elektronikfehler des Akkus
Temperatur des Akkus zu hoch (über
40 °C)
Temperatur des Akkus zu niedrig
(unter –10 °C)
Verbindungsproblem des Akkus
falsche Akkupolung
– „Deutsch“: Sie können die Sprache der Textanzeigen ändern. Zur Auswahl stehen Deutsch, Englisch, Französisch,
Spanisch, Italienisch und Niederländisch.
– „Strecke gesamt“: Anzeige der gesamten mit dem eBike
zurückgelegten Entfernung (nicht änderbar)
– „Betriebszeit gesamt“: Anzeige der gesamten Fahrdauer
mit dem eBike (nicht änderbar)
terstützung durch den Antrieb ist aber jederzeit möglich. Vor
weiteren Fahrten sollte das eBike überprüft werden.
 Lassen Sie alle Überprüfungen und Reparaturen ausschließlich von einem autorisierten Fahrradhändler
ausführen. Wird ein Fehler trotz Ihrer Abhilfe weiterhin
angezeigt, wenden Sie sich ebenfalls an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Abhilfe
Antriebseinheit überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Geschwindigkeitssensor überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Lassen Sie die Antriebseinheit abkühlen. Die Weiterfahrt ohne eBikeAntrieb ist möglich und beschleunigt die Abkühlung der Antriebseinheit.
Akku überprüfen lassen
Lassen Sie den Akku abkühlen. Die Weiterfahrt ohne eBike-Antrieb ist
möglich und beschleunigt die Abkühlung des Akkus.
Lassen Sie den Akku in einem warmen Raum langsam aufwärmen.
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Laden Sie den Akku mit dem original Bosch Ladegerät wie in dessen
Betriebsanleitung beschrieben auf.
Eine oder mehrere Tasten des Bedien- Prüfen Sie, ob Tasten verklemmt sind, z.B. durch eingedrungenen
computers sind blockiert.
Schmutz. Reinigen Sie die Tasten gegebenenfalls.
Verbindungsproblem der Bedienein- Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
heit
Eine oder mehrere Tasten der Bedien- Prüfen Sie, ob Tasten verklemmt sind, z.B. durch eingedrungenen
einheit sind blockiert.
Schmutz. Reinigen Sie die Tasten gegebenenfalls.
Verbindungsproblem der AntriebsAnschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
einheit
Verbindungsproblem des Akkus
Anschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
Kommunikationsfehler der KompoAnschlüsse und Verbindungen überprüfen lassen
nenten untereinander
* nur bei eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku (länderspezifisch)
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–6
Code
430
490
Ursache
Abhilfe
interner Akku des Bediencomputers Bediencomputer aufladen (in der Halterung oder über USB-Anschluss)
leer
interner Fehler des Bediencomputers Bediencomputer überprüfen lassen
* nur bei eBike-Beleuchtung über den Akku (länderspezifisch)
Energieversorgung externer Geräte über USBAnschluss
Mithilfe des USB-Anschlusses können die meisten Geräte, deren Energieversorgung über USB möglich ist (z.B. diverse Mobiltelefone), betrieben bzw. aufgeladen werden.
Voraussetzung für das Laden ist, dass der Bediencomputer
und ein ausreichend geladener Akku in das eBike eingesetzt
sind.
Öffnen Sie die Schutzkappe 8 des USB-Anschluss am Bediencomputer. Verbinden Sie den USB-Anschluss des externen
Geräts über ein passendes USB-Kabel mit der USB-Buchse 7
am Bediencomputer.
Hinweise zum Fahren mit dem eBike-System
Wann arbeitet der eBike-Antrieb?
Der eBike-Antrieb unterstützt Sie beim Fahren, solange Sie in
die Pedale treten. Ohne Pedaltreten erfolgt keine Unterstützung. Die Motorleistung ist immer abhängig von der beim Treten eingesetzten Kraft.
Setzen Sie wenig Kraft ein, wird die Unterstützung geringer
sein, als wenn Sie viel Kraft einsetzen. Das gilt unabhängig
vom Unterstützungslevel.
Der eBike-Antrieb schaltet sich automatisch bei Geschwindigkeiten über 25 km/h ab. Fällt die Geschwindigkeit unter
25 km/h, steht der Antrieb automatisch wieder zur Verfügung.
Eine Ausnahme gilt für die Funktion Schiebehilfe, in der das
eBike ohne Pedaltreten mit geringer Geschwindigkeit geschoben werden kann.
Sie können das eBike jederzeit auch ohne Unterstützung wie
ein normales Fahrrad fahren, indem Sie entweder das eBikeSystem ausschalten oder den Unterstützungslevel auf „OFF“
stellen. Das Gleiche gilt bei leerem Akku.
Zusammenspiel des eBike-Systems mit der Schaltung
Auch mit eBike-Antrieb sollten Sie die Schaltung wie bei einem normalen Fahrrad benutzen (beachten Sie dazu die Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes).
Unabhängig von der Art der Schaltung ist es ratsam, während
des Schaltvorganges das Treten kurz zu unterbrechen. Dadurch wird das Schalten erleichtert und die Abnutzung des
Antriebsstranges reduziert.
Durch die Wahl des richtigen Ganges können Sie bei gleichem
Krafteinsatz die Geschwindigkeit und die Reichweite erhöhen.
Bosch eBike Systems
Erste Erfahrungen sammeln
Es ist empfehlenswert, die ersten Erfahrungen mit dem eBike
abseits vielbefahrener Straßen zu sammeln.
Probieren Sie unterschiedliche Unterstützungslevel aus. Sobald Sie sich sicher fühlen, können Sie mit dem eBike wie mit
jedem Fahrrad am Verkehr teilnehmen.
Testen Sie die Reichweite Ihres eBikes unter unterschiedlichen Bedingungen, bevor Sie längere, anspruchsvolle Fahrten planen.
Einflüsse auf die Reichweite
Die Reichweite wird von vielen Faktoren beeinflusst, wie zum
Beispiel:
– Unterstützungslevel,
– Schaltverhalten,
– Art der Reifen und Reifendruck,
– Alter und Pflegezustand des Akkus,
– Streckenprofil (Steigungen) und -beschaffenheit (Fahrbahnbelag),
– Gegenwind und Umgebungstemperatur,
– Gewicht von eBike, Fahrer und Gepäck.
Deshalb ist es nicht möglich, die Reichweite vor Antritt einer
Fahrt konkret vorherzusagen. Allgemein gilt jedoch:
– Bei gleicher Motorleistung des eBike-Antriebs: Je weniger
Kraft Sie einsetzen müssen, um eine bestimmte Geschwindigkeit zu erreichen (z.B. durch optimales Benutzen der
Schaltung), umso weniger Energie wird der eBike-Antrieb
verbrauchen und umso größer wird die Reichweite einer
Akkuladung sein.
– Je höher der Unterstützungslevel bei ansonsten gleichen
Bedingungen gewählt wird, umso geringer ist die Reichweite.
Pfleglicher Umgang mit dem eBike
Beachten Sie die Betriebs- und Lagertemperaturen der eBikeKomponenten. Schützen Sie Antriebseinheit, Bediencomputer und Akku vor extremen Temperaturen (z.B. durch intensive Sonneneinstrahlung ohne gleichzeitige Belüftung). Die
Komponenten (besonders der Akku) können durch extreme
Temperaturen beschädigt werden.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 7 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–7
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Halten Sie alle Komponenten Ihres eBikes sauber, insbesondere die Kontakte von Akku und dazugehöriger Halterung.
Reinigen Sie sie vorsichtig mit einem feuchten, weichen Tuch.
Alle Komponenten inklusive der Antriebseinheit dürfen nicht
ins Wasser getaucht oder mit einem Hochdruckreiniger gereinigt werden.
Für Service oder Reparaturen am eBike wenden Sie sich bitte
an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zum eBike-System und seinen Komponenten
wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Transport
Die Akkus unterliegen den Anforderungen des Gefahrgutrechts. Die Akkus können durch den privaten Benutzer ohne
weitere Auflagen auf der Straße transportiert werden.
Beim Transport durch gewerbliche Benutzer oder beim Transport durch Dritte (z.B. Lufttransport oder Spedition) sind besondere Anforderungen an Verpackung und Kennzeichnung
zu beachten (z.B. Vorschriften des ADR). Bei Bedarf kann bei
der Vorbereitung des Versandstückes ein Gefahrgut-Experte
hinzugezogen werden.
Versenden Sie die Akkus nur, wenn das Gehäuse unbeschädigt ist. Kleben Sie offene Kontakte ab und verpacken Sie den
Akku so, dass er sich nicht in der Verpackung bewegt. Bitte
beachten Sie auch eventuelle weiterführende nationale Vorschriften.
Bei Fragen zum Transport der Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Beim Händler können Sie auch
eine geeignete Transportverpackung bestellen.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Entsorgung
Antriebseinheit, Bediencomputer inkl. Bedieneinheit, Akku, Geschwindigkeitssensor, Zubehör und
Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie eBikes und ihre Komponenten nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Elektrogeräte und gemäß
der europäischen Richtlinie 2006/66/EG
müssen defekte oder verbrauchte Akkus/
Batterien getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwendung zugeführt werden.
Der im Bediencomputer integrierte Akku darf nur zur Entsorgung entnommen werden. Durch das Öffnen der Gehäuseschale kann der Bediencomputer zerstört werden.
Geben Sie nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Akkus und Bediencomputer bitte bei einem autorisierten Fahrradhändler ab.
Li-Ion:
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise im Abschnitt „Transport“, Seite Deutsch–7.
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 8 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–8
Li-Ionen-Akku PowerPack
Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen.
Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise
und Anweisungen können
elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen
verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger), es sei denn, es wird ausdrücklich auf die Bauform Bezug genommen.
 Nehmen Sie den Akku aus dem eBike, bevor Sie Arbeiten (z.B. Montage, Wartung etc.) am eBike beginnen,
es mit dem Auto oder dem Flugzeug transportieren
oder es aufbewahren. Bei unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen
des Ein-/Ausschalters besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
 Öffnen Sie den Akku nicht. Es besteht die Gefahr eines
Kurzschlusses. Bei geöffnetem Akku entfällt jeglicher
Garantieanspruch.
Schützen Sie den Akku vor Hitze (z.B. auch vor
dauernder Sonneneinstrahlung), Feuer und
dem Eintauchen in Wasser. Es besteht Explosionsgefahr.
 Halten Sie den nicht benutzten Akku fern von Büroklammern, Münzen, Schlüsseln, Nägeln, Schrauben
oder anderen kleinen Metallgegenständen, die eine
Überbrückung der Kontakte verursachen könnten. Ein
Kurzschluss zwischen den Akkukontakten kann Verbrennungen oder Feuer zur Folge haben. Bei in diesem Zusammenhang entstandenen Kurzschlussschäden entfällt jeglicher Anspruch auf Garantie durch Bosch.
 Bei falscher Anwendung kann Flüssigkeit aus dem
Akku austreten. Vermeiden Sie den Kontakt damit. Bei
zufälligem Kontakt mit Wasser abspülen. Wenn die
Flüssigkeit in die Augen kommt, nehmen Sie zusätzlich
ärztliche Hilfe in Anspruch. Austretende Akkuflüssigkeit
kann zu Hautreizungen oder Verbrennungen führen.
 Bei Beschädigung und unsachgemäßem Gebrauch des
Akkus können Dämpfe austreten. Führen Sie Frischluft
zu und suchen Sie bei Beschwerden einen Arzt auf. Die
Dämpfe können die Atemwege reizen.
 Laden Sie den Akku nur mit original Bosch Ladegeräten. Bei Benutzung von nicht original Bosch Ladegeräten
kann eine Brandgefahr nicht ausgeschlossen werden.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Verwenden Sie den Akku nur in Verbindung mit eBikes
mit original Bosch eBike-Antriebssystem. Nur so wird
der Akku vor gefährlicher Überlastung geschützt.
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in den Betriebsanleitungen von Ladegerät und Antriebseinheit/Bediencomputer sowie in der
Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Abgebildete Komponenten
(siehe Seite 4 – 5)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellungen auf den Grafikseiten.
Alle Darstellungen von Fahrradteilen außer den Akkus und ihren Halterungen sind schematisch und können bei Ihrem
eBike abweichen.
19 Halterung des Gepäckträger-Akkus
20 Gepäckträger-Akku
21 Betriebs- und Ladezustandsanzeige
22 Ein-Aus-Taste
23 Schlüssel des Akkuschlosses
24 Akkuschloss
25 Obere Halterung des Standard-Akkus
26 Standard-Akku
27 Untere Halterung des Standard-Akkus
28 Tragegurt
29 Ladegerät
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 9 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–9
Technische Daten
Li-Ionen-Akku
Sachnummer
– Standard-Akku schwarz
– Standard-Akku weiß
– Gepäckträger-Akku
Nennspannung
Nennkapazität
Energie
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Zulässiger Ladetemperaturbereich
Gewicht, ca.
Schutzart
Montage
 Stellen Sie den Akku nur auf sauberen Flächen auf. Vermeiden Sie insbesondere die Verschmutzung der Ladebuchse und der Kontakte, z.B. durch Sand oder Erde.
Akku vor der ersten Benutzung prüfen
Prüfen Sie den Akku, bevor Sie ihn das erste Mal aufladen
oder mit Ihrem eBike benutzen.
Drücken Sie dazu die Ein-Aus-Taste 22 zum Einschalten des
Akkus. Leuchtet keine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 auf,
dann ist der Akku möglicherweise beschädigt.
Leuchtet mindestens eine, aber nicht alle LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21, dann laden Sie den Akku vor der ersten Benutzung voll auf.
 Laden Sie einen beschädigten Akku nicht auf und benutzen Sie ihn nicht. Wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Akku laden
 Benutzen Sie nur das im Lieferumfang Ihres eBikes enthaltene oder ein baugleiches original Bosch Ladegerät.
Nur dieses Ladegerät ist auf den bei Ihrem eBike verwendeten Li-Ionen-Akku abgestimmt.
Hinweis: Der Akku wird teilgeladen ausgeliefert. Um die volle
Leistung des Akkus zu gewährleisten, laden Sie ihn vor dem
ersten Einsatz vollständig mit dem Ladegerät auf.
Der Akku muss zum Laden aus dem eBike entnommen werden.
Lesen und beachten Sie zum Laden des Akkus die Betriebsanleitung des Ladegerätes.
Der Akku kann jederzeit aufgeladen werden, ohne die Lebensdauer zu verkürzen. Eine Unterbrechung des Ladevorganges
schädigt den Akku nicht.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
V=
Ah
Wh
°C
°C
°C
kg
PowerPack 300
PowerPack 400
0 275 007 500
0 275 007 501
0 275 007 502
36
8,2
300
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (staub- und spritzwassergeschützt)
0 275 007 503
0 275 007 504
0 275 007 505
36
11
400
–10...+40
–10...+60
0...+40
2,5
IP 54 (staub- und spritzwassergeschützt)
Der Akku ist mit einer Temperaturüberwachung ausgestattet,
welche ein Aufladen nur im Temperaturbereich zwischen 0 °C
und 40 °C zulässt.
Befindet sich der Akku außerhalb des Ladetemperaturbereiches, blinken drei LEDs der
Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Trennen Sie den Akku vom Ladegerät und lassen sie ihn austemperieren.
Schließen Sie den Akku erst wieder an das Ladegerät an,
wenn er die zulässige Ladetemperatur erreicht hat.
Ladezustandsanzeige
Die fünf grünen LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 zeigen bei
eingeschaltetem Akku den Ladezustand des Akkus an.
Dabei entspricht jede LED etwa 20 % Kapazität. Bei vollständig geladenem Akku leuchten alle fünf LEDs.
Der Ladezustand des eingeschalteten Akkus wird außerdem im
Bediencomputer angezeigt. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die
Betriebsanleitung von Antriebseinheit und Bediencomputer.
Liegt die Kapazität des Akkus unter 5 %, erlöschen alle LEDs
der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 am Akku, es gibt aber noch eine
Anzeigefunktion des Bediencomputers.
Akku einsetzen und entnehmen
(siehe Bilder C – D)
 Schalten Sie den Akku immer aus, wenn Sie ihn in die
Halterung einsetzen oder aus der Halterung entnehmen.
Damit der Akku eingesetzt werden kann, muss der Schlüssel
23 im Schloss 24 stecken und das Schloss muss aufgeschlossen sein.
Zum Einsetzen des Standard-Akkus 26 setzen Sie ihn mit
den Kontakten auf die untere Halterung 27 am eBike. Kippen
Sie ihn bis zum Anschlag in die obere Halterung 25.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 10 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–10
Zum Einsetzen des Gepäckträger-Akkus 20 schieben Sie
ihn mit den Kontakten voran bis zum Einrasten in die Halterung 19 im Gepäckträger.
Prüfen Sie, ob der Akku fest sitzt. Schließen Sie den Akku immer am Schloss 24 ab, weil sich sonst das Schloss öffnen und
der Akku aus der Halterung fallen kann.
Ziehen Sie den Schlüssel 23 nach dem Abschließen immer
aus dem Schloss 24. Damit verhindern Sie, dass der Schlüssel herausfällt bzw. dass der Akku bei abgestelltem eBike
durch unberechtigte Dritte entnommen wird.
Zum Entnehmen des Standard-Akkus 26 schalten Sie ihn
aus und schließen das Schloss mit dem Schlüssel 23 auf. Kippen Sie den Akku aus der oberen Halterung 25 und ziehen Sie
ihn am Tragegurt 28 aus der unteren Halterung 27.
Zum Entnehmen des Gepäckträger-Akkus 20 schalten Sie
ihn aus und schließen das Schloss mit dem Schlüssel 23 auf.
Ziehen Sie den Akku aus der Halterung 19.
Betrieb
Inbetriebnahme
 Verwenden Sie nur original Bosch Akkus, die vom Hersteller für Ihr eBike zugelassen wurden. Der Gebrauch
anderer Akkus kann zu Verletzungen und Brandgefahr führen. Bei Gebrauch anderer Akkus übernimmt Bosch keine
Haftung und Gewährleistung.
Ein-/Ausschalten
Das Einschalten des Akkus ist eine der Möglichkeiten, das
eBike-System einzuschalten. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die
Betriebsanleitung von Antriebseinheit und Bediencomputer.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einschalten des Akkus bzw. des
eBike-Systems, dass das Schloss 24 abgeschlossen ist.
Hinweis: Die Pedale des eBikes sollen beim Einschalten des
eBike-Systems nicht belastet sein, weil sonst die Leistung des
eBike-Antriebs eingeschränkt wird.
Zum Einschalten des Akkus drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste
22. Die LEDs der Anzeige 21 leuchten auf und zeigen gleichzeitig den Ladezustand an.
Hinweis: Liegt die Kapazität des Akkus unter 5 %, leuchtet am
Akku keine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Es ist nur am
Bediencomputer erkennbar, ob das eBike-System eingeschaltet ist.
Zum Ausschalten des Akkus drücken Sie die Ein-Aus-Taste
22 erneut. Die LEDs der Anzeige 21 erlöschen. Das eBikeSystem wird damit ebenfalls ausgeschaltet.
Wird etwa 10 min lang keine Leistung des eBike-Antriebs abgerufen (z.B., weil das eBike steht) und keine Taste an Bediencomputer oder Bedieneinheit des eBikes gedrückt,
schalten sich das eBike-System und damit auch der Akku aus
Energiespargründen automatisch ab.
Bosch eBike Systems
Der Akku ist durch die „Electronic Cell Protection (ECP)“ gegen Tiefentladung, Überladung, Überhitzung und Kurzschluss
geschützt. Bei Gefährdung schaltet sich der Akku durch eine
Schutzschaltung automatisch ab.
Wird ein Defekt des Akkus erkannt, blinken zwei LEDs der
Ladezustandsanzeige 21. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an
einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Hinweise für den optimalen Umgang mit dem
Akku
Die Lebensdauer des Akkus kann verlängert werden, wenn er
gut gepflegt und vor allem bei den richtigen Temperaturen gelagert wird.
Mit zunehmender Alterung wird sich die Kapazität des Akkus
aber auch bei guter Pflege verringern.
Eine wesentlich verkürzte Betriebszeit nach der Aufladung
zeigt an, dass der Akku verbraucht ist. Sie können den Akku
ersetzen.
Sollte der Tragegurt 28 des Standard-Akkus defekt sein, dann
lassen Sie ihn von einem Fahrradhändler austauschen.
Akku vor und während der Lagerung nachladen
Laden Sie den Akku vor längerer Nichtbenutzung auf etwa
60 % auf (3 bis 4 LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 leuchten).
Prüfen Sie nach 6 Monaten den Ladezustand. Leuchtet nur
noch eine LED der Ladezustandsanzeige 21, dann laden Sie
den Akku wieder auf etwa 60 % auf.
Hinweis: Wird der Akku längere Zeit in leerem Zustand aufbewahrt, kann er trotz der geringen Selbstentladung beschädigt
und die Speicherkapazität stark verringert werden.
Es ist nicht empfehlenswert, den Akku dauerhaft am Ladegerät angeschlossen zu lassen.
Lagerungsbedingungen
Lagern Sie den Akku möglichst an einem trockenen, gut belüfteten Platz. Schützen Sie ihn vor Feuchtigkeit und Wasser. Bei
ungünstigen Witterungsbedingungen ist es z.B. empfehlenswert, den Akku vom eBike abzunehmen und bis zum nächsten
Einsatz in geschlossenen Räumen aufzubewahren.
Der Akku kann bei Temperaturen von –10 °C bis +60 °C
gelagert werden. Für eine lange Lebensdauer ist jedoch eine
Lagerung bei ca. 20 °C Raumtemperatur vorteilhaft.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die maximale Lagertemperatur nicht
überschritten wird. Lassen Sie den Akku z.B. im Sommer
nicht im Auto liegen und lagern Sie ihn außerhalb direkter
Sonneneinstrahlung.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 11 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–11
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Halten Sie den Akku sauber. Reinigen Sie ihn vorsichtig mit
einem feuchten, weichen Tuch. Der Akku darf nicht ins Wasser getaucht oder mit Wasserstrahl gereinigt werden.
Ist der Akku nicht mehr funktionsfähig, wenden Sie sich bitte
an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zu den Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
 Notieren Sie Hersteller und Nummer des Schlüssels 23.
Bei Verlust der Schlüssel wenden Sie sich an einen autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Geben Sie dabei Schlüsselhersteller und -nummer an.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Entsorgung
Akkus, Zubehör und Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie die Akkus nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Elektrogeräte und gemäß
der europäischen Richtlinie 2006/66/EG
müssen defekte oder verbrauchte Akkus/
Batterien getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwendung zugeführt werden.
Geben Sie nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige Akkus bitte bei einem
autorisierten Fahrradhändler ab.
Li-Ion:
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise im Abschnitt „Transport“, Seite
Deutsch–11.
Transport
Die Akkus unterliegen den Anforderungen des Gefahrgutrechts. Die Akkus können durch den privaten Benutzer ohne
weitere Auflagen auf der Straße transportiert werden.
Beim Transport durch gewerbliche Benutzer oder beim Transport durch Dritte (z.B. Lufttransport oder Spedition) sind besondere Anforderungen an Verpackung und Kennzeichnung
zu beachten (z.B. Vorschriften des ADR). Bei Bedarf kann bei
der Vorbereitung des Versandstückes ein Gefahrgut-Experte
hinzugezogen werden.
Versenden Sie die Akkus nur, wenn das Gehäuse unbeschädigt ist. Kleben Sie offene Kontakte ab und verpacken Sie den
Akku so, dass er sich nicht in der Verpackung bewegt. Bitte
beachten Sie auch eventuelle weiterführende nationale Vorschriften.
Bei Fragen zum Transport der Akkus wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler. Beim Händler können Sie auch
eine geeignete Transportverpackung bestellen.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 12 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–12
Ladegerät Charger
Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen.
Versäumnisse bei der Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise
und Anweisungen können
elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen
verursachen.
Bewahren Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und Anweisungen
für die Zukunft auf.
Der in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Akku“ bezieht sich gleichermaßen auf Standard-Akkus (Akkus mit Halterung am Fahrradrahmen) und Gepäckträger-Akkus (Akkus
mit Halterung im Gepäckträger).
Halten Sie das Ladegerät von Regen oder Nässe
fern. Beim Eindringen von Wasser in ein Ladegerät
besteht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Laden Sie nur für eBikes zugelassene Bosch Li-IonenAkkus. Die Akkuspannung muss zur Akku-Ladespannung des Ladegerätes passen. Ansonsten besteht
Brand- und Explosionsgefahr.
 Halten Sie das Ladegerät sauber. Durch Verschmutzung
besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Überprüfen Sie vor jeder Benutzung Ladegerät, Kabel
und Stecker. Benutzen Sie das Ladegerät nicht, sofern
Sie Schäden feststellen. Öffnen Sie das Ladegerät
nicht selbst und lassen Sie es nur von qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal und nur mit Original-Ersatzteilen reparieren. Beschädigte Ladegeräte, Kabel und Stecker erhöhen das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages.
 Betreiben Sie das Ladegerät nicht auf leicht brennbarem Untergrund (z.B. Papier, Textilien etc.) bzw. in
brennbarer Umgebung. Wegen der beim Laden auftretenden Erwärmung des Ladegerätes besteht Brandgefahr.
 Bei Beschädigung und unsachgemäßem Gebrauch des
Akkus können Dämpfe austreten. Führen Sie Frischluft
zu und suchen Sie bei Beschwerden einen Arzt auf. Die
Dämpfe können die Atemwege reizen.
 Beaufsichtigen Sie Kinder. Damit wird sichergestellt,
dass Kinder nicht mit dem Ladegerät spielen.
 Kinder und Personen, die aufgrund ihrer physischen,
sensorischen oder geistigen Fähigkeiten oder ihrer Unerfahrenheit oder Unkenntnis nicht in der Lage sind,
das Ladegerät sicher zu bedienen, dürfen dieses Ladegerät nicht ohne Aufsicht oder Anweisung durch eine
verantwortliche Person benutzen. Andernfalls besteht
die Gefahr von Fehlbedienung und Verletzungen.
Bosch eBike Systems
 Lesen und beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und
Anweisungen in den Betriebsanleitungen von Akku und
Antriebseinheit/Bediencomputer sowie in der Betriebsanleitung Ihres eBikes.
 Auf der Unterseite des Ladegerätes befindet sich eine
Kurzfassung wichtiger Sicherheitshinweise in englischer,
französischer und spanischer Sprache (in der Darstellung
auf der Grafikseite mit Nummer 33 gekennzeichnet) und
mit folgendem Inhalt:
– Für eine sichere Benutzung beachten Sie die Betriebsanleitung. Risiko eines elektrischen Schocks.
– Nur in trockener Umgebung benutzen.
– Laden Sie nur Akkus des Bosch eBike-Systems. Andere
Akkus können explodieren und Verletzungen verursachen.
– Ersetzen Sie das Netzkabel nicht. Es besteht Brandund Explosionsgefahr.
Produkt- und Leistungsbeschreibung
Abgebildete Komponenten
(siehe Seite 6–7)
Die Nummerierung der abgebildeten Komponenten bezieht
sich auf die Darstellung des Ladegerätes auf der Grafikseite.
20 Gepäckträger-Akku
21 Akku-Ladezustandsanzeige
26 Standard-Akku
29 Ladegerät
30 Gerätebuchse
31 Gerätestecker
32 Lüftungsöffnungen
33 Sicherheitshinweise Ladegerät
34 Ladestecker
35 Buchse für Ladestecker
Technische Daten
Ladegerät
Sachnummer
Nennspannung
Frequenz
Akku-Ladespannung
Ladestrom
Zulässiger Ladetemperaturbereich
V~
Hz
V
A
Charger
0 275 007 905
207 –264
47 –63
42
4
°C
0...+40
Die Angaben gelten für eine Nennspannung [U] von 230 V. Bei abweichenden Spannungen und in länderspezifischen Ausführungen können
diese Angaben variieren.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 13 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–13
Ladegerät
Ladezeit
– PowerPack 300
– PowerPack 400
Anzahl der Akkuzellen
Betriebstemperatur
Lagertemperatur
Gewicht entsprechend EPTAProcedure 01/2003
Schutzart
Charger
h
h
°C
°C
kg
2,5
3,5
10 –80
–10...+75
–20...+70
0,8
IP 40
Die Angaben gelten für eine Nennspannung [U] von 230 V. Bei abweichenden Spannungen und in länderspezifischen Ausführungen können
diese Angaben variieren.
Hinweis: Achten Sie darauf, dass das Ladegerät während des
Ladevorgangs gut belüftet ist und die Lüftungsöffnungen 32
auf beiden Seiten nicht verdeckt sind.
Der Akku ist vollständig geladen, wenn alle fünf LEDs der Anzeige 21 dauerhaft leuchten. Der Ladevorgang wird automatisch unterbrochen.
Trennen Sie das Ladegerät vom Stromnetz und den Akku vom
Ladegerät.
Beim Trennen des Akkus vom Ladegerät wird der Akku automatisch abgeschaltet.
Sie können den Akku jetzt in das eBike einsetzen.
Fehler – Ursachen und Abhilfe
Ursache
Abhilfe
Zwei LEDs am Akku blinken
Akku defekt
an autorisierten Fahrradhändler wenden
Drei LEDs am Akku blinken
Betrieb
 Stellen Sie den Akku nur auf sauberen Flächen auf. Vermeiden Sie insbesondere die Verschmutzung der Ladebuchse und der Kontakte, z.B. durch Sand oder Erde.
Inbetriebnahme
Ladegerät anschließen (siehe Bilder E–F)
 Beachten Sie die Netzspannung! Die Spannung der
Stromquelle muss mit den Angaben auf dem Typenschild
des Ladegerätes übereinstimmen. Mit 230 V gekennzeichnete Ladegeräte können auch an 220 V betrieben werden.
Stecken Sie den Gerätestecker 31 des Netzkabels in die
Gerätebuchse 30 am Ladegerät.
Schließen Sie das Netzkabel (länderspezifisch) an das Stromnetz an.
Schalten Sie den Akku aus und entnehmen Sie ihn aus der Halterung am eBike. Lesen und beachten Sie dazu die Betriebsanleitung des Akkus.
Stecken Sie den Ladestecker 34 des Ladegerätes in die Buchse
35 am Akku.
Ladevorgang
Der Ladevorgang beginnt, sobald das Ladegerät mit dem
Akku und dem Stromnetz verbunden ist.
Hinweis: Der Ladevorgang ist nur möglich, wenn sich die
Temperatur des Akkus im zulässigen Ladetemperaturbereich
befindet.
Während des Ladevorgangs leuchten die LEDs der Ladezustandsanzeige 21 am Akku. Jede dauerhaft leuchtende LED
entspricht etwa 20 % Kapazität Aufladung. Die blinkende LED
zeigt die Aufladung der nächsten 20 % an.
 Seien Sie vorsichtig, wenn Sie das Ladegerät während
des Ladevorgangs berühren. Tragen Sie Schutzhandschuhe. Das Ladegerät kann sich insbesondere bei hohen
Umgebungstemperaturen stark erhitzen.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Akku zu warm oder zu kalt
Akku vom Ladegerät trennen
und austemperieren lassen,
bis der Ladetemperaturbereich erreicht ist
Schließen Sie den Akku erst
wieder an das Ladegerät an,
wenn er die zulässige Ladetemperatur erreicht hat.
Kein Ladevorgang möglich (keine Anzeige am Akku)
Stecker nicht richtig einge- alle Steckverbindungen übersteckt
prüfen
Kontakte am Akku vorsichtig
Kontakte am Akku verschmutzt
reinigen
Lüftungsöffnungen 32 des
Lüftungsöffnungen 32 reiniLadegerätes verstopft oder gen und Ladegerät gut belüfverdeckt
tet aufstellen
Steckdose, Kabel oder Lade- Netzspannung überprüfen,
gerät defekt
Ladegerät vom Fahrradhändler überprüfen lassen
Akku defekt
an autorisierten Fahrradhändler wenden
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 14 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
Deutsch–14
Wartung und Service
Wartung und Reinigung
Sollte das Ladegerät ausfallen, wenden Sie sich bitte an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kundendienst und Kundenberatung
Bei allen Fragen zum Ladegerät wenden Sie sich an einen
autorisierten Fahrradhändler.
Kontaktdaten autorisierter Fahrradhändler finden Sie auf der
Internetseite www.bosch-ebike.com
Entsorgung
Ladegeräte, Zubehör und Verpackungen sollen einer umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Werfen Sie Ladegeräte nicht in den Hausmüll!
Nur für EU-Länder:
Gemäß der Europäischen Richtlinie
2002/96/EG über Elektro- und ElektronikAltgeräte und ihrer Umsetzung in nationales
Recht müssen nicht mehr gebrauchsfähige
Ladegeräte getrennt gesammelt und einer
umweltgerechten Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden.
Änderungen vorbehalten.
Bosch eBike Systems
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 1 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–1
Drive Unit Cruise/
Drive HMI Intuvia
Safety Notes
Read all safety warnings and all instructions. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions may result in electric shock, fire
and/or serious injury.
Save all safety warnings and instructions for future reference.
The term “battery pack” used in these operating instructions
refers both to standard battery packs (battery packs with
holder on the bike frame) and to rack-type battery packs (battery packs with holder in the rear rack/carrier).
 Do not open the drive unit yourself. The drive unit is
maintenance-free and may be repaired only through a
qualified repair person and only using original spare
parts. This will ensure that the safety of the drive unit is
maintained. Unauthorised opening of the drive unit will
void any and all warranty claims.
 All components mounted to the drive unit and all other
components of the eBike drive (e.g., the chainwheel,
chainwheel seat, pedals) may be replaced only against
identical components or components specifically approved for your eBike by the bicycle manufacturer. This
protects the drive unit against overload and damage.
 Remove the battery pack from the eBike before working on the eBike (e.g., assembling, maintenance, etc.),
transporting it via car or plane, or storing it. Danger of
injury when accidentally actuating the On/Off switch.
 The push-assistance function may only be used when
pushing the eBike. Danger of injury when the wheels of
the eBike do not have ground contact while using the pushassistance function.
 Use only original Bosch battery packs approved for
your eBike by the manufacturer. Using other battery
packs can lead to injuries and pose a fire hazard. When using other battery packs, Bosch shall not assume any liability and warranty.
 Please observe all national regulations on registering
and using eBikes.
 Please read and observe the safety warnings and instructions enclosed in the operating instructions of the
battery pack as well as in the operating instructions of
your eBike.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
Product Description and
Specifications
Intended Use
The drive unit is intended exclusively for your eBike and may
not be used for other purposes.
The eBike is intended for use on paved paths. It is not permitted for use in competition.
Product Features
(see page 2–3)
The numbering of the product features refers to the illustrations on the graphics page.
All representations of bike components, with exception of the
drive unit, drive HMI incl. operating unit, speed sensor and
corresponding holders, are schematic and can deviate from
your eBike.
1 Display-function button “i”
2 Illumination button
3 Drive HMI
4 Holder for drive HMI
5 Drive HMI On/Off button
6 “RESET” button
7 USB port
8 Protective cap of USB port
9 Drive unit
10 Operating unit
11 Display-function button “i” on the operating unit
12 Reduce value/scroll down button “ –”
13 Increase value/scroll up button “+”
14 Push-assistance button “WALK”
15 Lock latch for drive HMI
16 Locking screw for drive HMI
17 Speed sensor
18 Spoke magnet of the speed sensor
Indication Elements, Drive HMI
a Motor-output indicator
b Assistance-level indicator
c Text indication
d Value indication
e Speed indication
f Battery charge-control indicator
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 2 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–2
Technical Data
Drive Unit
Article number
Power output
Output torque, max.
Rated voltage
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
Drive HMI
Article number
Max. charging current, USB
connection.
Charging voltage, USB connection
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
Lighting*
Rated voltage
Power output
– Front light
– Rear light
W
Nm
V
°C
°C
kg
Drive Unit Cruise
0 275 007 006/
0 275 007 007
250
50
36
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (dust and splash
water protected)
4
Intuvia
1 270 020 903
mA
500
V
°C
°C
5
–5...+40
–10...+50
IP 54 (dust and splash
water protected)
kg
0.15
V
W
W
6
2.7
0.3
* Not possible via the eBike battery pack in all country-specific versions,
depending on the statutory regulations
Assembly
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack
For inserting and removing the battery pack in/from the
eBike, please read and observe the battery pack operating instructions.
Inserting and Removing the Drive HMI
(see figure A)
To insert the drive HMI 3, slide it from the front into the
holder 4.
To remove the drive HMI 3, press the lock latch 15 and slide
the drive HMI toward the front out of the holder 4.
 Remove the drive HMI when parking the eBike, so that
the drive cannot be used by unauthorised persons.
Without the drive HMI, the eBike system cannot be
switched on.
Bosch eBike Systems
The drive HMI can also be secured in the holder against removing. For this, remove the holder 4 from the handlebar. Insert the drive HMI into the holder. Screw the locking screw 16
from below into the corresponding thread in the holder.
Mount the holder onto the handlebar again.
Checking the Speed Sensor (see figure B)
The speed sensor 17 and its spoke magnet 18 must be
mounted in such a manner that the spoke magnet, after a turn
of the wheel, moves past the speed sensor with a clearance of
at least 5 mm, yet no more than 17 mm.
Note: If the clearance between speed sensor 17 and spoke
magnet 18 is too small or too large, or if the speed sensor 17
is not properly connected, the speed indication e will fail, and
the eBike drive will operate in emergency mode.
In this case, loosen the screw of the spoke magnet 18 and fasten the spoke magnet to the spoke in such a manner that it
runs past the mark of the speed sensor at the correct clearance. When the speed is still not being indicated in the speed
indication e after this, please refer to an authorised bicycle
dealer.
Operation
Initial Operation
Requirements
The eBike system can only be activated when the following requirements are met:
– A sufficiently charged battery pack is inserted (see operating instructions of the battery pack).
– The drive HMI is properly inserted in the holder (see “Inserting and Removing the Drive HMI”, page English–2).
– The drive HMI is properly connected (see “Checking the
Speed Sensor”, page English–2).
Switching the eBike System On/Off
Options for switching on the eBike system:
– If the drive HMI is already switched on when inserting it in
the holder, the eBike system is automatically switched on.
– When the drive HMI and the battery pack are inserted,
briefly press the On/Off button 5 of the drive HMI once.
– When the drive HMI is inserted, press the On/Off button of
the battery pack (see battery pack operating instructions).
Note: When switching on the eBike system, the pedals of the
eBike must not be subject to load, as otherwise the motor output capacity will be limited. The error message “Release pedal” is displayed in text indication c.
If the eBike system was inadvertently switched on with load
applied to the pedals, then switch it off and then on again
without load.
The drive is activated as soon as you step into the pedals (except when in push-assistance mode, see “Switching the Pushassistance mode On/Off”, page English–4). The motor output depends on the settings of the drive HMI.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 3 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–3
As soon as you stop pedaling when in normal operation, or as
soon as you have reached a speed of 25 km/h, the assistance
from the eBike drive is switched off. The drive is automatically
re-activated as soon you start pedaling again and the speed is
below 25 km/h.
Options for switching off the eBike system:
– Press the On/Off button 5 of the drive HMI.
– Switch the battery pack off by its On/Off button (see battery pack operating instructions.)
– Remove the drive HMI out of its holder.
When no power output of the drive is requested for approx.
10 minutes (e. g., because the eBike is parked) and no button
of the drive HMI or operating unit is pressed, the battery pack
automatically switches off to save energy.
Indications and Settings of the Drive HMI
Power Supply of the Drive HMI
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, a sufficiently
charged battery pack is inserted in the eBike and the eBike
system is switched on, power is supplied to the drive HMI via
the eBike's battery pack.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, it is supplied
with power via an internal battery pack. If the internal battery
pack is low when switching on the drive HMI, “Attach to bike”
is displayed for 3 s in text indication c. Afterwards, the drive
HMI switches off again.
To recharge the internal battery pack, insert the drive HMI into the holder 4 (a battery pack must be inserted in the eBike).
Switch the eBike battery pack off by its On/Off button (see
battery pack operating instructions).
The drive HMI can also be charged via USB connection. Open
protective cap 8 for this. Using a matching USB cable, connect the USB port 7 of the drive HMI to a commercially available USB charger or to the USB port of a computer; (5 V charging voltage; max. 500 mA charging current). “USB
connected” is displayed in text indication c of the drive HMI.
Switching the drive HMI On/Off
To switch on the drive HMI, briefly press the On/Off button 5.
When the internal battery pack is sufficiently charged, the
drive HMI can also be switched on when not inserted in the
holder.
To switch off the drive HMI, press the On/Off button 5.
When the drive HMI is not inserted in the holder and no button
is pressed, it automatically switches off after 1 min to save energy.
Battery Charge-control Indicator
The battery-pack charge-control indicator f indicates the
charge condition of the eBike’s battery pack, and not the
charge condition of the drive HMI’s internal battery pack. The
charge condition of the eBike’s battery pack can also be read
from the battery pack’s LEDs.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
On indicator f, each bar of the battery pack symbol is equivalent to a capacity of approx. 20 %:
100 % to 80 % capacity
20 % to 5 % capacity; the battery pack should be
recharged.
Less than 5 % capacity; drive assistance is no longer possible. The LEDs of the charge-control indicator on the battery pack go out.
When the eBike lighting is powered via the battery pack
(country-specific), the capacity upon first indication of the
empty battery pack symbol will be sufficient for approx.
2 hours of lighting. When the symbol begins to flash, the lighting will continue to operate only for a short period.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, the last indicated battery pack charge condition is stored.
Setting the Assistance Level
The level of assistance of the eBike drive when pedaling can
be adjusted via the drive HMI. The assistance level can be
changed anytime, even during riding.
Note: For individual versions, it is possible that the the assistance level is pre-set and cannot be changed. It is also possible that less assistance levels are available for selection than
listed here.
The following assistance levels (max.) are available:
– “OFF”: The drive is switched off, the eBike can be operated
as a normal bicycle through pedaling.
– “ECO”: Effective assistance at maximum efficiency for
maximum cruising range
– “TOUR”: Uniform assistance, for touring with long cruising
range
– “SPORT”: Powerful assistance for sportive riding off road
as well as for urban traffic
– “TURBO”: Maximum assistance, supporting highest cadence for sportive riding
To increase the assistance level, press the “+” button 13 on
the operating unit until the desired assistance level is displayed in indicator b; to decrease the assistance level, press
the “ –” button 12.
The requested motor output is displayed in indicator a. The
maximum motor output depends on the selected assistance
level.
Assistance Level Motor Output*
Derailleur
30 %
“ECO”
“TOUR”
100 %
“SPORT”
170 %
250 %
“TURBO”
Gear Hub
30 %
90 %
150 %
200 %
* The motor output can vary for individual versions.
When the drive HMI is removed from holder 4, the last indicated assistance level is stored; the motor-output indicator a remains empty.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 4 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–4
Switching the Push-assistance mode On/Off
The push-assistance feature makes it easier to push the
eBike. The speed in this function depends on the set gear and
cannot exceed 6 km/h (max.). The lower the set gear, the lower the speed in the push-assistance function (at full output).
 The push-assistance function may only be used when
pushing the eBike. Danger of injury when the wheels of
the eBike do not have ground contact while using the pushassistance function.
To activate the push-assistance function, press and hold the
“WALK” button 14 on the operating unit. The eBike's drive is
activated.
The push-assistance function is switched off as soon as any
of the following incidents occur:
– You release the “WALK” button 14,
– You pedal in forward or quickly in backward direction,
– The wheels of the eBike are blocked (e. g., through braking
or running against an obstruction),
– Your speed exceeds 6 km/h.
Switching the Lighting On/Off
Depending on country-specific regulations, two lighting versions are possible:
– The front light, rear light and display backlight can be
switched on and off at the same time via the drive HMI.
In this version, “Lights on” is displayed for approx. 1 s in
text indication c when switching on, and “Lights off” when
switching off.
– Only the display backlight can be switched on and off; the
front and rear light of the eBike are independent of the
drive HMI.
For both versions, the lighting is switched on and off by
pressing button 2.
Speed and Distance Indication
The speed indication e always displays the current speed.
The following functions are available in the function indication (combination of text indication c and value indication d):
– “Range”: Estimated range of the available battery-pack
charge (for constant conditions such as assistance level,
route profile, etc.)
– “Distance”: Distance covered since the last reset
– “Trip time”: Trip time since the last reset
– “Avg. Speed”: Average speed achieved since the last reset
– “Max. Speed”: Maximum speed achieved since the last reset
– “Clock”: Current time
To switch between the indication functions, press the “i”
button 1 on the drive HMI or the “i” button 11 on the operating
unit until the desired function is displayed.
To reset “Distance”, “Trip time” and “Avg. Speed”, switch to
any of the three functions and then press and hold the
“RESET” button 6 until the indication is set to zero. This also
resets the values of the other two functions.
Bosch eBike Systems
To reset the “Max. Speed”, switch to this function and then
press and hold the “RESET” button 6 until the indication is set
to zero.
When the drive HMI is removed from the holder 4, all function
values remain stored and can be viewed.
Displaying/Adapting Basic Settings
The basic settings can be displayed and changed no matter if
the drive HMI is in the holder 4 or not.
To access the basic settings menu, press and hold the
“RESET” button 6 and the “i” button 1 until “Configuration”
is displayed in text indication c.
To switch between the basic settings, press the “i” button 1
on the drive HMI until the desired basic setting is displayed.
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, you can also press
the “i” button 11 on the operating unit.
To change the basic settings, press the On/Off button 5 next
to the “ –” indication to decrease the value or scroll down, or
the illumination button 2 next to the “+” indication to increase
the value or scroll up.
When the drive HMI is inserted in holder 4, you can also
change the values with the “ –” button 12 or the “+” button 13
on the operating unit.
To exit the function and store a changed setting, press the
“RESET” button 6 for 3 s.
The following basic settings are available:
– “unit km/mi”: The speed and distance can be displayed either in kilometres or miles.
– “time format”: The time can be displayed either in the
12 hour or 24 hour format.
– “clock”: The current time can be set here. Pressing and
holding the setting buttons fast-forwards the setting
speed.
– “English”: The language for text indication can be
changed. The available languages are German, English,
French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch.
– “odometer”: Indicates the total distance travelled with the
eBike (not changeable).
– “power-on hours”: Indicates the total travel duration with
the eBike (not changeable).
Error Code Indication
The components of the eBike system are continuously and automatically monitored. When an error is detected, the respective error code is indicated in text indication c.
To return to the standard indication, press any button on the
drive HMI 3 or on the operating unit 10.
Depending on the type of error, the drive is automatically shut
off if required. Continued travel without assistance from the
drive is possible at any time. However, have the eBike
checked before attempting new trips.
 Have all inspections and repairs carried out only by an
authorised bicycle dealer. When an error is still displayed
despite corrective measures, please also refer to an
authorised bicycle dealer.
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 5 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–5
Code
100
101
102
103*
104
105
200
201
202
203
204
410
414
418
422
423
424
430
490
Cause
Internal error of the drive unit
Connection problem of the drive unit
Error of the speed sensor
Connection problem of the lighting
system
Connection problem of the drive HMI
Temperature of the drive unit too high
(above 40 °C)
Internal electronic error of battery
pack
Temperature of the battery pack too
high (above 40 °C)
Temperature of the battery pack too
low (below –10 °C)
Connection problem of battery pack
Incorrect polarity of battery pack
Corrective Measure
Have the drive unit checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Have the speed sensor checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Have connections and contacts checked
Allow the drive unit to cool down. Continued travel without assistance
from the eBike drive is possible and speeds up the cooling of the drive
unit.
Have battery pack checked
Allow the battery pack to cool down. Continued travel without eBike drive
is possible and speeds up the cooling of the battery pack.
Allow the battery pack to warm up slowly in a warm location.
Have connections and contacts checked
Charge the battery pack with the original Bosch charger as described in
the operating instructions.
One or more buttons of the drive HMI Check if any buttons are blocked, e.g. from dirt or debris. Clean the
are blocked.
buttons, if required.
Connection problem of the operating Have connections and contacts checked
unit
One or more buttons of the operating Check if any buttons are blocked, e.g. from dirt or debris. Clean the
unit are blocked.
buttons, if required.
Connection problem of the drive unit Have connections and contacts checked
Connection problem of battery pack Have connections and contacts checked
Communication error among the com- Have connections and contacts checked
ponents
Internal battery pack of drive HMI
Charge drive HMI (in holder or via USB port)
empty
Internal error of the drive HMI
Have the drive HMI checked
* only for eBike lighting via battery pack (country-specific)
Power Supply of External Devices via USB
Connection
With the USB connection, it is possible to operate and charge
most devices whose power supply is possible via USB (e.g.,
various mobile phones).
Prerequisite for the charging is that the drive HMI and a sufficiently charged battery pack are inserted in the eBike.
Open the protective cap 8 of the USB port on the drive HMI.
Using a matching USB cable, connect the USB port of the external device to the USB port 7 of the drive HMI.
Notes on Riding with the eBike System
When does the eBike Drive Operate?
The eBike drive supports you when riding, as long as you step
into the pedals. Without pedaling, there is no assistance. The
0 276 001 YYY | (12.10.12)
motor output always depends on the amount of your pedaling
power.
When applying less pedaling power, the assistance or support
will be lower than when applying a lot of pedaling power. This
applies independent of the assistance Level.
The eBike drive automatically switches off at speeds in excess
of 25 km/h. When the speed falls below 25 km/h, the drive is
automatically available again.
An exception applies for the push-assistance function, in
which the eBike can be pushed at low speed without pedaling.
The eBike can also be ridden as a normal bicycle without assistance at any time, by either switching off the eBike system
or setting the assistance level to “OFF”. The same applies
when the battery pack is empty.
Bosch eBike Systems
OBJ_BUCH-1407-003.book Page 6 Friday, October 12, 2012 1:01 PM
English–6
Interaction of the eBike System with the Bicycle Gears
The bicycle gears should be used as with a normal bicycle,
even with eBike drive (please observe the operating instructions of your eBike).
Independent of the type of gearing, it is recommended to
briefly interrupt the ped